[R26BK01807431] [AQ 등록업체 제한 / 서류제출 공고/ 재공고] 방폐물검사건물 건설기자재 PCMS(J212) 구매

===== 2-1-1. 기술제안서 제출 안내 공고문 - 재공고.hwp =====

기술제안서 제출 안내공고 (제한경쟁/규격가격분리입찰/총액입찰)

공고번호 : 나라장터 물품 입찰공고 제R26BK01807431-000호

< 이 계약은 청렴계약(서약)제가 적용됩니다 >

이 계약은 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률」 제5조의2에 따른 청렴계약제가 적용됩니다. 입찰자는 반드시 입찰서 제출시 아래 청렴계약서에 관한 내용을 숙지하여야 하며, 동 내용을 위반한 경우 발주기관의 조치에 대하여 어떠한 이의도 제기할 수 없습니다. 아울러, 입찰서를 제출한 자는 청렴계약이행서약서를 제출한 것으로 간주합니다.

「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률」 제5조의2 및 같은 조의3에 따라 이 입찰에 참여한 당사 대리인과 임직원은 입찰·낙찰, 계약체결 또는 계약이행 등의 과정(준공∙납품 이후를 포함한다)에서 아래 각호의 청렴계약조건을 준수할 것이며, 이를 위반할 때에는 입찰·낙찰을 취소하거나 계약을 해제∙해지하는 등의 불이익을 감수하고, 이에 민∙형사상 이의를 제기하지 않을 것임을 약정합니다.

1. 금품·향응 등을 요구 또는 약속하거나 수수(授受)하지 않을 것이며, 관계직원에게 금품, 향응 등을 제공하지 않겠습니다.

2. 입찰가격의 사전협의 또는 특정인의 낙찰을 위한 담합 등 공정한 경쟁을 방해하지 않겠습니다.

3. 공정한 직무수행을 방해하는 알선‧청탁을 통하여 입찰 또는 계약과 관련된 특정정보의 제공을 요구하거나 받는 행위를 하지 않겠습니다.

4. 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률 시행령」 제4조의2제1항제2호 위반 시에 아래의 손해배상액을 납부토록 하겠습니다.(국가계약법 적용 입찰 및 계약 건에 한함)

• 입찰자 : 입찰금액의 100분의 10, 계약상대자 : 계약금액의 100분의 10

동 입찰이 2인 이상의 유효한 입찰자가 없거나 낙찰자가 없을 경우 재입찰에 부칠 수 있으니 국가종합전자 조달시스템(나라장터)에서 개찰결과를 확인 후 공고된 일정에 따라 재입찰하시기 바랍니다.

이 입찰 설명서는 한국원자력환경공단이 집행하는 입찰에서 입찰자와 낙찰자가 숙지하고 준수하여야 할 사항을 기재한 것으로써 모든 입찰희망자는 이를 열람하여야 합니다. 이 입찰과 관련하여 추가 문의사항이 있으면 아래 담당자에게 연락하시기 바랍니다.

① 입찰참가자격 등록, 나라장터 시스템: 정부조달 콜센터(☎ 1588-0800)

② 사업 담당자: 엔지니어링팀 이수열 차장(☎ 054-750-4318)

③ 계약담당자(입찰공고, 개찰, 계약방법 등) : ESG상생팀 최준하 직원(☎ 054-750-4076)

• 주소: 38062 경북 경주시 충효천길 19(서악동, 한국원자력환경공단)

전자입찰 공고에 첨부된 계약조건, 입찰유의서 등을 반드시 확인·숙지하시기 바랍니다.

1. 입찰에 부치는 사항

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

관리번호 한국원자력환경공단 2026-185 입찰건명

방폐물검사건물 건설기자재 PCMS(J212) 구매

계약방법 제한경쟁 낙찰자결정 규격가격분리입찰(2단계 경쟁(규격가격분리)) 사업예산 2,145,000,000원(부가세 포함) 추정가격 1,950,000,000원 구매규격 구매규격서 참조 계약기간

2027.1.1. 또는 계약체결일(2027.1.1. 이후에 체결시)로부터 2028.4.2.

납품기한 납기일: `28.4. 2. 인도조건 규격서 참조 기타사항

① 가격입찰 예정일: 2026. 11월~12월(적격업체에 한하여 일정 확정시 개별통지, 나라장터 시스템상 입찰 일자는 시스템상 공고등록을 위한 임의 입력)

② 하자보증기간: 닙픔일로부터 3년 (보증증권, 5%)

③ 중소기업제품 구매촉진 및 판로지원에 관한 법률 시행령 제7조(중소기업자간 경쟁입찰의 예외 등) ①항 4호 및 <제7조 ①항 4. 특정한 기술·용역이 필요한 경우> 에 의거하여 중기간 경쟁입찰 예외임을 안내드립니다.

④ 설계용역 계약에 따라, 본 기술입찰서의 평가는 설계사인 “(주)한국전력기술” 이 진행함을 안내드립니다.

⑤ 본 공고는 나라장터 입찰공고 제R26BK01784783-000호 유찰에 따른 재공고입찰입니다

2. 입찰 참가자격

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

① 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률」시행령 제12조 및 같은 법 시행규칙 제14조 규정에 따라 경쟁입찰 참가자격을 갖추고 같은 법 시행령 제76에 의해 제한받지 아니한 자

② 국가종합전자조달시스템 입찰참가등록규정에 의하여 국가종합전자조달시스템(나라장터)에 입찰참가자격을 등록한 자

③ 공고마감일 전일까지 공단 품질절차서 「업체평가 및 등록관리」에 따라 “Process Control and Monitoring System (J212)” 으로 등록된 업체

※ 상기 자격을 갖추지 못한 자의 기술제안서는 접수하지 않습니다.

※ 입찰참가자격은 계약 체결 시 까지 유지하여야 합니다.

※ 입찰 참가 전, 참가자격의 유효기간 및 갱신여부를 확인하여 주시기 바랍니다.

3. 참가등록 및 기술제안서(이하 ‘입찰서’) 제출 안내

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

가. 작성 지침 및 평가기준 열람: 국가종합전자조달(www.g2b.go.kr)에 게시

나. 참가등록 및 입찰서 제출기한

① 입찰참가자격 등록장소: 조달청(또는 서울지방조달청) 고객지원센터 또는 각 지방조달청 경영지원과(팀)

② 입찰서 제출방법: 나라장터 전자입찰 및 오프라인 제출

③ 입찰서 제출기한

1) 직접방문 제출 및 나라장터 제출: 2026.11.11.(수) 18:00

2) 우편접수: 2026.11.11.(수) 도착 분까지 인정

다. 제출 장소 : 나라장터 전자입찰 제안서제출 시스템, 오프라인

라. 제출서류( *입찰유의서 1.3.2 입찰서 구성 및 내용 확인 필수)

① 입찰참가신청 공문 1부 (1) 입찰서 제출 공문 (2) PART A 기술사항 (3) PART B 상업사항 (4) 가격명세(가격불표시분) 및 납품일정 (5) 예외사항

(6) 입찰설명서에서 요구되는 기타 도면, 기술, 일반자료 및 정보

② ①의 내용을 담은 원본 1부 전자파일(온라인), 사본 5부 오프라인 총 6부

③ 사업자 등록증 사본(원본대조필) 및 법인등기부 등본 각 1부

④ 법인인감증명원 및 사용인감계 각 1부 ⑤ 국세 및 지방세 완납 증명서 각 1부

⑥ 대리인일 경우 위임장 및 재직증명원(신분증 지참)

※ 접수 시 구비서류가 미비한 서류는 일체 접수하지 않으며 제출된 제안서는 반환하지 않습니다. 신청서류 중 사본 제출 시에는 “원본과 같음”이라고 명기하고 인감증명상의 인감으로 날인하여 제출해야 하며, 개인보보호법에 의거 제안서 내용 중 개인식별번호(성을 제외한 이름, 주민등록번호 뒷자리 등)에 해당하는 부분은 반드시 삭제 후 제출해야 합니다.

※ 최초 응찰인 나라장터 입찰공고 제R26BK01784783-000호 응찰 업체가 최초 오프라인 및 온라인 제출시 제출한 제출서류 ①의 내용이 본 재공고입찰 제출서류와의 내용변동이 없을 경우, 제출서류 ②인 오프라인 사본제출을 생략 가능합니다. (온라인 제출은 필요)

4. 입찰참가적격자 선정 및 통지, 낙찰자결정방법

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

가. 입찰서를 평가하여 적격업체를 선정하고 적격업체에 한하여 가격투찰을 실시한 후 가격입찰서를 개봉하여 예정가격 이하 최저가 입찰자를 낙찰자로 결정합니다.

* 낙찰자결정 등 세부기준은 “국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률 시행령” 및 “기획재정부 계약예규”를 적용합니다.

나. 입찰참가적격자가 1개사인 경우 재공고를 실시합니다.

다. 입찰참가적격자, 입찰일시 및 장소 등은 선정된 자에 한하여 개별 통지합니다.

5. 입찰무효

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

가. 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률 시행령」 제39조제4항, 「같은 법 시행규칙」 제44조 및 「(계약예규) 물품구매(제조)입찰유의서」 제12조에 해당되는 입찰은 무효입니다.

나. 입찰참가자격등록증상의 상호 및 대표자(수인대표인 경우 대표자 전원의 성명을 모두 등재, 각자 대표도 해당)가 법인등기부등본상의 상호, 대표자와 다른 경우에는 입찰참가자격등록증을 변경등록하고 입찰에 참여하여야 하며, 변경등록하지 않고 참여한 입찰은 무효입찰임을 알려드리오니 주의하시기 바랍니다.(공동수급 구성원 전원 해당)

다. 입찰참가자격의 판단기준일은 입찰참가자격등록 마감일(기준일이 정해져 있는 경우에는 해당일)이며 마감일(일시가 정해져 있는 경우에는 해당일시)까지 참가자격을 갖추지 않은 경우 무효입찰임을 알려드리오니 주의하시기 바랍니다.

라. 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률 시행규칙」 제44조 및 「(계약예규) 물품입찰유의서」 제12조에 정한 입찰무효 해당여부 확인을 위하여 등록정보 확인을 위한 서류(법인등기부등본, 입찰대리인임을 확인할 수 있는 서류, 관련되는 면허 등을 증명하는 서류 등)를 요청하는 경우, 낙찰대상자는 관계서류를 공단으로 제출하여야 합니다.

6 불공정행위 금지

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

가. 입찰자 또는 계약상대자는 입찰·낙찰, 계약체결 또는 계약이행 등의 과정에서 입찰 및 계약의 공정한 질서를 저해하는 다음 각 호의 어느 하나에 해당하는 행위를 하여서는 아니 됩니다.

① 금품·향응 등의 공여·약속 또는 공여의 의사를 표시하는 행위

② 입찰가격의 사전 협의 또는 특정인의 낙찰을 위한 담합 등 공정한 경쟁을 방해하는 행위

③ 공정한 직무수행을 방해하는 알선·청탁을 통하여 입찰 또는 계약과 관련된 특정정보의 제공을 요구하는 행위

④ 하수급인 또는 자재·장비업자의 계약상 이익을 부당하게 제한하는 행위

⑤ 그 밖에 입찰 및 계약 등 과정에서 공정한 경쟁을 저해하는 행위

나. 입찰자 또는 계약상대자는 제1항각호에 따른 행위가 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률」 제5조의3 등 관계법령에 위반되는 경우 해당 입찰·낙찰이 취소되거나 계약이 해지·해제될 수 있고, 입찰참가자격 제한대상에 해당되는 경우 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률」 제27조 등 관계법령에 따라 부정당업자로 입찰참가자격 제한처분을 받을 수 있습니다.

다. 계약담당자는 제1항각호의 위반행위를 확인하기 위하여 입찰자 또는 계약상대자에게 관련 자료제출을 요청할 수 있으며, 입찰자 또는 계약상대자는 특별한 사정이 없는 한 적극 협조하여야 합니다.

라. 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률 시행령」 제76조제1항제2호의 계약 주요 조건을 위반한 경우 ‘부정당업자 입찰참가자격 제한처분’을 받을 수 있습니다.

7. 동반성장 강화를 위한 상생결제 시행안내(국내 공급사에 한함)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

가. 공단은 정부의 상생결제 확대시행 방침에 부응하고 2·3차 하위 협력사와의 상생강화를 위하여 4개은행(농협은행, 우리은행, IBK기업은행, IM뱅크)과 상생결제 약정을 체결하여 운영 중입니다.

나. 본 입찰의 계약금액 전액은 상생결제채권으로 결제(2일 이내 채권만기 도래)되며, 공단으로부터 상생결제채권을 받은 자는 공단으로부터 받은 상생결제채권액의 20% 이상을 2차 협력사에 상생채권으로 재발행(공단 채권 만료 전까지)하여야 합니다. 이를 위하여 협력기업은 대금지급 요청 전 은행약정 가입 완료, 협력사 채권발행에 대한 계획수립(협력사 은행 약정 가입 포함) 등의 사전 절차가 필요합니다.

다. 기타 상세한 내용은 상생결재 제도 안내(www.winwinpay.or.kr) 를 확인하시거나, 결제제도 문의사항은 공단 동반성장 담당자(054-750-4072)로 문의하시기 바랍니다.

8. 기타사항

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

가. 참가등록 및 입찰서 등 관련서류 제출은 업체대표자 또는 대리인이 제출서류를 지참, 접수하여야 합니다.

나. 입찰서는 우리 공단이 교부한 입찰설명서에 따라 사실대로 작성하여야 하며, 허위사실이 발견되면 입찰참가제한 및 낙찰취소, 계약해지될 수 있습니다.

다. 입찰서 각 항목은 빠짐없이 채워야 하며 해당사항이 없을 경우에는 “해당사항 없다”는 표기를 해야 하며, 평가항목 중 기간계산은 평가기준에 별도 기재가 없는 한 공고일을 기준으로 합니다.

라. 입찰참가희망업체가 전산장비 준비부족 등의 사유로 전자입찰 등록 및 투찰이 어려운 경우에는 입찰마감 24시간 이전에 조달청 정부조달콜센터(1588-0800)로 장애해결을 위해 문의바라며, 장애발생에도 정부조달콜센터로 문의하지 않아 발생되는 모든 책임은 입찰참가자에게 있습니다.

마. 입찰에 참가하고자 하는 자는 반드시 입찰등록사항과 법인등기부등본(법인) 및 사업자등록증(개인)상 대표자(대표자가 다수인 경우 전부), 주소, 상호 등이 일치하는 지 확인하고 입찰에 참여하시기 바랍니다.

바. 입찰 및 계약과 관련하여 공단 직원이 금품, 향응 등 부당한 요구를 할 경우 공단 감사담당관에게 신고하여 주시기 바랍니다.

사. 이 입찰과 관련하여 비리·불공정행위가 있는 경우 공단 감사실(054-750-4040~4047) 및 공단 홈페이지(www.korad.or.kr → 고객참여 → 민원접수 → 민원접수)를 통하여 신고 할 수 있습니다.

아. 입찰에 제출되는 서류가 사본일 경우에는 "사실과 상위 없음"을 날인하여 제출하시기 바랍니다.

자. 제출한 서류가 허위 또는 부정한 방법으로 작성(제출)된 사실이 확인될 경우에는 관련법규에 따라 계약해지, 부정당업자제재 등의 처분을 받을 수 있습니다.

1) 이 입찰에 참가하는 자는 다음의 입찰설명서를 구성하는 공고서 및 각종 규정, 규격서 등을 반드시 열람하고 숙지하여야 하며, 숙지하지 못함에 따라 발생하는 모든 책임은 입찰자에게 있음을 알려 드립니다.

2) 규격착오 또는 규정 미숙지 등으로 입찰자가 계약을 체결하지 않거나, 계약을 체결하고 불이행할 경우 관계 법령에 따라 부정당업자로 제재되어 일정기간 입찰참여가 제한되는 등 불이익을 받을 수 있습니다.

3) 이 입찰 집행과 관련하여 입찰공고서와 규격서(제안요청서 등 입찰첨부서류 일체)의 내용이 서로 다를 경우 입찰공고서가 우선 적용됩니다.

4) 이 입찰관련 규정들은 개정될 수 있으며, 개정될 경우 개정규정 부칙의 시행일(또는 적용례)에 따라 개정 규정의 적용 여부가 결정될 수 있습니다.

5) 다음 입찰 관련 법령 및 규정의 기준일자는 입찰공고일 현재입니다.

1. 입찰공고문

2. 국가종합전자조달시스템 전자입찰특별유의서 (조달청고시)

3. 국가종합전자조달시스템 입찰참가자격등록규정 (조달청고시)

4. 물품/용역입찰유의서 (재정경제부계약예규)

5. 정부입찰·계약 집행기준 (재정경제부계약예규)

6. 물품/용역/계약일반조건 (재정경제부계약예규)

7. 협상에 의한 계약체결기준(재정경제부계약예규)

- 자료검색 방법 -

1. 법령·계약예규 등: 국가법령정보센터 홈페이지(http://www.law.go.kr) → 법령 또는 행정규칙에서 검색

2. 조달청 고시·지침 등: 조달청 홈페이지(http://pps.go.kr) → 정보제공 → 법령정보(고시, 공고 및 지침 안내 등) 또는 업무별 자료(내자구매 등)에서 검색

3. 정확한 자료 검색이 되지 않을 경우 입찰공고문의 계약담당자에게 확인하시기 바랍니다.

2026. 11. 5. 한국원자력환경공단 이사장

< 선금 및 생산자금 지원 안내 >

▣ 선금 지급

• 지급범위 : (1차) 최초 지급 시 계약금액의 30~50%* 범위 내 허용

*

(공사) 100억 원 이상 30%, 20억 원 이상 100억 원 미만 40%, 20억 원 미만 50%

(물품의 제조 및 용역) 10억 원 이상 30%, 3억 원 이상 10억 원 미만 40%, 3억 원 미만 50%

(2차~N차) 해당연도 이행금액의 최대 70%까지 가능하며, 직전차수 선금사용계획서의 적정 이행 여부 점검 후 적정판정을 받은 경우에 한하여 추가 지급 가능

※ 선금은 계약 목적 달성을 위한 용도와 수급인이 하수급인에게 배분하는 경우에만 사용할 수 있으며, 그 외의 목적으로는 사용할 수 없음

※ 선금 신청 시 공단이 제공하는 양식(공단 홈페이지 ― ‘환경ㆍ사회ㆍ투명 경영’ ― ‘S 동반성장’ ― ‘공지사항’ 17번의 계약규정 [별지 제8호 서식]의 선금지급신청서 참고)을 사용해야 하며, 신청 금액에 해당하는 채권(증권 또는 보증서)을 제출해야 함

• 지급불가 : 신청일 기준, 잔여 기한이 30일 이하인 경우

• 선금의 정산 : 기성부분 또는 기납부분의 대가 지급 시마다 선금 정산액 이상을 정산함

• 반환 청구 : 계약 해제ㆍ해지, 지급조건 위배 등 반환 사유 발생 시 발주자는 반환을 청구할 수 있음

• 세부내용 및 상기 명시하지 않은 사항은 ｢재정경제부 계약예규｣(제12장 선금의 지급 등)를 준용하여 적용

▣ 공공구매론

중소기업의 판로지원 및 경쟁력 강화를 위해 공단과 계약한 사실을 근거로 은행에서 생산/운영 자금을 대출 받을 수 있는 중소기업지원을 위한 금융서비스입니다.

• 신청 대상 : 공단과 계약을 체결한 중소기업

• 대출 한도 : 계약금액(단가계약은 발주금액)에서 선금 수령액을 제외한 금액의 최대 80%까지 신청 가능(※금융기관별 세부한도 확인 필요)

• 취급은행 : 5개 은행(기업, 산업, 하나, 경남, 광주)

• 신청 시 필수사항 : ① 공공구매정보망(www.smpp.go.kr) 회원가입, ② 신용평가등급확인서(공공기관제출용), 공단과의 계약서, ③ 취급은행 방문 및 대출심사

• 신청 기간 : 계약기간 내 수시 신청 가능

• 문의처 : 콜센터 1533-0092 │ 한국중소벤처기업유통원 디지털정보팀 02-6678-9427

< 납품대금 연동제 시행 안내 > 임직원행동강령 위반 신고 안내문

우리 원자력환경공단은 귀사와 계약업무를 수행하면서 우리 공단의 임직원행동강령에 따라 금품수수‧향응‧편의제공을 허용하지 않고 있습니다.

허용되지 않은 행위로 인하여 우리 공단이 신뢰를 잃는 일이 없도록 해 주시기 바랍니다.

특히, 우리 공단 직원이 금품‧향응‧편의 또는 사사로운 이익행위를 요구하는 경우 즉시 거부하시고 (054)-750-4020~5로 연락해 주시기 바랍니다.

신고에 따른 피해가 없도록 하겠습니다.

다만, 다음과 같은 경우는 허용하고 있습니다.

1. 직무를 수행하는 과정에서 부득이한 경우 통상적인 관례의 범위(5만원 한도)에서 제공되는 음식물 또는 편의

2. 직무와 관련된 공식적인 행사에서 주최자가 참석자에게 일률적으로 제공하는 교통‧숙박 또는 음식물

3. 불특정 다수인에게 배포하기 위한 기념품 또는 홍보용 물품

한국원자력환경공단 임직원행동강령 책임자

< ‘KORAD Pay’ 캠페인 >

협력사를 을(乙)로 생각하는 그릇된 인식을 바로 잡고, 관행화된 부당한 업무지시 등 갑을(甲乙) 문화를 타파하기 위한 캠페인입니다.

===== 2-1-1. 기술제안서 제출 안내 공고문 - 재공고.pdf =====
기 술 제 안 서 제 출 안 내 공 고
(제 한 경 쟁 /규 격 가 격 분 리 입 찰 /총 액 입 찰 )
공고번호 : 나라장터 물품 입찰공고 제R26BK01807431-000호
< 이 계약은 청렴계약(서약)제가 적용됩니다 >
이 계약은 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률」 제5조의2에 따른 청렴계약제가 적용됩니다.
입찰자는 반드시 입찰서 제출시 아래 청렴계약서에 관한 내용을 숙지하여야 하며, 동 내용을
위반한 경우 발주기관의 조치에 대하여 어떠한 이의도 제기할 수 없습니다. 아울러, 입찰서를
제출한 자는 청렴계약이행서약서를 제출한 것으로 간주합니다.
「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률」 제5조의2 및 같은 조의3에 따라 이 입찰에 참여한 당사 대리인과
임직원은 입찰·낙찰, 계약체결 또는 계약이행 등의 과정(준공∙납품 이후를 포함한다)에서 아래 각호의 청렴
계약조건을 준수할 것이며, 이를 위반할 때에는 입찰·낙찰을 취소하거나 계약을 해제∙해지하는 등의 불이익을
감수하고, 이에 민∙형사상 이의를 제기하지 않을 것임을 약정합니다.
1. 금품·향응 등을 요구 또는 약속하거나 수수(授受)하지 않을 것이며, 관계직원에게 금품, 향응 등을 제공
하지 않겠습니다.
2. 입찰가격의 사전협의 또는 특정인의 낙찰을 위한 담합 등 공정한 경쟁을 방해하지 않겠습니다.
3. 공정한 직무수행을 방해하는 알선‧청탁을 통하여 입찰 또는 계약과 관련된 특정정보의 제공을 요구하거나
받는 행위를 하지 않겠습니다.
4. 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률 시행령」 제4조의2제1항제2호 위반 시에 아래의 손해배상액을
납부토록 하겠습니다.(국가계약법 적용 입찰 및 계약 건에 한함)

• 입찰자 : 입찰금액의 100분의 10, 계약상대자 : 계약금액의 100분의 10

동 입찰이 2인 이상의 유효한 입찰자가 없거나 낙찰자가 없을 경우 재입찰에 부칠 수 있으니 국가종합전자 조달
시스템(나라장터)에서 개찰결과를 확인 후 공고된 일정에 따라 재입찰하시기 바랍니다.
이 입찰 설명서는 한국원자력환경공단이 집행하는 입찰에서 입찰자와 낙찰자가 숙지하고 준수하여야 할 사항을
기재한 것으로써 모든 입찰희망자는 이를 열람하여야 합니다. 이 입찰과 관련하여 추가 문의사항이 있으면 아래
담당자에게 연락하시기 바랍니다.
① 입찰참가자격 등록, 나라장터 시스템: 정부조달 콜센터(☎ 1588-0800)
② 사업 담당자: 엔지니어링팀 이수열 차장(☎ 054-750-4318)
③ 계약담당자(입찰공고, 개찰, 계약방법 등) : ESG상생팀 최준하 직원(☎ 054-750-4076)

• 주소: 38062 경북 경주시 충효천길 19(서악동, 한국원자력환경공단)

전자입찰 공고에 첨부된 계약조건, 입찰유의서 등을 반드시 확인·숙지하시기 바랍니다.

1. 입찰에 부치는 사항
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
관리번호 한국원자력환경공단 2026-185
입찰건명 방폐물검사건물 건설기자재 PCMS(J212) 구매
계약방법 제한경쟁
낙찰자결정 규격가격분리입찰(2단계 경쟁(규격가격분리))
사업예산 2,145,000,000원(부가세 포함)
추정가격 1,950,000,000원
구매규격 구매규격서 참조
계약기간 2027.1.1. 또는 계약체결일(2027.1.1. 이후에 체결시)로부터 2028.4.2.
납품기한 납기일: `28.4. 2.
인도조건 규격서 참조
기타사항
① 가격입찰 예정일: 2026. 11월~12월(적격업체에 한하여 일정 확정시 개별
통지, 나라장터 시스템상 입찰 일자는 시스템상 공고등록을 위한 임의 입력)
② 하자보증기간: 닙픔일로부터 3년 (보증증권, 5%)
③ 중소기업제품 구매촉진 및 판로지원에 관한 법률 시행령 제7조(중소기업자
간 경쟁입찰의 예외 등) ①항 4호 및 <제7조 ①항 4. 특정한 기술·용역이 필요
한 경우> 에 의거하여 중기간 경쟁입찰 예외임을 안내드립니다.
④ 설계용역 계약에 따라, 본 기술입찰서의 평가는 설계사인 “(주)한국전력기
술” 이 진행함을 안내드립니다.
⑤ 본 공고는 나라장터 입찰공고 제R26BK01784783-000호 유찰에 따른 재공
고입찰입니다
2. 입찰 참가자격
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
① 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률」시행령 제12조 및 같은 법 시행규칙 제14조 규정에
따라 경쟁입찰 참가자격을 갖추고 같은 법 시행령 제76에 의해 제한받지 아니한 자
② 국가종합전자조달시스템 입찰참가등록규정에 의하여 국가종합전자조달시스템(나라장터)에
입찰참가자격을 등록한 자
③ 공고마감일 전일까지 공단 품질절차서 「업체평가 및 등록관리」에 따라 “Process Control
and Monitoring System (J212)” 으로 등록된 업체

※ 상기 자격을 갖추지 못한 자의 기술제안서는 접수하지 않습니다.
※ 입찰참가자격은 계약 체결 시 까지 유지하여야 합니다.
※ 입찰 참가 전, 참가자격의 유효기간 및 갱신여부를 확인하여 주시기 바랍니다.
3. 참가등록 및 기술제안서(이하 ‘입찰서’) 제출 안내
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
가. 작성 지침 및 평가기준 열람: 국가종합전자조달(www.g2b.go.kr)에 게시
나. 참가등록 및 입찰서 제출기한
① 입찰참가자격 등록장소: 조달청(또는 서울지방조달청) 고객지원센터 또는 각 지방조달청
경영지원과(팀)
② 입찰서 제출방법: 나라장터 전자입찰 및 오프라인 제출
③ 입찰서 제출기한
1) 직접방문 제출 및 나라장터 제출: 2026.11.11.(수) 18:00
2) 우편접수: 2026.11.11.(수) 도착 분까지 인정
다. 제출 장소 : 나라장터 전자입찰 제안서제출 시스템, 오프라인
라. 제출서류( *입찰유의서 1.3.2 입찰서 구성 및 내용 확인 필수)
① 입찰참가신청 공문 1부
(1) 입찰서 제출 공문
(2) PART A 기술사항
(3) PART B 상업사항
(4) 가격명세(가격불표시분) 및 납품일정
(5) 예외사항
(6) 입찰설명서에서 요구되는 기타 도면, 기술, 일반자료 및 정보
② ①의 내용을 담은 원본 1부 전자파일(온라인), 사본 5부 오프라인 총 6부
③ 사업자 등록증 사본(원본대조필) 및 법인등기부 등본 각 1부
④ 법인인감증명원 및 사용인감계 각 1부
⑤ 국세 및 지방세 완납 증명서 각 1부
⑥ 대리인일 경우 위임장 및 재직증명원(신분증 지참)
※ 접수 시 구비서류가 미비한 서류는 일체 접수하지 않으며 제출된 제안서는 반환하지 않습니다.
신청서류 중 사본 제출 시에는 “원본과 같음”이라고 명기하고 인감증명상의 인감으로 날인
하여 제출해야 하며, 개인보보호법에 의거 제안서 내용 중 개인식별번호(성을 제외한 이름,
주민등록번호 뒷자리 등)에 해당하는 부분은 반드시 삭제 후 제출해야 합니다.
※ 최초 응찰인 나라장터 입찰공고 제R26BK01784783-000호 응찰 업체가 최초 오프라인 및
온라인 제출시 제출한 제출서류 ①의 내용이 본 재공고입찰 제출서류와의 내용변동이 없
을 경우, 제출서류 ②인 오프라인 사본제출을 생략 가능합니다. (온라인 제출은 필요)

4. 입찰참가적격자 선정 및 통지, 낙찰자결정방법
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
가. 입찰서를 평가하여 적격업체를 선정하고 적격업체에 한하여 가격투찰을 실시한 후 가격입
찰서를 개봉하여 예정가격 이하 최저가 입찰자를 낙찰자로 결정합니다.
* 낙찰자결정 등 세부기준은 “국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률 시행령” 및 “기획재정부 계약예규”를
적용합니다.
나. 입찰참가적격자가 1개사인 경우 재공고를 실시합니다.
다. 입찰참가적격자, 입찰일시 및 장소 등은 선정된 자에 한하여 개별 통지합니다.
5. 입찰무효
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
가. 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률 시행령」 제39조제4항, 「같은 법 시행규칙」 제44조
및 「(계약예규) 물품구매(제조)입찰유의서」 제12조에 해당되는 입찰은 무효입니다.
나. 입찰참가자격등록증상의 상호 및 대표자(수인대표인 경우 대표자 전원의 성명을 모두 등재,
각자 대표도 해당)가 법인등기부등본상의 상호, 대표자와 다른 경우에는 입찰참가자격등록증을
변경등록하고 입찰에 참여하여야 하며, 변경등록하지 않고 참여한 입찰은 무효입찰임을
알려드리오니 주의하시기 바랍니다.(공동수급 구성원 전원 해당)
다. 입찰참가자격의 판단기준일은 입찰참가자격등록 마감일(기준일이 정해져 있는 경우에는 해당일)
이며 마감일(일시가 정해져 있는 경우에는 해당일시)까지 참가자격을 갖추지 않은 경우
무효입찰임을 알려드리오니 주의하시기 바랍니다.
라. 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률 시행규칙」 제44조 및 「(계약예규) 물품입찰유의서」
제12조에 정한 입찰무효 해당여부 확인을 위하여 등록정보 확인을 위한 서류(법인등기부
등본, 입찰대리인임을 확인할 수 있는 서류, 관련되는 면허 등을 증명하는 서류 등)를
요청하는 경우, 낙찰대상자는 관계서류를 공단으로 제출하여야 합니다.
6 불공정행위 금지
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
가. 입찰자 또는 계약상대자는 입찰·낙찰, 계약체결 또는 계약이행 등의 과정에서 입찰 및 계약의
공정한 질서를 저해하는 다음 각 호의 어느 하나에 해당하는 행위를 하여서는 아니 됩니다.
① 금품·향응 등의 공여·약속 또는 공여의 의사를 표시하는 행위
② 입찰가격의 사전 협의 또는 특정인의 낙찰을 위한 담합 등 공정한 경쟁을 방해하는 행위
③ 공정한 직무수행을 방해하는 알선·청탁을 통하여 입찰 또는 계약과 관련된 특정정보의 제공을
요구하는 행위
④ 하수급인 또는 자재·장비업자의 계약상 이익을 부당하게 제한하는 행위
⑤ 그 밖에 입찰 및 계약 등 과정에서 공정한 경쟁을 저해하는 행위
나. 입찰자 또는 계약상대자는 제1항각호에 따른 행위가 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률」
제5조의3 등 관계법령에 위반되는 경우 해당 입찰·낙찰이 취소되거나 계약이 해지·해제될 수

있고, 입찰참가자격 제한대상에 해당되는 경우 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률」
제27조 등 관계법령에 따라 부정당업자로 입찰참가자격 제한처분을 받을 수 있습니다.
다. 계약담당자는 제1항각호의 위반행위를 확인하기 위하여 입찰자 또는 계약상대자에게 관련 자료
제출을 요청할 수 있으며, 입찰자 또는 계약상대자는 특별한 사정이 없는 한 적극 협조하여야 합니다.
라. 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률 시행령」 제76조제1항제2호의 계약 주요 조건을
위반한 경우 ‘부정당업자 입찰참가자격 제한처분’을 받을 수 있습니다.
7. 동반성장 강화를 위한 상생결제 시행안내(국내 공급사에 한함)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
가. 공단은 정부의 상생결제 확대시행 방침에 부응하고 2·3차 하위 협력사와의 상생강화를 위하여
4개은행(농협은행, 우리은행, IBK기업은행, IM뱅크)과 상생결제 약정을 체결하여 운영 중입니다.
나. 본 입찰의 계약금액 전액은 상생결제채권으로 결제(2일 이내 채권만기 도래)되며, 공단으로부
터 상생결제채권을 받은 자는 공단으로부터 받은 상생결제채권액의 20% 이상을 2차 협력사에
상생채권으로 재발행(공단 채권 만료 전까지)하여야 합니다. 이를 위하여 협력기업은 대금지급
요청 전 은행약정 가입 완료, 협력사 채권발행에 대한 계획수립(협력사 은행 약정 가입 포함)
등의 사전 절차가 필요합니다.
다. 기타 상세한 내용은 상생결재 제도 안내(www.winwinpay.or.kr) 를 확인하시거나, 결제제도 문
의사항은 공단 동반성장 담당자(054-750-4072)로 문의하시기 바랍니다.
8. 기타사항
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
가. 참가등록 및 입찰서 등 관련서류 제출은 업체대표자 또는 대리인이 제출서류를 지참, 접수
하여야 합니다.
나. 입찰서는 우리 공단이 교부한 입찰설명서에 따라 사실대로 작성하여야 하며, 허위사실이
발견되면 입찰참가제한 및 낙찰취소, 계약해지될 수 있습니다.
다. 입찰서 각 항목은 빠짐없이 채워야 하며 해당사항이 없을 경우에는 “해당사항 없다”는 표기를
해야 하며, 평가항목 중 기간계산은 평가기준에 별도 기재가 없는 한 공고일을 기준으로 합니다.
라. 입찰참가희망업체가 전산장비 준비부족 등의 사유로 전자입찰 등록 및 투찰이 어려운 경우
에는 입찰마감 24시간 이전에 조달청 정부조달콜센터(1588-0800)로 장애해결을 위해 문의
바라며, 장애발생에도 정부조달콜센터로 문의하지 않아 발생되는 모든 책임은 입찰참가자
에게 있습니다.
마. 입찰에 참가하고자 하는 자는 반드시 입찰등록사항과 법인등기부등본(법인) 및 사업자등록증
(개인)상 대표자(대표자가 다수인 경우 전부), 주소, 상호 등이 일치하는 지 확인하고 입찰에
참여하시기 바랍니다.
바. 입찰 및 계약과 관련하여 공단 직원이 금품, 향응 등 부당한 요구를 할 경우 공단 감사
담당관에게 신고하여 주시기 바랍니다.

사. 이 입찰과 관련하여 비리·불공정행위가 있는 경우 공단 감사실(054-750-4040~4047) 및 공단
홈페이지(www.korad.or.kr → 고객참여 → 민원접수 → 민원접수)를 통하여 신고 할 수 있습니다.
아. 입찰에 제출되는 서류가 사본일 경우에는 "사실과 상위 없음"을 날인하여 제출하시기 바랍니다.
자. 제출한 서류가 허위 또는 부정한 방법으로 작성(제출)된 사실이 확인될 경우에는 관련법규에
따라 계약해지, 부정당업자제재 등의 처분을 받을 수 있습니다.
1) 이 입찰에 참가하는 자는 다음의 입찰설명서를 구성하는 공고서 및 각종 규정, 규격서 등을 반드시 열람
하고 숙지하여야 하며, 숙지하지 못함에 따라 발생하는 모든 책임은 입찰자에게 있음을 알려 드립니다.
2) 규격착오 또는 규정 미숙지 등으로 입찰자가 계약을 체결하지 않거나, 계약을 체결하고 불이행할 경우
관계 법령에 따라 부정당업자로 제재되어 일정기간 입찰참여가 제한되는 등 불이익을 받을 수 있습니다.
3) 이 입찰 집행과 관련하여 입찰공고서와 규격서(제안요청서 등 입찰첨부서류 일체)의 내용이 서로 다를
경우 입찰공고서가 우선 적용됩니다.
4) 이 입찰관련 규정들은 개정될 수 있으며, 개정될 경우 개정규정 부칙의 시행일(또는 적용례)에 따라 개정
규정의 적용 여부가 결정될 수 있습니다.
5) 다음 입찰 관련 법령 및 규정의 기준일자는 입찰공고일 현재입니다.
1. 입찰공고문
2. 국가종합전자조달시스템 전자입찰특별유의서 (조달청고시)
3. 국가종합전자조달시스템 입찰참가자격등록규정 (조달청고시)
4. 물품/용역입찰유의서 (재정경제부계약예규)
5. 정부입찰·계약 집행기준 (재정경제부계약예규)
6. 물품/용역/계약일반조건 (재정경제부계약예규)
7. 협상에 의한 계약체결기준(재정경제부계약예규)

• 자료검색 방법 -

1. 법령·계약예규 등: 국가법령정보센터 홈페이지(http://www.law.go.kr) → 법령 또는 행정규칙에서 검색
2. 조달청 고시·지침 등: 조달청 홈페이지(http://pps.go.kr) → 정보제공 → 법령정보(고시, 공고 및 지
침 안내 등) 또는 업무별 자료(내자구매 등)에서 검색
3. 정확한 자료 검색이 되지 않을 경우 입찰공고문의 계약담당자에게 확인하시기 바랍니다.
2026. 11. 5.
한국원자력환경공단 이사장

< 선금 및 생산자금 지원 안내 >
▣ 선금 지급

• 지급범위 : (1차) 최초 지급 시 계약금액의 30~50%* 범위 내 허용

* (공사) 100억 원 이상 30%, 20억 원 이상 100억 원 미만 40%, 20억 원 미만 50%
(물품의 제조 및 용역) 10억 원 이상 30%, 3억 원 이상 10억 원 미만 40%, 3억 원 미만 50%
(2차~N차) 해당연도 이행금액의 최대 70%까지 가능하며, 직전차수 선금사용계획서
의 적정 이행 여부 점검 후 적정판정을 받은 경우에 한하여 추가 지급 가능
※ 선금은 계약 목적 달성을 위한 용도와 수급인이 하수급인에게 배분하는 경우에만 사용할 수 있으
며, 그 외의 목적으로는 사용할 수 없음
※ 선금 신청 시 공단이 제공하는 양식(공단 홈페이지 ― ‘환경ㆍ사회ㆍ투명 경영’ ― ‘S 동반성장’ ―
‘공지사항’ 17번의 계약규정 [별지 제8호 서식]의 선금지급신청서 참고)을 사용해야 하며, 신청
금액에 해당하는 채권(증권 또는 보증서)을 제출해야 함

• 지급불가 : 신청일 기준, 잔여 기한이 30일 이하인 경우
• 선금의 정산 : 기성부분 또는 기납부분의 대가 지급 시마다 선금 정산액 이상을 정산함
• 반환 청구 : 계약 해제ㆍ해지, 지급조건 위배 등 반환 사유 발생 시 발주자는

반환을 청구할 수 있음

• 세부내용 및 상기 명시하지 않은 사항은 ｢재정경제부 계약예규｣(제12장 선금의

지급 등)를 준용하여 적용
▣ 공공구매론
중소기업의 판로지원 및 경쟁력 강화를 위해 공단과 계약한 사실을 근거로 은행에
서 생산/운영 자금을 대출 받을 수 있는 중소기업지원을 위한 금융서비스입니다.

• 신청 대상 : 공단과 계약을 체결한 중소기업
• 대출 한도 : 계약금액(단가계약은 발주금액)에서 선금 수령액을 제외한 금액의

최대 80%까지 신청 가능(※금융기관별 세부한도 확인 필요)

• 취급은행 : 5개 은행(기업, 산업, 하나, 경남, 광주)
• 신청 시 필수사항 : ① 공공구매정보망(www.smpp.go.kr) 회원가입, ② 신용평가

등급확인서(공공기관제출용), 공단과의 계약서, ③ 취급은행 방문 및 대출심사

• 신청 기간 : 계약기간 내 수시 신청 가능
• 문의처 : 콜센터 1533-0092 │ 한국중소벤처기업유통원 디지털정보팀 02-6678-9427

< 납품대금 연동제 시행 안내 >

임직원행동강령 위반 신고 안내문
우리 원자력환경공단은 귀사와 계약업무를 수행하면서 우리
공단의 임직원행동강령에 따라 금품수수‧ 향응‧ 편의제공을 허용
하지 않고 있습니다.
허용되지 않은 행위로 인하여 우리 공단이 신뢰를 잃는 일이
없도록 해 주시기 바랍니다.
특히, 우리 공단 직원이 금품‧ 향응‧ 편의 또는 사사로운 이익
행위를 요구하는 경우 즉시 거부하시고 (054)-750-4020~5로 연락
해 주시기 바랍니다.
신고에 따른 피해가 없도록 하겠습니다.
다만, 다음과 같은 경우는 허용하고 있습니다.
1. 직무를 수행하는 과정에서 부득이한 경우 통상적인 관례의
범위(5만원 한도)에서 제공되는 음식물 또는 편의
2. 직무와 관련된 공식적인 행사에서 주최자가 참석자에게 일률적
으로 제공하는 교통‧ 숙박 또는 음식물
3. 불특정 다수인에게 배포하기 위한 기념품 또는 홍보용 물품
한국원자력환경공단 임직원행동강령 책임자

< ‘KORAD Pay’ 캠페인 >
협력사를 을(乙)로 생각하는 그릇된 인식을 바로 잡고, 관행화된 부
당한 업무지시 등 갑을(甲乙) 문화를 타파하기 위한 캠페인입니다.

===== 2-1-2. (물품 및 가격명세서-제안서와 함께 첨부).xls =====

[시트: PDS]
E: Spec.: 0-771-J212
E: Rev. 0
A: ATTACHMENT 3-1
A: PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
C:
Name of Tenderer :_________
A: PRICING DATA SUMMARY
A: No. B: Description C: On-shore(￦) E: Off-shore(US$)
A: 1 B: Equipment & Material E: N/A
A: 2 B: Special Tools E: N/A
A: 3 B: Spare Parts E: N/A
A: 4 B: Sub-Total (Sum of Items 1 through 3) E: N/A
C: (Jobsite Loaded Price) E: (FCA Price)
A: 5 B: All Charges for Off-shore Portion;
B: - Overseas and inland freight, insurance

premium, customs duties and other

charges from FCA to Jobsite Loaded C: N/A E: N/A
A: 6 B: Total (Sum of Items 4 through 5) E: N/A
C: (Jobsite Loaded Price) E: (Jobsite Loaded Price)
A: 7 B: Technical Supervisory Service E: N/A
C: [By Domestic (sub)Supplier)] E: [By Foreign (sub)Supplier]
A: 8 B: Total (Sum of Items 6 and 7) E: N/A
A: 9 B: Value-Added Tax E: N/A
A: 10 B: Grand Total (Sum of Items 8 and 9) C: ￦ E: US $
N/A
B: - On-shore : Say Korea Won only
B: - Off -shore : Say U.S. Dollars only
B: Authorized Signature or Seal
D: :
B: Print Title
D: :
B: Tenderer
D: :
B: Date of Submission D: :

[시트: 1.0]
G: Spec. : 0-771-J212
G:
Rev. 0
A: ATTACHMENT 3-1
A: PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
E: Name of Tenderer : ___________
A: Item No. B: Description C: Quantity D: Unit Price
(￦/ US$) F: Extension (￦/US$) H: Required Site
Delivery Date
A: 1.0 B: EQUIPMENT & MATERIALS
A: 1.01 B: Remote System Cabinet
B: a. 0-771-J-RX01 C: 1 Lot I: 4/2/28
A: 1.02 B: Quadruplex Fiber Optic Cables with Connector
B: a. Quadruplex Fiber Optic Cables
(1,350 Meters per Drum) C: 1 Lot I: 4/2/28
B: b. Connectors C: 1 Lot
A: 1.03 B: Engineering Station
B: 0-771-J-CA03 C: 1 Lot I: 4/2/28
A: 1.04 B: Other Components or Equipment Necessary to Complete and Integrate the System(Tenderer to List) C: 1 Lot I: 4/2/28
A: 1.05 B: Sub-Total (Sum of Item 1.1 through 1.04),
B: - On-shore, Jobsite Loaded C: N/A E: N/A G: ￦
B: - Off-shore, Jobsite Loaded C: N/A E: N/A G: US$
N/A
B: Remark : According to buyer's request schedule data, the site delivery data will be changed ahead of schedule.

[시트: 2.0]
F: Spec. : 0-771-J212
G:
Rev. 0
A: ATTACHMENT 3-1
A: PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
E: Name of Tenderer : ___________
A: 2.0
SPECIAL TOOLS
A:
Below is a list of special tools being supplied which are required for installation(mark *),

adjustment, calibration, maintenance and dismantling of the equipment.
The items which are

specified in Section 4, Technical Specifications, if any, shall be included in the list.

If no items are required, "N/A" shall be indicated below.
A: No. B: Item D: Recom. Q'ty/Unit E: Unit Price (￦/US$) G: Extension (￦/US$) H: Site Delivery Date
B: - Description
B: - Material Specification (Rating,

Grade, Type, etc.) H:
B: - Part No. / Orig. Mfr's Part No.
B: - Mfr's Name
A: A. Sub-Total of Special Tools
A:

• On-shore, Jobsite Loaded G: ￦

A:

• Off-shore, FCA G: US $

A: B. All charges for Off-shore portion :
A:

• Overseas and inland freight, insurance premium, customs

duties and other charges from FCA to Jobsite Loaded G: US $
A: C. Total of Special Tools(Sum of Items A and B),

Excluding V.A.T
A:

• On-shore, Jobsite Loaded G: ￦

A:

• Off-shore, Jobsite Loaded G: US $

[시트: 3.0 SPR]
F:
Spec. : 0-771-J212
F:
Rev. 0
A: ATTACHMENT 3-1
A: PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
E:
Name of Tenderer : _____________
A: 3.0 SPARE PARTS
A:
Below is a list of spare parts including consumable parts being supplied which are required for

installation(mark *), start-up(mark **) and two(2) years operation(mark ***).

The items which are specified in Section 4, Technical Specifications, if any, shall be included

in the list.
If no items are required, "N/A" shall be indicated below.
A: No. B: Item D: Recom. Q'ty/Unit E: Unit Price (￦/US$) F: Extension (￦/US$) G: Site Delivery Date
B: · Description
B: · Material Specification (Material,
Size, Rating, Grade or Type, etc.)
B: · Part No./Orig. Mfr's Part No.
B: · Mfr's Name
B: · Period of Replacement
B: · Code No., etc.
A: A. Sub-Total of Spare Parts
A:

• On-shore, Jobsite Loaded F: ￦

A:

• Off-shore, FCA F: US $

A: B. All charges for Off-shore portion :
A:

• Overseas and inland freight, insurance premium, customs

duties and other charges from FCA to Jobsite Loaded F: US $
A: C. Total of Special Tools(Sum of Items A and B),

Excluding V.A.T
A:

• On-shore, Jobsite Loaded F: ￦

A:

• Off-shore, Jobsite Loaded F: US $

[시트: 4.0 DLV]
F:
Spec. : 0-771-J212
F:
Rev. 0
A: ATTACHMENT 3-1
A: PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
E:
Name of Tenderer : _____________
A: 4.0
DELIVERY
A:
4.1
Delivery Required
B: In case of delivery to FCA port of export, schedule date is two(2) months before site delivery date.
B: A. Can Tenderer meet the delivery set forth in Item 1.0 through 3.0?
B: B. If the answer to Item 4.1, A is "No", Tenderer shall give schedule of earliest possible

dates.
B: C. Shipping shall not be made earlier than one (1) month prior to the delivery date set

forth in item 1.0 through 3.0 without written approval of the Buyer.
A:
4.2
Document Submittal Schedule
B: A. Can the Tenderer meet the document submittal schedule given in Appendix 4D?

(Yes or No) (If the answer to this question is "No", Tenderer shall list the earliest

possible submittal dates in the appropriate column in Appendix 4D)
B: B. Will the document submittal schedule in Appendix 4D and the review period

specified in Appendix 4C permit the Tenderer to commence fabrication in sufficient

time to meet the delivery date(s) given in Item 1.0 through 3.0? (Yes or No)

(If the answer to this question is "No", Tenderer shall list the required submittal dates

in Appendix 4D and/or indicate which documents will require expedited review.) J:
D: Authorized Signature or Seal :
D: Date of Submission :

[시트: 5.0 TSS-1]
E:
Spec. : 0-771-J212
E:
Rev. 0
A: ATTACHMENT 3-1
A: PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
E:
Name of Tenderer : ___________
A: 5.0
TECHNICAL SUPERVISORY SERVICES (IF REQUIRED)
A:
The Tenderer shall furnish the following information related to the technical supervisory

services which are required for the Equipment at the Site per Section 2, Special Terms and

Conditions, and Section 4, Technical Specifications.
A:
5.1
Number of working days and Supervisory/Technicians
B: Total
B:

• Supervisory : [

] persons X [
] days = [
] man-days
B:

• Technician

: [
] persons X [
] days = [
] man-days
B: Note : 1. The above working days shall be expected requirements based upon Tenderer's

experience.
A:
2. The actual working days shall be determined when the Buyer requests such

services.
A:
5.2
Rate and Expense (for a person)
E: Supervisory G: Technician
B: A. Basic rate per day for a normal

working day E: ￦/US$ G: ￦/US$
B: B. Hourly rate for overtime

(including Sunday and Holidays) E: ￦/US$ G: ￦/US$
B: C. Sojourn rate per day, excluding

lodging and local transportation E: ￦/US$ G: ￦/US$
B: D. Travel expense of round trip
B:

• Domestic person : 2days / trip E: ￦/US$ G: ￦/US$

B:

• Foreign person

: 4days / trip E: ￦/US$ G: ￦/US$
B: E. Economic round trip air fare E: ￦/US$ G: ￦/US$
B: Note : The ceiling of the air fare unit price shall be presented here.
A: 5.0
TECHNICAL SUPERVISORY SERVICES (CONT.)
A:
5.3 Estimated Amount of Technical Supervisory Services
B: Total, excluding V.A.T
B:

• Portion by Supervisor G: ￦

G: US$
B:

• Portion by Technician G: ￦

G: US$
B: Note : A detailed calculation sheet shall be attached hereto.
D: Authorized Signature or Seal :
D: Date of Submission
:

[시트: 5.0 TSS-2]
D:
Spec. : 0-771-J212
D:
Rev. 0
A: ATTACHMENT 3-1
A: PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
A: 5.0
TECHNICAL SUPERVISORY SERVICES (CONT.)
A:
5.4 Detailed Calculation Sheet
A: Unit No. C: Phase 1 F: Total
A: Grade C: Supervisor D: Technician E: Sub-Total
A: Man-Days
A: Services Fee B: Rate (￦/US$)
B: Extension (￦/US$)
A: Sojourn Allowance B: Rate (￦/US$)
B: Extension (￦/US$)
A: Travel Expenses of Round Trip (￦/US$)
A: Air Fares of Round Trip (￦/US$)
A: Total (￦/US$)

===== 2-1-3. 입찰설명서 1편(입찰유의서).hwp =====

방폐물검사건물 건설기자재 구매 입찰설명서

품 명: Process Control & Monitoting System(J212)

차 례 제Ⅰ편 입찰유의서 제Ⅱ편 계약조건 제Ⅲ편 입찰서 양식(물품 및 가격명세) 제Ⅳ편 기술규격서 Ⅰ. 입 찰 유 의 서 차 례 제1장 일반유의사항 1.1 일반사항 1.2 입찰절차 1.3 입찰서 작성 1.4 일찰서 평가 및 계약체결 제2장 특별유의사항 2.1 구매개요 2.2 구매범위 2.3 납품일정 2.4 입찰마감일시 2.5 입찰형태 2.6 입찰참가자격 2.7 계약전 통지 2.8 입찰가격 작성기준 2.9 입찰서 평가 절차 및 기준 붙 임 A 입찰보증금 지급각서 B 청렴계약 및 공정거래 이행각서 C 공정계약 서약서 D 협력회사 인권경영 이행 서약서 제1장 일반유의사항 1.1 일반사항 1.1.1 목 적

대한민국 법률에 의해 설립되어 경북 경주시에 주소를 둔 한국원자력환경공단(이하 ‘공단’)은 중․저준위 방사성폐기물 방폐물검사건물 건설에 필요한 기기, 자재 및 용역을 구매하고자 하며, 이와 관련하여 입찰자에게 입찰절차 및 요건, 계약조건, 구매범위 및 납품일정, 기술규격 등 보다 상세한 입찰 관련 정보를 제공하기 위하여 이 입찰설명서를 발급한다.

1.1.2 입찰설명서의 준수

가. 입찰자는 ‘국가종합전자조달시스템(조달청의 나라장터)’ 전자입찰시스템을 이용하여 이 입찰에 참여하여야 하므로 ‘전자입찰유의서 및 이용약관’과 이 입찰 설명서를 숙지, 동의한 후 입찰설명서에 규정된 절차 및 요건을 엄격히 준수하여 입찰서를 작성, 제출하여야 한다. 이를 위반한 입찰서는 부적격 처리되거나 불리하게 처리될 수 있으며, 이는 입찰자의 책임이다.

나. 입찰자는 ‘전자입찰유의서 및 이용약관’과 이 입찰설명서의 모든 내용을 충분히 숙지하고 수락한 것으로 간주된다.

1.1.3 용어정의

제Ⅱ편 계약조건 제1장 일반조건 제2조에 규정된 용어의 의미는 문맥 상 다르게 해석되어지는 경우를 제외하고는 이 입찰설명서의 다른 편에 사용된 용어에도 적용된다.

1.1.4 언어

입찰설명서는 한글 또는 영어로 작성, 제공된다. 입찰서는 한글, 영어 또는 양 언어로 작성되어야 하며, 그 이외의 언어로 작성된 입찰서는 접수하지 아니한다.

1.1.5 입찰비용

입찰자는 입찰서의 작성 및 제출, 입찰참가자격 심사, 입찰평가 및 계약협상과 관련하여 자신에게 발생된 비용 및 경비를 부담하여야 한다. 어떠한 경우에도 공단은 동 비용 및 경비에 대하여 책임을 지지 아니한다.

1.1.6 입찰의 비밀유지

입찰자는 입찰서 작성과 직접 관련이 없는 제3자에게 입찰설명서를 공개하여서는 아니 된다. 공단은 정부조달협정, 법령 또는 입찰설명서에 의하여 필요한 경우 이외에는 입찰서의 보안을 유지한다.

1.1.7 입찰서의 소유권

공단에 제출된 입찰서 및 기타서류는 공단의 재산이 되며, 입찰서의 적격여부를 불문하고 입찰자에게 반환되지 아니한다.

1.1.8 입찰설명서의 변경통지

공단은 입찰설명서의 내용 중 전자입찰의 취소 등 변경사항이 있으면 입찰자에게 통보를 하며, 변경사항은 입찰설명서의 내용에 포함된다.

1.1.9 기간계산

입찰설명서에 상세히 다르게 규정되지 않는 한, 일수로 표시된 기간은 토요일, 공휴일을 포함하지 않으며 월수 또는 년수로 표시된 기간은 토요일, 공휴일을 포함한다. 이때 말일 또는 어느 특정일의 토요일, 공휴일과 겹치는 경우에는 최초 다음 영업일로 연기된다. 이 입찰설명서에 표시된 일시는 한국 표준시를 기준으로 한다.

1.1.10 입찰철회 등

공단은 입찰자에 대한 책임 없이 사업변경, 가격초과, 협상결렬, 기타 다른 사유 등으로 언제든지 이 입찰을 철회 또는 연기하거나 재입찰 또는 재공고 입찰을 실시할 수 있으며, 구매범위, 납품일정, 입찰조건 등을 변경할 수 있다. 공단은 이러한 변경, 수정, 철회, 재입찰 또는 재공고 입찰과 관련하여 입찰자에게 어떠한 배상책임도 지지 아니한다.

1.1.11 입찰의 무효

다음 각 호의 1에 해당하는 입찰은 무효로 한다.

가. 입찰 참가 자격이 없는 자가 한 입찰

나. 입찰자(법인의 경우 대표자를 말한다. 이하 같다)가 직접 입찰을 하지 아니하고 대리인을 통하여 입찰할 경우 입찰개시 시각 전까지 위임장을 제출한 대리인이 아닌 자 또는 대리권이 없는 자가 한 입찰

다. 소정일시까지 소정의 입찰보증금을 납부하지 아니하고 한 입찰

라. 입찰서가 소정의 일시까지 도착하지 아니한 입찰

마. 동일사항에 대하여 동일인(1일이 수개의 법인의 대표자인 경우 해당 수개의 법인을 동일인으로 본다)이 2통 이상의 입찰서를 제출한 입찰.
단, 대안입찰서는 예외.

바. 동일사항에 대하여 타인의 대리를 겸하거나 2인 이상을 대리한 입찰

사. 입찰서의 입찰금액 등 중요한 부분이 불분명하거나, 정정한 후 날인을 누락한 경우

아. 담합하거나 타인의 경쟁참가를 방해 또는 공단 직원의 입찰업무 집행을 방해한 자의 입찰

자. 입찰자의 기명날인이 없는 입찰(입찰자의 성명을 기재하지 아니하고 대리인 성명 또는 회사명을 기재한 경우 및 입찰참가신청서 제출 시 신고한 인감과 다른 인감으로 날인된 경우도 포함된다)

차. 입찰설명서에서 요구하는 서류, 정보, 평가 자료를 제출하지 아니한 입찰

카. 기타 공단이 판단하는 입찰 설명서의 주요 요건을 위배한 입찰

1.1.12 부정당업자의 입찰참가자격 제한

국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률 시행령 76조에 의거 경쟁의 공정한 집행 또는 계약의 적정한 이행을 해할 우려가 있거나 기타 입찰에 참가시키는 것이 부적합하다고 인정되는 자에 대하여는 1개월 이상 2년 이하의 기간을 정하여 입찰참가자격을 제한한다.

1.1.13 기타사항

입찰공고 또는 이 입찰유의서에 명시되지 아니한 기타의 사항에 대하여는 공단이 정하는 바에 따른다.

1.2 입찰절차 1.2.1 입찰참가 신청

입찰공고 또는 따로 정하는 경우를 제외하고는 이 입찰에 대한 입찰참가신청은 아래 1.2.2조에 규정된 입찰보증금 제출로 갈음한다.

1.2.2 입찰보증금

가. 입찰보증금의 납부는 면제하되 입찰보증금 지급각서를 제출하여야 한다. 신용정보관리규약에 의한 채무불이행 또는 금융질서 문란자인 경우 부가가치세를 포함한 총 입찰금액의 5% 이상의 금액을 공단에 납부하여야 한다. 입찰보증금 지급각서(붙임 A의 양식)를 제 2장 특별유의사항 제2.4조에 규정된 입찰마감일시까지 제2장 특별유의사항 2.7.1조의 주소지로 제출하여야 한다.

나. 입찰보증금 지급각서 제출방법은 전자입찰 시 정해진 서식에 따라 송신한 입찰서로 대체한다.

다. 입찰보증금은 (1) 입찰자가 입찰서의 유효기간 만료일 이전에 입찰서를 철회한 경우, 또는 (2) 낙찰자가 정당한 이유 없이 계약체결을 거부하거나 약정된 기간 내에 계약이행보증금을 납부하지 않는 경우에 공단에 귀속하며, 입찰자는 귀속사유 발생 시 공단의 요청에 따라 입찰보증금 해당금액을 현금으로 즉시 납부하여야 한다.

1.2.3 입찰서 제출 가. 가격입찰서 및 입찰보증금 지급각서

공단으로부터 기술평가 적격업체로 통보받은 입찰자는 ‘국가종합전자조달시스템(조달청의 나라장터)’ 전자상거래 홈페이지에 온라인으로 제출하여야 한다. (가격입찰서 제출일은 추후통보)

나. 기술사항 입찰서

기술제안서는 제출 안내공고문에 안내된 장소 및 제출방법을 준수하여 제출기한 내에 제출하여야 한다. 입찰서가 공단에 접수되었는지 확인 할 책임은 입찰자에게 있다.

1.2.4 입찰서 개봉

가격입찰서를 제외한 입찰서는 기재사항 확인 및 입찰평가를 위해 입찰마감 후에 즉시 개봉된다. 가격입찰서는 기술성 평가가 완료된 후 ‘국가종합전자조달시스템(조달청의 나라장터)’ 전자상거래 시스템을 이용하여 개찰되며 공단은 입찰자의 입회를 위해 가격입찰서의 개찰일시와 장소를 입찰자에게 통보한다.

1,3 입찰서 작성 1.3.1 일반사항

입찰품목은 사용되지 않은 신품이고 구매의도에 적합하여야 하며, 제Ⅲ편 물품 및 가격명세 또는 제Ⅳ편 기술규격서에 규정된 바에 따라 엄격하게 설계, 제작, 조립, 시험, 공급 또는 설치되어야 하며, 규정된 기술규격이 없는 경우에는 가장 최신의 설계에 의한 제품이고, 제작자의 통상적인 생산물품과 동일하거나 보다 우수한 제품이어야 한다.

1.3.2 입찰서 구성 및 내용

입찰서는 제Ⅲ편 입찰서 양식(물품 및 가격명세)에 따라 작성되어야 하며, 입찰설명서에서 요구하거나 충분한 입찰평가를 위하여 필요하다고 생각되는 추가 관련 자료가 첨부되어야 한다. 입찰서 양식은 모든 항목이 기재되어야 하며, 필요한 경우 입찰자는 충분한 설명과 함께 양식의 내용을 수정할 수 있다. 입찰서는 아래와 같이 구성되어야 한다.

가. 기술 및 상업사항 입찰서 (1) 입찰서 제출 공문 (2) PART A 기술사항 (3) PART B 상업사항 (4) 가격명세(가격불표시분) 및 납품일정 (5) 예외사항

(6) 입찰설명서에서 요구되는 기타 도면, 기술, 일반자료 및 정보

(7) (2)～(6)의 내용을 담은 원본(전자파일 온라인), 사본(오프라인)

나. 가격입찰서 (1) 총액가격은 온라인 제출

(2) 가격명세(가격표시분) 및 납품일정은 계약체결 시 제출

1.3.3 입찰서 포장 및 표시

오프라인으로 제출하는 기술 및 상업사항 입찰서는 겉면에 입찰번호, 물품명, 입찰자명, 입찰서번호(입찰자 부여 시)등을 명시하여야 한다.

1.3.4 입찰서 수량

기술 및 상업사항 입찰서는 원본 1부(전자파일 온라인), 사본 5부(오프라인) 총 6부를 제출한다.

1.3.5 입찰서 수정

기술 및 상업사항 입찰서는 첨자, 변경 또는 삭제 없이 작성되어야 한다. 수정이 필요한 경우에는 수정부분에 법인 또는 사용인감으로 날인하여야 한다.

1.3.6 추가서류

아래 서류를 제외하고, 공단은 입찰평가기간 중에는 어떠한 입찰서의 변경사항 또는 추가서류를 접수하지 아니한다.

가. 제출된 입찰서의 주요내용을 변경시키지 않는 입찰자의 확인사항에 관한 서류

나. 입찰서 또는 입찰보증금의 유효기간 연장에 관한 서류

다. 입찰평가를 위해 공단이 서면으로 요청한 서류

1.3.7 입찰설명서에 대한 예외사항

가. 입찰자는 제Ⅰ편 입찰유의서 및 제Ⅱ편 계약조건을 수락하여야 하며, 이에 대한 예외사항은 원칙적으로 인정하지 아니한다.

나. 입찰설명서 제Ⅳ편 기술규격서에 대한 예외사항을 제시할 때에는 입찰자는 공단이 그 타당성을 평가할 수 있도록 충분한 설명과 함께 그 차이점을 상세히 기술하여야 한다.

1.3.8 대안입찰서

입찰자는 개선사항이 있거나 보다 경제적이라고 판단되는 경우 대안입찰서를 제출할 수 있다. 대안입찰서는 원입찰서와 쉽게 구별될 수 있도록 작성되어야 하며, 가격을 포함한 모든 대안사항이 그 이점 등에 대한 충분한 설명과 함께 기술되어야 한다. 대안입찰서는 원입찰서와 동일한 절차 및 요건에 따라 제출되고 취급되어야 한다.

1.3.9 입찰서 유효기간

입찰가격을 포함한 입찰서는 확정청약으로서 구속력이 있으며 가격입찰마감일 이후 최소 8개월까지 조건 없이 유효하여야 한다. 공단은 필요한 경우 입찰자에게 입찰서 유효기간의 연장을 요청할 수 있다.

1.3.10 입찰설명서 또는 입찰서 내용의 상치

입찰설명서 또는 입찰서의 내용이나 수치가 모순되거나 상충될 경우, 공단 또는 입찰자가 달리 확인하지 않는 한, 해당 사항을 보다 구체적으로 상세히 취급한 내용이 우선한다. 입찰자가 입찰설명서의 정확한 의미 또는 해석에 의문이 있는 경우, 서면으로 공단에 확인을 요청할 수 있다. 공단은 구두로 확인한 사항에 대하여 책임을 지지 아니한다.

1.3.11 참고자료

입찰자가 달리 언급하지 않는 한, 입찰서에 참고용으로 포함된 입찰자의 홍보물, 자료 또는 정보는 공식 입찰내용으로 간주되지 아니한다.

1.3.12 도면확인

입찰설명서에 포함된 도면은 하자 또는 불일치가 있을 수 있다. 입찰자는 입찰설명서의 도면과 기술된 규격서를 대조하여야 하며, 규격서와의 일치를 위한 도면의 수정사항을 입찰서에 명시하여야 한다.

1.3.13 입찰서 기명날인 또는 서명

가. 기술 및 상업사항 입찰서에는 반드시 입찰자 성명(법인의 경우 법인명과 대표자의 성명을 같이 기재하여야 함)을 기재하고 법인인감(신고된 사용인감을 포함함)을 날인하여야 한다. 입찰서에는 인감증명서(필요시 사용인감계 포함)가 첨부되어야 한다.

나. 가격입찰서의 경우에는 입찰유의서에 따라 ‘국가종합전자조달시스템(조달청의 나라장터)’ 전자입찰시스템을 이용한다.

1.4 입찰서 평가 및 계약체결 1.4.1 입찰서 평가 기준 및 절차

공단은 제2장 특별유의사항에 명시된 입찰서 평가 기준, 절차 및 필요시 공단의 표준사업관리절차서에 따라 공정하게 평가를 실시한다.

1.4.2 입찰서 평가내용 비공개 원칙

입찰서 평가는 공단 또는 공단이 지정한 다른 기관에 의하여 수행된다. 공단이 결정한 입찰서 평가의 결과는 최종적이고 확정적이며, 정부조달협정에 의하지 아니하고는 공단은 입찰서 평가에 관한 내용을 공개할 의무가 없다.

1.4.3 낙찰자 선정

공단은 2인 이상의 유효한 입찰에 의하여 경쟁입찰이 성립된 경우, 기술규격 등 입찰설명서의 주요 요건을 충족하고 예정가격 이하로 입찰한 자 중 최저가격 입찰자를 낙찰자로 선정한다.

1.4.4 계약체결

가. 낙찰자는 공단으로부터 낙찰통지를 받은 후 7일 이내에 소정서식에 의한 구비서류(붙임 B,C,D의 양식) 및 낙찰금액의 산출내역서를 공단에 제출하고, 10일 이내에 계약을 체결한다. 단, 불가항력의 사유로 인하여 계약을 체결할 수 없는 경우에는 그 사유가 존속하는 기간은 이를 산입하지 아니한다.

나. 계약상대자는 계약 체결 시 계약보증금과 관련규정에 의하여 필요한 서류를 공단에 제출하여야 한다.

(붙임 B 청렴계약 및 공정거래 이행각서, 붙임 C 공정계약 서약서,
붙임 D 협력회사 인권경영 이행 서약서)

1.4.5 재입찰 및 재공고 입찰

가. 공단은 가격입찰서를 개찰한 결과 낙찰자를 결정할 수 없는 경우로서 기술규격 적격자가 2인 이상인 때에는 그 기술규격 적격자에 한하여 다시 가격입찰서를 제출하게 할 수 있다.

나. 그 외 재입찰 및 재공고입찰에 대한 사항은 계약예규 ‘물품 구매 입찰유의서’ 및 국가계약법에 따라 시행한다.

붙임 A 입찰보증금 지급각서 입찰번호 : 물 품 명 : 입찰일시 :

귀 공단에서 시행하는 위 구매입찰에서 본인이 입찰서 유효기간 만료일 이전에 입찰서를 철회하거나, 또는 본인이 낙찰자 또는 계약협상대상자로 선정된 후 정당한 이유 없이 계약을 체결하지 않거나 약정된 기일 내에 계약보증금을 납부하지 않아 입찰보증금의 귀 공단에 귀속사유가 발생할 경우에는 귀 공단의 요청에 따라 총 입찰금액의 100분의 5에 해당하는 금액을 귀 공단에 즉시 현금으로 납부하겠으며, 기타 입찰보증금의 귀 공단 귀속사유로 인한 어떠한 조치에 대하여도 귀 공단의 결정 또는 요구에 따를 것임을 확약합니다. 또한, 위 물품의 구매와 관련한 재공고 입찰에 본인이 참여할 경우에도 이 각서가 입찰보증금 지급각서로서 계속 유효함을 인정합니다.

20 년
월
일

대표자
인

상 호 주 소 한국원자력환경공단 이사장 귀하 붙임 B 청렴계약 및 공정거래 이행각서

당사는 한국원자력환경공단 [이하 “공단”이라 한다]이 시행하는 입찰에 참가하거나 공단과의 거래를 함에 있어 청렴계약 및 공정거래 이행이 사회발전과 국가 경쟁력 제고에 중요한 관건이 됨을 깊이 인식하고 공단의 청렴계약 및 공정거래 실천의지에 적극 호응하여 공단에서 발주하는 공사ㆍ용역ㆍ물품 등의 입찰 및 계약과 관련하여 청렴계약 및 공정거래를 이행할 것을 다음과 같이 서약합니다.

1. 어떠한 명분으로도 공단의 계약관련 업무수행자[계약부서, 수요부서 및 청구부서의 직원과 공단의 대리인 및 그 임직원을 포함한다]에게 직접 또는 간접적으로 금품ㆍ향응 등(친인척 등에 대한 부정한 취업 제공 포함) 부당한 이익을 제공하지 않겠습니다.

2. 공단의 임직원 또는 업무종사자(친인척 포함)로서 거래를 하지 않겠습니다.

3. 계약을 이행함에 있어 부실 또는 부당하게 하지 않겠습니다.

4. 독점규제 및 공정거래에 관한 법률 또는 하도급거래 공정화에 관한 법률에 위반되는 어떠한 행위도 하지 않겠습니다.

5. 산업안전보건법에 의한 안전조치 또는 보건조치를 소홀하게 하여 근로자 및 공중에게 위해가 가도록 하지 않겠습니다.

6. 이번 입찰과 관련하여 입찰가격 또는 특정인의 낙찰을 위한 담합 등 어떠한 사항에 대하여도 경쟁자들과 사전에 협의, 연락, 합의, 조정 등을 한 사실이 없음을 서약함과 동시에, 이 후에도 자유경쟁을 부당하게 저해하는 일체의 불공정한 행위를 않겠습니다.

가. 이를 위반하여 입찰집행 중 또는 입찰집행 후에 공정거래위원회의 결정 또는 법원의 판결에 따라 담합사실이 인정되는 경우에는 입찰중지, 입찰무효, 계약해제ㆍ해지, 공사 중지, 손해배상 청구, 공정거래위원회의 통지, 검찰고발 등 일체의 조치를 취하여도 민ㆍ형사상 이의를 제기하지 않겠습니다.

나. 또한 경쟁입찰과 관련한 담합으로 공단에게 손해를 입혔을 경우에는 다음 각 호의 금액을 배상하도록 하겠습니다.

① 담합에 따라 결정된 낙찰가격과 담합이 없었을 경우 형성되었으리라고 인정되는 가격의 차액

② 담합으로 인하여 입찰이 유찰된 경우 입찰공고 및 현장설명회 개최 등 재입찰절차에 따라 소요되는 각종 행정비용

③ 기타 공단이 입증하는 담합으로 인한 유․무형의 손해

다. ‘나’호에도 불구하고 구체적인 손해액을 산정하기가 곤란하거나 불가능할 경우에는 계약금액의 10%를 배상하도록 하겠습니다.

라. ‘나’, ‘다’호의 배상액은 공단이 청구한 날로부터 60일 이내에 납부하도록 하겠으며, 이 기간 내에 납부하지 못할 경우에는 공단이 당사에 지급할 타 대가에서 우선 공제하여도 민ㆍ형사상 이의를 제기하지 않겠습니다.

7. 입찰 또는 계약에 관한 서류(전자서류 포함)를 위변조하거나 부정하게 행사하거나 기타 공정한 입찰 질서를 방해하는 어떠한 행위도 하지 않겠습니다.

위 사항을 위반할 경우에는 공단의 입찰참가자격의 취소, 낙찰취소, 계약의 해제 또는 해지 및 입찰참가자격의 제한 등의 조치를 감수할 것이며, 공단의 조치와 관련하여 손해배상의 청구, 소송 등에 대해 어떠한 이의도 제기하지 않을 것을 확약합니다.

20 . . 서 약 자 기 관 명 :

대
표 :

한국원자력환경공단 이사장 귀하 붙임 C 공정계약 서약서

한국원자력환경공단[이하 “공단”이라 한다]은 공단에서 발주한 공사ㆍ용역ㆍ물품 등의 입찰 및 계약과 관련하여 낙찰된 계약상대자와 청렴계약 및 공정거래를 이행할 것을 다음과 같이 서약합니다.

1. 어떠한 명분으로도 계약상대자에게 직접 또는 간접적으로 금품ㆍ향응 등(친인척 등에 대한 부정한 취업 제공 포함) 부당한 이익을 요구하지 않겠습니다.

2. 계약상대자의 경영ㆍ인사관리 및 계약상대자가 제3자와 체결한 계약의 내용에 대해 개입하지 않겠습니다.

3. 해당 계약과 직접적인 관련이 없는 의무를 계약상대자에게 부과하거나 공단이 부담하여야 하는 계약 내용을 계약상대자에게 전가하는 행위를 하지 않겠습니다.

가. 신기술ㆍ특허공법 보유자 또는 물품공급ㆍ기술지원사와 발주 전에 기술사용(지원)협약 등을 체결하지 아니하고 낙찰자로 하여금 직접 신기술ㆍ특허 보유자 또는 물품공급ㆍ기술지원사와 체결한 사용협약서 또는 물품공급ㆍ기술지원협약서를 제출하게 하거나 이로 인해 낙찰자가 계약을 체결할 수 없는 경우에도 부정당업자로 입찰참가자격을 제한하고 입찰보증금을 귀속하지 않겠습니다.

나. 신기술ㆍ특허공법 보유자 또는 물품공급ㆍ기술지원사와 공단이 사전에 체결한 기술사용(지원)협약 등과 다르게 부당한 요구를 하여 낙찰자와 신기술ㆍ특허 보유자 또는 물품공급ㆍ기술지원사가 간 협약이 체결되지 않도록 하는 행위를 방지하겠습니다.

다. 신기술ㆍ특허공법이 사용되는 공사의 전부 또는 일부가 기술보유자의 기술력을 활용하지 아니하면 시공과 품질 확보가 불가능하거나, 기술보유자가 보유한 특수 장비 등을 직접 사용하지 아니하면 시공과 품질 확보가 불가능한 경우를 제외하고 계약상대자에게 신기술ㆍ특허공법 보유자와 하도급계약 등을 체결하도록 강요ㆍ유도하지 않겠습니다.

라. 계약체결 부대비용 등 계약체결 및 이행 과정에서 발생하는 비용 중 공단이 부담할 부분을 계약상대자에게 전가하거나, 공사용지 확보, 사업관련 민원대응 등 공단의 업무를 계약상대자에게 전가하는 행위를 하지 않겠습니다.

4. 「공기업ㆍ준정부기관 계약사무규칙」, 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률(이하, “국가계약법”이라 한다)」, 국가계약법 시행령 및 시행규칙, 재정경제부 계약예규, 공단 계약규정에 규정된 사항을 위반하여 계약상대자의 계약상 이익을 부당하게 제한하거나 의무를 부과하는 특약 또는 조건을 요구하는 어떠한 행위를 하지 않겠습니다.

가. 수의계약 시에도 규격서나 시방서 등에 명시한 수의계약 대상제품을 부득이하게 특별하여 필요한 경우를 제외하고 특정제품 규격이나 인증번호 등을 명시하여 수의계약 체결을 요구하지 않겠습니다.

나. 계약체결 이후 과업을 변경 시 계약 목적달성을 위해 필요한 최소한의 과업만을 변경하지 않고 빈번하게 과업변경을 계약상대자에게 요구하거나 계약금액 감액 시 기준, 대상, 방식에 대한 협의 없이 자의적으로 계약상대자의 적정대가를 보장하지 않는 행위를 하지 않겠습니다.

다. 국가계약법 제19조 등에 따른 계약 내용의 변경에 따른 계약금액 조정과 관련하여 계약금액의 조정 없이 추가 과업을 요구하거나 일방적으로 과업을 변경하며 정당한 이유 없이 계약금액 조정신청을 거부 또는 인정하는 행위를 하지 않겠습니다.

라. 장기계속계약의 연차별 계약기간 중 계약예규 「공사계약일반조건」제25조제3항 제1호부터 제3호까지 및 제6호ㆍ제7호에 따른 사유가 발생한 이후, 해당 연차계약을 해지하고 잔여 공사부분을 차년도 연차계약으로 이월하는 행위를 하지 않겠습니다.

5. 공단은 시장에서 거래되는 등 재산적 가치가 있는 기술지식 등을 계약상대자의 승인을 얻어 복사ㆍ이용 또는 공개하려는 경우에는 계약상대자와 협의하여 정당한 이용대가를 지급하겠습니다.

위 사항을 위반할 경우에는 공단은 계약상대자에게 계약의 해제 또는 해지 및 입찰참가자격의 제한 등의 행위를 하지 않으며, 공정거래 이행 위반에 따른 손해배상을 청구, 소송 등에 의한 어떠한 이의를 제기하지 않을 것을 서약합니다.

20 .
.
.

서 약 자
한국원자력환경공단 이사장 (인)

붙임 D 협력회사 인권경영 이행 서약서

당사는 한국원자력환경공단의 협력회사로서 근로자(하도급업체 포함)의 인권보호, 고용안정, 노동환경 등의 권리보호를 위해 다음 사항을 이행할 것을 서약합니다.

1. 당사는 근로자가 인간으로서의 존엄과 가치 및 자유와 권리를 누릴 수 있도록 인권보호를 위한 경영정책을 확립하도록 노력하겠습니다.

2. 근로자에 대하여 인종ㆍ종교ㆍ신체적 결함ㆍ성별ㆍ출생지ㆍ노동조합 가입여부 등의 이유로 고용ㆍ보상ㆍ훈련의 기회, 승진, 이직, 퇴직 등에 차별을 하거나 차별을 조장하지 않겠습니다.

3. 안전시설, 휴게시설 등을 설치하여 근로자의 노동환경을 개선하고 작업과 관련한 사고나 질병을 예방하기 위해 적절한 조치를 취하겠습니다. 특히, 근로자가 건강과 안전이 위험하다고 판단하여 작업을 거부한 경우 즉시 현장의 문제를 조사하여 조치를 취하도록 하겠습니다.

4. 근로자에게 노동력 착취적인 언어, 신체적 접촉과 성적 강압 등과 같은 행위, 정신적 강압이나 언어폭력 등은 허용하지 않고, 근로자의 개인정보나 사생활에 대한 권리를 존중하겠습니다.

5. 근로자에게 관련 규정에 부합한 노동시간 준수 및 휴일 제공으로 근로자 자신과 가족이 건강한 생활수준을 누릴 수 있게 하며, 여성근로자의 모성은 특별한 도움을 받을 권리를 보장하겠습니다.

6. 당사는 근로 중 근로자에게 발생한 문제에 대하여 「근로기준법」,「산업재해보상보험법」,「국민건강보험법」등 관련 법령을 준수하여 필요한 조치를 취하며 이를 위반할 경우에는 관계법령에 따라 책임지겠습니다.

20 .
.
.

서약자 :
대표 :

제2장 특별유의사항 2.1 구매개요

공단은 경북 경주시 문무대왕면 봉길리 일대 중저준위운영본부 내 인수/검사를 위한 방폐물검사건물(제2인수저장건물)의 건설 사업을 추진 중이다.

2.2 구매범위

이 입찰에 의한 구매범위의 상세내역은 제Ⅲ편 입찰서 양식 「가격명세 및 납품일정」및 제Ⅳ편「기술규격서」에 명시되어 있다.

2.3 납품일정

이 입찰에 의한 구매물품의 납품일정은 제Ⅲ편 입찰서 양식 「가격명세 및 납품일정」에 명시되어 있다.

2.4 입찰마감일시

입찰서는 한국시간으로 입찰공고문에 명시된 기간까지 제출되어야 한다.

2.5 입찰형태 가. 이 입찰은 국내 경쟁입찰이다.

나. 이 입찰은 규격․가격분리 (2단계 경쟁)입찰이다.

다. 이 입찰은 기술평가 적격업체 중 예정가격 이하 최저가격으로 입찰한 자를 낙찰자로 결정한다.

2.6 입찰참가자격

이 입찰에 참가할 수 있는 자는 기술제안서 제출 마감 전일 현재 공단 등록업체 관리목록의 “Process Control and Monitoring System (J212)”에 등록된 업체이어야 한다.

2.7 계약전 통지

2.7.1 입찰자는 입찰관련 추가정보의 요청, 입찰참가신청 및 입찰서 제출 등 계약 절차 상 문의는 아래 주소로 하여야 한다.

경북 경주시 충효천길19 (우‐38062) 한국원자력환경공단 경영관리본부 ESG상생팀 전화번호 : (054) 750-4076

2.7.2 입찰자는 입찰설명서 기술사항 문의 또는 입찰서 기술사항 확인 등 기술 상 문의는 아래 주소로 하여야 한다.

경북 경주시 충효천길19 (우‐38062)

한국원자력환경공단 중저준위사업본부 엔지니어링팀

전화번호 : (054) 750-4303

2.7.3 위 2.7.1조 및 2.7.2조에 의한 확인요청, 문의, 추가정보 등에 대하여 공단 자신의 판단 하에 회신하지 않거나 또는 회신이 이유를 불문하고 입찰자에게 지연 도착하는 경우에도 입찰자의 지연입찰에 대하여 공단은 어떠한 책임도 지지 않는다.

2.8 입찰가격 작성기준 2.8.1 일반사항

입찰자는 입찰설명서에 규정된 요건 및 조건에 따라 공단의 구매범위에 대하여 총액 입찰가격을 제시하여야 하며(공단 선택구매항목은 별도 항목으로 제시), 제Ⅲ편 입찰서 양식 「가격명세 및 납품일정」에 명시한 바와 같이 품목별 및 단계별로 세분하여 가격명세를 제시하여야 한다.

2.8.2 입찰통화 입찰가격은 원화(￦)로 표시하여야 한다. 2.8.3 납품조건

입찰가격은 처분시설 현장하차도 조건에 의한 가격이어야 한다.

2.8.4 제세 및 공과금

입찰가격에는 물품 납품과 용역의 수행에 관련되는 부가가치세를 포함한 모든 세금과 공과금이 포함되어야한다. 부가가치세는 품목별 입찰가격에서는 제외하되 총 입찰가격에는 포함되어야 한다.

2.9 입찰서 평가 절차 및 기준 2.9.1 입찰평가 절차

가. 입찰서 평가는 2단계로 구분되어 수행된다. 제1단계는 기술성에 대한 평가이며, 제2단계는 경제성 평가이다. 제1단계 평가 시 부적격으로 평가된 입찰서는 제2단계 평가대상에서 제외된다.

나. 입찰서 평가를 위하여 공단은 서면 또는 확인회의를 통하여 입찰서 내용을 확인할 수 있다. 공단의 확인 요청에 불응 시는 입찰자에게 불리한 조건으로 평가되거나, 제2단계 평가에서 제외될 수 있으며 이것은 전적으로 입찰자의 책임사항이다.

2.9.2 입찰평가 기준 2.9.2.1 일반기준

가. 제1단계 평가에서 공단은 이의사항에 대한 수용여부를 포함하여 각 입찰서가 기술규격 등 입찰 설명서 주요요건을 충족하는지 여부를 평가한다. 1단계 평가 적격자만이 2단계 평가에 신청할 수 있다.

나. 공단은 제2단계 평가에서 1단계 평가 적격자가 제출한 입찰서 중에서 최저가 입찰서를 선정한다.

2.9.2.2 입찰평가 항목 입찰평가 주요항목은 다음과 같다 가. 기술성 평가 (1) 공급범위 및 납품일정 (2) 기술규격 차이 (3) 기기의 성능 및 신뢰성

(4) 설치, 시공 유지보수에 있어서의 편의성

(5) 품질보증 (6) 기술규격에 대한 이의 또는 예외사항 (7) 계약조건에 대한 이의 사항 (8) 기타 필요한 사항 등 2.9.3 기술성 평가 기준 가. 기술평가 유의사항

• 입찰서와 기타 구비서류를 검토하여 미비한 입찰자에 대하여는 상황에 따라 보완지시, 실격처리 등의 조치를 취하고 그 결과를 기술평가에 반영할 수 있다.

• 입찰내용에 대한 확인, 검증이 필요한 경우 입찰자에게 입증자료를 요구할 수 있으며, 입증자료를 제출하지 못할 경우 입찰내용의 이행을 할 의사가 없는 것으로 간주한다.

• 입찰자는 본 사업과 관련하여 취득한 내용에 대하여 제3자에게 누설하여서는 아니 된다.

• 입찰자가 제출한 모든 자료 및 문서는 입찰자의 권익보호를 위하여 외부에 공개하지 않음을 원칙으로 한다.

• 기술평가는 공단 또는 공단이 지정한 전문기관에서 수행한다.

나. 기술입찰서 작성 방법

• 기술입찰서는 명료하고 간결하게 작성되어야 하며 불확실하거나 추상적인 표현, 즉 「~가능할 것이다」또는「~고려하고 있다」등은 사용하지 말아야 한다.

• 기술입찰서는 허위 또는 예상으로 작성되지 않아야 하며 허위로 작성한 사실이 발견될 시에는 평가대상에서 제외한다.

• 입찰자는 사업목적을 효과적으로 달성하기 위하여 필요하다고 판단되는 사항에 대해 추가로 제안 또는 대안을 제시할 수 있다.

다. 기술평가 평가기준

• 입찰자는 입찰용 기술규격서의 모든 항목을 만족해야 한다. 아울러 입찰자가 제시한 각 항목에 대한 제안 또는 대안사항에 대해 평가자의 승인을 득하는 경우 만족한 것으로 본다.

• 입찰자는 제출한 입찰서에 대한 평가자의 질의서 또는 보완자료를 접수한 경우 2주 이내에 적정한 답변을 회신하여야 한다. 입찰자의 답변이 기간을 초과하거나, 동일한 항목에 대해 기술규격서 요건에 불만족한 답변이 3회 이상 계속되는 경우에는 기술요건을 만족시킬 수 없는 것으로 평가한다. 단, 다음의 사항에 해당되는 경우 해당 기간 동안 답변기간을 연장할 수 있다.

• 질의사항에 대한 상세검토가 필요하여 입찰자 전부가 기한 내 회신이 불가능하고 후속공정에 특별한 영향이 없는 경우

• 기타 천재지변 등의 불가항력 사항으로 인정되는 경우

===== 2-2-1. 구매규격서.pdf =====
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BUILDING
PURCHASE SPECIFICATION
Title : PROCESS CONTROL & MONITORING
SYSTEM
Spec. No. : 0-7 1-J212

ADDENDUM 1
to
Specification Number : 0-7 1-J212
PROCESS CONTROL & MONITORING SYSTEM
for
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BUILDING
Quality Clas : AQ/ NQ
Radwaste Safety Category : I / I I
DATE REVISIONS PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED

• Specification of Supplier’s responsibility

for revising the existing PCMS supplier
documents of LILW phase 1
07/09/26 - Addition of the latest control logic
diagrams

• Addition of the related schematic diagrams

of LILW phase 1
AD - 1
Preparer : 박종선, Tel : 054-421-6565

Spec.: 0-771-J212
Add. 1
A D D E N D U M 1
This following pages have been revised and issued herewith.
Changed pages Changes pertaining to
SIS-1 thru SIS-3 (Final) Addendum 1 Specification Issue Summary
4-9, 4-24, Page 2 and 4 of App. 4D
TC 4-4-3 (Final), 4-4-51, 4-4-52
TC 4-7-1, 4-7-14, 4-7-15
Page 8 of App. 4D
Specification of Supplier’s responsibility for
revising the existing PCMS supplier documents
of LILW phase 1 (Buyer’s request)
Addition of the latest control logic diagrams
Addition of the related schematic diagrams of
LILW phase 1 (Buyer’s request)
Change in quantity of instruction manuals for
the site (Buyer’s request)
AD – 2 (Final)

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BUILDING
SPECIFICATION ISSUE SUMMARY
Title : PROCESS CONTROL & MONITORING SYSTEM
Spec. No. : 0-7 1-J212
● Quality Clas : AQ/NQ ● Radwaste Safety Category : I /I I
KEPCO E&C JOB No. : 1 G79
ISSUE STATUS
1 07/09/26 Ad endum 1
0 10/02/25 Is ue for ITB
ISSUE NO. DATE DESCRIPTION
SIS-1
Preparer : 박종선, Tel : 054-421-6565

2nd Radwaste Receipt/Storage Building
Spec. 0-771-J212
SPECIFICATION ISSUE SUMMARY
DESCRIPTION REVISION
This specification for furnishing PROCESS CONTROL & MONITORING SYSTEM consists of :
Section 1
Section 2
Section 3
Section 4
General Conditions
Special Conditions
Material Description and Pricing Data
Technical Specification
ATTACHMENTS
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-10
Witness Point
Hold Point
System General Configuration For Tender Purpose Only
Control Logic Diagram List
Functional Loop Diagram List
Analog Loop Summary List for Electrical System
Electrical Schematic Diagram List
Building Structure Mounting Design and Load Summary Form
Supplier’s equipment list
Form Parent Component Design Functions and Classification
Evaluation Sheet
APPENDICES
4A1
4B
4C
4D
4E
4H
4P
4S
4T
4U
4X
Quality Assurance Manual Requirements
Quality Surveillance Requirements
General Requirements for Submittal of Documents
Drawing and Data Submittal Requirements
Quality Verification Documentation List
Documentation Requirements of Supplier Deviations and Non-
Conformances
Standard Specification for Electrical Apparatus
General Requirements for Instrumentation & Control
Requirements for Instrument Tagging
Requirements for Panel Labels
Requirements for Part Classification
Form 6.10-2, Rev. 0
-
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
SIS-2

2nd Radwaste Receipt/Storage Building
Spec. 0-771-J212
SPECIFICATION ISSUE SUMMARY
DESCRIPTION REVISION
ADDENDA
No.
Description
1.
Addendum 1 Specification Issue Summary
To specify Supplier’s responsibility for revising the existing
PCMS supplier documents of LILW phase 1
(Buyer’s request)
To add the latest control logic diagrams
To add the related schematic diagrams of LILW phase 1
(Buyer’s request)
To change quantity of instruction manual for the site (Buyer’s
request)
Page Affected
SIS-1 thru SIS-3 (Final)
4-9, 4-24, Page 2 and 4
of App. 4D
TC 4-4-3 (Final), 4-4-
51, 4-4-52
TC 4-7-1, 4-7-14, 4-7-
15
Page 8 of App. 4D
1
Form 6.10-2, Rev. 0
SIS-3 (Final)

Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev.0
SECTION 1 – GENERAL CONDITIONS
The General Conditions of this purchase specification will be prepared and added by KORAD.
1-1 (Final)

Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev.0
SECTION 2 – SPECIAL CONDITIONS
The Special Conditions of this purchase specification will be prepared and added by KORAD.
2-1 (Final)

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BUILDING
SECTION 3
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
Title : PROCESS CONTROL & MONITORING SYSTEM
Spec. No. : 0-7 1-J212
● Safety Category : Non-Safety-Related ● Quality Clas : AQ/ NQ
● Safety Clas : I / I I
KEPCO E&C JOB No. : 1 G79
ISSUE STATUS
0 10/02/25 Is ue for ITB
REV NO. DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
Preparer : 박종선, Tel : 054-421-6565

FORM OF PROPOSAL
SECTION 3, MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
FOR
PROCESS CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEM
SPECIFICATION NUMBER : 0-771-J212
QUALITY CLASS : AQ & NQ
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY : II & III
FOR
KOREA RADIOACTIVE WASTE AGENCY
PROPOSAL NO. :
TENDERER'S NAME :
BUSINESS ADDRESS :
TEL NO. :
FAX NO. :
E-MAIL ADDRESS :

SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE
PART A - TECHNICAL INFORMATION
3A.1.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL DATA
3A.2.0 EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED
PART B - COMMERCIAL INFORMATION
3B.1.0 TENDER PRICE
3B.2.0 DELIVERY SCHEDULE
3B.3.0 PAYMENT METHOD
3B.4.0 POINT(S) OF ORIGIN
3B.5.0 PORT OF EXPORT
3B.6.0 PROPOSAL VALIDITY
3B.7.0 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
3B.8.0 SEAL TO BE USED (For Domestic Tenderer only)
3B.9.0 TENDERER'S DEFINITE STATEMENT
ATTACHMENT 3-1 PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
ATTACHMENT 3-2 EXCEPTIONS
TC3 - 1 (Final)

Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A– TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :
3A.1.1 NET WEIGHTS (not shipping weight) (lb/kg), as follows:
Each unit complete………………… (lb/kg)
Heaviest piece handled during
erection…………………………….. (lb/kg)
Heaviest piece handled after
erection……………………………. (lb/kg)
3A.1.2 OVERALL DIMENSIONS
1. Remote Control Cabinet (Including Termination Section)
a. Width (in/cm)
b. Height (in/cm)
c. Depth (in/cm)
d. Weight (lb/kg)
e. Number of Remote Control Cabinet
e1. 0-771-J-RX01
3A-1

Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A– TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :
2. Quadruplex Fiber Optic Cables with Connector
a. Width (in/cm)
b. Height (in/cm)
c. Depth (in/cm)
d. Weight (lb/kg)
e. Number of Quadruplex Fiber Optic Cable
Drum
3. Engineering Station
a. Width (in/cm)
b. Height (in/cm)
c. Depth (in/cm)
d. Weight (lb/kg)
e. Number of Station
3A.1.3 SHIPPING WEIGHT & VOLUME
SHIPPING WEIGHT SHIPPING VOLUME
a. 2nd Radwaste (lb/kg) (lb/kg)
Receipt/Storage
Building
b. Total (lb/kg) (lb/kg)
3A-2

Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A– TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :
3A.1.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL DATA (CONT.)
3A.1.4 DRAWING AND DATA SUBMITTALS
The drawing and data submittals required by the specification are summarized in
Appendices 4D and 4E.
Electronic media submittals for drawings and documents are required by
Appendices 4C and 4D.
3A.1.5 THE BUYER'S OPTIONS
The Tenderer agrees to furnish the following work/services when the Buyer
issues notification to exercise all or part of these options.
Unit Price
Item No. Description Q'ty/Unit
(￦/US$)
(List Optional Items)
Extension
(￦/US$)
C. Sub-Total
3A-3

Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A– TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :
3A.2.0 EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED
3A.2.1 TECHNICAL DATA
3A.2.1.1 General
a. Ambient Temperature Limits (oF )
b. Relative Humidity Limits (%)
c. Forced Ventilation
c1. Maximum permissible ambient
temperature without forced
ventilation/cooling
c2. Manufacturer
c3. Type and Model No
c4. Maximum permissible ambient
c5. Fan Motor sizes
c6. Power Requirements (V, Ø,Hz)
d. Heat Load (Each Cabinet fully loaded)
d1. Heat dissipated per cabinet
(BTU/HR/Kilowatt)
Remote
Controller
Cabinet
Other Cabinets
3A.2.1.2 Input Power Supplies
3A.2.1.2.1 Power Supply Required
(Each Cabinet Bay, Fully Loaded)
a. Condition
Tenderer shall provide technical data required in Table 3A-1.
3A-4

SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A– TECHNICAL INFORMATION
3A.2.0 EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT.)
Name of Tenderer :
TABLE 3A-1
POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENT
Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
DCS Buyer’s Power Static Inrush Inrush Current Power
Cabinet Bay, Power Source Consumption Current (A) Current (A) Duration (sec.) Factor
Console and (VA)
EWS No. (Note 1)
Ungrounded
Power 120VAC,
60Hz, 1Ø
(Note 2)
Grounded Power
120VAC, 60Hz,
1Ø
(Note 3)
Grounded Power
120VAC, 60Hz,
1Ø for Receptacle
and Lighting
125VDC
Incoming Protection Device (Fuse and
Breaker : Rating/Interrupting rating/
Model No./Manufacturer)
* Note) 1. UPS power is limited. Tenderer to provide the best estimated power consumption to be accommodated in A/E's UPS rating
2. Normal power source.
3 Alternate (back-up) power source.
3A-5

Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A– TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :
3A.2.0 EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT.)
b. Regulation
b1. Frequency (%)
b2. Voltage (%)
c. Crest Factor
d. Type of connection/termination
Remote Controller
Cabinet
Other Cabinets
3A.2.1.2.2 Voltage Regulators
a. Manufacturer and Type
b. Number
c. Voltage (V)
d. Regulation (%)
e. Watts
f. Method of Adjustment
Remote Controller
Cabinet
Other Cabinets
3A.2.1.3 Internal Power Distribution Circuits:
a. Type of power supplies (linear/switching)
b. Internal power supply efficiency
c. Number of Circuits
d. Regulation (%)
e. Manufacturer; Model No.; type of
disconnecting switch, fuse or circuit breaker
used for each branch circuit
f. Manufacturer; Model No.; type of
disconnecting switch, fuse or circuit breaker
used for each branch circuit
Remote Controller Other Cabinets
Cabinet
3A-6

Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A– TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :
3A.2.0 EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT.)
3A.2.1.4 Terminal Blocks (for external cable)
a. Manufacturer
b. Type and model No
c. Voltage Rating (V)
d. Ampere Rating (A)
e. Maximum wire size/terminal
e1. Control Cable Size (AWG)
e2. Instrument Cable Size (AWG)
e3. Power Cable Size (AWG)
Remote Controller
Cabinet
Other Cabinets
3A.2.1.5 Cabinet Internal Wiring
a. Manufacturer
b. Type and model number (Including Color
Code)
c. Size of wire (AWG)
d. Type of insulation & jacketing
e. Voltage rating (V)
f. Terminal blocks
f1. Manufacturer
f2. Type and model No.
f3. Voltage rating (V)
f4. Ampere Rating (A)
f5. Maximum wire size/terminal (AWG)
g. Fuses/Circuit Breakers
g1. Manufacturer
g2. Type and model No.
g3. Rating (AMP. /Interrupting Rating)
Remote Controller Other Cabinets
Cabinet
3A-7

Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A– TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :
3A.2.0 EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT.)
3A.2.1.6 Internal Communication (I.C) Cables and Fiber Optic Cable with connector
a. Manufacturer
b. Type and Model Number
c. Type of Insulation & Jacketing
d. Number of Fibers per Tube
e. Fiber Type (Single or Multimode)

• Core/Clad Size
• Attenuation (dB/Km)

@ 850nm
@ 1300nm

• Bandwidth (Mhz-Km)

@ 850nm
@ 1300nm
f. Jacket Material/Color

• FO Cable Type (Loose or Tight Tube)

g. Radiation Rating (Gy)
h. Overall Diameter (inch)
i. Weight per feet (lb/ft)
j. Max. Tension (lb)
k. Sidewall Pressure (lb/ft)
l. Minimum Bend. Radius (Pulling/Training)
(inch)
m. Cable Length of Limitation to assure the
acceptable range of the signal (ft)
n. Has cable construction been qualified to
IEEE 383 vertical tray flame test? (Yes or
No)
o. Connector
o1. Manufacturer
o2. Type and Model No.
p. Transmission Loss (dB/Km)
q. Maximum data transmit rate
r. Transmission bandwidth
I.C. Cable Fiber Optic
Cable
3A-8

Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A– TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :
3A.2.0 EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT.)
3A.2.1.7 Control Cards
a. Number of different types required
b. Type of terminator
c. Type of locking (supply detail description)
d. Type of integrated circuit
e. Type of microprocessor (for each different
card)
e1. Manufacturer
e2. Model No.
e3. Size of memory
e4. Type of memory
e5. Average Access Time of the Memory
e6. Processor Speed
f. Backup Battery for RAM
f1. Manufacturer
f2. Type & Model No.
f3. Replacement Schedule
g. Life Time for Memory Device in Normal
Operation
Analog On-Off
3A.2.1.8 I/O Cards
a. Manufacturer/Model No (for each different
card)
b. Type of Terminator
c. Type of Locking
d. Type of Integrated Circuit
e. Capacity of Handling I/O Points per Cards
f. Card Load List per Cabinet Bay
Analog On-Off
3A-9

Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A– TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :
3A.2.0 EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT.)
3A.2.1.9 System Response Time (Worst Case)
a. Master Clock Speed
b. Single CCS Controller Segment: Control Command Execution
within single CCS Controller
b1. Slow Loops
b2. Fast Loops
b3. Discrete Logic Control
b4. Protective Logic
b5. Sequence of Event Alarms
c. Integrated CCS Controller Segment: Control Command Execution
between CCS Controllers
c1. Slow Loops
c2. Fast Loops
c3. Discrete Logic Control
c4. Protective Logic
c5. Sequence of Event Alarms
d. Integrated CCS Controller and Gateway Segment: Control
Command Execution between CCS Controller and Gateway
(Digital/Analog)
e. Operator-manipulated control data : Control Command
Transmission from Soft Control to control logic in CCS Controller
(Digital/Analog)
f. Dynamic Process Data Response Time: Process Acquisition Data
Transmission from Remote Control Cabinet. to Console and
update on Console (Digital/Analog)
g. Acknowledge response time for operator action: Acknowledge
Response Transmission from CCS Controller to Console
(Digital/Analog)
h. Response time for diagnostic status and alarm and non-control
information: Data Transmission for diagnostic status and alarm
from CCS Controller to Console (Digital/Analog)
i. Acquisition data from Remote Control Cabinet and the
intermediate data from Remote Control Cabinet to DCS server
(Digital/Analog)
j. Representation Response time for New Information Display on
Console (Goal/Max)
k. Representation Response time for New Soft Control Template on
Information Display (Goal/Max)
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
3A-10

Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A– TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :
3A.2.0 EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT.)
3A.2.1.10 Scanning Time (Worst Case)
a. Analog Input (mSec)
b. Contact Closure Digital Input (mSec)
c. Sequence of Event Input (mSec)
d. Digital Input Thru Data Link (mSec)
3A.2.1.11 Internal Data Communication
Controller to
Controller
Controller to
Server
Server to
Server
a. Protocol (Hardware/Software) / / /
b. Original Supplier (Hardware/ / / /
Software)
c. Qualification (Yes/No) / / /
d. Cable/Connector Type
e. Media Access Method
f. Link Capabilities
g. IP address (If required)
h. Message Format
i. Message Content

• Security Check/Type / / /
• Quality Check/Type / / /
• Definition of data structure and / / /

data bit definition
j. Rate
k. Distance Without Repeater
l. Quality Source(link,point,other)
m. Number of Nodes
n. Network Topology
o. Error Detecting and Recovery
Methodology
p. Floating Point format
q. Transmission rate(baud/speed)
r. Failover Function
s. Other Key Characteristics
3A-11

Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A– TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :
3A.2.0 EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT.)
3A.2.1.12 External Data Communication (DCS to other external system)
(Tenderer shall provide specific data communication message structure to interface
with other external system such as monitoring system)
a. Protocol (Hardware/Software) /
b. Cable/Connector Type /
c. Media Access Method
d. IP address (If required)
e. Message Structure (Definition of data structure and
data bit definition)
f. Error Detecting and Recovery Methodology
g. Floating Point format
h. Transmission rate(baud/speed)
i. Distance Without Repeater
j. Quality Source(link, point, other)
k. Number of Nodes
l. Failover Function
3A.2.1.13 Remote Control Cabinet
a. Type
b. Network Capability
c. Maximum Number of I/O Cards per Cabinet
c1. Analog I/O
c2. Contact I/O
d. Diagnostic Facilities (If yes, shall list all
Hardware and Software and explain the function)
e. Maximum Number of I/O Cards per Cabinet Bay Per Bay Total
e1. Control Cards (If required)
e2. On-Off I/O Cards
e3. Analog I/O Cards
e4. Other (Specify)
f. Number of Termination Points for external cables
g. Card Load List per Cabinet Bay
3A-12

Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A– TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :
3A.2.0 EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT.)
3A.2.1.14 Number of Control Loops Per System Cabinet Bay
a. Maximum Number of On-off Control Loops
(Input/Output and Control cards)
b. Maximum Number of Analog Control Loops
(Input/Output and Control cards)
c. Card Load List per Cabinet Bay
Per Bay Total
3A.2.1.15 Information Flat Panel Display (FPD)
a. Manufacturer
b. Model No.
c. Display Technology
d. Display Area
e. Dimension (HxWxD)
f. Pixel Pitch
g. Number of Pixels
h. Number of Color
i. Viewing Angle
j. Contrast Ratio
k. Brightness
l. Power Consumption
m. Supply Voltage
n. Module Weight
o. Backlight Unit
p. Display Response Time
q. Bezel Color
r. Screen Refresh Frequency
s. MTBF
t. Temperature
u. Humidity
v. Vibration
w. Heat Dissipated
3A-13

Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A– TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :
3A.2.0 EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT.)
3A.2.1.16 Engineering Station
a. Type/model/quantity / /
b. Manufacturer
c. Redundancy
d. System hardware
d1. Processor type/bit/speed
d2. Operating system
d3. System memory
(1) Quantity of RAM
(2) Hard disk type/q'ty/size
(3) Back-up storage type/q'ty/size
e. Optical disk drive capacity
f. Function
f1. Historical data storage and retrieval
f2. Monitor sequence of event, display trend
f3. Software On-line configuration
3A.2.1.17 Manufacturer Tests
The manufacturer shall list all tests and inspections to be performed on the DCS and
its components during manufacturing, during and after assembly and system
integration. ............................................................................................
3A.2.1.18 Operational Features
3A.2.1.18.1 Shielding & Equipment Protection
a. Is shielding required for cables supplied by KORAD for input
connections?.............................................................................
b. If shielding is required, or recommended, describe type, method,
degree and grounding methods………………………………
c. Are twisted pairs required? If required, describe type of twist
pair……………………………………………………………
d. Does the equipment include protection against voltage spikes, electrical noise,
power surges/transients or EMI/RFI?
d1. Type (describe)……………………………………………
d2. Design Features (Describe in detail in separate sheets)…..
d3. Voltage Level and Duration it is designed for……………
3A-14

Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A– TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :
3A.2.0 EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT.)
3A.2.1.18.2 Has manufacturer tested the control circuits fail safe features
specified in this specification ? .......................................................
a. If not, identify which features were not tested. ………………
b. Design Features of Fail Safe (Describe in detail in separate
sheets) …………………………………………………………
3A.2.1.18.3 Does proposed system includes a full functional test of all system components,
subassemblies, assemblies with the exception of purchaser's site input contacts?
(Purchaser's site input contacts shall be simulated for full functional test by the
Supplier.) ……….............................................................................
3A-15

Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A– TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :
3A.2.0 EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT.)
3A.2.2 CONSTRUCTION DATA
Detailed description of specification covering construction and materials used in the
equipment.
3A.2.3 SPECIAL TOOL/TEST EQUIPMENT LIST AND THEIR DATA
Tenderer shall list all special tools proposed to be supplied which are required for
adjustment, maintenance and dismantling of the equipment including cables
terminations and connectors assembly.
In addition to the list submitted as per para. 4.0 of Attachment 3-1, the Tenderer
shall submit the following technical information in its proposal for each item of the
above special tool/test equipment list.

• Item description/name
• Rating, Grade or Type
• Usage

3A-16

Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A– TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :
3A.2.0 EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT.)
3A.2.4 SPARE PART LIST AND THEIR DATA
In addition to the list submitted as per para. 5.0 of Attachment 3-1, the Tenderer
shall submit the following technical information in its proposal for each item of the
above spare part list.

• Item description/name
• Material Specification (Material, Size, Rating, Grade or Type, etc.)
• Drawing Item Number
• Part Number
• Original Mfr's Part Number
• Manufacturer's Name
• Period of Replacement
• Recommended Quantity
• Parent Item Stock Code Number
• For resilient materials, year of manufacture and the recommended shelf life
• One or more following code(s) shall be indicated in the remarks column.

Codes Description
A
Non-standard Items (Code 'A' is assigned to those parts whose failures
will cause a malfunction of adjacent components/ equipment and itself,
and cause significant affects to the related components/equipment.)
3A-17

Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A– TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :
3A.2.0 EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT.)
B
Standard Items (Code 'B' is assigned to off-the-shelf items, other than
the non-standard items above, which are available for general
industry application from manufacturers, or suppliers based solely on
the manufacturer's catalog description and data. When failures occur
in these components/equipment, they should be replaced with new
off-the-shelf items purchased.)
C Environmental Qualification required
D UL Listed Item
3A-18

Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A– TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :
3A.2.0 EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT.)
3A.2.5 ADDITIONAL PROPOSAL DATA
Tenderer shall submit the following data with each copy of ARE THESE DATA
his proposal: INCLUDED?
YES/NO
A. Detailed Specifications covering construction and
materials used in the equipment …………………
B. Drawings showing general arrangement and principal
dimensions of equipment …………………………..
C. Description of any variance between this specification
and any code requirements …………………………
D. Detailed data covering the performance of the proposed
equipment for the design and operating conditions
specified ……………………………………………
E. Qualification Experience data and associated documents
of equipment/component seismic qualification and
environmental qualification …………………………..
F. Experience List of completed projects including
description of each, and an assessment of how past
experience will be factored into the proposed system
design …………………………………………………
G. Description of the Process Control & Monitoring
System design and implementation features
incorporated in defense against common mode failure
of hardware/software, and how the single failure criteria
have been met for the subsystem …………………….
H. Describe in detail the diagnostic features to check the
integrity of the system hardware/software …………..
I. Describe the outline of the training program of on-site
and off-site …………………………………………..
J. Any additional technical information necessary to
clearly describe the equipment
………………………………
K. List of the certificate and copy of each certificate
according to applicable codes & standards (KEPIC /
ASME / ISO, etc.) ……………………………………
3A-19

Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A– TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :
3A.2.0 EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT.)
L. Equipment Availability : Tenderer shall provide the following availability
information specific to the proposed equipment and the specific service
1. Availability data for proposed design:
a. Availability of the equipment …………………
b. The Mean Time Between Failures(MTBF) and
Mean Time to Repair (MTTR) Availability equals
MTBF/(MTBF+MTTR) ……………………….
c. The source of the availability information. This
may consist of Availability Council
(GADS/NERC), specific utility inquiries
(enumerate), or in-house tests. Include extent of
data input and time span covered. If equipment
availability data is based on Tenderer's own data
base, and such equipment data is different from
that published GADS/NERC, Tender shall
explain why. ……………………………………
2. Availability Trends
a. Historical availability values, preferably on an
annual basis, specific to each piece of equipment,
Sources for the information shall be provided. ….
b. Summarize reasons for variances in availability
values, such as equipment redesign, improved
operating and maintenance procedures, expanded
spare parts inventory, etc. ………………………...
3. Availability Options
a. Equipment options to the purchaser that may
enhance availability. These options may include
monitoring devices, installed spares, specific
component spares inventory, etc. ………………..
b. The Corresponding impact on MTBF and/or
MTTR for each option and the associated costs. ..
c. Documented examples of option applications. ….
3A-20

Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A– TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :
3A.2.0 EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT.)
M. Integrated Circuit(IC) Component List of all Modules
including Component Grades which are indicated by
Commercial / Industrial / Military Grade. …………………
N. Certificate for Integrated Circuit(IC) Qualification Test …..
O. Other electrical and electronic component List including the
Quality and Accuracy Grade ……………………………….
P. Quality Assurance Manual …………………………………
3A-21

Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A– TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :
3A.2.0 EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT.)
3A.2.6 LISTS OF SUPPLIED ITEMS
Tenderer shall provide a list of the items supplied to the customer during past
ten(10) years as follows.
No. Item Supplied Customer Technical Project * Note 1 Remarks
Description Date Specification Name
Note 1: Indicate whether or not a Certificate of Actual Supply was issued by
customer by the marking (Yes or No).
3A.2.7 USER'S CERTIFICATE OF ACTUAL SUPPLY
o The Tenderer shall submit the Certificate of Actual Supply by preparing
the following sample form.
o The Certificate shall be certificated by the User's Site/Plant Manager or
Quality Assurance Manager.
3A-22

Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A– TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :
SAMPLE FORM
OF
USER'S CERTIFICATE OF ACTUAL SUPPLY
TO : (Tenderer's Name)
I hereby certify that all the matter recorded in this certificate are true and authentic.
o Name of Company
o Address of Operating Site/Plant
o Period of Operation
o Mean Time Between Failure(MTBF), and Mean Time To Repairing(MTTR) the
Defects caused
o General Option
Signature / Title
3A-23

Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A– TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :
3A.2.0 EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT.)
3A.2.8 ADDENDA
Tenderer represents that this proposal includes provisions for following Addenda
Authorized Signature
or Seal :
Print Name :
Print Title :
Date of Submission :
3A.2.9 UNIT PRICES FOR ADDITION/DEDUCTION
Tenderer agrees to make changes as may be authorized by the Buyer. The
following unit prices cover all required equipment and shall apply to the net
amount of work that may be added to or deducted from that indicated in
Contract Documents/ Specification. The unit prices shall include as applicable,
all necessary hardware, firmware and software, engineering, installation, wiring,
inspection and retesting, drawings and documentation revision as necessary, to
fully document the change.
3A-24

SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A– TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :
3A.2.0 EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT.)
Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
3A.2.9 UNIT PRICE FOR ADDITION/DEDUCTION
PERIOD 0 PERIOD 1 PERIOD 2
MILESTONE AFTER AWARD FROM ENGINEERING AFTER SHIPMENT
TO ENGINEERING RELEASE RELEASE TO SHIPMENT (NOTE 1)
COMPONENT
ADDITION(￦/US$) DELETION(￦/US$) ADDITION(￦/US$) DELETION(￦/US$) ADDITION(￦/US$) DELETION(￦/US$)
DESCRIPTION
1. PROCESS CONTROL & MONITORING
SYSTEM CABINET (BAY) WITH ALL
NECESSARY HARDWARE AND
FIRMWARE (WITHOUT FUNCTIONAL
CONTROL CARDS OR I/O CARDS)
2. REMOTE CONTROL CABINET(BAY)
WITH ALL NECESSARY HARDWARE
AND FIRMWARE (WITHOUT I/O
CARDS)
3. QUADRUPLEX FIBER OPTIC CABLE
PER DRUM (1,000 METER PER DRUM)
4. CONNECTOR FOR FIBER OPTIC
CABLE
5. ONE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (THE
SUPPLIER SHALL SEPARATELY LIST
FOR ALL TYPES OF CARDS)
3A-25

SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A– TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :
3A.2.0 EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT.)
Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
3A.2.9 UNIT PRICE FOR ADDITION/DEDUCTION
PERIOD 0 PERIOD 1 PERIOD 2
MILESTONE AFTER AWARD FROM ENGINEERING AFTER SHIPMENT
TO ENGINEERING RELEASE RELEASE TO SHIPMENT (NOTE 1)
COMPONENT ADDITION(￦/
DESCRIPTION DELETION(￦/US$) ADDITION(￦/US$) DELETION(￦/US$) ADDITION(￦/US$) DELETION(￦/US$)
US$)
6. PROGRAM CHANGE PER EPROM
WITHOUT A HARDWARE CHANGE
(INDIVIDUAL LOOP SCHEMATIC
DIAGRAM ONLY FOR ON/OFF AND
ANALOG).
7. PROGRAM CHANGE AT SITE PER EPROM
WITHOUT A HARDWARE CHANGE
(PROGRAMMING BY KORAD, OR ITS
DESIGNEE) DUE TO THE FAULT OF THE
SUPPLIER (INDIVIDUAL LOOP
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ONLY FOR
ON/OFF AND ANALOG).
3A-26

SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A– TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer :
3A.2.0 EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED(CONT.)
Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
3A.2.9 UNIT PRICE FOR ADDITION/DEDUCTION
PERIOD 0 PERIOD 1 PERIOD 2
MILESTONE AFTER AWARD FROM ENGINEERING AFTER SHIPMENT
TO ENGINEERING RELEASE RELEASE TO SHIPMENT (NOTE 1)
COMPONENT
DESCRIPTION ADDITION(￦/US$) DELETION(￦/US$) ADDITION(￦/US$) DELETION(￦/US$) ADDITION(￦/US$) DELETION(￦/US$)
8. PROGRAM CHANGE PER EPROM
WITHOUT A HARDWARE CHANGE
(INDIVIDUAL LOOP SCHEMATIC
DIAGRAM ONLY FOR ON/OFF AND
ANALOG).
9. PROGRAM CHANGE AT SITE PER
EPROM WITHOUT A HARDWARE
CHANGE (PROGRAMMING BY
KORAD, OR ITS DESIGNEE) DUE TO
THE FAULT OF THE SUPPLIER
(INDIVIDUAL LOOP SCHEMATIC
DIAGRAM ONLY FOR ON/OFF AND
ANALOG).
NOTES 1. This price is for providing the engineering, equipment, inspection, testing and packing of the site modification FCA port of export.
Site installation will be done by KORAD. If site supervisory services are required, they will be requested in accordance with the
Paragraph 3.6 of Section 3.
2. The price for addition shall be the same for the deletion price for period 0.
Authorized Signature or Seal :
3A-27
Print Name :

Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART A– TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer : .
3A.2.0 EVALUATION DATA REQUIRED (CONT.)
3A.2.10 GUARANTEED DATA FOR PLANT OPERATION & MAINTENANCE
Qualified Life Period of
Item / Part Manufacturer Model No. Time (Year) Replacement Remarks
(Year)
3A–28 (Final)

Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART B– COMMERCIAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer : .
3B.1.0 TENDER PRICE
3B.1.1 The tender price is specified in Attachment 3-1, Pricing and Schedule Data.
3B.1.2 The tender price is for all the Goods and Services which shall be supplied under the
Contract.
3B.1.3 The tender price shall be fixed and firm, not subject to price adjustment for the entire
duration of contract. However, it is understood that the rates and expense for technical
supervisory services as quoted shall be also firm, and total price therefor will be fixed
on the basis of man.days actually performed until the expiration of the duration of
contract.
3B.2.0 DELIVERY SCHEDULE
Delivery schedule is specified in Attachment 3-1, Pricing and Schedule Data.
3B–1

Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART B– COMMERCIAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer : .
3B.3.0 PAYMENT METHOD
3B.3.1 Payment for on-shore portion shall be made through the remittance to the Supplier's
bank account(Bank account No. shall be presented to Buyer at the time of the demand
for payment).
Payment for foreign Tenderer's on-shore portion shall be made directly to the
Subsupplier upon Supplier's request for payment. If applicable, the Tenderer shall state
the Subsupplier's name and address with the relevant items below(Bank account No.
shall be presented to Buyer at the time of the demand for payment).
Items Company Name and Address
3B.3.2 Payment for off-shore portion shall be made through the medium of an unconfirmed
irrevocable letter of credit or by telegraphic transfer(T/T) to the Supplier's bank.
The Tenderer shall state his preference (L/C or T/T).
If the answer is "L/C", the Tenderer shall state the beneficiary's name and address on
L/C below.
If the answer is "T/T", the Tenderer shall state the Supplier's bank account below.
Payment in U.S. dollars for domestic Tenderer's off-shore portion shall be made
through the transfer to the Supplier's Resident's Account opened with a foreign
exchange bank(Resident's Account No. shall be presented to Buyer at the time of the
demand for payment).
3B–2

Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART B– COMMERCIAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer : .
3B.4.0 POINT(S) OF ORIGIN
The Point(s) of Origin and the manufacture(s) for the Goods are indicated below with
the applicable items.
Item Point of Origin (City/State/Country) Manufacture
(Major Items & No.)
3B.5.0 PORT OF EXPORT
For off-shore portion, the Tenderer shall indicate Port of Export where the Goods are
shipped with the applicable items.
Item Port of Export (City/State/Country)
3B.6.0 PROPOSAL VALIDITY
The Tenderer hereby agrees that this tender is firm for acceptance without any
condition within eight ⑻ months from the stated tender due date.
(Yes / No)
3B.7.0 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
The Tenderer shall designate below a representative who is authorized to make
binding and enforceable decisions and assume financial responsibility on behalf of the
Tenderer in all matters relating to clarification of the tender and the administration and
performance of the resultant Contract.
Title :
Name :
Tel No. :
Fax No. : _______________________
3B–3

Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SECTION 3 - MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AND PRICING DATA
PART B– COMMERCIAL INFORMATION
Name of Tenderer : .
3B.8.0 TENDERER'S DEFINITE STATEMENT
The undersigned hereby declares, as Tenderer, that the only persons or parties
interested in this Tender as principals are those named herein, that this is made without
connection to any other person or party for the same purpose, that this is in all respects
fair and without collusion or fraud, and that the Tenderer agrees that as submitted
based on the requirements, if it will be accepted, the Tenderer shall promptly execute
and return to Buyer the acceptance copy of the Contract issued by Buyer in accordance
with the tender, the contractual terms and conditions in ITT, and other documents
agreed to between Buyer and Tenderer, that the Tenderer will perform and complete
the Work within the time limit specified therein, and that Tenderer will accept in full
payment therefor, the prices quoted above.
Authorized Signature :
(or Seal)
Print Name :
Print Title :
Tenderer :
Date of Submission :
Note: The Tenderer shall attach the Certificate of Seal Impression for the Registered Seal or the
notarized Power(s) of Attorney for the signer. In case of a partnership or joint venture, full
names of partners or joint ventures shall be given herein.
3B–4(Final)

PRICE TENDER
ITT No.
Tendering Date
Goods
Tender Price On-shore
(DDP/ Portion
2nd Radwaste
Receipt/Storage
Building, Off-shore
Loaded) Portion
Say Won only
(￦ )
※ Including V.A.T.
Say U.S. dollars only
(US$ )
※ Including V.A.T.
We submit this tender in strict compliance with the provisions in Buyer's
Invitation to Tender(ITT), and hereby promise definitely that if this tender is accepted
by Buyer, we will supply the Goods and/or Services at the above Tender Price within
the time limit therefor in accordance with the terms and conditions in the resultant
Contract.
Date :
Authorized Signature :
or Seal
Print Name :
Print Title :
Tenderer :
Address :
Note: If the affixed signature or seal is not identical to the presented, the tender
will become nullified.
KOREA RADIOACTIVE WASTE AGENCY
PT-1

ATTACHMENT 3-1
PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
Name of Tenderer :________________
PRICING DATA SUMMARY
No. Description On-shore(￦) Off-shore(US$)
1 Equipment & Material
_________________ _________________
2 Special Tools _________________ _________________
3 Spare Parts _________________ _________________
4 Sub-Total (Sum of Items 1) _________________ _________________
(Jobsite Loaded Price) (FCA Price)
5 All Charges for Off-shore Portion;

• Overseas and inland freight, insurance

premium, customs duties and other
charges from FCA to Jobsite Loaded
N/A _________________
6 Total _________________ _________________
(Sum of Items 2 and 3) (Jobsite Loaded Price) (Jobsite Loaded Price)
7 Technical Supervisory Service _________________ _________________
[By Domestic [By Foreign
(sub)Supplier)] (sub)Supplier]
8 Total (Sum of Items 4 and 5) _________________ _________________
9 Value-Added Tax _________________ _________________
3-1-1

ATTACHMENT 3-1
PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
Name of Tenderer :________________
PRICING DATA SUMMARY(CONT.)
No. Description On-shore(￦) Off-shore(US$)
10 Grand Total
￦________________ US$_______________
(Sum of Items 6 and 7)

• On-shore : Say Korea Won only
• Off -shore : Say U.S. Dollars only

Authorized Signature or
Seal : _________________
Print Name : _________________
Print Title : _________________
Tenderer : _________________
Date of Submission : _________________
3-1-2

ATTACHMENT 3-1
PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
Unit Price Extension Required Site
Item No. Description Quantity
(￦/ US$) (￦/US$) Delivery Date
1.0 Equipment and Materials
1.01 Remote System Cabinet
1.01.a 0-771-J-RX01 1 Lot ________ ________ ________
1.02 Quadruplex Fiber Optic Cables with Connector
1.02.a Quadruplex Fiber Optic Cables
(1,350 Meters per Drum) 1 Lot ________ ________ ________
1.02.b Connectors 1 Lot ________ ________ ________
1.03 Engineering Station
0-771-J-CA03 ________
1 Lot _______ _______
1.04 Other Components or Equipment
Necessary to Complete and Integrate the
System
(Tenderer to List) 1 Lot _______ _______ ________
1.05 Sub-Total (Sum of Item 1.1 through 1.04),

• On-shore, Jobsite Loaded ￦_______
• Off-shore, FCA US$________

_
1.06 All Charges for Off-shore Portion

• Overseas and inland freight, insurance

premium, customs duties and other
charges from FCA to Jobsite Loaded US$______
_
3-1-3

Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
ATTACHMENT 3-1
PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
Name of Tenderer :____________
2.0 SPECIAL TOOLS
Below is a list of special tools being supplied which are required for installation(mark *), adjustment,
calibration, maintenance and dismantling of the equipment. The items which are specified in Section
4, Technical Specifications, if any, shall be included in the list. If no items are required, "N/A" shall
be indicated below.
Recom. Unit Price Extension Site Delivery
No. Item
Q'ty/Unit (￦/US$) (￦/US$) Date
Description
Material Specification (Rating, Grade,
Type, etc.)
Part No. / Orig. Mfr's Part No.
Mfr's Name
A. Sub-Total of Special Tools

• On-shore, Jobsite Loaded ￦_________________
• Off-shore, FCA US$_______________

B. All charges for Off-shore portion:

• Overseas and inland freight, insurance premium, customs

US$_______________
duties and other charges from FCA to Jobsite Loaded
C. Total of Special Tools(Sum of Items A and B), Excluding V.A.T

• On-shore, Jobsite Loaded ￦_________________
• Off-shore, Jobsite Loaded US$_______________

3-1-4

Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
ATTACHMENT 3-1
PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
Name of Tenderer : _____________
3.0 SPARE PARTS
Below is a list of spare parts including consumable parts being supplied which are required for
installation(mark *), start-up(mark **) and two(2) years operation(mark ***). The items which are
specified in Section 4, Technical Specifications, if any, shall be included in the list. If no items are
required, "N/A" shall be indicated below.
Recom.
No. Item
Q'ty/Unit
Unit Price
(￦/US$)
Extension Site Delivery
(￦/US$) Date

• Description
• Material Specification

(Material, Size, Rating,
Grade or Type, etc.)

• Part No./Orig. Mfr's Part

No.

• Mfr's Name
• Period of Replacement
• Code Noogetc

A. Sub-Total of Spare Parts

• On-shore, Jobsite Loaded ￦___________________
• Off-shore, FCA US$_________________

B. All charges for Off-shore portion:

• Overseas and inland freight, insurance premium, customs

duties and other charges from FCA to Jobsite Loaded
US$_________________
C. Total of Special Tools(Sum of Items A and B),
Excluding V.A.T

• On-shore, Jobsite Loaded ￦___________________
• Off-shore, Jobsite Loaded US$_________________

3-1-5

Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
ATTACHMENT 3-1
PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
Name of Tenderer : ______________
4.0 DELIVERY
4.1 Delivery Required
In case of delivery to FCA port of export, schedule date is two(2) months before site delivery date.
A Can Tenderer meet the delivery
set forth in Item 1.0 through 5.0?…………….…_________________________
B If the answer to Item 6.1, A is "No",
Tenderer shall give schedule of
earliest dates possible ...….......……………….……_________________________
C Shipping shall not be made earlier than one (1) month prior to the delivery date
set forth in item 1.0 through 5.0 without written approval of the Buyer.
4.2 Document Submittal Schedule
A Can the Tenderer meet the document submittal
schedule given in Appendix 4D? (Yes or No)
(If the answer to this question is "No", Tenderer
shall list the earliest possible submittal dates in
the appropriate column in Appendix 4D)
..................................................................................._________________________
B Will the document submittal schedule in Appendix 4D
and the review period specified in Appendix 4C
permit the Tenderer to commence fabrication in
sufficient time to meet the delivery date(s) given in
Item 1.0 through 5.0? (Yes or No)
(If the answer to this question is "No", Tenderer
shall list the required submittal dates in Appendix 4D
and/or indicate which documents will require
expedited review.) ............................................................._________________________
Authorized Signature
or Seal : ___________________
Date of Submission : ___________________
3-1-6

ATTACHMENT 3-1
PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
Name of Tenderer : ____________
5.0 OFF-SITE (SUPPLIER'S FACTORY) TRAINING SERVICES
Tenderer shall furnish the following information related to off-site (Supplier's Factory) training
services for operating and maintenance personal designated by in accordance with
Para.4.01.B.36 in Section 4, Technical Specification.
A. The required period for training 12 Wks
B. Training Fee for four (4) personnel per week US$ ________
C. Total US$ ________
Note : 1. Training Fee shall cover tuition fee, cost of supporting materials for training.
Trainee's travel expense and living allowance, etc. will be borne by Buyer.
2. The subject, methods, program and schedule of training shall be attached.
3. If the required period for training (Item A) is not acceptable to Tenderer, please
specify the recommended period for training. ________ Wks
3-1-7

ATTACHMENT 3-1
PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
Name of Tenderer : ____________
6.0 ON-SITE (JOBSITE) TRAINING SERVICES
The Tenderer shall furnish the following information related to on-site training
services for Tenderer's competent representative (s) for operating maintenance
for which services are required at job-site in accordance with Para.4.01.B.36
in Section 4, Technical Specification.
A. The required period for training Wks
B. Number of Instructor ________
C. Fee for one (1) Instructor per week US$ ________
D. Sojourn rate per week, excluding lodging
and local transportation US$ ________
E. Travel expense for round trip (4 days),
excluding air fare. US$ ________
F. Provisional Sum US$ ________
Note : 1. Instructor fee shall cover all charges and costs to be expected to incur in
incur in connection with training including cost of supporting materials for training.
2. Local transportation and lodging will be provided by Buyer without charge to the
Supplier.
3. Actual and economy class air transportation cost will be reimbursed for a round
trip to and from Supplier's country to Korea.
4. The subject, methods, program and schedule of training shall be attached.
3-1-8

ATTACHMENT 3-1
PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
Name of Tenderer :__________
7.0 TECHNICAL SUPERVISORY SERVICES
The Tenderer shall furnish the following information related to the technical supervisory
services which are required for the Equipment at the Site per Section 2, Special Terms and
Conditions, and Section 4, Technical Specifications.
7.1 Number of working days and Supervisory/Technicians

• Supervisory : [ ] persons X [ ] days = [ ] man-days
• Technician : [ ] persons X [ ] days = [ ] man-days

Note : 1. The above working days shall be expected requirements based upon
Tenderer's experience.
2. The actual working days shall be determined when the Buyer requests
such services.
7.2 Rate and Expense (for a person)
Supervisory Technician
A. Basic rate per day for a normal ￦/US$_________ ￦/US$____
working day _____
B. Hourly rate for overtime (including ￦/US$_________ ￦/US$____
Sunday and Holidays) _____
C. Sojourn rate per day, excluding lodging ￦/US$_________ ￦/US$____
and local transportation _____
D. Travel expense for round trip

• Domestic person : 2days / trip ￦/US$_________ ￦/US$____

_____

• Foreign person : 4days / trip ￦/US$_________ ￦/US$____

_____
E. Economic round trip air fare ￦/US$_________ ￦/US$____
_____
Note : The ceiling of the air fare unit price shall be presented here.
7.3 Estimated Amount of Technical Supervisory Services
A. Total, excluding V.A.T

• Portion by Supervisor ￦______________

US$____________

• Portion by Technician ￦______________

US$____________
Note : A detailed calculation sheet shall be attached hereto.
Authorized Signature or Seal : ________________
Date of Submission : ________________
3-1-9

ATTACHMENT 3-1
PRICING AND SCHEDULE DATA
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
Name of Tenderer : ___________
7.0 TECHNICAL SUPERVISORY SERVICES (CONT.)
7.4 Detailed Calculation Sheet
Grade Supervisor
Man-Days
Rate
Services (￦/US$)
Fee Expansion
(￦/US$)
Rate
Sojourn
(￦/US$)
Allow-
Expansion
ance
(￦/US$)
Travel Expanses of
Round Trip (￦/US$)
Air Fares of Round
Trip (￦/US$)
Total (￦/US$)
Technician
Total
3-1-10(Final)

Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
ATTACHMENT 3 –2
EXCEPTIONS
Name of Tenderer:____________
1.0 Tenderer hereby certifies that it agrees to all provisions of the contractual terms and
conditions and the Specifications documents, unless exceptions are specifically and clearly
listed hereafter.
A. Tenderer's printed terms and conditions are not considered specific exceptions to Terms
and Conditions of the ITT and the exceptions to Tendering Instructions and Terms and
Conditions of the ITT will not be accepted, in principle.
B. If no exceptions are taken by Tenderer, “No Exceptions” shall be indicated below.
Authorized Signature :
or Seal
Print Name :
Print Title :
Date of Submission :
3-2-1(Final)

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BUILDING
SECTION 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Title : PROCESS CONTROL & MONITORING SYSTEM
Spec. No. : 0-7 1-J212
● Safety Category : Non-Safety-Related ● Quality Clas : AQ/NQ
● Safety Clas : I /I I
KEPCO E&C JOB No. : 1 G79
ISSUE STATUS
0 10/02/25 Is ue for ITB
REV NO. DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
Preparer : 박종선, Tel : 054-421-6565

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
4.01 SCOPE ............................................................................................. 4-4
4.02 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS......................................... 4-12
4.03 QUALITY STANDARDS ................................................................ 4-13
4.04 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................. 4-19
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS ................................................................... 4-26
4.06 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION .............................................. 4-94
4.07 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL REQUIREMENTS ........... 4-122
4.08 SURFACE PREPARATION AND COATING ................................ 4-123
4.09 NAMEPLATES .............................................................................. 4-125
4.10 INSPECTION AND TESTING ....................................................... 4-126
4.11 SHIPPING REQUIREMENTS ........................................................ 4-134
4.12 INSTRUCTION MANUALS .......................................................... 4-135
4-1

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)
SECTION TITLE PAGE
ATTACHMENT
4-1 WITNESS POINT ............................................................................................. 4-1-1
4-2 HOLD POINT ................................................................................................... 4-2-1
4-3 SYSTEM GENERAL CONFIGURATION ......................................................... 4-3-1
4-4 CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM LIST ............................................................... 4-4-1
4-5 CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAM LIST .................................. 4-5-1
4-6 ANALOG LOOP SUMMARY LIST FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ................. 4-6-1
4-7 TYPICAL ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM LIST ............................. 4-7-1
4-8 BUILDING STRUCTURE MOUNTING DESIGN AND
LOAD SUMMARY FORM ............................................................................... 4-8-1
4-9 SUPPLIER’S EQUIPMENT (CABINETS & CARDS) LIST ............................. 4-9-1
4-10 FORM PARENT COMPONENT DESIGN FUNCTIONS AND
CLASSIFICATION EVALUATION SHEET ...................................................... 4-10-1
4-2

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)
SECTION TITLE PAGE
APPENDICES
4A1 QUALITY ASSURANCE MANUAL REQUIREMENTS ...................................... 4A1-1
4B QUALITY SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS .................................................. 4B-1
4C GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMITTAL OF DOCUMENTS ................. 4C-1
4D DRAWING AND DATA SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS .................................. 4D-1
4E QUALITY VERIFICATION DOCUMENTATION LIST ..................................... 4E-1
4H DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS OF SUPPLIER
DEVIATIONS AND NON-CONFORMANCES ...................................................4H-1
4P STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL APPARATUS ..................... 4P-1
4S GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROL .......... 4S-1
4T REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTRUMENT TAGGING ............................................. 4T-1
4U REQUIREMENTS FOR PANEL LABELS .......................................................... 4U-1
4W WELD END DETAILS .................................................................................4W-1
4 X REQUIREMENTS FOR PART CLASSIFICATION .............................................4X-1
4-3

4.01 SCOPE
SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
A. PROCESS CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEM (PCMS) OVERVIEW
1. PCMS features an advanced control room and distributed digital control systems. The
PCMS consists of the following major I&C systems:
a. Distributed Control System (DCS): This supports operator interface (MMI) functions
for all facility systems including monitoring and control systems. DCS supports
control functions (Component Control System, CCS) and data processing functions.
DCS drives a large display panel (LDP), and information FPD in the consoles in the
main control room. DCS also drives other information FPD displays in various
locations of inside and outside of the facility including other areas, and offices. All
process control and monitoring systems are interfaced to DCS to allow an integrated
and unified operator interface at the DCS workstations.
b. Man-Machine Interface (MMI): The Soft Control as Control MMI shall allow control
of continuous and discrete control components. MCR operator consoles shall provide
devices for access to all information and controls associated with facility operation.
The Soft Control for components shall be provided on MCR operator consoles as
control MMI for components. The Soft Control allows manual control of continuous
and discrete control components from a single control device. The Soft Control also
provides continuous parameters being controlled as well as in some cases parameters
of components associated with component selected for control. The control switches
and M/A stations are provided on the Soft Controls template, which are implemented
via MMI software to emulate the various switches and analog control devices that
populate conventional facility control panels. MMI should be integrated with LILW
phase 1 which has been operated.
2. PCMS overview and configuration is shown on Attachment 4-3, Figure 1.
The main operating area of MCR contains two (2) operator consoles, and one Large
Display Panel (LDP) of LILW Phase 1 that has been already operated.
3. Main control room utilizes compact consoles and a large display panel (LDP) as the main
means of operation during normal and accident situations. The DCS workstations, which
are equipment, support CCS soft control function to enable operators to actuate and
control components and processes.
4-4

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.01 SCOPE (CONT.)
B. WORK INCLUDED
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
1. The Supplier shall design, furnish materials, fabricate, test, software V&V, document,
export-package, deliver PCMS which shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the
items listed in Attachment 3-1, Pricing and Schedule Data in accordance with this
specification for the following systems. The Supplier shall integrate 2nd Radwaste
Receipt/Storage Building PCMS with existing #1 LILW PCMS so that the operators in
the main control room in LILW Phase 1 are able to operate the systems of 2nd Radwaste
Receipt/Storage Building. The Supplier shall provide hardware and software required to
integrate 2nd Radwaste Receipt/Storage Building PCMS with #1 LILW PCMS.
a. DCS enclosed with all necessary facilities and functions for the following Monitoring
and Control Functions:
◦ Operator Interface (MMI) Functions utilized existing console displays and LDP in
MCR
◦ Information (Data) Processing Functions including Signal Validation, Tag
Processing and Alarm Processing
◦ Component Control Functions for systems
◦ Software development to extend PCMS for Phase 1 disposal facility
◦ MMI Function for diagnostic, testing and performance verification of DCS
a1. Remote System (RX) cabinet containing microprocessor based on-off and analog
input/output circuits for data acquisition, data communication devices, power
supply, terminal blocks for the Buyer's site wiring connections and other
components necessary to meet the requirements of the specification. The
remote cabinet required for this specification is listed below:
◦ One (1) (Quality Class AQ) PCMS Remote System Cabinet in Crane Control
Room in 2nd Radwaste Receipt/Storage Building El. 150 ft: 0-771-J-RX01
a2. One (1) Engineering Station as described below:
◦ Engineering Station in Computer Room in #1 LILW Service Building EL. 119
ft: 0-771-J-CA03
2. Supplier shall furnish and install in/on the above cabinets the instruments, controls and
electrical devices specified as being furnished by the Supplier and listed in the
specification and drawings and/or Instrument Data Lists.
3. Supplier shall install in/on the above cabinets the Buyer or others supplied instruments,
controls and electrical devices as listed in the specification or drawings.
4-5

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.01 SCOPE (CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
4. Supplier shall complete shop-assembled cabinets, containing required instruments,
switches, and insert type subpanels, as well as interconnecting wiring and accessories,
such as cable trays, wireways, busways, conduit, breakers, fuses, resistors and cable
supports.
However, Supplier shall install the components which will be supplied by the Buyer in/on
the cabinets at the site. The detailed delivery date for the Buyer supplied components will
be informed after the contract award. The Supplier shall submit quality plan and work
procedure to the Buyer for the site installation work.
5. Supplier shall be responsible for the proper shop installation of wiring for all cabinets
devices, whether furnished by Supplier or by the Buyer excluding those devices specified
to be wired in the field by the Buyer.
However, the design of wire ways and terminal boards shall include sufficient capacity to
incorporate the Buyer's equipment to be connected in the field.
6. Supplier shall be responsible for developing cabinets internal wiring diagrams for shop
installed wiring between devices and between devices and terminal blocks.
7. Supplier shall be responsible for developing consoles, panels and cabinets internal cable
and wire layout drawings showing routing, wire way, wire entrance, opening, for shop
and field installed wiring between devices and terminal blocks and between devices and
cable entry points.
8. After the equipment is received by the Supplier at the site, the Supplier shall submit a
deviation report to the Buyer for all equipment (regardless of scope of supply) for any
overage, shortage, damage and late delivery.
9. Supplier shall separately tag all identifiable devices.
10. Supplier shall furnish all necessary appurtenances and accessories required for
interconnection of components and to ensure functionality of the consoles, panels and
cabinets as designed even if they are not specifically stated or specified in this purchase
requirements.
11. Supplier shall be responsible for all instruments and control devices obtained from the
Buyer’s site warehouse, which are supplied by the Buyer or others, for mounting or
installation on the cabinets at the supplier’s site fabrication shop. Any work associated
with clearing the Non-Supplier supplied equipment or devices through the custom will be
performed by the Buyer.
12. When requested by the Buyer, the Supplier shall furnish the services of competent
technical advisor(s) who shall provide technical advice, guidance and assistance in the
erection and testing of the equipment furnished under this Specification, as required for
the placement of the equipment in successful operation by facility personnel.
4-6

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.01 SCOPE (CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
13. Fiber optic cables with connector sets for data communications within PCMS and
between PCMS and other system provided by other supplier.
14. Supplier shall implement software and hardware design to achieve the functions
according to the CLD and FLD provided as the Engineering Release (ER). It is Supplier’s
responsibility to meet the specification requirement and the Supplier shall take immediate
action to remediate the problems caused by the deviation from the function required by
CLD and FLD at its own cost without the impact on the site construction schedule even
though the Supplier design is approved as Status 1. Buyer’s role in this aspect will be
limited to the design review of inputs/outputs, card assignment, and other A/E related
interface. In this regard the Supplier shall issue the design certificate that its product is
designed as the drawings issued by the Buyer as ER including consequential design
changes.
15. The Supplier shall provide gateways between systems supplied by the Supplier and 3rd
party Radiation Monitoring System (RMS) that are connected to the Supplier’s systems
through an Ethernet.
16. The Supplier shall integrate all other systems that have interfaces with the systems
supplied by the Supplier and furnish all necessary appurtenances and accessories required
for the intended application of this specification, whether or not such appurtenances and
accessories are detailed herein.
17. The Supplier shall be responsible for the coordination with 3rd party monitoring systems
suppliers, architect engineers, and others to integrate the systems supplied by the Supplier
and by others and guarantee the function of systems supplier by the Supplier, when
necessary, except the part responsible by other package suppliers.
18. The Supplier shall be responsible for the data communication performance testing among
systems supplied by the Supplier as well as among systems supplied by others and have
interfaces with Supplier supplied systems to guarantee the function of systems supplier by
the Supplier, when necessary, except the part responsible by other package suppliers.
19. The Supplier shall be responsible for coordination with others to implement the fault
tolerance requirements specified in Paragraph 4.05.A.3.b. The system supplied by the
Supplier shall detect and handle appropriately with the failures in the external systems
supplied by the others. The system supplied by the Supplier shall support, when required,
other external systems to detect and handle appropriately with the failures in the systems
supplied by the Supplier.
20. The Supplier shall provide platform hardware, software and necessary supports to allow
third parties to design, develop, and supply the application programs to be integrated in
DCS supplied by the Supplier. The Supplier shall integrate the application program
supplied by third party in the DCS and furnish all necessary appurtenances and
accessories required for the intended application of this specification, whether or not such
4-7

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.01 SCOPE (CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
appurtenances and accessories are detailed herein.
21. The Supplier shall furnish one lot of all special tools, test and maintenance equipment
such as card extender, card component troubleshooting tester etc., per unit which may be
required for adjustment, calibration, dismantling, testing and maintenance of the
equipment. The test/maintenance equipment shall be designed as a trouble shooting,
modification, diagnostic and support tool for the Supplier's system. The test equipment
shall be able to simulate the site inputs (contacts or analog signals) of any interfacing
equipment.
Tools and test equipment shall be new and of the first-class quality. Supplier shall furnish
on-site programming and debugging facilities, including all necessary software for
diagnostics and debugging for control circuits.
Tools and test equipment shall be shipped in a separate suitable container clearly marked
with the name of the equipment in accordance with the requirements in section 2.
Associated with the fiber optic cable, Supplier shall provide hexa driver.
22. The Supplier shall provide one lot of engineering facilities including the following:
◦ Engineering stations with associated software, procedures, and manuals
◦ Source code data and source program listing
◦ Programming/debugging tools including the following:

• Display object and page editor
• Data processing logic object and page editor
• Procedure object and page editor
• Control logic object and page editor

◦ Software qualification systems/tools including configuration management/control
system and verification and validation systems, etc, per unit to support facility life cycle
maintenance of PCMS software.
23. The engineering facilities supplied shall support Buyer’s engineers or third parties to add
or modify display pages, data processing logic, control logic, application programs and
new external systems.
24. The Supplier shall provide one lot of spare parts required for installation, start-up and 2
years of normal operation. All requirements regarding quality control and documentation
that apply to the original parts of the specified equipment shall apply equally to the spare
parts of the specified equipment.
25. The Supplier shall furnish two (2) year supply of consumables.
4-8

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Add. 1
4.01 SCOPE (CONT.)
26. The Supplier shall provide all internal wiring including power supply wiring with circuit
protective fuses, circuit breakers and terminals for external cables.
27. The Supplier shall provide the capability for wiring between multiple adjacent cabinets of
the same system to be routed through internal wireways. This applies to non-field related
wiring such as networks, power supplies, and internal I/O. Wiring for field-I/O, wiring to
non-adjacent cabinets and wiring to cabinets of different systems will be routed through
external cable trays.
28. The Supplier shall furnish and route all cables and wiring within a cabinet including all
bay to bay wiring, all loop power wiring such as solenoid and analog loop power supplied
from PCMS and all jumper wiring within a cabinet for signal fan-out.
29. The Supplier shall provide the following cables including technical data per Appendix 4P:
◦ All special cables that are available solely from the Supplier
◦ All fiber optic/prefabricated cables and connector
◦ Cables whose manufacturing or installation can influence the performance of the
system supplied.
30. The system shall be capable of performing the functions specified. Omissions in this
specification shall not relieve the Supplier of obligation to furnish a fully functioning
system.
31. The Supplier shall be responsible for the licensing with respect to the component design,
manufacture, equipment qualification, software qualification assurance including
software verification and validation, and test of the systems supplied as well as
integration with PCMS for LILW phase 1. The Supplier shall be responsible for the
revision of existing PCMS supplier documents for LILW phase 1 such as I/O list, etc. as a
result of 2nd Radwaste Receipt/Storage Building PCMS integration into phase 1 PCMS
facilities. The Supplier shall also provide licensing support for system reliability backup
documents as required by Buyer.
32. The Buyer will provide system design documents such as control room facility
drawing/specifications, HFE Guidelines, data processing logic diagrams, control logic
diagrams, control & instrumentation diagrams for the system configuration and
implementation of application. The Supplier shall have the responsibility to perform the
component design based on system design documents supplied by the Buyer. Also, the
Supplier shall have the responsibility to design operation display pages and implement
them.
4-9

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.01 SCOPE (CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
33. The functional requirements, description of operation and control requirements included
in the design specification supplied by the Buyer establish the criteria for component
design, manufacturing and supply of the equipment to be performed by the Supplier. It is
not intended to provide the detailed requirements in the implementation and
manufacturing aspects of the systems supplied. The Supplier shall be responsible for the
component design, manufacture, integration, testing including software unit testing and
supply of a fully integrated, functional, completely operational systems whether or not
specifically stated in this specification.
Moreover, it is not intended to limit the operation, functions or designs of the required
system only to those either mentioned or implied herein. The Supplier is encouraged to
make suggestions or recommendations, based on his expertise that will improve the
system functionality, reliability and/or availability. The Supplier shall support buyer to
improve system design such as operator interface design based on his experiences and
practice.
34. Supplier shall provide off-site training services when requested by the Buyer. Supplier
shall provide on-site training services for operating and maintenance personnel
designated by the Buyer. The off-site training program shall be conducted during the
system factory acceptance test period. The training shall include detailed instruction in
system configuration, principles and modes of operation and use, routine preventive and
corrective maintenance and servicing of the equipment, adjustment, calibration, diagnosis,
modification and corrective repair of all supplied equipment.
35. The Buyer has the overall responsibility on all aspects of HFE V&V. Identification,
finalization, evaluation, and resolution of all applicable HED(Human Engineering
Discrepancy) will be made based on inputs from the participating specialists.
The Supplier will incorporate and reflect resolutions of finalized HEDs into their design,
when directed by the Buyer, on a T&M basis. When the Supplier cannot make the
requested design changes, the Supplier shall present sufficient and clear technical
justification on why the requested changes cannot be made.
The Supplier shall provide a technical coordinator for the duration of V&V activity
period to assist the V&V team and to provide technical inputs and positions for the
resolution of HEDs.
4-10

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.01 SCOPE (CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
C. RELATED WORK NOT INCLUDED.
The following work will be performed by others :
1. All conduit, cable and wiring external to the equipment furnished and not forming an
integral part of the Supplier's equipment.
2. Mounting of the equipment, foundations, supporting steel and anchor bolts.
3. Connections to Buyer's interfacing system's hardware.
4. Site Installation labor
5. All process sensors interfacing with the Supplier's equipment unless specifically noted in
the specification
6. External Power Supply
4-11

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.02 ABBREVIATION AND DEFINITIONS
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
A. GENERAL
In addition to definitions included in the General Conditions and Special Conditions the
following shall apply:
1. The Buyer will review drawings and data submitted by Supplier, therefore, reference
to the terms "approve", "approved", "approval" etc., shall be construed to mean
"review" or "reviewed".
2. Wherever the terms "or equal" or "as agreed upon" are used in this Specification,
they shall mean "as agreed upon" by "Buyer" unless otherwise specifically stated.
3. The word "shall" means mandatory requirement.
4. Whenever the word "Should/May" appears in the specification, it shall mean
recommendation or action which is advised but not required.
5. Wherever the word "Will" appears in the Specification, it is used to denote actions to
be performed by Buyer or others.
6. The abbreviations listed below shall have the following meaning:
ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
ANSI - American National Standards Institute
NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association
IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council
KS - Korean Industrial Standards
KEPIC - Korea Electric Power Industry Code
NEI - Nuclear Energy Institute
4-12

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.03 QUALITY STANDARDS
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
A. GENERAL
Supplier shall control the quality of Goods and Services to meet the requirements of the
Specification, and applicable codes and standards.
B. CODES AND STANDARDS
1. KEPIC shall be the 2015 Edition through 2016 Addenda. The cross reference table
between KEPIC and referenced Codes and Standards are specified in the "Publication
Status of KEPIC Edition and Addenda", published by KEPIC(www.kepic.org) shall be
used for local supplier. All other codes and standards except KEPIC shall be the edition
in effect as of February 28, 2017, unless indicated otherwise.
2. Should conflict exists between KEPIC and the referenced codes and standards, the
referenced codes and standards takes precedence over KEPIC.
3. Codes and standards mentioned in Attachments and Appendices of this specification
shall be read to mean the equivalent Article or Subarticle of KEPIC code for Local
supplier.
4. Authorized inspector requirements specified in KEPIC MG are not applied for Local
Supplier.
5. The work performed shall comply with the applicable codes, standards and regulations,
and in particular the following:
SPONSOR NUMBER SUBJECT
ASME NQA-1, Part II Quality Assurance Requirements for
[KEPIC] [QAP-2] Nuclear Facility Applications
ASTM D 635 Standard Test Method for Rate of
Burning and/or Extent and Time of
Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal
Position
ASTM D 2863 Standard Test Method for Measuring the
Minimum Oxygen Concentration to
Support Candle-Like Combustion of
Plastics
4-13

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.03 QUALITY STANDARDS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SPONSOR NUMBER SUBJECT
IEC 61000-4-2 Electrostatic Discharge Requirements
IEC 61000-4-3 Radiated, Radio-Frequency,
Electromagnetic Field Immunity Test
IEC 61000-4-4 Electrical Fast Transient/Burst
Immunity Test
IEC 61000-4-5 Surge Immunity Requirement
IEC 61000-4-12 Testing and measurement techniques
Ring wave immunity test
IEEE 336 Standard Installation, Inspection and
Test Requirements for Power,
Instrumentation and Control Equipment
at Nuclear Facilities
IEEE 338 Standard Criteria for the Periodic
Testing of Nuclear Power Generating
Station Protection Systems
IEEE 352 General principles for Reliability
Analysis of Nuclear power Generating
Station Protection Systems
IEEE 383 Standard for Qualifying Electric Cables
and Splices for Nuclear Facilities
IEEE 610 Standard Computer Dictionary
IEEE 665 Standard for Generating Station
Grounding
IEEE 796 Standard for Microcomputer System Bus
4-14

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.03 QUALITY STANDARDS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SPONSOR NUMBER SUBJECT
IEEE 944 Recommended Practice for the
[KEPIC] [EEL-1000] Application and Testing of
Uninterruptible Power Supplies for the
Power Generating Stations
IEEE 1012-2004 Standard for Software Verification and
Validation
IEEE 1050 IEEE Guide for I&C Equipment
Grounding in Generating Stations.
IEEE 1202 Standard for Flame Propagation Testing
of Wire and Cables
IEEE 7432 Programmable Digital Computer System
IEEE C37.90.1 Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests
[KEPIC] [EEF-2000] for Protective Relays and Relay Systems
Transceivers
IEEE C37.90.2 IEEE Trial-Use Standard for Withstand
Capability of Relay Systems to radiated
Electromagnetic Interference from
IEEE C62.36 Standard Test Methods for Surge
Protectors Used in Low-Voltage Data,
Communication and Signaling Circuits.
IEEE C62.41 Recommended Practice on Surge
Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
IEEE C62.45 Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment
Connected to Low-Voltage AC Power
Circuit.
ANSI C39.1 Requirement for Electrical Analog
Indicating Instrument
4-15

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.03 QUALITY STANDARDS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SPONSOR NUMBER SUBJECT
ISA 67.04.01 Setpoints for Nuclear Safety Related
AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code Sheet Steel
[KEPIC] [SWT]
UL 94 Standard for Tests for Flammability of
Plastic Parts in Devices and Appliances
NEMA ICS 1 Industrial Controls and Systems General
Requirements
NEMA WC 55 Standard for Instrumentation Cables and
Thermocouple Wire (ICEA S-82-552)
NEMA WC 57 Standard for Control Cables
(ICEA S-73-532)
NRC Regulatory Seismic Design Classification
Guide 1.29
NRC Regulatory Nonmetallic Thermal Insulation for
Guide 1.36 Austenitic Stainless Steel
NRC Regulatory Bypassed and Inoperable Status
Guide 1.47 Indication for Nuclear Power Facility
Safety Systems
NRC Regulatory Physical Independence of Electric
Guide 1.75 System
NRC Regulatory Environmental Qualification of Certain
Guide 1.89 Electrical Equipment Important to Safety for
Physical Independence of Electric Nuclear Power
Facilities
NRC Regulatory Instrumentation for Light-Water- Cooled
Guide 1.97 Nuclear Power Facilities to Access Facility and
Environs Conditions During and Following an
Accident
4-16

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.03 QUALITY STANDARDS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SPONSOR NUMBER SUBJECT
NRC Regulatory Seismic Qualification of Electric and
Guide 1.100 Mechanical Equipment for Nuclear
Power Facility
NRC Regulatory Instrument Setpoint Calculations
Guide 1.105
NRC Regulatory Periodic Testing of Electric Power and
Guide 1.118 Protection Systems (Rev.03)
NRC Regulatory Periodic Testing of Protection System
Guide 1.22 Actuation Functions.
NRC NUREG/CR Data Communication
-6082
NRC NUREG 0700 Human-System Interface Design
Guideline
NRC GL 91-05 Licensee Commercial-Grade
Procurement and Dedication Program
SSPC Structural Steel Painting Council
Specifications
SAMA PMC 20.1 Process Measurement and Control
Terminology
MIL-STD 202F Test Methods for Electronic and
Electrical Components Parts
MIL-HDBK 217F Reliability Prediction of Electronic
Equipment
4-17

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.03 QUALITY STANDARDS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
C. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
1. This specification covers Goods and Services that have related functions in a facility. The
Supplier shall meet the specific requirements of App. 4A1, 4B and 4H as applicable.
2. A distinct quality classes are assigned to all work within this specification. Unless
specifically noted otherwise in this specification, the following quality classes shall be
applied to the specified work.
Quality Class Item I.D
AQ PCMS Cabinets which control and monitor AQ systems
NQ All others except AQ
D. CONFLICT
Should conflict exist among codes, standards, the technical specification including
Attachments and Appendices, the Supplier shall notify the Buyer (A/E) for clarification
prior to proceed with the work.
E. SUBSUPPLIER
A subsupplier, i.e., a foundry, forging shop, or independent testing agency, may perform
operations, tests, and examinations that require procedure submittals and documentation
of results. The organization which proposes to perform or performs the activity shall
prepare the procedure and documentation covering that activity: however, the Supplier is
solely responsible for the acquisition of procedures and certified documents, for their
submittal to Buyer, and shall assure that the subsuppliers are properly qualified in
accordance with Appendices 4A1 and 4B of this specification.
4-18

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.04 SUBMITTALS
A. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
Drawings and data shall be submitted in accordance with Appendix 4C. Drawings and data
requirements and quality verification document requirements are summarized in Appendices
4D and 4E and are augmented by detailed requirements in the specification (Appendix 4C).
The Supplier shall provide a list of drawings and documents to be submitted in accordance with
Appendix 4C. The list of Supplier's own drawings and document titles shall be cross referenced
with those documents and drawing titles/description itemized in Appendix 4D and the Supplier
shall submit a cross reference list after notification of award.
B. DRAWING AND DATA
After notification of award, the Supplier shall submit to Buyer for review, drawings and data
called for in this specification including Appendices, Standard Specifications and forms as
applicable. These shall as a minimum include the following:
1. Inspection and test procedures shall be submitted per Appendix 4B and Paragraph 4.10.
2. Schedule and progress
a. The Supplier shall submit engineering and fabrication schedules and monthly reports
showing progress in materials and component procurement, software development,
fabrication status and testing.
b. Updated drawing control log with drawing/document completion status shall be
periodically submitted.
c. Copies of all deviation reports, disposition and approval of deviation reports and
non-conformance reports.
3. Design and Engineering
The following engineering documents shall indicate clearly and completely the
information required for engineering design and system interface coordination,
installation, site storage, testing, field program modifications, operation, and maintenance
of the system. The documents and drawings shall encompass all information and data for
the System hardware, firmware and software. If any of the Supplier's drawing titles differ
from the following, the Supplier shall submit a cross reference list of Supplier's drawing
titles, so that both the Supplier and the Buyer have common understanding on the type of
drawings and technical information to be contained therein;
a. Compact disk (CD) for CAD graphic files of individual analog and on-off loop
schematic diagrams compatible with Intergraph Micro Station CAD system or Auto
CAD.
4-19

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
4.04 SUBMITTALS (CONT.)
b. Overview of the system architecture in functional block diagram showing all major
equipment and communication network modes with a comprehensive technical
description.
c. EWS (Engineering Workstation)
c1. Hardware and software list with description
c2. General functional block diagram including diagnostic
c3. Network interface requirement with description
c4. Backup copy of EWS operating system and application software. The media
type of the backup copy shall be approved by the Buyer.
d. Internal system configuration diagram showing all types of cabinet configurations
with internal data communication buses and network interfaces.
e. System general arrangement drawing and overview cable block diagram among
systems and equipment.
f. The Supplier shall complete the Building Structure Load Summary Form and submit
it for review as per Appendix 4D as follows:
Building Structure Load Summary Form indicated Seismic Category III Equipment
Foundation shown in Attachment 4-8 with the corresponding building structure load
calculation.
The building structure loads resulted from all applicable loads shall be calculated on
the basis that are all postulated to act at the geometric center of the anchor bolt group
or the weld group of equipment foundation.
g. Assembly and outline dimension detail drawing showing bill of material information.
This drawing shall show all pertinent dimensional information including cutout
details, the locations of all devices or electrical connections together with all
necessary information to locate and mount these on the cabinets, consoles and panels.
h. Foundation/Mounting details drawing showing bill of material information, all
dimensions, part list, mounting method, materials, channel identification, channel
separation details, support(stiffener) details, anchor bolt requirements, installation
and fabrication tolerance.
i. Internal arrangement drawing for workstation, cabinet, panel and console showing
bill of material information.
j. Individual control circuit and I/O card assignment drawing per cabinet.
4-20

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.04 SUBMITTALS (CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
k. Power supply system arrangement diagram including circuits protection devices,
power monitoring circuits and cable termination arrangement.
l. 125V DC power distribution drawing including circuit protective device (part No.
size, etc.), solenoid valve No. and terminal block point No.
m. Internal Wiring diagram. Wiring diagrams and wire routing (raceway) design shall
show power/control/instrument raceway, field cable entrance location, all terminal
designations and any other information necessary to enable Buyer to complete its
design interface with other equipment.
n. Fiber optic/prefabricated cables termination data (drawing) including cable length
requirements from point of entry to termination and CD including database file.
o. Field cable connection terminal arrangement drawings and CD including database
file. The database shall at least contain all the required field : terminal blocks,
terminal points, relevant device or equipment tag and drawing with no sheet no. The
Supplier shall confirm the field structure and design of database to the A/E prior to
submittal.
p. Control switch modules and panel mounted instrument drawings showing
dimensions, panel cutout, wiring, centers of gravity, weights, and mounting
requirements.
q. Drawing showing scale range, scale graduation and engineering unit for panel
mounted analog and digital instruments.
r. Typical on-off loop and analog loop schematic diagrams.
s. Individual on-off loop and analog loop schematic diagram.
t. Individual cabinet power supply requirement including power consumption.
u. Documents/Drawings for Engineering Station
v. Loop card list showing all pertinent data.
w. Equipment/component list showing all pertinent data.
x. Panel mounted device list showing all pertinent data.
4-21

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.04 SUBMITTALS (CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
y. Prefabricated cable assemblies and Fiber Optic cable list with connectors
information as applicable. This list shall be also provided on CD including sortable
database file compatible with EXCEL.
z. Comprehensive computerized I/O list and CD for efficient update.
a . Cable data sheet for prefabricated cables and fiber optic cables per APP. 4P.
ab. The cross section drawings of prefabricated cables and fiber optic cables.
ac. Source programs as hard copy and CD.
ad. Documentation for the programming kit and program change procedure.
ae. Internal hardware circuit diagram for each type of module.
af. Fuse performance curves and data, relays contact rating, and breaker rating.
ag. Protective coordination verification reports. These reports show the protective
coordination is being well done between main incoming circuit breakers or fuses and
branch circuit breakers or fuses.
ah. Information for setpoint margin and instrument loop uncertainty calculation to meet
Paragraph 4.07.B.4 requirements.
ai. Cabinet load list including Buyer's loop no. for all cabinets with break down based
on a cabinet, bay and module configuration.
aj. Functional block diagram, description and model number for all types of modules.
ak. Bill of material.
al. Analysis report for each digital and analog loop's System Response Time.
am. Grounding and shielding information for all systems including loop controller, field
I/O, panel mounted devices analog signals etc.
an. Hardware design feature for protection against EMI/RFI/ESD/SWC.
4-22

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.04 SUBMITTALS (CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
ao. Description of data communication method within the system and between other
packages including the following;
ao1. Network architecture drawing and interconnecting drawing with comprehensive
description including the following;
◦ Identification of network system type, i.e. whether it is an event-based or a
state-based system
ao2. Data rates between all nodes of the network architecture for normal, upset and
error condition.
ao3. Data communication protocol architecture and message structure.
ao4. Time delay between all nodes of the network architecture.
ao5. Failure detection method and recovery or fail-over method including procedure
to re-establish communication after data link failure.
ao6. Communication performance when encounters undetected and unrecoverable
error.
ao7. Communication method between dual communication links.
ao8. Clock synchronization method between modules and between cabinets.
ao9. Stale or bad data identification method.
ao10. System feature that isolates a failed controller to prevent degradation or lock-up
communication path or disturb the rest of the system.
ao11. Theoretical support for performance and reliability.
ao12. Experimental support for performance and reliability.
ao13. Information support for deterministic communication.
ao14. Experience and performance data for reference.
ao15. Statement about event based or state-based communication system.
ao16. Data communication method with external systems interfaced that are interfaced
that are supplied by another vendor.
4-23

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Add. 1
4.04 SUBMITTALS (CONT.)
◦ Protocol and message structure for data communication.
◦ Detailed Test procedures, test results and test report of all testing (including
unit test, integration test).
ap. All Type of Display Page with related design documents
aq. Temperature and heat generation data (Paragraph 4.05.B.2.d).
ar. As-built drawings.
as. Finish Color Chips.
at. Complete instrument data lists.
au. Catalog of Supplier supplied instruments.
av. Data for chemical analysis and mechanical properties of metal structural materials.
aw. Detailed field test procedure for adjustment and/or calibration (functional verification)
for each component such as all PCMS I/O cards, controllers, control modules, MMI
instrument, etc
ax. Detailed software unit test procedures.
ay. Detailed software integration procedures.
az. Detailed PCMS system test procedures.
ba. Supplier document list requiring revision for LILW phase 1 PCMS
bb. Revised I/O List for LILW phase 1 PCMS
4. Procurement
The Supplier shall submit list of Sub-vendors, Sub-vendor's components, and Sub-
vendor's specifications.
5. Manufacturing and Fabrication
a. Welding procedures including Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and
Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) prepared in accordance with ANSI/AWS
D1.3.
b. Cleaning and protection procedure.
c. Surface Preparation and Coating Procedure with Supplier's Standard Coating System
Technical Data Sheets in accordance with the requirement of Section 4.08
d. Nameplate drawing.
e. Documentation for the fiber optic test kit
4-24

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
4.04 SUBMITTALS (CONT.)
f. Installation procedure and test guideline with acceptance criteria for fiber optic cable.
g. Part List(s) in accordance with Appendix 4X for information.
6. Test and Examination
a. Test report shall be provided for all qualification test and prototype tests including
the detailed procedure, results and conclusion as a minimum.
b. System reliability and availability data with back-up document and with system
reliability test data.
c. Failure Modes and Effects Analysis (FMEA)
Failure Modes and Effects Analysis shall be performed.
c1. For system architecture considering their configuration, redundancy,
interaction and on-line diagnostics availability for each major subsystem
failure and mode of operation.
c2. All printed circuit boards, power supplies, communication links and system
clock and the following components:

• Components already considered in the past projects.
• Components of concern to Supplier.
• Components that were or are being considered for aging by the testing

laboratories as part of equipment qualification.

• Components of concern to Buyer consistent with the recommendations

provided in Mil Handbook MIL-HDBK-217, Reliability Prediction of
Electronic Equipment.
7. The supplier shall submit software V&V documents in accordance with Paragraph
4.06.A.7.
4-25

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITION
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENT
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
1. Implementation using Proven System
Control and monitoring system shall be implemented using hardware, networks and
software platforms that are mature and proven as followings;
a. It has at least three years of documented, satisfactory service as modules of
subsystems in facility applications and has more than 3000 years of accumulated
operating years(systems multiplied by operating years), or
b. It has at least three years of documented, satisfactory service in other than facility
applications and has more than 3000 years of accumulated operating years(systems
multiplied by operating years), or
c. It has satisfactorily completed a defined program of prototype testing and software
qualification process which has been designed to verify its performance in the
facility application.
2. Soft Control
a. The Supplier shall design, license and implement the PCMS so that operator can
perform the control of system component/process via DCS control systems from
DCS workstation.
b. The final FMEA report shall be prepared and submitted by the Supplier.
3. Reliability Requirements
a. Overall System Reliability Goal
a1. The Supplier shall design PCMS such that no single credible electrical
component malfunction within the package will result in the disabled of
facility due to facility shutdown forced by technical specification violation.
a2. The mean time between control system failures that can lead to the stoppage
shall be greater than 50 years.
a3. The mean time to repair (MTTR) of PCMS supplied shall be less than 4 hours.
b. Fault-tolerance
b1. All types of failures in processors, memory devices, networks, I/O cards,
sensors, and other components in the PCMS subsystems shall be detected.
Failures of application programs shall be detected as well.
4-26

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
b2. Diagnosable failures as well as non-diagnosable failures (such as silent
failures caused by a program in an infinite loop) shall be detected. Extensive
on-line diagnostic features shall be incorporated to detect diagnosable failure.
Appropriate methodologies, such as periodically transmitting health status
data to external systems over the appropriate data communication network or
the use of suitable “watchdog timers”, shall be incorporated to allow external
systems to detect non-diagnosable failures in any one subsystem in the PCMS.
b3. Upon detection of failure, appropriate subsequent actions shall be taken by the
subsystem and/or by external subsystems to recover the failure by failure-over,
to alert the operator to initiate corrective (maintenance) actions, and to avoid
spurious interpretations of the presented information.
b4. To avoid unintended interpretation of the presented information from failed
components, the relevant data fields in a display shall be given in
predetermined fail states in predefined formats, or given the value decided by
the operators. Heartbeat indicator shall be provided for a positive indication
that the system is actively receiving and processing data. The heartbeat shall
utilize an icon that is dynamic as long as the display system continues to
receive and process dynamic data.
b5. The silent failures in DCS shall be detected and annunciated to the operators
in all the systems connected to DCS
b6. The system shall be designed and implemented to fail gracefully (i.e., hold last
value or fail to mid-scale) to allow continued system operation until repair can
be made. Preset fail states for external systems which interface to one
subsystem shall be assumed when normal operation in one subsystem is
disrupted.
c. Reliability and Availability Analysis
c1. The reliability of the systems shall be demonstrated by a detailed analysis of
system availability of the system during system design and by test upon
installation in the facility.
c2. Reliability and maintainability values (mean time between failure and mean
time to repair) for all system modules and equipment shall furnished with
associated detailed calculations for the projected overall system availability
along with assumptions used for quoted MTBF and MTTR figures. The
Supplier shall also supply all conceivable combinations of equipment failures
with fault mode analysis that will result in a total system failure and their
associated probabilities (MTBF) of occurrence. The Supplier shall collect
information and data from the system designers to determine the types of
failures that can lead to spurious facility failure of technical specifications.
4-27

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
c3. The analysis shall include all assumptions. MIL-HDBK-217 shall be utilized
for determining failure rates. This analysis shall include the following
information for each piece of hardware:
◦ Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF)
◦ Mean Time To Repair (MTTR)
◦ Field Experience (if the item has been on the filed for at least one year)
c4 The Supplier's equipment shall be designed to have an operational availability
of at least 99.99%. The availability of the system shall be defined
mathematically in accordance with ANSI/IEEE-352.
d. Analysis of Abnormal Condition and Events (ACEs)
The Supplier shall provide a detail analysis of ACEs that have potential for defeating
the function on systems supplied. ACEs shall include external events as well as
conditions internal to the system hardware and software.
e. Failure Modes and Effects Analysis (FMEA)
e1. The Supplier shall perform an FMEA on the all system including DCS and
soft control system using the guidance provided by ANSI/IEEE 352. A
preliminary analysis shall be submitted for acceptance prior to manufacture:
e2. The FMEA shall be presented in tabular form listing the following items for
each module, component, and element or system function according to
Paragraph 4.04.B6.c:
◦ Descriptive name of each element or system function.
◦ Concise statement of function performed by element or system architecture.
◦ Detail statement of possible failure modes such as open circuit, short
circuit, high voltage, or burn out, malfunction as applicable.
◦ Failure mechanisms for each failure mode.
◦ Effect of each postulated failure on system performance.
◦ Failure rate and replacement schedule.
4. Performance Requirements
a. Uniform Operator Interface Performance
The operator interface function including process system monitoring and soft control
shall be designed to allow uniform response time performance requirements for
process and components
4-28

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
b. Operator interface display response time Requirements
b1. The delay time between process sensors to the display for manual process
(quick acting) modulation control shall be less than 1.5 sec.
b2. The delay time in jog control display between operator command selection
(such as open) and the feedback value from jog control valve positioner shall
be less than 600 msec.
b3. Jog Control at the console of component shall be smooth and timely.
b4. The DCS shall be designed to provide up to a once per second update of
dynamic process data under the most demanding system loads. This
condition is based on a maximum number of active display devices and a
maximum quantity of dynamically updated parameters. The DCS, shall
support faster update of process data on the displays of DCS.
c. Periodic Data Update
c1. The Supplier shall utilize a state-based, rather than an event-based architecture
to support transmitting a fixed set of data, at regular intervals, whether the
data has changed or not since the last transmission. This requirement intends
to maintain a constant and regular data loading on processors and networks.
c2. The Supplier shall design the systems to periodically update dynamic data
under the most demanding system loads, based on the maximum number of
display devices and the most demanding for different dynamic parameters to
be updated.
5. Software Requirement
The Supplier shall perform software engineering on all sorts of software to be
implemented per Software Requirements.
The purpose of the Software Requirements is to specify systematic qualification
approach to be used for the software engineering process of software based
Instrumentation and Control (I&C) systems. Software engineering includes planning,
software requirements definition, software requirement verification, software design,
software design verification, code implementation, code verification, testing,
configuration management and training process.
The Software Requirements describe software development, verification, configuration
management, maintenance and operation and support processes related to software based
I&C systems.
The Supplier shall have licensing responsibility for defense of inconsistencies, if any,
between this Software Requirements and the SPM used by Supplier.
4-29

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
6. Integration Requirements
a. The Supplier shall provide all requirements, information and technical support
including testing to the following suppliers of the systems that are connected with
PCMS supplied by the Supplier.:
a1. Radiation Monitoring System (RMS)
b. Some of the application programs in the systems in the scope of supply will be
supplied by third parties. The Supplier shall supply the following facility and
services to integrate the third party application programs in the systems supplied by
the Supplier:
b1. Platform hardware and software
b2. Development environment/materials and training
b3. Modifications to the platform hardware and software to accommodate
functional requirements of the third party applications
b4. Review of third party design
b5. Integration Tests
c. The Supplier shall provide gateways between Ethernet and the Supplier’s networks
to interface external systems connected to the systems in the scope of supply.
d. The Supplier shall be responsible for the integration of all systems including system
in the scope of supply, external systems and application programs supplied by other
vender and connected or integrated to the systems in the scope of supply.
7. Time Synchronization and Tagging Requirements
a. The Supplier's master clock system for the PCMS shall also have interface facilities
to receive time synchronizing signal provided by Buyer. Technical requirements for
the establishment of the synchronization shall be submitted.
b. The clock system shall be designed to operate as a master clock by issuing a time
synchronizing signal to all sub-systems of PCMS. Characteristic of master clock
synchronization signal provided by the Buyer to the PCMS is as follows :
◦ Input signal : GPS receiver time data.
◦ Accuracy : Within 1ms
◦ Synchronization signal issued by period for a contact signal or RS-485
synchronization data.
4-30

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
c. The Supplier shall provide description of time synchronization system including
interface design with a global standard time system.
d. The system clock shall provide a time tagging capability with a real-time 24-hour
cycle with date and year tag. All internally generated system status, diagnostic and
alarms shall be time tagged with a proper resolution. The time tagged data shall be
updated on each change of state. The minimum of 256 data transitions shall be stored
for each module and time tagged information can be extracted from the Workstation.
e. The DCS shall correctly process dates and time. The Supplier shall provide
suitable methods/algorithms to correctly determine dates, time, and time intervals.
These methods/algorithms shall remain valid for the life of the system.
8. Maintainability, Operability, Diagnostic and Testing
a. The system shall be designed and constructed in a modular and flexible manner
insofar as practicable such that modifications and additions can be made easily and
without undue change to the existing equipment.
b. All cards shall be designed so that they may be installed/removed with the system
energized without damage to the card or system, to facilitate easy removal and
insertion of the circuit card. Each card shall have a built-in lever at the card edge that
will lock the card in place after insertion. The card shall be disengaged and partially
pulled out from the edge connector without tools when the lever is unlocked.
c. Hardware interchangeability feature shall be provided and shall be demonstrated for
all similar modules and/or components including PCMS for LILW Phase 1.
d. All items removable from equipment, such as assemblies, subassemblies, circuit
component modules, and hardware shall be physically and electrically replaceable
with corresponding items without major disassembly or undue force such as drilling,
bending, filing, extensive disordering, etc. The Supplier shall provide all necessary
torque values for equipment mounting bolts or fasteners.
e. Replacement of parts, when accomplished in a manner prescribed by the Supplier,
shall not cause the equipment to depart from original specified performance.
f. The equipment specified shall be designed for 60 years of service. If any of the parts,
components or equipment have life expectancy less than 60 years, the Supplier shall
provide a recommended maintenance schedule, and replacement period to extend the
life span to 60 years. The Supplier shall also, guarantee availability of replacement
and/or spare parts for sixty (60) years. If any parts are discontinued or have to be
replaced due to obsolescence, the Supplier shall guarantee availability of
replacement parts which are identical in form, fit and functional support for all
hardware supplied.
4-31

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
g. The Supplier shall warrant that the equipment shall meet the functional requirements
described in the specification under all operating conditions.
h. Diagnostic and Testing
h1. On-Line Diagnostic
The system architecture shall inherently minimize the consequence of failure.
The system shall be designed so that no failure of a single control loop will
affect any other control loop in the system. On-line diagnostics shall be
provided with capability to automatically block the control loop from the
system should a malfunction cause it to interrupt system communications. The
duration of a failure shall be minimized by the ability to diagnose all problems
quickly and to replace any failed part easily.
h2. On-Line Periodic Test
h2.1 Equipment furnished under the specification shall be designed and
arranged to facilitate on-line periodic testing, calibration and
maintenance in accordance with ANSI/IEEE-338 as augmented by
Regulatory Guide 1.118 (Rev3). The system shall include continuous
on-line automatic self-checking capability to detect malfunction of the
card including control power failure, pinpoint problem areas to a single
printed circuit board or device, and out-of-calibration condition.
h2.2 Equipment and software shall be provided that allows for on-line
diagnostic of the system. Simulation capabilities for complete on-off
and analog control input signals shall be provided when the equipment
is in the safe out-of-service state in order to prevent an unsafe facility
condition during the simulation. System simulation shall be capable of
being accomplished on a single loop basis.
h3. Failure Indication
Failure shall be indicated locally through indication light and through system
diagnostic result messages and displays on the maintenance subsystem (tester)
and operator interface FPDs.
h4. Built-In Self Test (BIST)
h4.1 BIST shall be invoked on every module in the DCS System including
RX Cabinet upon power-up
h4.2 These tests shall verify the basic functionality of the equipment before
allowing the equipment to become operational.
4-32

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
h4.3 The power-up confidence test must execute successfully prior to on-line
operation. This test shall ensure the integrity of the CPU, memory and
peripheral. Automatic error recording shall be provided. The error
report shall be generated by a simple command entry from workstation.
h5. MMI of console, cabinet, EWS and panel mounted devices listed in
Attachment shall be designed in accordance with NUREG-0700 and Appendix
4S.
9. Dynamic Design Requirements
The equipment shall not exhibit any gross structural failure during and after the Design
Basis Events specified herein.
The attachment/foundation of the equipment (e.g. bolting, weldments, etc) shall be
designed to sustain the forces resulting from the specified Design Basis Events.
The equipment specified in this specification shall be classified as Seismic Category III
and designed in accordance with the Korean Building Code.
The Supplier shall submit for review, details, and calculations demonstrating the
capability of the equipment attachment/foundation design (e.g. bolt hole sizes; suggested
bolting type, material, and sizes; weldment type, material, and sizes; etc) to sustain the
forces resulting from the specified seismic event
10. Environmental Design Requirements
All items shall be designed and fabricated to operate without loss of function for the
following environmental conditions:
a. Temperature (℉) 50~104
b. Relative humidity (%) 7~90
c. Radiation TID (Gy) Negligible
Supplier shall submit backup analytical documents justifying qualification of the
equipment for normal operation in the above environmental conditions for 60 years.
11. EMI/RFI/ESD
a. The Supplier shall design and manufacture the systems to be immune to false
operation or a damage as a result of radiated or conducted electrical transients from
electromagnetic interference (EMI) and/or radio frequency interference (RFI).
4-33

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
b. The Supplier shall design the system to lower the susceptibility from externally
generated EMI/RFI. The Supplier shall also design the system to minimize the
generation of EMI/RFI, thus becoming a potential source.
b1. Techniques used to reduce effects of EMI/RFI.
The Supplier shall include design feature, but shall not be limited to, such
items as :
◦ Appropriate shielding of wiring, enclosure, etc.
◦ Proper grounding techniques.
◦ Separation or input filtering of analog, digital and power wiring.
◦ EMI/RFI filtering of signal input and output
◦ EMI/RFI filtering of incoming AC power
◦ Inductive noise suppression devices on switching circuits including relay
coil, solenoid if any are used.
◦ Use of EMI/RFI resistant door gaskets
◦ Use of EMI/RFI shielding on cabinet entrance ways.
b2. EMI/RFI/ESD/SWC Test
Electrostatic Discharge test, conducted immunity to RFI field test and Surge
withstand capability test shall be performed in accordance with IEC 61000- 4-
2, 61000-4-3, 610004-4, 61000-4-5 and 61000-4-12.
The as-tested and as-delivered configuration shall be identical including
ground, power line filter and internal wiring routing. In addition, all of MMI
supporting systems including cabinet/panel/console mounted micro-processor
based device shall be designed to have immunity to ESD in accordance with
IEC 61000-4-2. The Supplier may use the latest version of the standards when
approved by the Buyer. The Supplier shall prepare and submit a test procedure
and test report.
12. Accuracy
a. The accuracy of the DCS software from memory to Information FPD shall be equal
to or better than ±0.1%. This excludes any inaccuracies introduced by the Analog
to Digital (A/D) Conversion process performed by the other I&C systems or by the
communication network. The software applications' actual results shall be
compared with independent computations of the algorithms contained within the
applications.
4-34

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
b. Accuracy of all analog inputs and outputs shall be better than 0.1% of full scale
except for Type T thermocouples which are 0.15% of full scale.
c. The miniature type analog meter accuracy shall be 2% of full scale or better.
13. Metrication
a. The DCS shall provide the capability to display engineering values in metric units so
that it can support application programs developed in either of the units.
b. Inputs and outputs to the DCS shall be accessible by the facility operator in Korean
metric units. MMI dialogue sequences, which require numeric data entries, shall
accept the metric units. The process computer components in the control room
shall support the entry, display and logging of data in the metric units. Radiation unit
shall be SI units.
c. The DCS shall provide the capability to display engineering values in metric units so
that it can support application programs developed in either of the units.
14. System Security
a. The DCS shall be provided with a degree of security from unauthorized access and
shall facilitate administrative control of access to all calibration adjustments, test
points, and to the software.
b. A multilevel access security system shall be implemented to restrict access to certain
computer functions. Users shall be authorized to access only DCS functions that
support their access level. The degree of accessibility shall be determined via
password entry at the time of operator sign-on.
15. System Expandability
a. The PCMS supplied shall be designed to be both flexible and expandable to adapt to
the changing needs of the utility throughout the life of the facility. Provisions for
upgrade of part or whole of the system throughout the life of the facility shall be
considered in design and implementation of PCMS.
b. The hardware/software system shall be based upon a modular concept which allows
for evolutionary growth of the system without having to extensively redesign either
the hardware or the software.
4-35

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
c. Under the condition of all task loading, the system shall reserve unused memory for
future expansion. The unused memory shall be at least 20% of total memory size.
Spare executive periods shall be allocated in the processing cycle to assure at least
10% of the CPU loading is available for expansion of high priority tasks.
d. The DCS shall have the ability to add additional display pages, main memory, disk
memory and peripherals after installation in order to support the needs of potential
future system growth. The DCS shall be designed such that additional display pages,
display devices, memory, peripherals and application programs can be accomplished
by modular based expansion.
16. Portability Requirements
The term portability refers to the ability of a software unit to be ported (to a given
environment). The principal types of portability usually considered are binary
portability (porting the executable form) and source portability (porting the source
language representation). DCS shall meet source portability to the maximum extent
practical.
An old version application software of DCS can be executable without correction or
after re-compiling in the upgraded system.
17. Power Requirements
a. General
a1. Buyer's instrumentation and control power supply systems will be 125 Vdc
ungrounded and 120 Vac single phase grounded or ungrounded. The 120 Vac
UPS power (instrument power) will be ungrounded.
a2. Equipment specified for 125 Vdc service shall operate satisfactorily over a
range of 90 Vdc to 140 Vdc.
a3. Equipment specified for 120 Vac shall operate satisfactorily over a range of
the following:
◦ voltage : 120 Vac ±10 %, single phase
◦ frequency : 60 Hz ±5 %
◦ neutral : grounded or ungrounded
a4. Power source for the Supplier supplied indicating lights, display devices, etc.
shall be 120 Vac single phase ungrounded.
4-36

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
a5. The Supplier shall furnish and install devices and wiring required to provide
power (other than Buyer's power supply) for instruments.
a6. Each cabinet, console and panel mounted instrument requiring power from
source external to the cabinets, consoles and panels shall be supplied by use of
insulated general purpose conductor wire (AWG 12 minimum size wire) from
the appropriate terminal block to the instrument.
a7. Accidental or incorrect application of DC or AC control voltages shall not
damage the circuit components.
a8. The Supplier shall provide the following information for all equipment:
◦ power requirements
◦ power factor
◦ inrush current (1/4 cycle and multiple cycles, as applicable)
◦ steady state current
b. Power Supply System by Supplier
b1. General
The Supplier shall be responsible for all power supplies and power
distribution within the cabinets and for power distribution to the Buyer's
control panel mounted instruments, control switch modules and monitoring
light modules. The power supply system shall be provided two independent
and redundant 125 percent capacity of full load for each cabinet, and the
power supply system shall be designed such that each bay of the cabinet shall
be able to operate as a stand alone unit exclusive of only the main breaker.
The switching due to failure of normal power source or the failure of one
power supply component common to more than one functional circuit shall
not affect the operation of the control circuits.
b2. Main incoming circuit breaker supplied by Supplier
The main incoming circuit breaker for the Buyer's provided all power sources
except receptacle power source for the Buyer’s use shall be provided for all
cabinets and panels.
The main incoming circuit breakers supplied by the Supplier shall have the
protective coordination with downstream circuit breakers or fuses. Supplier
shall provide the protective coordination verification reports, which show the
protective coordination is being well done between main incoming circuit
breakers and branch circuit breakers or fuses.
4-37

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
Supplier shall also provide the characteristic curves with the technical data of
the main incoming circuit breakers for the Buyer to achieve the coordination
between the Buyer provided feeder circuit breakers and the Supplier's main
incoming circuit breakers.
Supplier shall provide the fuse block and puller for the aid of the maintenance.
b3. Isolation
Control circuit power shall be electrically isolated from the incoming power
and from facility equipment control power and also ground buses shall be
electrically isolated.
b4. Failure and Ground Fault Detection
b4.1 The ungrounded control circuit power supply shall be provided with a
ground fault detector which will indicate with ON/OFF and generate
an alarm signal upon detection of a ground fault. The fault indication
shall be sufficiently high such that it shall be clearly visible to the
operator.
b4.2 The detector shall monitor circuits as well as input/output signals of
cabinets for a ground fault. The detector shall be provided with a
design feature which will identify a ground fault quickly and
conveniently by being able to isolate per a module at a time.
b4.3 Alarm output contacts shall be provided to annunciate failure of power
sources, power supply components, and power supply bus voltages.
18. Heat Removal
a. It shall be the Supplier's responsibility to determine the amount of heat dissipated in
each system cabinet and to make all necessary provisions to remove the heat to
maintain the temperature inside the cabinets for proper operation of the devices
contained therein and to maintain the temperature inside the cabinets within +5 C of
the outside ambient. It is preferable to qualify the cabinets with natural convection
only and the forced ventilation is for a backup means of cooling. The Supplier shall
install thermostatically controlled forced ventilation /cooling fans rated for 120V ac.
The fans shall be operated only when temperature inside cabinets is above +5 C.
The fans and thermostat shall be appropriately qualified for the intended application.
All vent openings shall have screens and filters to minimize dust and debris
infiltration.
4-38

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
b. The cabinets shall be dust tight and ventilated. However, it shall be the Supplier's
responsibility to determine the amount of heat dissipated in each cabinet and to make
all necessary provisions to remove the heat by a forced cooling method such as using
heat pipe to maintain the temperature inside the cabinets for proper operation of the
devices contained therein and to maintain the temperature inside the cabinets within
+5 C of the outside ambient temperature. Provisions shall be provided to prevent
the rupture of the heat pipe due to the corrosion and to avoid the condensation inside
the cabinet.
c. The Supplier shall provide detailed description of the cabinet cooling design for all
cabinets to be furnished, and field procedure detailing the cleaning process so that all
critical cooling surfaces and components are properly cleaned.
B. Distributed Control System (DCS)
1. Hardware and Software Requirements
The DCS consists of the data acquisition, data processing and controls provided for
various process systems in the facility. The DCS also provides operator interfaces for
equipment control and facility variable monitoring. The DCS provides the data
processing system for operational data for data management such as monitoring, display
and storage. It also provides interfaces with the monitoring system.
Redundancy is incorporated in the design of equipment which performs control-related
functions to ensure that credible single failures do not affect component control
performed. Additionally, fiber optic cable is applied for selected interfaces to preclude
single electrical faults originating at the interface from effecting overall operation.
Fiber optic cables are mostly used for the internal and external data communication
between the subsystem and other systems such as the monitoring systems etc.
Excluded from the DCS is purely local instrument and control loops such as local control
loops to be controlled by local panels.
a. Configuration
The DCS shall be functionally distributed hierarchical microprocessor-based control
system.
The philosophy of the control system shall be based on the following, but not
limited to :
a1. Maximum safety for the equipment and facility personnel.
a2. Safe, reliable and efficient operation of the facility under all operational
conditions.
4-39

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
a3. High equipment availability and sufficient performance margin.
a4. Uniformity of control system to include high degree of simplicity, operability
and maintainability.
a5. The malfunction of any component or loss of supply shall lead to fail-safe
condition.
a6. The system shall provide accurate and reliable information to the facility
operators to allow decisions be made and actions be taken to ensure safe,
reliable and efficient operation of the equipment.
a7. Load of the DCS processors shall be less than 60% under the most stressed
anticipated operating conditions including 25% capacity for future expansion.
a8. The control system shall be structured to reflect the redundancy provision of
the facility so that no single fault within the control system can cause the
failure of the facility to be unavailable.
b. MMI
The existing MMI in LILW Phase 1 MCR shall be utilized for the 2nd Radwaste
Receipt/Storage Building PCMS so that the operator in the MCR in LILW Phase 1
are able to operate the systems of 2nd Radwaste Receipt/Storage Building. The
Supplier shall provide hardware and software required to integrate 2nd Radwaste
Receipt/Storage Building PCMS with #1 LILW PCMS.
b1. Engineering Station
The Engineering Station shall provide following as functions:
b1.1 Engineering station shall be used for configuration, tuning, diagnostics
etc. for DCS. In addition, engineering station shall have the functions
to check and test the electronic cards/modules on off-line basis so that
the engineer can check the card's quality of DCS at any time.
Configuration for control loops, control strategies, controller's tuning,
mathematical functions, table formats, trend displays, graphic displays,
reports or any other standard function shall not require a highly skilled
programmer.
It shall be possible to download programs from the Engineering
station to controllers and information subsystem without interrupting
currently running programs.
4-40

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
b1.2 The engineering station shall be designed for trouble shooting,
diagnostic and as a maintenance support tool for Supplier’s
supplied DCS.
b1.3 The overall status of the system shall be determined from the
engineering station. The engineering station shall incorporate
automatic self-test and error checking to continuously verify its
operational readiness.
b1.4 The built-in diagnostics in conjunction with the engineering station
shall allow rapid identification of failures down to the replaceable
module level.
b1.5 When the engineering station is installed or removed, the system shall
not be affected or damaged.
b1.6 The engineering station shall provide extensive diagnostics for
detailed analysis and problem source identification. It shall also be
possible to analyze and diagnosis system communications problems.
b1.7 The engineering station Video Display Unit (VDU) shall be available
to the operator to verify the operational status of any control loop in
the system and to highlight problem areas.
b1.8 The engineering station shall perform on or off-line test, diagnose and
monitor all different type of modules and gateways with a capability
to automatically perform individual module tests on specific units.
b1.9 Simulation Capability
◦ The engineering station shall provide simulation capability of a
new control loop or logic prior to installation in the system.
◦ The test equipment shall be able to simulate field inputs (contacts
or analog signals) of any interfacing equipment for the
preliminary testing. Tools and test equipment shall be new and
of the first-class quality.
◦ All inputs and outputs (both hardware and network) shall be
simulated and tested.
4-41

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
b1.10 Engineering station interface
◦ The programming language for the control system shall be
designed so that the facility engineer does not need a computer
programming background, but instead configures the system
through control builder. For example, the facility engineer is able
to modify an existing control diagram or build a new control
diagram on the system.
The facility engineer shall be able to converse with the system
using simple statements, with the system continually prompting
the facility engineer and providing "help" messages if requested.
◦ The system software shall be a high-level real time process
oriented language for the control loops. The same control
language shall be capable of being used in modulating control
and sequential control and shall provide increased operator
guidance. The facility engineer shall have the capability to
interface the control language in an interactive mode with and be
provided direct access to the tuning of the control loops at one
central location.
◦ All program changes and modifications shall be accomplished
through the Engineering station and shall be downloaded across
the communications network to the process controller whose
software is being altered. Reprogramming and re-configuration
shall not be required to be performed at the various location, nor
shall the entire system need to be connected to perform these
functions. All configuration changes shall be made with the
system on-line. All components or elements of the system shall
be in the on-line and operational mode before, during and after all
configuration changes. Any and all deviations from this concept
shall be identified by the Supplier in his proposal with an
explanation of the reason.
◦ When an existing control loop program is modified or a new
service is added to the system, the engineering station shall
perform each type of error checking before the program is
committed to an EPROM.
◦ All operator displays and functions shall be provided for facility
engineers at the Engineering station except that no control (auto-
manual selections and set point changes) of the facility shall be
permitted under any circumstances through password protection.
4-42

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
◦ System status and control displays
The system shall be provided with FPD graphic displays to
permit the monitoring of system components, peripheral
devices and communication circuits. Information shall be
provided to the individual I/O card level utilizing the system
diagnostic capabilities. From these displays, the engineer
shall be able to restore system communications, mark system
devices in or out of service, and generally monitor the
conditions of each piece of hardware included in the system.
Interaction with these displays shall be accomplished from
any Engineering station. Interaction with these displays at
the Engineering station shall be accomplished only under
password control.
◦ Modification and expansion characteristics
Displays shall be modified or new displays shall be added by
creating new displays or editing existing displays as necessary on
the facility engineer's console and downloading them over the
data network to the appropriate FPD. This shall be done with
the facility operating and with no degradation of the on-line
control and monitoring functions. All devices required or
available to the Supplier's factory personnel to assist in display
building shall be provided with the DCS shipments.
◦ Display building and integration
The implementation and programming of all displays including
the Buyer's package system shall be the Supplier's responsibility.
This shall include, but not be limited to, custom graphics, control
graphics, faceplates, standard displays, alarm and event logs with
Buyer configured portions and all standard graphics and displays
available.
All operator interface displays and control station displays shall
be approved by Buyer and built by the Supplier.
4-43

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
◦ FPD display interaction
FPD display interaction shall be provided for such functions
as :

• FPD Display Generator/Editor
• Log/Report Generator/Editor
• Data Base Generator/Editor
• General Purpose Editors

The above functions shall be accomplished in a high-level
programming language or preferably via a "fill in the
blanks" or cursor and symbol fill-in approach, constantly
displaying graphically on the FPD what has been
programmed.
◦ The facility engineer shall be able to obtain a complete printout
of the entire data base (both control and monitoring) of any
process controller or the entire system.
b1.11 Installation
◦ Engineering Station shall be provided for engineering, diagnostic
and testing. Engineering Station shall be installed in computer
room in LILW 1.
◦ Engineering Station shall have one (1) set of its own electronics
such as CPU, power supply, hard disk drive, CD-ROM drive,
floppy disk drive, 18.1” FPD, keyboard, mouse, etc.
Engineering station is necessary to perform engineering,
diagnostic and testing functions and also fault-tolerance
through automatic wrapping redundant data highway interface
capability.
c. Information Processing Function
The existing Information Processing Function performed in LILW Phase 1 PCMS
shall be utilized for the 2nd Radwaste Receipt/Storage Building PCMS so that the
operators of the LILW Phase 1 are able to operate the systems of 2nd Radwaste
Receipt/Storage Building. The Supplier shall provide hardware and software
required to integrate 2nd Radwaste Receipt/Storage Building PCMS with #1 LILW
PCMS.
4-44

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
d. Control System (Component Control System)
The control system accommodates the facility components and systems related to
normal facility process control. The control system comprises of a functionally
segmented, fault-tolerant RX Cabinets, Communication Interface Device, control
MMI, Engineering Station and data communication networks for the internal and
external data transfer.
The gateway segments of the control system consist of two kinds of gateways;
Communication Interface Device. The Communication Interface Device supports the
DCS intersystem and intra-division communications, and the Soft Control.
Communication Network provides the data flow path between each equipment such
as CCS Controller, RX Cabinet and Gateway.
d1. CCS Controller
d1.1 The CCS Controller supports a set of RXs for data acquisition
interfaces. Appropriate control commands for the components are
issued to RXs and various feedback signals for the process and
component conditions are received from RXs and transmitted to
Communication Interface Device.
d1.2 The CCS Controller shall be of microprocessor based electronic
modules for closed loop controls, open loop controls and interlocks
and for interfacing with the system communication channel.
d1.3 The CCS Controller shall functionally perform closed loop control,
open loop control, sequence control, data acquisition, sequence of
events and alarming applications.
d1.4 The CCS Controller shall be functionally distributed, highly modular
and arranged in a hierarchical structure closely reflection the
functional grouping of the facility equipment to be controlled.
d1.5 The high-level control function such as all system level control logic
is performed within CCS Controller since the CCS Controller must
coordinate control among multiple facility components.
d1.6 Each CCS Controller executes control programs of a set of inter-
related components along with system interlocks associated with that
RX Cabinet.
4-45

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
d1.7 Each CCS Controller includes the component control logic and
performs component control for assigned individual facility
component. Components are functionally grouped to different CCS
Controller when component independence is required within a CCS
Controller.
d1.8 Components are functionally grouped (assigned) to different CCS
Controller segments when component independence is required within
a control system channel.
d1.9 CCS Controller shall provide the redundancy to enhance reliability.
Each identical CCS Controller chassis (designated primary and
standby) contains redundancy controllers referred to as hot backup
units. The hot backup units function such that the primary chassis
performs its functions while the standby unit passively follows
(tracks) the action of the primary unit. All CCS Controllers shall
be provided with full redundant controller. The full redundant
requirements mean that at the minimum the following components
consisting of a controller shall be redundant : CPU, power supply,
communication card, memory, I/O handler and etc. The redundant
controllers shall access simultaneously the field data and if one (1)
controller fail, the other controller can perform automatically the
functions of controller without bump.
Automatic transfer from any element to its redundant backup shall be
alarmed.
d1.10 All CCS Controller shall not be loaded greater than 60% (i.e. have
40% idle time) and have 40% spare memory, except standardized
modular type drive level controller, after performance test.
d1.11 Each CCS Controller communicates with the Communication
Interface Device and other CCS Controller in the channel over the
redundant intra-division network. This network distributes global data.
(i.e., test interlocks, diesel load sequencer signals.... etc.). The network
also gathers data from each CCS Controller (i.e., component status,
data acquisition signals) to support Soft Control and Communication
Interface Device.
d1.12 Each CCS Controller communicates with the RX Cabinets over a
redundant group network to provide data acquisition interface signals.
Group control segment capacity is limited by the number of
interfacing nodes on the network.
4-46

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
An intra-division network provides exchange of data between each
segment within a DCS. This network utilizes active redundant cables
to maintain communication between segment under single cable fault
conditions. A deterministic peer to peer network is applied as intra-
division network to interconnect all segments within DCS;
Communication Interface Device, CCS Controller, and Engineering
Station.
d1.13 Group controllers support high level system process functions while
an associated set of RX Cabinets support I/O for facility components
and data acquisition interfaces.
d1.14 The CCS Controllers are mounted in equipment cabinets located in
I&C equipment rooms. Each chassis includes a programmable logic
processor with non-volatile memory, equipment power supply, a
network interface module, and a redundancy controller called a
backup unit. Electrical isolation of system I/O signals is provided by
fiber optic cable when required.
d1.15 The functions and configuration of the CCS controller may be
implemented in the RX Cabinet.
d2. Remote System (RX) Cabinet
d2.1 The RX Cabinets consists of input/output module and wiring
terminations for process sensing and control component interface.
d2.2 The RX Cabinets provide hardwired output signals to switchgear in
motor control centers and electrical distribution panels that control
facility components. Under normal facility operating conditions, the
RX Cabinets receive control command signal from CCS Controller
and provides output signals to the facility components.
d2.3 The RX Cabinets performs the data acquisition for process signals
from all types of sensors and contact devices without requiring
external or auxiliary signal conditioning devices. All input/output
signals decoupled in a suitable way with adjustable type hardware
filtering for each analog or digital card.
d2.4 The RX Cabinets are housed in wall mounted enclosures or floor
mounted cabinets that are distributed throughout the facility. Location
of RX Cabinets near controlled facility components, motor control
center and data acquisition signal sources serve to minimize the length
of field cable.
4-47

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
d2.5 The RX Cabinet is provided for control and signal multiplexing, and
located in the field. The data links are used to communicate directly
with system cabinets. These cabinets provide power for their
associated field components.
d2.6 Each RX Cabinet chassis contains a network interface module,
equipment power supply and slot positions for input and output
modules. Each chassis can be loaded with input and output module
types to accommodate, data acquisition interfaces to suit signal
loading requirements at any particular facility location.
d2.7 I/O energizing power supplies are included in RX Cabinet and
enclosure designs for I/O circuits and analog loops powered from the
DCS.
d2.8 RX Cabinet shall be utilized for the inputs and outputs of on-off and
analog controls. Under normal facility operating conditions, the RX
Cabinet provides output signals to the facility components in
response to digitized input signals received through a
communication network interface. The hardwired manual input
signal from control room switches will override input data
received from the communication network interface to actuate the
facility components.
d2.9 Each RX Cabinet shall be provided with redundant communication
links for communication with the main control units in the system
cabinet. The link shall use fiber optics and operate at high-speed data
transfer rate to meet the response time requirement, up to a distance of
two (2) kilometers without repeaters and signal degradation.
d2.10 RX Cabinet shall be loop dedicated. The Supplier shall specify the
handling capacity of input/output points per RX Cabinet in his
proposal. The Supplier shall also design the circuits such that any one
failure shall be alarmed on the DCS workstation, and Engineering
Station.
d3. Communication Interface Device
d3.1 Communication Interface Device performs data concentration
functions and serves as the communication gateway for the channel.
Intersystem and interdivision communications are supported by
datalinks from the Communication Interface Device. The test and
diagnostic code provide in Communication Interface Device.
4-48

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
d3.2 Communication Interface Device provides the redundancy to enhance
reliability. Primary and standby processors function such that the
primary unit actively performs control functions while the standby
unit passively follows (tracks) the action of primary unit. Primary and
standby processor performance is continuously monitored by a
redundancy controller.
d3.3 Each Communication Interface Device chassis connects to the
intra-division network, maintains tables of communication data,
and supports communications to other systems via fiber optic
datalink or network communication interface modules.
Communication Interface Device CPUs, which are both active,
communicate with each other over a dedicated datalink to provide
synchronization and arbitration for common communication interfaces.
Communication Interface Device chassis are mounted in an equipment
cabinet and include a CPU with non-volatile memory and power
supply, a network interface module and communication processors.
The communication processors provide datalinks for intersystem and
inter-division communications. Redundancy is applied to the datalinks
to achieve functional availability. The communication processors
access data from processor memory and coordinate communication to
interfacing channels and systems.
d3.4 Both Communication Interface Device chassis connect to the
redundant intra-division network to maintain communications within
the channel upon single failure of either chassis or either redundant
half of the intra-division network.
d3.5 Acquired data in a control system channel is concentrated in the
Communication Interface Device and updated at intervals of 0.5
seconds or less. This tabulated data is then periodically transmitted to
the data processing system. Data transmission will not impact internal
DCS data communication. Scaling and engineering unit conversion is
performed by the data processing system.
d3.6 Unscaled discrete and analog data is loaded into contiguous tables in
each Communication Interface Device.
4-49

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
d4. Control Circuit Modules
d4.1 General
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
Control circuit modules shall be microprocessor based. Each
functional circuit shall be designed such that none of circuit
components are shared with another function circuit such that circuit
failures and maintenance of one circuit affect only one functional
circuit insofar as practicable.
◦ Hardware
All input/output point cards shall utilize optical or other isolation
techniques to protect the system from a damage due to external
“SPIKES” and meet the surge withstand capability required by
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1, C37.90.2 and IEC 61000-4-5(1995).
The software shall be secured using a non-volatile storage
device such as EPROM. Each functional circuit shall have its
own application program within a control circuit module. The
field terminations shall be physically separated from the low-
level signal portion of each functional circuit.
◦ Software
Software programming shall use address table programming,
symbolic menu configuration programming, or graphical
programming. Supplier shall provide the detail description of
software programming method in the bid proposal.
The address table or equivalent shall tie all control functions
together for a specific application. Battery-backed RAM shall
be utilized for analog loops requiring on-line tuning capability.
◦ Data Communication
The redundant high-speed data communication buses between
control circuit modules shall be provided for data exchange
between the control circuits.
◦ I/O subsystem shall be cabinets consisting of input/output modules
and wiring terminations for process sensing and control equipment
interface.
4-50

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
◦ The I/O subsystem shall be capable of supporting process signals
from all types of sensors and contact devices without requiring
external or auxiliary signal conditioning devices. All input/output
signals shall be decoupled in a suitable way with adjustable type
hardware filtering for each analog or digital card. Each input and
output shall be separately fused. The design of I/O sections shall
allow easy separation of the field wiring during the loop checkout.
This section shall protect the I/O circuits from transient and limit
damage to a single I/O points or I/O card. Failure of any I/O card
shall not affect any other loops in the controller. I/O section shall
also perform self-diagnostics and provide error and alarm status on
the workstation. The Supplier shall guarantee that accidental
connection of non instrumentation voltages or electrical
interference shall not damage the system electronics or cause
incorrect encoding data.
◦ Standard I/O modular, "plug-in" components shall be provided. All
connection terminal blocks will be made with tin plated
compression type ring tongue terminal lugs listed in Appendix 4P.
Field wiring shall be terminated in screwed terminal block and
interconnected to the processor I/O system with prefabricated
cables and plug-in card type connectors.
Each type of I/O modules shall be arranged on a plug-in printed
circuit board so that in case of failure of the board, the number of
concerned I/O is minimum. Replacing one board shall concern a
minimum of I/O.
◦ The Supplier shall make provisions for terminating and grounding
individual shield and overall cable shield wires. These shield wires
shall be grounded properly.
◦ All analog inputs shall be isolated different type inputs. All digital
inputs and outputs shall be optically isolated.
◦ The isolation of the interfacing signals shall be made by Supplier's
system when Supplier's system interface with other Supplier's
system.
◦ All outputs to final control devices shall be through the Supplier's
interposing relays.
◦ The multiplexing equipment shall be provided with error detection
facilities.
4-51

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
◦ For each multiplexed data transmission system used, the effects of
failures shall be analyzed. Single failure shall not cause loss of
all information.
◦ Multiplexing equipment shall be designed such that faults are not
propagated from one part of the equipment to another, or to another
system.
◦ Internal redundancy shall be determined on the basis of required
reliability. To reach this level of reliability, a multiplexing
equipment may need redundant channel within itself.
d4.2 Input/output cards
Input/Output cards should include the following requirements, but not
be limited to :
◦ Analog input card
Passive or active 4-20 mA, generally 24 Vdc, loop power for 4-
20mA, 2-wire transmitters shall be furnished by the control system
◦ Analog output card
Capable of driving up to 600 ohms total loop resistance at 4-20 mA,
24 Vdc loop power shall be furnished by the control system. The
load impedance for smart type valve positioner operation shall be
maximum 1.2 kΩ and the Supplier shall specify this in the
proposal.
◦ Digital input card
Capable of receiving 24 Vdc as input "1" and open circuit (infinite
resistance) as "0".
Generally, sense voltage (24 Vdc) to field contacts shall be
provided by the control system.
◦ Digital output card
Digital outputs shall be fitted when needed with interposing relays
with isolated contact of a switching capacity adapted to the load of
the connected device.
4-52

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
◦ Periodic input card
Capable of receiving a zero-based pulse or rectangular wave or
sinusoidal wave form with amplitude of 1-10 volts and rate of 0-
50,000 pulses per second.
◦ Conversion accuracy (A/D, D/A) shall be as follows as a
minimum :
Resolution : 12 bits
Linearity : 1 least significant bit (LSB)
Repeatability : 1/2 LSB
Accuracy : 0.1% full scale range over entire operating
temperature range
d4.3 Functional requirements
◦ Each measured variable and calculated variable shall have a point
record which resides in facility data bases. The data bases shall be
available in electronic form. These fields will be used as the basis
of documentation, engineering and system configuration, as a
minimum.
The following fields shall be provided for all I/O and
calculated points :

• Point identification.
• Alphanumeric English description (30 character

minimum).

• Current processing status (in or out of scan).
• Scan frequency, both present and normal. (Note :

Scanning and processing shall be guaranteed to be
performed at the same frequency).

• Current information quality, good, bad or substitute.

4-53

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0

• Alarm check indication of whether limit checking is

ON, OFF, or cutout. It shall also state what alarm limits
are being cutout, and shall allow either low or high or
both alarms to be cutout.

• Alarm cutout assignment for alarm limits. This shall be

set separately for high and low alarms (analog
variables).

• Identification by point number of the logical variable or

contact input that initiates alarm cutout.

• Logical state of the variable or contact input that

initiates cutout for alarm suppression.

• DCS terminal block location identification for

termination of I/O field wiring. This shall be completed
such that field termination to the correct terminal and
block can be accomplished from the data. (Does not
apply to calculated points.)

• Card type, position/location, and card point number.

The following fields shall be applied to all analog I/O and
calculated points, in addition to those listed in a) above :

• Current input value in engineering units of measure.
• Units of measure descriptor (Kg/㎠g, etc.)
• Current numeric value (not engineering units, but units

of measure for the input signal such as ohms, etc.) and
electrical units, or digital counts.

• Transducer reasonability limits, high and low in

engineering units.

• Process alarm limit values, high and low.
• Alarm deadband in engineering units.
• Significant change alarm increment in engineering units.

The following fields shall be applied to all digital I/O and
calculated points :
4-54

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0

• Status descriptors (OPEN, CLOSED, RUN, STOP, etc.)

for each state of the input (minimum of 8 characters).

• Normal state (Open or closed) of the contact ("true"

condition). The state shall be able to be changed at one
location if the field contact needs to be reversed, i.e. if
the "1" state is OPEN and not CLOSED, as was
assumed.

• Alarm state of contact (or no alarm for point).

◦ Field inputs and field outputs shall be able to be commanded to any
value or state through software.
This function shall be available from any FPD operating in the
maintenance role under the control of a facility engineer or
technician, with password protection.
This function shall replace the use of field jumpers commonly
used during startup or testing. Reports of these non-permanent
jumpers shall also be provided automatically, when they are
installed or removed, or if requested from the operator's
console.
◦ Analog input scanning
The system shall select and measure all analog inputs stated
on a continuous basis. All analog inputs shall have a hardware
voltage accuracy of 0.1% of span for the value at the system
terminal boards, in engineering units, and shall have no loss of
accuracy through the software.
All system analog inputs shall be scanned, limit checked, and
updated in the system at least once every one (1) second to
achieve data consistency throughout the system.
Each analog input shall be compared to extreme sensor limits.
Readings beyond these limits shall cause the input to be
declared "bad." This "bad" quality shall be automatically
propagated with the value throughout the system. This is in
addition to alarm limits and applies to all analog and
calculated values.
◦ Digital logic, alarm and status contact input scanning
4-55

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
These inputs will be referred to as digital inputs, regardless of how
they are used throughout the DCS.
The system shall provide a digital scan for all logic, alarm,
and status contact inputs. Monitoring inputs shall be scanned
at least once each second.
Provision shall be made for online software reversing of the
physical status (open/closed state) of the inputs with respect to
the status pair without changing field wiring. This shall be
accomplished through the engineer console. All changes in
this physical status value shall be designed to propagate
through all logic that uses this point to ensure correct
operation, and shall require only one change per point.
All sequence of event points shall have provisions to prevent
contact bouncing without loss of time resolution. Therefore,
the first closure shall be the time noted if debounce timing is
used.
◦ Contact sequence of events (SOE) input scanning
The system shall provide a digital fast scan for the quantity of
high-speed sequence of events alarm contacts.
All SOE inputs shall have the attributes of digital inputs as
well as SOE requirements without extra Buyer wiring.
The Supplier shall provide at least 500 total points per unit of
sequence of event inputs with a maximum system-wide
resolution of 1 msec between events.
The Supplier shall supply the same contact sensing voltage as
for contact inputs.
◦ Pulse Input Scanning
The system shall be furnished with hardware pulse counters
for the quantity of pulse inputs. Each pulse input will be from
an isolated contact with a maximum pulse rate of 50,000
pulses per second.
4-56

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
The pulse counts shall be accumulated and processed for use
with the hourly, shift and daily logs, as well as other
calculations and must be accurate for these intervals. Lost or
(time) relocated pulses are not acceptable, nor is the inability
to accurately log these values.
All pulse accumulations shall have the same attributes as
analog inputs. The Supplier shall provide correct logging
output capability on all pulse accumulations.
The Supplier shall supply the same sensing power for pulse
inputs as for contact inputs.
◦ Analog output requirements
All analog outputs shall have 0.1% resolution of calculated
value; as measured at the system terminal boards.
All analog outputs shall be updated at least every 0.5 seconds.
Some outputs may need to be updated every 0.1 second, and
will be so identified by Buyer during the design process for
specific control loops.
◦ Digital outputs requirements
The System shall implement the following types of relay
outputs which shall be a function of the controlled device. The
Supplier shall mount and wire these relays in their I/O
termination cabinets.
In addition, 10% of output relays shall be mounted and wired
in each termination cabinets for future use.
Two types of DPDT output relays shall be provided and shall
be rated for 10 A at 120 Vac or 5 A at 125 Vdc respectively.
The relays shall use the same plug-in base so they are
interchangeable.
All output relays shall contain a status (energized/
deenergized) indicator on the output relay card.
Provisions (terminal space) for powering of AC digital outputs
shall be provided on the Supplier's cabinet.
4-57

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
◦ Calculated variables
The system shall have the capability for creating calculated
variables which are formed using pre-defined algorithms
involving one or more quantitative and/or Boolean variables.
These calculations shall be executed each time the data is
acquired or at pre-defined periodic rates at the frequency of
the fastest scan of the independent variables involved in the
calculation.
The results of the calculations shall be processed as though
they were measured variables and shall have the same
attributes including alarming and logging. Each calculated
variable shall be treated as a separate system point, complete
with Buyer's tag identification.
The system shall have provision for calculating and
accommodating the following types of computed variables as
required by Buyer :

• Differences between any two specified quantitative

variables.

• Arithmetic averages of two to eight specified

quantitative variables.

• Rate of changes of any specified quantitative variable.

Hourly averages shall employ successive values that are
collected at a frequency of at least once every 10 seconds.
◦ Inoperable (Trouble and Disabled)
The functional logic circuit shall be able to monitor the
functionality of each controlled equipment and shall generate
separately a trouble and disabled status alarm signal as shown on
the typical logic. The detected trouble and/or disabled condition
shall be displayed on each control switch module and shall be time
tagged, monitored, logged, recorded and displayed on the operator
console.
4-58

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
d5. Control System Cabinets (Including RX Cabinet)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
d5.1 The system components shall be housed in cabinets designed for
component protection, space for convenient field wiring, and ease of
maintenance and field changes. All components, adjustments,
indications, connections and field wiring terminals shall be easily
accessible.
d5.2 The system control circuit components and the terminals for each
functional circuit shall be located together. Components and terminals
for the functional circuits within the same facility process system shall
be located in the same cabinet area as much as practicable. The system
shall include all necessary control circuit and power supply system
interconnections within each cabinet.
d5.3 Each cabinet shall include provisions for at least 10 percent future
additions of circuit card and for at least 10 percent future additions of
terminal blocks, wire ways, power supply capacity, etc. to the system,
complete with all pre-wired internal wiring. All of the control and data
transfer functions shall not be degraded by future additions to the
system.
d5.4 Cabinets shall be provided with front and rear access. Hinged doors
shall be provided and arranged to lie at least 135 degree and not
restrict access to the apparatus contained within the cabinet. Hinged
doors shall be of captured hinge type secured with integral handles
and shall be flush fitting and be dust proof, provision shall be made
for locking all doors. The inside and outside color of all cabinets shall
be painted.
d5.5. The lowest mounting accessories shall be not less than 150mm
above floor level. Cabinets shall be complete with all necessary
terminal markers, terminal covers and blocks and insulated sleeves
for small wiring and multi-pair cables.
d5.6 The construction of all cables shall be such that cable terminations
are arranged for bottom entry of cabinets as may be appropriate.
However, RX Cabinet shall be accessible both of top and bottom
entry.
d5.7 The Supplier shall submit and be accepted all signal and power
grounding and ground requirements. Unless otherwise specified, a
ground bus consisting of minimum 6 mm x 25 mm copper bar shall
be supplied and connected to metal of each section extending the
full length of the cabinet.
4-59

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
Also, the Supplier shall provide a grounding connector suitable for
through 100 mm2 bar copper cable at one end of the copper bus.
d5.8 One dual, non-locking electrical convenience outlet shall be
provided for each two sections of the cabinet for use with test
instruments. These outlets shall be connected to a separate 120 V
ac, 60 Hz, single phase.
d5.9 Filters and plenum chambers, if required, shall be provided at the
top and bottom of each cabinet to allow air distribution for cooling
purposes and shall be readily accessible for maintenance. Cooling
fans shall be furnished, if necessary, to dissipate expected
extensive heat. Any forced airflow shall be from cabinet bottom to
top.
d5.10 The Supplier shall provide separate field cable termination cabinets
for system inputs and outputs which shall have no electronic
equipment therein. The field wiring will be connected from field
junction boxes to these termination cabinets via multi-cable.
The Supplier's wiring shall all be terminated on the same side of the
terminal block or column of terminal blocks leaving the other side for
Buyer's wiring. All electrical connections between adjacent cabinets
and prefabricated cables shall be done by the Supplier.
d5.11 The Supplier shall provide an electronic file including database that
contains termination information such as cabinet tag, terminal block,
points and drawing number with sheet number. The Supplier shall
confirm the field structure and design of database to the A/E prior to
submittal.
d5.12 All cabinet internal wiring and prefabricated interconnection wiring
shall be a minimum of #20 AWG (except I/O bus cables). Digital
output relay wiring for 5A/125V DC or 10A/120V AC relays shall be
a minimum of #16 AWG.
d5.13 The system logic section shall be separated from cabinet termination
section for protection against EMI and ease of maintenance.
d5.14 All cabinets shall provide test and checking facilities for system status
check, control logic test and input/output card check thru field MMI
device such as loader.
4-60

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
e. Data Communication
e1. Performance
The DCS data communication network shall be deterministic in order to
minimize the system response time and improve overall system reliability.
To reduce the system response time as low as practically achievable, the
digital data communication bus/link within the system shall be designed
with a field proven, high speed, fiber optically isolated links.
Digital data communication shall be transparent to application level users.
Communication error performance shall be determined. The expected
error levels and their effects upon system safety, reliability, and
performance shall be determined. Performance of data communication
system essential to safety shall be verified by test to show reliable
performance under the worst anticipate conditions.
For unrecoverable errors, there shall be predefined failure state outputs,
and it shall be verified that data communication system goes to the failure
state outputs for postulated errors. It shall be recognized that no system
can be expected to be predicable in the presence of unanticipated errors
precisely because they are unanticipated.
e2. Redundancy
The system shall have dual(redundant) communication links which are
continuously checked for failure by the on-line diagnostics.
Any failure of either one of the two communication links shall result in
annunciation but without any loss of communication or degradation of
system performance as the redundant link continue to function properly.
e3. Diagnostic
Each network communication module shall have diagnostic functions such
as self-testing and surveillance testing.
4-61

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
e4. Submittal
Supplier shall provide design specification with justification for the data
communication design including the requirement of system network
reliability, performance and independence in his proposal.
Supplier shall provide network data protocol and message structure for
data communication to interface between DCS and other foreign system
such as monitoring system etc.
e5. Hardware Capability
e5.1 A communication network shall link all process controllers, operator
and engineer interface functions, and associated equipment and
system peripherals, in a manner so that all information or commands
appear totally integrated, reliable, and nearly instantaneous.
e5.2 The communication system shall have multiple branches having
primary and back-up fiber optic cables and redundant electronics.
e5.3 Transfer to the back-up communication channel shall be automatic
without disturbing the system operation. Each communication unit
shall be micro-processor based on.
e5.4 Communication between the various equipments of the DCS shall be
ensured by the redundant internal communication network. The
design of this network shall make full use of optical fiber and
optical technology in order to achieve high immunity to
electromagnetic noise and highly resistant galvanic insulation. The
use of armored cable shall be accepted inside a signal cabinet or
between two adjacent cabinets.
e5.5 The communication network shall be open, heterogeneous, and offer
the possibility of easily connecting an additional computer, it shall
comply with prevailing international standards or the factory standards,
i.e. IEEE 802.3/Ethernet, IEEE 802.4/Token passing, ISO 8802, etc.
4-62

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
e5.6 The communication network shall use high speed, reliable,
deterministic communications protocols designed for real-time
process control between controllers.
The fault-tolerance through automatic wrapping redundant data
highway communication network shall provide full connectivity with
corporate LANs, WANs, and Internet, such as, combining control and
enterprise information systems with high speed (minimum
100MBAUD) used by FDDI or Fast Ethernet.
The network shall be fully redundant, including network interface
cards in he equipment, cables, and optical and electronic equipment.
The network's electronic equipment shall be entirely automatic.
e5.7 The DCS communication network shall be redundant with both
redundant networks operational and in use at all times (unless faulted).
Faults in any single component which interfaces with the data
communication subsystem shall not fail both channels in the
communication network or any other component.
e5.8 The redundant networks shall automatically and continuously be
checked for operability. No manual intervention shall be required to
perform this check or to restore operation to a previously faulted
network after completion of repairs.
e5.9 Noise and hardware failure shall not cause erroneous information to
be accepted in the message received. Self-diagnosis shall provide
system status to the operator. Alarm and appropriate protection shall
be carried out automatically. The monitoring and the preventive and
corrective maintenance of internal communication shall be carried out
through the Engineer station.
e5.10 For deterministic communication, the communication systems
shall be designed and operate with a load no more than 60% to
assure the cyclical/non-cyclical data transmit reliably and meet the
response time requirement in case of using the 25% capacity for
future expansion under the worst conditions.
e5.11 For non-deterministic communication, the communication systems
shall be designed and operate with a load no more than 15% under
the worst conditions.
4-63

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
e5.12 The Supplier shall provide details stating how redundant power
supplies will be used for network controllers with automatic
failover; the recovery scheme; and reporting method. The Supplier
shall also provide the protocol; define the message format,
including bit lengths of preamble, flags, address, control;
maximum data capability; error checking; stop bits; etc. and
specify data handling capability per message; how many contact,
analog, pulse input, and various output points can be
accommodated.
f. Response Time Performance
The DCS, as finally configured and installed, shall exhibit response times which do
not adversely impact the operation of facility equipment nor impede the operator's
response to events.
The response time shall assume that the input/output devices are located in the
worst communication situation possible.
The response time shall include the loop time, transportation time and update time.
◦ Loop Time : The loop time is the delay time from I/O module to controller.
◦ Transportation Time : The transportation time is the delay time from
controller to the Information FPD display processor. The transportation time
also can be defined as network of the delay time to transmit from controller to
the Information FPD display processor.
◦ Update Time : The update time is the delay time from the Information FPD
display processor to the Information FPD display.
f1. Response Time Adjustability
f1.1 Response time of all parameters shall be adjustable. Supplier shall
submit the adjustable capability of timing change for response time.
4-64

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
f1.2 The response time shall be adjustable as follows:
◦ Loop Time : 510 msec or longer
◦ Transportation Time : 100msec or longer
◦ Update Time : 250 msec ~ 2 sec
f2. Control response time shall not exceed the following values :
f2.1 Slow loops 250~1000 msec
f2.2 Fast loops 250 msec
f2.3 Discrete/logic control 50~5100 msec
f2.4 Protective logic 1~100 msec
f2.5 Sequence of event alarms 1 msec
f3. Response Time for the Soft Control
Following requirements shall be applied for the soft control on CCS soft
control on the Information FPD. These requirements will be applied for the
components for discrete control and modulation control only.
f3.1 The response time for dynamic data from I/O card to the soft
control display (workstation FPD) shall be less than 1.5 sec. This
response time shall include the loop time and transportation time.
The default update time on the Soft Control shall be within 1 sec.
f3.2 The response time for manual control command from the soft
control to the output card in DCS shall be less than 500 msec.
f3.3 The total response time for an operator initiating a jog control
action at the soft control display until the new output state is
transmitted back to the soft control display from the field input
shall not exceed 1.5sec.
f3.4 The response time for the operator action on the soft control
display shall be acknowledged within 500 msec from the controller to
the soft control display.
f4. Response Time for Information Data on Information FPD display
Following requirements shall be applied for the information display data on
the Information FPD display.
4-65

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
f4.1 The response time for critical monitoring components from I/O
card to the Information FPD display shall be shall be less than 1.5
sec. This response time shall include the loop time and
transportation time. The default update time on the Information
FPD shall be within 1 sec.
f4.2 The response time for other dynamic data from I/O card to the
Information FPD display shall be less than 2.5 sec. This response
time shall include the loop time and transportation time. The default
update time on the Information FPD shall be within 1 sec.
f5. Response Time for DCS Application Server
The acquisition data from RX Cabinet shall be transmitted to DCS
application server less than 1.5 second.
The delay time from DCS application server to Information FPD display
processor is less than 1 sec.
f6. To adequately support the facility operation by the operator, the overall
time period between when an operator designates a controllable
component on a display device until the appropriate control page for that
component is automatically displayed on the Information FPD, shall be
200millisecond (goal) and 1.0 second (max).
g. Power Supply System
g1. Power Supply System Design
g1.1 For DCS, two(2) independent single phase, 120V, 60Hz AC
primary sources (normal source and alternate source) will be
provided from the facility power system by Buyer. At least one of
these two sources is supplied by an ungrounded uninterruptible
power supply (UPS), which will be used as normal power source.
When the failure of normal power source occurs, the load shall be
automatically transferred to the alternate power source without
interruptions.
One (1) 125V DC source will be provided for the operation of
solenoid valves from the facility power system by Buyer.
The failure of any power supply source and power supply
equipment shall be detected and alarmed by the DCS through a
such device as the operator console.
4-66

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
g1.2 The Supplier shall provide the fully redundant power supply units
operating in parallel (diode auctioneered) to feed DC power
sources for process controllers, I/O cards, field transmitters,
interposing relays, etc., so that no single failure, either of power
source or power supply unit, or the restoration of the failure, shall
degrade or interrupt the normal functioning of any part of the DCS.
g1.3 For system peripherals such as workstation, information
processing server, keyboard, printer etc., the Supplier's system
shall automatically transfer to the redundant power supply. This
automatic transfer shall not cause disruption to the equipment
function.
g1.4 Power supplies should be sized to cover all cabinet space; in case
spaces will be filled with modules in the future. In addition, the
Supplier shall provide independent power distribution panel(s) to
feed power the solenoid valves for 120V AC/125V DC.
Distribution panels for facility solenoids should be provided with
fuses and monitoring relays. The solenoid power circuit should be
monitored and alarmed when power fails. Special attention should
be given to critical solenoids.
g1.5 The Supplier shall furnish distribution panel(s) to supply power
for his system. The Supplier shall be responsible for any
additional or special sources required for his system other than the
above source.
g1.6 The total power consumption of each piece of Supplier's
equipment shall be provided. All of the power supplies shall be
monitored with "contact making" instruments to provide light
indication for out of tolerance voltage in lower and upper
directions. The Supplier shall submit a power supply distribution
schematic.
g1.7 All power supplies shall be equipped with a short-circuit
protection feature. The Supplier shall submit this configuration
drawing for approval.
4-67

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
g1.8 DC Power Supply
The Supplier shall provide all necessary DC power sources and segment
distribution of this power throughout the DCS. The DC power supplies
shall be provided in following way :
◦ Power supplies must be of a nominal size and capable of handling a
25 % steady-state overload vs. design load.
◦ The surge protection feature on the power input shall also be included.
◦ Provisions shall be made on easy access and replacement to enhance
convenient maintenance.
◦ The ripple of each output voltage shall not exceed 5% peak to peak for
main and auxiliary 24V DC power supplies under full load condition.
g2. Power Supply System Design Consideration
The Supplier shall be responsible for all power supplies and power
distribution within the cabinets and for power distribution to the Buyer's
control panel mounted instruments, control switch modules and monitoring
light modules. The power supply system shall be provided two independent
and redundant 125 percent capacity of full load for each cabinet, and the
power supply system shall be designed such that each bay of the cabinet shall
be able to operate as a stand alone unit exclusive of only the main breaker.
The switching due to failure of normal power source or the failure of one
power supply component common to more than one functional circuit shall
not affect the operation of the control circuits.
The power supply system shall not include batteries in the system cabinets or
RX Cabinets except the batteries for the battery-backed RAM.
g2.1 Isolation
Control circuit power shall be electrically isolated from the
incoming power and from facility equipment control power and
also ground buses shall be electrically isolated.
4-68

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
g2.2 Failure and Ground Fault Detection
The ungrounded control circuit power supply shall be provided
with a ground fault detector which will indicate with ON/OFF and
generate an alarm signal upon detection of a ground fault. The
fault indication LED light intensity shall be sufficiently high such
that it shall be clearly visible to the operator.
The detector shall monitor circuits as well as input/output signals
of RX and RX Cabinets for a ground fault. The detector shall be
provided with a design feature which will identify a ground fault
quickly and conveniently by being able to isolate no more than
five (5) circuits (loops) or ten (10) input/output signals at a time.
Alarm output contacts shall be provided to annunciate failure of
power sources, power supply components, and power supply bus
voltages.
g2.3 Grounding
The Instrument ground and equipment ground shall be separate
and isolated from each other by providing separate grounding
busses and/or bus bars.
The grounding for the analog and on-off control loop shall be
designed in accordance with IEEE 1050.

• Two 1/4 by inch (minimum) copper ground buses shall be

installed inside, near the bottom (or cable entry), and bolted
to the each panel structure. The ground buses shall be
physically separated and identified.

• One ground bus (instrument ground bus) with a NEMA two-

hole compression type ground lug to accept #4/0 AWG
insulated ground cable shall be isolated from the
cabinet/panel steel structures and will be used for all cable
shields and instrumentation ground applications.
The name plate of laminated phenolic material with engraved
letter on instrument ground bus shall be installed to designate
“I-GND”.
4-69

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0

• The other ground bus (equipment ground bus) with a NEMA

two-hole compressing type ground lug to accept #4/0 AWG
bare stranded ground cable shall be used for power ground
applications. The name plate of laminated phenolic material
with engraved letter on equipment ground bus shall be
installed to designated “E-GND”.

• Cables or Wires connecting to each ground bus shall be

identified by letter (I-GND or E-GND) on marker.

• The metal parts of doors and unbolted hinged panels shall be

connected to those of the fixed parts by flexible copper braids.
The welding and bolting systems of the compartment
enclosures and the frames shall be provided electrical
continuity of metal parts. Withdrawal parts shall be grounded
permanently by plug and shielding contacts.
g2.4 Power for Analog Loop
Supplier shall provide regulated 24V DC power supplies for all
analog loops, with individual fuse for each analog loop power.
These shall include loop power to the Supplier's loop as well as to
the associated field transmitters by others, and input/output
converters which are supplied by others. There are typically three
possible cases for transmitter wiring. In the first case transmitters
are a two wire type.
In the second the transmitters may require an external 24VDC
power supply besides the signal wires in a four wire configuration.
The Supplier shall include provision in the system cabinets and
multiplexing cabinets to provide the 24V DC to the field transmitter
and to accommodate the four wire type transmitters. In the third case,
an external power supply to a four wire type transmitter will be
provided by others. In all the above three cases, the field transmitter
will interface with the DCS except for a few field transmitters which
may not have any interface with the DCS but would still require 24V
DC power only. For these special cases, the Supplier shall make 10
percent spare provision to supply 24VDC power to these field
transmitters.
4-70

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
h. Maintenance
h1 The control functional circuit and power supply system design shall minimize
the number of different spare parts required for maintenance.
h2 Switches or other power disconnect devices shall be provided to remove
control functional circuit power from each functional circuit to facilitate
maintenance.
h3 Status LED shall be provided in the system cabinets and remote multiplexing
cabinets to indicate the status of system inputs and system outputs except
those to control switch modules.
h4 Provisions shall be made to avoid replacement by components that are not
functionally equivalent.
h5 Replacement control circuit cards shall not require complex pre-adjustments
to make them suitable for use.
h6 Warning signs shall be provided inside the system cabinets and remote
multiplexing cabinets to remind maintenance personnel of any unusual
maintenance, test, or handling techniques to prevent incorrect operation or
damage.
2. Functional Requirements
a. Workstation
The functional requirement of existing workstation in LILW Phase 1 MCR shall be
applied for the 2nd Radwaste Receipt/Storage Building PCMS so that the operator in
the MCR in LILW Phase 1 are able to operate the systems of 2nd Radwaste
Receipt/Storage Building. The Supplier shall provide hardware and software
required to integrate 2nd Radwaste Receipt/Storage Building PCMS with #1 LILW
PCMS.
4-71

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
b. Data Processing
Data processing is performed by existing DCS application server in LILW Phase 1
MCR
b1. Signal Validation
b1.1 Process Representation Value (PRV) Validation
Where there are more than two identical process parameter inputs
including control and protection systems, a valid process
representative value (PRV) calculated in DCS application server can
be used for the control systems to select a valid control signal where
necessary.
b1.2 Control Signal Validation
The control system will take action based on a sensor which is
selected by the PRV that reflects the average of all good process
signal, not a specific signal. Therefore, there is fewer challenges to
facility safety due to control system errors, since deviating sensors are
detected and eliminated before they adversely impact control system
performance.
The signal validation logic function as follows:
◦ A PRV for a given parameter being controlled is received from the
DCS application server.
◦ Each control sensor is then deviation-checked against the PRV to
verify that the sensor has not drifted or failed.
◦ Sensors that show acceptable deviations from the PRV are
considered “good”, deviating sensors are considered “bad”.
◦ The control sensor signal that has less deviation from the PRV is
then used as the controlling signal within the control system(s)
When the validation algorithm in the DCS application server is unable
to determine a valid signal or the valid signal is out of predetermined
operating range or there is a deviation alarm between DCS application
server PRV, the control system will be automatically switched to the
manual selection mode, with the selected channel remaining
unchanged and an alarm will be generated. The operator can select a
sensor to be used.
4-72

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
b2. Alarm and Event Processing
b2.1 Alarm Processing
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
◦ Alarm Processing Overview
The alarm processing technique used for DCS alarms develops
system/function related alarms based on individual component
status and parameter values. The DCS acquires facility process
data and uses it in their respective alarm display processing
algorithms.
The alarm function determines individual component/parameter
data and uses status and alarm algorithms to warn the control
room operator of facility conditions through the MMI.
◦ Parameter Alarm Processing
The Process Representative Value (PRV), and process control
system alarms are input to the parameter alarm setpoint algorithm.
The parameter alarm setpoint algorithm defines all the attributes
of each alarm.
◦ Component Alarm Processing
The component alarm algorithm generates three types of alarm
conditions. They are 1) component parameter alarms, 2)
component trouble/disable alarms and 3) other binary alarms.
◦ Flag Processing
The DCS transmit component and system level status information
to the flag algorithm. The flag algorithm evaluates the input data
and determines whether the flag status message should be
displayed on a tile or alarm descriptor of system or component.
b3. Historical Data Storage and Retrieval
b3.1 A Historical Data Storage and Retrieval (HDSR) function shall record,
store, retrieve, print, and display historical information as it is needed
by facility personnel. Retrieved information may be sent to the printer
as logs or displayed on the display device as static graphs.
4-73

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
b3.2 The HDSR shall record and store multiple types of process data such
as process values and the status of points, SOE data history, alarm
history, and post trip reports.
b3.3 HDSR shall have the capability to store and retrieve the data with a
resolution of the scan rate of the points.
b3.4 All analog points shall be stored when the point value exceeds the last
stored value by a specified amount (threshold) or the point status is
changed.
b3.5 For the digital points, the data shall be stored when the point value or
the point status is changed.
b3.6 All addressable points shall be stored when the update time is reached.
The user shall be able to specify the threshold and the update time.
The update time shall be limited up to 15 seconds.
b3.7 The added or removed points in database shall be added or removed
automatically to HDSR storage.
b3.8 The stored data shall be transferred periodically to the permanent data
storage unit with a file extension of "yyyymmdd" which means year-
month-day, automatically or upon operator's request.
b3.9 If the permanent data storage units are not loaded, the error message
shall be displayed on the display device to inform the operator.
b3.10 The storage disk shall provide enough disk space to store one-month's
worth of point data online for 20,000 points application. The data on
the disk shall be retained as long as disk space is available.
b3.11 When the disk capacity limits are reached, the system shall
automatically delete the oldest closed file. The backup device shall
have the size of more than 10 GB (Giga Bytes) and transfer rate of
more than 2 MB (Mega Bytes) over per seconds as a minimum.
4-74

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
b3.12 The stored information shall include the followings as a minimum:
◦ Start and End Time
◦ Point ID
◦ Point ID description
◦ Point ID type
◦ Value of the point
◦ Unit of the point
◦ Status of the Point (i.e. bad status and alarm status, etc.)
b3.13 Data shall be retrieved by subset of Point IDs and time span. HDSR
shall allow the operator to sort and view the data that is stored in the
historical files. The data may be filtered on the following criteria for
the time span defined by the operator:
◦ All points defined by the user
◦ Points in alarm
◦ Points in out of alarm
◦ Points in out of scan
◦ Points in out of range
◦ Points in bad data
◦ Points with entered values
b3.14 Data retrievals shall not be obtained by requiring the
operator/engineer to know which file the desired data is in and then
requesting that file. But data retrievals shall be obtained by presenting
an interactive display that allows the operator/engineer to specify the
parameters to search the historical archives for data that matches the
request for display or printing.
4-75

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
b3.15 In case of the master data server failure, the slave data server shall
perform the function of HDSR. After restart of master server, the
collected information shall be transferred from the secondary to
master server to protect the data missing.
b3.16 In addition, the pre-selected alarms shall be written to the alarm
history file every midnight with the extension of ""yyyymmdd" which
means year-month-day. The file shall include the following
information:
◦ Time of alarm in ms
◦ Point ID
◦ Process variable description
◦ Current value of process variable with quality
◦ Engineering units of the process variable
◦ Level of alarm such as Low Low alarm, Low alarm, High alarm,
High High alarm
◦ Value of alarm setpoint violated
◦ Alarm priority
◦ Time which alarm is acknowledged
◦ Time which alarm is returning to normal
b3.17 HDSR Backup Builder shall be provided to allow the operator to
select the group from the historical data including the alarm history
logs, SOE reports, and Post-trip reports and to backup the data to
backup device. Backup Builder display contain the following
information or entry:
◦ Historical data lists
◦ Backup start and end times ( year / month / day / hour) or
duration
◦ Backup information
4-76

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
b3.18 The historical data shall be displayed with same format of Real-time
Trend and be printed in a tabular format. HDSR shall have capabilities
to display the average, min/max values of points when the operator
selects the time periods.
b3.19 HDSR shall permit the display or print of any SOE, Alarm history,
Message or Post-trip data from stored/ archived data files. The
displayed or printed data shall be identical to the data printed at a real
time.
b3.20 Historical File Viewer shall be capable of archiving data files to the
optical media for permanent storage. Historical File Viewer shall be
capable of selecting devices, such as alarm printer, log printer, display
device, for printing or displaying the data.
b4. Information Processing Application
Buyer will provide the information processing application program. However,
Supplier shall provide the I&C platform for the application program. Supplier
also shall be responsible for integration and testing of DCS for the information
processing application program.
b5. Engineering Station
b5.1 Maintenance
The DCS shall be capable of performing a functional test of its
capability to detect and display the errors or unexpected events by on-
line or off-line. This test shall perform an operational check of all
inputs and processing modules. It shall be performed such that no
events occurring during the short testing period are lost.
◦ Device Test
Device test shall allow the engineer to perform operability testing
of the system peripherals.
◦ Restore Device
The restore device function shall allows the user to restore to
service certain peripherals (such as a printer) which have been
removed from on-line status.
4-77

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
◦ Online Self Check
DCS shall perform certain health self-checks during on-line
operations. A poor health status shall be displayed on the System
Status Overview display page.
◦ Offline Diagnostics
A full complement of off-line diagnostics shall be provided to
allow all major components of the DCS to be tested.
◦ Software Maintenance
The software maintenance shall be facilitated via a server which
performs maintenance functions. This server shall contain source
images of all application programs as well as a complete database.
The maintenance server shall be accessible to both the primary
and backup DCS servers.
◦ Power-up Self Test
The power-up self test function shall have the ability to perform a
self-test of the main processor upon power up. The self-test is an
automatic feature of the power up process and not requires user
attention.
◦ Power-up Monitor
The DCS shall monitor (or have external devices installed for
monitoring) the power subsystems for over-temperature and
blower/fan failures.
b5.2 Development Environment
◦ Point Configuration Editor
Point Configuration Editor shall be provided to allow the
engineer to view the database records of the selected process
point as well as make changes to point attributes such as scan
status, scan rate, alarm status, alarm priority, alarm limit,
deadband, and entered value, etc. The results before or after the
change shall be printed. The access to these functions shall be
restricted by the access level.
4-78

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
Reset function shall be provided to cancel the configuration for
the point at any time before completion
Point Configuration Editor shall contain the following
information or entry as a minimum:
For analog point
Point ID, Value, Engineering unit, Sensor value, Unit,
Description, Status word, Type, Instrument name, Quality,
Scan rate, Scan Checking rate, Filtering value, Alarm
checking status, Alarm level, Alarm high range, Alarm low
range, Alarm Hi-Hi Limit, Alarm High limit, Alarm Low limit,
Alarm Lo Lo limit, Alarm High deadband, Alarm Low
deadband, Alarm priority, Hi cutout, Hi status, Lo cutout, and
Lo status, and HDSR threshold.
For digital point
Point ID, Value, Description, Status word, Type, Instrument
name, Quality, Scan rate, Scan Checking rate, Alarm checking
status, Alarm priority, Alarm status, Cutout, and Status, and
HDSR threshold
For constant point
Point ID, Value, Description, Type, Quality, and status
◦ Graphic Editor
Graphic Editor resides on the Engineering station. The role of the
graphic editor is to create and edit system mimic display. These
process diagrams are software programs which display graphical
images that represent actual facility process control equipment.
◦ Logic Editor for control and data processing
Logic Editor is the user interface package that gives the engineer
the capability to monitor, control and tune controller logic
through diagrams. An algorithm is tunable according to the
permissions set by the security builder.
4-79

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
◦ Procedure Editor
Procedure editor subsystem can create and modify procedure data
suitable for a facility. procedure data is an electronic file saved in
a computer.
◦ Software Qualification Management System
SQM software tool aid in the evaluation or improvement of
software quality. Typical tools include, but are not limited to,
operating system utilities, debugging aids, documentation aids,
checklists, structuring preprocessors, file comparators, structure
analyzers, code analyzers, standards auditors, simulators,
execution analyzers, performance monitors, statistical analysis
packages, software development folders/files, software
traceability matrices, test drivers, test case generators, static or
dynamic test tools, and information engineering CASE tools.
◦ Software Configuration Management System
Software configuration management shall be performed by
automatic configuration management software.
The control of the SCM system will be accomplished by :
Maintaining historical records of software as it is developed
and maintaining the relationship between that software and
the corresponding functional documents.
Controlling changes to software.
Recording and reporting change processing and
implementation status.
b5.3 DCS Operation
◦ Power Fail/Auto Restart
Upon an external power failure, the DCS shall generate an
interrupt causing an orderly shutdown of the system. This
interrupt shall arm an auto-restart circuit by the program as part
of normal power shutdown sequence. When power returns, the
auto-restart circuit shall bring the processor on line to the state it
was in previous to the power failure.
4-80

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
◦ Security Builder
Security Builder shall be provided to assign access levels to the
users by which unauthorized access can be controlled.
Security Builder shall allow the definition of various levels of
access to the data and various monitoring functions based on the
user name, the program functions, and/or the type of display
station.
◦ DCS Engineering Station
A Engineering Station (or similar device which serves the same
function) shall be provided in the computer room. This
Engineering Station shall allow the computer
engineer/programmer to communicate with the overall DCS
system, and allow for “warm” and “cold" system starts. This
device is the primary interface to the DCS for the computer
engineer/programmer.
A Engineering Station shall be able to be shared with primary and
backup servers. Each pair of servers shall have one (1) system
console.
◦ DCS Status Overview
The DCS Status Overview shall provide on-line display that
graphically represents the status of the system hardware,
components, communication network, status of the cabinets and
cards in DCS, peripherals and software executions. Any
component failure shall be displayed on the DCS Status
Overview.
The DCS Status Overview shall provide the capability with
access to more detailed displays of subsystem equipment to allow
the operator to acquire more detailed information.
4-81

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
◦ Processor Load Status Display
The Engineering Station shall provide performance measurement
tools. The operating system shall be equipped with a standard set
of system performance monitoring and analysis tools, capable of
monitoring process utilization status as well as memory and
processor elapsed time utilization on a per task basis. In addition,
it shall be capable of writing selected information to a log file so
that the output can be formatted by the user. Additional tools may
be added based on system needs.
b6. Database Guideline Information and Requirement
Supplier shall provide all of the information and requirement to prepare the
facility database guideline of the DCS for other supplier. The facility
database is the primary source of addressable points used by DCS.
b6.1 Scope
The facility database guideline information and requirement shall
contain the descriptions of the operational and documentary fields that
will be contained in DCS addressable point database. The purpose of
each field in the database and interrelationships between fields shall
be also explained. Engineering units, format specification for this
data base, the required cards and fields for each signal type, and a list
of acronyms and abbreviations shall be given in facility database
information. The facility database guideline information and
requirement shall be defined as any composed or calculated (pseudo
analog or digital) point, any analog or digital input or output, or
constant.
b6.2 Assignment of Responsibility
The database guideline as pertaining to all points of DCS shall be
compiled, maintained and updated by Buyer. The DCS Supplier,
Other Supplier and Buyer shall agree upon a mutually acceptable
schedule for compliance with the requirements and procedures set
forth in the facility database guideline.
4-82

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
It will be the responsibility of Buyer to verify that any information
transmitted to DCS Supplier is correct to the best of their knowledge.
The database guideline information and requirement provided from
Supplier shall be approved by Buyer, and Buyer will not be
responsible for incorrect information and requirement transmitted by
the Supplier.
c. Control System (CCS)
c1. Buyer will provide basic design documents such as control logic diagram and
control & instrumentation diagram, input/output list for the system
configuration and implementation of application. the Supplier shall have a
responsibility to perform the detail design based on basic documents supplied
by Buyer.
c2. The design and implementation of the control strategy for the unit shall be the
responsibility of the Supplier, as reviewed by Buyer. The Supplier shall
provide a state-of-the art control capability based on industry standards and
recommendations as approved by Buyer.
c3. The DCS shall provide discrete state and modulating control of facility
components and systems.
c4. The DCS shall receive a process representative value (PRV) calculated in
DCS application server to select a valid control signal where necessary.
c5. A combination of manual and continuous automatic test features shall permit
testing of the DCS equipment and interfaces.
c6. Process Controller
The function of process controller will be resided in the CCS Controller.
c6.1 The process controllers for closed loop control shall continuously act
on valves, dampers, or other mechanical devices such as variators,
hydraulic coupling, etc., which alter the facility operation conditions.
The system shall accept and execute commands from the Information
FPD on the workstation where required.
4-83

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
Adequate software capability shall be provided to implement closed
loop control functions, as required. Controller capability shall, as a
minimum, include following control functions :
◦ P, PI and PID control and their variations
◦ On-off control
◦ Cascade control
◦ Feed forward control
◦ Predictive control
◦ Ratio and bias control
◦ Logical operation
All controllers shall be freely configurable with respect to requisite
control algorithms and there will be no limitations on the number of
times these algorithms are being used.
Any switchover from automatic to manual and manual to automatic
shall be balanceless and bumpless and without resulting in any
changing the facility regulation.
c6.2 The controllers for open loop control shall perform the functions of
automatic sequential operation, interlock and protection of the various
auxiliaries of the facility.
Open loop control system shall consist of group level, subgroup level
and component level.
Group and subgroup control shall set up by means of sequence
progressing. A sequence shall be made of STEPS. The steps shall be
executed in predetermined order according to logic criteria. For each
step there shall be a provision for 'waiting time' and 'monitoring time'
and it shall output an action on the process.
All the necessary interlocking and protection requirements of the
process and equipments involved shall act as starting/stopping criteria
in all modes of operation. All inputs required for protection system
shall be an high priority basis.
4-84

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
Protection commands shall have priority over manual commands, and
manual commands shall prevail over automatic commands.
c6.3 The controllers for component level control shall have capability for
interfacing between manual operation from the workstation, automatic
operation from higher level controllers, basic interlock and protection
logic of that component, the check-back signals from the components.
The functional requirements of component level control as indicated
below :
◦ Individual software modules shall be provided for every
component i.e. motor, motor operated valve, control valve/
damper actuator, solenoid valve, etc.
◦ The basic interlock logic shall be provided. The interlock signals
i.e. the enabling criteria for that component, shall be effective
both during the automatic operation as well as manual operation
through the workstation.
◦ The different commands shall be performed according to priority
of the control command.
c6.4 A control loop for one component shall be fully integrated into same
CCS Controller segment and shall incorporate control signals required
for sequencing, interlocking and correct operation.
c6.5 Each component control logic shall use a standard algorithm of LILW
for the interface from the DCS to the actuator, including alarms for
failure to travel, loss of power or signal, etc.
c6.6 The control system shall be capable of operating the controlled
equipment from zero percent to full load.
c6.7 If any transmitter input goes to either an excessively high or low value
(above 20mA or below 4mA, for instance), this shall be interpreted by
the system as an input failure.
4-85

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
c7 Component Control Logic
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
The typical logic circuits provided for the on-off control system includes the
medium voltage switchgear and load center breaker control circuits, Reversing
motor Starter (RS) circuits, Non-Reversing Motor Starter (NRS) circuits,
Solenoid Operated Valve (SOV) circuits, Electro-Hydraulic Motor (EHM)
damper circuits.
c7.1 The breaker control circuit is used for medium voltage switchgear and
load center circuits. Medium voltage motor circuits are provided with
a 4 to 20 mA dc motor current ammeter integral to the control switch
implemented either as dedicated control or as soft control. However
load center motor circuits do not have motor current ammeter. Instead,
electrical distribution circuits are provided with separate ammeters or
voltmeters.
c7.2 The RS circuit is used for the motor operated valve actuator and motor
operated dampers. It uses dual coil ac starter with control transformers
and electrical and mechanical cross interlocks.
c7.3 The NRS circuit is used for equipment which are single coil ac starters
with control transformers.
c7.4 The SOV circuit is used for single coil solenoid valve with process
valve position limit switches, direct solenoid controlled process valve,
pneumatic or electro-hydraulic actuator process valves, and solenoid
valve operated dampers. The process valve opens (or closes) when the
solenoid valve is energized and closes (or opens) when de-energized.
c7.5 The EHM circuit is used for single-coil ac motor starter with process
damper position limit switches. The process damper opens when the
hydraulic motor is started and closed when the coil is de-energized.
4-86

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
d. Data Communication
The data communication shall provide high speed and error free communications
between remotely located systems. The data communication consist of the hardware,
protocols, and interfacing cabling.
The data communication shall be designed to provide accurate, reliable and timely
transfer of data between control/protection systems and information systems or
within the information systems. RX Cabinets shall acquire facility data, and transmit
the acquired data to control and protection systems. These systems transmit these
data through two types of facility wide data networks:
◦ DCN : Network for DCS information
The DCS application server acquire information from these networks, process the
data and provide information to display devices and other peripherals.
d1 General Requirement
d1.1 The Supplier shall provide the design data and documents to identify
the technical rational for critical technical features of data
communication as follows;
◦ Quality of components and modules
◦ DCS software quality
◦ Performance such as time delay, data rates, data bandwidths, data
precision, deterministic characteristic, error performance,
interface with other I&C system and supplier test data.
◦ Reliability
d1.2 The Supplier shall provide following design features and analysis for
data communication system to verify the design suitability.
◦ Detailed layout design
◦ Data transmission rate between node to node
4-87

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
◦ Message structure
◦ Timing design
◦ Failure Mode Effective Analysis (FMEA)
◦ Communication media
◦ Communication independence
◦ Test data for performance and reliability
d2 DCN
d2.1 The DCN typically shall interface the following monitoring, control
and systems and signals:
◦ DCS application server
◦ DCS workstation
◦ Component Control System
◦ Radiation Monitoring System (RMS)
d2.2 The DCN shall be a redundant network. The control system which
interfaces with the DCN shall be via multiple (multi- channel) or
redundant communication paths, such that a single failure in the
communication path will not cause a total loss of data transmission
capability between these systems and the DCN. The DCS
application server shall interface with the DCN via a redundant
communication path, such that a single failure in the communication
path, will not cause the loss of data transmission capability between
the DCS application server and DCN.
d2.3 The DCS application server shall communicate with the DCS
workstation over DCN.
d2.4 The protocol used in DCN shall be based on a standard vendor
product which is considered to be mature.
4-88

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
d2.5 An evaluation shall be performed to assure that the throughput,
capacity, response time and data accuracy of DCN meet the
requirements of the supported I&C systems. Expected error levels
and their effects upon system safety, reliability and performance shall
be also evaluated.
d2.6 The DCN shall utilize a state-based, rather than an event-based
architecture. This supports transmitting a fixed set of data, at regular
intervals, whether the data has changed or not since the last
transmission. This shall maintain a constant and regular data loading
on the DCN.
d2.7 Error checking and correction techniques shall be incorporated into
the DCN communication protocol to assure the integrity of the
transmitted data. The DCN shall be designed so that undetected
transient communication network errors are limited so as not to cause
a significant error in the operator displays more frequently than once
for every 1010 data transmissions.
d2.8 The DCN shall be monitored constantly for communication failures.
Should a communication failure be detected, the DCS application
server shall annunciate the failure to the control room operator. This
shall provide for rapid notification of a communications failure.
d2.9 The DCN shall be provided with a mechanism for reporting
communication performance and errors. Each DCN network
element shall provides on-line performance statistics when requested.
Recording network communication statistics (such as the number of
retransmissions and link utilization) shall ensure proper network
operation and shall provide for network maintenance and planning.
d2.10 Pre-operational test after installation shall be performed to verify
proper installation. Operational test shall be performed to verify
proper operation and to verify that the data communications
parameters are within the acceptable design limits.
4-89

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
d3 Intra-division Communication Network
e3.1 The Intra-division communication network provides the data
communication path between each segment in the DCS as follows:
◦ CCS Controllers
◦ Communication Interface Device
◦ Engineering Station
d3.2 Exchange of data between each segment within a DCS channel is
provided by the Intra-division communication network. This
network utilizes active redundancy cables to maintain communication
between segments under single cable fault conditions.
d3.3 The Intra-division communication network is applied to interconnect
all segments within DCS and interface to soft control.
d3.4 The communication response time is designed to meet the specific
requirement for the DCS performance.
d3.5 The data communication protocols for these networks are contingent
on the specific equipment selected for system implementation;
however, error detection methods such as Cyclic Redundancy Check
(CRC) or Longitudinal Redundancy Check (LRC) are always
employed.
d3.6 All networks are selected to have demonstrated field proven
robustness to EMI.
d4 Group Network
d4.1 The group network provides the data communication path between
each segment within the group controller segment as follows:
◦ CCS Controller
◦ RX Cabinet.
d4.2 This network utilizes active redundancy cables to maintain
communication between segments under single cable fault conditions.
4-90

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
d4.3 Each group controller communicates with RX Cabinets over a
redundant group network to provide component control and data
acquisition interface signals. Group control segment capacity is
limited by the number of interfacing nodes on the network.
d4.4 The data communication protocols for these networks are contingent
on the specific equipment selected for system implementation;
however, error detection methods such as Cyclic Redundancy Check
(CRC) or Longitudinal Redundancy Check (LRC) are always
employed.
d4.5 All network are selected to have demonstrated field proven robustness
to EMI.
d5 LDP Communications
d5.1 The LDP shall receive information from the DCS application server
and shall present this information for display.
d5.2 An evaluation shall be performed to assure that the throughput,
capacity, response time and data accuracy of the LDP communications
meet the requirements of the supported I&C systems. Potential
errors and their impact upon system reliability and performance shall
be also evaluated.
d5.3 Error checking and correction techniques shall be incorporated into
the LDP communication protocol to assure the integrity of the
transmitted data.
d5.4 The LDP communications shall be subject to integration and
validation testing to verify proper operation. Response time testing
shall be performed to assure the system performance requirements are
achieved.
4-91

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
3. Interface Requirement
a. Interface Requirement with Other Foreign Systems
a1 The Supplier shall have a responsibility for the establishment of data
communication link among the DCS and foreign devices (other foreign
package system) for control and monitor including all hardware, software and
technical service for the communication interface.
a2 The Supplier shall supply all data communication interfaces device and cable
except the basic (dedicated) communication interface device for foreign
device control and monitoring system. These communication interfaces shall
be fully integrated into the DCS to provide the same functionality as for I/O
directly connected.
a3 The Supplier shall submit network data protocol and message structure for
data communication to be provided by package system supplier. Following
items shall be included in the document of the network data protocol and
message structure by Supplier, but not be limited to the following:
◦ System overview to comprehend the DCS configuration
◦ Hardware description to interface with the DCS (hardware protocol,
physical connection, cable and connector type, fiber transceiver, and IP
address etc.)
◦ Database description if DCS network datalink is “database driven”.
◦ Information of network node design
◦ Design information for the data format
◦ Node initialization information such as database loading, database
synchronization etc,.
◦ Description for data processing and message updating
◦ Description for abnormal processing
◦ Communication requirement between the DCS and foreign system such
as network byte order, floating point format etc,.
4-92

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.05 DESIGN CONDITIONS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
a4 The Supplier shall submit requirements (documentation, etc.) to be provided
by package system supplier such as configuration drawings to be shown scope
of supply, technical specifications, and scope of responsibility for data
communication interface with package system on proposal.
a5 Data access shall be fully bi-directional (i.e. controls and monitoring), and
shall operate at adjustable data rates determined by Buyer.
a6 Supplier shall provide the gateway to interface with standard Ethernet TCP/IP
protocol to be mature and proven.
a7 The Supplier shall provide data communication interfaces of foreign devices
for Buyer's package systems.
a8 The Supplier shall provide one (1) FPD for Personal Computer (PC) and space
reserved a PC processor supplied be Buyer. This PC will be used for MMI of
CCTV.
a9. Data communication interface shall be uni-directional from foreign system to
DCS for monitoring, and shall operate at adjustable data rates determined by
Buyer.
a10. For the monitoring for the foreign system information on DCS workstation,
the redundant data communication network shall be provided.
4-93

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
A. GENERAL
1. Materials and fabrication shall be suitable for the design and operating conditions
specified in this specification.
a. All materials used including terminal blocks, raceways, wireways, wire cleats, cable
ties, and receptacles shall comply with IEEE 383. The flame retardant test report of
the materials shall be furnished by the Supplier.
b. Supplier shall state any exception to section 4.06.A.1.a. giving (1) functional
descriptions of the flammable part (2) material description
c. Paints and/or other applied surface preparations shall contribute minimally relative
to the total combustible potential of materials or components in or on the goods.
No preparation of materials shall release toxic gases or dense smoke or propagate
flames when heated or exposed to open flames. No material shall be polyvinyl
chloride.
2. Materials and fabrication not specifically covered by this specification shall be
manufacturer's standard, suitable for the application. All materials and fabrication will be
subject to review by the Buyer.
3. Instrument numbers will be assigned by the Buyer. The Supplier shall use the assigned
number on all tags and in all references on drawing correspondence, manuals, reports, etc.
4. Material test report of the structural materials used (e.g., "typical" Mill Test Report) shall
be furnished to the Buyer.
5. Flame-retardant materials shall be used throughout the entire console, panel and cabinets.
6. Materials & fabrication shall meet the applicable requirements of the codes and the
standards.
7. The WORK related to Software V&V shall meet the following :
a. The Supplier shall prepare and submit software V&V plan (SVVP) and software
V&V report (SVVR) that comply with IEEE Std. 1012-2004.
b. All software shall be verified and validated in accordance with the requirement
specified in IEEE Std. 1012-2004, except for Annex A, C, D, E, and G.
4-94

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
B. DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
1. Video Display Unit (VDU) on Information FPD
a. The VDU shall be of a personal computer based design with Flat Panel Display
(FPD) device.
b. The VDU shall provide at least two spare PCI expansion slots to support
communication interface to communication network or other designated function.
c. General requirements for VDU shall as follow :
c1. High resolution type, full graphics and 19-inch diagonal measure FPD with a
dot size 0.26mm as minimum.
c2. FPD shall be treated or coated with anti-glare substance to eliminate glare
problem.
c3. Minimum of 256 distinct colors.
c4. Capable of displaying alphanumeric characters and graphics.
c5. Screen resolution shall be 1,280 pixels wide by 1,024 pixels high as minimum.
d. The maximum viewing angle (between the line of sight and the perpendicular of the
plane of the display) shall be equal or smaller than 40o.
e. The update frequency shall be not faster than three times per second.
f. The data shall also be easily read by the operator in steady-state noisy conditions.
The update frequency can be reduced by application of dead bands or filtering
methods.
g. The screen refresh frequency:
g1. should be higher than 50Hz for single screens and dark background formats;
g2. shall be higher than 70Hz for multiple screen arrangements and light
background formats.
4-95

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
h. The spectrum should be checked at regular intervals.
i. The phosphor persistence of VDUs should reduce the emitted light intensity below
10% of initial value after 1ms of refresh.
j. Suitable measures shall be provided to ensure the reflection of other light sources on
the screens (such as glare) are kept to an acceptable level.
2. Control Circuits
a. General
a1. The process control circuits shall be microprocessor based. All components
shall be mounted on the printed circuit cards. The cards shall be made of
epoxy-fiber glass and all connector contacts shall be gold plated. Provisions
such as a card insertion and removal lever shall be included on the card edge
to easily and properly insert and lock the card into without damaging the
connector.
a2. Any removable circuit board shall be clearly identified with a serial/model
number and a slot location, slot number shall be assigned and permanently
identified on the card cage or lever.
a3. The control circuits shall use highly reliable and proven components that have
high noise immunity, heat sinks where necessary, conservative ratings, and
surge withstand capability.
a4. The system shall be provided with necessary high and low internal signal
isolation as well as with suitable; shielding, filtering and noise rejection
capability.
a5. The repeatability of time delay function shall be within 0.01%.
a6. Control circuit shall be designed such that accidental shorting of the lamp
sockets while relamping shall not cause false operation or component damage.
a7. System input and output shall be electrically isolated from the control circuits.
The isolation shall meet Section 4.06.B.3.d requirement
a8. All cards, modules and terminations including T/C socket termination shall be
adequately spaced so that field installation and maintenance work can be
properly performed.
4-96

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
b. On-Off Input/Output
b1. Input
A minimum of 45 volts and adequate current shall be applied from DCS
cabinets to system input dry contacts to minimize false operation caused by
contact contamination. A lower voltage may be used for input contacts in the
control switch modules if justified.
b2. Output
b2.1 Output switches may be solid state relay contacts, reed relay contacts
or mechanical relay contacts. Reed relays are preferred but shall be
limited to applications for computer, annunciator and other low-level
control system output switches. Relay contacts shall be rated for at
least 0.5 amp inductive at 250 volts DC and 5.0 amp resistive at 120V
AC. The solid state relay output contact shall be selected to operate
the load circuits reliably based on the specified current, voltage and
estimated number of operations. The Supplier shall obtain required
contact rating information from the Buyer prior to selection of the
output contacts. The load circuits will include:
◦ 6,900 volt medium-voltage switchgear circuit breakers.
◦ 480 volt load center circuit breakers.
◦ 480 volt motor control center non-reversing motor starters.
◦ 480 volt motor control center reversing motor starters.
◦ 120 volt AC electro-hydraulic damper.
◦ Small 125 Volt DC solenoid valves.
◦ Large 125 Volt DC solenoid valves.
◦ 125V DC reversing motor starters.
◦ Synchronizing relays.
◦ Facility computer (Equipment status input only).
◦ Other control systems.
◦ Special circuits.
b2.2 Output contacts to the computer and annunciator shall be electrically
separate and normally open, close to alarm except that power failure
detection module and ground detector combined alarm shall be
normally closed, open to alarm.
4-97

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
b3. Response Time
The response time of the input and output signals due to signal conditioning
shall not be greater than necessary to avoid false operation or damage.
Electrical protection and other circuit actions requiring immediate response
shall not operate through the system control circuits where it may incur
excessive signal delay.
c. Analog Control Circuit
c1. Bistable Unit Characteristic
c1.1 Setpoint adjustability : 0 to 100% of input
c1.2 Adjustable Deadband over the entire input range.
c1.3 SPDT for each function shown on each FLD and logic diagram.
c2. Analog Circuit Requirements
Analog circuit shall meet the following requirements:
c2.1 Accuracy : Better than ±0.1% of the full span.
c2.2 Input transient filtering and protection
c2.3 Attenuation of power frequency pickup of 31 dB minimum and
attenuation to high frequency noise of 60Hz or greater.
c2.4 A/D and D/A capability.
c2.5 Optically isolated input channels according to Section 4.06.B.3
requirements
c2.6 On-Board
c2.7 Linearization
c2.8 Span and zero setting
c2.9 Correction for drift and gain change errors
4-98

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
c2.10 Real time clock
c2.11 10K ohm input impedance
c2.12 Resolution 0.025% of span
c2.13 Outputs diode clamped and fuse protected
c3. Analog Input Signal
c3.1 Thermocouple input circuitry (direct T/C inputs) shall include
reference junction temperature compensation.
c3.2 Direct thermocouple input circuitry shall accept thermocouple types E,
J. K and T.
c3.3 RTD input circuitry shall be for 100 ohms and 200 ohms platinum
RTDs. Three-wire connection shall be provided for lead resistance
compensation.
c3.4 Resistance input circuitry shall be for 0-2000 ohms range.
c3.5 Analog input signals shall be checked for out of range limits and
appropriately alarmed. Out of ranged analog input values shall be
displayed on Information FPD. When a signal exceeds high limit, the
circuit shall lock into high limit point until the signal returns within
normal range.
c4. Analog Output Signal
Analog output signals shall be compared to the demand signal and out of limit
deviations shall be detected and alarmed by the DCS through a such device as
the Operator Interface Subsystem.
3. System Cabinet
This section includes Control System Cabinets, RX Cabinet (Controller Cabinets and
Remote I/O Cabinets).
4-99

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
a. Cabinet Feature
a1. The control system cabinets shall be NEMA 12 enclosures fabricated from
smooth rolled sheet steel so designed as to form rigid, self supporting
structures of neat appearance.
Floor mounting cabinets shall have formed hinged front and back access doors
with latches, handles and locks, and shall be furnished with a channel base.
Cabinets shall be suitably attached to the channels using bolting or welding.
The channel base of the cabinet will be fillet welded to Buyer's structural steel
foundation by the Buyer. Size and spacing of fillet shall be determined by
Supplier. Necessary internal brackets and/or structural steel frame work shall
be provided to support wire ways, incoming cable, terminals and other
appurtenances. Cabinets shall not be taller than 90" exclusive of the channel
base.
Supplier shall provide lifting eye bolts per each cabinet assembly and furnish
lifting and handling instructions for lifting the cabinets either using the eye
bolts or using slings from the bottom.
a2. Door Lock and Alarm
All the door locks shall use the same key and keys shall be non removable
unless the door is locked. Alarm shall be sounded when cabinet door is opened.
The door open alarm contact (2 DPDT) shall be provided. Output contact shall
be rated for 0.5A at 250Vdc inductive or 5A for resistive load at 120Vac. The
cabinet shall be designed and devices shall be located to facilitate maintenance
and replacement of equipment mounted therein.
a3. Logic and Termination side cabinet separation
The control system cabinets shall be designed such that the logic side cabinet
and termination side cabinet shall be separated and field cable terminations to
be on the termination side of the cabinet only. Assemblies for field
connections shall include provisions for supporting field cables. The cabinet
seismic qualification shall include these cable loads.
Connection between control system cabinets and terminal blocks shall be by
inter-cabinet wiring and plug connectors by the Supplier.
4-100

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
a4. Spare Slot
Each cabinet shall have spare card slots (at least 10%) of maximum cabinet
capacity when delivered. Spare slots shall be completely wired such that no
cabinet modifications are necessary when new cards are added to the system.
a5. Physical Location for On-Off and Analog Control Circuit
The physical location of the on-off control circuits in the cabinet(s) shall be
separated from the analog control circuits. In the case of system cabinet(s)
with various bays, it shall be arranged per bay basis. For the case when the
system cabinet consists of only one bay, it shall be arranged per rack basis.
a6. 120Vac Receptacle
A 120V AC duplex utility receptacle shall be provided inside of each cabinet.
The wiring for these receptacles shall be electrically independent and
separately routed in a rigid metallic conduit.
a7. Module Layout Drawing
Detailing module layout drawing shall be affixed inside every bay door to
identify a module per each loop easily.
a8. EMI Shielding
Both of front and rear doors shall have EMI shielding gasket material.
b. Cooling and Ventilation
b1. Cooling
Special thermostat with two adjustable setpoints to control the cabinet cooling
fans for cooling/ventilation shall be provided by the Supplier. The loss of
any fan shall be alarmed. Internal cabinet temperatures shall be monitored
and alarmed by the system at a setpoint determined by the Supplier.
4-101

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
b2. Ventilation
The cabinet shall have filters installed on all ventilation louvers to minimize
dust infiltration. Detection and alarming of clogged filters shall be provided.
c. Grounding
c1. Equipment Ground
A 1/4 inch x 1 inch thick copper ground bus bar shall be mounted horizontally
in the cabinet and extended to the cabinet steel structures to effectively ground
the entire steel structure to the facility ground. An equipment (instruments,
relays, and switching devices, etc) requiring grounding shall be connected to
this bus.
The NEMA two-hole compression type lug shall be installed at each end of
each ground bus series for connection of 100 sq. mm bare standard copper
ground cable at each end.
c2. Instrument Ground
A separate insulated instrument ground bus isolated from the cabinet steel
structures and equipment ground bus shall be mounted, with a ground lug to
accept 100 sq. mm insulated ground cable for connection to the station ground
grid, vertically in the cabinet.
A separate insulated instrument ground bus shall be provided for all cable
shields, instrumentation grounds and system logic circuit ground connections.
A connection to the instrument ground bus shall be provided for each analog
loop unless otherwise specified. Each ground point shall be readily
accessible and clearly identified for easy removal, testing, and replacement.
Each instrument cable shield shall be grounded at one(1) point only. The cable
shield will be terminated as follows:
c2.1 Thermocouple
The shields of all grounded junction thermocouple circuits and the
shields of thermocouple circuits intentionally grounded at the
thermocouple shall be grounded at or near the thermocouple well and
shall not be continuous to the instrument ground.
4-102

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
c2.2 RTD
All RTD shields shall be grounded at the power supplies in the cabinets
unless grounding at the RTD is required for personnel safety which will
be appropriately noted by the Buyer.
c2.3 Other analog signal shield ground
All other analog signal shields shall be grounded at the system cabinets
or Remote I/O module cabinets instrument ground.
c3. The Supplier's systems shall design cabinet enclosure ground and system
ground for the supplied system. The cabinet enclosure grounding will be
provided by the buyer from the facility grounding mat to the cabinets supplied.
The Supplier shall provide and connect the cables for cabinet system
grounding from the grounding boxes in the cable spreading room to each
cabinet.
c4. When shielding terminations are required in cabinets furnished under this
specifications, suitable terminals and supports shall be furnished adjacent to
each input rack. Cabinet wiring by the Supplier shall include connection of the
shield terminal to the cabinet grounding bus.
c5. Any internal component grounds or commons shall be the system ground,
which shall be kept isolated from the cabinet enclosure ground.
c6. The Supplier shall specify and submit all signal and power grounding and
ground separation requirements for his system in the proposal.
4. Wiring
Any nonmetallic components and devices such as terminal blocks, raceways, wire
troughs, wire cleats, cable ties, etc. shall be manufactured from "nonburning" materials
as defined by ASTM D635.
Wiring extensions from raceways or bundles to instruments and prefabricated cables
shall be neatly formed and attached and secured to the panels with wire cleats. Bends
in the wiring shall be carefully made in such a manner that the insulation or cover will
not be damaged. Care must be used in the removal of insulation from wire so that the
wire will not be cut or nicked.
4-103

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
a. The provisions shall be made for all field wiring to enter from top and bottom. Both
of the top and bottom entry openings shall be provided with a removable gasketed
steel cover plate bolted to the cabinet. Details of the opening shall be provided by the
Supplier in advance to accommodate the need of the Buyer's penetration opening
design.
b. All prefabricated plug connected cables shall enter the control system cabinets from
the bottom and terminate directly on flanged connector.
c. Instrument cables, including but not limited to computer, transmitter, sensor,
thermocouple or other low level signal cables shall be in separate bundles or
wireways. These shall be separated as far as practical from all power carrying cables
and at right angles to such wiring when spacing is less than 12 in. Wiring requiring
shielded conductors shall be indicated on the Supplier's drawings. However, if a
Sub-Supplier of equipment furnished by Supplier requires the use of shielded or
special conductor cable, it shall be approved by Buyer. If approved, Supplier shall
furnish and install such special cables. An adequate number of terminal block
points shall be provided for Buyer's shield drain wire.
d. Cable supports shall be provided for prefabricated cables or field wiring which is
directly run to instruments. Wiring troughs may be required in areas requiring a high
density of such cables. These troughs are to be supplied upon request of the Buyer.
Routing paths of all such cables shall be shown on Supplier's cabinet wiring
drawings
e. Special care shall be taken to provide adequate space and cable support bars for field
wiring. System component and internal wiring shall be installed such that they are
separated from the field wiring.
f. Supplier shall provide sufficient clearance between the cabinet door and internal
module so as not to damage/squash the fiber optic cables
g. All cabinet internal wiring unless otherwise noted shall be in accordance with
Appendix 4P. All internal wiring shall be suitable for the particular application
taking into account of load current, voltage, short circuit current, circuit fault
protection and temperature effects of wire bundles. A ring tongue type with an
insulated barrel compression lug or DIN connections shall be utilized for each wire
and cable termination. The lug shall comply with Appendix 4P. The internal wiring
shall not be spliced. Wiring conductors shall be copper. No more than two wires
shall be terminated on one terminal post. The special installation methods shall be
used when wiring is subject to flexing.
4-104

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
h. Control wiring between the output relays and terminal block shall be #16 AWG,
stranded copper wire having 600 volt, 90 C insulation, type SIS or tefzel where
applicable. The wire insulation shall meet the flame resistance testing requirements
of IEEE-383.
i. All internal wiring shall be installed exactly as shown on the "as-built" wiring
diagrams. When the original tracings are sent to the Buyer before factory wiring
tests have been completed, Supplier shall send a marked set of "as-built" wiring
diagrams to Buyer who will make the necessary changes on the tracings. The
expense of any necessary reworking of the actual panel wiring, to make it conform to
the wiring diagrams or vice versa, will be back-charged to the Supplier.
j. Connections between the control circuit assemblies and the terminal blocks shall be
by inter-cabinet wiring and plug connector.
5. Terminal Block
a. General
All wiring for connection to outgoing cables shall be terminated at terminal blocks
which shall be a barrier type made of molded bakelite with a washer head screw,
Marathon Type 1600 series, General Electric Type CR151, or equivalent. The
terminal blocks shall be provided with marking strips clearly and permanently
identified in exact accordance with "as built" wiring diagram with the Buyer's
terminal block identification number.
The arrangement of terminal block inside control system and Remote I/O cabinets
shall be reviewed and rearranged by Buyer for the appropriate external cable
termination.
One or more terminal blocks shall be provided for each functional circuit. The
wiring terminated on one terminal block shall be limited to one functional circuit.
b. Terminal Block Size
b1. Owner supplied cables are 14 AWG for on/off Signal and 16 AWG for
Analog signal. Therefore, Supplier supplied terminal blocks shall be suitable
for these cable sized. Terminal block size for power cable shall be reviewed
and approved by Buyer.
4-105

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
b2. Supplier shall provide a limited number of large size (up to gauge 2) field
wires to be terminated to Ovation I/O. Buyer will give the information of large
size field wires satisfactorily early.
c. Identification
c1. Terminal Block Identification
The heavy duty terminal blocks and special wire terminals shall be used for
the field wiring. The terminal block marking strips shall be provided and
marked with the Buyer's terminal block identification number consisting of
four (4) characters.
c2. Others Identification
Identification shall be provided for all functional circuits, power supply
components, circuit breakers, logic cards, terminal blocks, etc.
c3. Internal Wiring Identification
Color coded internal wiring shall be provided per voltage level.
The Supplier shall provide wire marker for all internal wires which are
terminated on terminal block per Appendix 4S. Each wire marker shall include
a unique wire number as a minimum.
k. Welding Procedure
Welding procedures including WPS and PQR shall be submitted to the Buyer for
review and acceptance. Procedures shall be accepted by the Buyer prior to
production welding. Buyer's inspector will review performance qualification records
for individual welders and welding operators. Welding procedures and welding
qualification shall conform to ANSI/AWS D1.3.
l. Power Supply and System Protection
e1. Control and power supply system components shall be located in the cabinet
with provision for sufficient air circulation to avoid heat concentration (hot
spots) that would affect the system operation. The high heat emitting
components should preferably be located at the top of the cabinet to promote
the convection and to avoid connective heat affecting the circuit cards. And
also, the location of power supply and the direction of forced airflow by the
power supply cooling fan shall be designed such that accumulation of dust
inside the power supply.
4-106

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
Power supplies, critical circuits and components shall be appropriately
protected for overcurrent and overvoltage including direct short circuit.
Each electrical power supply to the cabinet shall be provided with enclosed
overcurrent (fuse blocks) protection and shall provide disconnecting device
which shall be mounted within the cabinet.
e2. Supplier shall provide all necessary devices to protect the equipment in his
scope of supply from the abnormal voltage peaks on Buyer's feeds. Circuit
protection shall minimize the possibility and effect of any internal or external
component failure or personnel error.
e3. The 120 Vac sources will require short circuit current interrupting devices
capable of interrupting 10,000 amperes and symmetrical.
e4. The 125 Vdc sources will be ungrounded and will require short circuit
interrupting devices capable of interrupting 25,000 amperes and symmetrical.
e5. Power supply main circuit breaker shall be provided for each cabinet
e6. Each cabinet power supply bus system shall have a minimum capability of
125% of full load. The power supply system shall consider the 10% spare
capacity for future addition in the design. If Supplier is using switching power
supplies in his system, the crest factor of the load current shall be provided for
Buyer's review and approval.
e7. The power supply and its components shall be designed to force its output fail
low upon detection of an overvoltage condition or regulation failure thus
avoiding damage to downstream system components. Additionally, overload
limits shall be set to avoid damage to the power supply sources due to
downstream failures.
e8. All system DC power supply outputs shall be redundant and be configured to
allow both redundant power supplies to be on-line at the same time, utilizing
dual-diode auctioneering techniques. Logic level power outputs shall
provide for monitoring the control system's voltage level and contain the
capability to disconnect power automatically when the voltage level exceeds
the low voltage threshold for the system components. Provisions for manual
reset shall be provided. Suitable alarm contact outputs shall be provided for
Purchaser's use to notify the operator upon failure of any power supply or
regulating equipment.
4-107

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
e9. Each power supply shall have manual voltage adjustment controls and voltage
regulation per each voltage level.
Also, each power supply shall have individually detection function for ground
fault.
e10. Supplier shall guarantee that Each power supply will be normally operated
without a function loss even though momentary voltage dips up to 20% for
power feed are possible.
e11. The power supply shall be modularized separately per each voltage level and
shall be rack-mounted with a slide-in/out feature for easy removal/installation.
6. Fiber Optic Cables
a. Duplex fiber optic cables shall be utilized for the data communications among or
between cabinets. Duplex fiber optic cables shall be environmentally qualified for
use both indoors and outdoors.
b. Supplier shall provide the necessary quantity plus sufficient spares of duplex fiber
optic cables and connectors needed for terminating the complete network.
c. Overall cable jacket material shall be chlorinated polyethylene or a Buyer accepted
equal. The insulation and cable jacket shall be flame retardant and shall be capable
of passing the flame resistance test of IEEE-383.
d. The individual fiber optic cables will be cut at the jobsite by the Buyer. A price
adjustment will be made by the Buyer for increase/decrease due to cable length
adjustment at fabrication release. The adjustment will be based on the unit price
per drum (roll) given by the Supplier in the proposal.
e. Jackets for all of internal and external cable shall be color coded per Appendix 4P.
f. It is Supplier's responsibility to request and obtain the information for the exact cable
length per drum prior to the final cutting of the fiber optic cables.
4-108

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
7. Workstations, Consoles and Panels
a. The workstations, consoles and panels shall be designed by Supplier to
accommodate all control and indicating devices, instruments, switches, signal lights,
alarms, mimic lines, demarcations, nameplates, etc., as indicated on the MCR
arrangement drawings, and as specified in the Instrument Data List or in this
specification. The Supplier shall design the workstations, consoles and panels
internally and externally to accommodate devices furnished by Supplier or Buyer
which form part of the workstations, consoles and panels assembly. Unused spaces
on the panel and operator's console front surface shall not be unduly obstructed to
future use of the space for instruments and controls.
b. Workstations, consoles and panels shall be of the enclosed type and cable access
shall be from the bottom. The cable entry shall be designed to prevent dripping or
splashing water from the top cable entry. Framework shall be constructed to ensure
adequate structural strength to meet seismic qualification requirements defined in
this specification. Structural design shall be developed by the Supplier subject to
Buyer's acceptance.
c. Size and arrangement of the workstations, consoles and panels shall be in accordance
with Supplier's drawings to be approved by the Buyer.
d. Provision for interconnecting workstations, consoles and panels shipping sections
shall be developed by the Supplier for the Buyer's acceptance.
e. Supplier shall be responsible for proper alignment of workstations, consoles and
panels sections during manufacture. Height of individual workstations, consoles and
panels sections shall be held to a tolerance of plus or minus 1/8 inch, with the added
restriction that the overall width of a section shall be plus or minus 1/8 inch, and
height variations between adjacent sections of workstations, consoles and panels
shall be no more than 1/16 inch. Gaps between adjacent sections of workstations,
consoles and panels shall be no greater than 1/16 inch.
4-109

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
f. The workstations and panels shall be steel plate of minimum 3/16inch(4.5mm)
thickness, all welded construction, built and reinforced in such a manner that no
discernible deflection or vibration will occur, due to any seismic testing, shipping,
installation, weight of instruments, interconnecting wiring, etc. Edges and corners of
the non-mating panels shall be rounded and smooth. The workstations and panels
shall have the following flatness tolerance which is defined as the maximum
allowable deflection of the actual workstations, consoles and panels surface from a
flat surface standard:
f1. Width up to 24 inches: 1/11-inch tolerance
f2. 24 inches to 32 inches: 3/32-inch tolerance
f3. 32 inches and larger: 1/8-inch tolerance
g. The entire structure for the workstations, consoles and panels shall be all welded
construction as per AWS D1.3 and hot-rolled steel plate selected for flatness and free
from surface defects.
h. Flux-Cored Arc Welding (FCAW) shall be used with an external shielding gas and
operation shall be in the spray transfer mode.
i. Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW) shall be used only in the spray transfer mode,
except that the short circuiting arc transfer mode may be used for materials up to and
including 3/16 inch thickness.
j. Structural Welding may be performed by using the shielded metal arc welding
(SMAW) process to limit panel surface warpage inherent in the high heat methods
described in Sections 4.06.B.5.e and 4.06.B.7.h.
k. Necessary internal brackets and/or structural steel framework shall be provided to
support wireways, incoming cable, wiring, terminals, and other appurtenances.
l. All panel structural bases shall be suitable for mounting by welding onto embedded
plates or structural steel foundations.
m. The workstations, consoles and panels bases shall be fabricated from steel channels
which allow for shimming between the base and structure before final attachment in
place.
n. Weld access opening shall be provided in the workstations, consoles and panels
structural bases as required so that they may be welded to Buyer's foundation. A
preferred method of welding to improve welding access would be the outside
welding.
4-110

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
o. Structural bases for all workstations, consoles and panels shall be fillet welded to
Buyer's structural steel foundations. Size and spacing of fillet shall be determined
and be specified on the drawings by the Supplier. Preferred location of the weld
would be the outside of the base for ease of access during welding.
p. Location of horizontal and vertical centerlines for device cut-outs shall be within a
tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch.
q. Workstations, consoles and panels doors and removable sections shall be designed to
facilitate instrument and wiring maintenance, and field wiring installation
considering control room layout as shown in Attachment 4-3 figure 1. These shall be
designed by the Supplier for the Buyer's acceptance.
r. Workstations, consoles and panels doors shall be constructed so that they shall
neither weave nor warp, and shall have stiffening members, if necessary, to ensure
rigidity.
s. Doors shall have vertical edges bent to a convenient return bend radius. Each door
shall be equipped with a handle flush with the surface and latch sufficiently strong to
hold it in alignment when closed. Doors shall be equipped with lock and key such
that the key is not removable unless the door is locked. Door swing radius, hinging,
and location shall take into account locations of the other (back) panels and cabinets
in the control room as well as the placement of architectural features such as
walkways, room doors, and pillars.
t. Removable assemblies shall be designed to be manipulated by one person.
u. Removable assemblies and covers necessary for erection, maintenance, or repair
shall be flush and shall be secured by captive quick-disconnect fasteners.
v. Fastening devices for all consoles and panel access covers shall be corrosion
resistant.
w. Where openings for ventilation are required, louvered ventilating openings shall be
furnished with stainless steel screens having a maximum 1/8-inch mesh to prevent
the entrance of insects or rodents. Louvers shall be formed to prevent dripping or
splashing water from entering the enclosure.
4-111

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
4.06 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION(CONT.)
x. Design, material selection, and workmanship shall result in a neat appearance
outside and inside, with no welds, holes, rivets, or bolt heads apparent on exterior
surfaces. All exterior surfaces shall be within tolerance previously defined. All
workstations, consoles and panels inserts shall be mounted flush with panel surfaces
or shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
y. A brushed 1/8-inch thick stainless steel trim piece around the perimeter of the
bottom of the workstations, consoles and panels shall be installed to minimize the
refinishing required after welding the workstations, consoles and panels base to the
embedment. The trim piece shall be designed in such a manner that it can be
removed for welding and re-attached afterwards without any interference from the
weld metal.
z. General welding procedure including WPS and PQR shall be submitted to the Buyer
for review and acceptance. Procedures shall be accepted by the Buyer prior to
production welding.
aa. Buyer's inspector will review performance qualification records for individual
welders and welding operators. Welding procedures and welder qualification shall
conform to ANSI/AWS D1.3.
ab. Workstations, consoles and panels welding shall be done according to the Supplier's
weld map showing the location, type and size of welds required on the structure. The
Supplier shall incorporate the weld inspection acceptance criteria to be used on the
workstations, consoles and panels into general welding procedure.
ac. Repairs to the workstations, consoles and panels surface shall be done using all
metal materials and the use of non-metallic materials is not acceptable.
8. Electrical Requirements for Workstations, consoles and panels
a. General
a1. Wiring to all Supplier supplied items and certain Buyer or other supplied
items shall be wired to terminal blocks. Prefabricated cables or others supplied
items shall be by the Buyer. Wire routing designs and drawings shall include
all Supplier installed and Buyer installed wiring. Supplier shall furnish wire
routing design for internal workstations, consoles and panels including
equipment pullout, special requirements and cable clearance requirements for
Buyer's approval prior to manufacturing.
4-112

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
4.06 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION(CONT.)
a2. All Supplier installed wiring shall be clearly shown on wiring and
interconnection diagrams. Four inches clear space shall be left adjacent to
each terminal block on Supplier's interconnection and wiring diagrams for the
Buyer, to add wire numbers and reference drawing numbers. The diagram
shall be relative to the rear view arrangement of the equipment and terminal
block locations. Device identification on wiring diagrams shall match rear of
workstations, consoles and panels device.
a3. Electrical wiring information will be provided to the Supplier for all devices
required to be wired to terminal blocks. The Supplier shall provide an
electronic file including database that contains termination information such
as cabinet tag, terminal blocks, points and drawing No. with sheet No. The
Supplier shall confirm the field structure and design of database to the A/E
prior to submittal. The Supplier shall prepare his wiring diagrams and install
the internal wiring according to this information. Devices which are wired at
the site using pre-fabricated plug connected cables will also be included in the
Buyer's wiring information. The scope of supply for wiring is shown on
Attachment 4-6.
b. Installation
b1. Interconnecting wiring between devices within the workstations, consoles and
panels and between shipping sections shall be routed inside the respective
enclosures. Interconnection wiring shall be factory installed and terminated
and then rolled back for shipment and field re-installation.
b2. Each wire installed in the console and panel shall be identified at each end by
means of a nonmetallic sleeve or similar permanent type marker, except for
short visible jumpers which can have one wire marker in the middle of the
jumper. Each wire that runs in raceways, wireways, etc. shall be identified at
both ends regardless of length.
b3. Wiring shall be routed in wireways or shall be neatly grouped in bundles using
nonmetallic wiring cleats or bands with substantial supports to secure the
bundles to the structure adequately for seismic qualification.
b4. Lacing of conductors is not acceptable.
b5. Wires shall not be spliced or tapped between terminal points.
b6. All series-connected devices shall be connected in the sequence shown on the
Buyer's wiring information.
4-113

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
b7. Where wiring is installed in wireways or troughs, the edges of the cutouts
through which the wires pass shall be suitably protected or grommeted to
protect the wire insulation from cuts or nicks.
b8. Wiring and components shall be arranged such that instrument or device may
be removed and/or service without unduly disturbing the wiring. No wire shall
be routed across the face or rear of an instrument, connector, terminal block,
or device in a manner which will prevent the opening of covers or obstruct
access to leads, terminals or instruments.
b9. Wire extensions from wireways or bundles to instruments shall be neatly
formed, attached and secured to the workstations, consoles and panels with
wire cleats. Bends in the wiring shall be carefully made in such a manner that
the insulation or cover is not damaged and wire/cable manufacturers'
minimum bending radii are not violated. Care shall be used in removing
insulation from the wire to avoid wire cuts or nicks.
b10. Wires from voltage transformer secondary circuits shall be bundled and routed
separately from other circuits. Wiring of current transformer circuits shall also
be separated.
b11. Supplier shall make provisions and supply the necessary drawings for conduit
interfaces at the points of cable entry to the workstations, consoles and panels
structure.
b12. Where top and bottom entry is used, vertical wireways shall be located over
floor openings to allow Buyer's cables to have a clear run direct to the terminal
blocks or instrument devices.
b13. Unless otherwise specified, prefabricated cables, coaxial, triaxial and
thermocouple wires will be run by the Buyer directly to the instrument device
terminals. Space, wireways, and supports for these cables shall be provided by
the Supplier. Buyer will supply information concerning number of cables,
cable size and location of cable entry.
b14. The Supplier shall not provide raceway external to the workstations, consoles
and panels for the Buyer's field-run cables.
b15. Power wiring for receptacles, light switch, lights and communication
equipments shall be run in EMT or rigid steel conduit with wiring connected
to terminal blocks separate from those used for instruments and devices.
4-114

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
b16. Wiring shall be arranged to permit future changes or additions with a
minimum of relocation of existing wiring.
b17. Power, control and instrument (low level signal) shall be wired separately on
physically separate terminal blocks.
c. Wire Type
c1. The workstations, consoles and panels wiring shall be single conductor,
unshielded, class B stranded copper unless specified otherwise. The wire shall
be rated for 90 C insulation as a minimum. The conductor size shall be as
follows:
Application (Typical) Minimum Conductor Size
General purpose panel wiring, No. 14 AWG stranded
Control switches, relays, indicating
lights
Instrumentation analog signals No. 16 AWG stranded
High-current(15 to 25A) load No. 10 AWG stranded
distribution circuits
Two-conductor twisted shielded , Twisted shielded pair, each
pair such as computer signals, low- equivalent to No. 18 AWG
level inputs, etc. stranded, shielded
Thermocouple Cable No. 16 AWG stranded
c2. The conductor insulation level shall be 600V. Insulation material shall be
cross-linked polyethylene or EPR, type SIS or 150 C tefzel with wire sized for
90 C wire capacity and shall be capable of passing the flame test of IEEE 383.
c3. Use of mineral insulted cables or any other special cable shall be approved by
the Buyer.
4-115

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
d. Terminal Connection
d1. All internal wiring which terminates on terminal blocks, except prefabricated
cables, coaxial or triaxial cables, thermocouple wires, and in some cases
shielded cables, shall be made with ring-tongue terminals with insulated
ferrules fastened to the contact strips of terminal blocks with machine screws.
Spade, slotted spade, flanged spade, hook terminals, or terminals of the quick
disconnect type are not acceptable. Termination design shall be in accordance
with Appendix 4P.
d2. Mating plug terminations on Supplier-supplied instruments or devices shall be
provided for Buyer's field installation on the incoming cable when required by
the Buyer. These plugs shall be sized for Buyer's cable diameters and
conductor size.
d3. All low-level signal wiring shall be run separately from power or control
wiring and shall not terminate on terminal blocks used for power or control
circuit terminations.
d4. All control wiring shall be run separately from power wiring and shall not
terminate on terminal block used for power wiring.
d5. Buyer's control wiring for the control of the components and the status or
position indication feedback between MCC, L/C, SWGR and PCMS will be
used one multi-conductors control cable included 120Vac and 24Vdc or
48Vdc on-off signals, respectively. Supplier shall accommodate the Buyer's
control wiring conditions.
e. Shielding
e1. Wire shields shall not be grounded, unless otherwise specified, at both the
device and at the terminal block end of the cable.
e2. Wire shields shall be connected by the Supplier to a point on the terminal
block adjacent to the active conductor points so that Buyer can connect the
shield of the incoming cable to that point and effectively continue the
shielding up to the device.
e3. Buyer's supplied instrument cables shall be the copper mylar shield cables
connected to the PCMS, however no shields on control cables.
4-116

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
f. Terminal Blocks
f1. Terminal block requirements shall be in accordance with Appendix 4P. All
terminal blocks shall have covers. PVC materials are not acceptable for
terminal block covers.
f2. Terminal blocks shall have at least 10 percent spare unused points.
Arrangement shall be such that each terminal strips at the bottom will have its
approximate proportion of spares. The spare terminals shall be properly
identified on the Supplier internal connection diagrams.
f3. Terminal blocks shall be grouped by cable designation and segregated
according to circuit voltage. Terminal block groupings shall also meet the
requirements of protective and safety circuits. The first terminal connections
shall be no less than 18 inches from the bottom of the cabinet so that the
incoming cables can be properly supported and will not prevent access to the
lower terminals.
f4. All workstations, consoles and panels wiring for connection to external
circuits shall be wired to terminal blocks unless otherwise specified herein.
One side of each field con ection terminal block shall be reserved exclusively
for field use.
These terminal blocks shall be rigidly mounted and located in the workstations,
consoles and panels to permit ease in maintenance or testing and the entry of
all cables. The blocks shall be located to provide adequate space for entrance
and termination of the external cables. The location will be subject to
acceptance by the Buyer. Power cable terminal blocks shall be separated from
those used for instruments and controls. Terminal block shall be suitable to the
size of external wirings and be approved by the Buyer.
f5. No more than two wires installed by the Supplier shall be connected to one
terminal point.
f6. When Buyer's wiring informations show more than one wire connected to one
wiring point, a sufficient number of terminal points shall be jumpered together
internally to allow connection of only one wire per terminal point on the
outgoing side of the terminal blocks.
f7. Identification of terminal blocks and terminal points shall be alphanumeric
with each terminal block having a unique identifying letter(s).
4-117

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
f8. Terminal points shall be identified on the marking strip with the Buyer's wire
numbers.
f9. Complete terminal block identification as well as wire identification shall be
shown on Supplier's wiring diagrams. Terminal block covers shall be marked
by the Supplier with the terminal block identification number.
g. Ground Buses and Grounding
g1. 1/4-inch by 1-inch (minimum) copper ground bus shall be installed inside near
the bottom of all consoles and panels structure. This safety ground bus shall be
mechanically and electrically connected to the workstations, consoles and
panels structure. The shield ground bus shall be used for grounding
instrumentation cable shields in accordance with IEEE 1050.
g2. The ground buses shall extend the entire length of each console and panel and
be furnished with splice sections for interconnection of the buses to mating
sections.
g3. A NEMA two-hole compression-type lug each end of each ground bus
sections for connection of 100 sq. mm bare stranded copper ground cable.
g4. The cases of all instruments and switching devices shall be grounded
effectively to the console & panel steel structure.
g5. When Buyer indicates a definite ground at the workstations, consoles and
panels, a single wire for each circuit thus grounded shall be run independently
to the ground bus and fastened thereto with a drilled and tapped connection.
Each ground point shall be readily accessible for removal, testing, and
replacement.
h. Receptacles, Lighting, and Telephone Jacks
h1. Duplex grounding type, convenience receptacles shall be provided in the back
section of each workstations, consoles and panels.
h2. Each receptacle will be energized from Buyer's 120 Vac, single-phase, 60 Hz,
lighting system supply. Each receptacle will be 15A.
h3. Receptacle ground terminal shall be connected to the workstations,
consoles and panels ground bus.
4-118

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
h4. The interior of each workstation, console and panel shall be lighted by
suitably located, shielded and guarded, incandescent fixtures with lamps.
Illumination in each workstation, console and panel shall be a minimum of 50
foot candles with doors closed.
h5. Fixtures and lamps shall be suitable for use on Buyer's 120 Vac, single-phase,
60 Hz lighting system supply.
h6. Fixtures shall be controlled from conveniently located switches. The fixtures
and switches shall be engineered and located inside the panel by the Supplier,
subject to Buyer's acceptance.
h7. Sound powered telephone jacks, paging phones and other communication
plugs as deemed necessary by the Buyer including steel outlet boxes, covers,
and conduits, shall be installed at the workstations and console. The size and
mounting information will be provided after contract award.
C. MATERIALS
1. Because of the interchangeability of system components such as VDU, control circuit
cards, I/O cards, relays, and power supply components, all such components shall be
designed, tested, and documented for use.
2. The contacts of the control switches supplied by the Supplier shall be gold plated.
3. The use of asbestos in the manufacture of any component purchased under this
Specification shall be prohibited.
4. All of the Integrated Circuit(IC) components shall be Industrial Grade, as a minimum.
The temperature ratings for industrial grade components are in the range from 0ºC to
85ºC (32ºF to 185ºF).
5. Other electrical and electronic component shall be of the high quality and accuracy
similar to or better than IC component.
4-119

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
D. SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Preliminary Engineering
a. Immediately after award, engineering kick-off meetings shall be held to develop
preliminary engineering information required by the Supplier and the Buyer. This
information shall include:
a1. General clarification of Specification requirements and implementation
methods.
a2. Review of system architecture
a3. Additional preliminary information required by the Supplier.
a4. Review and revision of typical control logic diagrams provided in the
Specification.
a5. Review and revision of typical schematic diagrams provided in the
Specification.
a6. Number of conductors required for the cable to each facility equipment.
a7. System cabinet size and construction.
a9. Location of facility process system areas within the system cabinets.
a10. System cabinet field wiring entrance requirements and termination method.
a11. System cabinet power supply system arrangement, power source and
requirements including output contact rating.
a12. Heat Dissipation and cabinet cooling method.
a13. Design, review, and acceptance of soft control, Prototype modules are
required for the meeting.
a14. Design, review, and acceptance of typical logic circuit designs, and
input/output interface, etc, Prototype circuits and simulation demonstration
shall be provided for the meeting.
4-120

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.06 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
a15. Schedule for release of approved drawings for detailed design and
construction.
a16. Schedule for delivery of prefabricated cable cutting lengths.
a17. Review of type and content of engineering documents to be provided by the
Supplier.
a18. Schedule and discussion for the data communication interface test and test
procedure between DCS and other control systems.
a19. Schedule for delivery.
a20. Information, documents, design drawings and engineering data needed by the
Supplier from the Buyer.
a21. Schedule for demonstration of the DCS hardware and software at Supplier's
facility.
b. After the preliminary engineering approach is established, the Supplier shall proceed
with general system design and construction. Detailed design and construction
related to individual functional circuits shall not proceed until the latest dates critical
to maintaining the schedule or earlier release by the Buyer. This method will
minimize the transmission of preliminary drawings by the Buyer and rework by the
Supplier.
c. Should it become apparent that the system design conflicts with the requirements of
the standards, the Supplier shall immediately bring such conflicts to the attention of
the Buyer and the manufacture of that portion of the equipment affected shall be
stopped until the conflict is resolved with the Buyer.
4-121

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.07 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
A. GENERAL
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
All miscellaneous instrumentations and controls furnished by the Supplier shall comply with
the requirements delineated in Appendix 4S.
B. INSTRUMENT NUMBERS AND DATA SHEETS
1. The Supplier shall tag all instrument and control devices with Buyer's instrument
number.
2. The Supplier shall furnish detailed specification, calibration and setpoint data for all
instrument and control devices furnished factory mounted on the equipment and devices
furnished loose for mounting by the Buyer. For all analog control loops, Supplier shall
provide initial factory settings of loop tuning parameters such as gain, bias, time setting,
etc. and detailed instructions on subsequent loop tuning procedures at the site by the
Buyer's startup personnel. This data may be submitted in a Supplier standard format.
3. The data furnished by the Supplier will be included in the Buyer's Instrument Index.
Therefore, it shall be furnished in the format that is compatible with the index format as
follows using the form attached in Appendix 4S.
a. Instrument numbers will be assigned by the Buyer. The Supplier shall use the
assigned number on all tags and in all references to the instrument on drawings,
correspondence, manuals, reports, etc.
b. The Supplier shall furnish the panel mounted device list including the instrument
specification, calibration, tagging data, etc.
4-122

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.08 SURFACE PREPARATION AND COATING
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
A. GENERAL
1. The coating requirements specified herein are applicable for the exposed ferrous metal
surfaces both interior and exterior of PCMS.
2. The following surfaces shall not be coated unless otherwise indicated.
a. Stainless steel
b. Galvanized steel
c. Machined or wearing surfaces (a suitable shipping and storage preservative is
required.)
3. Following requirements shall be applicable for the panels and consoles.
a. The finish coating material of equipment/components which will be located in the
Main Control Room shall be non-glare type.
b. The Supplier shall submit the selected finish color chips illustrating the color and
gloss for approval prior to application.
c. To assure uniformity of color shade and gloss, only one coating manufacturer's
material shall be used for exterior surfaces of all board and panel placed in one
given location. To further assure uniformity of color of each board and panel
section, all final finish materials shall be of the same batch.
4. Manufacturer's standard surface preparation, application and coating system should be
applied with the concurrence of the Buyer. Supplier shall submit the surface preparation
and coating procedure with the coating manufacturer's technical data sheets of the
proposed coating system for review prior to the start of coating work.
B. FINISH COLOR
1. Color of finish coat shall be as follows:
a. Exterior surface color:
Equipment/Component Color Munsell No.*
Workstation & Console Warm Grey2 8.4Y 8.3/0.5
Control Cabinet Light Yellowish 5Y 7/1
Grey
4-123

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.08 SURFACE PREPARATION AND COATING (CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
b. Interior surfaces color shall be the same as front surface color.
* Munsell Color, Macbeth, Division of Kollmorgen Corp., Baltimore, Maryland 21218,
latest edition
C. INSPECTION
The Supplier shall perform the following inspection;
1. Verify compliance with requirements of the coating manufacturer's specification
2. Inspect prepared surfaces immediately before application of the coating. Coating
application shall proceed only when results of the inspection are acceptable to Supplier's
inspector.
3. Check the dry film thickness of coating using SSPC-PA2.
4. Check relative humidity and temperature to allow the specified curing period.
D. MATERIAL FOR TOUCH UP
The Supplier shall provide to the buyer, with the shipment of the equipment, components, or
materials to the project site, one-gallon container(s) minimum of each coating material to be
used for the touch up work, including required solvents. The Supplier shall label each
container with the color name, batch number, and shelf life expiration date. Supplier shall
also attach the coating manufacturer's product identify certification record and application
instructions.
4-124

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.09 NAMEPLATES
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
A. All cabinets shall have laminated nameplates attached with stainless steel machine screws at
the top of the cabinet door, front & back. The nameplate color, size and engraving shall be in
accordance with Appendix 4U.
B. All devices including panel mounted devices such as power supply components, circuit
breakers, functional circuits, cards, terminal blocks and those within the cabinets shall be
identified with numbers assigned by the Buyer. The identification shall be permanently attached
and visible. The same number shall be indelibly affixed to the panel adjacent to the device.
C. The identification of components to be mounted on the Buyer's control panels shall include
purchase order number, item number and Buyer-Assigned tag number in accordance with
Appendix 4T.
D. All prefabricated cables shall be identified at both ends with a metallic or non-flammable cable
tag (marker) with identifying number as designated by the Buyer.
4-125

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.10 INSPECTION AND TESTING
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
A. GENERAL
1. The Supplier shall conduct and be responsible for the shop inspections and shop tests called
for in the Specification as well as the applicable codes and standards, and shall furnish all
facilities necessary for the performance of such tests.
2. The Buyer has the right to inspect and witness the Supplier’s manufacturing and testing
operations for the equipment purchased in accordance with Sections 1 and 2, Attachment
and Appendix 4B of this Specification.
3. Buyer shall be given the opportunity to witness the final inspection of all equipment prior to
the release for shipment.
4. The equipment/materials which have been subject to destructive design test(s) such as
seismic qualification test, fire retardant test, etc. shall not be delivered, unless it can be
demonstrated by analysis, or other means acceptable to the Buyer, that the accumulated
stress cycles already experienced by the tested equipment will not degrade, in any way, its
ability to perform its function.
5. The Supplier shall submit records and reports for all tests and inspections required by this
Specification. These records and reports shall be prepared promptly after each test or
inspection and shall be transmitted to Buyer prior to shipment of the equipment to the
project site.
B. INSPECTION AND TESTING
1. Inspection
a. The tests shall be witnessed by the Buyer’s representative. The Supplier shall notify
the Buyer at least fifteen working days in advance so that the arrangements can be
made to witness the tests.
b. The Buyer’s inspection or the waiving of inspection of the tests shall in no way relieve
the Supplier from furnishing the equipment in accordance with this Specification.
c. Material/Equipment shall not be prepared for the shipment or shipped before the
Buyer has either inspected the Material/Equipment or waived the inspection.
4-126

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.10 INSPECTION AND TESTING(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
d. The Buyer’s shop inspector shall have access to the work specified herein. The
inspector shall have authority to refuse release of shipment, if, in the inspector’s
opinion, the design, intent or requirements of the specification have not been fulfilled,
or the certified copies of required inspection or test results are not available for review.
He will indicate tests and inspections he wants to witness after the review of
Supplier’s work plan.
The Supplier shall give at least fifteen working days of advanced notice from the
schedule dates for performance of tests to be witnessed for a final inspection before
the shipment.
2. Testing
a. Electrical Tests
a1. Point to point continuity test
System electrical tests shall include 100 percent point-to-point continuity test and
electrical insulation test of all wiring including prefabricated cables and plug
connectors.
a2. Insulation Test
High potential dielectric test shall be conducted on all control circuit wiring and
AC and DC power wiring. 1500 Vdc or 1500 Vac peak 60Hz to ground, shall
be applied for 1 minute after all circuit grounds have been disconnected. The
Supplier shall be responsible for proper protection of instruments, devices and
components that may be damaged by high voltage tests.
a3. Surge withstand capability
Surge withstand capability tests shall be performed on relay systems and
electronic components in accordance with ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1, C37.90.2 and
ANSI 62.45(1997), ANSI/IEEE C62.41(1991), C62.36(1991).
a4. EFT and burst immunity test
Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test shall be performed to justify
immunity of electrical and electronic equipment when subjected to repetitive fast
transients/bursts on power supply, signal and control port in accordance with IEC
61000-4-4,1995.
4-127

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.10 INSPECTION AND TESTING(CONT.)
a5. EMI/RFI/ESD/SWC test
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
Electrostatic Discharge test, conducted immunity to RFI field test and Surge
withstand capability test shall be performed in accordance with IEC 61000- 4-2,
61000-4-3, 610004-4, 61000-4-5 and 61000-4-12.
b. Components/Assemblies Reliability
b1. Aging Qualification
Maximum reliability is to be achieved through extensive use of high-quality
pretested components and assemblies. Chips are to be subject to thermal shock
preconditioning and burn-in test. Supplier shall provide documentation
supporting component reliability tests. It is expected Supplier’s prototype system
has undergone burned-in tests which as a minimum included system functional
tests at 122 ° F and 50 ° F for at least 8 HRs each. Supplier shall provide
documentation for such tests identifying all components and assemblies type and
model no. which are equivalent to the hardware to be provided under this
purchase order.
Mechanical components that are cyclic in nature, such as switches, relays, circuit
breakers, shall undergo a cyclic type test prior to qualification testing of the
system.
b2. Heat Test
The Supplier shall provide an enclosure suitable for elevating the ambient
temperature. The entire system shall be operated continuously without
malfunction for a-24-hour period at an ambient temperature of 104 °F. Upon
conclusion of this heat test, the system shall be thoroughly retested at normal
room temperature to verify that no malfunctions exist. Upon detection of any
malfunction during the heat test or subsequent verification tests, the malfunction
shall be corrected and the entire heat test shall be repeated.
4-128

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.10 INSPECTION AND TESTING(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
c. Integrated System Test (IST)
Prior to the factory acceptance test, the completely integrated PCMS hardware and
software including all interconnecting cables, fiber-optic communication cables and
connecting Workstation shall undergo comprehensive operational and diagnostic tests.
These tests shall verify the performance of every input and output, including spare
inputs and outputs, all data acquisition and communication functions, all data
communication ports. Supplier shall submit hardware and software Integration Plan
and detailed test procedures for hardware and software integration in his proposal.
These shall include but not be limited to the followings :
c1. Comprehensive physical configuration audit will be performed, which will
include a detailed review and confirmation of the system as built configuration
and documentation.
c2. Validation of test equipment, test inputs and outputs including all power supplies
(sources) and protective devices comprehensive review of test documentation
and test procedures.
c3. Conduct point-by-point data base verification to ensure that all signals are
properly converted at the front-end I/O cards in the cabinets. This shall include
input/output linearity and accuracy test.
c4. Verification of all standard and custom software including utility functions and
operating software that are provided as part of the system. This shall include
configuration of each type of functional loop defined by logic diagram, control
and instrumentation diagram.
c5. Verification of proper function and accuracy of all panel mounted devices.
c6. Verification of system restart capability following power failure and replacement
of printed circuit boards.
c7. Verification of communication protocols and proper data transmission between
PCMS and other packages provided by other vendors.
c8. Demonstrate that no common mode failure exist between any two independent
circuits and functions.
4-129

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.10 INSPECTION AND TESTING(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
d. Stability Test
Following successful integrated system test (including any necessary retests following
hardware/software changes resulting from the integrated system test), the fully
assembled system shall be subject to 200 hours continuous stability and drift test under
simulated operating conditions. The temperature inside the cabinets shall be monitored
and shall be verified in accordance with paragraph 4.05.A.20 in this specification
during this test. Simulated steady state analog inputs and contact closure inputs shall
be connected to the terminals in the cabinets. Analog and digital outputs shall be
monitored during this test. Computerized logging of data shall be required at periodic
intervals, during the 200 hours test to verify system compliance with the accuracy and
stability specifications.
Should a component failure occur during the test, following replacement of the part,
the test period shall be extended for another 200 hours. This test is in addition to the
standard printed circuit board burn-in test or the heat run test of the vendor prototype
systems.
e. Factory Acceptance Test
Prior to shipment, the completely assembled PCMS shall be operationally and
functionally tested at the Supplier’s factory in the presence of the Buyer’s
representative. This test shall demonstrate that the system hardware and software
performs in accordance with the system design specification. The factory acceptance
test shall include as a minimum the following:
e1. Demonstrate proper function of control switch modules and Workstations.
e2. Demonstrate proper function of all software/firmware including all types of test
cases with normal and abnormal data.
e3. Demonstrate proper operation of all data communication channels with full load.
◦ Data communication channel within PCMS
◦ Data communication with other packages
e4. Demonstrate all operator/interface functions, including response to erroneous or
incorrect operator entries.
e5. Simulate failure situations and failover of each system/subsystem device that has
backup/redundant unit.
4-130

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.10 INSPECTION AND TESTING(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
e6. Demonstrate the use of online and offline diagnostics and test programs.
e7. Simulate system alarms and status change conditions.
e8. Simulate field inputs both digital and analog and vary analog input over entire
input range to confirm I/O processing accuracy, I/O card linearity and data
display.
e9. Demonstrate I/O signal processing time of the system, one for only the PCMS
and another one for the package with other packages together.
e10. Demonstrate the system response time verification test to confirm the theoretical
system response time.
e11. Demonstrate system operation under high and low power source voltage
condition.
e12. Demonstrate system operation with either one of the two power sources failure.
e13. Demonstrate that a failure or maintenance of a circuit does not affect other
functional circuits.
e14. Demonstrate cabinet over temperature alarm and thermostat settings in each
system cabinets.
e15. The Supplier shall provide all test procedures per App. 4D, TP-A through D for
review and approval by the Buyer at lest 4 weeks prior to the test. The factory
acceptance test procedure shall provide a step-by-step method for verifying
system functional requirements including data acquisition; inputs and outputs;
system response time and scanning time; microprocessor algorithms and
calculations; operation of all functional circuits; and data communication and
restart capability. It shall be possible to verify system response to postulated
firmware/ software and hardware failure, and logic functions. The Buyer shall
have the right to modify, and/or expand the test procedures to ensure complete
system testing is accomplished.
e16. Changes necessary for the system to perform the specified functions shall be
made permanently and shall be retested before completion of the test activity.
These changes shall be documented and included with the test results.
4-131

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.10 INSPECTION AND TESTING(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
e17. All costs arising from the factory tests including replacement of damaged
material shall be borne by the Supplier. Supplier shall submit the repair
verification reports.
e18. The Supplier shall submit the written test report.
e19. The tests on panel mounted instruments shall include the following:
◦ The Supplier shall inspect for any damage occurred during shipment from
sub-supplier and test all instruments completely, including calibration
accuracy, drift and stability.
C. WITNESS AND HOLD POINTS
1. The items covered by this specification shall be subject to at least the minimum level of
Quality Surveillance actions as indicated in the witness and hold point lists attached to this
specification.
2. However, the actual and detailed witness and hold points will be decided when the Buyer
reviews and confirms the Supplier’s quality plan specified in the Appendix 4B of this
specification.
D. FIELD PERFORMANCE TESTING
1. After the PCMS system installation at the site, the completely assembled and wired system
shall undergo a verification test to be performed by the Supplier. The purpose of this test is
to verify that the PCMS did not suffer damages during shipment and that integrated system
operates properly in the field environment. This test shall include as a minimum the
following;
a. System energizing and verification of proper power supply values at all test points
within the PCMS including each internal power distribution bus.
b. Verification of all system functions not tested during the factory acceptance test as
well as the integrated system test.
c. Verification of proper communication protocols and data transmission between :
c1. PCMS cabinets including redundant communication links.
c2. PCMS and other packages verification that the system addresses (node
addresses) are correct.
c3. Redundant communication links including PCMS system fail-over testing.
4-132

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.10 INSPECTION AND TESTING(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
d. Verification of proper interface and control functions between;
d1. PCMS and field control devices (a sample of each type per each system cabinet).
e. Verification of the PCMS data processing time and loading while communicating with
full complement of other vendor’s systems.
f. Verification of system response to postulated software and hardware failures, logic
functions and power supply failure of the PCMS.
2. The Supplier shall provide a comprehensive field performance test procedure for Buyer
approval two (2) months prior to system shipment to the site.
3. The Supplier shall recommend any additional system tests to be included in Buyer’s
preoperational system acceptance test procedures.
4. The field performance testing will be performed during start-up operation. The schedule
will be given to the Supplier three (3) months prior to the test date by the Buyer.
5. The result of the field performance test shall be approved by the Buyer with notice of
acceptance.
4-133

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.11 SHIPPING REQUIREMENTS
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
A. GENERAL
1. The items procured by this specification are to be shipped, handled, stored, packaged and
marked in accordance with Section 2 and Subpart 2.2 of ASME NQA-1, Part II. The
ASME NQA-1, Part II, Subpart 2.2 classification of each item is designated below.
Item Level
All Equipment B
2. Instruction covering handling, storage, installation and maintenance at construction site
shall be prepared and submitted by the Supplier.
3. Supplier shall provide Buyer with required storage procedures and environmental control
necessary to store the spare parts at the jobsite.
B. SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
1. Openings shall be covered or plugged during shipment and storage. Exposed screw
threads shall be protected with plastic caps or plugs.
2. The equipment shall be packed, crated, and/or braced to protect it during transit and
storage.
3. A desiccant shall be packaged with equipment subject to damage from moisture.
Equipment with internal desiccants shall be so tagged.
4. The packaging shall be clearly labeled with the equipment name and number, the
Purchase Order number, and other information required by site and engineering.
5. Freestanding cabinets shall include removable provisions for lifting and shall be crated on
skids.
6. Internal devices shall be braced as required to protect against damage in shipping.
7. Instruction covering handling, storage, installation, and maintenance at construction site
shall be prepared and submitted by Supplier.
4-134

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.12 INSTRUCTION MANUALS
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
A. ERECTION INFORMATION
1. The Supplier shall, when requested, furnish to the Buyer for the installation of the
equipment, a detailed scope of the work involved in the complete erection of this equipment,
including all accessories and appurtenances furnished therewith.
2. This information shall include all necessary drawings and a comprehensive outline as to the
extent of field work required; and as to all temporary false work, scaffolding, blocking,
shoring, heating, disassembling, reassembling, welding, bolting, cleaning, checking,
inspection, painting, testing, etc., required to be done by the Construction Contractor.
B. INSTRUCTION MANUALS
1. Supplier shall furnish twenty (20) bound sets to the Buyer site and six (6) bound sets to the
A/E of instruction manuals for all equipment furnished by Supplier. Such instruction
books shall include, but are not limited to, manufacturers' instruction books and leaflets, and
other instruction literatures containing the following information:
a. Handling and Storage Instructions.
b. Installation instructions, including disassembly and assembly procedure(s).
c. As built general arrangement, assembly and erection drawings.
d. Compete start-up, adjustment, calibration (functional verification) procedure, operation,
troubleshooting, preventive maintenance and maintenance instructions.
e. Warranted performance data.
f. Complete material/parts list(s).
g. Calibration curves of non-liner devices.
h. Programming guide and diagnostics procedures.
i. Test instructions.
2. Parts List :
Parts List: The instruction manual shall include complete parts listing for the equipment.
The parts list using Microsoft Excel shall be inclusive for and applicable to all
equipment, components, auxiliaries, accessories and materials being furnished under the
contract. Each part shall be completely identified by part number, part description, part
classification and drawing references in accordance with Appendix 4X.
4-135

SECTION 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4.12 INSTRUCTION MANUALS(CONT.)
Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
3. The installation instructions, disassembly and assembly procedure(s), assembly drawing(s),
erection drawing(s) and material/parts list(s) shall be completely and consistently cross-
referenced by drawing number, part number, piece mark number, etc.
4. Each instruction book shall have an index listing of all leaflets, etc., in the same order as
they appear, in the book. Individual submittal of various manufacturers' instruction books,
etc., will not be acceptable. The index listing shall also identify the specific equipment,
including all furnished options and accessories that the instruction literature is to cover.
5. Maintenance/Surveillance program and preventive maintenance program should assure that
equipment will operate on demand to meet the performance requirements. This program
shall include acceptance criteria to ensure that the design qualified life has not suffered
thermal and cyclic degradation resulting from the accumulated stresses triggered by the
specified environmental condition.
6. The maintenance instruction shall include the following information:
a. Test method, trouble-shooting method and recommended test equipment necessary to
verify/ measure the performance degradation of component.
b. Maintenance schedule and preventive maintenance schedule.
c. Corrective maintenance method.
4-136 (Final)

ATTACHMENT 4-1 Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
WITNESS POINT
Page 1 of 1
The following tests / operations are to be witnessed by Buyer’s representative on a first operation basis.
Witnessing of these activities after acceptable first operation will be on a representative sample basis
unless otherwise directed below.
Witness Point(s) Sample Size Alternative
1. Dimension/Visual Inspection of Cabinets in
Accordance with the Technical
Specification and Supplier Drawings
2. In-Process Inspection During Device/
Equipment Installation and Wiring in
Accordance with the Technical
Specification and Supplier Drawings.
3. Surface Preparation and Coating Inspection
4. Software Verification and Validation
Process, Test and Milestones.
4-1-1 (Final)

ATTACHMENT 4-2 Spec. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
HOLD POINT
Page 1 of 1
The following tests / operations are to be witnessed by Buyer’s representative on a 100% basis, unless
otherwise directed below. Waiver of Hold Points must be given by Buyer.
Hold Point(s) Sample Size Alternative
1. Critical Software Module Test
2. Factory Acceptance Test
3. Actual Communication Interface Test
Between PCMS and other systems
4. Integrated System Test
5. Stability Test
6. Electrical Test
7. Component/Assemblies Reliability Test
8. Final Inspection
9. Review and Sign-Off of Quality
Verification Documentation
10. Packaging Inspection
11. Release for Shipment
4-2-1 (Final)

ATTACHMENT 4-3 Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SYSTEM GENERAL CONFIGURATION
No. Drawing No. Title
1 Fig. 1 PCMS Overview Diagram
Page 1 of 1
TC 4-3-1 (Final)

ATTACHMENT 4-3 Spec.: 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
SYSTEM GENERAL CONFIGURATION
Fig. 1 PCMS Overview Diagram
4-3-1 (Final)

ATTACHMENT 4-4
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM LIST
Spec : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
Drawing No. Title
1 1-700-J158-001 Control Logic Diagram Legend and General Notes
2 1-700-J158-002 Control Logic Diagram Legend and General Notes
Typical PCMS Control Logic Diagram Medium Voltage
3 1-700-J158-003
Switchgear and Load Center Circuit & Notes
Typical PCMS Control Logic Diagram Medium Voltage
4 1-700-J158-004
Switchgear and Load Center Circuit & Notes
Typical PCMS Control Logic Diagram Reversing Motor Starter
5 1-700-J158-005
Circuits & Notes
Typical PCMS Control Logic Diagram Reversing Motor Starter
6 1-700-J158-006
Circuits & Notes
Typical PCMS Control Logic Diagram Non-Reversing Motor
7 1-700-J158-007
Starter Circuits & Notes
Typical PCMS Control Logic Diagram Non-Reversing Motor
8 1-700-J158-008
Starter Circuits & Notes
Typical PCMS Control Logic Diagram Solenoid Valve Circuits &
9 1-700-J158-009
Notes
Typical PCMS Control Logic Diagram Solenoid Valve Circuits &
10 1-700-J158-010
Notes
Typical PCMS Control Logic Diagram Control Mode Transfer
11 1-700-J158-011
Circuits & Notes
Typical PCMS Control Logic Diagram Control Mode Transfer
12 1-700-J158-012
Circuits & Notes
Typical PCMS Control Logic Diagram Control Electro-Hydraulic
13 1-700-J158-013
Motor Damper Circuits & Notes
Typical PCMS Control Logic Diagram Control Electro-Hydraulic
14 1-700-J158-014
Motor Damper Circuits & Notes
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (DE) RADIOACTIVE DRAIN
15 0-481-J158-000
SYSTEM
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (DE) 2ND RADWASTE BLDG.
16 0-481-J158-001
SUMP PUMPS
17 0-481-J158-002 CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (DE) SYSTEM ALARM
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (WM) MAKE-UP
18 0-582-J158-000
DEMINERALIZER SYSTEM
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (WM) DEMI. WATER
19 0-582-J158-001
TRANSFER PUMPS
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (WM) DEMI. WATER
20 0-582-J158-002
STORAGE TANK ISOLATION VALVE
21 0-582-J158-003 CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (WM) SYSTEM ALARM
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (WM) DOMESTIC WATER
22 0-582-J158-004
FEED PUMPS
TC 4-4-1

ATTACHMENT 4-4
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM LIST
Spec : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
Drawing No. Title
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (WD) DOMESTIC WATER
23 0-585-J158-000
SYSTEM
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (WD) PROCESS WATER
24 0-585-J158-001
SUPPLY PUMPS
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (WD) DOMESTIC WATER
25 0-585-J158-002
STORAGE TANK ISOLATION VALVE
26 0-585-J158-003 CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (WD) SYSTEM ALARM
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (VH) RADWASTE R/ST. BLDG
27 0-611-J158-000
HVAC
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (VH) RADWASTE R/ST. BLDG
28 0-611-J158-001
SUPPLY AHU FAN
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (VH) RADWASTE R/ST. BLDG
29 0-611-J158-002
EXH. FAN
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (VH) SUPPLY AHU ACCU
30 0-611-J158-003
HV02
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (VH) RADWASTE R/ST. BLDG
31 0-611-J158-004
EXH. ACU FANS
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (VH) ELECTRIC UNIT
32 0-611-J158-005
HEATERS
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (VH) SUPPLY AHU. ELECT.
33 0-611-J158-006
HEATING COIL
34 0-611-J158-008 CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (VH) SYSTEM ALARM
35 0-611-J158-009 CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (VH) SYSTEM ALARM
36 0-611-J158-010 CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (VH) BATTERY RM EDH
37 0-611-J158-011 CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (VH) FIRE DAMPERS
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (VH) NON-RADIOACTIVE
38 0-611-J158-012
SUMP PUMP RM EXH. FAN
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (ST) SANITARY WATER
39 0-653-J158-000
TRANSFER PUMPS
40 0-653-J158-001 CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (ST) SYSTEM ALARM
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (DM) MISCELLANEOUS
41 0-673-J158-000
BLDG. DRAIN SYSTEM
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (DM) 2ND RADWASTE R/ST.
42 0-673-J158-001
BLDG. SUMP PUMPS
43 0-673-J158-002 CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (DM) SYSTEM ALARM
TC 4-4-2

ATTACHMENT 4-4
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM LIST
Spec : 0-771-J212
Add. 1
Drawing No. Title
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM 480V LOAD CENTER POWER
44 0-824-E158-001
SUPPLY PCB
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM 480V LOAD CENTER POWER
45 0-824-E158-002
SUPPLY PCBS (LC03-C2)
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM 480V LOAD CENTER
46 0-824-E158-003
ALARMS
47 0-826-E158-001 CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM 480V MCC ALARMS
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM 480V MCC DIESEL
48 0-826-E158-002
GENERATOR FEED PCB
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (DC) 125V DC DIST. PANEL &
49 0-841-E158-001
BATT. CHARGER
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (IP) INSTRUMENT POWER
50 0-842-E158-001
SYSTEM ALARM
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM(PR) RADIATION
51 0-761-J158-000
MONITORING SYSTEM
52 0-761-J158-001 CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM(PR) SYSTEM ALARM
TC 4-4-3 (Final)

4 3
2
1
D
C
B
A
FUNCTION
SYMBOL
DEFINITION
MANUAL INPUT
MR
CONTROL SWITCH TAG NO.
MANUAL CONTROL COMMAND.
LOCATION OF CONTROL SWITCH
HS-104 START (SC OR LP)
: MOMENTARY CONTROL SWITCH.
: MAINTAINED CONTROL SWITCH.
SWITCH LOCATION OR CONTROL PANEL NO.
PROCESS INPUT
AND
PA01
PRESS. HI
PS-371
INPUT TO LOGIC EXISTS WHEN PRESSURE
SWITCH "PS-371" OPERATES
ORIGINATING POINT OF PROCESS INPUT(PS-371)
OUTPUT EXISTS ONLY WHEN ALL INPUTS ARE PRESENT.
COINCIDENCE
MATRIX
A/B
OUTPUT EXISTS ONLY WHEN AT LEAST A OUT OF B INPUTS
ARE PRESENT.
OR
NOT
ON DELAY
OFF DELAY
(TIMED MEMORY)
S-R MEMORY
LATCH MEMORY
(OVERRIDE)
ACTUATION SIGNAL
(L)
BLOCK (OVERRIDE) SIGNAL (R)
TOGGLE MEMORY
SPECIAL FUNCTION
OUTPUT EXISTS WHEN ANY ONE OR MORE INPUTS ARE PRESENT.
ON
OFF
S
R
L
R
R
S
S
T
R
FLASHER
PUPF
OUTPUT EXISTS ONLY WHEN INPUT IS NOT PRESENT.
OUTPUT EXISTS ONLY WHEN INPUT HAS BEEN CONTINUOUSLY PRESENT
FOR A PRESET TIME AND REMAINS PRESENT.
OUTPUT EXISTS WHEN INPUT IS PRESENT AND ALSO CONTINUES TO EXIST
FOR A PRESET TIME AFTER THE INPUT IS NOT PRESENT.
SET OUTPUT EXISTS WHEN SET INPUT IS PRESENT AND ALSO CONTINUES
TO EXIST UNTIL THE RESET INPUT IS PRESENT.
RESET OUTPUT EXISTS ONLY WHEN SET OUTPUT IS NOT PRESENT.
A CIRCLE AROUND S INDICATES THAT SET OUTPUT EXISTS WHEN
BOTH SET AND RESET INPUTS ARE PRESENT, OTHERWISE, RESET OUTPUT
EXISTS WHEN BOTH SET AND RESET INPUTS ARE PRESENT.
A DEVICE HAVING MEMORY AND ACTUATING SIGNAL
BLOCK LOGIC FUNCTIONS AS INDICATED BELOW.
OUTPUT EXISTS WHEN LATCH INPUT(ACTUATION) SIGNAL
IS PRESENT AND CONTINUES TO EXISTS UNTIL THE RESET
(BLOCK/OVERRIDE) SIGNAL IS PRESENT. THE LATCH INPUT
IS CONTINUOUSLY BLOCKED EVEN AFTER THE RESET SIGNAL
DISAPPEARS. THE BLOCK CAN BE REMOVED ONLY WHEN
THE ACTUATION SIGNAL IS REACTIUATED.
OUTPUT CHANGES EACH TIME TOGGLE INPUT IS PRESENT.
SET AND RESET OPERATE THE SAME AS FOR THE S-R MEMORY GATE.
THE TOGGLE INPUT IS NOT EFFECTIVE WHEN SET OR RESET INPUTS
ARE PRESENT.
PULSE -OUTPUT EXISTS FOR A PRESET TIME ONLY ONCE WHEN INPUT IS
PRESENT.
FLASHER -FLASHER LOGIC SIGNAL GENERATOR.
POWER UP PULSE LOGIC UNIT.
R-RED -OPERATING, FLOWING OR INCREASING.
LIGHT (DISPLAY ON R G-GREEN -NOT OPERATING, NOT FLOWING OR DECREASING.
PCMS A-AMBER -MANUAL, SYNCHRONIZE OR OPERATOR INFORMATION.
FPD AND SWITCH)
(NOTE 1) Y-YELLOW -TROUBLE/DISABLED
FUNCTION
SYMBOL
PCMS INPUT/OUTPUT
EXTERNAL LOGIC
FANOUT
INPUT
CONNECTION
1
PLC/PCMS
NO CONNECTION
DEFINITION
LOGIC SIGNAL INPUT/OUTPUT FROM/TO PCMS.(HARDWIRED)
LOGIC SIGNAL INPUT/OUTPUT FROM/TO PCMS (DATA COMMUNICATION)
LOGIC TO MORE THAN ONE CIRCUIT BY FIELD WIRING JUMPERS
ON THE PCMS FIELD TERMINAL BLOCKS.
REPRESENTS LOGIC CONNECTION.
BROKEN LINE REPRESENTS LOGIC CONNECTED DIS.
D
ALARM
PCMS
FIELD
COMMUNICATION WITH
OTHER SYSTEM
R
UA
001
LDP
(NOTE 1,3)
ALARM(SC)
PARAMETER(PRESSURE,FLOW...)
ALARM
SEVERITY(LOW,HIGH,...)
LAL
001
ALARM IDENTIFICATION NO. 001
LDP
(NOTE1,3) ALARM GROUP ID.
GENERAL ABBREVIATIONS
MCC
SOL VLV.
PCMS
FPD
LDP
SC
PM01
LP

• MOTOR CONTROL CENTER.
• SOLENOID VALVE.
• PROCESS CONTROL & MONITORING SYSTEM
• FLAT PANEL DISPLAY
• LARGE DISPLAY PANEL
• SOFT CONTROL SWITCH
• OPERATOR WORKSTATION
• LOCAL PANEL

NOTES
1 . LOCATION OF DISPLAY UNIT AND INDICATION.
(PCMS,LDP,SWGR,MCC)
2 . DELETED.
3. NO SUFFIX MEANS THIS ALARM IS ONLY PRESENTED
ON FPD.
C
B
2 05/25/11 AS-BUILT
1 05/13/11 GENERAL REVISION
0 04/30/07 ISSUE FOR CONSTRUCTION
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
CONTINUATION
CONTINUATION
1-700-J158-001
1
LOGIC CONTINUATION ON ANOTHER DRAWING.
4
LOGIC CONTINUATION ON THE SAME DRAWING.
4 3
2
A
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM LEGEND
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
1-700-J158-001
JOB NO.
2A626
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
NNS
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
2
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

4 3
2
1
D
C
B
A
GENERAL NOTES
1. LOGIC SYMBOLS REPRESENT SYSTEM LOGIC FUNCTIONS AND DO NOT NECESSARILY
DUPLICATE CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENT OR DEVICES.
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS DO NOT INHERENTLY IMPLY ENERGIZED, DE-ENERGIZED,
OR OTHER CIRCUIT OPERATION STATES.
2. PROCESS EQUIPMENT WILL CHANGE STATE WHEN A CHANGE IS INITIATED, AND WILL
REMAIN IN THAT STATE UNTIL A CHANGE TO ANOTHER STATE IS INITIATED.
3. PROCESS EQUIPMENT WILL REMAIN IN OR RETURN TO THE ORIGINAL STATE AFTER
A LOSS AND RESTORATION OF CONTROL POWER UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
IN THE CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS, THE FOLLOWING DEFINITION IS USED FOR
CONTROL LOGIC AND EQUIPMENT POWER
A. MOTIVE POWER: POWER THAT MOTIVATES FACILITY EQUIPMENT (SAME AS BUS POWER,
BUS VOLTAGE, ETC)
B. CONTROL POWER: POWER FOR A CONTROL CIRCUIT (SUCH AS MOTOR STARTER,
CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL CIRCUIT, ETC)
C. LOGIC POWER: POWER FOR LOGIC CIRCUIT (SAME AS PCMS LOGIC POWER)
4. INHERENT EQUIPMENT INTERLOCKS SUCH AS CIRCUIT BREAKER INTERNAL CIRCUITS AND
REVERSING STARTER AUXILIARY CONTACT CROSS INTERLOCKS ARE NOT SHOWN.
5. ALL CIRCUIT CONTROLS FUNCTION WHEN CIRCUIT BREAKERS ARE IN THE TEST POSITION
TO ALLOW CIRCUIT TESTING EXCEPT INTERLOCKS WITH OTHER EQUIPMENT.
TEST RACKS ARE AVAILABLE FOR CIRCUIT BREAKER MAINTENANCE.
6. PROCESS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CONTACTS CLOSE WHEN THE STATED LOGIC CONDITION
IS TRUE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
7. THE FOLLOWING REPETITIVE LOGIC FUNCTIONS AND/OR INFORMATION ARE NOT SHOWN ON
INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS(REFER TO TYPICAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS AND
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS).
A. EQUIPMENT SPACE HEATERS.
B. DETAILS OF ELECTRICAL OVERCURRENT, SHORT CIRCUIT, DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION
AND LOCKOUT RELAY.
C. TEST CONTROL SWITCHES THAT ARE USED ONLY WHEN CIRCUIT BREAKERS ARE IN
THE TEST POSITION.
D. THE CELL SWITCH INPUTS AND LOGIC THAT PREVENT INCORRECT OPERATION OF
INTERLOCKED EQUIPMENT WHEN CIRCUIT BREAKERS ARE IN THE TEST POSITION.
E. THE LOGIC THAT CAUSES VALVE AND DAMPER OPEN AND CLOSED POSITION
INDICATING LIGHTS BOTH TO BE ON WHEN IN AN INTERMEDIATE POSITION.
F. THE LOGIC TO OBTAIN GREEN AND/OR RED LIGHT.
G. THE LIMIT AND TORQUE SWITCH LOGIC THAT CAUSES VALVES AND DAMPERS TO
STOP AT THE END OF TRAVEL. THE VALVE TYPE AND REQUIRED ACTIONS WILL BE
NOTED ON INDIVIDUAL LOGIC DIAGRAMS.
H. DETAILS OF THE FOLLOWING COMPONENT CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONS:
1) WIRE NUMBERS.
2) TROUBLE DETECTOR.(REFER TO GENERAL NOTE 10.)
3) DISABLED DETECTOR.(REFER TO GENERAL NOTE 10.)
4) AUTO CONTROL MODE TRANSFER.
5) STANDBY START.
6) TEST AND MAINTENANCE.
7) LAMP TEST CIRCUIT FOR INDIVIDUAL CONTROL MODULE.
8. FOR EQUIPMENT AND INSTRUMENT IDENTIFICATION ABBREVIATIONS SEE P&ID, FLD SYMBOLS
AND LEGEND DRAWINGS.
9. DURING NORMAL FACILITY OPERATION, CONTROL CIRCUITS WITH AUTOMATIC CONTROL
SHOULD NORMALLY BE PLACED IN AUTOMATIC MODE OF OPERATION UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
10. THE TROUBLE CONDITIONS ARE THE CONDITIONS WHERE THE EQUIPMENT DOES NOT PERFORM
AS COMMANDED AFTER A COMMAND IS GIVEN WHILE THE DISABLE CONDITIONS ARE THE EQUIPMENT
OPERATING CONDITION WHERE THE EQUIPMENT IS PREDISPOSITIONED TO BE UNABLE TO PERFORM
IT’S INTENDED FUNCTION.
11. WHEN MORE THAN ONE ITEM OF EQUIPMENT OPERATES IN THE SAME MANNER,
DIFFERENCES IN DEVICES, LOCATION AND CONTINUATION NUMBERS AND POWER
SEGREGATION ARE INDICATED IN A TABLE. A TYPICAL EXAMPLE IS SHOWN BELOW:
EQUIPMENT
NO.
CONTROL
SWITCH NO.
LOCATION OF MONITORING LOCATION OF
CONT. SW. LIGHT NO. MON LIGHT
PROCESS DEVICE
PCMS
CAB NO/SLOT NO.
501
HS-501
LP01
ZL-501
LP01
LS-227
PS-227
PA01-01
502
HS-502
SC ZL-502
SC
LS-226
PS-226
PA01-02
EQUIPMENT
POWER SOURCE
REMARKS
MCC
10 (NOTE B)
(NOTE C)
MCC
11 (NOTE B)
(NOTE C)
NOTE : A. THE ABOVE IS A TYPICAL EXAMPLE AND EACH LOGIC DIAGRAM MAY HAVE A DIFFERENT
COLUMN ORGANIZATION TO BETTER SUIT A PARTICULAR APPLICATION.
B. PCMS TROUBLE AND DISABLED DETECTOR ALARM IDENTIFIERS.
C. THIS COLUMN SHOWS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING INTERFACE DEVICES.
12. ELECTRICAL AND MOTOR THERMAL PROTECTION ALARMS ARE NOT SHOWN ON INDIVIDUAL
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM. THEY MAY BE DESIGNED AND SHOWN ON EACH LOGIC DIAGRAM
WHEN SPECIFICALLY REQUIRED FROM SYSTEM OPERATION. HOWEVER A COMBINED COMMON
ALARM IS PROVIDED FOR ELECTRICAL AND THERMAL PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT ENERGISED
FROM SAME MOTOR CONTROL CENTER OR SWITCHGEAR.
13. EACH WINDOW OF THE CONTROL SWITCH MODULE CONTAINS FOUR(4) LED LIGHTS
AND IT CAN BE SPLIT INTO TWO(2) ZONES, TOP AND BOTTOM WITH TWO(2) LIGHTS
IN EACH ZONE. EACH ZONE COULD BE ENGRAVED WITH DIFFERENT INSCRIPTIONS
AND COULD HAVE DIFFERENT COLORS AS INDICATED ON AN INDIVIDUAL LOGIC
DIAGRAM. WHEN A WINDOW IS NOT SPLIT, THE INSCRIPTION IS CENTERED ON THE
WINDOW AS SHOWN ON AN INDIVIDUAL LOGIC DIAGRAM.
WHEN A WINDOW IS TO BE SPLIT WITH DIFFERENT INSCRIPTION AND COLORS FOR
EACH ZONE, THE SWITCH MODULE IS PROVIDED WITH AN APPROPRIATE BARRIER
BETWEEN TWO(2) ZONES TO ELIMINATE ANY LIGHT DIFFUSION ACROSS THE TWO(2)
ZONES.
D
C
B
2 05/25/11 AS-BUILT
1 05/13/11 GENERAL REVISION
0 04/30/07 ISSUE FOR CONSTRUCTION
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
A
4 3
2
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM
GENERAL NOTES
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
1-700-J158-002
JOB NO.
2A626
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
NNS
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
2
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

4 3
2
1
D
C
B
A
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR AND LOAD CENTER CIRCUITS
DETAIL "A"
NOTES
A. FORMAT
1. LOGIC FUNCTION IN HEAVY LINES ARE SHOWN ON INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS.
LOGIC SYMBOLS ARE INDICATED WITH A,B,C OR D IN ORDER TO COORDINATE THE LOGIC
GATES SHOWN ON THE TYPICAL LOGIC DIAGRAMS.
2. LOGIC IN LIGHT LINES IS NOT SHOWN ON INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS.
B. FUNCTIONAL CIRCUIT TYPES
1. LOGIC IS SHOWN FOR MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR AND LOAD CENTER CIRCUITS.
2. MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR MOTOR CIRCUITS ARE PROVIDED WITH A MOTOR CURRENT
AMMETER.
3. LOAD CENTER MOTOR CIRCUITS DO NOT HAVE MOTOR CURRENT AMMETER.
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED IN THE INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS.
4. ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION CIRCUITS HAVE AMMETERS OR VOLTMETERS AS SHOWN ON
INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS. CONTROL SWITCHES ARE MARKED WITH CLOSE
AND TRIP INSTEAD OF START AND STOP.
C. GENERAL FUNCTIONS
1. TEST CONTROL SWITCH AT THE SWITCHGEAR ALLOWS THE OPERATION OF THE
BREAKER ONLY WHEN CIRCUIT BREAKERS ARE IN THE TEST POSITION.
2. CELL SWITCH LOGIC PREVENTS THE INCORRECT OPERATION OF INTERLOCKED
EQUIPMENT WHEN CIRCUIT BREAKERS ARE IN THE TEST POSITION.
3. WHEN THE SWITCHGEAR CONTROL POWER FAILS, CIRCUIT BREAKERS REMAIN LATCHED
IN THE LAST POSITION EVEN AFTER THE RESTORATION OF THE CONTROL POWER.
4. REFER TO DRAWING 1-700-J158-014 FOR AUTOMATIC CONTROL MODE TRANSFER AND
STANDBY START AND CONTROL SWITCH MODULE FUNCTIONS
5. WHEN THE SWITCHGEAR BUS VOLTAGE FAILS, RUNNING EQUIPMENT WILL STOP.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS REMAIN LATCHED IN THE LAST POSITION UNLESS TRIPPING
ON BUS VOLTAGE LOW LOW IS SHOWN ON INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS.
WHEN BUS VOLTAGE IS RESTORED, EQUIPMENT WILL RESTART IF THE CIRCUIT
BREAKERS ARE STILL LATCHED CLOSED.
6. WHEN THE PCMS LOGIC POWER FAILS, CIRCUIT BREAKERS REMAIN LATCHED IN THE LAST
POSITION, EVEN AFTER THE RESTORATION OF THE PCMS LOGIC POWER.
7 .PHASE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION INTO RELAY 86 OF MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR IS
TYPICAL FOR ONE OR MORE RELAYS PER PHASE.(SEE DETAIL "A")
8. PHASE OVERCURRENT FOR LOAD CENTERS IS INTERNAL TO BREAKER MECHANISM.
(SEE DETAIL "A")
D. TROUBLE DETECTOR FUNCTIONS.
A FLASHING TROUBLE LIGHT AND ALARM OPERATE UNDER THE FOLLOWING
CONDITIONS TO INDICATE AN EQUIPMENT TROUBLE CONDITION. THE FLASHING
TROUBLE LIGHT GOES TO STEADY WHEN THE TROUBLE/DISABLED PUSHBUTTON IS
OPERATED AND TO OFF WHEN THE TROUBLE CONDITION RETURNS TO NORMAL.
1. START FAILURE OR UNEXPECTED STOP IS DETECTED BY A CIRCUIT BREAKER
THAT IS OPEN AFTER A START COMMAND IS GIVEN. AT THAT TIME, THE START
CIRCUIT IS BLOCKED BY THE PROTECTIVE RELAY IN THE SWITCHGEAR. ANY
AUTOMATIC MODE CONTROL OR STANDBY START CIRCUIT IS RESET TO MANUAL
MODE AND THE TROUBLE DETECTOR IS OPERATED. THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
PROTECTIVE RELAY MUST BE RESET LOCALLY AFTER AN ELECTRICAL PROTECTION
TRIP.
2. STOP FAILURE OR UNEXPECTED START DETECTED BY A CIRCUIT BREAKER THAT
IS CLOSED AFTER A STOP COMMAND IS GIVEN.
3. MOTOR OVERLOAD (MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTOR LOADS ONLY) DETECTED BY A MOTOR
OVERCURRENT RELAY SET BELOW THE TRIPPING CURRENT. THE DEGREE OF
OVERLOAD IS INDICATED ON THE MOTOR LOAD AMMETER.
4. MISCELLANEOUS TROUBLE CONDITION AND ANY RELATED ALARM OR INDICATING
LIGHT WHEN APPLICABLE.
E. DISABLED DETECTOR FUNCTIONS.
A FLASHING DISABLED LIGHT AND ALARM OPERATE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS
TO INDICATE THAT THE EQUIPMENT CANNOT BE OPERATED. THE FLASHING DISABLED
LIGHT GOES TO STEADY WHEN THE TROUBLE/DISABLED PUSHBUTTON IS OPERATED AND
TO OFF WHEN THE DISABLED CONDITION RETURNS TO NORMAL.
1. CIRCUIT BREAKER NOT IN THE OPERATING POSITION AS DETECTED BY A
CELL SWITCH THAT INDICATES THE DRAW-OUT CIRCUIT BREAKER POSITION.
2. LOSS OF TRIP/CLOSING CIRCUIT CONTROL POWER DETECTED BY CONTROL POWER
MONITORING CIRCUIT.
3. ABSENCE OF STARTING CIRCUIT PERMISSIVE INTERLOCK SIGNALS THAT NORMALLY
EXIST TO PERMIT STARTING OF THE EQUIPMENT, WHEN SHOWN ON INDIVIDUAL
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM AS APPLICABLE.
4. LOSS OF BREAKER TRIP/CLOSING CIRCUIT CONTINUITY DETECTED BY A COIL
CONTINUITY MONITORING CIRCUIT.
5. EXISTENCE OF MECHANICAL PROTECTION SIGNAL THAT WOULD BLOCK STARTING
OF THE EQUIPMENT, WHEN SHOWN ON INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM AS
APPLICABLE.
6. MISCELLANEOUS DISABLED CONDITION AND ANY RELATED ALARM OR INDICATING
LIGHT WHEN APPLICABLE.
7. MODULE DISABLE CONDITION INCLUDING INTERNAL DISABLED CONDITIONS
WHICH ARE DETECTED BY SELF TEST AND ERROR DETECTION BY PCMS.
1. MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR BREAKER.
0A OVERCURRENT(NOTE C.9)
0B OVERCURRENT(NOTE C.9)
0C OVERCURRENT(NOTE C.9)
GND NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT
MOTOR DIFFERENTIAL
(AS APPLICABLE)
ELECT.
PROT.
S
R
MANUAL
RESET 86
2. LOAD CENTER BUS FEEDER BREAKER.
0A OVERCURRENT(NOTE C.10)
0B OVERCURRENT(NOTE C.10)
0C OVERCURRENT(NOTE C.10)
XFMR GND OVERCURRENT
MANUAL RESET
S
R
86
ELECT.
PROT.
3. LOAD CENTER EQUIP. SUPPLY BREAKER.
0A OVERCURRENT(NOTE C.10)
0B OVERCURRENT(NOTE C.10)
0C OVERCURRENT(NOTE C.10)
GND OVERCURRENT
MANUAL RESET
S
R
86
4. LOAD CENTER TIE BREAKER.
0A OVERCURRENT(NOTE C.10)
ELECT.
PROT.
0B OVERCURRENT(NOTE C.10)
ELECT. PROT.
0C OVERCURRENT(NOTE C.10)
D
C
B
4 3
2
2 05/25/11 AS-BUILT
1 05/13/11 GENERAL REVISION
0 04/30/07 ISSUE FOR CONSTRUCTION
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
A
TYPICAL PCMS CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR AND
LOAD CENTER CIRCUITS. NOTES
SHEET
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER 1-700-J158-003
1/1
JOB NO.
2A626
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
NNS
SCALE
NONE
REV.
2
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

4 3
PM01
MAN START(SC)
2
SWGR
R
D
C
AUXILIARY START
PROCESS CONTROL(AUTO START)
1 700-J158-014
AUTO MODE
PERMISSIVE COMMAND
5
TO DISABLED
DETECTOR WHEN
APPLICABLE
PROCESS CONTROL(AUTO STOP)
A
2
SWGR
HS CLOSE
CELL SWITCH 33a
(BKR IN TEST POSITION)
B
START 52a
EQUIPMENT
2
4
S
ON
R 0.5 SEC
S
ON
R 0.5 SEC
MISC.TROUBLE
TROUBLE/DISABLED
SC
TROUBLE DETECTOR
1
1-700-J158-014 4
TO AUTOMATIC CONTROL
OR SYNCHRONIZING
R
SC
TO STARTED INTERLOCK
WITH OTHER CIRCUITS
TO STOP INTERLOCK
WITH OTHER CIRCUITS
TO AUTOMATIC CONTROL
1-700-J158-014 5
OR SYNCHRONIZING
G
SC
TRANSFER AUTOMATIC CONTROL
1-700-J158-014 6
OR STANDBY START TO MANUAL MODE
S
R
FLASHER
TO ALARM LOGIC
Y
TROUBLE(SC)
D
C
PM01
MAN STOP(SC)
B
AUXILIARY STOP
BUS VOLTAGE LOW LOW
MECHANICAL PROTECTION
C
4
CLOSING CIRCUIT OPEN
ON
10 SEC
TRIP CIRCUIT OPEN
5
PERMISSIVE
EQUIPMENT CONTROL POWER FAIL
PCMS LOGIC POWER FAIL
MISC.DISABLED
ON
0.5 SEC
MECH.PROTECTION
6
DISABLED DETECTOR
S
R
FLASHER
6
TO DISABLED DETECTOR
WHEN APPLICABLE
D
SWGR
HS TRIP
ELECTRICAL PROTECTION(NOTE 1)
STOP
52b
EQUIPMENT
G SWGR
W SWGR
A
START (SC)
STOP (SC)
ELECTRICAL PROTECTION
START
EQUIPMENT
STOP
EQUIPMENT
R
(SC)
G
(SC)
2A626M31.DGN
TROUBLE
DETECTOR
DISABLED
DETECTOR
TO ALARM
LOGIC
INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM FORMAT EXAMPLE
4 3
LOAD METER
START RED
TROUBLE
YEL
DISABLED
STOP
YEL
GRN
MANUAL
AMB
HS-
CONTROL SWITCH
NOTES
1. SEE DETAIL "A" ON
1-700-J158-003
2
TO ALARM LOGIC
Y
DISABLED(SC)
B
2 05/25/11 AS-BUILT
1 04/12/11 GENERAL REVISION
0 04/30/07 ISSUE FOR CONSTRUCTION
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
A
TYPICAL PCMS CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR AND
LOAD CENTER CIRCUITS
SHEET
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER 1-700-J158-004 1/1
JOB NO.
2A626
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
NNS
SCALE
NONE
REV.
2
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

D
C
B
A
4 3
2
1
REVERSING MOTOR STARTER CIRCUITS
NOTES
A. FORMAT
1. LOGIC FUNCTION IN HEAVY LINES ARE SHOWN ON INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS.
LOGIC SYMBOLS ARE INDICATED WITH A,B,C OR D IN ORDER TO COORDINATE THE LOGIC
GATES SHOWN ON THE TYPICAL LOGIC DIAGRAMS.
2. LOGIC IN LIGHT LINES IS NOT SHOWN ON INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS.
3. THE DETAILED MOTOR STARTER CONTROL LOGIC SHOWN INDICATES THE ACTUAL CIRCUIT
ARRANGEMENT INCLUDING LOGIC OPEN AND CLOSE MEMORY AND OPEN AND CLOSE MOTOR
CLOSE AND STOP LOGIC FUNCTIONS BY THREE SEPARATE FUNCTIONAL LOGIC TRAINS AS
STARTER COILS. HOWEVER, INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS SHOW THE OPEN,
SHOWN IN THE FORMAT EXAMPLE.
B. FUNCTIONAL CIRCUIT TYPES
1. THE LOGIC IS SHOWN FOR ELECTRIC MOTOR OPERATED VALVE ACTUATOR THAT IS
CONTROLLED BY USING A DUAL COIL STARTER WITH ELECTRICAL CROSS INTERLOCKS.
THE LOGIC CAN ALSO BE USED FOR MOTOR OPERATED DAMPERS.
2. THE LOGIC IS SHOWN FOR OPEN-CLOSE OPERATION WITH LIMIT STOPPED OPENING, AND
LIMIT STOPPED CLOSING OR TORQUE SEATED CLOSING SCHEME. INDIVIDUAL CONTROL
LOGIC DIAGRAMS SPECIFY THE DESIRED SCHEME.
C. GENERAL FUNCTIONS
1. THE OPEN/CLOSE LOGIC CIRCUITS ARE CROSS INTERLOCKED TO PROVIDE IMMEDIATE
REVERSAL OF VALVE TRAVEL.
2. WHEN THE MOTOR STARTER BUS VOLTAGE OR CONTROL POWER FAILS, VALVES IN
THE MID-TRAVEL WILL STOP. UPON RESTORATION OF THE POWER, THE VALVES
WILL RESTART IF THE OPEN OR CLOSE MEMORIES ARE STILL SET UNLESS SHOWN
ON INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM AS REMAIN STOPPED. VALVES THAT
ARE NOT IN MID-TRAVEL REMAIN IN THE LAST POSITION.
3. REFER TO DRAWING 1-700-J158-010 FOR AUTOMATIC CONTROL MODE TRANSFER
AND CONTROL SWITCH MODULE FUNCTIONS.
4. WHEN THE PCMS LOGIC POWER FAILS, VALVES IN MID-TRAVEL WILL STOP, UPON
RESTORATION OF THE POWER, VALVE REQUIRES RESTARTING BY THE OPERATOR.
VALVES THAT ARE NOT IN MID-TRAVEL REMAIN THE LAST POSITION.
5. THE SELECTION OF LIMIT STOPPED OR TORQUE SEATED CLOSING OPERATION IS
PERFORMED IN THE PCMS LOGIC CIRCUITS. THE REQUIREMENT IS INDICATED ON INDIVIDUAL
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM.
CLOSING CIRCUIT MEMORY IS RESET AT THE FIRST ACTUATION OF THE CLOSING TORQUE
SWITCH OPERATION AFTER THE CLOSED LIMIT SWITCH OPERATES. THIS IS TO AVOID
VALVE HAMMER WHEN HIGH SPEED VALVES ARE TORQUE SEATED.
THE TORQUE SWITCHES OPERATE MOTOR STARTER COILS DIRECTLY WITHOUT BEING
ACTUATED THROUGH PCMS LOGICS TO AVOID DAMAGE CAUSED BY DELAY WHEN STOPPING HIGH
SPEED VALVES. THIS IS ESPECIALLY IMPORTANT FOR HIGH SPEED VALVES.
6. THE RED LIGHT OF THE CONTROL SWITCH MODULE IS ON WHEN VALVE IS OPEN AND
A GREEN LIGHT IS ON WHEN VALVE IS CLOSED.
BOTH LIGHTS ARE ON WHEN VALVE IS IN INTERMEDIATE POSITION.
THE VALVE SYMBOL IN DISPLAY ALSO SHOWS THE MID-POSITION WHEN VALVE IS
IN INTERMEDIATE POSITION.
D. TROUBLE DETECTOR FUNCTIONS
A FLASHING TROUBLE LIGHT AND ALARM OPERATE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS
TO INDICATE AN EQUIPMENT TROUBLE CONDITION. THE FLASHING TROUBLE LIGHT GOES TO
STEADY WHEN THE TROUBLE/DISABLED PUSHPUTTON IS OPERATED AND TO OFF WHEN THE TROUBLE
CONDITION RETURNS TO NORMAL.
1. OPEN/CLOSE FAILURE OR UNEXPECTED STOP DETECTED BY A MOTOR STARTERS AFTER
AN OPEN OR CLOSE COMMAND IS GIVEN AND BEFORE THE TRAVEL IS COMPLETED OR
STOPPED BY A DELIBERATE CONTROL ACTION. UNDER THIS CONDITION, THE AUTOMATIC
MODE CONTROL AND OPEN/CLOSE MEMORY CIRCUITS ARE NOT RESET. THE EQUIPMENT
RETURNS TO NORMAL OPERATION AUTOMATICALLY AFTER THE FAULT CONDITION IS
CLEARED.
WHEN THE EQUIPMENT IS STOPPED BY ELECTRICAL PROTECTION DEVICES. THE ELECTRICAL
PROTECTION DEVICES SHALL BE MANUALLY RESET LOCALLY AFTER THE FAULT CONDITION
IS REPAIRED. HOWEVER, PRIOR TO RESETTING, THE OPERATOR SHALL DETERMINE WHICH
CONTROL CIRCUIT MEMORY (OPEN OR CLOSE) SHOULD BE RESET BASED ON PROCESS SYSTEM
REQUIRMENT.
2. UNEXPECTED OPERATION FROM THE OPEN OR CLOSE POSITION WHEN NO OPEN OR CLOSE
COMMAND IS GIVEN.
3. MISCELLANEOUS TROUBLE CONDITION AND ANY RELATED ALARM OR INDICATING LIGHT
WHEN APPLICABLE.
E. DISABLED DETECTOR FUNCTIONS
A FLASHING DISABLED LIGHT AND ALARM OPERATE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS TO
INDICATE THAT THE EQUIPMENT CANNOT BE OPERATED. THE FLASHING DISABLED LIGHT GOES
TO STEADY WHEN THE TROUBLE/DISABLED PUSHBUTTON IS OPERATED AND TO OFF WHEN THE
DISABLED CONDITION RETURNS TO NORMAL.
1. LOSS OF OPEN OR CLOSE CIRCUIT CONTROL POWER AND MCC BUS VOLTAGE DETECTED BY
A MCC POWER MONITORING CIRCUIT.
2. LOSS OF OPEN OR CLOSE MOTOR STARTER COIL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY DETECTED BY A PCMS
COIL CONTINUITY MONITORING CIRCUIT.
3. LOSS OF THE PCMS LOGIC POWER DETECTED BY A PCMS INTERNAL POWER MONITORING CIRCUIT.
4. ABSENCE OF OPEN OR CLOSE PERMISSIVE INTERLOCK SIGNALS, THAT NORMALLY EXIST
TO PERMIT THE OPENING OR CLOSING THE VALVES, WHEN SHOWN ON THE INDIVIDUAL
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS AS APPLICABLE.
5. MISCELLANEOUS DISABLED CONDITION AND ANY RELATED ALARM OR INDICATING
WHEN APPLICABLE.
6. MODULE DISABLE CONDITION INCLUDING INTERNAL DISABLED CONDITIONS
WHICH ARE DETECTED BY SELF TEST AND ERROR DETECTION BY PCMS.
7. LOSS OF OPEN OR CLOSE MOTOR STARTER PCMS INTERPOSING OUTPUT RELAY CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
DETECTED BY A RELAY CONTINUITY MONITORING CIRCUIT.
D
C
B
2 05/25/11 AS-BUILT
1 05/13/11 GENERAL REVISION
0 04/30/07 ISSUE FOR CONSTRUCTION
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
A
4 3
2
TYPICAL PCMS CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM
REVERSING MOTOR STARTER CIRCUITS, NOTES
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
1-700-J158-005
JOB NO.
2A626
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
NNS
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
2
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

4 3
2
1
D
PM01
MAN OPEN(SC)
C
AUXILIARY OPEN
PROCESS CONTROL(AUTO OPEN)
1 1-700-J158-014
AUTO MODE
PERMISSIVE COMMAND
AUXILIARY STOP COMMAND
1
A
3
7
TO DISABLED
DETECTOR WHEN
APPLICABLE
B
1
2
PROCESS CONTROL(AUTO CLOSE)
PM01
MAN CLOSE(SC)
CONNECT FOR JOG
OPERATION
2
C
4
B
AUXILIARY CLOSE
PERMISSIVE COMMAND
7
TO DISABLED DETECTOR
WHEN APPLICABLE
D
OPENING TORQUE HI
S
R
9
ELECTRICAL PROTECTION
BUS VOLTAGE FAILURE
OPEN
VALVE
LS-io
LS-o
R MCC
42-o/a
8
5
3
4
ON
0.5 SEC
S
ON
R 0.5 SEC
S
ON
R 0.5 SEC
MISC. TROUBLE
ON
0.5 SEC
TROUBLE/DISABLED
SC
TROUBLE DETECTOR
S
R
FLASHER
TO ALARM
LOGIC
Y
TROUBLE(SC)
OPEN COIL CIRCUIT OPEN
5
6
CLOSE COIL CIRCUIT OPEN
PERMISSIVE
7
CONTROL POWER FAIL
DCS LOGIC POWER FAIL
MISC. DISABLED
ON
0.5 SEC
S
R
8
DELETE FOR TORQUE
SEATED OPERATION
CLOSING TORQUE HI
DISABLED DETECTOR
TO ALARM
LOGIC
S
R
FLASHER
Y
DISABLE(SC)
CLOSE
VALVE
LS-ic
LS-c
42-c/a
G MCC
9
6
1-700-J158-014 4
TO AUTO CONTROL
TO OPEN
INTERLOCK WITH
OTHER CIRCUIT
TO NOT FULLY
OPEN INTERLOCK
WITH OTHER CIRCUIT
G
SC
STOP
VALVE
R
SC
1-700-J158-014 5
TO NOT FULLY
CLOSE INTERLOCK
WITH OTHER CIRCUIT
TO CLOSE
INTERLOCK
WITH OTHER CIRCUIT
D
C
B
A
SWITCH CONTACT DEVELOPMENT
VALVE POSITION
FULLY FULLY
INTERMEDIATE
CLOSED OPEN
LS
TS
o
ic
c
io
+qo
+qc
SOLID LINE DENOTES
CONTACT CLOSED
MAN OPEN(SC)
ELECTRICAL PROTECTION
TORQUE PROTECTION
MAN CLOSE(SC)
TROUBLE
DETECTOR
DISABLED
DETECTOR
OPEN
VALVE
STOP
VALVE
CLOSE
VALVE
TO ALARM
LOGIC
R
(SC)
G
(SC)
INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM FORMAT EXAMPLE
4 3
OPEN
RED
TROUBLE
YEL
DISABLED
CLOSE
YEL
GRN
MANUAL
AMB
HS-
CONTROL SWITCH
MODULE
2
2 05/25/11 AS-BUILT
1 04/12/11 GENERAL REVISION
0 04/30/07 ISSUE FOR CONSTRUCTION
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
A
TYPICAL PCMS CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM
REVERSING MOTOR STARTER CIRCUITS
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
1-700-J158-006
JOB NO.
2A626
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
NNS
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
2
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

4 3
2
1
D
C
B
A
NON-REVERSING MOTOR STARTER CIRCUITS
D
NOTES
A. FORMAT
1. LOGIC FUNCTION IN HEAVY LINES ARE SHOWN ON INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS.
LOGIC SYMBOLS ARE INDICATED WITH A,B,C OR D IN ORDER TO COORDINATE THE LOGIC
GATES SHOWN ON THE TYPICAL LOGIC DIAGRAMS.
2. LOGIC IN LIGHT LINES IS NOT SHOWN ON INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS.
3. THE DETAILED MOTOR STARTER CONTROL LOGIC SHOWN INDICATES THE ACTUAL CIRCUIT
ARRANGEMENT INCLUDING MEMORY CIRCUIT AND SINGLE MOTOR STARTER COIL.
INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS SHOW THE START AND STOP LOGIC FUNCTIONS
BY TWO SEPARATE FUNCTIONAL LOGIC TRAINS AS SHOWN IN THE FORMAT EXAMPLE.
B. FUNCTIONAL CIRCUIT TYPES
1. THE LOGIC IS SHOWN FOR NON-REVERSING MOTOR STARTERS USING SINGLE-COIL AC
STARTERS WITH MCC CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMERS.
2. INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS INDICATE ANY SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
MOTOR STARTERS.
C. GENERAL FUNCTIONS
1. WHEN STOP COMMANDS ARE PRESENT, THE START COMMANDS ARE BLOCKED.
2. WHEN THE MOTOR STARTER BUS VOLTAGE OR CONTROL POWER FAILS, THE RUNNING
EQUIPMENT WILL STOP. UPON RESTORATION OF THE POWER, THE EQUIPMENT WILL
RESTART IF THE MEMORIES ARE STILL SET UNLESS SHOWN ON INDIVIDUAL CONTROL
LOGIC DIAGRAMS AS REMAIN STOPPED.
3. WHEN THE PCMS LOGIC POWER FAILS, RUNNING EQUIPMENT WILL STOP. WHEN LOGIC POWER
IS RESTORED, EQUIPMENT REQUIRES RESTARTING BY THE OPERATOR UNLESS OTHERWISE
NOTED IN THE INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS.
4. REFER TO DRAWING 1-700-J158-010 FOR AUTOMATIC CONTROL MODE TRANSFER
AND CONTROL SWITCH MODULE FUNCTIONS.
E. DISABLED DETECTOR FUNCTIONS
A FLASHING DISABLED LIGHT AND ALARM OPERATE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS TO
INDICATE THAT THE EQUIPMENT CANNOT BE OPERATED. THE FLASHING DISABLED LIGHT GOES
TO STEADY WHEN THE TROUBLE/DISABLED PUSHBUTTON IS OPERATED AND TO OFF WHEN THE
DISABLED CONDITION RETURNS TO NORMAL.
1. LOSS OF CONTROL POWER AND MCC BUS VOLTAGE DETECTED BY A MCC POWER MONITORING CIRCUIT.
2. LOSS OF MOTOR STARTER COIL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY DETECTED BY A PCMS COIL CONTINUITY
MONITORING CIRCUIT.
3. LOSS OF THE PCMS LOGIC POWER DETECTED BY AN INTERNAL POWER MONITORING CIRCUIT.
4. ABSENCE OF STARING CIRCUIT PERMISSIVE INTERLOCK SIGNALS THAT NORMALLY EXIST
TO PERMIT STARTING OF THE EQUIPMENT WHEN SHOWN ON THE INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGICS
AS APPLICABLE.
5. EXISTENCE OF MECHANICAL PROTECTION SIGNAL THAT WOULD BLOCK STARTING OF
THE EQUIPMENT, WHEN SHOWN ON THE INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGICS AS APPLICABLE.
6. MISCELLANEOUS DISABLED CONDITION AND RELATED ALARM OR INDICATING LIGHT
WHEN APPLICABLE.
7. MODULE DISABLE CONDITION INCLUDING INTERNAL DISABLED CONDITIONS
WHICH ARE DETECTED BY SELF TEST AND ERROR DETECTION BY PCMS.
8. LOSS OF MOTOR STARTER PCMS INTERPOSING OUTPUT RELAY CIRCUIT CONTINUITY DETECTED
BY A RELAY CONTINUITY MONITORING CIRCUIT.
C
D. TROUBLE DETECTOR FUNCTIONS
A FLASHING TROUBLE LIGHT AND ALARM OPERATE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS
TO INDICATE AN EQUIPMENT TROUBLE CONDITION. THE FLASHING TROUBLE LIGHT GOES TO STEADY WHEN
THE TROUBLE/DISABLED PUSHBUTTON IS OPERATED AND TO OFF WHEN TROUBLE CONDITION RETURNS
TO NORMAL.
1. START FAILURE OR UNEXPECTED STOP IS DETECTED BY A MOTOR STARTER THAT IS
DEENERGIZED AFTER A START COMMAND IS GIVEN. UNDER THIS CONDITION, THE AUTOMATIC
MODE CONTROL, STANDBY START CIRCUIT AND MEMORY ARE NOT RESET UNLESS OTHERWISE
NOTED IN THE INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS. THE EQUIPMENT RETURNS TO NORMAL
OPERATION AUTOMATICALLY AFTER THE FAULT CONDITION IS CLEARED.
WHEN EQUIPMENT IS STOPPED BY ELECTRICAL PROTECTION DEVICES, THE CONTROL
CIRCUIT MEMORY MAY REQUIRE RESET BY THE OPERATOR BEFORE THE ELECTRICAL
PROTECTION DEVICES ARE MANUALLY RESET LOCALLY TO AVOID UNEXPECTED STARTING
OF THE EQUIPMENT.
2. STOP FAILURE OR UNEXPECTED START AFTER A STOP COMMAND IS GIVEN.
3. MISCELLANEOUS TROUBLE CONDITION AND ANY RELATED ALARM OR INDICATING LIGHT
WHEN APPLICABLE.
B
2 05/25/11 AS-BUILT
1 05/13/11 GENERAL REVISION
0 04/30/07 ISSUE FOR CONSTRUCTION
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
A
4 3
2
TYPICAL PCMS CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM
NON-REVERSING MOTOR STARTER
CIRCUITS, NOTES
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
1-700-J158-007
SHEET
1/1
JOB NO.
2A626
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
NNS
SCALE
NONE
REV.
2
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

D
C
B
A
4 3
2
1
PM01
MAN START(SC)
AUXILIARY START
PROCESS CONTROL(AUTO START)
FROM
AUTO MODE 1 1-700-J158-014
PERMISSIVE COMMAND
PROCESS CONTROL(AUTO STOP)
PM01
MAN START(SC)
AUXILIARY STOP
MECHANICAL PROTECTION COMMAND
A
C
2
PULSE
TRANSFER AUTO CONTROL
OR STANDBY START
TO MANUAL MODE
1-700-J158-014 14
MCC
R
BUS VOLTAGE FAIL
ELECTRICAL PROTECTION
W MCC
S
R
START 42a
EQUIPMENT
MCC
G
STOP 42b
EQUIPMENT
R
SC
1-700-J158-014 4
TO AUTO CONTROL
OR STANDBY START
TO STARTED INTERLOCK
WITH OTHER CIRCUIT
G
SC
TO AUTO CONTROL
1-700-J158-014 5
OR STANDBY START
B
3
TO DISABLED
DETECTOR WHEN
APPLICABLE
5
2
S
R
ON
1 SEC
ON
0.5 SEC
5
S
MISC.TROUBLE
R
ON
0.5 SEC
TROUBLE/DISABLED
SC
TROUBLE DETECTOR
TRANSFER AUTO CONTROL OR
1-700-J158-014 13
STANDBY START TO MANUAL MODE
S
R
FLASHER
TO ALARM
LOGIC
Y
TROUBLE(SC)
D
COIL CIRCUIT OPEN
PERMISSIVE
3
6
MECH.PROTECTION
MISC.DISABLED
CONTROL POWER FAIL
DCS LOGIC POWER FAIL
ON
1 SEC
ON
1 SEC
S
R
FLASHER
TO ALARM
LOGIC
Y
DISABLED(SC)
6
WHEN APPLICABLE
TO DISABLED DETECTOR
DISABLED DETECTOR
TRANSFER AUTO CONTROL OR
1-700-J158-014 9
STANDBY START TO MANUAL MODE
D
C
B
MAN START(SC)
MAN STOP(SC)
ELECTRICAL PROTECTION
TROUBLE
DETECTOR
DISABLED
DETECTOR
START
EQUIPMENT
STOP
EQUIPMENT
TO ALARM
LOGIC
R
(SC)
G
(SC)
INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM FORMAT EXAMPLE
4 3
START
RED
TROUBLE
YEL
DISABLED
YEL
STOP
GRN
MANUAL AMB
HS-
CONTROL SWITCH
MODULE
NOTES
1. DELETE WHEN SYSTEM DESIGN REQUIRES
AUTOMATIC RESTART UPON CLEARING OF
TROUBLE CONDITION.
2
2 05/25/11 AS-BUILT
1 04/12/11 GENERAL REVISION
0 04/30/07 ISSUE FOR CONSTRUCTION
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
A
TYPICAL PCMS CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM
NON-REVERSING MOTOR STARTER CIRCUITS
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
1-700-J158-008
JOB NO.
2A626
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
NNS
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
2
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

4 3
2
1
D
C
B
A
SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUITS
NOTES
A. FORMAT
1. LOGIC FUNCTION IN HEAVY LINES ARE SHOWN ON INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS.
LOGIC SYMBOLS ARE INDICATED WITH A,B,C OR D IN ORDER TO COORDINATE THE LOGIC
GATES SHOWN ON THE TYPICAL LOGIC DIAGRAMS.
2. LOGIC IN LIGHT LINES IS NOT SHOWN ON INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS.
3. THE DETAILED SOLENOID VALVE CONTROL LOGIC SHOWN INDICATES THE ACTUAL CIRCUIT
ARRANGEMENT INCLUDING MEMORY CIRCUIT AND SINGLE SOLENOID VALVE COIL.
INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS SHOW THE OPEN AND CLOSED LOGIC FUNCTIONS
BY TWO SEPARATE FUNCTIONAL LOGIC TRAINS AS SHOWN IN THE FORMAT EXAMPLE.
B. FUNCTIONAL CIRCUIT TYPES
1. THE LOGIC IS SHOWN FOR SINGLE-COIL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUITS WITH PROCESS VALVE
POSITION LIMIT SWITCHES USED WITH FAIL CLOSED VALVES. THE PROCESS VALVE OPENS
WHEN THE SOLENOID VALVE IS ENERGIZED AND CLOSES WHEN DEENERGIZED. NOTES
INDICATE THE LOGIC FOR FAIL OPEN VALVES, OPEN/MODULATE-CLOSE VALVES AND OPEN
-CLOSE/MODULATE VALVES. THE LOGIC CAN BE USED FOR DIRECT SOLENOID CONTROLLED
PROCESS VALVES, AND PNEUMATIC OR ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC ACTUATOR PROCESS VALVES.
THE LOGIC CAN ALSO BE USED FOR SOLENOID VALVE OPERATED DAMPERS.
2. INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS INDICATE WHETHER THE PROCESS VALVE OPENS
OR CLOSES WHEN THE SOLENOID VALVE COIL IS ENERGIZED. SOLEOID VALVE COILS ARE
125V DC UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
3. THE LOGIC CIRCUIT REQUIREMENTS FOR SINGLE-COIL SOLENOID VALVES WITHOUT PROCESS
VALVE POSITION LIMIT SWITCHES AND FOR TWO-COIL SOLENOID VALVES IS INDICATED ON
INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS.
C. GENERAL FUNCTIONS
1. WHEN DEENERGIZING COMMANDS ARE PRESENT. THE ENERGIZING CIRCUITS ARE BLOCKED.
2. WHEN THE SOLENOID VALVE CONTROL POWER FAILS, ENERGIZED SOLENOID COIL WILL BE
DEENERGIZED. UPON RESTORATION OF THE CONTROL POWER, SOLENOID COIL WILL BE
REENERGIZED IF THE LOGIC MEMORY IS STILL SET UNLESS SHOWN ON INDIVIDUAL
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS AS REMAIN DEENERGIZED.
3. WHEN THE PCMS LOGIC CONTROL POWER FAILS, ENERGIZED SOLENOID COIL WILL BE
DEENERGIZIED. WHEN LOGIC POWER IS RESTORED, SOLENOID COIL REQUIRES
REENERGIZING BY THE OPERATOR.
4. REFER TO DRAWING 1-700-J158-010 FOR THE AUTOMATIC CONTROL MODE TRANSFER
AND CONTROL SWITCH MODULE FUNCTIONS.
5. THE RED LIGHT OF THE CONTROL SWITCH MODULE IS ON WHEN VALVE IS OPEN AND
A GREEN LIGHT IS ON WHEN VALVE IS CLOSED.
BOTH LIGHTS ARE ON WHEN VALVE IS IN INTERMEDIATE POSITION.
THE VALVE SYMBOL IN DISPLAY ALSO SHOWS THE MID-POSITION WHEN VALVE IS
IN INTERMEDIATE POSITION.
D. TROUBLE DETECTOR FUNCTIONS.
A FLASHING TROUBLE LIGHT AND ALARM OPERATE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS
TO INDICATE A VALVE TROUBLE CONDITION. THE FLASHING TROUBLE LIGHT GOES TO
STEADY WHEN THE TROUBLE/DISABLED PUSHBUTTON IS OPERATED AND TO OFF WHEN THE
TROUBLE CONDITION RETURNS TO NORMAL. THE TROUBLE DETECTOR DOES NOT FUNCTION
WHEN THE PROCESS VALVE IS IN MODULATING MODE SINCE THE VALVE MAY BE IN ANY MID
POSITION.
1. FAILURE TO OPEN OR UNEXPECTED CLOSING OF THE VALVE AFTER A OPEN COMMAND
IS GIVEN. UNDER THIS CONDITION, THE AUTOMATIC MODE CONTROL AND LOGIC
MEMORY CIRCUITS ARE NOT RESET UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED ON INDIVIDUAL CONTROL
LOGIC DIAGRAMS. THE EQUIPMENT RETURNS TO NORMAL OPERATION AUTOMATICALLY AFTER
THE FAULT CONDITION IS CLEARED.
2. FAILURE TO CLOSE OR UNEXPECTED OPENING OF THE VALVE AFTER A CLOSE COMMAND IS GIVEN.
3. MISCELLANEOUS TROUBLE CONDITION AND ANY RELATED ALARM OR INDICATING LIGHT
WHEN APPLICABLE.
E. DISABLED DETECTOR FUNCTIONS
A FLASHING DISABLED LIGHT AND ALARM OPERATE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS TO
INDICATE THAT THE VALVE CANNOT BE OPERATED. THE FLASHING DISABLED LIGHT GOES TO
STEADY WHEN THE TROUBLE/DISABLED PUSHBUTTON IS OPERATED AND TO OFF WHEN THE
DISABLED CONDITION RETURNS TO NORMAL. THE DISABLED DETECTOR DOES NOT FUNCTION
WHEN THE PROCESS VALVE IS IN MODULATING MODE SINCE THE VALVE MAY BE IN ANY MID
POSITION.
1. LOSS OF SOLENOID VALVE COIL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY DETECTED BY A COIL CONTINUITY
MONITORING CIRCUIT.
2. LOSS OF SOLENOID VALVE COIL POWER DETECTED BY A CONTROL POWER MONITORING CIRCUIT.
3. LOSS OF THE PCMS LOGIC POWER DETECTED BY INTERNAL POWER MONITORING CIRCUIT.
4. ABSENCE OF OPEN OR CLOSE PERMISSIVE INTERLOCK SIGNALS THAT NORMALLY EXIST
TO PERMIT THE OPENING OR CLOSING OF THE VALVE, WHEN SHOWN ON THE INDIVIDUAL
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS AS APPLICABLE.
5. MISCELLANEOUS DISABLED CONDITION AND ANY RELATED ALARM OR INDICATING
LIGHT WHEN APPLICABLE.
6. LOSS OF AIR FOR A ON/OFF PNEUMATIC VALVE IN AN ENERGIZED CONDITION.
7. MODULE DISABLE CONDITION INCLUDING INTERNAL DISABLED CONDITIONS
WHICH ARE DETECTED BY SELF TEST AND ERROR DETECTION BY PCMS.
8. LOSS OF SOLENOID VALVE PCMS INTERPOSING OUTPUT RELAY CIRCUIT CONTINUITY DETECTED
BY A RELAY CONTINUITY MONITORING CIRCUIT.
D
C
B
4 3
2
2 05/25/11 AS-BUILT
1 05/13/11 GENERAL REVISION
0 04/30/07 ISSUE FOR CONSTRUCTION
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
A
TYPICAL PCMS CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM
SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUITS, NOTES
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
1-700-J158-009
JOB NO.
2A626
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
NNS
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
2
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

D
C
B
A
4 3
2
EN SOL
OPEN
VALVE
LS-o
1
1-700-J158-014
4
TO AUTOMATIC
CONTROL
TO OPEN INTERLOCK
WITH OTHER CIRCUITS
PM01
MAN OPEN(SC)
AUXILIARY OPEN
PROCESS CONTROL(AUTO OPEN)
1 1-700-J158-014
AUTO MODE
PERMISSIVE COMMAND
PROCESS CONTROL(AUTO CLOSE)
PM01
MAN CLOSE(SC)
AUXILIARY CLOSE
PERMISSIVE COMMAND
A
2
REVERSE PROGRAMMING
FOR FAIL OPEN VALVES
S
R
CONTROL VOLTAGE
FAILURE
REVERSE OPERATION
FOR FAIL OPEN VALVES
DEEN SOL
CLOSE
VALVE
LS-c
B
NOTE 1
R
SC
G
SC
TO CLOSE INTERLOCK
WITH OTHER CIRCUITS
TO AUTOMATIC
1-700-J158-014 5
CONTROL
TROUBLE DETECTOR
5
TO DISABLED
DETECTOR
WHEN APPLICABLE
C
4
D
5
TO DISABLED DETECTOR
WHEN APPLICABLE
2
S
R
ON
NOTE 3
4
MISC. TROUBLE
S
ON
R
NOTE 3
TROUBLE/DISABLED
SC
S
R
FLASHER
NOTE 4
NOTE 5
NOTE 6
COIL CIRCUIT OPEN
ON
NOTE 3
5
PERMISSIVE
SOL. POWER FAIL
DCS LOGIC POWER FAIL
MISC. DISABLED
ON
1-700-J158-014 9
TRANSFER AUTOMATIC
CONTROL TO MANUAL
MODE
1 SEC
S
R
DISABLED DETECTOR
FLASHER
TO ALARM LOGIC
Y
TROUBLE(SC)
TO ALARM LOGIC
Y
DISABLED(SC)
D
C
B
MAN OPEN(SC)
EN SOL.
OPEN
VALVE
R
(SC)
MAN CLOSE(SC)
DEEN SOL.
LIMIT SWITCH CONTACT DEVELOPMENT
VALVE POSITION
FULLY FULLY
INTERMEDIATE
CLOSED OPEN
LS-o
LS-ic
LS-c
LS-io
SOLID LINE DENOTES
CONTACT CLOSED
CLOSE
VALVE
G
(SC)
TROUBLE
DETECTOR
DISABLED
DETECTOR
TO ALARM
LOGIC
INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM FORMAT EXAMPLE
OPEN
RED
TROUBLE
YEL
DISABLED
CLOSE
YEL
GRN
MANUAL AMB
HS-
CONTROL SWITCH
MODULE
NOTES
1. DELETE FOR OPEN/MODULATE-CLOSE OPERATION.
2. DELETE FOR OPEN-CLOSE/MODULATE OPERATION.
3. SET TO 15 SEC. IT IS ADJUSTABLE UP TO 999SEC.
4. PROGRAMMING FOR FAIL OPEN VALVES.
5. PROGRAMMING FOR FAIL CLOSED VALVES.
6. PROGRAMMING FOR FAIL CLOSED VALVES WITH
OPEN/MODULATED-CLOSE OPERATION AND FOR FAIL
OPEN VALVES WITH OPEN-CLOSE/MODULATED OPERATION.
4 3
2
2 05/25/11 AS-BUILT
1 04/12/11 GENERAL REVISION
0 04/30/07 ISSUE FOR CONSTRUCTION
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
A
TYPICAL PCMS CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM
SOLENNOID VALVE CIRCUITS
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
1-700-J158-010
JOB NO.
2A626
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
NNS
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
2
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

D
C
B
A
4 3
2
1
NOTES
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC MOTOR DAMPER CIRCUITS
A. FORMAT
1. LOGIC FUNCTION IN HEAVY LINES ARE SHOWN ON INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS.
LOGIC SYMBOLS ARE INDICATED WITH A,B,C OR D IN ORDER TO COORDINATE THE LOGIC
GATES SHOWN ON THE TYPICAL LOGIC DIAGRAMS.
2. LOGIC IN LIGHT LINES IS NOT SHOWN ON INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS.
3. THE DETAILED ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC MOTOR DAMPER CONTROL LOGIC SHOWN INDICATES
THE ACTUAL CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENT INCLUDING MEMORY CIRCUIT AND SINGLE MOTOR
STARTER COIL, INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS SHOW THE OPEN AND CLOSED
LOGIC FUNCTIONS BY TWO SEPARATE FUNCTIONAL LOGIC CHANNELS AS SHOWN IN THE
FORMAT EXAMPLE.
B. FUNCTIONAL CIRCUIT TYPES
1. THE LOGIC IS SHOWN FOR SINGLE-COIL AC MOTOR STARTER CIRCUITS WITH PROCESS
DAMPER POSITION LIMIT SWITCHES USED WITH FAIL CLOSED DAMPERS. THE PROCESS
DAMPER OPENS WHEN THE HYDRAULIC MOTOR IS STARTED AND CLOSES WHEN THE COIL
IS DEENERGIZED. NOTES ON INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS INDICATE THE LOGIC
FOR FAIL OPEN DAMPER, OPEN/MODULATE-CLOSE DAMPER AND OPEN-CLOSE/MODULATE DAMPERS.
THE LOGIC IS USED FOR ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC MOTOR ACTUATOR PROCESS DAMPERS.
2. INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS INDICATE WHETHER THE PROCESS DAMPER
OPENS OR CLOSES WHEN THE MOTOR STARTER COIL IS ENERGIZED AND MODULATED
OPERATION. ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC MOTOR STARTER COILS ARE 120V AC SINGLE PHASE
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
C. GENERAL FUNCTIONS
1. WHEN DEENERGIZATION COMMANDS FOR DAMPER TO CLOSE ARE PRESENT THE ENERGIZATION
CIRCUITS FOR DAMPER OPEN ARE BLOCKED.
2. WHEN THE MOTOR STARTER BUS VOLTAGE OR CONTROL POWER FAILS, THE ENERGIZED
COIL WILL BE DEENERGIZED. UPON RESTORATION OF THE CONTROL POWER, THE COIL WILL
REENERGIZED IF THE LOGIC MEMORY IS STILL SET, UNLESS SHOWN ON INDIVIDUAL CONTROL
LOGIC DIAGRAMS.
3. WHEN THE PCMS LOGIC CONTROL POWER FAILS, ENERGIZED COIL WILL BE DEENERGIZED.
WHEN LOGIC POWER IS RESTORED, THE COIL REQUIRES REENERGIZING BY THE OPERATOR.
4. REFER TO DRAWING 1-700-J158-014 FOR THE AUTOMATIC CONTROL MODE TRANSFER
AND CONTROL SWITCH MODULE FUNCTIONS.
5. THE RED LIGHT OF THE CONTROL SWITCH MODULE IS ON WHEN DAMPER IS OPEN
AND THE GREEN LIGHT IS ON WHEN DAMPER IS CLOSED.
BOTH LIGHTS ARE ON WHEN DAMPER IS IN INTERMEDIATE POSITION. THE DAMPER SYMBOL IN
DISPLAY ALSO SHOWS THE MID-POSITION WHEN DAMPER IS IN INTERMEDIATE POSITION.
D. TROUBLE DETECTOR FUNCTIONS
A FLASHING TROUBLE LIGHT AND ALARM OPERATE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS
TO INDICATE AN DAMPER TROUBLE CONDITION. THE FLASHING TROUBLE LIGHT GOES TO
STEADY WHEN THE TROUBLE/DISABLE PUSHPUTTON IS OPERATED AND TO OFF WHEN THE TROUBLE
CONDITION RETURNS TO NORMAL. THE TROUBLE/DISABLED DETECTOR DOES NOT FUNCTION WHEN
THE PROCESS DAMPER IS IN MODULATING MODE SINCE THE VALVE WAY BE IN ANY MID POSITON.
1. FAILURE TO OPEN OR UNEXPECTED CLOSING OF THE DAMPER DETECTED BY A DAMPER THAT IS
CLOSED AFTER A OPEN COMMAND IS GIVEN.
UNDER THIS CONDITION, THE AUTOMATIC MODE CONTROL AND LOGIC MEMORY CIRCUITS
ARE NOT RESET UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED ON INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS.
THE EQUIPMENT RETURNS TO NORMAL OPERATION AUTOMATICALLY AFTER THE FAULT CONDITION
IS CLEARED.
2. FAILURE TO CLOSE OR UNEXPECTED OPENING OF THE DAMPER DETECTED BY A DAMPER THAT IS
OPEN AFTER A CLOSE COMMAND IS GIVEN.
3. MISCELLANEOUS TROUBLE CONDITION AND ANY RELATED ALARM OR INDICATING LIGHT
WHEN APPLICABLE.
E. DISABLED DETECTOR FUNCTIONS
A FLASHING DISABLED LIGHT AND ALARM OPERATE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS TO
INDICATE THAT THE DAMPER CANNOT BE OPERATED. THE FLASHING DISABLED LIGHT GOES TO
STEADY WHEN THE TROUBLE/DISABLED PUSHBUTTON IS OPERATED AND TO OFF WHEN THE
DISABLED CONDITION RETURNS TO OFF WHEN THE DISABLED CONDITON RETURNS TO NORMAL.
THE TROUBLE/DISABLED DETECTOR DOES NOT FUNCTION WHEN THE PROCESS DAMPER IS IN
MODULATING MODE SINCE THE VALVE MAY BE IN ANY MID POSITION.
1. LOSS OF MOTOR STARTER COIL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY DETECTED BY A COIL CONTINUITY
MONITORING CIRCUIT.
2. LOSS OF MOTOR STARTER CONTROL POWER DETECTED BY A CONTROL POWER
MONITORING CIRCUIT.
3. ABSENCE OF OPEN OR CLOSE PERMISSIVE INTERLOCK SIGNALS THAT NORMALLY EXIST TO PERMIT
THE OPENING OR CLOSING OF THE DAMPER WHEN SHOWN ON THE INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM.
4. MISCELLANEOUS DISABLED CONDITION AND ANY RELATED ALARM OR INDICATING LIGHT
WHEN APPLICABLE.
5. MODULE DISABLE CONDITION INCLUDING INTERNAL DISABLED CONDITIONS
WHICH ARE DETECTED BY SELF TEST AND ERROR DETECTION BY PCMS.
D
C
B
4 3
2
2 05/25/11 AS-BUILT
1 05/13/11 GENERAL REVISION
0 04/30/07 ISSUE FOR CONSTRUCTION
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
A
TYPICAL PCMS CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC MOTOR
DAMPER CIRCUITS. NOTES
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
1-700-J158-011
SHEET
1/1
JOB NO.
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
SCALE
REV.
2A626
NNS
NONE
2
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

4 3
REVERSE PROGRAMMING
FOR FAIL OPEN DAMPER
2
EN-COIL
OPEN
DAMPER
LS-o
PM01
MAN OPEN(SC)
D
AUXILIARY OPEN
PROCESS CONTROL(AUTO OPEN)
1 1-700-J158-014
AUTO MODE
A
2
S
R
B
REVERSE PROGRAMMING
FOR FAIL OPEN DAMPERS
CONTROL VOLTAGE
FAILURE
ELECTRIC
PROTECTION
A
OPEN
PERMISSIVE
SC
DEEN-COIL
CLOSE
DAMPER
LS-c
NOTE 1
PERMISSIVE COMMAND
C
PROCESS CONTROL(AUTO CLOSE)
5
TO DISABLED
APPLICABLE
4
2
S
ON
R
NOTE 6
4
MISC. TROUBLE
TROUBLE/DISABLED
SC
S
ON
R NOTE 6
1
1-700-J158-014
5
TO AUTOMATIC
CONTROL
TO OPEN INTERLOCK
WITH OTHER CIRCUITS
R
SC
G
SC
TO CLOSE INTERLOCK
WITH OTHER CIRCUITS
1-700-J158-014
TO AUTOMATIC
4
CONTROL
TROUBLE DETECTOR
TO ALARM LOGIC
S
R
D
FLASHER
Y
TROUBLE(SC)
C
PM01
MAN CLOSE(SC)
C
B
A
AUXILIARY CLOSE
D
NOTE 5
NOTE 4
NOTE 3
COIL CIRCUIT OPEN
ON
NOTE 6
ON
1 SEC
1-700-J158-014 9
TRANSFER AUTOMATIC
CONTROL TO MANUAL
MODE
ON
0.5 SEC
S
R
DISABLED DETECTOR
TO ALARM LOGIC
PERMISSIVE COMMAND
5
TO DISABLED DETECTOR
WHEN APPLICABLE
5
PERMISSIVE
EQUIPMENT CONTROL POWER FAIL
PCMS LOGIC POWER FAIL
FLASHER
Y
DISABLED(SC)
B
LIMIT SWITCH CONTACT DEVELOPMENT
LS-o
DAMPER POSITION
FULLY FULLY
INTERMEDIATE
CLOSED OPEN
LS-Ic
LS-c
LS-Io
SOLID LINE DENOTES
CONTACT CLOSED
MISC. DISABLED
CONTROL
PANEL
OPEN(SC)
CONTROL
PANEL
CLOSE(SC)
ELECTRIC PROTECTION
EN COIL
OPEN
DAMPER
DEEN COIL
CLOSE
DAMPER
TROUBLE
DETECTOR
DISABLED
DETECTOR
TO ALARM
LOGIC
R
(SC)
G
(SC)
OPEN
RED
TROUBLE
DISABLED
YEL
YEL
NOTES
1. DELETE FOR OPEN/MODULATE-CLOSE OPERATION.
2. DELETE FOR OPEN-CLOSE/MODULATE OPERATION.
3. PROGRAMMING FOR FAIL OPEN DAMPERS.
4. PROGRAMMING FOR FAIL CLOSED DAMPERS.
5. PROGRAMMING FOR FAIL CLOSED DAMPERS WITH OPEN/
MODULATED-CLOSE OPERATION AND FOR FAIL OPEN DAMPERS
WITH OPEN-CLOSE/MODULATED OPERATION.
6. SET TO 5 SEC. IT LAN BE ADJUSTED FROM 0.1 SEC TO 999 SEC.
2 05/25/11 AS-BUILT
1 04/12/11 GENERAL REVISION
0 04/30/07 ISSUE FOR CONSTRUCTION
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
CLOSE
GRN
MANUAL
AMB
HS-
CONTROL SWITCH
MODULE
INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM FORMAT EXAMPLE
TYPICAL PCMS CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC MOTOR DAMPER CIRCUITS
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
1-700-J158-012
JOB NO.
2A626
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
NNS
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
2
A
4 3
2
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

4 3
2
1
D
C
B
AUTOMATIC CONTROL AND STANDBY START
NOTES
A. FORMAT
1. LOGIC IN HEAVY LINES IS SHOWN ON INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS,
WHEN APPLICABLE.
2. LOGIC IN LIGHT LINES IS NOT SHOWN ON INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS.
3. THE LOGIC IS SHOWN FOR START AND STOP CIRCUIT ACTIONS. OPEN AND CLOSE
CIRCUIT ACTIONS USE A SIMILAR LOGIC ARRANGEMENT.
B. FUNCTIONS
1. WHEN EQUIPMENT IS STARTED, OPERATION OF THE START PUSHBUTTON TRANSFERS
THE CONTROL MODE FROM AUTOMATIC TO MANUAL AND BACK TO AUTOMATIC EVERY
TIME THE START PUSHBUTTON DEPRESSED.
2. WHEN EQUIPMENT IS STOPPED, OPERATION OF THE STOP PUSHBUTTON PERFORMS
THE SAME AUTOMATIC MANUAL CONTROL MODE TRANSFER DESCRIBED IN ITEM B.1
ABOVE.
3. AUTOMATIC CONTROL CIRCUITS SHOULD NORMALLY BE IN AUTOMATIC. AN AMBER
LIGHT INDICATES WHEN THE CONTROL CIRCUIT IS NOT IN AUTOMATIC.
4. WHEN VALVES AND DAMPERS ARE IN AN INTERMEDIATE POSITION, AUTOMATIC-MANUAL
TRANSFER CANNOT TAKE PLACE.
5. WHEN IN AUTOMATIC, PROCESS CONTROL INPUTS START AND STOP THE EQUIPMENT.
6. MANUAL OPERATION OF THE START AND STOP PUSHBUTTONS CONTROLS THE EQUIPMENT
AND TRANSFERS THE CONTROL MODE FROM AUTOMATIC TO MANUAL AND BACK TO AUTOMATIC.
7. OPERATION OF THE MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR, AND LOAD CENTER CIRCUIT
TROUBLE DETECTOR TRANSFERS THE CONTROL MODE TO MANUAL.
THIS PREVENTS AUTOMATICALLY STARTING EQUIPMENT AFTER AN ELECTRICAL
PROTECTION TRIP.
8. OPERATION OF THE SAFETY COMMAND TRANSFERS THE CONTROL MODE TO MANUAL.
THIS AVOIDS AUTOMATIC CONTROL DURING OR AFTER A ESF ACTUATION.
9. WHEN NON-REVERSING MOTOR STARTERS AND SOLENOID VALVES ARE DEENERGIZED
BECAUSE OF OVERLOAD OR LOSS OF MCC CONTROL POWER, SOLENOID COIL MOTIVE POWER,
MANUAL OPERATION OF THE STOP AND DEENERGIZED COMMAND PUSHBUTTONS
TRANSFERS AUTO CONTROL TO MANUAL MODE.
10. FOR STANDBY START CONTROL, THE PROCESS CONTROL STOP INPUT IS DELETED.
11. REFER TO DRAWINGS 1-700-J158-004, 006, 008,010 AND 012 FOR EQUIPMENT TYPICAL
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS.
NOTES
SYNCHRONIZING MODE CIRUIT
A. FORMAT
1. LOGIC IN HEAVY LINES IS SHOWN ON INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS
WHEN APPLICABLE.
2. LOGIC IN LIGHT LINES IS NOT SHOWN ON INDIVIDUAL CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAMS.
B. FUNCTIONS
1. WHEN CIRCUIT BREAKERS ARE TRIPPED, OPERATION OF THE TRIP PUSHBUTTON
TRANSFERS THE CONTROL MODE FROM NOT IN SYNC. TO SYNC. AND BACK TO
NOT IN SYNC. EVERY TIME THE TRIP PUSHBUTTON DEPRESSED.
2. AN AMBER LIGHT INDICATES WHEN THE CIRCUIT IS IN SYNCRONIZATION MODE.
3. WHEN ANY ONE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS IN SYNC. MODE ALL OTHER SYNCHRONIZING MODE
TRANSFER CIRCUITS MAKING USE OF THE SAME SYNCHROSCOPE AND VOLTAGE COMPARISON
ARE BLOCKED TO PREVENT PARALLELING POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER CIRCUITS ON THE
SYNCHRONIZING BUSES.
4. THE SYNCHRONIZING RELAYS CONNECT THE APPROPRIATE INCOMING AND RUN POTENTIALS
TO THE SYNCHRONIZING BUSES.
5. CIRCUIT BREAKER CLOSING CIRCUITS ARE BLOCKED UNTIL SYNC. MODE HAS BEEN
SELECTED.
6. WHEN CIRCUIT BREAKERS ARE CLOSED, THE CONTROL CIRCUIT TRANSFERS TO NOT IN SYNC.
AND DEENERGIZES THE SYNCHRONIZING RELAYS AUTOMATICALLY.
D
C
B
A
4 3
2
2 05/25/11 AS-BUILT
1 05/13/11 GENERAL REVISION
0 04/30/07 ISSUE FOR CONSTRUCTION
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
A
TYPICAL PCMS CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM
CONTROL MODE TRANSFER CIRCUITS. NOTES
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
1-700-J158-013
JOB NO.
2A626
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
NNS
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
2
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

4 3
2
1
D
C
B
A
PM01
CLOSE(SC)
PM01
TRIP(SC)
CIRCUIT BREAKER
TRIPPED
CIRCUIT BREAKER
CLOSED
FROM OTHER
SYNCHRONIZING
CIRCUITS
5 9-700-J158-004
4 9-700-J158-004
A
SEE DWG.
9-700-J158-004
FOR DETAIL
C
TO OTHER
SYNCHRONIZING
CIRCUITS
OFF
0.1SEC
S
T
(9-700-J158-013)
R
ENERGIZING
SYNCHRONIZING
INSTRUMENT
& RELAYS
PM01
MAN START(SC)
1
2
1
PROCESS CONTROL(AUTO START)
A
START
COMMAND
EQUIPMENT STARTED
(NOTE 2)
4
NOTE 4
EQUIPMENT STOPPED
(NOTE 1)
5
NOTE 4
NOTE 2
SWGR AND LC
CIRCUIT TROUBLE
6 1-700-J158-004
BUS VOLTAGE
FAILURE
14 1-700-J158-008
NRS TROUBLE
13 1-700-J158-008
NRS, SOL. VALVE
AND DAMPER DISABLED
9 1-700-J158-006,
008,010
OFF
1 SEC
PM01
MAN STOP(SC)
SH0WN ON INDIVIDUAL
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM
S
T
R
NOTE 4
1
A
SC
MAN
NOTE 3
2
PROCESS CONTROL(AUTO STOP)
DELETE FOR STANDBY START
C
STOP
COMMAND
AUTOMATIC CONTROL OR STANDBY START
4 3
STATE 1
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
TRIPPED AND
NOT IN SYNC
MODE
HAND SWITCH TRIP
HAND SWITCH TRIP
STATE 2
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
TRIPPED AND
IN SYNC MODE
HAND
SWITCH
CLOSE
CLOSE
RED
TROUBLE
YEL
DISABLED
TRIP
YEL
GRN
SYNC
AMB
HS-
CONTROL SWITCH
MODULE
D
CIRCUIT BREAKER
CLOSED AND NOT
IN SYNC MODE
STATE 3
SYNCHRONIZING CIRCUIT
STATE 1
STATE 2
EQUIPMENT
STOPPED AND
IN AUTOMATIC
MODE
PROCESS CONTROL START
PROCESS CONTROL STOP
DELETE FOR
STANDBY START
EQUIPMENT
STARTED AND
IN AUTOMATIC
MODE
HAND
SWITCH
STOP
HAND
SWITCH
START
HAND SWITCH START
EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT
STOPPED AND STARTED AND
IN MANUAL HAND SWITCH STOP IN MANUAL
MODE MODE
STATE 4
STATE 3
START
RED
TROUBLE
YEL
DISABLED
STOP
YEL
GRN
MANUAL
AMB
HS-
CONTROL SWITCH
MODULE
C
B
NOTES
1. FROM NOT FULLY OPEN LOGIC FOR VALVES,
OR DAMPERS.
2. FROM NOT FULLY CLOSED LOGIC FOR VALVES,
OR DAMPERS.
3. FROM DEENERGIZE COMMAND LOGIC FOR
SOLENOID VALVES.
4. REFER TO DWG. NO. 1-700-J158-004, 006,008, 010
AND 012.
2
2 05/25/11 AS-BUILT
1 04/12/11 GENERAL REVISION
0 04/30/07 ISSUE FOR CONSTRUCTION
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
A
TYPICAL PCMS CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM
CONTROL MODE TRANSFER CIRCUITS
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
1-700-J158-014
JOB NO.
2A626
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
NNS
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
2
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

9 8 7 6 5
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-481-J158-000
H
4
G
LOGIC DIAG. NO. TITLE
0-481-J158-001
2ND RADWASTE, RADWASTE R/ST BLDG. SUMP PUMPS
0-481-J158-002 SYSTEM ALARM
3
2
REV.
0
0
1
H
G
F
F
E
E
D
D
C
C
B
A
DGN.
32E
79G
11
9
.01 10 20
1:100 0 1M 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 0
8
7
1
2
3
6
4
5
5
?"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
B
05/29/18
0
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
3/8"
0 1 2 3 4 5
3
6
7
8
9
10
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (DE)
RADIOACTIVE DRAIN SYSTEM
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-481-J158-000
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
III
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
A
1/4"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
1
A3 (16.5"X11.7")

H
G
F
9 8 7 6 5
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-481-J158-001
HS-001 START(SC)
LOCAL
HS-001A MCR
LOCAL
HS-001A START
4
FROM PP02 START FAIL
1
2
SUMP LVL.HI
PCMS
LS-001A
COMMON S
T
R
1 700-J158-014
AUTO MODE
TO PUMP
PP02
2
4
3
A
4
START
PUMP
PP01
3
2
1
HS-001(SC)
R
HS-001A
R
LOCAL
START RED
TROUBLE
DISABLE
STOP
YEL
YEL
GRN
MANUAL
AMB
HS-001(SC)
CONTROL SWITCH
MODULE
G
R
MCR
STOP START
H
HS-001A
3-POSITION
MAINTAINED
(LOCAL)
G
F
E
D
C
B
SUMP LVL.HI-HI
PCMS
LS-001C
481-J158-002 1 TO ALARM LOGIC
(NOTE2)
TO PUMP PP02
PCMS SUMP LVL.LO
LS-001B
HS-001 STOP(SC)
LOCAL
HS-001A STOP
TO PUMP
PP02
C
ELEC.PROTECTION
TROUBLE
DETECTOR
481-J158-002 10
DISABLED
DETECTOR
481-J158-002 11
TO ALARM LOGIC
NOTES
1. BOTH PUMPS SHOULD BE AUTO
MODE DURING NORMAL OPERATION.
E
2. THIS ALARM OUTPUT IS
APPLICABLE TO PP01 ONLY
STOP
PUMP
PP01
3
HS-001A
G
LOCAL
HS-001(SC)
G
ON
1 SEC
1
TO START
STAND-BY
PUMP PP02
REFERENCE DWGS
P & ID : 0-481-N105-001
FLD : 0-481-J157-001
TYPICAL LOGIC : 1-700-J158-008,014
ELEC. SCHEMATIC : LATER
D
C
EQUIPMENT
NO.
CONTROL SWITCH
NO. CONNECTION LOCATION
INDICATION
MMI
NO. LOCATION
PWR
SEG
PP01
HS-001(SC)
HS-001A
-
PM-OC
LDP
-
LOCAL
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
HS-002(SC) - PM-OC LDP - -
PP02
HS-002A - LOCAL - - -
-
-
EQUIP. PWR.
PROCESS DEVICE PCMS CABINET
SOURCE
REMARK
LS-001A,LS-001B,
LS-001C
LATER
LATER
LATER
10,11,1
12,13
2ND RADWASTE BLDG. FLOOR
DRAIN SUMP PUMPS
B
05/29/18
0
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
A
DGN.
32E
79G
11
9
RADWASTE, RADWASTE R/ST BLDG. SUMP PUMPS
.01 10 20
1:100 0 1M 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 0
8
7
1
2
3
6
4
5
5
?"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
3/8"
0 1 2 3 4 5
3
6
7
8
9
10
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (DE)
2ND RADWASTE, RADWASTE R/ST BLDG. SUMP PUMPS
A
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-481-J158-001
JOB NO.
11G79
1/4"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
II
SCALE
NONE
1
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
A3 (16.5"X11.7")

9 8 7 6 5
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-481-J158-002
H
4
3
2
1
H
G
F
E
PP01 TROUBLE
10 481-J158-001
PP01 DISABLED
11 481-J158-001
R
UA
001
PP02 TROUBLE
12 481-J158-001
PP02 DISABLED
13 481-J158-001
R
UA
002
2ND RADWASTE BLDG. FLOOR DRAIN
SUMP LEVEL HI-HI
1 481-J158-001
LS-001C
LAHH
011
G
F
E
D
D
C
C
B
A
DGN.
32E
79G
11
9
.01 10 20
1:100 0 1M 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 0
8
7
1
2
3
6
4
5
5
?"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
B
05/29/18
0
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
3/8"
0 1 2 3 4 5
3
6
7
8
9
10
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (DE)
SYSTEM ALARM
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-481-J158-002
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
II
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
A
1/4"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
1
A3 (16.5"X11.7")

9 8 7 6 5
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-582-J158-000
H
4
3
2
1
H
G
F
E
D
LOGIC DIAG. NO.
0-582-J158-001
0-582-J158-002
0-582-J158-003
0-582-J158-004
TITLE
DEMI. WATER TRANSFER PUMPS
DEMI. WATER STORAGE TANK ISOLATION VALVE
SYSTEM ALARM
DOMESTIC WATER FEED PUMPS
REV.
A
A
A
A
VOID
G
F
E
D
C
C
B
A
DGN.
32E
79G
11
9
.01 10 20
1:100 0 1M 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 0
8
7
1
2
3
6
4
5
5
?"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
B
06/11/18
0
VOID
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
3/8"
0 1 2 3 4 5
3
6
7
8
9
10
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (WM)
MAKE-UP DEMINERALIZER SYSTEM
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-582-J158-000
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
III
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
A
1/4"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
1
A3 (16.5"X11.7")

H
G
F
E
D
C
9 8 7 6 5
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-582-J158-001
4
3
2
1
LP01
HS-3001 START
LP01
HS-3002 MAN
LP01
HS-3002 AUTO
LP01
HS-3011 AUTO
5
1
2
PUMP DISCH.PRESS LO
PS-003
ON
3 SEC
582-J158-003 2
TO ALARM
LOGIC
DEMI.WATER STRG TANK TK01
LEVEL LO-LO
LP01
LS-3002D (SW.2)
LP01
HS-3011 MAN
LP01
HS-3011 START
DEMI.WATER STRG TANK TK01 LEVEL LO-LO-LO
LP01
LS-3002E(SW.2)
2
3
LP01
HS-3011 MAN
LP01
HS-3011 STOP
5
HS-3002 MAN
LP01
HS-3001 STOP
ELECTRICAL PROTECTION
3
START
PUMP
PP01
4
R
ZL-001
PCMS
TO
582-J158-003 1 ALARM
LOGIC
HS-3001
R
LP01
HS-3011
R
LP01
ZL-3011
R
LP01
(NOTE 3)
G
R
STOP START
MAN AUTO
HS-3001
2-POSITION
MAINTAINED
HS-3002
2-POSITION
MAINTAINED
MAN AUTO START
STOP
HS-3011
LOCATION CRT(LP01)
H
G
F
NOTES
1. CONTROL SWITCH LIGHT & CIRCUIT
WILL BE SUPPLIED BY WATER
TREATMENT SYSTEM(M233) VENDOR.
2. ONE PUMP IS MANUALLY STARTED
DURING NORMAL OPERATION. THE
OTHER PUMP SHOULD BE PLACED
IN AUTO MODE.
3. THIS LAMP IS EXPRESSED AS THE
1
GRAPHIC SYMBOL ON THE CRT.
VOID4 G ZL-001PCMS
STOP
PUMP
PP01
HS-3001
G
LP01
HS-3011
G
LP01
ZL-3011
G
LP01
(NOTE 3)
REFERENCE DWGS
P & ID : 0-582-M105-001
FLD : 0-582-J157-002
VENDOR DWG : LATER
ELEC. SCHEMATIC : LATER
E
D
C
TO ALARM
582-J158-003 10
LOGIC
B
A
DGN.
32E
79G
11
EQUIPMENT
NO.
CONTROL SWITCH
NO. CONNECTION LOCATION
HS-3011
-
LP01
INDICATION
MMI
NO. LOCATION
MON. LOC. OF
LIGHT NO. MON. LIGHT
PROCESS DEVICE
EQUIP. PWR.
PCMS CAB. REMAKES
SOURCE
B
PP01
PP02
9
HS-3001
HS-3002
HS-3012
HS-3003
HS-3004
-
-
-
-
-
LP01
LP01
LP01
LP01
LP01
-
ZL-001 PCMS
ZL-3011
LATER
LATER
10
-
ZL-002 PCMS
ZL-3012
LP01 PS-003
LS-3002D LS-3002E
LATER
LATER
11
DEMI. WATER TRANSFER PUMPS
.01 10 20
1:100 0 1M 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 0
8
7
1
2
3
6
4
5
5
?"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
3/8"
0 1 2 3 4 5
3
6
7
8
9
10
06/11/18
0
VOID
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (WM)
DEMI. WATER TRANSFER PUMPS
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-582-J158-001
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
III
SCALE
NONE
A
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
1/4"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
1
A3 (16.5"X11.7")

9 8 7 6 5
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-582-J158-002
H
4
3
2
1
AUTO
CLOSE OPEN
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
DGN.
32E
79G
11
LP01
HS-3005 OPEN
LP01
HS-3005 AUTO
DEMI.WATER STRG TANK TK01
LEVEL LO
LP01
LS-3002B
S
R
DEMI.WATER STRG TANK TK01
LEVEL HI
LP01
LS-3002A
LP01
HS-3005 CLOSE
(NOTE 2)
HS-3005
LOCATION CRT
(LP01)
G
EN-SOL
OPEN
VALVE
005
LS-o
LS-o
582-J158-004 1
ZL-3005
R
LP01
(NOTE 4)
F
NOTES
1. CONTROL SWITCH LIGHT & CIRCUIT
WILL BE SUPPLIED BY WATER
TREATMENT SYSTEM(M233) VENDOR.
2. THIS PORTION OF THE CONTROL
LS-c
CLOSE 582-J158-004 2 CIRCUIT WILL BE HANDLED BY THE
DEEN-SOL
VALVE WATER TERAMENT SYSTEM(M233)
LS-c ZL-3005
005 G VENDOR.
LP01
3. THERE IS NO INTERFACE WITH PCMS.
(NOTE 4)
4. THIS LAMP IS EXPRESSED AS THE
VOIDGRAPHIC SYMBOL ON THE CRT.
REFERENCE DWGS
P & ID : 0-582-M105-001
FLD : 0-582-J157-002
VENDOR DWG.: LATER
ELEC. SCHEMATIC : N/A
E
D
C
EQUIPMENT
NO. NO.
CONTROL SWITCH MON. LOC. OF
PROCESS DEVICE
CONNNECTION LOCATION LIGHT NO. MON. LIGHT
V0005 HS-3005 -
LP01 ZL-3005 LP01 LS-3002A LS-3002B
PCMS EQUIP. PWR.
CABINET SOURCE
N/A
582-J-LP01
REMARKS
DEMI. WATER STORAGE TANK ISOLATION VALVE
B
9
.01 10 20
1:100 0 1M 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 0
8
7
1
2
3
6
4
5
5
?"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
06/11/18
0
VOID
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
3/8"
0 1 2 3 4 5
3
6
7
8
9
10
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (WM)
DEMI. WATER STORAGE TANK ISOLATION VALVE
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-582-J158-002
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
III
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
A
1/4"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
1
A3 (16.5"X11.7")

9 8 7 6 5
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-582-J158-003
H
4
3
2
1
H
G
F
E
D
C
DEMI. WATER STRG TANK TK01 LEVEL LO-LO-LO
RX02-1
LS-001B
DEMI. WATER STRG TANK TK01 LEVEL LO-LO
RX02-1
LS-001A
DEMI. WATER STRG TANK TK01 LEVEL HI-HI
LP01
LS-3002C(NOTE 1)
DEMI. WATER STRG TANK TK01 LEVEL LO-LO
LP01
LS-3002D(SW.1)(NOTE 1)
DEMI. WATER STRG TANK TK01 LEVEL LO-LO-LO
LP01
LS-3002E(SW.1)(NOTE 1)
ELEC. PROTECTION OF WM SYS. PACKAGE PUMPS
DEMI. WATER TRANSFER PUMP
PP01 ELEC. PROTECTION
10 582-J158-001
11 582-J158-001
DEMI. WATER TRANSFER PUMP
PP02 ELEC. PROTECTION
10 582-J158-004
DEMI. WATER FEED PUMP PP03
ELEC. PROTECTION
11 582-J158-004
DEMI. WATER FEED PUMP PP04
ELEC. PROTECTION
R
LALL
001
LAHL
3339
LP01
PUMP PP01 START
1 582-J158-001
PUMP PP02 START
1 582-J158-001
PUMP DISCHARGE
PRESS LO
2 582-J158-001
ON
30 SEC
PAL
3361
LP01
(NOTE 2)
NOTES
1. IT WILL BE IMPLEMENTED IN PLC
PANEL(LP01) SUPPLIED BY WATER
TREATMENT SYSTEM(M233) VENDOR.
2. THIS PORTION OF CONTROL CIRCUIT
IS LOCATED IN VENDOR PLC AND
WILL BE HANDLED BY WATER
TREATMENT SYSTEM(M233) VENDOR.
UA
-
VOIDLP01
G
F
E
D
DEMI. WATER STRG TANK TK01 TEMP LO
TIS-3005
TAL
3005
LP01
REFERENCE DWGS
P&ID : 0-582-M105-001
FLD : 0-582-J157-001,002
C
B
A
DGN.
32E
79G
11
9
.01 10 20
1:100 0 1M 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 0
8
7
1
2
3
6
4
5
5
?"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
B
06/11/18
0
VOID
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
3/8"
0 1 2 3 4 5
3
6
7
8
9
10
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (WM)
SYSTEM ALARM
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-582-J158-003
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
III
SCALE
NONE
A
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
1/4"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
1
A3 (16.5"X11.7")

9 8 7 6 5
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-582-J158-004
4
3
2
1
H
G
F
E
D
C
MAN AUTO START
H
STOP
LP01
LP01
HS-3201 MAN
HS-3201 START
HS-3201
LOCATION CRT(LP01)
PP03 PP04
G
DOMESTIC WATER STORAGE TANK TK02 LEVEL LO
LP01
WD-LS-3002B HS-3201
R
LP01
DEMI.WATER ISO. VLV. 005 OPEN POSITION
1 582-J158-002 HS-3203
(NOTE 2) LOCATION CRT
DOMESTIC WATER FEED
PUMP CONTROL ZL-3201 (LP01)
DEMI.WATER ISO. VLV. 005 CLOSE POSITION R
2 582-J158-002 LP01
SEE VENDOR
(NOTE 2) (NOTE 4)
DWG.:LATER NOTES
HS-3201 AUTO
LP01
HS-3201 1. CONTROL SWITCH & CIRCUIT WILL
G
LP01
HS-3201 STOP BE SUPPLIED BY WATER TREATMENT
LP01
SYSTEM(M233)VENDOR.
HS-3201 MAN
LP01 2. THIS PORTION OF THE CONTROL
ZL-3201
G CIRCUIT WILL BE HANDLED BY
LEAD SELECTOR LP01
LP01 (NOTE 4) THE WATER TERAMENT SYSTEM
HS-3203
(M233) VENDOR.
ELEC.PROTECTION 3. THERE IS NO INTERFACE WITH
PCMS.
4. THIS LAMP IS EXPRESSED AS THE
GRAPHIC SYMBOL ON THE CRT.
582-J158-003VOID 10 TO ALARMLOGIC
F
E
D
REFERENCE DWGS
P & ID : 0-582-M105-001
C & ID : N/A
VENDOR DWG. : LATER
C
B
A
DGN.
32E
79G
11
9
EQUIPMENT
NO. NO.
CONTROL SWITCH MON. LOC. OF
CONNNECTION LOCATION LIGHT NO. MON. LIGHT
PROCESS DEVICE
PP03
PP04
HS-3201
HS-3202
-
-
LP01
LP01
ZL-3201
ZL-3202
LP01
585-LS-3002B
-

• HS-3203 -

LP01
-
-
-
-
EQUIP. PWR.
SOURCE
REMARKS
LATER
10
LATER
-
11
-
DOMESTIC WATER FEED PUMPS
B
06/11/18
0
VOID
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
.01 10 20
1:100 0 1M 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 0
8
7
1
2
3
6
4
5
5
?"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
3/8"
0 1 2 3 4 5
3
6
7
8
9
10
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (WM)
DOMESTIC WATER FEED PUMPS
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-582-J158-004
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
III
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
A
1/4"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
1
A3 (16.5"X11.7")

9 8 7 6 5
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-585-J158-000
H
4
3
2
1
H
G
F
E
D
LOGIC DIAG. NO.
0-585-J158-001
0-585-J158-002
0-585-J158-003
TITLE
PROCESS WATER SUPPLY PUMPS
DOMESTIC WATER STORAGE TANK ISOLATION VALVE
SYSTEM ALARM
REV.
A
A
A
VOID
G
F
E
D
C
C
B
A
DGN.
32E
79G
11
9
.01 10 20
1:100 0 1M 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 0
8
7
1
2
3
6
4
5
5
?"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
B
06/11/18
0
VOID
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
3/8"
0 1 2 3 4 5
3
6
7
8
9
10
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (WD)
DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-585-J158-000
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
III
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
A
1/4"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
1
A3 (16.5"X11.7")

9 8 7 6 5
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-585-J158-001
4
3
2
1
H
G
F
E
D
C
LOCAL
582-LP01
HS-001 START
HS-3015 LOCAL
HS-3015 REMOTE
582-LP01
HS-3013 START
582-LP01
HS-3013 MAN
582-LP01
3
1
2
4
G
R
STOP
START
REMOTE
LOCAL
HS-001
3-POSITION SPRING
RETURN TO CENTER
HS-3015
LOCATION CRT
(582-LP01)
7
6
PP04 START FAIL
BOTH LEVEL LO
ZL-001
R
PCMS
MAN AUTO START
FROM PP04 START
5
HS-3013 AUTO
582-LP01
DOMESTIC WATER STRG
TK02 LEVEL LO
582-LP01
LS-3002B
FWST LEVEL LO
LATER
FP-LS-003C
S
T
R
6
PUMP SUCTION PRESS LO
PS-3350
DOMESTIC WATER STRG TK02 LEVEL HI
582-LP01
LS-3002A
FWST LEVEL HI
LATER
FP-LS-003B
HS-3013 STOP
582-LP01
HS-3015 REMOTE
1
HS-3013 MAN
2
LOCAL
3
HS-001 STOP
HS-3015 LOCAL
ELECTRICAL PROTECTION
ON
15SEC
S
R
START
PUMP
PP03
HS-001
R
LOCAL
HS-3013
R
582-LP01
STOP
HS-3013
LOCATION CRT(582-LP01)
S
R
TO PP04
5 TO PP04
TO PUMP PP04
ON 7
AUTO START
VOID4 1SEC G ZL-001PCMS REFERENCE DWGS
STOP
PUMP
PP03
HS-001
G
LOCAL
P & ID : 0-585-M105-001
FLD : 0-585-J157-002
VENDOR DWG : LATER
ELEC. SCHEMATIC : LATER
HS-3013
G
582-LP01
H
G
F
E
D
C
TO ALARM
585-J158-003 10
LOGIC
B
A
DGN.
32E
79G
11
9
EQUIPMENT
NO.
CONTROL SWITCH
NO. CONNECTION LOCATION
HS-001
-
-
PP03
HS-3013
-
582-LP01
PP04
HS-3015
HS-002
HS-3014
HS-3015
-
-
-
-
582-LP01
-
582-LP01
582-LP01
INDICATION
MMI
NO. LOCATION
EQUIP. PWR.
PROCESS DEVICE PCMS CAB. REMARKS
SOURCE
-
ZL-001 PCMS
-
ZL-002 PCMS
LS-3002A
LS-3002B
FP-LS-003B
FP-LS-003C
PS-3350
LATER
LATER
10
LATER
LATER
11
PROCESS WATER SUPPLY PUMPS
.01 10 20
1:100 0 1M 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 0
8
7
1
2
3
6
4
5
5
?"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
3/8"
0 1 2 3 4 5
3
6
7
8
9
10
B
06/11/18
0
VOID
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (WD)
PROCESS WATER SUPPLY PUMPS
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-585-J158-001
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
III
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
A
1/4"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
1
A3 (16.5"X11.7")

9 8 7 6 5
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-585-J158-002
H
4
3
2
1
AUTO
CLOSE OPEN
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
582-LP01
HS-3001 OPEN
582-LP01
HS-3001 AUTO
DOMESTIC WATER STRG TANK TK02
LEVEL LO
582-LP01
LS-3002B
S
R
DOMESTIC WATER STRG TANK TK02
LEVEL HI
582-LP01
LS-3002A
(NOTE 2)
582-LP01
HS-3001 CLOSE
HS-3001
LOCATION CRT
(582-LP01)
G
EN-SOL
OPEN
VALVE
001
LS-o
ZL-3001
R
582-LP01
(NOTE 4)
F
NOTES
1. CONTROL SWITCH LIGHT & CIRCUIT
WILL BE SUPPLIED BY WATER
TREATMENT SYSTEM(M233) VENDOR.
2. THIS PORTION OF THE CONTROL
DEEN-SOL CLOSE
LS-c ZL-3001 CIRCUIT WILL BE HANDLED BY THE
VALVE G
582-LP01 WATER TERAMENT SYSTEM(M233)
001
(NOTE 4) VENDOR.
3. THERE IS NO INTERFACE WITH PCMS.
4. THIS LAMP IS EXPRESSED AS THE
VOIDGRAPHIC SYMBOL ON THE CRT.
REFERENCE DWGS
E
D
P & ID : 0-585-M105-001
FLD : 0-585-J157-002
VENDOR DWG.: LATER
ELEC. SCHEMATIC : N/A
C
EQUIPMENT
NO. NO.
CONTROL SWITCH MON. LOC. OF EQUIP. PWR.
PROCESS DEVICE
CONNNECTION LOCATION LIGHT NO. MON. LIGHT SOURCE
V0001 HS-3001 -
582-LP01 ZL-3001 582-LP01
LS-3002A LS-3002B
LATER
REMARKS
DOMESTIC WATER STORAGE TANK ISOLATION VALVE
B
A
DGN.
32E
79G
11
9
.01 10 20
1:100 0 1M 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 0
8
7
1
2
3
6
4
5
5
?"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
06/11/18
0
VOID
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
3/8"
0 1 2 3 4 5
3
6
7
8
9
10
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (WD)
DOMESTIC WATER STORAGE TANK ISOLATION VALVE
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-585-J158-002
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
III
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
A
1/4"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
1
A3 (16.5"X11.7")

9 8 7 6 5
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-585-J158-003
H
4
3
2
1
H
G
F
E
D
C
DOMESTIC WATER STRG TANK TK02 LEVEL LO-LO
LATER
LS-001B
DOMESTIC WATER STRG TANK TK02 LEVEL LO
LATER
LS-001A
DOMESTIC WATER STRG TANK TK02 LEVEL HI-HI
582-LP01
LS-3002C (NOTE 1)
DOMESTIC WATER STRG TANK TK02 LEVEL LO
582-LP01
LS-3002B (NOTE 1)
DOMESTIC WATER STRG TANK TK02 LEVEL LO-LO
582-LP01
LS-3003D (NOTE 1)
R
LALL
001
LAHL
3360
582-LP01
G
F
PROCESS WATER SUPPLY PUMP NOTES
PP03 ELEC. PROTECTION
10 585-J158-001
UA 1. IT WILL BE IMPLEMENTED IN PLC
PROCESS WATER SUPPLY PUMP

• PANEL(LP01) SUPPLIED BY WATER

PP04 ELEC. PROTECTION
11 585-J158-001 TREATMENT SYSTEM(M233) VENDOR.
582-LP01
2. THIS PORTION OF CONTROL CIRCUIT
IS LOCATED IN VENDOR PLC AND
WILL BE HANDLED BY WATER
TREATMENT SYSTEM(M233) VENDOR.
VOID3. PCMS CABINET : LATER
DOMESTIC WATER STRG TANK TK02 TEMP LO
TIS-001
(NOTE 3)
TAL
002
E
D
REFERENCE DWGS
P&ID : 0-585-M105-001
FLD : 0-585-J157-001,002
C
B
A
DGN.
32E
79G
11
9
.01 10 20
1:100 0 1M 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 0
8
7
1
2
3
6
4
5
5
?"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
B
06/11/18
0
VOID
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
3/8"
0 1 2 3 4 5
3
6
7
8
9
10
CONTROL LOGIC DAIGRAM (WD)
SYSTEM ALARM
A
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-585-J158-003
JOB NO.
11G79
1/4"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
III
SCALE
NONE
1
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
A3 (16.5"X11.7")

9 8 7 6 5
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-611-J158-000
H
4
3
2
1
H
G
F
E
D
LOGIC DIAGRAM NO.
0-611-J158-001
0-611-J158-002
0-611-J158-003
0-611-J158-004
RADWASTE R/ST. BLDG SUPPLY AHU FAN
RADWASTE R/ST. BLDG EXH. FAN
SUPPLY AHU ACCU HV02
RADWASTE R/ST. BLDG EXH. ACU FANS
0-611-J158-005
0-611-J158-006
ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS
SUPPLY AHU ELECT. HEATING COIL
0-611-J158-007
0-611-J158-008
(DELETED)
SYSTEM ALARM
0-611-J158-009
0-611-J158-010
SYSTEM ALARM
BATTERY RM EDH
0-611-J158-011
FIRE DAMPERS
0-611-J158-012
NON-RADIOACTIVE SUMP PUMP RM EXH. FAN
TITLE
REV.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
G
F
E
D
C
C
B
A
DGN.
32E
79G
11
9
.01 10 20
1:100 0 1M 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 0
8
7
1
2
3
6
4
5
5
?"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
B
06/15/18
0
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
3/8"
0 1 2 3 4 5
3
6
7
8
9
10
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (VH)
RADWASTE R/ST. BLDG HVAC
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-611-J158-000
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
III
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
A
1/4"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
1
A3 (16.5"X11.7")

9 8 7 6 5
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-611-J158-001
H
HS-001 START (SC)
G
F
1 700-J158-014
AUTO MODE
1
FROM FAN AH02 STOP
6 611-J158-004
FAN AH05 START
5 611-J158-004
FAN AH04 START
A
TO AH02
START
FAN
AH01
2
2
FAN AH01
STOP
FAN AH02
STOP
5
5
FAN AH01
START
FAN AH02
START
4
3
2
1
4
5
611-J158-003 3
TO ACCU HV02
611-J158-006 4
TO SUPPLY AHU HC01
611-J158-010 5
TO EDH HC02
HS-001(SC)
R
611-J158-002 2
TO EXH. FAN AH03
START RED
TROUBLE
YEL
DISABLE
YEL
STOP
GRN
MANUAL
AMB
HS-001(SC)
CONTROL SWITCH
MODULE
H
G
611-J158-002 7
TO EXH. FAN AH03
F
E
HS-001 STOP (SC)
2 611-J158-004
FAN AH04 & AH05 STOP
D
3
ELECTRICAL PROTECTION
C
C
TROUBLE
DETECTOR
DISABLED
DETECTOR
611-J158-008 10
611-J158-008 11
TO ALARM LOGIC
STOP
FAN
AH01
1
TO FAN AH02
START
2
HS-001(SC)
G
NOTE
1. ONE FAN SHOULD BE MANUALLY
STARTED. THE OTHER FAN SHOULD
BE PLACED IN AUTO MODE DURING
NORMAL OPERATION.
E
FAN AH01 START
4
ON
60 SEC
OFF
5 SEC
SUPPLY AHU DOWNSTREAM FLOW LO
FS-009B
3
TO FAN AH01 STOP
TO ALARM
611-J158-008 6
LOGIC
REFERENCE DWGS
D
P&ID : 0-611-M105-001
FLD : 0-611-J157-002
TYPICAL LOGIC : 1-700-J158-004,014
ELECT. SCHEMATIC : 0-611-E143-001
C
B
A
DGN.
32E
79G
11
EQUIPMENT
NO.
CONTROL SWITCH
NO. CONNECTION LOCATION
AH01
HS-001 (SC)
-
PM-OC
AH02
HS-002 (SC)
-
PM-OC
MMI
PCMS
PCMS
INDICATION
NO. LOCATION
PWR
SEG
-
-
-
-
-
-
PROCESS DEVICE PCMS CAB NO.
FS-009B
FS-009B
LATER
LATER
EQUIPMENT
POWER SOURCE
824-E-LC03
824-E-LC03
EQUIPMENT
NO.
REMARKS
AH01
6,10,11
FAN AH04 & AH05
AH02
7,12,13
FAN AH04 & AH05
FAN AH03, HC01, HC02, HV02
FAN AH03, HC01, HC02, HV02
RADWASTE R/ST. BLDG SUPPLY AHU
9
.01 10 20
1:100 0 1M 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 0
8
7
1
2
3
6
4
5
5
?"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
3/8"
0 1 2 3 4 5
3
6
7
8
9
10
B
06/15/18
0
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (VH)
RADWASTE R/ST. BLDG SUPPLY AHU FAN
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-611-J158-001
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
III
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
A
1/4"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
1
A3 (16.5"X11.7")

9 8 7 6 5
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-611-J158-002
4
3
2
1
H
G
1 700-J158-014
AUTO MODE
7
EITHER AH01 OR AH02
START
611-J158-001
HS-003 START (SC)
LOCAL
EXH. FAN AH03 DIFF. PR. LO
PDIS-3003
A
START
FAN
AH03
ON
30 SEC
611-J158-008 5
TO ALARM LOGIC
HS-003(SC)
R
START RED
TROUBLE
YEL
DISABLED
STOP
MANUAL
YEL
GRN
AMB
HS-003(SC)
CONTROL SWITCH
MODULE
H
G
F
E
HS-003 STOP (SC)
1 700-J158-014
AUTO MODE
2
BOTH AH01 & AH02
STOP
611-J158-001
ELECTRICAL PROTECTION
C
STOP
FAN
AH03
HS-003(SC)
G
F
E
D
C
TROUBLE
DETECTOR
DISABLED
DETECTOR
611-J158-008 10
611-J158-008 11
TO ALARM LOGIC
REFERENCE DWGS
P&ID : 0-611-M105-001
FLD : N/A
TYPICAL LOGIC : 1-700-J158-008,014
ELECT. SCHEMATIC : 0-611-E143-002
D
C
B
A
DGN.
32E
79G
11
EQUIPMENT
NO.
CONTROL SWITCH
NO. CONNECTION LOCATION
AH03
HS-003 (SC)
-
PM-OC
MMI
PCMS
INDICATION
NO. LOCATION
PWR
SEG
-
-
-
PROCESS DEVICE PCMS CAB. NO.
PDIS-3003
LATER
EQUIPMENT
POWER SOURCE
826-E-MC09
B
EQUIPMENT
NO.
AH03
REMARKS
INTERLOCK WHTH
10,11
FAN AH01 & AH02
-
RADWASTE R/ST. BLDG EXH. FAN
9
.01 10 20
1:100 0 1M 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 0
8
7
1
2
3
6
4
5
5
?"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
06/15/18
0
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
3/8"
0 1 2 3 4 5
3
6
7
8
9
10
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (VH)
RADWASTE R/ST. BLDG EXH. FAN
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-611-J158-002
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
III
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
A
1/4"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
1
A3 (16.5"X11.7")

9 8 7 6 5
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-611-J158-003
H
G
F
HS-012 AUTO (SC)
HS-012 STOP (SC)
S
R
3 611-J158-001
FAN AH01/AH02 START
ACCU HV02
CONTROL
SEE VENDOR DWG.
4
3
2
1
HS-012(SC)
A
HS-012(SC)
R
START
AUTO
STOP
RED
AMB
GRN
HS-012(SC)
CONTROL SWITCH
MODULE
H
G
F
E
D
ELECTRICAL PROTECTION
611-J158-008 10 TO ALARM LOGIC
HS-012(SC)
G
REFERENCE DWGS
P&ID : 0-611-M105-001
FLD : 0-611-J157-001
TYPICAL LOGIC : N/A
E
D
C
B
EQUIPMENT
NO.
CONTROL SWITCH
NO. CONNECTION LOCATION
INDICATION
MMI
NO. LOCATION
HV02
HS-012 (SC)
-
PM-OC
PCMS
-
-
PWR
PROCESS DEVICE PCMS CAB. NO.
SEG
-
-
LATER
EQUIPMENT
POWER SOURCE
824-E-LC03
10
REMARKS
FAN AH01,AH02
SUPPLY AHU ACCU HV02
C
B
A
DGN.
32E
79G
11
9
.01 10 20
1:100 0 1M 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 0
8
7
1
2
3
6
4
5
5
?"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
06/15/18
0
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
3/8"
0 1 2 3 4 5
3
6
7
8
9
10
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (VH)
SUPPLY AHU ACCU HV02
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-611-J158-003
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
III
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
A
1/4"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
1
A3 (16.5"X11.7")

H
G
9 8 7 6 5
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-611-J158-004
HS-004 START (SC)
1 700-J158-014
AUTO MODE
1
FROM FAN AH05 STOP
A
START
FAN
AH04
3
FAN AH04 STOP
3
FAN AH05 STOP
4
3
611-J158-001 5
TO AHU AH01,AH02
2
HS-004(SC)
R
611-J158-001 2
TO AHU HV01
2
1
START RED
TROUBLE
DISABLED
STOP
MANUAL
YEL
YEL
GRN
AMB
HS-004(SC)
CONTROL SWITCH
MODULE
H
G
F
HS-004 STOP (SC)
E
4
RADIATION HI
761-RE/RT-012
TO FAN AH05
ON
30SEC
ELECTRICAL PROTECTION
C
STOP
FAN
AH04
1
3
HS-004(SC)
G
D
C
TROUBLE
DETECTOR
DISABLED
DETECTOR
611-J158-008 10
611-J158-008 11
TO ALARM LOGIC
2
FAN AH04
START
ON
60 SEC
OFF
5 SEC
EXH. ACU DOWNSTREAM FLOW LO
LATER
FS-011B
4
TO FAN AH04
STOP
611-J158-008 3
TO ALARM
LOGIC
F
NOTE
1. ONE FAN SHOULD BE MANUALLY
STARTED. THE OTHER FAN SHOULD
BE PLACED IN AUTO MODE DURING
NORMAL OPERATION.
E
REFERENCE DWGS
P&ID : 0-611-M105-001
FLD : 0-611-J157-003
TYPICAL LOGIC : 1-700-J158-008,014
ELECT. SCHEMATIC : 0-611-E143-002
D
C
B
A
DGN.
32E
79G
11
EQUIPMENT
NO.
CONTROL SWITCH
NO. CONNECTION LOCATION
AH04
HS-004 (SC)
-
PM-OC
AH05
HS-005 (SC)
-
PM-OC
MMI
PCMS
PCMS
INDICATION
NO. LOCATION
PWR
SEG
PROCESS DEVICE PCMS CAB NO.
-
-
-
FS-011B
761-RE/RT-012
826-E-MC07
-
-
-
FS-011B
761-RE/RT-012
826-E-MC09
EQUIPMENT
POWER SOURCE
LATER
LATER
EQUIPMENT
NO.
AH04
3,5,10,11
AH05
4,6,12,13
REMARKS
FAN AH01 & AH02
FAN AH01 & AH02
RADWASTE R/ST. BLDG EXH. ACU FANS
9
.01 10 20
1:100 0 1M 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 0
8
7
1
2
3
6
4
5
5
?"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
3/8"
0 1 2 3 4 5
3
6
7
8
9
10
B
06/15/18
0
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (VH)
RADWASTE R/ST. BLDG EXH. ACU FANS
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-611-J158-004
SHEET
1/1
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
II
SCALE
NONE
REV.
0
A
1/4"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
1
A3 (16.5"X11.7")

9 8 7 6 5
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-611-J158-005
H
4
3
2
1
G
R
AUTO
OFF ON
H
G
F
E
LOCAL
HS-3051 ON
LOCAL
HS-3051 AUTO
ROOM TEMP. LO
TIS-3051 (NOTE 2)
LOCAL
HS-3051 OFF
ELECTRICAL PROTECTION
ELECTRIC
UNIT HEATER
HX01 CONTROL
SEE V/P
611-J158-008 1 TO ALARM LOGIC
HS-3051
R
LOCAL
HS-3051
3-POSITION
MAINTAINED
(NOTE 1)
G
HS-3051
G
LOCAL
F
NOTES
1. HAND SWITCHES AND TEMP.
INDICATING SWITCHES WILL BE
SUPPLIED BY THE EUH VENDOR.
2. THE REQUIRED DEAD BAND IS
PROVIDED BY THE INSTRUMENT.
3. THERE IS NO INTERFACE WITH PCMS.
E
D
C
B
A
DGN.
32E
79G
11
REFERENCE DWGS
D
EQUIPMENT
NO.
CONTROL SWITCH
NO. CONNECTION LOCATION
HX01
HS-3051
-
LOCAL
HX02
HS-3052
-
LOCAL
HX03
HS-3053
-
LOCAL
HX04
HX05
HX06
HX07
HX08
HX09
HX10
HX11
HX12
HS-3054
HS-3055
HS-3056
HS-3057
HS-3058
HS-3059
HS-3060
HS-3061
HS-3062
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
LOCAL
LOCAL
LOCAL
LOCAL
LOCAL
LOCAL
LOCAL
LOCAL
LOCAL
MMI
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
INDICATION
NO. LOCATION
PWR
SEG
-
-
-
PROCESS
DEVICE
TIS-3051
EQUIPMENT
POWER SOURCE
REMARK
826-E-MC09
1
DISPOSAL DRUM INSP. AREA
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
TIS-3052
TIS-3053
826-E-MC09
826-E-MC09
TIS-3054
TIS-3055
TIS-3056
826-E-MC09
826-E-MC09
826-E-MC09
TIS-3057
TIS-3058
826-E-MC09
826-E-MC09
TIS-3059
826-E-MC09
TIS-3060
TIS-3061
826-E-MC09
826-E-MC09
TIS-3062
826-E-MC07
2
3
DISPOSAL DRUM INSP. AREA
DISPOSAL DRUM INSP. AREA
4
DISPOSAL DRUM INSP. AREA
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
MEDIUM LEVEL RAD. AREA
MEDIUM LEVEL RAD. AREA
STAIR-1
STAIR-2
STAIR-3
ACU RM
HALL
12
HALL
P & ID : 0-611-M105-002
FLD : N/A
C
B
06/15/18
0
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
9
ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS
.01 10 20
1:100 0 1M 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 0
8
7
1
2
3
6
4
5
5
?"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
3/8"
0 1 2 3 4 5
3
6
7
8
9
10
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (VH)
ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS
A
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-611-J158-005
JOB NO.
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
SCALE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
11G79
1/4"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
III
NONE
1
0
A3 (16.5"X11.7")

9 8 7 6 5
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-611-J158-006
H
G
F
E
D
HS-021 AUTO (SC)
HS-021 OFF (SC)
S
R
FAN AH01/AH02 START
4 611-J158-001
ELECTRICAL PROTECTION
AHU HV01
ELECT. HTG COIL
HC01 CONTROL
SEE VENDOR DWG.
611-J158-008 1 TO ALARM LOGIC
C
4
3
HS-021(SC)
A
HS-021(SC)
R
2
1
H
ON
AUTO
RED
AMB
OFF
GRN
HS-021(SC)
CONTROL SWITCH
MODULE
G
F
HS-021(SC)
G
E
REFERENCE DWGS
P&ID : 0-611-M105-001
FLD : 0-611-J157-001
TYPICAL LOGIC : N/A
D
C
B
A
DGN.
32E
79G
11
EQUIPMENT
NO.
CONTROL SWITCH
NO. CONNECTION LOCATION
HC01
HS-021 (SC)
-
PM-OC
MMI
PCMS
INDICATION
NO. LOCATION
PWR
SEG
-
-
-
PCMS CAB. NO.
LATER
EQUIPMENT
POWER SOURCE
824-E-LC03
1
REMARKS
FAN AH01,AH02
B
9
SUPPLY AHU ELECT. HEATING COIL
.01 10 20
1:100 0 1M 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 0
8
7
1
2
3
6
4
5
5
?"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
06/15/18
0
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
3/8"
0 1 2 3 4 5
3
6
7
8
9
10
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (VH)
SUPPLY AHU ELECT. HEATING COIL
A
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-611-J158-006
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
III
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
1/4"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
1
A3 (16.5"X11.7")

H
G
F
E
D
C
9 8 7 6 5 4
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-611-J158-008
EXH. ACU FAN AH04
FLOW LO
3 611-J158-004
AHU HV01 FAN AH01 TROUBLE
10 611-J158-001 R R
EXH. ACU FAN AH05
UA FLOW LO
4 611-J158-004
001
AHU HV01 FAN AH01 DISABLED
11 611-J158-001
EXH. ACU AU01 DNSTRM FLOW HI
ON OFF
FS-011A (NOTE 1)
30SEC 5SEC
AHU HV01 FAN AH02 TROUBLE
12 611-J158-001 R
UA AHU HV01 DOWNSTREAM AIR SMOKE HI
002 XS-009 LATER
AHU HV01 FAN AH02 DISABLED
13 611-J158-001
HX01 ELECT. PROT.
AHU HV01 FAN AH01 DNSTRM 1 611-J158-005 R
LATER
FLOW LO
6 611-J158-001 R
FAL ELECT. UNIT HTR HX01 SEC. OVER TEMP HI-HI
AHU HV01 FAN AH02 DNSTRM 003 TS-3051B
LATER
FLOW LO
7 611-J158-001
HX02 ELECT. PROT.
2 611-J158-005 R
AHU HV01 PREFILTER FT01 DIFF. PR. HI PDAH LATER
PDIS-3001 LATER 004
ELECT. UNIT HTR HX02 SEC. OVER TEMP HI-HI
TS-3052B LATER
AHU HV01 ELECT. HTG COIL HC01 (BANK 1)
SEC OVER TEMP HI-HI
TS-3062
LATER
R
AHU HV01 ELECT. HTG COIL HC01
ELECT. PROT.
1 611-J158-006
LATER
UA
005
3
611-J158-005
HX03 ELECT. PROT.
LATER
R
ELECT. UNIT HTR HX03 SEC. OVER TEMP HI-HI
TS-3053B LATER
4
611-J158-005
HX04 ELECT. PROT.
LATER
R
ACCU HV02 UPSTREAM TEMP HI-HI
TS-012
TAHH
034
ELECT. UNIT HTR HX04 SEC. OVER TEMP HI-HI
TS-3054B
LATER
3
2
1
FAHL
010
XAH
011
UA
012
8
EUH HX08 ELECT.
PROT.
611-J158-005
LATER
EUH HX08 SEC. OVER TEMP. HI-HI
TS-3058B
LATER
9
EUH HX09 ELECT.
PROT.
611-J158-005
LATER
EUH HX09 SEC. OVER TEMP. HI-HI
TS-3059B
LATER
EUH HX10 ELECT.
PROT.
10 611-J158-005
LATER
UA
013
UA
014
EUH HX10 SEC. OVER TEMP. HI-HI
TS-3060B LATER
EUH HX11 ELECT.
PROT.
11 611-J158-005
LATER
EUH HX11 SEC. OVER TEMP. HI-HI
TS-3061B
LATER
EUH HX12 ELECT.
PROT.
12 611-J158-005
LATER
EUH HX12 SEC. OVER TEMP. HI-HI
TS-3062B
LATER
R
R
R
R
R
UA
015
NOTES
UA
021
H
UA
022
G
UA
023
F
UA
024
UA
025
E
D
ACCU HV02 ELECT. PROT.
10 611-J158-003
LATER
EXH. FAN AH03 TROUBLE
10 611-J158-002
EXH. FAN AH03 DISABLED
11 611-J158-002
R
EXH. FAN AH03 DIFF. PR. LO
5 611-J158-002
UA
006
AHU HV01 ELECT. HTG COIL HC01 DNSTRM TEMP LO
TS-3063 (NOTE 1)
TAL
016
UA
007
EUH HX05 ELECT. PROT.
5 611-J158-005
EUH HX05 SEC. OVER TEMP. HI-HI
TS-3055B
LATER
R
LATER
UA
018
1. PCMS CAB. LATER :
SOFTWARE PROGRAM DISPLAY
C
B
10 611-J158-004
EXH. ACU FAN AH04 TROUBLE
R
11 611-J158-004
EXH. ACU FAN AH04 DISABLED
UA
008
EUH HX06 ELECT. PROT.
6 611-J158-005
EUH HX06 SEC. OVER TEMP. HI-HI
TS-3056B
LATER
R
LATER
UA
019
A
DGN.
32E
79G
11
12 611-J158-004
EXH. ACU FAN AH05 TROUBLE
R
13 611-J158-004
EXH. ACU FAN AH05 DISABLED
UA
009
EUH HX07 ELECT. PROT.
7 611-J158-005
EUH HX07 SEC. OVER TEMP. HI-HI
TS-3057B
LATER
R
LATER
UA
020
9
.01 10 20
1:100 0 1M 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 0
8
7
1
2
3
6
4
5
5
?"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
3/8"
0 1 2 3 4 5
3
6
7
8
9
10
B
06/15/18
0
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (VH)
SYSTEM ALARM
A
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-611-J158-008
JOB NO.
11G79
1/4"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
III
SCALE
NONE
1
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
A3 (16.5"X11.7")

9 8 7 6 5
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-611-J158-009
H
4
3
2
1
H
G
F
DISPOSAL DRUM INSPECTION AREA TEMP. HI
TIS-011 (SW.1)
DISPOSAL DRUM INSPECTION AREA TEMP. LO
TIS-011 (SW.2)
LATER
R
LATER
TAHL
021
EDH HC02 ELECT. PROT.
11 611-J158-010
LATER
R
EDH HC02 SEC. OVER TEMP HI-HI
TS-3303B
LATER
UA
030
G
F
E
DISPOSAL DRUM INSPECTION AREA TEMP. HI
TIS-012 (SW.1)
LATER
DISPOSAL DRUM INSPECTION AREA TEMP. LO
TIS-012 (SW.2) LATER
R
TAHL
022
BATTERY RM TEMP HI
TS-3303C (NOTE1)
BATTERY RM TEMP LO
TS-3303D (NOTE1)
R
TAHL
031
REFERENCE DWGS
FLD : 0-611-J157-004
E
D
C
B
A
DGN.
32E
79G
11
MED. LEVEL RADWASTE DRUM ST. AREA TEMP. HI
TIS-013 (SW.1) LATER
MED. LEVEL RADWASTE DRUM ST. AREA TEMP. LO
TIS-013 (SW.2) LATER
R
TAHL
024
ACU AU01 PREFILTER FT02 DIFF. PR. HI
PDIS-3006
LATER
PDAH
032
MED. LEVEL RADWASTE DRUM ST. AREA TEMP. HI
TIS-014 (SW.1) LATER
MED. LEVEL RADWASTE DRUM ST. AREA TEMP. LO
TIS-014 (SW.2) LATER
R
TAHL
025
ACU AU01 HEPA FILTER FT03 DIFF. PR. HI
PDIS-3007
LATER
PDAH
033
D
NOTES
1. PCMS CAB. LATER :
SOFTWARE PROGRAM DISPLAY
C
FAN AH06 TROUBLE
10 611-J158-012
FAN AH06 DISABLED
11 611-J158-012
LATER
R
UA
031
LATER
9
.01 10 20
1:100 0 1M 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 0
8
7
1
2
3
6
4
5
5
?"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
B
06/15/18
0
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
3/8"
0 1 2 3 4 5
3
6
7
8
9
10
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (VH)
SYSTEM ALARM
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-611-J158-009
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
III
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
A
1/4"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
1
A3 (16.5"X11.7")

9 8 7 6 5
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-611-J158-010
H
G
F
E
D
HS-022 AUTO (SC)
HS-022 OFF (SC)
S
R
FAN AH01/AH02 START
5 611-J158-001
ELECTRICAL PROTECTION
BATTERY RM
ELECT. DUCT HEATER
HC02 CONTROL
SEE VENDOR DWG.
611-J158-009 10 TO ALARM LOGIC
4
3
HS-022(SC)
A
HS-022(SC)
R
2
1
ON
AUTO
RED
AMB
OFF
GRN
HS-022(SC)
CONTROL SWITCH
MODULE
H
G
F
HS-022(SC)
G
REFERENCE DWGS
P&ID : 0-611-M105-002
FLD : 0-611-J157-004
TYPICAL LOGIC : N/A
E
D
C
B
A
DGN.
32E
79G
11
EQUIPMENT
NO.
CONTROL SWITCH
NO. CONNECTION LOCATION
MMI
INDICATION
NO. LOCATION
PWR
SEG
HC02 HS-022 (SC) - PM-OC PCMS -
-
-
PCMS CAB. NO.
LATER
EQUIPMENT
POWER SOURCE
826-E-MC09
10
REMARKS
FAN AH01/AH02
C
9
BATTERY RM EDH
.01 10 20
1:100 0 1M 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 0
8
7
1
2
3
6
4
5
5
?"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
B
06/15/18
0
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
3/8"
0 1 2 3 4 5
3
6
7
8
9
10
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (VH)
BATTERY RM EDH
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-611-J158-010
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
III
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
A
1/4"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
1
A3 (16.5"X11.7")

9 8 7 6 5
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-611-J158-011
H
4
3
2
1
H
G
CLEAN AGENT INITIATION
(691-J-LP26)
1 691-J158-006
DEENERGIZED
OPEN
DAMPER
Y1502
G
F
E
D
ENERGIZED
CLOSE
DAMPER
Y1502
NOTES
1. THERE IS NO INTERFACE WITH
PCMS.
2. THE DAMPER IS ELECTRIC
THERMAL LINK TYPE.
REFERENCE DWGS
P&ID : 0-611-M105-002
FLD : N/A
TYPICAL LOGIC : N/A
ELECT. SCHEMATIC : N/A
F
E
D
C
B
A
DGN.
32E
79G
11
EQUIPMENT
NO.
Y1502
Y1503
Y1504
Y1505
Y1506
Y1507
Y1508
Y1509
Y1510
Y1511
Y1512
CONTROL SWITCH
NO. CONNECTION LOCATION
-
-
-
MMI
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-

• - - -

-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
INDICATION
NO. LOCATION
PWR
SEG
PROCESS DEVICE
-
-

• 691-J-LP26

-
-

• 691-J-LP28

-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-

• 691-J-LP29
• 691-J-LP27
• 691-J-LP26
• 691-J-LP26
• 691-J-LP29
• 691-J-LP28
• 691-J-LP27

-
-
-
-

• 691-J-LP28
• 691-J-LP27

REMARKS
1:691-J158-006
2:691-J158-006
3:691-J158-006
4:691-J158-006
5:691-J158-006
9:691-J158-006
6:691-J158-006
7:691-J158-006
8:691-J158-006
7:691-J158-006
8:691-J158-006
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
FIRE DAMPERS
C
B
06/15/18
0
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
9
.01 10 20
1:100 0 1M 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 0
8
7
1
2
3
6
4
5
5
?"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
3/8"
0 1 2 3 4 5
3
6
7
8
9
10
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (VH)
FIRE DAMPERS
A
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-611-J158-011
JOB NO.
11G79
1/4"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
III
SCALE
NONE
1
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
A3 (16.5"X11.7")

9 8 7 6 5
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-611-J158-002
H
G
HS-023 START (SC)
START
FAN
AH06
4
3
HS-023(SC)
R
2
1
START RED
TROUBLE
YEL
DISABLED
YEL
STOP
GRN
HS-023(SC)
CONTROL SWITCH
MODULE
H
G
F
E
HS-023 STOP (SC)
STOP
FAN
AH06
HS-023(SC)
G
F
E
D
C
TROUBLE
DETECTOR
DISABLED
DETECTOR
611-J158-009 10
611-J158-009 11
TO ALARM LOGIC
REFERENCE DWGS
P&ID : 0-611-M105-002
FLD : N/A
TYPICAL LOGIC : 1-700-J158-008
ELECT. SCHEMATIC : LATER
D
C
B
EQUIPMENT
NO.
CONTROL SWITCH
NO. CONNECTION LOCATION
AH06
HS-023 (SC)
-
PM-OC
MMI
PCMS
INDICATION
NO. LOCATION
PWR
SEG
-
-
-
PCMS CAB. NO.
EQUIPMENT
POWER SOURCE
LATER
LATER
REMARKS
10,11
-
B
A
DGN.
32E
79G
11
9
NON-RADIOACTIVE SUMP PUMP RM EXH. FAN
.01 10 20
1:100 0 1M 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 0
8
7
1
2
3
6
4
5
5
?"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
06/15/18
0
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
3/8"
0 1 2 3 4 5
3
6
7
8
9
10
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (VH)
NON-RADIOACTIVE SUMP PUMP RM EXH. FAN
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-611-J158-012
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
III
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
A
1/4"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
1
A3 (16.5"X11.7")

9 8 7 6 5
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-653-J158-000
H
4
G
LOGIC DIAG. NO. TITLE
0-653-J158-001
SYSTEM ALARM
3
2
REV.
0
1
H
G
F
E
F
E
D
D
C
C
B
A
DGN.
32E
79G
11
9
.01 10 20
1:100 0 1M 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 0
8
7
1
2
3
6
4
5
5
?"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
B
06/15/18
0
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
3/8"
0 1 2 3 4 5
3
6
7
8
9
10
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (ST)
SANITARY WATER TRANSFER PUMPS
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-653-J158-000
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
III
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
A
1/4"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
1
A3 (16.5"X11.7")

9 8 7 6 5
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-653-J158-001
H
4
3
2
1
H
G
F
E
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG.VACUUM VALVE PIT LVL HI-HI
LS-3008
LATER
LAHH
008
G
F
E
D
C
D
REFERENCE DWG
P & ID : 0-653-H105-001
C
B
A
DGN.
32E
79G
11
9
.01 10 20
1:100 0 1M 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 0
8
7
1
2
3
6
4
5
5
?"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
B
06/15/18
0
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
3/8"
0 1 2 3 4 5
3
6
7
8
9
10
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (ST)
SYSTEM ALARM
A
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-653-J158-001
JOB NO.
11G79
1/4"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
III
SCALE
NONE
1
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
A3 (16.5"X11.7")

6
D
C
5
4
3
2
LOGIC DIAG. NO.
0-673-J158-001
0-673-J158-002
TITLE
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG. SUMP PUMPS
SYSTEM ALARM
REV.
0
0
1
D
C
B
B
A
6
5
4
3
2
0
07/23/19
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
REV.
DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED
CHECKED
REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
A
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (DM)
2ND RADWASTE R/S BLDG. DRAIN SYSTEM
SHEET
PROJECT DRAWING 0-673-J158-000
NUMBER 1/1
JOB NO. RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY SCALE REV.
11G79 III NONE 0
A2 (594 x 420 mm)
1

6
5
4
3
2
1
D
C
LOCAL
HS-030 START
SUMP LEVEL HI
LS-031
LOCAL
HS-030 AUTO
COMMON
1
PUMP PP31 START FAIL
TO PUMP
PP31
SUMP LEVEL HI-HI
LS-032(SW 1)
LOCAL
HS-030 STOP
ELECTRICAL PROTECTION
START
PUMP
PP30
STOP
PUMP
PP30
HS-030
R
LOCAL
AUTO
STOP START
HS-030
3-POSITION
MAINTAINED
D
ON
1 SEC
673-J158-002
3 TO ALARM
TO PUMP PP31
1 AUTO START
C
HS-030
G
LOCAL
NOTES
1. THERE IS NO INTERFACE WITH PCMS.
B
EQUIPMENT CONTROL SWITCH
NO. NO. CONNECTION LOCATION
PP30 HS-030 - LOCAL
PP31 HS-031 - LOCAL
MMI
-
-
INDICATION PWR
NO. LOCATION SEG

• -
• -

PROCESS
DEVICE
LS-031
LS-032(SW.1)
EQUIP. PWR. REMARKS
SOURCE
LATER 3 : 673-J158-002 2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/
LATER 4 : 673-J158-002 STORAGE BLDG SUMP
REFERENCE DWGS
P & ID : 0-673-M105-001
FLD : N/A
ELECT. SCHEMATIC : LATER
B
A
6
MISCELLANEOUS BLDG. SUMP PUMPS
5
4
3
2
0
07/23/19
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
REV.
DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED
CHECKED
REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
A
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (DM)
2ND RADWASTE R/S BLDG. SUMP PUMPS
SHEET
PROJECT DRAWING 0-673-J158-001
NUMBER 1/1
JOB NO. RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY SCALE REV.
11G79 III NONE 0
A2 (594 x 420 mm)
1

6
5
4
3
D
C
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG SUMP LEVEL HI HI
LS-032
3
673-J158-001
SUMP PUMP PP30 START FAIL
4
673-J158-001
SUMP PUMP PP31 START FAIL
LAHH
031
UA
032
UA
033
2
1
D
C
B
B
A
6
5
4
3
2
0
07/23/19
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
REV.
DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED
CHECKED
REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
A
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (DM)
SYSTEM ALARM
SHEET
PROJECT DRAWING 0-673-J158-002
NUMBER 1/1
JOB NO. RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY SCALE REV.
11G79 III NONE 0
A2 (594 x 420 mm)
1

6
5
4
3
2
1
D
C
B
LC03-A2
HS-401 CS CLOSE
CLOSE
PCB
LC03-A2
R HS-401
(LC03-A2)
R ZL-401
LC03-A2
TEST SW ON
(33)
HS-401 CS TRIP
PHASE OVERCURRENT (LT, ST)
XFMR NEUTRAL
OVERCURRENT(51GN)
MANUAL RESET
86
TROUBLE
DETECTOR
DISABLED
DETECTOR
0-824-E158-003 1
0-824-E158-003 2
TO ALARM
LOGIC
1
TRIP
PCB
LC03-A2
G HS-401
(LC03-A2)
G ZL-401
(NOTE 2)
0-822-E158-003 2 TO TRIP SWGR PCB
(NOTE 2)
0-822-E158-003 3 SWGR PCB CLOSE PERMISSIVE
824-E158-003
3 TO ALARM LOGIC
1
EQUIPMENT NO.
0-824-E-LC03-A2
HAND SWITCH
NO.
LOCATION
HS-401 (SC)
LC03
NO.
INDICATION
PCMS CABINET
ZL-401
LATER
NO.
1
REMARKS
SWGR BRKR LOGIC DWG
ALARM LOGIC
NO.
0-822-E158-003
0-824-E158-003
(NOTE 2)
480V LOAD CENTER POWER SUPPLY PCB
1
A
6
5
4
3
G
R
CLOSE
TRIP
RE
D
GRN
ZL-401 (SC)
MONITORING LIGHT
MODULE
TRIP CLOSE
HS-401
3-POSITION
SPRING RETURN
TO CENTER, POSTOL
GRIP HANDLE WITH
TARGET
D
C
NOTES
1. POWER TO MCS MONITORING LIGHT IS PORVIDED FROM
THE PCMS.
2. REF TO PHASE #2 FACILITY (0-822-E158-003)
REFERENCE DWGS
TYPICAL SCHEMATIC : 0-824-E143-001
SINGLE LINE : 0-824-E140-003
B
*PREPARE : 이창수, TEL : 054-421-7461
2
1
01/17/19
FINAL ISSUE
0
05/17/18
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
REV.
DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED
CHECKED
REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
A
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM
480V LOAD CENTER POWER SUPPLY PCBS (LC03-A2)
SHEET
PROJECT DRAWING 0-824-E-158-001
NUMBER 1/1
JOB NO. RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY SCALE REV.
11G79 II/III NONE 1
A2 (594 x 420 mm)
1

6
5
4
3
2
1
D
C
B
A
D/G FEED PCB "AA" TRIPPED
1 826-E158-002
3 ELECTRICAL PROTECTION NOT TRIPPED
HS-402N01 CLOSE (SC)
HSS-402 MCR
592-LP01
HSS-402 LOCAL
592-LP01
HS-402N02 CLOSE
592-LP01
1
2
SS-402 SYNC
592-LP01
SYNC RELAY(25M)
2 826-E158-002
(NOTE 2)
(NOTE 3)
CLOSE
PCB
LC03-C2
R HS-402N03
(LC03-C2)
R HS-402N01
R HS-402N02
(592-LP01)
4
TR
˝A2˝
LC03
HS-402N01 TRIP (SC)
1 HSS-402 MCR
2 HSS-402 LOCAL
HS-402N02 TRIP
592-LP01
LC03 UNDERVOLTAGE
2 824-E158-003
4
ON
3 SEC
PHASE OVERCURRENT (LT,ST)
TROUBLE
824-E158-003 1
DETECTOR
DISABLED 824-E158-003 2
DETECTOR
TO ALARM
LOGIC
˝C2˝
(NOTE 2)
MC08
˝AA˝
VOID G
TO CLOSE D/G
826-E158-002 1
FEED BRKR
TRIP
PCB G HS-402N01
LC03-C2
G HS-402N02
(592-LP01)
ELECTRICAL PROTECTION
824-E158-003 7 TO ALARM LOGIC
3
826-E158-002 2 TO CLOSE D/G FEED BRKR
G HS-402N03
(LC03-C2)
480V LOAD CENTER POWER SUPPLY PCB (LC03-C2)
VOLTMETER
0-600V
CLOSE
RED
TROUBLE YEL
DISALBED YEL
TRIP GRN
HS-402N01(SC)
CONTROL SWITCH
MODULE
TRIP CLOSE
HS-402N02
3-POSITION SPRING
RETURN TO CENTER
WITH TARGET
@ 592-LP01
LOCAL MCR
TRIP CLOSE
HS-402N03
3-POSITION SPRING
RETURN TO CENTER
WITH TARGET
@ L/C
OFF
SYNC
D
HSS-402 SS-402
2-POSITION MAINTAINED 2-POSITION MAINTAINED
SWITCH SW. WITH REMOVABLE
@ 592-LP01 HANDLE (SYNC. SW)
@ 592-LP01
C
NOTES
1. PCMS CAB NO. : LATER
2. “AND” LOGIC IS IMPLEMENTED IN D/G CONTROL PNL.
3. CONTINEOUS COIL MONITORING IS NOT REQUIRED FOR
THIS CLOSING OUTPUT.
4. VOLTMETER PCMS
CAB NO. : LATER
REFERENCE DWGS.
SINGLE LINE : 0-824-E140-001
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM : 0-824-E143-004
TYPICAL LOGIC : 0-700-J158-004
V/P : J212-DE-G22-01 (SH.248)
J212-DL-A25-60
B
*PREPARE : 이창수, TEL : 054-421-7461
1
01/17/19
VOIDED
0
05/17/18
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
REV.
DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED
CHECKED
REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
A
6
5
4
3
2
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM
480V LOAD CENTER POWER SUPPLY PCBS (LC03-C2)
SHEET
PROJECT DRAWING 0-824-E158-002
NUMBER 1/1
JOB NO. RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY SCALE REV.
11G79 II/III NONE 1
A2 (594 x 420 mm)
1

6
5
4
3
2
D
C
3
824-E158-001
0 LC XFMR TR03 TEMP. HI
49T
LC LC03 UNDER VOLTAGE
27-1
LC LC03 UNDER VOLTAGE
27-2
LC LC03 DC POWER LOSS
FDR ELEC. PROTECTION
LC LC03
(NOTE 2)
LATER
LATER
LATER
R
(NOTE 1)
LATER
LATER
UA
001
1
824-E158-001
2
824-E158-001
1
480V LOAD CENTER ALARMS
R
UA
002
1
D
C
B
1
NOTES
1. LOGIC IMPLEMENTED IN THE LOAD CENTER.
2. PCMS CAB NO. : LATER
REFERENCE DWGS
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM : 0-824-E143-003
B
*PREPARE : 이창수, TEL : 054-421-7461
A
6
5
4
3
2
1
01/17/19
FINAL ISSUE
0
05/17/18
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
REV.
DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED
CHECKED
REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
A
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM
480V LOAD CENTER ALARMS
SHEET
PROJECT DRAWING 0-824-E158-003
NUMBER 1/1
JOB NO. RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY SCALE REV.
11G79 II/III NONE 1
A2 (594 x 420 mm)
1

6
5
4
D
FAULT TRIP
52BA
UNDERVOLTAGE
27
CONTROL POWER FAILURE
74
MCC 0-826-E-MC07, 08, 09 TROUBLE
1
(NOTE 1)
1
C
B
MCC NO
MC07
MC08
MC09
PCMS CAB. NO
LATER
LATER
LATER
NO
1
2
3
1
1
2
3
R
UA
001
A
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
D
C
3
NOTES
1. LOGIC IMPLEMENTED IN THE MCC.
REFERENCE DWGS
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM NO. : 0-826-E143-001
*Preparer : 이창수 , Tel : 054-421-7461
B
2
1
01/17/19
FINAL ISSUE
0
05/17/18
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
REV.
DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED
CHECKED
REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
A
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM
480V MCC ALARMS
SHEET
PROJECT DRAWING 0-826-E158-001
NUMBER 1/1
JOB NO. RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY SCALE REV.
11G79 II/III NONE 1
A2 (594 x 420 mm)
1

D
C
B
A
6
5
4
3
2
1
592-LP01
592-LP01
HSS-400N01 MCR
HS-400N01 CLOSE (SC)
HSS-400N02 MANUAL
592-LP01
592-LP01
HSS-400N01 LOCAL
HS-400N02 CLOSE
LC03 SUPPLY PCB "C2"
TRIPPED
1 824-E158-002
W ZL-400
1
W ZL-400
2
592-LP01
HSS-400N02 AUTO
D/G RATED VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY
2 592-J158-002
SS-400 SYNC
592-LP01
LOCAL CLOSE COMMAND
3
592-LP01 SYNC RELAY (25M)
EMERGENCY TRIP
3 592-J158-002
HS-400N01 TRIP (SC)
592-LP01
1
HSS-400N01 MCR
HS-400N01 LOCAL
2
HS-400N02 TRIP
PHASE OVERCURRENT (LT.ST)
D/G PROTECTIVE TRIPS
1 592-J158-003
TROUBLE
DETECTOR
DISABLED
DETECTOR
824-E158-003 1
824-E158-003 2
TO ALARM
LOGIC
3
MANUAL
A
LC TR
˝A2˝
LC03
˝C2˝
MC08
˝AA˝
G
AUTO
2 824-E158-002
B
(NOTE 2)
CLOSE
PCB
MC08-AA
R MC08-AA
R HS-400N01
R HS-400N02
(592-LP01)
824-E158-002 2
VOIDC
TRIP
PCB
MC08-AA
G MC08-AA
G HS-400N01
G HS-400N02
(592-LP01)
824-E158-002 1
VOLTMETER
0-600V
CLOSE
RED
TROUBLE
DISALBED
YEL
YEL
TRIP
GRN
HS-400N01(SC)
CONTROL SWITCH
MODULE
MCR
WHITE
LOCAL
WHITE
ZL-400 (SC)
MONITORING
LIGHT MODULE
D
TRIP
CLOSE
LOCAL
MCR
HS-400N02
3-POSITION SPRING
RETURN TO CENTER
WITH TARGET
@592-LP01
MAIN
AUTO
HSS-400N02 (SC)
2-POSITION MAINTAINED
SWITCH
@592-LP01
HSS-400N01
2-POSITION MAINTAINED
SWITCH
@592-LP01
OFF
SYNC
SS-400
2-POSITION MAINTAINED
SW. WITH REMOVABLE
HANDLE (SYNC. SW)
@592-LP01
C
NOTES
1. PCMS CAB NO. : LATER
2. CONTINUOUS COIL MONITORING IS NOT REQUIRED FOR
THIS CLOSING OUTPUT.
3.VOLTMETER
PCMS CAB NO. : LATER
REFERENCE DWGS
TYPICAL LOGIC : 0-700-J158-004
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM : 0-826-E140-008
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM : 0-826-E143-002
B
*PREPARE : 이창수, TEL : 054-421-7461
DIESEL GENERATOR FEED PCB (MC08-AA)
6
5
4
3
2
1
01/17/19
VOIDED
0
05/17/18
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
REV.
DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED
CHECKED
REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
A
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM
480V MCC DIESEL GENERATOR FEED PCB
SHEET
PROJECT DRAWING 0-826-E158-002
NUMBER 1/1
JOB NO. RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY SCALE REV.
11G79 II/III NONE 1
A2 (594 x 420 mm)
1

6
5
4
3
D
C
0-DP05
0-BC05
0-BC05
0-DP05 DC BUS GROUND
64R
BATTERY CHARGER 0-BC05 OUTPUT BKR OPEN
72/b
BATTERY CHARGER 0-BC05 OUTPUT BKR TRIP
72/TAS
0-BC05
BATTERY CHARGER 0-BC05 DC OUTPUT FAILURE
37
0-BC05
BATTERY CHARGER 0-BC05 LOW DC VOLTAGE
27
0-BC05
BATTERY CHARGER 0-BC05 HI DC VOLTAGE
59
0-BC05
BATTERY CHARGER 0-BC05 AC POWER FAILURE
27
0-DP05
0-DP05 DC BUS UNDERVOLTAGE
27
0-DP05
0-DP05
0-DP05
BATTERY 0-BT05 FEEDER BKR OPEN
72/b
BATTERY 0-BT05 FEEDER FUSE FAIL
FU(P), FU(N)
BATT. CHARGER 0-BC05 INCOMING FUSE FAIL
FU(P), FU(N)
Y
0-DP05
Y
0-BC05
Y
0-BC05
Y
0-BC05
Y
0-BC05
Y
0-BC05
Y
0-DP05
Y
0-DP05
LATER
LATER
LATER
LATER
LATER
UA
001
B
0-DP05
BATTERY 0-BT05 TEST BREAKER CLOSED
72/a
R
0-DP05
LATER
UA
002
2
1
D
C
NOTES
1. PCMS CAB. NO. : LATER
2. THIS 125V DC DIST. PANEL IS USED FOR 2ND
RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG.
REFERENCE DWG
1. S/L DWG : 0-820-E140-001
0-841-E140-001
0-842-E140-001
B
A
6
5
4
3
2
0
05/29/18
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
REV.
DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED
CHECKED
REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
A
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (DC)
125V DC DIST. PANEL & BATT. CHARGER
SHEET
PROJECT DRAWING 0-841-E-158-001
NUMBER 1/1
JOB NO. RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY SCALE REV.
11G79 II/IIIⅡ NONE 0
A2 (594 x 420 mm)
1

6
5
4
3
D
C
0-UP05
UPS 0-UP05 TROUBLE
0-UP05
INVERTER TROUBLE
0-UP05
UPS 0-UP05 SYNC./ALTERNATE SOURCE FAIL
0-UP05
120V AC POWER VIA REGULATING XFMR
0-841-E-DP05
125V DC FUSE FAIL TO UPS 0-UP05
LATER
LATER
LATER
LATER
LATER
R
UA
001
B
0-DP05
GROUND DETECTION (64)
0-DP05
UNDERVOLTAGE (27)
LATER
LATER
R
UA
002
2
1
D
C
NOTES
1. PCMS CAB. NO. : LATER
2. THIS UPS IS USED FOR 2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG.
REFERENCE DWG
1. S/L DWG : 0-820-E140-001
0-841-E140-001
0-842-E140-001
B
A
6
5
4
3
2
0
05/29/18
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
REV.
DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED
CHECKED
REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
A
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (IP)
INSTRUMENT POWER SYSTEM ALARM
SHEET
PROJECT DRAWING 0-842-E-158-001
NUMBER 1/1
JOB NO. RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY SCALE REV.
11G79 NNSII/IIIⅡ NONE 0
A2 (594 x 420 mm)
1

6
D
C
5
4
3
2
LOGIC DIAG. NO.
0-761-J158-001
SYSTEM ALARM
TITLE
REV.
A
1
D
C
B
B
A
6
5
4
3
2
A
06/30/26
REV.
DATE
PRELIMINARY
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED
CHECKED
REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
A
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (PR)
RADIATION MONITORING SYSTEM
SHEET
PROJECT DRAWING 0-761-J158-000
NUMBER 1/1
JOB NO. RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY SCALE REV.
11G79 III NONE A
A2 (594 x 420 mm)
1

6
5
4
D
RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BUILDING EXHAUST ACU EFFLUENT PART RAD. HI (RT-012)
2-761-J-CA05
RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BUILDING EXHAUST ACU EFFLUENT PART ALERT HI (RT-012)
2-761-J-CA05
RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BUILDING EXHAUST ACU EFFLUENT IODINE RAD. HI (RT-012)
2-761-J-CA05
RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BUILDING EXHAUST ACU EFFLUENT IODINE ALERT HI (RT-012)
2-761-J-CA05
RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BUILDING EXHAUST ACU EFFLUENT GAS RAD. HI (RT-012)
2-761-J-CA05
RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BUILDING EXHAUST ACU EFFLUENT GAS ALERT HI (RT-012)
2-761-J-CA05
ISOCS ROOM & X-RAY VAULT RAD. HI (RT-241)
2-761-J-CA05
ISOCS ROOM & X-RAY VAULT ALERT (RT-241)
2-761-J-CA05
C
TRUCK BAY & WAITING AREA RAD. HI (RT-242)
2-761-J-CA05
TRUCK BAY & WAITING ALERT (RT-242)
2-761-J-CA05
3
2
R
RAH
001
DISPOSAL DRUM INSPECTION RAD. HI (RT-244)
2-761-J-CA05
DISPOSAL DRUM INSPECTION ALERT (RT-244)
2-761-J-CA05
DISPOSAL DRUM INSPECTION RAD. HI (RT-245)
2-761-J-CA05
DISPOSAL DRUM INSPECTION ALERT (RT-245)
2-761-J-CA05
R
RAH
002
RADWASTE STORAGE RAD. HI (RT-246)
2-761-J-CA05
RADWASTE STORAGE ALERT (RT-246)
2-761-J-CA05
R
RAH
003
1
R
RAH
005
D
R
RAH
006
C
MEDIUM LEVEL RADWASTE STORAGE RAD. HI (RT-243)
2-761-J-CA05
MEDIUM LEVEL RADWASTE STORAGE ALERT (RT-243)
2-761-J-CA05
B
R
RAH
004
NOTE : 1. THE RMS SYSTEM SHALL HAVE DATA
COMMUNICATION WITH LILW #1 PCMS
CABINET (1-752-J-PA01) FOR RADIATION
SYSTEM ALARM.
2. THE RMS SYSTEM SHALL HAVE DATA
COMMUNICATION WITH LILW #2 RMS
COMPUTER (2-761-J-CA05) FOR RADIATION
SYSTEM ALARM.
B
A
6
5
4
3
2
A
06/30/26
REV.
DATE
PRELIMINARY
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED
CHECKED
REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
A
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM (PR)
SYSTEM ALARM
SHEET
PROJECT DRAWING 0-761-J158-001
NUMBER 1/1
JOB NO. RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY SCALE REV.
11G79 III NONE A
A2 (594 x 420 mm)
1

ATTACHMENT 4-5 Spec. No. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM LIST
Drawing No. Title
Typical Functional Loop Diagrams
1 1-700-J157-001 FLD INDEX AND LEGEND
2 1-700-J157-002 FLD INDEX AND LEGEND
3 1-700-J157-003 FLD INDEX AND LEGEND
System Functional Loop Diagrams
4 0-481-J157-000 FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM RADIOACTIVE DRAIN
SYSTEM
5 0-481-J157-001 FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM 2ND RADWASTE BLDG.
FLOOR DRAIN SUMP LEVEL
6 0-582-J157-000 FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM MAKEUP DEMINERALIZER
SYSTEM
7 0-582-J157-001 FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM DEMINERALIZED WTR
STOR. TK LEVEL #1
8 0-582-J157-002 FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM DEMINERALIZED WTR
STOR. TK LEVEL #2
9 0-585-J157-000 FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM DOMESTIC WATER
SYSTEM
10 0-585-J157-001 FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM DOMESTIC WTR STOR. TK
LEVEL #1
11 0-585-J157-002 FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM DOMESTIC WTR STOR. TK
LEVEL #2
12 0-611-J157-000 FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM RADWASTE R/ST. BLDG
HVAC SYSTEM
13 0-611-J157-001 FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM SUPPLY AHU TEMP
14 0-611-J157-002 FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM AIR FLOW
15 0-611-J157-003 FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM ACU AIR FLOW CONTROL
16 0-611-J157-004 FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM BATTERY RM TEMP
17 0-611-J157-005 FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM ACCU AIR TEMP
18 0-611-J157-006 FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM STOR & INSP AREA DP
TC 4-5-1 (Final)

4 3
2
1
D
C
1. ENCLOSURE SYMBOLS
SYMBOLS
DESCRIPTION
INSTRUMENT MOUNTED ON CONTROL ROOM
PANEL AND MOSAIC BOARD
(INDICATOR, RECORDER, ETC.)
AUTOMATIC SIGNAL PROCESSING
DISPLAY AND/OR CONTROL
ON FPD IN CONTROL ROOM
COMPUTER BASED DISPLAY AND
CONTROL DEVICE(LOCAL)
PCMS CABINET MOUNTED DISCRETE
DEVICE OR MODULE
SOFT FUNCTION MODULE IN CONTROL
CARD MOUNTED ON PCMS CABINET
LOCALLY MOUNTED DEVICE
(NOT ON ANY PANEL)
LOCAL INSTRUMENT PANEL MOUNTED DEVICE
NOTES
1. TYPES OF SYMBOL SHOWN ARE BASED ON SAMA STANDARD PMC 22.1
FOR FURTHER DETAILS AND CLARIFICATION REFER TO SAMA STANDARD.
2. DETAIL FUNCTIONS OF SIGNAL PROCESSING AND ITS ASSOCIATED MATH
EQUATION SHALL BE REFERRED TO DRAWING NO. 1-700-J157-002, 003
3. FUNCTIONAL RELATIONSHIP OF LOOP CONTROL IS SHOWN BELOW
AS A TYPICAL EXAMPLE.
INSTRUMENT
AIR
SUPPLY
PT
001
VENDOR - FURNISHED ITEM
MEASURED VARIABLE
LOOP NO.
INPUT SIGNAL TO PCMS
PID
DIFFERENCE FUNCTION
CONTROL FUNCTION
SET POINT
TRANSFER
T
A A MANUAL ADJUSTABLE
VALUE
CRT
(NOTE 6)
AUTO/MANUAL
CONTROL STATION
9. CONTINUATION ARROW SYMBOL
1-700-J157-001
1
FLD TO FLD
1
1-700-J158-001
1
WITHIN THE SAME FLD
SEQUENCE LETTER
FLD TO CLD
1 1-700-J158-001
CLD TO FLD
CONTINUATION TO A DEVICE
OR EQUIPMENT WHEN NO FURTHER
CLARIFICATION IS NEEDED.
10. FLD NUMBERING STRUCTURE
1 - 700 - J157 - 001
SERIAL NUMBER
ORIGINATING
FBS
DISCIPLINE
WBS
UNIT CODE
11. ABBREVIATIONS
FPD : FLAT PANEL DISPLAY
HS : HAND SWITCH
DC : DEDICATED CONTROL SWITCH
MMI : MAN-MACHINE INTERFACE
PCMS: PROCESS CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEM
MGB : MOSAIC GRAPHIC BOARD
D
C
B
A
DGN.
31M
626A
2
LOCALLY MOUNTED DISCRETE DEVICE
MULTIPLE DEVICES IN ONE ASSEMBLY
A
MANUAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
T
A
AUTO/MANUAL CONTROL STATION
AS
AS
AIR SET
(AS : INSTRUMENT AIR SUPPLY)
M
M
FINAL CONTROL ELEMENT SUCH AS DIAPHRAGM
TYPE CONTROL VALVE WITH POSITIONER ETC.
(TYPICAL)
FINAL CONTROL ELEMENT SUCH AS
MOTOR OPERATED TYPE CONTROL VALVE
S
SOLENOID VALVE
4. DEVICE SYMBOL USAGE ; REFER TO ENCLOSURE SYMBOLS(ITEM 1)
5. LOGIC SYMBOL ; REFER TO CLD SYMBOLS AND LEGEND
1-700-J158-001 THRU 014.
6. LOCATION OF THE AUTO/MANUAL CONTROL STATION ON FPD DISPLAY
7. SIGNALS OF CONTROL LOOP ARE SHOWN BELOW.
A.
: CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE SIGNAL
B.
: ON-OFF SIGNAL
C.
: CONNECTION TO PROCESS
OR INSTRUMENT AIR SUPPLY
D.
: PNEUMATIC SIGNAL
E.
: HYDRAULIC SIGNAL
F.
: CAPILLARY TUBING
(FILLED SYSTEM)
8. SIGNAL MONITOR IDENTIFICATION
SETPOINT VALUE
H/
PS 018A
SEQUENTIAL NUMBER (4 SPACE)
VARIABLE UNIT IN THE PCMS(2 OR 3 SPACE)
4 3
2
B
AS-BUILT & INCORP.
2 06/16/14
RRG/ES-140014K
1 04/29/11 AS-BUILT
0 04/30/07 ISSUE FOR CONSTRUCTION
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
A
FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM
SYMBOLS AND LEGEND
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
1-700-J157-001
JOB NO.
2A626
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
NNS
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
2
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

D
C
B
A
DGN.
31M
626A
2
4 3
2
1
NOTES
2. DEFINITION OF SIGNAL PROCESSING SYMBOLS
SYMBOL
FUNCTION
GRAPHIC
MATH EQUATION
REPRESENTATION
SUMMING
/n
AVERAGING
DIFFERENCE
M = X1+X2+.......+Xn
X
X1
X2
t
X X3
X2
X1+X2+.......+Xn
M = X1
n
t
X X1
X2
Xn = X1 - X2
t
M
M
M
D E F I N I T I O N
t
THE OUTPUT EQUALS THE ALGEBRAIC SUM OF THE
INPUTS. (THE INPUTS MAY BE LABELED WITH
POSITIVE OR NEGATIVE SIGNS)
t
t
THE OUTPUT EQUALS THE ALGEBRAIC SUM OF THE
INPUTS DIVIDED BY THE NUMBER OF INPUTS.
THE OUTPUT EQUALS THE ALGEBRAIC DIFFERENCE
OF THE TWO INPUTS .
P
X
PROPORTIONAL
M = KX
M
t1 t
t1
t
THE OUTPUT IS DIRECTLY PROPORTIONAL TO THE
INPUT.
I
INTEGRAL
1
M=
T1
Xdt
D
DERIVATIVE
dx
M=T
D
dt
X
t1 t2 t
X
X
t1 t
X1
X
MULTIPLYING M= X1 * X2
X2
M
t1 t2
M
t
M
t1
t
DIVIDING
X
t1 t
X1
M
X1 X2
M=
X2
t1 t
X
M
t1
t
t1
t
ROOT
M= X
EXTRACTION
n
X EXPONENTIAL
n
M= X
X
X
t
t
f(x)
FUNCTION
GENERATOR
M= f(X)
f(t)
TIME
FUNCTION
M = x f(t)
M = f(t)
>
HIGH
SELECTING
X1 FOR X1 > X2
M=
X2 FOR X1 < X2
<
LOW
SELECTING
X1 FOR X1 < X2
M=
X2 FOR X1 > X2
X
t
t1 t
X
X2
X1
X
t1
t
X2
t1
X1
t
M
t
M
t
M
t
t1
M
t
M
t1
t
t1
t
THE OUTPUT VARIES IN ACCORDANCE WITH BOTH
MAGNITUDE AND DURATION OF THE INPUT.
THE OUTPUT IS PROPORTIONAL TO THE TIME
INTEGRAL OF THE INPUT.
THE OUTPUT IS PROPORTIONAL TO THE RATE OF
CHANGE (DERIVATIVE) OF THE INPUT .
THE OUTPUT EQUALS THE PRODUCT OF THE TWO INPUTS.
THE OUTPUT EQUALS THE QUOTIENT OF THE TWO INPUTS.
THE OUTPUT EQUALS THE ROOT ( I.E., SQUARE ROOT,
FOURTH ROOT, 3/2 ROOT,ETC.) OF THE INPUT.
THE OUTPUT EQUALS THE INPUT RAISED TO A POWER
(I.E., SECOND, THIRD, FOURTH, ETC.).
THE OUTPUT EQUALS SOME NONLINEAR OR
UNSPECIFIED FUNCTION OF THE INPUT.
THE OUTPUT EQUALS THE INPUT TIMES SOME FUNCTION
OF TIME OR EQUALS SOME FUNCTION OF TIME ALONE
THE OUTPUT IS EQUAL TO THAT INPUT WHICH IS THE
GREATEST OF THE INPUTS.
THE OUTPUT IS EQUAL TO THAT INPUT WHICH IS THE
LEAST OF THE INPUTS.
4 3
2
1. THE VARIABLES USED IN THE TABLE ARE THE FOLLOWINGS.
b
ANALOG BIAS VALUE.
H
1
T1
L
M
n
t
TD
X
AN ARBITRARY ANALOG HIGH LIMIT VALUE.
INTEGRATING RATE.
AN ARBITRARY ANALOG LOW LIMIT VALUE.
ANALOG OUTPUT VARIABLE
NUMBER OF ANALOG INPUTS
OR VALUE OF EXPONENT.
TIME.
DERIVATIVE TIME.
ANALOG INPUT VARIABLE
X1,X2,X3, ........,Xn - ANALOG INPUT VARIABLE
(1 TO n IN NUMBER)
D
C
B
AS-BUILT & INCORP.
2 06/16/14
RRG/ES-140014K
1 04/29/11 AS-BUILT
0 04/30/07 ISSUE FOR CONSTRUCTION
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
A
FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM
SYMBOLS AND LEGEND
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
1-700-J157-002
JOB NO.
2A626
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
NNS
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
2
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

4 3
2
1
D
C
B
A
DGN.
31M
626A
2
SYMBOL
FUNCTION
GRAPHIC
MATH EQUATION
REPRESENTATION
D E F I N I T I O N
HIGH
LIMITING
M =
X FOR X H<
=
>
H FOR X H=
LOW
M =
LIMITING
X FOR X L
=
L FOR X L
=
X X
M
H
t1
t
X X
M
L
t1
t
t1
t
t1
t
THE OUTPUT EQUALS THE INPUT OR THE HIGH
LIMIT VALUE WHICHEVER IS LOWER.
THE OUTPUT EQUALS THE INPUT OR THE LOW
LIMIT VALUE WHICHEVER IS HIGHER
VELOCITY
LIMITING
REVERSE
K
PROPORTIONAL
dm dx
=
dt dt
dm
dt
= H
dX
H AND
dt =
m = x
dX
> H OR
dt =
m = x
X
dX
> H
dt
t1t2
t
X
M = -KX
t
M
t1t2
dm
= H
dt
t
THE OUTPUT EQUALS THE INPUT AS LONG AS THE
RATE OF CHANGE OF THE INPUT DOES NOT EXCEED A LIMIT
VALUE. THE OUTPUT WILL CHANGE AT THE
RATE ESTABLISHED BY THIS LIMIT UNTIL THE
OUTPUT AGAIN EQUALS THE INPUT.
M
t
THE OUTPUT IS REVERSELY PROPORTIONAL TO THE INPUT
+
-
¡
BIAS
M = X ¡¾
X
b
M
t
t
THE OUTPUT EQUALS THE INPUT PLUS (OR MINUS)
SOME ARBITRARY VALUE (BIAS)
* /
*
H/
/L
H/L
H//L
A
T
CONVERT
OUTPUT = f (INPUT)
SIGNAL
MONITOR
STATE 1
STATE 2 (ENERGIZED OR ALARM STATE)
H X<
=
H X>
STATE 1 (ENERGIZED OR ALARM STATE)
STATE 2
STATE 1 (FIRST OUTPUT m1 ENERGIZED
OR ALARM STATE)
STATE 2 (SECOND OUTPUT m2 ENERGIZED
OR ALARM STATE)
L X<
L X>
=
X<H,L
X>H,L
X X
M
H
STATE
1
STATE
2
t1 t
X X M
t1
t
L
STATE
1
STATE
2
t1 t
t1
t
X
X
L,H
t1
t
M
STATE
1
STATE
2
t1 t2 t
STATE 1 (FIRST OUTPUT m1 ENERGIZED
OR ALARM STATE)
X<L
STATE 2 (BOTH OUTPUTS INACTIVE
OR DE-ENERGIZED)
L X H< <=
=
STATE 3 (SECOND OUTPUT m2 ENERGIZED
OR ALARM STATE)
X>H
X X
H
M
L
STATE
1
STATE
2
STATE
3
t1 t2 t
t1 t2 t
ANALOG SIGNAL
GENERATOR
M = A
TRANSFER
M =
X1 FOR STATE 1
X2 FOR STATE 2
M
DOES NOT APPLY
A
X X1
M
X2
t
t
STATE1 STATE2
t
THE FORM OF THE OUTPUT SIGNAL IS DIFFERENT FROM
THAT OF THE INPUT.
*
E - VOLTAGE
B - BINARY
I - CURRENT
H - HYDRAULIC
P - PNEUMATIC
A - ANALOG
D - DIGITAL
O - ELECTROMAGNETIC, SONIC
R - RESISTANCE (ELECT.)
THE OUTPUT HAS DISCRETE STATES WHICH ARE
DEPENDENT ON THE VALUE OF THE INPUT.
WHEN THE INPUT EXCEEDS (OR BECOMES LESS THAN)
AN ARBITRARY LIMIT VALUE THE OUTPUT CHANGES STATE.
THE OUTPUT IS AN ANALOG SIGNAL DEVELOPED
WITHIN THE GENERATOR
THE OUTPUT EQUALS THE INPUT WHICH HAS BEEN
SELECTED BY TRANSFERER.
THE STATE OF THE TRANSFER IS ESTABLISHED
BY EXTERNAL MEANS.
4 3
2
D
C
B
AS-BUILT & INCORP.
2 06/16/14
RRG/ES-140014K
1 04/29/11 AS-BUILT
0 04/30/07 ISSUE FOR CONSTRUCTION
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
A
FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM
SYMBOLS AND LEGEND
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
1-700-J157-003
JOB NO.
2A626
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
NNS
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
2
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

4
3
2
D
C
FLD No.
0-481-J157-001
TITLE
2ND RADWASTE BLDG. FLOOR DRAIN SUMP LEVEL
REV.
0
1
D
C
B
A
4
3
B
2
0
06/15/18
REV.
DATE
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED
CHECKED
REVIEWED
APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
A
FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM
RADIOACTIVE DRAIN SYSTEM
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-481-J157-000
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
III
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

4
D
MMI
3
LI
001
2
1
NOTE
1. ALARMS AT FLOODING LEVEL
D
C
PCMS(LATER)
START SUMP PUMPS PP01 / PP02
STOP SUMP PUMPS PP01 & PP02
(50.98% )
H/
LS-001A
(17.65% )
/L
LS-001B
(56.86% )
HH/
LS-001C
TO ALARM LAHH & START BOTH
SUMP PUMPS PP01 & PP02 (NOTE 1)
B
A
FIELD
4
4-20mA
LIT
001
2ND RADWASTE BLDG.
FLOOR DRAIN SUMP LEVEL
3
2
REFERENCE DWGS
P&ID NO. : 0-481-N105-001
CLD NO. : 0-481-J158-001,002
C
B
0
06/15/18
REV.
DATE
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED
CHECKED
REVIEWED
APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
A
FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM
2ND RADWASTE BLDG. FLOOR DRAIN SUMP LEVEL
SHEET
PROJECT DRAWING 0-481-J157-001
NUMBER 1/1
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
III
SCALE
NONE
REV.
0
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

4
3
2
D
FLD No.
0-582-J157-001
0-582-J157-002
TITLE
DEMINERALIZED WTR STOR. TK LEVEL #1
DEMINERALIZED WTR STOR. TK LEVEL #2
REV.
A
A
C
B
VOID
1
D
C
B
A
4
3
2
0
06/12/18
REV.
DATE
VOID
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED
CHECKED
REVIEWED
APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
A
FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM
MAKEUP DEMINERALIZER SYSTEM
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-582-J157-000
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
N
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

4
3
2
D
MMI
LI
001
C
PCMS(LATER)
(9.8% )
/LL
LS-001A
TO ALARM
LALL-001
(5.4% )
/LLL TO ALARM
LALL-001
LS-001B
VOID
B
A
FIELD
4 ~ 20mA
DEMINERALIZED
WATER STORAGE TANK
TK01
153A-3/4
3/4"x 3/8"
V1173
153B-3/8
LT
001
4
3
2
1
D
REFERENCE DWGS
P & ID NO. : 0-582-M105-001
CLD NO. : 0-582-J158-003
C
B
0
06/12/18
REV.
DATE
VOID
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED
CHECKED
REVIEWED
APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
A
FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM
DEMINERALIZED WTR STOR. TK LEVEL #1
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-582-J157-001
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
N
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

4
3
2
D
LCP(LP01)
LI
3002
C
LCP(LP01)
TO CLOSE
DEMI. WTR
STOR. TK ISOL.
VALVE V005
LS
3002A
H
LS
3002C
HH
TO ALARM
LAHL
LS TO ALARM
3002D LAHL
LL
TO CONTROL DEMI.
WTR TRANSFER
TO OPEN DEMI. LS
PUMP PP01 & PP02
WTR STOR. TK 3002B
ISOL. VALVE L
V005
LS TO ALARM
3002E LAHL
LLL
TO STOP DEMI.
VOIDWTR TRANSFERPUMP PP01 & PP02
B
A
FIELD
4 ~ 20mA
DEMINERALIZED
WATER STORAGE TANK
TK01
154A-3/4
3/4"x 3/8"
V1174
LIT
002
154B-3/8
4
3
2
1
NOTE
1. : FURNISHED WITH ASSOCIATED
EQUIPMENT PACKAGE(M233)
2. THERE IS NO INTERFACE WITH PCMS.
D
REFERENCE DWGS
P & ID NO. : 0-582-M105-001
CLD NO. : 0-582-J158-001,002,003
C
B
0
06/12/18
REV.
DATE
VOID
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED
CHECKED
REVIEWED
APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
A
FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM
DEMINERALIZED WTR STOR. TK LEVEL #2
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-582-J157-002
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
N
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

4
3
2
D
FLD No.
0-585-J157-001
0-585-J157-002
TITLE
DOMESTIC WTR STOR. TK LEVEL #1
DOMESTIC WTR STOR. TK LEVEL #2
REV.
A
A
C
B
VOID
1
D
C
B
A
4
3
2
0
06/12/18
REV.
DATE
VOID
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED
CHECKED
REVIEWED
APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
A
FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM
DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-585-J157-000
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
N
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

4
3
2
D
MMI
LI
001
C
PCMS(LATER)
(22.2% )
/L
LS-001A
TO ALARM
LALL-001
(8.9% )
/LL TO ALARM
LALL-001
LS-001B
VOID
B
A
FIELD
4 ~ 20mA
DOMESTIC
WATER STORAGE TANK
TK02
132A-3/4
3/4"x 3/8"
V2032
LT
001
132B-3/8
4
3
2
1
D
REFERENCE DWGS
P & ID NO. : 0-585-M105-001
CLD NO. : 0-585-J158-003
C
B
0
06/12/18
REV.
DATE
VOID
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED
CHECKED
REVIEWED
APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
A
FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM
DOMESTIC WTR STOR. TK LEVEL #1
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-585-J157-001
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
N
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

4
3
2
D
LCP
(582-LP01)
LI
3002
C
LCP
(582-LP01)
B
TO CLOSE DOMESTIC
WTR STOR. TK
ISOL.VALVE V001
TO STOP PROCESS
WATER SUPPLY
PUMP PP03 & PP04
TO OPEN DOMESTIC
WTR STOR. TK
ISOL.VALVE V001
TO ALARM
LAHL
TO START PROCESS
WATER SUPPLY
PUMP PP03 & PP04
TO STOP DOMESTIC
WATER FEED PUMP
WM-PP03 & PP04
LS
3002A
H
LS
3002C
HH
TO ALARM
LAHL
LS TO ALARM
3002D LAHL
LL
LS TO STOP DOMESTIC
WTR SUPPLY PUMP
3002B PP01 & PP02
L
VOID
A
FIELD
4 ~ 20mA
DOMESTIC
WATER STORAGE TANK
TK02
131A-3/4
3/4"x 3/8"
V2031
LIT
002
131B-3/8
4
3
2
1
NOTE
1. : FURNISHED WITH ASSOCIATED
EQUIPMENT PACKAGE(M233)
2. THERE IS NO INTERFACE WITH PCMS.
D
REFERENCE DWGS
P & ID NO. : 0-585-M105-001
CLD NO. : 0-585-J158-001,002,003
C
B
0
06/12/18
REV.
DATE
VOID
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED
CHECKED
REVIEWED
APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
A
FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM
DOMESTIC WTR STOR. TK LEVEL #2
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-585-J157-002
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
N
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

4
D
C
FLD No.
0-611-J157-001
0-611-J157-002
0-611-J157-003
0-611-J157-004
0-611-J157-005
0-611-J157-006
3
2
TITLE
SUPPLY AHU TEMP
AIR FLOW
ACU AIR FLOW CONTROL
BATTERY ROOM TEMP
ACU AIR FLOW
STOR & INSP AREA DP
REV.
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
D
C
B
A
4
3
B
2
0
06/15/18
REV.
DATE
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED
CHECKED
REVIEWED
APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
A
FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM
RADWASTE R/ST. BLDG HVAC SYSTEM
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-611-J157-000
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
III
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

4
D
MMI
3
2
TIK
3063
C
PCMS(LATER)
PID
(4.4℃ )
/L
TS-3063
TO ALARM
TAL
T
A A
B
A
FIELD
TO ALARM
UA
TO ALARM
UA
TS
3061
HL
TS TS TS
3062 3061A 3062A
HHL HL HHL
FS
3009
TE
3061
TE
3062
TE
3061A
TE
3062A
HC
HC
4
FT01
HC01(BANK1)EL HC01(BANK2)EL
HV01
RADWASTE R/ ST. BLDG SUPPLY AHU
3
PT100Ω
TE
3063
RTD
CC
CW01
DX
2
1
NOTE
1. WIRING BETWEEN TE AND TS IS PROVIDED BY
AHU SUPPLIER.
D
REFERENCE DWGS
P&ID NO. : 0-611-M105-001
CLD NO. : 0-611-J158-006,008
C
B
0
06/15/18
REV.
DATE
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED
CHECKED
REVIEWED
APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
A
FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM
SUPPLY AHU TEMP
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-611-J157-001
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
III
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

4
D
MMI
3
FI
009
2
1
NOTE
1. 120VAC POWER SHALL BE PROVIDED.
D
C
PCMS(LATER)
B
A
FIELD
(953㎥/min)
/L
FS-009B
TO ALARM FAL
& STOP FAN
AH01 / AH02
SUPPLY AHU
HV01
4 ~ 20mA
FT
009 (NOTE 1)
FE
009
4
3
2
REFERENCE DWGS
P&ID NO. : 0-611-M105-001
CLD NO. : 0-611-J158-001,008
C
B
0
06/15/18
REV.
DATE
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED
CHECKED
REVIEWED
APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
A
FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM
AIR FLOW
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-611-J157-002
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
III
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

4
D
MMI
3
FIK
011
2
1
NOTE
1. 120VAC POWER SHALL BE PROVIDED.
D
C
PCMS(LATER)
TO ALARM
FAHL
TO ALARM
FAHL
(870㎥/min)
H/
FS-011A
(712㎥/min)
/L
FS-011B
PID
T
A A
B
TO PROCESS
RADIATION
MONITORY SYS.
(761-RE/RT-012)
A
FIELD
EXH. ACU
AU01
4 ~ 20mA
FT
011
(NOTE 1)
FE
011
I.A
4 ~ 20mA
Y0001
4
3
2
REFERENCE DWGS
P&ID NO. : 0-611-M105-001
CLD NO. : 0-611-J158-004,008
C
B
0
06/15/18
REV.
DATE
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED
CHECKED
REVIEWED
APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
A
FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM
ACU AIR FLOW CONTROL
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-611-J157-003
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
II
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

4
3
2
D
MMI
TIK
3303
C
40℃
H/
TS-3303C
18.3℃
/L
TS-3303D
TO ALARM
TAHL
TO ALARM
TAHL
PCMS(LATER)
B
TO ALARM
UA
PID
T
A A
A
FIELD
4
FS
3303
LL
TS
3303A
HL
(NOTE1)
PT100Ω
TE
3303A
RTD
TS
3303B
HHL
(NOTE1)
PT100Ω
TE
3303B
RTD
HC
EL
HC02
BATTERY RM
ELECT. DUCT HEATER
3
PT100Ω
TE
3303
RTD
BATTERY RM
2
1
NOTE
1. WIRING BETWEEN TE AND TS IS PROVIDED BY
EDH SUPPLIER.
D
REFERENCE DWGS
P&ID NO. : 0-611-M105-002
CLD NO. : 0-611-J158-009
C
B
0
06/15/18
REV.
DATE
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED
CHECKED
REVIEWED
APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
A
FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM
BATTERY RM TEMP
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-611-J157-004
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
III
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

4
D
MMI
C
PCMS(LATER)
3
TI
012
TO ALARM
TAHH
(LATER)
HH/
TS-012
2
B
A
FIELD
4
TE
012
4 ~ 20mA
TO ACCU HV02
CONTROL
EXH. ACU
AU01
3
2
1
D
REFERENCE DWGS
P&ID NO. : 0-611-M105-001
CLD NO. : 0-611-J158-008
C
B
0
06/15/18
REV.
DATE
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED
CHECKED
REVIEWED
APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
A
FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM
ACCU AIR TEMP
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-611-J157-005
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
III
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

4
3
D
MMI
PDI
1001
PDR
1001
2
PDI
1002
PDR
1002
1
D
C
PCMS(LATER)
B
A
FIELD
4 ~ 20mA
PDT
1001
(+)
(-)
OUTSIDE
AIR
DISPOSAL DRUM
INSP. AREA
4
3
4 ~ 20mA
PDT
1002
(+)
(-)
MED. LEVEL
OUTSIDE
RADWASTE DRUM
AIR
STOR. AREA
2
REFERENCE DWGS
P&ID NO. : 0-611-M105-002
C
B
0
06/15/18
REV.
DATE
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED
CHECKED
REVIEWED
APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
A
FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM
STOR & INSP AREA DP
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-611-J157-006
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
II
SCALE
NONE
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
1
A3 (420 x 297 mm)

ATTACHMENT 4-6 Spec. No. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
ANALOG LOOP SUMMARY LIST FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
No. Drawing No. Title
1
N/A
Typical Electrical Analog Loop Type Legend
2
N/A
Electrical Analog Loop Summary List
TC 4-6-1

ATTACHMENT 4-6 Spec. No. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
ANALOG LOOP SUMMARY LIST FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Typical Electrical Analog Loop Type Legend
N/A
TC 4-6-2

ATTACHMENT 4-6 Spec. No. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
ANALOG LOOP SUMMARY LIST FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Electrical Analog Loop Summary List
The detailed list will be provided with PCMS I/O List.
TC 4-6-3 (Final)

ATTACHMENT 4-7 Spec. No. : 0-771-J212
Add. 1
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM LIST
No. Drawing No. Title
1 0-481-E143-001 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM(DE) RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG. SUMP
PUMPS
2 0-611-E143-001 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM(VH) RADWASTE R/ST BLDG SUPPLY
AHU FANS
3 0-611-E143-002 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM(VH) RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
EXHAUST & EXH. ACU FANS
4 0-673-E143-001 SCHEMTIC DIAGRAM(DM) 2 ND RADWASTE R/S BLDG SUMP
PUMPS
5 0-824-E143-001 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 480V LOAD CENTER INCOMING
BREAKER
6 0-824-E143-002 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 480V LOAD CENTER TYPICAL
MOTOR LOAD FEEDER BREAKER
7 0-824-E143-003 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 480V LOAD CENTER AUX.
COMPARTMENT PART
8 0-824-E143-004 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 480V LOAD CENTER MCC &
PACKAGE FEEDER BREAKER
9 0-824-E143-005 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 480V LOAD CENTER BREAKER
INTERNAL MECHANISM
10 0-824-E143-006 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 480V LOAD CENTER MCC &
PACKAGE INCOMMING FEEDER BREAKER (ONLY DG)
11 0-826-E143-001 TYPICAL SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 480V MCC
12 0-826-E143-002 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM DIESEL GENERATOR MAIN
BREAKER
13 0-841-E143-001 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 125V DC DIST. PANEL 0-841-E-DP05
METERING & RELAYING
14 1-822-Y138-001 ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM(NB) 6.9KV SWGR
NORMAL FEED BRKR FROM POWER XFMR 1-822-E-SW01-
A2
15 1-822-Y138-002 ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM(NB) 6.9KV SWGR PT
CUBICLE 1-822-E-SW01-A1, F1
TC 4-7-1 (Final)

F
E
8
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-481-E143-001
7
A
B
C
6
ALARM
52
480-120V
2A
1
2
RESET
43
44
42
---
a
42
5
AT PCMS
A
X1
3C
3A
4
3
2
1
INDICATION
R
G
INDICATION (LOCAL)
A B
X1
CONTROL SWITCH DEVELOPMENT & ESCUTCHEON
G
R
MCR
STOP START
HS-001A,002A
3-POSITION
MAINTAINED
(LOCAL)
STOP
CONTACTS
STOPMCR
START
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
X
X
X
X
F
W
R HS-001A
G HS-001A
E
D
C
SSOR
A
B
A
C
C
7
50GS
8
(NOTE 3)
M
1
TO PCMS
A B
3R
A B
3G
A1
A2
74
A1
A2
42
A1
A2
42X
CONT
PWR
SSOR
95
96
O.L
b
U
13
14
42
a
21
22
42
b
21
22
74
B
A
A1
A0
31
32
A
42
b
A
120V AC AT MCC DISTR PNL
A0
H1
C
C
H2
A0
A1
7
8
52
TAS
10
11
52
a
31
11
74
TO ALARM CKT
DWG : 2-826-E143-002
13
14
43
42
a
44
53
42
a
54
31
42
a
32
61
42
b
62
61
42
b
62
97
74
98
O.L
a
SPARES
B
31
3
4
7
HS-001A
START
8
1
HS-001A
STOP
2
MCR
B
41
B
51
B
61
TO PCMS
LOCATION DESCRIPTION
C LOAD TAG NO.
PUMP RATING
0-481-M-PP01 10 HP
0-481-M-PP02 10 HP
A
MCC
0-826-E-MC07
0-826-E-MC07
A0 MCC
0-826-E-MC07
0-826-E-MC07
MCC
A1
DIST. PNL
0-826-E-MC07
0-826-E-MC07
PCMS CAB
0-771-J-RX01-LATER
0-771-J-RX01-LATER
B LOCAL
HS-001A
HS-002A
11E60M11_DWG.VST
8
7
6
5
4
3
D
NOTES
1. SYMBOL DENOTES PULLED WIRE LOCATION.
2. TAS : CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIP ALARM SWITCH.
3. GROUND TRIP APPLICABLE TO LOADS PROVIDED
WITH 50GS AS SHOWN ON SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM.
4. FOR OTHER SPARE CONTACTS NOT WIRED TO
TERMINAL BLOCK, SEE VENDOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
REFERENCE DWG
S.L.D : 0-826-E140-007
C.L.D : 0-481-J158-001
C.B.D : 0-481-E141-001
C
B
0
11/04/24
REV.
DATE
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
Ⅱ&Ⅲ
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (DE)
RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG. SUMP PUMPS
A
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-481-E143-001
2
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
N
SCALE
NONE
1
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
A1 (841X594 mm)

F
E
8
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-611-E143-001
480V LC BUS
A
B
C
7
52
OC/SC
6
P
FU
10A
CLOSE
FU
3A
A
P11 TO PCMS
61
62
33
5
3
4
TS
CLOSE
TO PCMS
1
A
25
27
86
4
TRIP
3
GROUND FAULT
INDICATION
1
2
TO PCMS
TS 2
TRIP A
26
24
86
50GS
7
R
TARGET
12
8
R
G
2
1
TEST SWITCH DEVELOPMENT & ESCUTCHEON
BREAKER CONTROL POSITION
TRIP
CLOSE
CONTACTS
DECK
3 POSITION SPRING
RETURN TO NORMAL 1
& PISTOL GRIP
HANDLE W/ TARGET
1
3
2
4
TRIPNORMALCLOSE
X
X
F
E
D
C
125V DC SUPPLY AT LC
A
B
C
A
C
3
50GS
4
M
1
19
3
CLOSE INT MECH.
2 20
N
FU
10A
FU
3A
N11 TO PCMS
A
7
9
TRIP INT MECH.
8
G
F
86
86
LOR
ES
7803D
C
86
B
D
NOTES
1. SYMBOL DENOTES PULLED WIRE LOCATION.
2. CELL SWITCH 33 CONTACTS SHOWN WITH BRKR
IN OPERATING POSITION.
3. TAS : CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIP ALARM SWITCH.
4. FOR OTHER SPARE CONTACTS NOT WIRED TO
TERMINAL BLOCK, SEE VENDOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
C
B
AC 120V SPACE HTR BUS
L
N
FU
6A
31
32
52 84
b 85
33
A
A
H1
C
A
H2
C
MOTOR
SPACE
HEATER
11E60M11_DWG.VST
8
45
46
74
64
65
33
32
38
86
26
27
52
TAS
37
38
52
a
71
72
41
33
42
52
a
74
75
33
39 43 47 49
52 52 52 52
b b b a
40 44 48 50
11 12 15
86 86 86
13 18 17
67 77 81
33 33 33 33 33 33
68 69 78 79 82 83
A
3C
A
3A
A
3T
A
3L
TO PCMS
SPARES(NOTE 4)
REFERENCE DWG
S.L.D : 0-824-E140-006
C.L.D : 0-611-J158-001
C.B.D : 0-611-E141-001
V/P : E207B-DE-C01-05
B
LOCATION DESCRIPTION
91
92
33
33
34
52
a
120V AC LC BUS PT'S1
RTM
2
C
MOTOR
TAG NO.
0-611-M-AH01
0-611-M-AH02
RATING
75 HP
75 HP
A 480V L/C
0-824-E-LC03
0-824-E-LC03
7
6
5
4
3
0
07/30/18
REV.
DATE
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (VH)
RADWASTE R/ST BLDG
SUPPLY AHU FANS
0-611-E143-001
2
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
ⅢN
SCALE
NONE
1
A
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
A1 (841X594 mm)

F
E
D
C
B
A
8
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-611-E143-002
480V MCC BUS
A
B
C
52
7
6
5
4
ALARM
AT MCC
AT PCMS
A1
A0
X1
3C
INDICATION
480-120V
2A
1
SSOR
RESET
2
43
42
a
44
3A
R
1
TO PCMS
G
W
42
SSOR
A
B
A1
C
C
7
50GS
8
(NOTE 3)
M
A2
A0
A1
31 42
b
32
A1
A0
H1
C
MOTOR
SPACE
120V AC AT MCC DISTR PNL HEATER
C
H2
A0
A2
A1
A2
74
A1
A2
42
CONT
PWR
SSOR
95
O.L
b
96
U
13
14
42
a
21
22
42
b
21
22
74
7
8
52
TAS
10
11
52
AX
31
32
74
61
62
74
71
72
74
53
54
42 61
a
62
42
b
97
98
O.L
a
TO ANN. CKT
DWG : 0-826-E143-002
SPARES (NOTE 4)
LOCATION DESCRIPTION
C MOTOR
TAG NO.
0-611-M-AH03
0-611-M-AH04
0-611-M-AH05
RATING
20 HP
60 HP
60 HP
A0 AUX T/B UNIT
0-826-E-MC09
0-826-E-MC07
0-826-E-MC09
MCC
A1 BREAKER UNIT
0-826-E-MC09
0-826-E-MC07
0-826-E-MC09
A2 120V AC DIST. UNIT
0-826-E-MC09
0-826-E-MC07
0-826-E-MC09
3
11E60M11_DWG.VST
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
F
E
D
NOTES
1. SYMBOL DENOTES PULLED WIRE LOCATION.
2. TAS : CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIP ALARM SWITCH.
3. GROUND TRIP APPLICABLE TO LOADS PROVIDED
WITH 50GS AS SHOWN ON SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM.
4. FOR OTHER SPARE CONTACTS NOT WIRED TO
TERMINAL BLOCK, SEE VENDOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
REFERENCE DWG
S.L.D : 0-826-E140-014
C.L.D : 0-611-J158-002, 004
C.B.D : 0-611-E141-001
V/P : E207C-DE-C01-22
C
B
0
07/30/18
REV.
DATE
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (VH)
RADWASTE R/ST BLDG EXHAUST & EXH. ACU FANS
A
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-611-E143-002
2
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
Ⅱ&NⅢ
SCALE
NONE
1
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
A1 (841X594 mm)

F
E
D
8
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-673-E143-001
7
6
5
4
3
2
480V MCC BUS
A
B
C
52-1
ALARM
A1
A5
PUMP PP30
START-STOP
A1
A3 B1
X1
3
4
HS-030
START
B1
S1
A3
1
HS-030
2 AUTO
B1
A1
A3
A5
A5
INDICATION
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER
HS-30
R
R
HS-30
G
G
27X
13
14
A5
A3
A11
B1
A5
A3
LS
E
W
27
5
6
HS-030
AUTO
LS-031
CL.ON
SUMP
LVL HI
480-120V
2A
42-1
13
14
71X1
1
5
62-2
TDC
1SEC
2
3
53
54
83
B1
3R1
83X A3
A1
A1
A2
74-1
A5
A1
A1
A2
42-1
SSOR-1
CONT
PWR
SSOR
95
96
O.L-1
b
13
14
42-1
a
B1
3G1
A3
A1
21
22
42-1
b
A1
A5
21
22
74-1
27X
B1
A12
A3
A1
61
62
42-1
b
A1
A5
E
LH A5
A3
LH
F
LS-032
(SW1)
CL.ON
SUMP
LVL
HI-HI
F
LHH
A3
A5
13
14
83X
L1
27X
L2
62-1
TDE
A1
A2
71X1
43
44
83
84
71X1
A1
A2
83X
6
7
ALT
83
INDICATION
PUMP PP31
START-STOP
ALARM
27X
A5
A4
X21
B2
21
22
5
6
HS-031
AUTO
W
B2
A22
A4
A2
61
62
42-2
b
A2
A5
A5
A2
G
HS-31
G
R
HS-31
R
1
2
HS-031
AUTO
B2
A2
A4
A5
B2 A4
X2
3
HS-031
START
4
B2
S2
A4
A2
A5
B2
3G2
A4
A2
B2
3R2
A4
A2
10
11
83
1
83
84
5
83X
62-1
TDC
1SEC
43
44
71X1
A5
A2
42-2
A1
A2
74-2
A1
A2
43
44
83X
21
22
74-2
L1
L2
62-2
TDE
27X
31
32
21
22
42-2
b
13
14
42-2
a
A5
A2
SSOR
95
96
O.L-2
b
CONT
PWR
1
480V MCC BUS
A
B
F
C
52-2
2A
120-480V
E
42-2
SSOR-2
D
C
B
A
50 GS
(NOTE 3)
A
B
A1
C
C1
7
8
52-1
TAS
10
11
31
32
52-1
a
74-1
43
44
42-2
a
53
54
61
42-1
a
62
71
97
74-1
74-1
72
98
O.L-1
a
SPARES
53
61
71
7
71X1
83X
83X
54
62
72
8
HS-030
a
SPARES
M
PUMP 0-673-M-PP30
TO ANN CKT
DWG : 0-826-E143-002
2
6
62-1
TDC
1SEC
2
6
62-2
TDC
1SEC
A5
A3
K032
K032S
A5
A3
K033
K033S
LS-032
(SW 2)
CL. ON
SUMP LVL
HI-HI
F
K031
A3
K031
K031S
K031S
TO PCMS CAB
PUMP START FAIL
TO PCMS CAB
LOCATION DESCRIPTION
SERVICE
DIESEL OIL TANK
ROOM SUMP PUMPS
MOTOR
TAG NO
C1 0-673-M-PP30
C2 0-673-M-PP31
BREAKER UNIT
A1 0-826-E-MC07-11
A2 0-826-E-MC07-12
MCC
AUX T/B UNIT
A3
A4
0-826-E-MC07
0-826-E-MC07
AUX RELAY UNIT
A5
0-826-E-MC07
LOCAL CONTROL BOX
B1
B2
0-673-J-HS-030
0-673-J-HS-031
LEVEL SWITCH
E
F
0-673-J-LS-031
0-673-J-LS-032
ALTERNATOR RELAY #83
STEP
1
2
3
4
83 COIL
ENERGIZED
DEENERGIZED
ENERGIZED
DEENERGIZED
2-3
X
X
10-11
X
X
CONTROL SWITCH DEVELOPMENT & ESCUTCHEON
G
R
AUTO
STOP START
HS-030,031
3-POSITION
MAINTAINED
CONTACTS
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
STOPAUTOSTART
X
X
X
X
11E60M11_DWG.VST
8
7
6
5
4
43
44
42-2
a
53
54
42-2
a
61
62
71
74-2
72
97
74-2
98
O.L-2
a
SPARES
10
11
52-2
a
31
32
74-2
50 GS
(NOTE 3)
7
8
52-2
TAS
A
B
A2
C
C2
TO ANN CKT
DWG : 0-826-E143-002
M
PUMP 0-673-M-PP31
C
NOTES
1. SYMBOL DENOTES PULLED WIRE LOCATION.
2. TAS : CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIP ALARM SWITCH.
3. GROUNT TRIP APPLICABLE TO LOAD PROVIDED
WITH 50GS AS SHOWN ON SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM.
B
REFERENCE DWG
S.L.D : 0-826-E140-007
C.L.D : 0-673-J158-001
C.B.D : 0-673-E141-001
3
0
10/29/24
REV.
DATE
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (DM)
2ND RADWASTE R/S BLDG
SUMP PUMPS
0-673-E143-001
2
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
ⅢN
SCALE
NONE
1
A
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
A1 (841X594 mm)

F
A
B
C
8
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-824-E143-001
480V LC BUS
7
E
OC/SC
LT
ST
52
D
FU
8A
A1
A11
B1 B11
480-120/240V
3KVA
FAN CONTROL
PANEL DWG.
PNS NO.
E208-DE-C01-01
DISCONNECT
LINK
a
CT
600/5A
c b
A
B
C
49T
3
51GN
4
6
P
FU
10A
(DWG : 0-824-E143-003)
125V DC SUPPLY AT 480V LC
5
CLOSE
4
TRIP
GROUND FAULT
3
INDICATION
3
4
HS
CLOSE
1
2
HS
TRIP
61
62
33
51GN
13
7
26
24
86
INST
TIME
14
12
8
R
A
G
T
21
22
49T
T
A
N
A1
A19
A3
CLOSE INT MECH.
DWG: 0-824-E143-005
A2
A20
FU
10A
A7
A9
TRIP INT. MECH.
DWG: 0-824-E143-005
A8
G
F
86
86
C
B
86
A1
49TX
A2
C
B
A
A
B
A
C
FROM 6.9 Kv SWGR
(SW01)
39 41 43 45 47 49
52 52 52 52 52 52
b a b a b a
40 42 44 46 48 50
52 CONTACT SPARES
13
49T
14
22
86
28
22
25
52
TAS
TO PCMS CAB.
FOR MONITORING LIGHT.
SEE BELOW TABLE
33
34
52
a
A
3C
B
A
3R
B
TO PCMS CAB.
FOR MONITORING LIGHT,
SEE BELOW TABLE
16 21
86 86
14 23
CLOSE & TRIP
SWGR FEED
TO L/C BRKR
SEE BELOW TABLE
67
71
74
77
81
33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33
68 69 72 73 75 76 78 79 82 83
33 CONTACT SPARES
11 12 15
86 86 86
13 18 17
86 CONTACT SPARES
TABLE
LOAD CENTER
A
BRKR NO.
0-824-E-LC03-A2
TO SWGR (86)
HAND SWITCH NO. SWGR BRKR NO.
HS-401
1-822-E-SW01-D1
B PCMS CAB
LATER
REMARK
-
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
HAND SWITCH DEVELOPMENT & ESCUTCHEON
BREAKER CONTROL
POSITION
TRIP
CLOSE
3 POSITION SPRING
RETURN TO NORMAL
& PISTOL GRIP
HANDLE WITH TARGET
CONTACTS
DECK
1
1
3
2
4
TRIPNORMALCLOSE
X
X
F
LOCATION DESCRIPTION
A LOAD CENTER
B PCMS CABINET
E
D
NOTES
1. SYMBOL DENOTES PULLED WIRE LOCATION.
2. CELL SWITCH 33 CONTACTS SHOWN WITH
BRKR IN OPERATING POSITION.
REFERENCE DRAWINGS
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM : 0-824-E140-003
LOGIC DIAGRAM : 0-824-E158-001
* PREPARE : 이창수, TEL : 054-421-7461
C
B
1
01/03/19
0
04/24/18
REV.
DATE
FINAL ISSUE
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
480V LOAD CENTER INCOMING BREAKER
A
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-824-E143-001
2
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
ⅢN
SCALE
NONE
1
SHEET
1/1
REV.
1
A1 (841X594 mm)

F
8
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-824-E143-002
A
B
C
480V LC BUS
E
52
OC/SC
LT
IT
7
P
6
5
FU
10A
CLOSE
FU
3A
A
P11 TO PCMS CAB
4
TRIP
GROUND FAULT
INDICATION
3
(DWG : 0-824-E143-003)
125V DC SUPPLY AT 480V LC
3
CS
CLOSE
4
TO PCMS
CAB
1
A
26
24
86
1
2
CS
TRIP
TO PCMS
CAB
2
A
25
27
86
50GS
7
R
12
TARGET
8
R
G
D
C
B
GROUND
SENSER
A
B
A
C
TO LOAD
3
50GS
4
N
91
92
33
33
34
52
a
1
RTM
120V AC LC BUS PTS
2
A1
A19
A3
CLOSE INT MECH.
DWG : 0-824-E143-005
A2
A20
A7
A9
TRIP INT. MECH.
DWG : 0-824-E143-005
A8
FU
10A
FU
3A
N11 TO PCMS CAB
A
FU
6A
31 84
52
b
32 85
33
120V AC SUPPLY AT 480V LCA
A
MOTOR
SPACE
HEATER
22
28
86
22
25
52
BA
TO ANN. CKT
DWG : 0-824-E143-003
G
F
86
86
C
B
86
33 35
52
a
34 36
52
b
37 71
52
a
38 72
33
41 74
52
a
42 75
33
A
3C
B
A
3R
B
A
3G
B
A
A
A
A
TO PCMS CAB.
SPARE
A
35
36
52
b
39
40
52
b
43
44
52
b
67
33
68
77
81
33
33
33
33
78
79
82
33
12 16 11 15 21
86 86 86 86 86
18 14 13 17 23
52 CONTACT SPARES
33 CONTACT SPARES
86 CONTACT SPARES
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CONTROL SWITCH DEVELOPMENT & ESCUTCHEON
CS
BREAKER CONTROL
POSITION
TRIP
CLOSE
CONTACTS
DECK
3 POSITION SPRING
RETURN TO NORMAL
& PISTOL GRIP
HANDLE WITH TARGET
1
1
3
2
4
TRIPNORMALCLOSE
X
X
F
LOCATION DESCRIPTION
A LOAD CENTER
B PCMS CAB.
E
D
NOTES
1. SYMBOL DENOTES PULLED WIRE LOCATION.
2. CELL SWITCH 33 CONTACTS SHOWN WITH
BRKR IN OPERATING POSITION.
3. THIS CIRCUIT IS NOT SUPPLIED FOR XFMR LOAD
REFERENCE DWG
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM : 0-824-E140-003
LOGIC DIAGRAM : LATER
* PREPARE : 이창수, TEL : 054-421-7461
C
B
1
01/03/19
0
04/24/18
REV.
DATE
FINAL ISSUE
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
480V LOAD CENTER
TYPICAL MOTOR LOAD FEEDER BREAKER
PROJECT DRAWING 0-824-E143-002
NUMBER
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
ⅢN
SCALE
NONE
A
SHEET
1/1
REV.
1
2
1
A1 (841X594 mm)

F
A
B
C
8
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-824-E143-003
480V LC BUS
7
E
C
A
B
A
C
B
FU
3A
v
2-PT'S
480-120V
4 2
8 6
VS
3
5 7 1
FU
8A
6
UNDERVOLTAGE RLY
27-1
UNDERVOLTAGE RLY
27-2
4
20
19
3
4
18
17
3
16
TS-1
15
5
4
3
2
1
VOLTEMTER SWITCH DEVELOPMENT & ESCUTCHEON
VOLTMETER CONTACTS POSITION
B-C OFF A-B B-C C-A
A-B C-A
1 2 X
OFF
3 4 X
SW. (VS) 5 6 X X
4 POSITION
KNURLED HANDLE 7 8 X X
@ LOAD CENTER
F
8
2
8
74
4
74
E
D
C
TO RTM
BUS UNDERVOLTAGE
125V DC
POWER FAIL
XFMR TEMP INCOMING BREAKER
HIGH INOPERABLE
DWG:0-824-E143-001
27-1
27-1
11
12
CLOSES
BELOW
TAP
VALUE
CLOSES
11
BELOW
TAP
12
VALUE
7
3
74
6
5
49T
22 22
86
28 25
52
BA
A
B2
A
B2
D A
P09
D A
P10
A
K2A03
B
A
K2A02
B
A
K2A01
B
TO PCMS CABINET
FU
20A
FU
20A
FEEDER ELEC. PROTECTION
DWG:0-824-E143-002,004,006
22 22
86
28 25
52
BA
TO OTHER
CONTACTS FOR
MCC FEEDER BRKR OR
NON MOTOR LOAD
A
K2A04
B
D A
X16
R1
R2
B
MCCB 2P 100AF/20ATMCCB 2P 100AF/20AT
DISTRIBUTION (0-841-E-DP05)
NORMAL 125V DC CONT. POWERDISTRIBUTION PNL (0-841-E-DP05)BACK-UP 125V DC CONT. POWER
N10
D A
N09
D A
FU
20A
FU
20A
A
7
7
5
27-1
8
8
27-2
6
74
(DWG:0-824-E143-002)
MCCB 2P 100AF/20AT
125V DC CONT. POWER FOR FEEDER BRKRS125V DC CONT. POWER FOR FEEDER BRKRS
120VAC FOR MOTOR SPACE HETER
U16
TO EACH MOTOR FEEDER
8
7
6
5
4
3
SPARES
D
NOTES
1. SYMBOL DENOTES PULLED WIRE LOCATION.
2. EXTERNAL POWER & INTERNAL JUPMER CONNECTIONS
WILL BE SHOWN ON DWG(V/D)
REFERENCE DRAWINGS
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM : 0-824-E140-003
LOGIC DIAGRAM : 0-824-E158-001,002,003
L/C V/P : LATER
C
* PREPARE : 이창수, TEL : 054-421-7461
B
1
01/03/19
0
04/24/18
REV.
DATE
FINAL ISSUE
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
480V LOAD CENTER AUX. COMPARTMENT PART
A
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-824-E143-003
2
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
NⅢ
SCALE
NONE
1
SHEET
1/1
REV.
1
A1 (841X594 mm)

F
8
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-824-E143-004
A
B
C
480V LC BUS
E
52
OC/SC
LT
ST
7
6
P
FU
10A
(DWG : 0-824-E143-003)
125V DC SUPPLY AT 480V LC
CLOSE
5
4
3
TRIP
GROUND FAULT
INDICATION
3
4
CS
CLOSE
7
13
51G
26
24
86
T
TIME
INST
T
R
1
2
CS
TRIP
8
12
14
G
61
62
33
2
1
CONTROL SWITCH DEVELOPMENT & ESCUTCHEON
CS
BREAKER CONTROL
POSITION
TRIP
CLOSE
CONTACTS
DECK
3 POSITION SPRING
RETURN TO NORMAL
& PISTOL GRIP
HANDLE WITH TARGET
1
1
3
2
4
TRIPNORMALCLOSE
X
X
F
E
D
C
CT
300/5A
3
51G
4
A
B
A
C
TO MCC OR PACKAGE FDR
N
A1
A19
A3
CLOSE INT MECH.
DWG:0-824-E143-005
A2
A20
FU
10A
A7
A9
TRIP INT MECH.
DWG:0-824-E143-005
E8
G
F
86
86
C
B
86-1
32
86
38
22
25
52
TAS
A
A
TO ANN. CKT
DWG:0-824-E143-003
B
39
52
b
40
41
52
a
42
43
52
b
44
45
52
a
46
47
52
b
48
49
52
a
50
67
33 33
68 69
71
74
77
33 33
72 73
33 33
75 76
33 33
78 79
81
33 33
82 83
11
86
13
12
86
18
15
86
17
52 CONTACT SPARES
33 CONTACT SPARES
86 CONTACT SPARES
A
8
7
6
5
4
3
NOTES
1. SYMBOL DENOTES PULLED WIRE LOCATION.
2. CELL SWITCH 33 CONTACTS SHOWN WITH
BRKR IN OPERATING POSITION.
REFERENCE DWG
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM : 0-824-E140-003
L/C V/P : LATER
D
C
* PREPARE : 이창수, TEL : 054-421-7461
B
1
01/03/19
0
04/24/18
REV.
DATE
FINAL ISSUE
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
480V LOAD CENTER
MCC & PACKAGE FEEDER BREAKER
0-824-E143-004
2
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
ⅢN
SCALE
NONE
1
A
SHEET
1/1
REV.
1
A1 (841X594 mm)

8
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-824-E143-005
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
F
E
D
C
B
A
A1
A3
52
W
52
b
52
CC
52
W
52
Y
52
Y
52
Z
52
Z
A19
A7
A9
52
Y
MULTI PROTECTION
RELAY DETAIL
VENDOR DWG PNS NO.
: LATER
52
a
52
b
1
52
M
2
52
W
1
2
52
TC
F
LEGEND
52
: CUT OFF SWITCH. CLOSED WHEN CLOSING SPRING IS FULLY CHARGED.
Z
52
: CUT OFF SWITCH. OPEN WHEN CLOSING SPRING IS FULLY CHARGED.
Y
52
: CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIP ALARM SWITCH. OPERATED WHEN BREAKER IS
TAS
TRIPPED BY ANY MEANS OTHER THAN SHUNT OR MANUAL TRIP.
52
: DRAWOUT AUX SWITCH CONTACT. CLOSED WHEN BREAKER IS CLOSED.
a
52
: DRAWOUT AUX SWITCH CONTACT. CLOSED WHEN BREAKER IS OPEN.
b
52
: SHUNT TRIP COIL.
TC
52
: CLOSING SPRING CHARGING MOTOR.
M
52
: CLOSING RELAY.
CC
52
: ANTI PUMP RELAY.
W
MOC : MECHANICAL OPERATED CONTACT
TOC : TRUCK OPERATED CONTACT, CELL SWITCH
NOTES
1. THE SHOWN CONTACT STATUS ARE FOR BREAKER IN OPERATING POSITION.
E
D
A2
A20
A8
REFERENCE DWG
L/C V/P : LATER
MOC
22
25
26
52
TAS
27
52
TAS
31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49
52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52
b a b a b a b a b a
32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50
TRIP ALARM
SWITCH
AUX. SWITCH CONTACTS
TOC
CONTACT DEVELOPMENT
BREAKER AUX. SWITCH
MOC SWITCH
TOC SWITCH
ACB
POSITION
MAIN
CONTACT
52
a
52
b
52
a
52
b
33
33
OPERATING CLOSE
POSITION OPEN
TEST CLOSE
POSITION OPEN
WITHDRAWN POSITION
"O" : CONTACT OPEN
"X" : CONTACT CLOSE
O
X
O
X
X
O
X
O
O
X
O
X
X
O
X
O
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
61
64
67
81
84
33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33
62 63 65 66 68 69 82 83 85 86
71
74
77
91
94
33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33
72 73 75 76 78 79 92 93 95 96
OPERATED AT TEST POSITION ONLY
OPERATED AT THE CONNECTED POSITION ONLY
8
7
6
5
4
3
C
* PREPARE : 이창수, TEL : 054-421-7461
B
1
01/03/19
0
04/24/18
REV.
DATE
FINAL ISSUE
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
480V LOAD CENTER
BREAKER INTERNAL MECHANISM
0-824-E143-005
2
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
ⅢN
SCALE
NONE
1
A
SHEET
1/1
REV.
1
A1 (841X594 mm)

F
8
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-824-E143-006
A
B
C
480V LC BUS
E
52
OC/SC
LT
ST
7
P
6
5
FU
10A
CLOSE
FU
3A
A
P11
TO PCMS CAB
TRIP
4
GROUND FAULT
INDICATION
3
(DWG : 0-824-E143-003)
125V DC SUPPLY AT 480V LC
7
13
51G
26
24
86
TO PCMS CAB.
3
4
CS 1
CLOSE A
11
A
11
B1
11
25P
14
B1
1
A
1
2
CS
TRIP
TO PCMS CAB
61
33 2
62
A
T
TIME
8
12
INST
T
R
14
G
D
C
CT
300/5A
3
51G
4
A
B
A
C
TO MCC OR PACKAGE FDR
N
FU
10A
A1
A19
A3
A7
A9
G
F
86
86
CLOSE INT MECH. TRIP INT MECH.
DWG:0-824-E143-005 DWG:0-824-E143-005
C
86-1
A2 A20 E8
B
N11 TO PCMS CAB
FU A
3A
SEE D/G V.P:
M264-DE-B01-31
1 3
VOID2 HSS-402LOCAL 4 HSS-402LOCAL
32
86
38
22
25
52
TAS
A
A
3
4
HS-
402N02
CLOSE
1
2
HS-
402N02
TRIP
B1
31
B2
B1
41
B2
B1
51
B2
SEE D/G V.P:
M264-DE-B01-31
9
10
HSS-402
MCR
B1
61
B2
B1
71
B2
SEE D/G V.P:
M264-DE-B01-28
9
10
SS-402
SYNCHRO
ON
B1
81
B2
B1
91
B2
TO ANN. CKT
DWG:0-824-E143-003
TO CCS CAB.(FROM NON 1E D/G SYNCHRO PNL)
B
A
39
52
b
40
41
52
a
42
43
52
b
44
45
52
a
46
47
52
b
48
49
52
a
50
67
33 33
68 69
71
74
77
33 33
72 73
33 33
75 76
33 33
78 79
81
33 33
82 83
11
86
13
12
86
18
15
86
17
52 CONTACT SPARES
33 CONTACT SPARES
86 CONTACT SPARES
LOCATION DESCRIPTION
A LOAD CENTER
B1 D/G B2
PCMS CABINET
SYNCHRO PANEL
0-824-LC03-C2
0-592-J-LP01-C
LATER
HS NO.
HS-402N01
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CONTROL SWITCH CONTACT
DEVELOPMENT & ESCUTCHEON
G
R
TRIP
CLOSE
CONTACTS
POSITION
HS-402N02
3-POSITION
SPRING RETURN
TO CENTER
WITH TARGET
@ D/G LP01-C
1
3
2
4
TRIPNORMALCLOSE
X
X
TRANSFER SWITCH CONTACTS
DEVELOPMENT & ESCUTCHEON
LOCAL
MCR
HSS-402
2-POSITION
MAINTAINED
@ D/G LP01-C
CONTACTS
POSITION
LOCAL
MCR
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
CONTROL SWITCH CONTACT
DEVELOPMENT & ESCUTCHEON
OFF
SYNC
SS-402
2-POSITION
MAINTAINED SW.
WITH REMOVABLE
HANDLE(SYNC.SW)
@ D/G LP01-C
CONTACTS
POSITION
OFF
SYNC
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
F
E
D
NOTES
1. SYMBOL DENOTES PULLED WIRE LOCATION.
2. CELL SWITCH 33 CONTACTS SHOWN WITH
BRKR IN OPERATING POSITION.
REFERENCE DRAWINGS
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM : 0-824-E140-002
LOGIC DIAGRAM : 0-824-E158-002
D/G V/P : M264-DE-B01-01~33
L/C V/P : E208-DE-C01-03
C
* PREPARE : 이창수, TEL : 054-421-7461
B
0
01/03/19
REV.
DATE
VOIDED
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
480V LOAD CENTER
MCC & PACKAGE INCOMING FEEDER BREAKER (MC08)
SHEET
PROJECT DRAWING 0-824-E143-006
NUMBER 1/1
JOB NO. RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY SCALE REV.
11G79 ⅡN/Ⅲ NONE 0
A
2
1
A1 (841X594 mm)

8
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-826-E143-001
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
F
A
SCHEME #1
NON-50GS LOAD FEEDER
480V MCC BUS
A
SCHEME #2
50GS LOAD FEEDER
480V MCC BUS
B
C
B
C
A
B
C
E
52
52
SCHEME #3
VOLTAGE MONITORING
480V MCC BUS
1A
480-120V 1A
1A
D
7
8
INCOMING
27-1
27-2
R
UNDERVOLTAGE
1A
Tb1
27-1
Tc2
Tb1
27-2
Tc2
A1
27X
A2
VS
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
V1
V
V2
0-600V
1
F
E
D
C
B
A
A
B
A
C
C
NON-MOTOR LOAD
& PACKAGE TYPE
MOTOR LOAD
A
B
C
SCHEME #5
50GS CIRCUIT
480V MCC BUS
A
B
A
C
C
NON-MOTOR LOAD
& PACKAGE TYPE
MOTOR LOAD
COMMON ALARM
50GS CONTROL BUS
POWER FAIL UNDERVOLATAGE
EACH NON-MOTOR FEEDER
BREAKER TRIP
EACH MOTOR FEEDER
BREAKER TRIP OR
CONTROL POWER FAIL
A B
K1A01
21
22
74
21
22
(NOTE 3)
27X
7
8
52
ALT
MCC INTERNAL
JUMPER TO
OTHER FDR´S
BREAKER TRIP
ALARM SWITCH
10
11
52
a
31
74
32
7
8
52
ALT
MCC INTERNAL
JUMPER TO
OTHER FDR´S
SAME ALARM
SCHEME #5
SCHEME #3
SCHEME #1,2
FROM EACH MOTOR FEEFER
SCHEMATIC DWG
A B
K01P
52*
(NOTE 3)
3A
EACH NON-MOTOR
(50GS) FEEDER
EACH NON-MOTOR
(50GS) FEEDER
480-120V
1
RESET
2
A1 1
74
A2 2
50GS
6
4
50GS
1
RESET
2
1
50GS
2
6
4
50GS
3
Y
5
50GS/
RESET
52
SHT
3
Y
5
50GS/
RESET
52
SHT
SCHEME #3
13
14
31
27X
32
43
27X
44
27X
TO OTHER FDR'S 50GS CIRCUITSPARE
SCHEME #5
13
14
74
31
32
43
74
44
74
SPARE
8
7
6
5
4
SCHEME #1
TO PCMS CAB.
FOR MCC
TROUBLE
ALARM
10
11
52
a
SPARE
SCHEME #2
LOCATION DESCRIPTION
1
RESET
2
1
50GS
2
6
4
50GS
3
Y
5
50GS/
RESET
52
SHT
C LOAD
10
11
52
a
NOTES
1. SYMBOL DENOTES PULLED WIRE LOCATION.
2. THIS BRKR IS PROVIDED FOR SHUNT TRIP 120V AC
CONTROL CIRCUIT OF LOADS WITH 50GS RELAY.
3. THESE CONTACTS ARE PROVIDED FOR TROUBLE
ALARM OF SHUNT TRIP 120V AC CONTROL CIRCUIT.
SPARE
REFERENCE DWGS
LOGIC DIAGRAM : 0-824-E-158-002,
0-826-E-158-001
* PREPARE : 이창수, TEL : 054-421-7461
C
LOCATION DESCRIPTION
A MCC
0-826-E-MC07
0-826-E-MC08
0-826-E-MC09
B PCMS CAB
CAB NO WIRE NO
0-771-J-LATER K1A01P, K01P
0-771-J-LATER K1A02P, K01P
0-771-J-LATER K1A03P, K01P
VOLTMETER SWITCH DEVELOPMENT & ESCUTCHEON
CONTACTS OFF AB BC CA
BC
AB CA 1 2 X
OFF 3 4 X
5 6 X X
VS 7 8 X X
3
B
1
07/17/24
0
04/24/18
REV.
DATE
FINAL ISSUE
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
TYPICAL SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
480V MCC
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-826-E143-001
2
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
ⅡN/Ⅲ
SCALE
NONE
1
A
SHEET
1/1
REV.
1
A1 (841X594 mm)

A
F
B
C
8
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-826-E143-002
480V MC08 BUS
OC/SC
LT
ST
52
E
A
A
B1
B
C
CT
D
CT
C
T1
T4
T2
T5
T3
T6
0-592-M-DG01
100KW
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
P
FU
10A
125V DC SUPPLY AT LC(DWG : 0-826-E143-001)
FU
3A
CLOSE
A
P11
TO PCMS CAB.
TRIP
ELECTRICAL
PROTECTION
61
62
33
A
B1
B4
3
4
TS
CLOSE
TO PCMS CAB.
1
A
11
A
11
B1
11 25M
DWG : 0-824-
14 E142-001
B1
1
A
1
2
TS
TRIP
43
86X
44
D/G TROUBLE
TO PCMS CAB
2
A
B4
2
A
INDICATION
R
G
HAND SWITCH CONTACTS
DEVELOPMENT & ESCUTCHEON
SELECTOR SWITCH CONTACT
DEVELOPMENT & ESCUTCHEON
G
R
TRIP
CLOSE
HS-400N02
3-POSITION
SPRING RETURN
TO CENTER
WITH TARGET
@ D/G LP01-C
POSITION
CONTACTS
OFF
SYNC
1
3
2
4
TRIPNORMALCLOSE SS-400
X 2-POSITION
MAINTAINED SW.
X WITH REMOVABLE
HANDLE (SYNC. SW)
@D/G LP01-C
CONTACTS
POSITION
OFF
SYNC
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
TRANSFER SWITCH CONTACTS
DEVELOPMENT & ESCUTCHEON
LOCAL
MCR
HSS-400N01
2-POSITION
MAINTAINED
@ D/G LP01-C
CONTACTS
POSITION
LOCAL
MCR
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A1
A19
A3
A7
A9
N
FU
10A
CLOSE INT MECH.
DWG : 0-824-E143-005
A2
A20
FU
3A
N11
A
TO PCMS CAB
SEE D/G V.P:
M264-DE-B01-30
SEE D/G V.P:
M264-DE-B01-30
TRIP INT MECH.
DWG : 0-824-E143-005
A8
VOID
SEE D/G V.P:
M264-DE-B01-30
SEE D/G V.P:
M264-DE-B01-28
SEE D/G V.P:
M264-DE-B01-23
SEE D/G V.P:
M264-DE-B01-12
SEE DWG : LATER (SUPPLIER DWG)
3 HSS- 1
400N02
MANUAL
4 2
HSS-
400N02
AUTO
3
4
HS-
1
400N02
CLOSE
2
HS-
400N02
TRIP
1
2
HSS-
9
400N01
LOCAL
10
HS-
400N01
MCR
9
SS-400
SYNCHRO
10
ON
13 D/G RATED
84TX VOLTAGE AND
14 FREQUENCY
43 D/G
5EX1 EMERGENCY
12 STOP
B1
111
B2
B1
121
B2
B1
131
B2
B1
31
B2
B1
41
B2
B1
51
B2
B1
61
B2
B1
71
B2
B1
81
B2
B1
91
B2
B1
101
B2
B3
VF1
B2
B3
VF2
B2
B4
DGET1
B2
B4
DGET2
B2
TEST SWITCH DEVELOPMENT & ESCUTCHEON
TS
BREAKER CONTROL POSITION
TRIP
CLOSE
CONTACTS
DECK
3 POSITION SPRING
RETURN TO NORMAL
& PISTOL GRIP
HANDLE WITH TARGET
@ LOAD CENTER
1
1
3
2
4
TRIPNORMALCLOSE
X
X
CT
TO PCMS CAB.(FROM D/G LOCAL CONTROL PANEL)
* PREPARE : 이창수, TEL : 054-421-7461
F
E
D
C
B
CT
A
8
37
38
52
a
A
3A
B2
A
3C
B2
TO PCMS CAB. FOR
MONITOR LIGHT
33
34
64
52
a
65
22
33
25
52
BA
A
3C
B2
A
3A
B2
A
3T
B2
A
3L
B2
TO PCMS CAB.
39
52
b
40
41 43 45 47 49
52 52 52 52 52
a b a b a
42 44 46 48 50
52 CONTACT SPARES
7
6
67
71
74
77
81
33 33 33 33
68 69 72 73
33 33 33 33
75 76 78 79
33 33
82 83
33 CONTACT SPARES
5
4
LOCATION DESCRIPTION
A MOTOR CONTROL CENTER 0-826-E-MC08-AA
B1 D/G SYNCHRO PNL (0-592-J-LP01-C)
B2 PCMS CAB. (0-752-J-PA01-02)
B3 D/G GEN. CONT PNL (0-592-J-LP01-B)
B4 D/G ENG. CONT PNL (0-592-J-LP01-A)
NOTES
1. SYMBOL DENOTES PULLED WIRE LOCATION.
2. CELL SWITCH 33 CONTACTS SHOWN WITH
BRKR IN OPERATING POSITION.
REFERENCE DWG
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM : 0-826-E140-008
LOGIC DIAGRAM : 0-826-E158-002
D/G V/P : M264-DE-B01-01~31
3
B
1
01/03/19
0
04/24/18
REV.
DATE
VOIDED
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
DIESEL GENERATOR MAIN BREAKER
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
0-826-E143-002
2
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
ⅡN/Ⅲ
SCALE
NONE
1
A
SHEET
1/1
REV.
1
A1 (841X594 mm)

F
E
8
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
0-841-E143-001
UNDERVOLTAGE
7
GROUND FAULT & RECORDER
6
INDICATION
5
27
(-)
6
R2
R1
NGV
27
(+)
5
298KΩ
1KΩ
PB-P
64R
V (+)
L
N
V (-)
G
298KΩ
PB-N
4
GS
3
GROUND
GRID
7
8
GS
64R
1 COM1
64R
2 COM2
Y
2
0~150V
+ -
V
VS
10
3
11
1
9
13
5
7
15
DETAIL "A"
B1 B1
VP VN
A A
4~20mA
18 V 20
(+) XDCR (-)
(+) (-)
17 15 6 8
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
SPARE
4
3
BATTERY CHARGER
FROM 480V MCC
0-826-E-MC08
DWG: 0-826-E140-008
E
A
C1
E
B
C1
E
C
C1
BATTERY
CHARGER
0-841-E-BC05
C1
CP
A
C1
CN
A
BATTERY
TEST PNL
BATTERY
BATTERY
TEST PNL
0-841-E-ZE05
D D
TP TN
A A
72-2
0-841-E-BT05
125V DC
BATTERY
C
BP
A
C
BN
A
(+)
SHUNT
100A
100mV
A
6
8
(-)
-100-0-100A
(+)
18
A
XDCR
20
17 15 (-)
2
INDICATION
1
A B1
AP
4~12~20mA
A B1
AN
PCMS LOOP
CONTROLLER
CAB.
F.O.C
B
A
(INFORMATION FPD)
DC-II-001
-100-0-100A
F
E
5A
D
125V DC
DIST.
PANEL
(+)
(-)
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
FU
150A
FU
150A
125V DC DIST. PANEL 0-841-E-DP05 BUS 100A 10KA
C
B1
K1A03
A
3
4
27
B1
K1A01
A
4
COM 4
3
64R
COM 3
64R
B1
K1A04
A
NO NO 17
FU(P) FU(N)
COM COM 18
72-1
b
A
K26A
B1
BUS
UNDER VOLTAGE
A
K26A
B1
BUS GROUND
A
K26A
B1
BATTERY 0-BT05 FDR
BKR OPEN/FUSE FAIL
B1
K1A02
C1
BATT.
CHARGER
0-BC05
TROUBLE
C1
K26A
B1
B1
K1A05
A
NO
COM
NO
FU(P)
COM
FU(N)
B1
K2B01
A
23
24
72-2
a
A
K26A
B1
BATT. CHARGER 0-BC05
INCOMING FUSE FAIL
A
K26B
B1
BATT. TEST PNL
FDR BKR CLOSED
TO PCMS LOOP CONTROLLER CAB.
TO PCMS LOOP CONTROLLER CAB.
72-1
FU
100A
(NOTE3)
120V AC
FU
100A EXT. POWER
0-842-E-UP05
DWG: 0-842-E140-001
B
DC-EI-001
0~150V
V
(INFORMATION FPD)
F.O.C
PCMS LOOP
CONTROLLER CAB.
DETAIL "A"
B
23
24
25
72-1
a
26
27
72-1
b
28
29
72-1
a
30
31
72-1
b
32
72-1
a
17
18
25
72-2
b
26
27
72-2
b
28
29
72-2
a
30
31
72-2
b
32
72-2
a
10
11
72-2
TAS
12
72-2
TAS
(NOTE2)
SPARES
SPARES
A
CONTROL SWITCH DEVELOPMENTS
OFF
ON
DEV. GS
CONTACTS
POSITIONS
HANDLE END
MAINTAINED
OFF
1
3
2
4
X
5
7
6
8
X
ON
X
X
1
2
3
OFF
4
DEV. VS
CONTACTS
HANDLE END
MAINTAINED
1
1=BATTERY
2=MAIN BUS 3
3=BATTERY CHARGER 5
4=SPARE POSITION
7
9
11
2
4
6
8
10
12
13
15
14
16
POSITIONS
1
OFF
X
2
3
X
X
X
X
X
4
X
X
8
7
6
5
4
3
LOCATION DESCRIPTION
A 125V DIST. PANEL (0-841-E-DP05)
B OPERATION CONSOLE (PM-OC)
B1 PCMS LOOP CONTROLLER CAB. (LATER)
C 125V DC BATTERY (0-841-E-BT05)
C1 BATTERY CHARGER (0-841-E-BC05)
D BATTERY TEST PNL (0-841-E-ZE05)
E 480V MCC NO. (0-826-E-MC08)
NOTES
1. SYMBOL DENOTES PULLED WIRE LOCATION.
2. TAS : TRIP ALARM SWITCH
3. BREAKER IS NON-ANUTOMATIC AND SHALL HAVE
NO TRIP ELEMENT.
REFERENCE DWG
S/L DIAGRAM : 0-841-E140-001
LOGIC DIAGRAM : 0-841-E158-001
V/P : LATER (E216)
D
C
B
0
05/29/18
REV.
DATE
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/STORAGE BLDG
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
125V DC DIST. PANEL
0-841-E-DP05 METERING & RELAYING
PROJECT DRAWING 0-841-E143-001
NUMBER
2
JOB NO.
11G79
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
ⅡN
SCALE
NONE
1
A
SHEET
1/1
REV.
0
A1 (841X594 mm)

F
E
D
C
B
A
DGN.
11M
626A
2
8
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
1-822-Y138-001
7
6
5
4
3
6.9kV SWGR 1-822-SW01-A2 SUBSTATION BLDG
P11-WBK
A2
5
P
FU2
4A
2
FU1
10A
1
1
2
2
DJ
A 8N
01
R
C L
18220210
P1-BK
2-WH
2-WH
1-BK
3
4
2
1
1
186N
13
11
3C-GR
3A-RD
3T-BL
3L-OR
9
10
11
12
152
a
M31 M30
133
T51 T50
186N
14 16
R
G
W
S

T
A

Y
L
PP
U
S

C
D

V
125
N11-RBK
6
N
FU
10A
1
FU
4A
2
2
1
1822C01AJC
1214LRN8
CLOSE
TRIP
INDICATION
T30
133
T31
3
4
CS
CLOSE
7
8
CS
CLOSE
1
REF 541
X4.1
1
CS
TRIP
2
12
18
186U
5
6
CS
TRIP
1
P.S
2
X4.1
M52
M53
M26
52
a
M27
52
b
22
186N
28
T52
133
T53
M1
M2
86
133
X5.2
3
TRIP
4
X5.2
1
2
X5.1
4
7
5
X5.1
8
11
R
G
12
A
6.9KV 2000A BUS
B
C
CT
6000/5A
C400
152
2000AF
STB1
1C5
1C6
1C7
25-BK
27-WH
29-RD
1C8
20-GR
54
55
152
b
A1
A3
A5
6.9kV SWGR BRKR INTERNAL MECHANISM
V/P : E207A-DE-C01-02
A2
A4
A6
TS-CT
STB2
G
186N
LOR
11 1 4
7
B
REF 541
V/P : E207A-DE-C01-01
8 7
2 1
4 3
6 5
1C4
1C1
1C2
1C3
SWGR PT CUBICLE 1-822-E-SW01-A1
19
22
21
24
25
27
TS-PT1
2 1
4 3
6 5
FU1
10A
2-PTS
120V-7200V
1F
A
A
B
C
B
C
CT
2000/5A
C400
S.A.
A2 19 20
1822C01AJA
0210LRN8
K
B -
1
M
H
W -
2
M
186N
15 17
A2
7
8
1822C01AJB
0210LRN8
K
B -
1U
H
W -
2U
7
125M
8
(+)
13
(-)
14
(-)
12
(+)
11
A2 16
17
18
A2 15
14
13
K
B -
P
V
1822C01ASB
0216LRP8
H
W -
VN
H
W -
AN
K
B -
P
A
1822C01ASA
0216LRP8
BUSBAR A B
C
1822C03ABA
0199MRS8
1822C03ABB
0199MRS8
1-BK
2-WH
3A-RD
3C-GR
3L-OR
3T-BL
P11-WBK
N11-RBK
2F2
12a
14
1
6
5
3
11a
12b
2F2
7
8
2F2
9
10
V/P : J212-DE-E20-40 (SH.14)
1F1 1
2
S
1F1 4
3
S
V/P:J212-DG-F015-40(SH.6)
K
B-
A
K
B -
B
K
B-
C
FROM POWER XFMR
1-881-E-TR01
DWG : 1-881-Y138-001
PCMS : 1-771-J-RX04-02
PCMS:1-771-J-RX04-01
NOTE
1. CELL SWITCH 33 CONTACTS SHOWN WITH BRKR
IN OPERATING POSITION.
CONTROL SWITCH DEVELOPMENT & ESCUTCHEON
CS
BREAKER CONTROL
TRIP
CLOSE
3-POSITION SPRING
RETURN TO NORMAL
& PISTOL GRIP
HANDLE
TYPE: YSNC3205
@SWGR
CONTACTS
POSITION
L
A E
PI M R S O
R L
T NO C
1
2
X
3
5
7
4
6
X
8
X
X
REFERENCE DRAWINGS
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
CABLE BLOCK DIAGRAM
VENDOR PRINT
1-822-E140-001
1-822-E158-001
1-822-E158-002
1-822-E158-004
1-822-E143-001
1-822-E143-002
1-822-E141-001
1-822-E141-003
E207A-DE-C01-02
E207A-DE-C01-03
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1822C01AJE
0408LRS8
2
1-752-E-PA01-02
RELAY & METERING PNL
25-BK
27-WH
29-RD
20-GR
T3
13
14
15
16
V/P:E222-DE-D01-05
P1-BK
2-WH
T6
11
12
F
E
D
C
B
AS-BUILT(CLIENT'S LOGO
2 06/10/14
CHANGE)
1 04/01/11
AS-BUILT
0 12/15/09 ISSUE FOR CONSTRUCTION
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM(NB)
6.9kV SWGR NORMAL FEED BRKR FROM POWER XFMR
1-822-E-SW01-A2
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
1-822-Y138-001
SHEET
1/1
JOB NO.
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
SCALE
REV.
2A626
III
NONE
2
A
2
1
A1 (841X594 mm)

F
E
D
C
8
PROJECT DRAWING NUMBER
1-822-Y138-002
7
6
6.9KV SWGR 1-822-E-SW01-F1
125V DC DIST. PANEL(NORMAL)
1-841-E-DP04-01
C
D

V
125
CB1
60A
P01-BK
N01-WH
1822C03CEA
0306LRN8
F1
P01
N01
FU3
30A
1
2
FU4
1
2
FU5
2A
R1
R2
A1
174
GMR-8D
A2
125V DC DIST. PANEL(ALTERNATE)
1-841-E-DP04-13
C
A

V
120
CB13
60A
P02-BK
N02-WH
1822C03CEB
0306LRN8
F1
P02
N02
120V AC DIST. PANEL
1-826-E-MC07-C2
CB12
20A

C
A

V
120
X12-BK
U12-WH
1822C03EJA
0210LRN8
F1
1
CB
30A
2
FU4
3
FU3
30A
4
3
4
TO SPACE HTR
V/P:E207A-DE-C01-06
FU5
2A
5
4
3
2
6.9KV SWGR 1-822-E-SW01-A1 SUBSTATION BLDG
V/P : E207A-DE-C01-05
1-822-E-SW01-A1
127B-1
ITE-27
7
127B-2
ITE-27
7
8
8
S
R
K
BR

R
O
F

R
E
W
O
P

L
O
R
T
ON
C

C
D

V
125
A
B
C
6.9KV SWGR
A
C
A
B
C
B
1E
2-PTS
7200-120V
127B-1
127B-2
UVR 27 UVR 27
UNDER VOLTAGE UNDER VOLTAGE
RELAY RELAY
3
4
3
4
TS-PT3
1
2
3
4
5
6
XDCR
V
1
15
3
17
(+) (-)
18 20
1
2
3 4
1 3 7 5
VS
2 4 8 6
V
0~9KV
120V AC IP PANEL
1-842-E-UP03-12
C
A

V
120
FU12
25A
X12-BK
U12-WH
1822C03DJA
0210LRN8
A1
HX
CB
10A
NX
1
2
127B-1
127B-1
12
CLOSE
ABOVE
SETTING
VALUE
11
12
CLOSE
ABOVE
SETTING
VALUE
11
174
21 22
127B-1
127B-2
14
CLOSE
BELOW
SETTING
VALUE
15
14
CLOSE
BELOW
SETTING
VALUE
15
A1 1 2 A1 5
6
1822C02JJA
0214LRN8
K
B-
A
27
D
R -
B
27
K
B-
A
74
1822C02JJD
0214LRN8
H
W -
B
74
A1 3 4
K
B-
A2
B
1822C02JJB
0214LRN8
H
W-
BC
1R1 7
8
19
20
1R1 9
10
3
4
A1 15
16
1822C02LSA
0216LRP8
K
B -
P
V
H
W -
VN
1F1 9
10
1
F
E
D
C
B
A
DGN.
11M
626A
2
8
7
6
V/P:J212-DE-E20-40 (SH.5)
PCMS:1-771-J-RX04-01
VOLTMETER SWITCH DEVELOPMENT & ESCUTCHEON
VOLTMETER
B-C
CONTACTS
A-B C-A
POSITION
OFF A-B B-C C-A
OFF
VM. SW (VS)
4-POSITION
KNURLED HANDLE
TYPE: YSNC4210
@SWGR
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
X
X
X
X
X
X
NOTE
1. CELL SWITCH 33 CONTACTS SHOWN WITH BRKR
IN OPERATING POSITION.
REFERENCE DRAWINGS
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
CABLE BLOCK DIAGRAM
VENDOR PRINT
1-822-E140-001
1-822-E140-002
1-822-E158-001
1-822-E158-002
1-822-E158-004
1-822-E143-001
1-822-E143-002
1-822-E143-002
1-822-E141-003
E207A-DE-C01-02
E207A-DE-C01-03
E207A-DE-C01-05
E207A-DE-C01-06
5
4
3
B
AS-BUILT(CLIENT'S LOGO
2 06/10/14
CHANGE)
1 04/01/11
AS-BUILT
0 12/15/09 ISSUE FOR CONSTRUCTION
REV. DATE
DESCRIPTION
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM(NB)
6.9kV SWGR PT CUBICLE
1-822-E-SW01-A1,F1
PROJECT DRAWING
NUMBER
1-822-Y138-002
JOB NO.
2A626
RADWASTE SAFETY CATEGORY
III
SCALE
NONE
A
SHEET
1/1
REV.
2
2
1
A1 (841X594 mm)

ATTACHMENT 4-8 Spec. No. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
BUILDING STRUCTURE MOUNTING DESIGN AND LOAD SUMMARY FORM
TABLE I – STRENGTH LIMITS FOR WELDING TO BUILDING STRUCTURE
Plant
Operating
Condition
Strength Limits
Loading Combination
Normal
(1.24)) Dead Loads
+ (1.6) Pressure Loads
+ (1.2) Thermal Expansion Loads5)
+ (1.6) Equip. Operation Loads2)
+ (1.2) Nozzle Loads
KDS 14 31 25 Section 4.1.2
(AISC 360-16 Section J2)
Upset
(1.24)) Dead Loads
+ (1.0) Pressure Loads
+ (1.0) Equip. Operation Loads2)
+ (1.0) Upset Condition Dynamic Loads3)
+ (1.2) Nozzle Loads
KDS 14 31 25 Section 4.1.2
(AISC 360-16 Section J2)
* BUILDING STRUCTURE REFERS TO A/E DESIGNED COMPONENT (REFER TO SKETCH 1(a))
TABLE II – STRENGTH LIMITS FOR BOLTING TO STEEL BUILDING STRUCTURE *
Plant
Operating
Condition
Normal
Loading Combination Strength Limits
(1.24)) Dead Loads
+ (1.6) Pressure Loads
+ (1.2) Thermal Expansion Loads5)
+ (1.6) Equip. Operation Loads2)
+ (1.2) Nozzle Loads
KDS 14 31 25 Section 4.1.3
(AISC 360-16 Section J3)
Upset
(1.24)) Dead Loads
+ (1.0) Pressure Loads
2) KDS 14 31 25 Section 4.1.3
+ (1.0) Equip. Operation Loads
3) (AISC 360-16 Section J3)
+ (1.0) Upset Condition Dynamic Loads
+ (1.2) Nozzle Loads
* BUILDING STRUCTURE REFERS TO A/E DESIGNED COMPONENT (REFER TO SKETCH 1(b))
4-8-1

ATTACHMENT 4-8 Spec. No. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
BUILDING STRUCTURE MOUNTING DESIGN AND LOAD SUMMARY FORM
TABLE III – STRENGTH LIMITS FOR ANCHORING TO BUILDING STRUCTURE *
Plant
Strength Limits per KDS 14 20 54 : 2021
Operating Loading Combination
(ACI 318-19 Chapter 17)
Condition
Test Tensile Strength
(If Required)
(1.24)) Dead Loads
where, shall not be taken greater than
+ (1.2) Field Test Pressure
Loads and 125,000 psi (860Mpa).
+ (1.2) Thermal Expansion
Loads5) Shear Strength
+ (1.6) Equip. Operation
Loads2)
where, shall not be taken greater than
+ (1.2) Nozzle Loads
and 125,000 psi (860Mpa).
Normal
Tension / Shear Interaction
(1.24)) Dead Loads
+ (1.6) Pressure Loads
+ (1.2) Thermal Expansion
Loads5)
+ (1.6) Equip. Operation
Loads2)
+ (1.2) Nozzle Loads
where,
Note)
The tensile & shear effective cross-sectional area for
anchor shall be taken as
Upset
(1.24)) Dead Loads
+ (1.0) Pressure Loads
+ (1.0) Equip. Operation
Loads2)
+ (1.0) Upset Condition
Dynamic
Loads3)
+ (1.2) Nozzle Loads
where,
: Outside diameter of anchor
: Number of threads per inch
Minimum center-to-center spacing
For untorqued anchors : 4da
For torqued anchors : 6da
Maximum anchor diameter
Anchor diameter(da) ≤ 2 in.
where,
: Outside diameter of anchor
If the concrete strength of the equipment foundation,
as designed by A/E, does not meet the anchor bolt
ductile failure requirements of KDS 14 20 54 (ACI
318-19 Chapter 17), Vendor shall modify anchor bolt
details including bolt diameter, number of bolt, bolt
material and bolt arrangement as recommended by
A/E
See KDS 14 20 54(ACI 318-19 Chapter 17) for
nomenclatures shown on this table.
* BUILDING STRUCTURE REFERS TO A/E DESIGNED COMPONENT (REFER TO SKETCH 1(c))
4-8-2

ATTACHMENT 4-8 Spec. No. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
BUILDING STRUCTURE MOUNTING DESIGN AND LOAD SUMMARY FORM
Notes :
1) For seismic category III equipment anchor bolt design in seismic
category I or II building structures, the anchor bolt can be designed
in accordance with KEPIC SNC 2005(ACI 349-01, Appendix B)
2) Equipment operation loads include but are not limited to :
a) Motor start-up and running torque
b) Valve seating torque and/or thrust
c) Thrust load on fans and pumps
3) Upset condition dynamic loads include:
a) Seismic load per KDS 41 17 00 (Seismic Building Design
Code). The seismic load shall be determined in accordance
with the following coefficients.
S(EPA) = 0.22g, SDS = 0.535, Ip = 1.5
The vertical seismic load shall be considered simultaneously
with the gravity load. For anchoring to concrete, the seismic
load shall be multiplied by overstrength factor( ).
b) Wind load per KDS 41 12 00 (Building Structure Code -
Design Load). The wind load is only considered when
equipment is installed outside of building and shall not be
considered occurring simultaneously with above mentioned
seismic loads. The load factor for wind load shall be 1.3
instead of 1.0 in Table III load combination.
c) Postulated dynamic loads as identified in the Purchase
Specification.
4) When calculating the vertical loads induced from the gravity of the
floor-mounted equipment, the load factor of the dead load shall be
0.9 instead of 1.2.
5) Thermal expansion load shall be considered only if the thermal
expansion of equipment affects the support system.
4-8-3

ATTACHMENT 4-8 Spec. No. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
BUILDING STRUCTURE MOUNTING DESIGN AND LOAD SUMMARY FORM
SKETCH 1 – TYPICAL EXAMPLES OF EQUIPMENT ATTACHMENTS TO BUILDING STRUCTURES
4-8-4

ATTACHMENT 4-8 Spec. No. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
BUILDING STRUCTURE MOUNTING DESIGN AND LOAD SUMMARY FORM
BUILDING STRUCTURE LOAD SUMMARY FORM
(Seismic Category III Equipment Foundation)
Client: Prepared by : Date :
Project : Project No. : Reviewed by : Date :
Equip. Name : Approved by : Date :
Equip. No. : Building Elevation :
Building Location : Drawing No. :
Forces (kips) Moments (ft-kips)
Building Structure Loads
FX FY FZ MX MY MZ
Dead Loads
Field Test Pressure Loads
Pressure Loads
Thermal Expansion Loads
Equipment Operation Loads
Nozzle Loads
Upset
Seismic Load
Condition
Dynamic
Wind Load
Loads
Foundation Plan Sketch1), 2) +X
(If necessary, use the accompanying paper.) +Y is up.
+Z
Note 1) The above building structure loads are the resultant directional forces and moments
at the geometric center of the foundation bolt group or weld group and
UNFACTORED LOADS. INDICATE THE GEOMETRIC CENTER OF THE
FOUNDATION BOLT GROUP OR WELD GROUP ON THE FOUNDATION
PLAN SKETCH.
2) Global axes X, Y & Z are mutually perpendicular at the equipment foundation,
where axis Y coincides with the vertical direction.
3) The resultant directional moments are a summation of applicable local moments
and transferred local force contributions.
4) The field test pressure loads, pressure loads, thermal expansion loads, equipment
operation loads, and upset condition dynamic loads shall NOT include the dead
loads.
4-8-5 (Final)

ATTACHMENT 4-9 Spec. No. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
Cabinet, Console , Server & Misc. List
Item No. Qty Model Description
1.0 Equipment and Materials
1.01 Remote System Cabinet
1.01.a 0-771-J-RX01
LATER
1.02 Quadruplex Fiber Optic Cables with Connector
LATER
1.03 Engineering Station
1.03.a 0-771-J-CA03
LATER
1.04 Other Components or Equipment
LATER
2.0 SPECIAL TOOLS
LATER
3.0 SPARE PARTS
LATER
4-9-1 (Final)

ATTACHMENT 4-10 Spec. No. : 0-771-J212
Rev. 0
Form. Parent Component Design Functions and Classification Evaluation Sheet
1. Evaluation
2. Station/Unit(s)
Sheet No.
3. System/Component Identification
System
Component Component Tag No.
Specification No. Supplier/Manufacturer
4. Component Design Functions Evaluation
Design Function Design Function Description
5. Component Classification
Radwaste Safety
□ I □ II □ III Quality Class □ AQ □ NQ
Category(RSC)
Electrical Class □ 1E □ Non-1E □ N/A Seismic Category □ I □ II □ III
Quality Group □ A □ B □ C □ D □ E □ G □ N/A
Safety
□ SR □ AQ □ NSR □ N/A
Classification
Environment □ Active □ Passive □
□ EQ □ N/A Operational Mode
Qualification N/A
6. References
4-10-1 (Final)

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/ STORAGE BUILDING
APPENDIX 4A1
Appendix 4A1(Quality As urance Program
Requirements)
KEPCO E&C JOB No. : 11G79
IS UE STATUS
0 04/25/18 General Revision
REV. NO DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
Preparer : 정영수, Tel : 054-421-7855

LILW 2nd Radwaste R/S Building
APPENDIX 4A1
Quality Assurance Program Requirements
KEPCO E&C JOB NO. : 11G79
ISSUE STATUS
0
REV. NO.
DATE
Issue for Use
DESCRIPTIONS
PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
작성자 : 정영수 전화 : 054-421-7855

Appendix 4A1
Rev. 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
Title
Page
1.0 SCOPE
2.0 TERMINOLOGY
3.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM CRITERIA
4A1-1
4A1-1
4A1-2
4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE MANUAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT (AQ Class)
4A1-4
TC 4A1-1(Final)

Appendix 4A1
Rev. 0
1.0
SCOPE
1.1
This appendix applies to the supplier and the sub-supplier of items and services and the
construction contractor (hereinafter called as supplier) as specified in the contract.
1.2
The supplier shall establish and implement an acceptable quality assurance program which wholly
or selectively complies with the “Quality Assurance Program Criteria in Sec. 3.0” depending upon
the work scope of the contract and the quality level of material, equipment and services supplied.
A comparative matrix table which shows conformance to the applied quality assurance program
requirements and the justification for the selective application, shall be included in the quality
assurance program.
1.3
The quality system, policy, organization, responsibility, requirements (and including a list of
procedures as necessary) necessary for control and assurance of quality throughout all phases of
the contract shall be documented and implemented.
1.4
The requirements specified in the contract (general conditions, special conditions, and technical
specification) have priority over the requirements of this appendix. If the supplier believes that an
inconsistency and an ambiguity exists between this appendix and the contract, the supplier shall
immediately notify the Buyer, and shall proceed relevant activities only after obtaining the Buyer's
acceptance.
1.5
The supplier may delegate any or all activities to the sub-supplier. The supplier shall assure that
the sub-supplier is subjected to the same applicable quality assurance requirements of this
appendix.
2.0
TERMINOLOGY
2.1
Buyer: KOREA RADIOACTIVE WASTE AGENCY (KORAD) and his authorized agents.
2.2
Supplier: An entity which provides services, equipment, components, fabrication, construction,
etc. with the Buyer in accordance with contract requirements. As all-inclusive term used in place
of any of the followings: vendor, seller, construction contractor, fabricator, consultant and their
sub-tier levels.
2.3
Controlled Copy: A copy of the supplier's documents which is marked with a controlled copy
number through which current status shall be maintained by transmittals of revisions, additions,
and deletions.
2.4
Procedure: Written requirements which specify operational steps, how an activity is to be
performed, and assign responsibilities for reaching objectives.
4A1-1

Appendix 4A1
Rev. 0
2.5
Quality Assurance Manual (QA Manual): A written document which prescribes quality assurance
program requirements so that all quality related activities are systematically performed and
controlled in accordance with regulatory requirements, contract requirements, codes and
standards.
2.6
Laws concerning nuclear regulation: Nuclear Safety Act, the Enforcement Decree of the Nuclear
Safety Act, NSSC Regulations and Notices.
2.7
Regulatory Body: Nuclear Safety and Security Commission (NSSC) or its agent, Korea Institute
of Nuclear Safety (KINS).
2.8
AQ-Class Items: Items or related services which are covered under Radioactive Waste Safety
Class I, II or Seismic Category I, II.
2.9
NQ-Class Items: Items or related services that are not AQ-Class.
2.10
CFISs (Counterfeit, Fraudulent, Suspect Items): All items which are not authentic.
3.0
QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM CRITERIA
3.1
General
3.1.1 The regulatory requirements and applicable codes and standards effective as of February 28, 2017
shall be used except described otherwise herein.
3.1.2 The Supplier shall identify a management position that retains overall authority and responsibility
for the Quality Assurance Program (normally, this position is the QA Manager). This position is
at the same or higher organization level as the highest line manager directly responsible for
performing activities affecting quality(such as engineering, procurement, production, and
construction)and has no other duties or responsibilities unrelated to QA that would prevent his
full attention to QA matters.
3.1.3 In case QA records are controlled as electronic media, the control measures, including
requirements for retrieval of stored information and duration life of media, shall be established
and implemented.
3.1.4 In case QA program is established based on ISO 9001 Quality Management requirements, a
comparative matrix table which shows conformance to the applied quality assurance program
criteria and justification for the selective application shall be included in the quality assurance
program.
4A1-2

Appendix 4A1
Rev. 0
3.1.5 In case the Supplier is not capable of conducting the tests and inspections using its own
equipment, the originals of QVDs (Quality Verification Documents) shall be submitted directly to
the Buyer by the institution which has conducted the relevant tests and inspections immediately
after having completed the test and inspections. The Supplier shall also submit the copies of the
QVDs to the Buyer. All QVDs submitted to the Buyer shall be self-checking for the truth.
3.2
AQ-class Quality Assurance Program Criteria
3.2.1 The Supplier (Domestic or Foreign) who performs work relevant to Quality Class AQ shall
establish a QA program to meet applicable quality assurance requirements.
3.2.1.1 Domestic Supplier (including Sub-Supplier)
NSSC Notice No. 2014-55 “Quality Assurance Criteria for Radioactive Waste Disposal Facility”
3.2.1.2 Foreign Supplier (including Sub-Supplier)
US NRC NUREG-1293, Rev.1 “Quality Assurance Guidance for a Low-Level Radioactive Waste
Disposal Facility”
3.3
NQ-class Quality Assurance Program Criteria
For NQ-class items, it is required to define and establish the QA program (e.g. ISO 9001, Quality
Management Systems- Requirements or equivalent) to perform quality activities in accordance
with the item's characteristics and the contract requirements. In case a quality assurance program
is specifically required by the applicable regulatory requirements, code and standards in the
contracts, the supplier with himself shall establish and implement a QA Manual to meet those
quality requirements.
3.4
Requirements for detection and prevention of Counterfeit/Fraudulent, Suspect Items (CFSI)
3.4.1 The Supplier shall establish and implement an acceptable program for CFSI control. If needed,
completeness of goods shall be confirmed through sample test, etc., at its own expense.
3.4.2 The Suppler shall not submit forged·falsified or any other wrongful QVDs (Quality Verification
Documents) to the Buyer in relation to the contract fulfillment. If the Supplier fails to do so, he or
she shall be subject to criminal penalties, constraint to participation in tenders as an unjust
supplier, cancellation of registration onto and prohibition on reentrance into Buyer’s qualified
suppliers’ list of quality related equipment and materials, claims for damages, and so on.
4A1-3

Appendix 4A1
Rev. 0
4.0
QUALITY ASSURANCE MANUAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT (AQ Class)
4.1
Tenderers/Contractors shall submit a QA Manual with tender or after award in accordance with
this appendix.
4.2
The Tenderer/Contractor, who has submitted a controlled copy of his QA Manual for the same
quality class, previously in this project, which has been accepted by the Buyer in accordance with
this appendix, need only submit documented evidence to provide commitment that the controlled
copy is applicable to the scope of the work involved in the Tender/Contract.
Documented evidence shall also address the current revision number, and identify the
procurement specification number for which the Tenderer/Contractor had submitted the
previously approved QA Manual.
4.3
The Tenderer who holds any certificate according to applicable code and standard, such as a
KEPIC / ASME Certificate of Authorization, ISO Certificates and other accredited authorization,
shall submit a copy of his current certificates for reference.
4A1-4(Final)

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/ STORAGE BUILDING
APPENDIX 4B
Appendix 4B(Quality Surveil ance
Requirements)
KEPCO E&C JOB No. : 11G79
IS UE STATUS
0 05/15/18 Construction is ue
REV. NO DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
Preparer : 이동기, Tel : 054-421-7874

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Appendix 4B
Rev. 0
SECTION TITLE PAGE
1.0 SCOPE 4B-1
2.0 TERMINOLOGY 4B-1
3.0 CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS 4B-2
4.0 QUALITY PLAN SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 4B-2
5.0 BUYER’S QUALITY SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4B-3
6.0 NONCONFORMANCE CONTROL 4B-5
7.0 SUPPLIER DEVIATION CONTROL 4B-5
8.0 QUALITY PROGRAM VERIFICATION (QPV) 4B-6
Attachment
1. Recommended Form of Supplier Quality Plan
TC 4B-1 (Final)

1.0 SCOPE
Appendix 4B
Rev. 0
1.1 This Appendix describes the Buyer's quality surveillance authority, quality
surveillance method and the Contractor's quality control responsibility, etc. for the
work process of material or equipment manufacturing, repair or installation as
specified in Technical Specification.
2.0 TERMINOLOGY
2.1 Buyer : Korea Radioactive Waste Agency (KORAD) and its representative
2.2 Contractor : An entity who provides equipment, fabrication, construction, components
and services to the Buyer. As all-inclusive term used in place of any of the following :
vendor, seller, contractor, supplier, fabricator and their subtier levels
2.3 Quality Plan (or Inspection & Test Plan) : A formal document which describes the
inspection and tests including supplied items, work process, applied documents and the
witness and hold points, etc. Quality Plan shall be prepared by the Contractor and
reviewed by the Buyer in advance of the work start.
2.4 Witness Point : An important step in manufacturing and testing whereby the Contractor
shall advise the Buyer by letter in advance of the operation. The Contractor may
proceed with the work past the witness point only if the Buyer has accepted the
inspection results by signature or advised the Contractor that the Buyer cannot attend.
2.5 Hold Point : A critical step in manufacturing and testing whereby the Contractor shall
not proceed with the work past the hold point without the presence of the Buyer,
unless there is a prior written agreement with the Buyer.
2.6 Release for Shipment : A written document, signed by the Buyer, permitting that the
shipment of materials and/or equipment are available after the completion of quality
surveillance. The Release for Shipment shall be submitted to the Buyer with Quality
Verification Documents on delivery of materials and/or equipment. The delivery of
materials and/or equipment without the Release for Shipment may be refused by the
Buyer but the shipping inspection may be omitted according to circumstances.
2.7 Quality Surveillance : The selective review, observation, and monitoring of processes,
procurements, manufacturing operations, quality control systems, and programs to
determine supplier compliance with contractual quality requirements.
2.8 Inspection : An action that performs examination, investigation or measurement, etc to
4B –1

Appendix 4B
Rev. 0
verify the compliance with the specified requirements for items or services and is
described as quality surveillance, witness inspection or inspection, etc. in this
Appendix.
3.0 CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS
3.1 The Contractor's Quality Inspection Organization shall prepare the related instructions
and procedures, etc. to control the quality inspection in accordance with the
requirements of the contract, the related codes and standards, the design documents
reviewed by the Buyer and Quality Assurance Manual, etc.
3.2 Quality Surveillance includes quality assurance, design, procurement, welding, heat
treatment, nondestructive examination, pressure (hydraulic, pneumatic, vacuum) test,
performance test, coating, packaging, handling, shipping and transportation, etc.
3.3 The Contractor's Quality Inspection shall be completed in advance of the Buyer's
Surveillance Inspection or Authorized Inspection and if not, the Buyer may refuse to
proceed with his surveillance inspection. But the Buyer's and the Contractor's
inspections may be simultaneously performed under impractical situations such as
pressure tests.
3.4 The Contractor shall cooperate with the Buyer for the access to shop and data of the
Contractor and using inspection tools, etc. without charge to the Buyer .
4.0 QUALITY PLAN SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
4.1 (Submittal and Review) The Contractor shall prepare and submit Quality Plan,
describing in detail the inspections and tests during manufacturing, repair and
installation, to the Buyer. The Quality Plan shall be reviewed by the Buyer in advance
of the work start and the Buyer designates witness and hold points in the Quality Plan.
4.2 (Observance of Codes and Standards) Quality Plan shall be prepared to observe
applicable codes and standards specified in the contract.
4.3 (Preparing Method) Quality Plan shall include at least the followings and the typical
example is showed in Attachment 1.
1) Contract No. and name
2) Component name, component No.
3) Quality Plan No. and revision No.
4) Operation, test and examination process
5) Applied documents (procedure, drawing etc.) for each process and revision No.
4B –2

Appendix 4B
Rev. 0
6) Blank for designating the Contractor's inspection points
7) Blank for designating the Buyer's surveillance inspection points
8) Blank for signature verifying inspection result
9) Identification of Quality Verification Documents, etc.
4.4 The Contractor shall not proceed with fabrication without the Buyer's approval of
Quality Plan.
5.0 BUYER’S QUALITY SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS
5.1 General
5.1.1 The Buyer appoints a responsible Quality Surveillance Representative (QS Rep.) who
may perform Initial Visit to the Contractor's shop prior to the start of manufacturing to
consult with necessary matters.
5.1.2 Prior to the start of manufacturing, the Buyer will conduct an initial visit with the
Contractor’s appropriate representative, the quality requirements of the purchase
contract/order and specification, etc. Production shall not start until this meeting is
held or unless Buyer has given a prior approval.
5.1.3 During the initial visit, the Contractor shall furnish the names and addresse s of
material subcontractors, significant components and/or services, such as NDE,
performance testing, etc.
5.1.4 During the initial visit, the Buyer will confirm scope of application and hold/witness
points of the quality plan with the Contractor.
5.2 Manufacturing Inspection
5.2.1 The Contractor shall advise the Buyer's QS Rep. by letter seven(7) working days in
advance of the operation and confirm two(2) working days in advance of the
operation.
5.2.2 Inspection Request Form includes contract No., contract name, inspection item,
inspection process, item No., inspection date, inspection place, the Contractor' person
in charge and his telephone No., etc.
5.2.3 The procedures and drawings applied to manufacturing, test and examination, etc.
shall be reviewed and approved by Buyer according to the contract requirements prior
to the operation.
4B –3

Appendix 4B
Rev. 0
5.2.4 If any nonconformance is found in inspection, the applicable operation shall be held at
the point and reinspected after the required corrective action is completed.
5.2.5 If the Buyer finds any Contractor’s nonconformance, the deficiencies shall be
documented using the Quality Surveillance Deficiency Report(QSDR) which
identifies the procedural requirement found deficient, the type and nature of the
deficiency, and the documentation and/or hardware involved. A copy of this form
shall be given to the Contractor for corrective action.
5.2.6 If the inspection result is satisfactory, the Buyer signs on Quality Plan
(a traveler as necessary) and if not, the Buyer can request the Contractor for corrective
action by Nonconformance Report (NCR) or Corrective Action Request (CAR).
5.3 Shipping Inspection
5.3.1 The items shall be inspected by the Buyer for shipment in the Contractor's shop after
the followings are completed.
1) Completing the submittal of design and quality documents in accordance with
Appendix 4D and the approval by the Buyer
2) Close-out of the disposition or corrective action (NCR, CAR, SDDR, etc.) related to
manufacturing, test, examination and audit
3) Preparation of Quality Verification Documents (CMTR, C of C, Inspection Report and
Record, etc.)
4) Issuing the Contractor's Certificate of Conformance (For materials, CMTR or
Certificate of Compliance shall be provided according to the applicable codes and
standards)
5.3.2 After completing para.5.3.1, the Contractor shall request the Buyer for shipping
inspection. If the shipping inspection result is satisfactory, the Buyer's QS Rep. issues
Release for Shipment and if not, the Buyer can hold the shipping.
5.3.3 The issue of Release for Shipment does not mean the direction for shipment. The
Contractor shall ship the items according to delivery schedule specified in the contract
or the Buyer’s direction.
5.3.4 The Buyer's Release for Shipment does not mean the qu ality assurance of the items.
The Contractor is responsible for any quality problems in manufacturing found after
Release for Shipment.
5.3.5 The detailed requirements for submittal of Quality Verification Documents are in
accordance with Appendix 4E.
4B –4

5.4 Packaging, Handling, Shipping and Transportation Control
Appendix 4B
Rev. 0
5.4.1 The packaging and shipping processes included in Quality Plan shall be witnessed by
the Buyer.
5.4.2 The Contractor shall take necessary measures for the safe delivery of the item during
packaging, handling, shipping and transportation after Release for Shipment.
5.4.3 The Contractor shall take special measures as necessary for heavy products and items
with potential damage during transportation.
6.0 NONCONFORMANCE CONTROL
6.1 Upon finding any nonconformance during manufacturing, test and examination, the
Contractor shall hold the applicable operation and dispose the nonconformance
according to quality assurance requirements.
6.2 When multi-operation process, test and examination are required to d ispose the
nonconformance, a separate Quality Plan shall be prepared for the Buyer’s review.
6.3 The disposition such as use-as-is or repair shall be approved by the Buyer.
6.4 The Contractor shall complete the nonconformance according to the necessary
measures approved by the Buyer and closing NCR shall be verified by the responsible
QS Rep.'s signature.
6.5 The closed NCR of the Contractor shall be included in Quality Verification
Documents.
7.0 SUPPLIER DEVIATION CONTROL
7.1 When the deviations from Purchase Specification requirements occur during
performing the contract, the Contractor shall issue Supplier Deviation Disposition
Request(SDDR) in accordance with Appendix 4H.
7.2 The Contractor shall not ship the material, equipment or service without the close-out
of SDDR.
7.3 SDDR may be issued to dispose NCR and not to substitute for NCR.
7.4 The closed SDDR shall be included in Quality Verification Documents.
4B –5

Appendix 4B
Rev. 0
8.0 QUALITY PROGRAM VERIFICATION (QPV)
8.1 QPV is a modified version of Contractor’s quality program audit. It is performed by the
Buyer to verify on a continuing and progressive basis, the implementation of the
selected quality program elements for safety related items, in producing desired results
in accordance with the contract.
4B –6(Final)

Attachment 1
Appendix 4B
Rev. 0
Recommended Form of Supplier Quality Plan
Page 1 of 3
Supplier: Supplier Quality Plan
Client: Project No.: PNS No.: QP. No. / Rev.
Purchase Spec. No./Description Rev.
Quality plan for
Revision
Rev. Date
Description
Form App. 4B, Rev. 0
Prepared
by
(Supplier)
Reviewed Approved
by by
(Supplier) (Supplier)

Appendix 4B
Rev. 0
Page 2 of 3
Quality Plan Summary QP No. Rev.
Item Description :
1. Quality Plan List
2. Sequence of Fabrication
Form App. 4B, Rev. 0

Appendix 4B
Rev. 0
Page 3 of 3
Quality Plan Detail QP No. Rev.
Supplier Buyer Quality
Description Reference
Seq. Inspection Inspection Verifica-
of Document Remarks
No. Point Point tion
Operation
No. Rev. Point Verify Point Verify Document
Inspection WP: Witness Point
Point ; HP: Hold Point
R: Document Review
Form App. 4B, Rev. 0
Quality
Verification W: With QVD
Document ;

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/ STORAGE BUILDING
APPENDIX 4C
General Requirements for Submit al
Documents
KEPCO E&C JOB No. : 11G79
IS UE STATUS
0 05/03/18 Construction is ue
REV. NO DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
Preparer : 서정욱, Tel : 054-421-6150

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Appendix 4C
Rev. 0
SECTION TITLE PAGE
1.0 GENERAL 4C-1
2.0 SUBMITTAL OF DRAWING AND DOCUMENT 4C-4
3.0 PERMISSION TO PROCEED 4C-5
4.0 DRAWING AND DOCUMENT CONTENTS 4C-8
5.0 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 4C-10
6.0 SAMPLES 4C-11
7.0 QUALITY VERIFICATION DOCUMENTATION 4C-11
8.0 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS 4C-13
9.0 REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONIC MEDIA 4C-13
10.0 STORAGE AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS 4C-18
FOR ELECTRONIC MEDIA
11.0 ELECTRICAL DRAWING REQUIREMENTS 4C-20
ATTACHMENTS
1 SUPPLIER'S TRANSMITTAL
2 DRAWING AND DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE LIST
3 PLAN VIEW ASSIGNMENT METHOD
4 INSTRUMENT LOCATION GRID ASSIGNMENT METHOD
5 INTERNAL WIRING DIAGRAM - CONTROL BOARD
6 INTERNAL WIRING DIAGRAM - RELAY CABINET
7 INTERNAL - EXTERNAL WIRING DIAGRAM - TERMINAL BLOCKS
8 INTERNAL - EXTERNAL WIRING DIAGRAM - LOCAL CONTROL
CABINET
9 SUPPLIER’S DRAWING/DOCUMENT CHANGE NOTICE
10 INSPECTION REPORT FOR COMPACT DISC
TC 4C – 1 (Final)

1.0 GENERAL
Appendix 4C
Rev. 0
1.1 This appendix provides the requirements for the Suppliers on the content, submittal, and
quality of their drawings and documents (hereinafter called documents) submitted to the
Buyer. The scope includes documents submitted with proposals and after award and all types
of engineering documents such as, but not limited to, design drawings, stress or design
reports, instruction manuals, quality verification documents, samples, manufacturer's data,
engineering data, cuts and diagrams for plumbing fixtures, hardware schedules, information
concerning materials and articles required, etc.
1.2 Definitions
1.2.1 Where the term "design drawings" is used herein, it shall mean “the Buyer’s Design
Drawings" unless otherwise indicated.
1.2.2 Where the term "shop drawings" is used herein, it shall mean "Supplier's shop drawings",
consisting of erection drawings and shop detail drawings, unless otherwise indicated.
1.2.3 Where the term "equipment outline drawings" is used herein, it shall mean Supplier's
drawings that show the general arrangement and overall dimensions of Supplier’s equipment
(such as valves, pumps, heat exchangers, etc.) including, but not limited to, other major
dimensions such as nozzle orientations/locations and sizes, anchoring details, etc.
1.2.4 "Original" - An original reproducible document.
1.2.5 "Reproduction" - Any type of copy of the original document.
1.2.6 “Native file”- Electronic file (2D CAD, 3D CAD, MS-word, Excel, etc.) which was
developed by original software. The original software can read and write this kind of data
file.
1.2.7 "Paper print" - An opaque reproduction such as white print.
1.3 The Buyer’s Project Numbering System (PNS)
1.3.1 In addition to the Supplier's own document number, the Supplier shall assign, for each
document to be submitted to the Buyer in accordance with Appendix 4D, an identification
number based upon the Buyer’s Project Numbering System (PNS) as set forth in Section
1.3.3 of the Appendix.
4C-1

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0
1.3.2 The identification number in accordance with the PNS shall be indicated by the Supplier in
document at the upper margin adjacent to the title block of the document as shown in the
following example :
PNS : M213 - DG-A01-01
1.3.3 The numbering per the PNS shall be done as follows ;
a. PNS numbering method :
* ** ***
Example :
M213 - D G - A 01 - 01
.
Spec. No
Document Category
Document Type
Document Description
Serial Number (Numeric)
Sub-Serial Number (Numeric)
* Specification Number
** Provided by the A/E in Appendix 4D of this Specification
(See Appendix 4D, Column 1)
*** To be assigned by suppliers
4C-2

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0
b. Document Category and Type Reference
Document Category Document Type
Symbol Description Symbol Description
-
Submittal With Proposal
C
Calculation
C
Schedule and Progress
D
Design & Engineering
E
Equipment Qualification
I
Site Instruction & Guidelines
M
Manufacturing and
Fabrication
P
Procurement
Q
Quality Assurance/Quality
Surveillance
S
Packing and Shipping
D
System Drawings such
as P&ID, etc.
E
Electrical Drawing
G
Physical Drawings such as
GA, Layout, Outline,
Foundation Drawing etc.
I
Instrumentation & Control
Drawing
L
List, Table and Data Sheet
M
Manual, Instruction, Guide
P
Procedure
T
Test and Examination
V
Quality Verification
Document
R
Report
S
Specification
T
Performance or
Characteristic Curve
Z
Others
4C-3

2.0 SUBMITTAL OF DRAWING AND DOCUMENT
Appendix 4C
Rev. 0
2.1 General
2.1.1 Drawings, data or samples required by Appendix 4D or by other specific reference in this
Specification, shall be submitted by and at the expense of the Tenderer/Supplier.
2.1.2 Documents submitted to the Buyer shall be one of the following acceptable sizes :
Korean Size Document Document
US Size Code
Code Size(mm) Size(inches)
A0 J 1189 x 841 36 x 48
A1 D 841 x 594 24 x 36
22 x 34
A2 C 594 x 420 17 x 22
18 X 24
A3 B 420 x 297 11 x 17
12 X 18
A4 A 297 x 210 8 1/2 X 11
9 X 12
2.1.3 Design information shall be included in the Drawings. The fact that such design information
may later be included in the instruction and/or operating manuals does not relieve the
Supplier from complying with these requirements.
2.1.4 For local items, Tenderers/Suppliers may submit Korean version for the following
documents;
a. Quality Assurance Program Manual
b. Instruction Manual/Operating and Maintenance Manual
c. Procedures and Reports
2.2 Submittal with Proposal
2.2.1 Each copy of Tenderer’s proposal shall include the drawings and data required in Section 3
and 4 of the Specification.
2.2.2 Proposal Drawings and Data
Drawings and data included as part of the proposal shall show equipment as required by the
Specification.
4C-4

2.3 Submittals after Award
Appendix 4C
Rev. 0
2.3.1 After award of contract, Supplier's drawings and documents shall be submitted to the Buyer
in accordance with Appendix 4D.
2.3.2 All drawings and documents resubmitted to the Buyer shall require the change notice using
Attachment 9 with the Supplier’s Transmittal form to minimize the Buyer’s review period.
2.3.3 Detail Drawings and Documents Submittal Schedule List
Upon contract award, the Supplier shall prepare and submit for the Buyer’s review, within 4
(four) weeks after award, a detail list of drawings and documents to be submitted by the
Supplier specified in Appendix 4D. The list shall be prepared using Attachment 2 and shall
include, for each drawing and document, the following information : document number base
upon the PNS & the Supplier’s own identification number, the title to be used by the
Supplier, the submittal purpose ("R" for Review & "I" for Information), the number of
submittal weeks required by Appendix 4D and the scheduled submittal date.
When there are changes on the list, the Supplier shall promptly submit the revised list for the
Buyer’s review. All the changes will be identified by revision bars in the right-hand margin
adjacent to the revision items.
2.3.4 The Supplier's Transmittal shown in Attachment 1 shall accompany drawings, documents,
etc. All submittals received without transmittal form will be returned to the Supplier. The
Supplier is responsible for reproducing Attachment 1 in sufficient quantity for his submittals.
2.3.5 All submittals shall be transmitted to the Buyer by first class mail, express mail, hand
carried, etc. Regarding submittals transmitted from foreign countries, the Supplier should
use registered air mail or overnight express mail such as Federal Express, DHL, etc. The
Supplier shall not send any invoices with the shipment. It is recommended that the
Supplier declare the shipment simply, as "Printed Materials - No Commercial Value".
2.3.6 All U.S. size "B" and Korean size "A3" and smaller documents shall be mailed flat
(unfolded) with chip board protectors on top and bottom of the transmittal. All other
documents shall be rolled (unfolded) inside regular mailing tubes. The inside diameter of
the rolled documents shall be no less than 1 1/2 inches.
3.0 PERMISSION TO PROCEED
3.1 No design drawings, data, etc., will be considered for review which are not complete in all
respects and which have not been thoroughly checked by the Supplier. No design drawings,
data, etc., will be considered for review which cover features that are contingent upon
review of other features for which the Supplier has not submitted drawings, etc., for review.
4C-5

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0
3.2 For shop drawings, one paper print of each submitted shop drawing will be returned to the
Supplier marked with the Buyer's stamped review status, comments, and corrections or
changes. Upon receipt of the returned print, the Supplier shall promptly incorporate these
comments, corrections, or changes on that drawing and resubmit it for review as many times
as required until the returned print is stamped with Status 1, and with no corrections or
changes. Such procedure shall not be considered a cause for delay.
3.3 Proper erection drawings shall be submitted with each set of shop detail drawings to indicate
correct location of all members submitted for review. Shop detail drawings submitted
without erection drawings will be returned to the Supplier without review. Erection
drawings showing members for which no shop details have been provided must be
resubmitted when these shop details are submitted for review.
3.4 The Buyer will review the drawings, data, etc., for compliance with the Specifications and
will mark and stamp to them indicate whether changes or corrections are required. If
changes or corrections are necessary, drawings, data, etc., with such changes or corrections
noted will be returned to the Supplier. The Supplier shall resubmit the corrected or changed
drawings, data, etc. All changes, corrections, etc., shall be clearly indicated.
3.5 Drawing and document submitted by the Supplier will be processed by the Buyer within
fifty (50) calendar days after receipt. Documents classified as status 4 or 5 will not be
returned to Supplier. Their status will be indicated on the transmittal only. Documents
classified as status 1,2,3,6 or U will be returned with status stamp and/or marked comments.
The definitions of the status are :
Status 1: No exception taken. Supplier may proceed with fabrication or construction in
accordance with the Specification.
Note: Requests for additional information or documents shall be made in the
remarks section of the Supplier Transmittal (Return Copy)
Status 2: Supplier may proceed in accordance with the Specification based on making
revisions as noted and resubmit.
Status 3: Revise as noted and resubmit. Hold-related work.
Status 4: The document is to be distributed for the Buyer and A/E information according to
project distribution requirements. However, the document may be used for
construction, operation and permanent records.
Status 5: The document is to be used for A/E information only.
Status 6: Void or superseded. This document is not applicable.
4C-6

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0
Note : The proper box shall be marked to indicate the reason for processing the
document.

• "Void" shall be marked when there is no other document replacing the

voided document.

• "Superseded" shall be marked when other documents are being issued

replacing the superseded document.
Status U: This status, which is to be determined and stamped by DDCC only, means that the
document is unacceptable for reproduction and should be resubmitted.
The "Status U" stamp shall be applied at the receiving phase.
3.6 Any action shown in Article 3.5 above is subject to the terms of the contract and does not
relieve the Supplier from his obligations under the contract, including design and detailing.
The Buyer's review of shop drawings shall not be interpreted as constituting approval of the
adequacy of the shop drawings for their use. Permission to proceed does not constitute
acceptance or approval of design details, calculations, analysis, test methods, or materials
developed or selected by the Supplier and does not relieve the Supplier from full compliance
with contractual obligations. Fabrication prior to the Buyer's permission to proceed shall be
at the Supplier 's risk.
3.7 The Supplier shall incorporate changes as required by comments on the drawing(s) or
document(s) and resubmit revised drawing(s) or document(s) within 30 calendar days.
Drawing(s) or document(s) having received previous authorization to proceed shall not be
changed without prior notification to the Buyer. Changes to such drawing(s) or document(s)
shall require resubmittal for the Buyer's permission to proceed.
3.8 The Supplier shall receive "Status 1" for the documents required the Buyer's review before
shipment to the jobsite.
4C-7

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0
4.0 DRAWING AND DOCUMENT CONTENTS
4.1 All drawings that are drawn to scale shall have a graphic scale so that any proportional
blowback from the Buyer's reproduction can be scaled.
4.2 All drawings, documents or other data submitted by Supplier shall include, as a minimum,
the following information :
a . Project Name : 2nd Radwaste R/S Building
b. The Buyer’s Name : Korea Radioactive Waste Agency (KORAD)
c. Supplier's Name
d. Project Numbering System (PNS No.)
e. Drawing or Document Title and Number and Revision Designation.
f. Specification Number & Description
g. Manufacturer's Name & Address (if different from Supplier)
h. Model Number (if applicable)
i. Drawing Size. (Drawing only)
j. The Buyer's Equipment Title and Tag Number and Equipment Location
(Building Name and Elevation)
k. Quality Class (AQ, NQ) and Radwaste Safety Category (I, II, III)
l. Supplier's Certification where applicable
m. North Direction (In the case the Buyer provides the requirements for north direction to
supplier or requests indication of north direction during the Buyer’s review process,
supplier shall indicate the north direction in the supplier’s physical drawings.)
4.3 Each issue of a drawing/document shall include the date of issue, and a description of
revision, if any. Each revised portion of the drawing/document shall be identified by
encircling or revision bar with an appropriate revision letter or number.
4.4 A 3"x6" space shall be provided in the lower right hand corner for the Buyer's status stamp.
Drawings too small or crowded to provide this space shall be printed on a larger size of
paper to provide a 3" wide blank strip on the right border of the drawing.
4.5 Equipment Outline Drawings
All "Equipment Outline Drawings" shall be identified with the following pertinent
information :
4C-8

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0
4.5.1 Location of Support and Equipment Mounting Details.
To establish the embedment requirements when the component is mounted directly to the
building structure, Equipment Support Details shall show the following information:
a. Base plate size and thickness, bolt pattern, bolt size, bolt hole size and bolt material
including each shear and tension load acting on each bolt for bolted mounting type
according to each plant operating condition, or
b. Welding plan, size, start and end point for welded mounting type according to each plant
operating condition
The Supplier shall use ASTM A36, or ASTM A193 Grade B7 for concrete pad and ASTM A307,
or ASTM A325 for steel pad as mounting bolt material unless otherwise noted. The bolt hole
size for concrete pad shall be as follows, unless notified otherwise.
Bolt Size Bolt Hole Size
≤ 1.0” Dia + 1/8”
1 1/8” to 2.0” Dia + 3/16”
> 2.0” Dia + 1/4”
4.5.2 Weights and Center of Gravity of Equipment
The weight and the center of gravity of equipment shall be defined for maximum normal
operating, flooded, and dry conditions.
The weight and the center of gravity of any major identifiable sub-assembly or component
shall be identified.
4.5.3 Location of Nozzle Connection (if provided with piping connection)
All nozzles shall be dimensioned from the equipment base reference or centerline to provide
orientation data.
4.5.4 Allowable Forces and Moments (if provided with piping connection)
The equipment supplier shall provide a tabulation of allowable forces and moments at each
nozzle/piping interface oriented to the major axis of the components.
If the maximum forces and moments are related by an equation allowing a variation in the
ratio of forces and moments, this shall also be shown (as applicable).
4.5.5 The weight of complete motor, rotating assembly, rotor part only and shaft only shall be
included in the motor outline drawing.
4C-9

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0
4.5.6 Equipment or anchor bolt installation tolerance shall be included in the drawing when
required.
4.6 Erection Drawings
4.6.1 Erection drawings shall be updated by the Supplier to reflect the latest revisions of the
Design Drawings, at each submittal to the Buyer. Issuance of erection drawings shall also
include references to the Buyer's Design Drawings, as well as issue dates of these Design
Drawings.
4.6.2 Each erection drawing shall be identified with "ERECTION DRAWING" in 1/2 inch high
bold lettering just above the title block.
4.7 Shop (Detail) Drawings
4.7.1 Shop (detail) drawings shall indicate in detail for the followings, when required :
a. All materials to be fabricated for the work.
b. Electrical equipment provided by the supplier (outline drawings and wiring diagrams
required).
c. Methods of anchoring.
d. Operating devices.
e. Construction joints, etc.
4.7.2 All shop (detail) drawings shall be clearly referenced to related erection drawings and other
shop (detail) drawings.
4.7.3 Each shop (detail) drawing shall include the building name and location for which the
materials are being furnished.
4.7.4 All shop (detail) drawings to be submitted to the Buyer shall be separated into unique unit, if
requested.
5.0 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
5.1 All submitted drawings or data shall be of sufficiently high quality drafting to permit
reproduction by the Buyer. It is preferable that originals be submitted when possible. If
reproductions of the originals are submitted, they shall be full size and direct-reading. The
reproduction shall be of original quality having sharp, clean, well-defined lines, with a line
density equal to or better than the original.
The lettering shall be large and of an open style permitting reductions down to 30X and
blowback up to 14.5X and remain open with no plugging or loss of legibility. The
reproduction shall maintain an evenly high contrast between image and background over the
4C-10

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0
surface of the wing. Reproductions with low contrast or heavy background density with
thin, weak lines and lettering are not acceptable.
5.2 Documents submitted to the Buyer that do not conform to the requirements of this
Specification, shall be subject to reject by the Buyer, and upon request, the Supplier shall
resubmit conforming documents. If conforming submittals cannot be obtained from the
source documents, such source documents shall be retraced, redrawn, or photographically
restored as may be necessary to meet such requirements. Supplier's (or his subsupplier’s)
failure to initially satisfy the legibility quality requirements herein set forth, shall not relieve
the Supplier (or his subsuppliers) from meeting the required schedule for submittal of
documents.
6.0 SAMPLES
6.1 Where samples are required, they shall be submitted by and at the expense of the Supplier.
Such submittals shall be made at least thirty(30) calendar days prior to the time that the
materials represented by such samples need to be purchased for the work. Samples shall be
subject to acceptance, and material represented by such samples shall not be manufactured,
delivered, or incorporated into any work without such acceptance.
6.2 Each sample shall bear a label showing: Supplier's name, project name, name of the item,
manufacturer's name, brand name, model number, as applicable; the appropriate drawing
number; and the applicable section and paragraph number(s) of specification.
7.0 QUALITY VERIFICATION DOCUMENTATION
7.1 The Supplier shall provide quality verification documents such as mill test reports,
hydrostatic test reports, certificates of compliance, etc., as defined throughout the
specification and in applicable codes, standards, etc., and as summarized on the Quality
Verification Documentation List, Appendix 4E.
7.1.1 Certificate of Conformance
A documents signed or otherwise authenticated by an authorized individual certifying the
degree to which items or services meet specified requirements.
a. The certificate should identify the purchased material or equipment.
b. The certificate should identify the specific procurement requirements such as codes,
standards, and other specifications.
c. The certificate should identify any procurement requirement that have not been met.
d. The certificate should be attested to by a person who is responsible for this quality
4C-11

assurance function.
Appendix 4C
Rev. 0
7.1.2 Certified Material Test Report / Material Test Report
A document attesting that the material is in accordance with specified requirements,
including the actual results of all required chemical analysis, tests, and examinations.
7.1.3 Certificate of Compliance
A written statement attesting that the materials are in accordance with specified
requirements.
7.2 Quality verification documents shall clearly identify the material being certified and shall
include, but not limited to, providing the following information: Supplier's name,
specification number, project name, name of the item and reference to the appropriate
drawing.
7.3 For the purpose of material verification, the Supplier shall provide the Buyer with a detailed
list under the "Material Test Property" category to be included in the "QVDL and it's Sample
Forms Listed in Appendix 4E". This detailed list shall consist but not limited to: equipment,
components, parts, module, assembly, material, etc., and the associated document required
such as (certified) material test report, certificate of compliance or "not applicable", shall be
indicated for each item.
7.4 Throughout the work process, the Supplier shall identify individual documents on the QVDL
by serial number and/or attachment number, and shall certify their applicability to the item,
verified by signature and date in the appropriate columns. Following such certification, the
individual documents shall be reviewed by the Buyer/Buyer’s Representative, who will
indicate compliance to the requirement by sign-off on the Appendix 4E form.
7.5 Following completion of fabrication and final inspection, the responsible Buyer/Buyer’s
Representative will verify that all required quality verification documents have been
reviewed and signed off and that copies are available for shipment with material, if required.
The Buyer/Buyer Representative will certify the completion of this requirement by
providing the "acceptance signature" for the specified material or equipment, along with the
necessary quality verification documents. Appendix 4E will serve as the transmittal form
for the quality verification documents that accompany the shipment to the jobsite.
7.6 Additional Information
In addition to the requirements of Appendix 4E and the technical specification, the following
general rules shall apply, as applicable, to determine the quality verification documents to be
prepared by the Supplier.
4C-12

7.6.1 The finally assembled equipment will require the following QVDs :
Appendix 4C
Rev. 0
a. Certificate of conformance
b. Test reports or test certificates of the design tests specified in the specification
c. Final signed-off quality plan
d. Test reports of the production tests specified in the specification
e. Final close-out Corrective Action Request (CAR), Non-Conformance Report(NCR) and
Supplier Deviation Disposition Request (SDDR)
7.6.2 Quality class AQ components, module, subassembly, etc. which are parts of the finally
assembled equipment shall require the Certificate of Conformance.
8.0 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
8.1 All as-built drawings in a electronic file format or equivalent shall be the property of the
Buyer. They shall be turned over to the Buyer, if the Buyer so requests, after of the Work and
after completion incorporation field changes.
8.2 Prior to Supplier's application for payment, and as a condition for an approval of the
payment by the Buyer, the Supplier shall transfer the as-built drawings to the Buyer, if the
Buyer so requests. The Supplier shall deliver the drawings in appropriate containers, indexed
and marked for each part of the Work.
8.3 In the event that the Buyer has not requested delivery of as-built drawings and it is the intent
of the Supplier to destroy these documents, a written approval shall be obtained from the
Buyer prior to destroying them.
9.0 REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONIC MEDIA
9.1 General
This section describes requirements for high density electronic storage media such as CD
ROMS submitted by the Suppliers to the Buyer. This section specifies requirements for
media recording, submission, and acceptance inspection.
9.2 Definition of Terminology
9.2.1 “Information Media” (hereinafter referred to as Media) means optical storage such as CD-
ROMs, etc. It contains the native document files, drawing image files and drawing vector
4C-13

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0
files which may be utilized by computer systems for archiving, retrieval, display and
printing. Media other than industry standard CD-ROMs may be utilized only with prior
approval of the Buyer.
9.2.2 “Drawing and Document file number” means the control number of drawing and document
which is recorded on electronic media. The same number shall be assigned to each media or
format (such as native document file, CAD-image file, and CAD vector file), if multiple
formats are submitted.
9.2.3 “As-Built drawings” shall mean finalized drawings after the completion of plant
construction, and show all aspects of the as-built status.
9.3 Media Submission and Inspection
9.3.1 Submittal item and quantity

• Compact Disc for Drawing and Document : Quantity to be adjusted as needed
• Data index (sorted by PNS No.) : One(1) set
• Inspection report : One (1) set

9.3.2 Submittal and Inspection
a. Supplier shall submit the items listed in Section 9.3.1 to the Buyer in accordance with
Appendix 4D.
b. The Buyer shall confirm that Supplier’s submittal is acceptable by signing the inspection
report. The Supplier shall guarantee that the submitted item and its quantity are
satisfactory and in accordance with the specification.
c. If the quality and quantity do not meet the minimum requirements, the Buyer will
require resubmittal
9.4 Format of Index Data
The basic input elements for Index Data shall be as follows.
4C-14

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0
No Index item Width Attribute Remark
1 D/N (Disc-No: CD-ROM No.) 3 AN/F 01A, 01B, 02A…
DRAWING / DOCUMENT
2 30 AN/V
FILE NO.
3 TITLE 80 AN/V
4 SZ (size) 2 AN/F AL, A0, A1, A2…
5 SUPPLIER NAME 30 AN/V
F : As-built
6 REV (Revision) 3 AN/V
001 : first rev.
7 DATE (Issue date, approval date) 6 N/F 032507 (MMDDYY)
*N : numeric, AN : alpha numeric V : variable F : fixed
9.4.1 Index fields shall comply with the following requirements:
a. D/N(Disc-No.), “Drawing File No” and/or “Document File No” shall be assigned in
accordance with instructions provided by the Buyer.
b. Drawing size shall be indicated by using two characters such as “A0”, “A1”, etc. If the
drawing size exceeds “A0” in size, “AL” should be used.
c. “Title” column should be filled-in using alphabetical characters and numerics.
d. Supplier name shall not be abbreviated.
9.5 Criteria for production Compact Disc
9.5.1 The file number shall match the PNS number.
9.5.2 Specification for CD-ROMs
CD record format must be compatible with the MS-Windows98 or later version and should
be in accordance with ISO 9660 standard. The Multi-session methodology is not acceptable.
9.5.3 CAD file format
File format may be either DGN (Microstation CAD file) or DWG (AutoCAD 2008 Ed. or
later version).
9.5.4 Document file format (Native Document File)
File format may be either the MS Office file or HWP file.
4C-15

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0
9.5.5 Image file format and standards for scanning
a. Image file shall be in TIFF and PDF (Portable Document Format) format per CCITT
Group 4.
b. 200 DPI (dots per inch) or greater is required as a scanning resolution.
c. 1 to 1 is required as a scanning reduction ratio.
9.5.6 Arrangement and configuration of directory and guidelines for the file name assignment.
a. Directory structure shall be as follows ;
\\DWG or Doc\ PNS XXX
File Extension Name
PNS No.
b. An example of the file name structure is as follows ;
\\ P N S . FFF
File Extension Name (.TIF, .DGN, etc.)
PNS No.
9.5.7 File Storage Structure and Label Attachment
a. Files (CAD, Document, Image) shall be inputted in the appropriate sub-directory
location.
b. A Label shall be attached to the Compact Disc which contains the drawing files or
document files.
The following Label must be attached to Compact Disc Cover
Project Name / DISC No. / PNS No.
c. The following Label must be attached to the CD box.
DISC No. / PNS No.
4C-16

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0
d. The following label must be attached to the front side of CD box.
TITLE
Responsible
Buyer
Person (tel.)
Responsible
Supplier
Person (tel.)
Dwg quantity Disc No.
Completion day
File No.
of inspection
Submittal
date Inspection
Confirmation
Remark
9.6 Inspection and Acceptance Criteria
9.6.1 Procedure for Acceptance Inspection
a. The Supplier shall submit an inspection report per Attachment 10 after an inspection.
b. When a non-conformity is discovered, Supplier shall correct the non-conformity.
9.6.2 Inspection and Criteria for Suitability
a. The Compact Disc inspection shall verify quantity , quality of the material, appearance
and retrieval linkage .
b. Acceptance criteria

• Quantity

The product quantity submitted by the Supplier shall match the as-shipped quantity
checked by the Buyer.

• Quality of Material

Check points for image cutting, secession, damage, omission, overlapping triangular
position, reversed image, readability and recoverability shall meet the recommendation.
4C-17

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

• Appearance

If there are any deficiencies or non-conformities such as label indexing mistakes and
disc damage, the submittal is not acceptable.

• Retrieval Linkage

Retrieved data through indexing tools shall match exactly with the image in the
electronic media or actual drawing.

• A 10 image reading per disc shall be performed as a minimum to check the retrieval

linkage capability.
10.0 STORAGE AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONIC MEDIA
10.1 The documents to be stored in the form of electronic media shall be the documents that have
been authenticated by the supplier who prepared, reviewed and approved them. The
identification of directories shall be easily understandable and consistent with a written
procedure.
10.2 Tests and inspection of magnetic media shall meet the following requirements:
10.2.1 Inspect magnetic media every 6 months for potential damages.
10.2.2 Test oxidized steel and chromic steel tapes at least every 3 years.
10.2.3 Replace tapes and cartridges with 10 defects and more (saves the data)

• Conducts sampling tests on the same lot where the defected tapes or cartridges came from.

10.2.4 For reel tapes that are used for data storage,
a. Skip error is allowed at less than 5 times, and error during the initial 100ft distance and
permanent error shall not be allowed.
b. A scratched or restored tape shall not be used.
c. A preliminary test of reel tapes for preservation shall be conducted at least 4 times over
the entire process.
d. For tape of records reservation, path test on the length of one rpm and high-speed
rewinding shall not be permitted
e. A preliminary test of reel tapes for recording 4 to 10 times shall be conducted before
use, and any error is not allowed in temporary writing.
4C-18

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0
10.3 The following storage conditions shall be met for storage facilities, and magnetic media,
optical media and compact disk of electronic records:
10.3.1 Storage conditions for facility
a. In storage facility any electronic device or non-magnetic device shall not be installed
facility.
b. All media and containers shall be inspected for their access to the facility.
c. The electronic recording media should be protected from an electronic signals.
d. The temperature of 40 ~ 80℉ and relative humidity of 30 ~ 50% shall be kept.
e. No smoking and no food are allowed inside.
10.3.2 Storage conditions for magnetic media
a. Be stored in a vertical rack according to a supplier’s recommendations.
b. The electronic media that are stored for a permanent or long period should be tested less
than every 6 months before writing.
c. Magnetic reel tapes shall be readable based on a statistical sampling method.
d. 62 ~ 68℉ and 35 ~ 45% humidity, etc.
10.3.3 Storage conditions for optical media
a. The optical media that have been stored for a permanent or long-term storage shall be
replicated before their storage life are expired according to supplier’s recommendations.
10.3.4 Storage conditions for CD-ROM
a. 50 ~ 77℉ and 20 ~ 50% humidity
b. The storage life span of CD-ROMs that are stored for a long term shall be specified.
10.4 The quality assurance records management system of electronic media should comply with
following requirements:
a. Regulatory issue summary 00-018 “Guidance on managing quality assurance records in
electronic media”
b. GL 88-18, “Plant record storage on optical disks”
c. NIRMA, Technical Guide (TG) 11-1998, “Authentication of records and media”
d. NIRMA, Technical Guide (TG) 15-1998, “Management of electronic records”
e. NIRMA, Technical Guide (TG) 16-1998, “Software configuration management and
quality assurance”
f. NIRMA, Technical Guide (TG) 21-1998, “Electronic records protection and restoration”
4C-19

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0
11.0 ELECTRICAL DRAWING REQUIREMENTS
11.1 General
11.1.1 The Supplier shall furnish prints for all necessary data required for an adequate review of the
schematic and wiring diagrams. This information typically consists of:
a. Complete drawings and development for all control and instrument switches, timers,
motor operated valves, etc., when information is already shown on drawings supplied.
b. Individual internal connection diagrams for all instruments, recorders, relays,
annunciators, power supplies, programmable controllers, etc.
11.1.2 Each device shall have the same identification wherever it is used on any other drawing.
11.1.3 All drawings shall be completely labeled to identify the drawing type and the project by
customer.
11.2 Schematic Diagrams
11.2.1 Schematic diagrams furnished by the Supplier shall be detailed so that the operation of the
equipment is very evident and a person with an average understanding of schematics can
become aware of the sequence of operations under normal conditions, while at the same
time be able to determine corrective measures in the case of faulty or improper operation of
the equipment. Circuit flow and component arrangement shall be from left to right or top
to bottom.
11.2.2 Schematics shall show all electrical components. Components shall be identified with
device numbers in accordance with applicable Industry Standards.
11.2.3 All devices shall have their terminal numbers shown. Any device with contacts shall have
all of the contacts shown along side its operating coil. All such contacts shall be identified
as to where they are used in other parts of the circuitry.
11.2.4 Schematics shall not be drawn where any part is crowded or illegible to the extent that its
content is unclear.
11.2.5 Schematics shall show a relay development on the same drawing or page where it is used in
the circuit. This development for each relay used shall show all terminal numbers and all
normally open and/or normally closed contacts as furnished. On this development, each
contact used shall have a reference to its use or position in the circuit and shall cross-
reference all contacts between drawings using the drawing numbers assigned by the Buyer if
4C-20

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0
the contacts are used on another drawing. When relay contacts are used on a drawing other
than where the coil is shown, the Buyer's reference drawing number should be shown just
above or below the relay contact device number. Black box devices shown on schematic
diagrams shall reference the manufacturers drawings or bulletins. These drawings or
bulletins shall be part of the document submittal.
11.2.6 Schematics that do not meet all of the preceding requirements will not be accepted.
11.3 Wiring Diagrams
11.3.1 The Supplier shall prepare detailed diagrams indicating all panel wire terminations in a
manner that physically and visually identifies each wire connection. The diagram shall
show a combination of wiring that connects to the internal components and to terminal
blocks used for the field connections to the equipment.
11.3.2 Each diagram shall show the devices in their physical positions relative to each other. The
Supplier shall assign and affix an instrument location grid code to each device, physically
and on the diagram.
11.3.3 The Supplier shall indicate the location of any shipping-split and show the wiring of
shipping-split terminal blocks if any are furnished. (A note should indicate the removable
end of the shipping-split jumper wires.)
11.3.4 Each device shall be shown as viewed from the wiring side of the device. Terminal
position and terminal numbering shall be shown identical to the device. If none exist, the
Supplier shall assign terminal numbers to be shown on all diagrams for the device.
11.3.5 Plug and/or receptacle units for each instrument or annunciator shall be shown at their
relative position with the type and style number as furnished. Wiring of these terminals
shall be shown in sequential table form.
11.3.6 Each device shall have its instrument number and other information shown adjacent to it.
Black boxes shown on wiring diagram shall reference the manufacturer's drawings or
bulletin. These drawings or bulletins shall be part of the document submittal.
11.3.7 Each electrical connection (other than a jumper on the same device) shall be shown with its
wire code and destination. The reference drawing number shall also be shown if the other
end of the wire is shown terminated on another drawing. This facilitates the identification
and tracing of the circuit throughout the diagrams.
4C-21

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0
11.3.8 Detailed wiring drawings of the panel connection side of all terminal blocks shall be
furnished. A minimum of four (4) inches of space shall be furnished on the terminal block
drawings for each row of terminals on the drawings (8 inches between each row of terminal
blocks) to permit the addition of the field connections. (See Attachment 7)
11.3.9 If wiring is color-coded, the coding shall be shown on the diagrams.
11.3.10 If wiring is numbered with bands or sleeves, these numbers shall appear on the diagrams.
Wiring and contacts on the diagrams shall be cross-referenced as specified under "Schematic
Diagrams" in Subsection 11.2.5.
Attachments 3 through 8 indicate representative methods of assigning instrument location
codes and preparing point-to-point wiring diagrams.
11.4 Assignment of Instrument Location Grid Codes
11.4.1 Attachment 4 indicates the method to be used in the layout of the instrument locations for a
typical panel. A left-to-right numbering sequence (when facing the wiring side of the
respective panel) and a top-to-bottom lettering sequence is recommended. Note that "F"
and "R" identify front and rear panels. (Eliminate use of "R" if no rear panel is furnished).
11.4.2 Refer to the front panel elevations and internal views, if any, and assign a vertical row
number to all devices including those mounted on the rear of the overhead, vertical,
benchboard, and apron areas. The row numbers should be consecutive with respect to a
position as viewed from the rear, and should include the maximum number of devices
possible for the front panel.
11.4.3 Repeat the procedure for the top-to-bottom row letters ending with the lowest device on the
apron.
11.4.4 The same procedure sequence should be followed before starting the wiring diagrams for the
rear panels for a duplex control board.
11.4.5 With all possible locations identified, each wiring diagram can then be designed and
numbered in an orderly fashion.
4C-22 (Final)

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0
ATTACHMENT 1
SUPPLIER’S TRANSMITTAL
2nd Radwaste R/S Building
From :
Supplier
Transmittal No.
Date
CC :
To : A/E DDCC
ZIP CODE 39660,
269 HYEOKSIN-RO, GIMCHEON-SI,
GYEONGSANGBUK-DO,
REPUBLIC OF KOREA
Page of
* Sh : If Sheet No. Is Applicable
Spec. No. :
Spec. Title :
** Submitted for : R – Review, I – Information
*** Review Status for A/E Use Only
DOCUMENT NUMBER **FOR
QT’Y
Project Doc. No. (PNS) REV. & DOCUMENT TITLE
Page TYPE R I
Supplier’s Doc. No. Sh.*
***
RS
Remarks : Supplier
Date :
/
Name / Signature

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0
ATTACHMENT 1
SUPPLIER’S TRANSMITTAL
SUPPLIER DOCUMENT LIST (CONTINUED) Page of
DOCUMENT NUMBER **FOR
QT’Y
***
Project Doc. No. (PNS) REV. & DOCUMENT TITLE
Page R I RS
TYPE
Supplier’s Doc. No. Sh.*

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0
ATTACHMENT 1
SUPPLIER’S TRANSMITTAL
(RETURN COPY)
2nd Radwaste R/S Building
To :
From : A/E DDCC
CC :
Page of
Supplier
Transmittal No.
Date
Spec. No. :
Spec. Title :
ZIP CODE 39660,
269 HYEOKSIN-RO, GIMCHEON-SI,
GYEONGSANGBUK-DO,
REPUBLIC OF KOREA
A/E Transmittal
No.
Date
* Sh : If Sheet No. Is Applicable
** Submitted for : R – Review, I – Information
*** Review Status for A/E Use Only
DOCUMENT NUMBER **FOR
QT’Y
***
Project Doc. No. (PNS) REV. & DOCUMENT TITLE
Page R I RS
TYPE
Supplier’s Doc. No. Sh.*
Remarks : A/E
Date :
/
Name / Signature

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0
ATTACHMENT 1
SUPPLIER’S TRANSMITTAL
(RETURN COPY)
SUPPLIER DOCUMENT LIST (CONTINUED) Page of
DOCUMENT NUMBER **FOR
QT’Y
***
Project Doc. No. (PNS) REV. & DOCUMENT TITLE
Page R I RS
TYPE
Supplier’s Doc. No. Sh.*

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0
ATTACHMENT 2
DRAWING AND DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE LIST
Supplier Name
Spec. No.: Submittal Sch. List Rev. No. Date: Page of
PNS Doc. Number
Supplier Doc. No. Sh.
Full Document Title*
R**
App. 4D
Submittal
I
Requirement
Sch. Date
Note : * Supplier shall incorporate project tag number and/or P.O. item in document title column for all design
drawings/documents (using Microsoft Excel only).
** Submitted for : R – Review, I - Information

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0
ATTACHMENT 9
SUPPLIER’S DRAWING/DOCUMENT CHANGE NOTICE
(RESUBMITTAL)
Rev. Changes
PNS No. Description of Changes Remarks
No. Was Is
NOTE : When the modification or changes affect the interface with the others (e.g. system/equipment/scope of supply), an asterisk(*) mark shall be indicated
in the “Remarks” column.

Appendix 4C
Rev. 0
ATTACHMENT 10
INSPECTION REPORT FOR COMPACT DISC
Disc No : -
Item
Buyer Division Dept. Responsible person [Tel : ]
Supplier Division Dept. Responsible person [Tel : ]
Classification Statement of Compact disc submission and undertaking
Supplier (Signature) [Tel : ]
Submitted Item
(1) Compact Disc : Q’ty [ ]
and
(2) Processed Index List (sorted by PNS No.)
Quantity
Pertinent
File No.
Acceptor (Signature) [Tel : ]
Result for
Inspection
Comprehensive
Quantity inspection
decision
Image quality
inspection
Appearance inspection
Inspection
Term
Inspection
Confirmed
by Supplier
Retrieval
linkage inspection
Inspector Inspector
[Tel : ] [Tel : ]
This report guarantees that inspection was performed by the pertinent person according to the rules and
procedures.
Certified by Buyer

2ND RADWASTE R/S BLDG. APPENDIX 4D
DRAWING AND DATA SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
Spec. No. : 0-771-J212 Revision No.: 0 Page 1 of 9
SUBMIT
PNS REQUIREMENTS
FOR
GUIDE REMARKS
SPECIFICATION
DOCUMENT DESCRIPTION
R I PARA. NO.
QUANTITY SUBMITTAL ⑷
E N ⑴
& WEEKS
V F
TYPE ⑵ ⑶
W O
D0. Submittal with Proposal * One Copy
Per Each
. Drawing Showing General Arrangement, Anchorage, 4.04.B.3 PR Proposal
Principal Dimension, Weight of Equipment unless
Otherwise
. Spare Parts List 3A.2.4 PR Specified
. Special Tool List 3A.2.3 PR
. Variance List 3A.2.5 PR
. Summary of Equipment Qualification Program 4.05.A.9 PR
(Dynamic)
. KEPIC/ASME/ISO Certificate, etc. 3A.2.5 PR
. Quality Assurance Manual 3A.2.5 PR
. Work Schedule 4.04.B.2 PR
. Overview of the System Architecture with Technical 4.04.B.3 PR
Description
. Internal System Configuration Diagram 4.04.B.3 PR
. Individual Control Circuit and I/O Card Assignment 4.04.B.3 PR
Drawing with Equipment/Component List per Cabinet
. Typical Logic Circuit Schematic Diagrams 4.04.B.3 PR
. An Analog Control Loop (Sample by Tenderer) 4.04.B.3 PR
Schematic Diagram
. Typical Composite Logic and Analog Control 4.04.B.3 PR
Algorithm Diagrams
. Control Switch Module and Panel Mounted Instruments 4.04.B.3 PR/Film
Outline with Key Physical Dimensions, Color
Photograph and full size Negative Film
. Hardware Feature for Protection against EMI/RFI/ 4.04.B.3 PR
ESD/Transient/Surge
. Communication Method Protocol Design Requirement/ 4.04.B.3 PR
Specification
. Cabinet load list including Buyer’s loop no. 4.04.B.3 PR
. Typical functional block diagrams, description and 4.04.B.3 PR
model no. for all types of modules
. Communication Performance Calculation 4.04.B.3 PR
(1) Refer to Appendix 4C, Paragraph 1.3 for detail explanations.
(2) Quantity: In numeral, Type: P=Paper Printing/Photocopy,
E= Electronic Files (N:NATIVE, P:PDF, T:TIFF, D:DXF, X : EXCEL)
(3) Submittal due time in calendar weeks prior to (-) or after (+) the event indicated.
PR = With Proposal, AW = Award, FB = Fabrication, SH = Shipping ,
* = Other Event/Activity defined in remarks column
(4) Tenderer to indicate his schedule in remarks column if different from (3) .
Form Appendix 4D, Rev. 0

2ND RADWASTE R/S BLDG. APPENDIX 4D
DRAWING AND DATA SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
Spec. No. : 0-771-J212 Revision No.: Add. 1 Page 2 of 9
SUBMIT PNS
REQUIREMENTS
FOR GUIDE REMARKS
SPECIFICATION
DOCUMENT DESCRIPTION QUANTITY SUBMITTAL
RE IN PARA. NO.
& WEEKS ⑷
VW FO ⑴
TYPE ⑵ ⑶
D0. Submittal with Proposal (Cont.)
. Operator Interface Subsystem/Maintenance 4.04.B.3 PR
Subsystem Hardware/Software List and Description
. Operator Interface Subsystem Functional Block 4.04.B.3 PR
Diagram, including diagnostic and network interface
requirements and description.
. Maintenance Subsystem Functional Block Diagram, 4.04.B.3 PR
including diagnostic and network interface
requirements and Description
. Each Digital and Analog loop's System Response 4.04.B.3 PR
Time with detail description, with Multiplexer and
without Multiplexer
. Typical EMI/RFI and ESD Test Plan 4.05.A.11, PR
4.10.B.2.a
. Typical Hardware and Software Integration Plan 4.10.B.2.c PR
. Typical Field Performance Test Plan 4.10.D PR
. System Reliability and Availability Data with Backup 4.04.B.6 PR
Documents
. Component Replacement and Maintenance Schedule 4.12.B.6 PR
. Description of heat removal provision of all the 4.05.A.18 PR
Cabinets
. Description of software programming method 4.05.C.2.d.d4 PR
. Detail Description of Data Communication 4.05.B.3 PR
. Training Program 4.01.B.34 PR
. Supplier's Experience List 3A.2.5.F PR
. Other Data and Documents Required in Section 3 PR
. Supplier Document List Requiring Revision for LILW 4.01.B.31 PR
phase 1 PCMS 4.04.B.3
(1) Refer to Appendix 4C, Paragraph 1.3 for detail explanations.
(2) Quantity: In numeral, Type: P=Paper Printing/Photocopy,
E= Electronic Files (N:NATIVE, P:PDF, T:TIFF, D:DXF, X : EXCEL)
(3) Submittal due time in calendar weeks prior to (-) or after (+) the event indicated.
PR = With Proposal, AW = Award, FB = Fabrication, SH = Shipping ,
* = Other Event/Activity defined in remarks column
(4) Tenderer to indicate his schedule in remarks column if different from (3) .
Form Appendix 4D, Rev. 0

2ND RADWASTE R/S BLDG. APPENDIX 4D
DRAWING AND DATA SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
Spec. No. : 0-771-J212 Revision No.: 0 Page 3 of 9
SUBMIT PNS
FOR GUIDE
RE IN
VW FO ⑴
SPECIFICATION
DOCUMENT DESCRIPTION
PARA. NO.
REQUIREMENTS
REMARKS
QUANTITY SUBMITTAL
& WEEKS ⑷
TYPE ⑵ ⑶
X
X
D1. Quality Assurance/Quality Surveillance
QM-A . Quality Assurance Manual App. 4A1
4.0
QL-A . Supplier's Quality Plan App. 4B
(Note : Supplier shall submit to Inspection Contractor
for review)
3P+1EN or 1EP AW+2
3P+1EN or 1EP AW+2
To KORAD
X
D2. Schedule & Progress
CL-A . Detail Drawing and Data Submittal Schedule
4.04.B.2
5P+1EN or 1EP AW+2
X CL-B . Supplier's Work Schedule Including Engineering, 4.04.B.2
Procurement, Fabrication & Delivery
X CR-A . Work Progress Report 4.04.B.2
5P+1EN or 1EP AW+2* *Also to
KORAD
5P+1EN or 1EP AW+4 & *
D3. Design & Engineering
X DZ-A . CD Including CAD Graphic Files 4.04.B.3 1 *1+5 *1 Engineer-
ing Release
X DR-B . System Overview Architecture with Technical 4.04.B.3 5P+1EN or 1EP AW+2
Description.
X DR-C . EWS Functional Block Diagram, including Diagnostic 4.04.B.3 4P+1EN or 1EP AW+2
and Network Interface Requirements, and
Description.
X DD-A . Internal System Configuration Diagram 4.04.B.3 4P+1EN or 1ET AW+2
X DG-A . System General Arrangement Drawing/Outline and 4.04.B.3 4P+1EN or 1ET AW+4
Assembly Detail Drawings
X DG-B . Assembly and outline dimension detail drawing 4.04.B.3 4P+1EN or 1ET AW+2
X DG-C . Building Structure Load Summary Form and 4.04.B.3 5P+1EN or 1EP AW+4
Calculation
X DG-D . Foundation/Mounting Detail 4.04.B.3 4P+1EN or 1ET AW+4
X DG-E . Cabinet Internal Arrangement Drawing 4.04.B.3 3P+1EN or 1ET AW+4
X DG-F . Individual Control Circuit and I/O Card Assignment 4.04.B.3 3P+1EN or 1ET *1+4
Drawing Per Cabinet
X DE-A . Power Supply System Arrangement Diagram 4.04.B.3 3P+1EN or 1ET AW+5
X DE-B . Internal 125V DC Power Distributing Drawing 4.04.B.3 3P+1EN or 1ET AW+5
X DE-C . Internal Wiring Diagram 4.04.B.3 3P+1EN or 1ET AW+5
X DE-H . All type of display pages with related design 4.04.B.3 3P+1EN or 1ET AW+5
document
(1) Refer to Appendix 4C, Paragraph 1.3 for detail explanations.
(2) Quantity: In numeral, Type: P=Paper Printing/Photocopy,
E= Electronic Files (N:NATIVE, P:PDF, T:TIFF, D:DXF, X : EXCEL)
(3) Submittal due time in calendar weeks prior to (-) or after (+) the event indicated.
PR = With Proposal, AW = Award, FB = Fabrication, SH = Shipping ,
* = Other Event/Activity defined in remarks column
(4) Tenderer to indicate his schedule in remarks column if different from (3) .
Form Appendix 4D, Rev. 0

2ND RADWASTE R/S BLDG. APPENDIX 4D
DRAWING AND DATA SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
Spec. No. : 0-771-J212 Revision No.: Add. 1 Page 4 of 9
SUBMIT PNS
REQUIREMENTS
FOR GUIDE REMARKS
SPECIFICATION
DOCUMENT DESCRIPTION QUANTITY SUBMITTAL
RE IN PARA. NO.
& WEEKS ⑷
VW FO ⑴
TYPE ⑵ ⑶
D3. Design & Engineering (Cont'd)
X DE-D . Fiber optic/prefabricated cables termination data 4.04.B.3 3P+1EN+ 1EX AW+8
(drawing) including cable length requirements
from point of entry to termination and CD
including database file.
X DE-E . Field Connection Terminal Arrangement Drawings 4.04.B.3 5P+1EN or 1ET *1+2 *1 Engineer-
and Designation, and CD including those database file ing Release
·
X DE-F . Typical On-Off Loop Schematic Diagram/Analog 4.04.B.3 3P+1EN or 1ET AW+2
Loop Schematic Diagram.
·
X DE-G . Individual On-Off Loop Schematic Diagram 4.04.B.3 3P+1EN or 1ET *1+2
X DM-B . Individual cabinet power supply requirement 4.04.B.3 3P+1EN or 1EP *1+2
including power consumption.
X DE-J . Documents/Drawings for Engineering Station (DCS) 4.04.B.3 3P+1EN or 1ET AW+8
X DL-A . Loop Card List 4.04.B.3 3P+1EX *1+4
X DL-B . Equipment/Component List per cabinet 4.04.B.3 3P+1EX *1+4
X DL-C . Panel Mounted Device List 4.04.B.3 3P+1EX *1+4
X DL-D . Fiber Optic Cable List 4.04.B.3 3P+1EX *1+4
X DL-E . Comprehensive I/O Summary List 4.04.B.3 3P+1EX *1+5
X DL-F . Cable Data Sheet per Fiber Optic Cable List 4.04.B.3 3P+1EX *1+4
App. 4P
X DL-G . Supplier Document List Requiring Revision for LILW 4.01.B.31 3P+1EX *1+5
phase 1 PCMS 4.04.B.3
X DL-H . Revised I/O List for LILW phase 1 PCMS 4.01.B.31 3P+1EX *1+5
4.04.B.3
X DE-L . The Cross Section Drawing and Installation 4.04.B.3 3P+1EN or 1EP AW+5
Instruction of Fiber Optic Cable
X DL-G . Source Code and Listing 4.04.B.3 3P+1EN or 1EP SH-8
X DM-A . Documentation for the Programming Kit and Program 4.04.B.3 3P+1EN or 1EP AW+14
Change procedure
X DS-A . Internal Hardware Circuit Diagram for Each Type of 4.04.B.3 3P+1EN or 1ET AW+3
Module
(1) Refer to Appendix 4C, Paragraph 1.3 for detail explanations.
(2) Quantity: In numeral, Type: P=Paper Printing/Photocopy,
E= Electronic Files (N:NATIVE, P:PDF, T:TIFF, D:DXF, X : EXCEL)
(3) Submittal due time in calendar weeks prior to (-) or after (+) the event indicated.
PR = With Proposal, AW = Award, FB = Fabrication, SH = Shipping ,
* = Other Event/Activity defined in remarks column
(4) Tenderer to indicate his schedule in remarks column if different from (3) .
Form Appendix 4D, Rev. 0

2ND RADWASTE R/S BLDG. APPENDIX 4D
DRAWING AND DATA SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
Spec. No. : 0-771-J212 Revision No.: 0 Page 5 of 9
SUBMIT PNS
FOR GUIDE
RE IN
VW FO ⑴
SPECIFICATION
DOCUMENT DESCRIPTION
PARA. NO.
REQUIREMENTS
REMARKS
QUANTITY SUBMITTAL
& WEEKS ⑷
TYPE ⑵ ⑶
D3. Design & Engineering (Cont'd)
X DT-A . Fuse & Breaker Characteristic Curves & Data, Relay 4.04.B.3
Contact and Breaker Rating
X DT-D . Breaker/Fuses Coordination Verification Report 4.04.B.3
X DT-E . Information for Setpoint Margin and Instrument Loop 4.04.B.3
Uncertainty Calculation
X DS-B . Cabinet Load List 4.04.B.3
X DS-C . Functional Block Diagram, Description and 4.04.B.3
Component Model No. for Each Type of Module.
X ML-A . Bill of Material 4.04.B.3
X DR-A . Analysis report for System Response Time 4.04.B.3
3P+1EN or 1EP AW+5
3P+1EN or 1EP FB-4
3P+1EN or 1EP AW+12
3P+1EN or 1EP AW+4
3P+1EN or 1EP AW+3
3P+1EN or 1EP AW+15
3P+1EN or 1EP AW+2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
DM-D . Grounding and Shielding Configuration Diagram and 4.04.B.3 3P+1EN or 1EP AW+4
Ground Cable Data
DM-C . Hardware Feature for Protection against EMI/RFI/ 4.04.B.3 3P+1EN or 1EP *1+2 *1 Engineer-
ESD/Transient/Surge ing Release
DT-B . Data Communication Method within Package A 4.04.B.3 3P+1EN or 1EP AW+4
system and between other packages
DI-A . All Type of Display Page 4.04.B.3 3P+1EN or 1EP AW+15
DR-D . Segmentation Report 4.04.B.3 3P+1EN or 1EP AW+3
TC-A . Temperature and heat generation data (Paragraph 4.04.B.3 3P+1EN or 1EP AW+3
T.05.A.20.a).
MZ-A . Finish Color Chips 4.04.B.3 & 5P+1EN or 1EP *-12
4.08.A.3.b
* Coating
(1) Refer to Appendix 4C, Paragraph 1.3 for detail explanations.
(2) Quantity: In numeral, Type: P=Paper Printing/Photocopy,
E= Electronic Files (N:NATIVE, P:PDF, T:TIFF, D:DXF, X : EXCEL)
(3) Submittal due time in calendar weeks prior to (-) or after (+) the event indicated.
PR = With Proposal, AW = Award, FB = Fabrication, SH = Shipping ,
* = Other Event/Activity defined in remarks column
(4) Tenderer to indicate his schedule in remarks column if different from (3) .
Form Appendix 4D, Rev. 0

2ND RADWASTE R/S BLDG. APPENDIX 4D
DRAWING AND DATA SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
Spec. No. : 0-771-J212 Revision No.: 0 Page 6 of 9
SUBMIT PNS
FOR GUIDE
RE IN
VW FO ⑴
SPECIFICATION
DOCUMENT DESCRIPTION
PARA. NO.
REQUIREMENTS
REMARKS
QUANTITY SUBMITTAL
& WEEKS ⑷
TYPE ⑵ ⑶
D3. Design & Engineering (Cont'd)
X PM-A . Catalog of Supplier supplied instruments. 4.04.B.3 3P+1EN or 1EP AW+12
X MR-A . Data for chemical analysis and mechanical properties 4.04.B.3 3P+1EN or 1EP AW+5
of metal structural materials.
X DL-A . Complete instrument data lists. 4.04.B.3 5P+1EX AW+12
X TP-A . Detailed field test procedure for adjustment and/or 4.04.B.3 3P+1EN or 1EP *5-10 *5 Relevant
calibration (functional verification) for each Test
component such as all MMIS I/O cards, controllers,
control modules, MMI instrument, etc.
X TP-B . Detailed software unit test procedures. 4.04.B.3 3P+1EN or 1EP *5-10
X TP-C . Detailed software integration procedures. 4.04.B.3 3P+1EN or 1EP *5-10
X TP-D . Detailed MMIS system test procedures. 4.04.B.3 3P+1EN or 1EP *5-10
D4. Procurement
X PP-A . Sub-Supplier Qualification and Surveillance/ 4.04.B.4 3P+1EN or 1EP *1-6 *1 sub-
Inspection Procedure Contracting
D5. Manufacturing and Fabrication
X MP-A . Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and 4.04.B.5 3P+1EN or 1EP *2-10 *2 Welding
Procedure Qualification Record (PQR)
X MP-B . Cleaning & Protection Procedure 4.04.B.5 3P+1EN or 1EP *3-10 *3 Cleaning
X MP-C . Surface Preparation & Coating Procedure with 4.04.B.5.c 3P+1EN or 1EP *4-10 *4 Coating
Supplier's Standard Coating System Technical Data
Sheets
X MR-A . Nameplate Data or Nameplate Drawings 4.04.B.5 3P+1EN or 1EP SH-15
X MM-A . Documentation for the Fiber Optic Kit 4.04.B.5 3P+1EN or 1EP SH-10
X MM-B . Fiber Optic Cable Installation Procedure 4.04.B.5 3P+1EN or 1EP AW+15
(1) Refer to Appendix 4C, Paragraph 1.3 for detail explanations.
(2) Quantity: In numeral, Type: P=Paper Printing/Photocopy,
E= Electronic Files (N:NATIVE, P:PDF, T:TIFF, D:DXF, X : EXCEL)
(3) Submittal due time in calendar weeks prior to (-) or after (+) the event indicated.
PR = With Proposal, AW = Award, FB = Fabrication, SH = Shipping ,
* = Other Event/Activity defined in remarks column
(4) Tenderer to indicate his schedule in remarks column if different from (3) .
Form Appendix 4D, Rev. 0

2ND RADWASTE R/S BLDG. APPENDIX 4D
DRAWING AND DATA SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
Spec. No. : 0-771-J212 Revision No.: 0 Page 7 of 9
SUBMIT PNS
FOR GUIDE
RE IN
VW FO ⑴
SPECIFICATION
DOCUMENT DESCRIPTION
PARA. NO.
REQUIREMENTS
REMARKS
QUANTITY SUBMITTAL
& WEEKS ⑷
TYPE ⑵ ⑶
D6. Test and Examination
X TP-E . All listed electrical Test Procedures including Fiber 4.10.B.2.a 3P+1EN or 1EP *5-12 *5 Relevant
Optic Test guideline & Procedure Test
X TP-F . Components/Assemblies Reliability Test Procedure 4.10.B.2 3P+1EN or 1EP *5-12
X TP-G . Integrated System Test Procedure 4.10.B.2 3P+1EN or 1EP *5-12
X TP-H . Stability Test Procedure 4.10.B.2 3P+1EN or 1EP *5-12
X TP-I . Factory Acceptance Test Plan/Procedure 4.10.B.2 3P+1EN or 1EP *5-12
X TP-J . Field Performance Test Procedure 4.10.D 3P+1EN or 1EP SH-8
X TP-K . Critical Software Unit Witness Test Plan and Procedure 4.04.B.3.ax 3P+1EN or 1EP *5-8
4.10.E.2
X TP-H . EMI/RFI/ESD Test Plan, Procedure and Report 4.05.A.11 3P+1EN or 1EP *5-8
X TR-A . Failure Modes & Effects Analysis Report 4.04.B.6 3P+1EN or 1EP AW+4
X TR-B . System Reliability/Availability Data with Back-up 4.04.B.6 3P+1EN or 1EP AW+10
Document 4.05.A.3
X TR-E . Critical Software Unit Witness Test Report 4.04.B.3.ax 3P+1EN or 1EP *5+4
4.10.B.2
X TP-L . Software Verification and Validation Plan/Procedure 4.06.A.7 3P+1EN or 1EP AW+8
X TR-C . Software Verification and Validation Report 4.06.A.7 3P+1EN or 1EP SH
D7. Packing and Shipping
X SP-A . Packing Procedure 4.11
X SP-B . Shipping & Transportation Procedure 4.11
X SL-A . List of Loose Parts : Parts or Accessories not Attached 4.11
to the Equipment (Delivered) to be Installed at Site
3P+1EN or 1EP
3P+1EN or 1EP
3P+1EN or 1EP
SH-15
SH-15
**SH
**Two
Copies With
Shipment to
Site & One
Copy to the
A/E
including CD
ROM
(1) Refer to Appendix 4C, Paragraph 1.3 for detail explanations.
(2) Quantity: In numeral, Type: P=Paper Printing/Photocopy,
E= Electronic Files (N:NATIVE, P:PDF, T:TIFF, D:DXF, X : EXCEL)
(3) Submittal due time in calendar weeks prior to (-) or after (+) the event indicated.
PR = With Proposal, AW = Award, FB = Fabrication, SH = Shipping ,
* = Other Event/Activity defined in remarks column
(4) Tenderer to indicate his schedule in remarks column if different from (3) .
Form Appendix 4D, Rev. 0

2ND RADWASTE R/S BLDG. APPENDIX 4D
DRAWING AND DATA SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
Spec. No. : 0-771-J212 Revision No.: Add. 1 Page 8 of 9
SUBMIT PNS
REQUIREMENTS
FOR GUIDE REMARKS
SPECIFICATION
DOCUMENT DESCRIPTION QUANTITY SUBMITTAL
RE IN PARA. NO.
& WEEKS ⑷
VW FO ⑴
TYPE ⑵ ⑶
X IM-A D8. Site Instruction and Guideline 4.12 26P+1EP SH-8 5 Copies
with
. Instruction Manual Including the Following Shipment
Information : to Site & 6
Copies to the
. Handling and Storage Instruction A/E
including CD
. Installation Instruction Including Assembly and ROM
Disassembly Procedure(s)
. Final General Arrangement, Assembly and Erection
Drawings
. Complete Start-Up, Calibration Procedure, Operation,
Troubleshooting and Maintenance Instruction
. Warranted Performance Data
. Calibration Curves of Non-Linear Devices
. Programming Guide and Diagnostic Procedure
. Test Instructions
. Component Replacement and Maintenance Schedule
. Complete Material / Parts Lists
D9. Quality Verification Document
X VL-A . QVDL and It’s Sample Forms of Quality Verification App.4C.7.3 5P+1EN or 1EP AW+4
Documents Listed in Appendix 4E
(Note : Supplier shall submit to Inspection Contractor Directly to
for review) Inspection
Contractor
X VR-E . Quality Verification Documents App.4C.7.0 5P+1EN or 1EP *SH
*With
Shipment &
Not to be
Submitted to
the A/E
(1) Refer to Appendix 4C, Paragraph 1.3 for detail explanations.
(2) Quantity: In numeral, Type: P=Paper Printing/Photocopy,
E= Electronic Files (N:NATIVE, P:PDF, T:TIFF, D:DXF, X : EXCEL)
(3) Submittal due time in calendar weeks prior to (-) or after (+) the event indicated.
PR = With Proposal, AW = Award, FB = Fabrication, SH = Shipping ,
* = Other Event/Activity defined in remarks column
(4) Tenderer to indicate his schedule in remarks column if different from (3) .
Form Appendix 4D, Rev. 0

2ND RADWASTE R/S BLDG. APPENDIX 4D
DRAWING AND DATA SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
Spec. No. : 0-771-J212 Revision No.: 0 Page 9 of 9
SUBMIT PNS
FOR GUIDE
RE IN
VW FO ⑴
SPECIFICATION
DOCUMENT DESCRIPTION
PARA. NO.
REQUIREMENTS
REMARKS
QUANTITY SUBMITTAL
& WEEKS ⑷
TYPE ⑵ ⑶
X
X
X
X
D10. Equipment Qualification
EP-A . Dynamic Qualification Program (Test Plan or Procedure) App.4I 3.3 5P+1EN or 1EP AW+8 *Qual. Test
*-8
ER-A . Dynamic Qualification Report App.4I 5P+1EN or 1EP AW+8
14.0
ER-B . Justification Document for Aging Conditions (Mild 4.05.A.10 5P+1EN or 1EP SH-20
Environment) 4.10.B.2.b1
ER-C . Verification document for Equipment 4.05.A.10 5P+1EN or 1EP SH-20
X
X
D11. 3D CAD Electronic File
·Native 3D CAD File Format & DXF
·Index of Equipment Part List
App.4C, 9
App. 4C, 9
1EN+1ED
1EN
AW + 8
AW + 8
X
X
D12. Electronic Media
. As-Built Drawings
. As-Built Documents
App.4C,
8, 9
1P+1EN&1ET
*
App.4C,
8, 9
1P+1ENor1EP
*
*After
Installatio
n
(1) Refer to Appendix 4C, Paragraph 1.3 for detail explanations.
(2) Quantity: In numeral, Type: P=Paper Printing/Photocopy,
E= Electronic Files (N:NATIVE, P:PDF, T:TIFF, D:DXF, X : EXCEL)
(3) Submittal due time in calendar weeks prior to (-) or after (+) the event indicated.
PR = With Proposal, AW = Award, FB = Fabrication, SH = Shipping ,
* = Other Event/Activity defined in remarks column
(4) Tenderer to indicate his schedule in remarks column if different from (3) .
Form Appendix 4D, Rev. 0

2ND RADWASTE R/S BLDG. APPENDIX 4E
QUALITY VERIFICATION DOCUMENTATION LIST
Spec. No. : 0-771-J212 Revision No.: 0 Page 1 of 3
IDENTIFICATION AND DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT QUALITY PROGRAM DOCUMENT CERTIFIED BY THE BUYER’S
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION PROVIDED SUPPLIER REPRESENTATIVE
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION PARA. SERIAL
BY ATTACH.
ITEM NO. EQUIP. NO./TAG NO. DESCRIPTION OF REQUIRED DOCUMENTS NO. NO. * NO.* SIGNATURE / DATE SIGNATURE / DATE
E1. Certificate of Conformance
E2. Material Test Property
. Material Test Report
. Certificate of Compliance
(Including Electrical Items)
E3. Inspection and Test Reports
. Electrical Test Report
. Components/Assemblies Reliability
Test Report
. Failure Modes and Effect Analysis
(FMEA) Report
App.4C
7.1.1
App.4C
7.1.2
App.4C
7.1.3
4.10.B.2
4.10.B.2
4.05.A.3.
e
* SUPPLIER to show identification of individual documents
SUPPLIER CERTIFICATION
We certify that listed documentation meets the requirements
of the Purchase Contract and applicable Specifications.
Supplier
Title : Date :
THE BUYER’S REPRESENTATIVE ACCEPTANCE
The Buyer’s Representative shall indicate acceptance. When inspection
is not Required at the shop, the Buyer’s review will be made at the job site
after material or equipment has been shipped.
Accepted by :
The Buyer’s REP. & Title Date
FORM APPENDIX 4E, REV.0

2ND RADWASTE R/S BLDG. APPENDIX 4E
QUALITY VERIFICATION DOCUMENTATION LIST
Spec. No. : 0-771-J212 Revision No.: 0 Page 2 of 3
IDENTIFICATION AND DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT QUALITY PROGRAM DOCUMENT CERTIFIED BY THE BUYER’S
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION PARA. SERIAL PROVIDED SUPPLIER REPRESENTATIVE
BY ATTACH.
ITEM NO. EQUIP. NO./TAG NO. DESCRIPTION OF REQUIRED DOCUMENTS NO. NO. * NO.* SIGNATURE / DATE SIGNATURE / DATE
E3. Inspection and Test Reports (Con'd)
. Reliability and Analysis Report
. Integrated System Test Report
. Stability Test Report
. Factory Acceptance Test Report
. Software Verification and Validation
Report
. Welding Verification Documents,
Including Welding Reports
4.05.A.3
4.10.B.2
4.10.B.2
4.10.B.2
4.06.A.7
App.4B
* SUPPLIER to show identification of individual documents
SUPPLIER CERTIFICATION
We certify that listed documentation meets the requirements
of the Purchase Contract and applicable Specifications.
Supplier
Title : Date :
THE BUYER’S REPRESENTATIVE ACCEPTANCE
The Buyer’s Representative shall indicate acceptance. When inspection
is not Required at the shop, the Buyer’s review will be made at the job site
after material or equipment has been shipped.
Accepted by :
The Buyer’s REP. & Title Date
FORM APPENDIX 4E, REV.0

2ND RADWASTE R/S BLDG. APPENDIX 4E
QUALITY VERIFICATION DOCUMENTATION LIST
Spec. No. : 0-771-J212 Revision No.: 0 Page 3 of 3
IDENTIFICATION AND DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT QUALITY PROGRAM DOCUMENT CERTIFIED BY THE BUYER’S
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION PROVIDED SUPPLIER REPRESENTATIVE
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION PARA. SERIAL
BY ATTACH.
ITEM NO. EQUIP. NO./TAG NO. DESCRIPTION OF REQUIRED DOCUMENTS NO. NO. * NO.* SIGNATURE / DATE SIGNATURE / DATE
E3. Inspection and Test Reports (Con'd)
. Major Repair Verification Reports
. Other Inspection & Test Reports
Required by Section 4 or Quality
Plan
4.10.B.
2.e
E4. Final Signed-off Quality Plan
E5. SDDR/NCR/CAR (close-out), If Any
E6. Others
App. 4C
7.6.1
* SUPPLIER to show identification of individual documents
SUPPLIER CERTIFICATION
We certify that listed documentation meets the requirements
of the Purchase Contract and applicable Specifications.
Supplier
Title : Date :
THE BUYER’S REPRESENTATIVE ACCEPTANCE
The Buyer’s Representative shall indicate acceptance. When inspection
is not Required at the shop, the Buyer’s review will be made at the job site
after material or equipment has been shipped.
Accepted by :
The Buyer’s REP. & Title Date
FORM APPENDIX 4E, REV.0

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/ STORAGE BUILDING
APPENDIX 4H
Documentation Requirements of Supplier
Deviations and Non-Conformances
KEPCO E&C JOB No. : 11G79
IS UE STATUS
0 05/03/18 Construction is ue
REV. NO DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
Preparer : 서정욱, Tel : 054-421-6150

Appendix 4H
Rev. 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
1.0 SCOPE ········································································ 4H-1
2.0 DEFINITION ·································································· 4H-1
3.0 REQUIREMENTS FOR SUPPLIER DEVIATION······················· 4H-2
DISPOSITION REQUEST
ATTACHMENT
1. Supplier Deviation Dispositions Request Form
TC 4H-1 (Final)

Appendix 4H
Rev. 0
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This Appendix delineates requirements for notification to the Buyer of Supplier
requested deviations and nonconformances to the technical specification requirements in
the contract.
2.0 DEFINITION
2.1 Modify Specification
In general, modification of Specification is applicable to “proposed deviation” except
“nonconformance”. In case the proposed deviation is acceptable, A/E will issue
addendum of technical specification to the Buyer for contract change.
2.2 Repair
The process of restoring a nonconforming characteristic to a condition such that the
capability of an item to function reliably and safely is unimpaired, even though the item
still may not conform to the original requirements. Repair includes alterations to the
properties of the material through heat treating, welding, metal deposition, chemical
processing, etc.
2.3 SDDR (Supplier Deviation Disposition Request)
SDDR is a form that shall be prepared by a supplier to request the Buyer’s acceptance of
a proposed deviation from the technical specification requirements, having a proposed
disposition of “modify specification”, or to get the Buyer’s decision of the supplier-
detected nonconformances to the technical specification requirements and/or the
requirements on drawings, procedures or other documents, having a proposed disposition
of “repair” or “use-as-is”.
2.4 Supplier
An entity who provides services, equipment, components, fabrication, assembly of
components for 2nd Radwaste R/S Building. An all-inclusive term used in place of any
of the following : vendor, seller, contractor, subcontractor, fabricator, consultant, and
their subtier levels.
4H-1

Appendix 4H
Rev. 0
2.5 Surveillance
Surveillance, as used herein, may include inspection, survey, and/or audit requested by
the Buyer.
2.6 Use-As-Is
A disposition which may be imposed for a nonconformance when it can be established
that the discrepancy will result in no adverse conditions and that the item under
consideration will continue to meet all engineering functional requirements including
performance, maintainability, fitness and safety.
3.0 REQUIREMENTS FOR SUPPLIER DEVIATION DISPOSITION REQUEST
3.1 Supplier Deviation Disposition Request(SDDR) - A form that shall be prepared by all
suppliers:

• to request the Buyer’s acceptance of a proposed deviation that departs from the

Technical Specification (Section 4) requirements prior to implementation of work
associated with a deviation, having a proposed disposition of “Modify Specification”,
or

• to notify the Buyer of the Supplier-detected nonconformances to the Technical

Specification requirements and/or the requirements on drawings, procedures of other
documents previously reviewed by the A/E, having a proposed disposition of “Repair”
or “Use-As-Is”
3.2 The A/E shall be promptly (within five working days) advised of the above said
nonconformances by means of SDDR. A copy of SDDR notifying the nonconformances
to the Buyer shall be furnished to the Buyer’s Quality Surveillance Representative.
3.3 The Buyer’s acceptance of the SDDR shall be obtained prior to implementation of work
associated with a deviation or implementation of a proposed disposition to the above said
nonconformances.
3.4 The SDDR form shall not be used for cases where the Buyer has previously provided
permission the proceed using an accepted repair procedure covering a specific type of
repair, however, records shall be maintained for each specific repair.
4H-2

Appendix 4H
Rev. 0
3.5 The Supplier shall describe the recommended disposition based on appropriated analysis
and provide technical justification to be firm basis for the proposed deviation.
Submittal of requests for deviations to the A/E from lower-tier suppliers shall be through
the prime supplier.
3.6 SDDRs shall be used for all applicable specifications, regardless of quality class. The
form to be employed is attached to this Appendix as Attachment 1.
3.7 In case where the supplier proposed disposition (based on the deviation) involves cost
impact, the detailed cost amount shall be addressed by the Supplier in a separate sheet as
an attachment to the SDDR. A/E acceptance of the SDDR does not imply that the cost
amount suggested by the supplier is accepted. The cost amount will be separately
adjusted by the Buyer after issuing addendum of the Specification.
3.8 After Quality Surveillance Representative verifies and signs that the accepted disposition
was correctly implemented and accomplished, one(1) copy of the final SDDR shall be
submitted by the Supplier with a letter of transmittal to A/E DDCC.
3.9 A copy of all completed SDDRs shall be included in the Quality Verification
Documentation Package.
4H-3 (Final)

Appendix 4H
Rev. 0
2nd Radwaste R/S Building ATTACHMENT 1
SDDR (Supplier Deviation Disposition Request)
NOTE :
1. Complete instruction on back this sheet 5. A copy of the completed SDDR form shall be included by the supplier in
2. Items 1-17 below to be completed by supplier the quality verification documentation for each item to which this SDDR
3. *Items, Architect/Engineer entries only applies
4. Attach additional information whenever necessary
FOR SUPPLIER USE * FOR A/E USE
Supplier SDDR No. Date Submitted A/E SDDR No. Date Received
1. Supplier
Name Tel. No. / Fax. No./E-mail
2. Supplier’s Order No. 3. Supplier’s Part No. 4. Supplier’s Part Name 5. NCR Reference No.
6. Spec. & Rev. No. 7. A/E Part No. 8. A/E Part Name 9. Q. S. Rep. Notified
10. A/E Engineer Notified
Date Method Date Method
11. Deviation Description(attach extra sheets, sketches, photographs, etc., as necessary and identify quantity and serial numbers as applicable)
12. Supplier’s Proposed Disposition
S u p p l i e r C o m p l e t e d
□ Use-as-is □ Repair □ Modify Specification
13. Cost Impact : □ Yes □ No 14. Schedule Impact : □ Yes □ No
15. Proposed Disposition and Technical (plus cost/schedule if applicable) Justification (attach extra sheets, sketches, etc., as necessary)
16. Associated Supplier Document Change (PNS No., Supplier Document No. and Title)
17. Supplier’s Authorized Representative
Name Title
Signature Date
*18. A/E Engineering Action Engineering
Followup □ Drawing change(□ A/E □ Supplier) □ Licensing document change
□ Accepted
□ Spec. / req. change (□ A/E □ Supplier) □ Price adjustment
□ Rejected
□ Other suppliers affected □ Other
*19. A/E Disposition Statement Including Justification (attach extra sheets, sketches, etc., as necessary)
A r c h i t e c t / E n g i n e e r
*20. Signature/Date
RE /
EGS /
APM /
Construction action required □ Yes □ No
Date
21. Supplier
*22. Quality Surveillance
Representative

Instruction for Completing SDDR
Appendix 4H
Rev. 0
This form is to be used by a supplier to:
a) Notify A/E when manufactured product or service does not meet established contract requirements and to document the supplier’s proposed disposition with
their technical (and where appropriate cost/schedule) justification
b) Notify A/E when the supplier wants to propose changes to the technical specification unanticipated at time of award.
c) Record A/E’s disposition of the SDDR.
A deviation is any departure from the requirements of the technical specification, which the supplier has incorporated or proposes to incorporate in the
completed item or service provided. SDDR disposition can be classified as Use-As-Is, Repair, or Modify Specification.
Repair is defined as the process of restoring a nonconforming characteristic to a condition such that the capability of an it em to function reliably and safely is
unimpaired, even though that item still may not conform to the original requirement. Repair includes alterations to the properties of the material through
heat-treating, welding, metal deposition, chemical processing etc. The SDDR form is not to be used for cases where the A/E has pre viously provided
authorization to proceed using as accepted repair procedure covering a specific type of repair, however, records must be maintained for each specific repair.
A/E’s engineering action and disposition statement does not relieve the supplier from responsibility for the accuracy, adequacy, or suitability of the item or
service being provided as defined in the technical specification, nor does it constitute waiver of the right to renegotiate the terms of the technical specification.
Block No. Entry Information
1. Supplier’s company name, telephone number, facsimile number, and e-mail address.
2. Supplier’s order number if one has been assigned.
3. Supplier’s Part No (s). as applicable from the drawing, catalog, internal specification, etc.
4. Supplier’s Part Name
5. Supplier’s NCR No.
6. Specification Number and Revision Number
7. A/E Part No.
8. A/E Part name, if one has been assigned.
9. Date and method (Fax, E-mail, Letter, etc.) used to notify the Buyer’s Quality Surveillance Representative (QSR) whenever quality surveillance is
applicable.
10. Date and method (Fax, E-mail, Letter, etc.) used to notify A/E Engineering
11. Describe the deviating characteristics and define the extent of the out-of-specification for each identified piece affected. Include quantities and
serial, lot, batch, heat, or other numbers as appropriate. Identify the location of the deviating characteristic by print coordinates or specific location,
as applicable. Attach reproducible-quality extra sheets, sketches, etc., as necessary. When proposing a change in either supplier or A/E
documents : describe the change : identify the documents completely including title or subject, date, and revision : and where appropriate, attach a
copy of areas in question.
12. State proposed disposition.
13. Check cost impact that would result from proposed changes. If cost impact is marked “yes”, the detailed cost amount shall be addressed on a
separate sheet as an attachment to this SDDR.
14. Enter delivery schedule impact that would result from proposed changes.
15. Describe the proposed disposition and provide technical (and where appropriate, cost/schedule) justification for A/E evaluation. Attach
reproducible quality copies whenever required. If the deviation is correctable by repair, submit a detail repair procedure or reference procedure
previously submitted. Provide the Buyer PNS number, supplier number, and procedure title. For documents, provide suggested corrective
wording, procedures, documents, etc. Provide a copy of each SDDR attachment to the Buyer QSR at the supplier’s location.
16. Identify the nature changes that may be needed on associated supplier documents (drawings, specifications, procedures, manual, etc.)
17. Enter the name (typed or printed) and title of the supplier representative authorizing the disposition request and appropriate signature and date
signed.
*18 Check all applicable boxes to define the action required by the A/E engineering.
*19 Provide appropriate justification for the A/E actions indicated in Block 18. When changes to drawings, specification, or other A/E documents are
involved, each document should be identified and the associated change briefly described. If other suppliers are affected, i ndicate who they are
and the document that initiated resolution of that involvement. Other followup action (e.g. the need for additional A/E calculations, additional
drawings or sketches, inspection by an KORAD QSR, etc.) should also be identified here. If construction action is required, so indicate.
*20 RE - Signature of the responsible engineer accepting the engineering action and the date signed.
EGS - Signature of the Engineering Group Supervisor who reviewed and concurred with the disposition and date signed.
APM - Signature of the APM (or designee) and the date signed.
21. Signature of the supplier’s inspector or other representative authorized to verify that the accepted disposition was correctly accomplished and the
date signed.
*22 Signature of the KORAD QSR (when a QSR is assigned to the order) or designee and the date signed.
This signature indicated that the accepted disposition was correctly implemented and verified (on a random sample basis if the SDDR applies to
several parts)

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/ STORAGE BUILDING
APPENDIX 4P
Standard Specification for Electrical
Apparatus
KEPCO E&C JOB No. : 11G79
IS UE STATUS
0 05/31/18 Construction is ue
REV. NO DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
Preparer : 김기운, Tel : 054-421-4877

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT / STORAGE BUILDING
APPENDIX 4P
Standard Specification for Electrical Apparatus
KEPCO E&C JOB NO. : 11G79
ISSUE STATUS
0 Issue for Use
REV. NO. DATE DESCRIPTIONS PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
작성자 : 김기운 전화 : 054-421-4877

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
SECTION. TITLE PAGE
1.0 SCOPE ...………………………………………….................................... 4P-1
2.0 ATTACHMENTS
A. INSULATED TERMINAL LUGS FOR CONTROL AND
INSTRUMENTATION WIRING
B. COMPRESSION COPPER POWER LUGS
C. TERMINATION OF CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION
CABLES AND WIRES
D. CONDUIT TERMINATIONS AT THERMOCOUPLES,
TRANSMITTERS, SOLENOIDS, ETC.
E. TERMINATION OF CONDUIT AND CABLES AT MOTOR
DRIVE UNITS, VALVES, ETC.
F. HINGED COVER CABINETS WITH REMOVABLE PANEL
FOR TERMINAL BLOCK MOUNTING
G. CABLE REQUIREMENT FOR SUPPLIER FURNISHED CABLE
TC 4P -1 (Final)

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
1.0 SCOPE
This Appendix provides design requirements and general information to be used by the
Supplier for electrical equipment design. Refer to each individual attachment for specific
information regarding the scope of each one.
The products listed herein are proven to be adequate for the intended uses specified by the
buyer. Other brands may be substituted where the Supplier demonstrates that the substitute
product is adequate for the intended use.
4P-1 (Final)

ATTACHMENT A
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
INSULATED TERMINAL LUGS FOR
CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION WIRING
A-1

Attachment A
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
1.0 SPECIFICATIONS .……………………………………. ........................ A-3
A-2

Attachment A
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
1.0 SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 All terminal lugs shall be screw-compression ring tongue type.
1.2 All connections to terminal blocks, instrument, etc., shall be made with following tin
plated compression type ring tongue terminal lugs according to the location or Electrical
Classification of systems, equipment or components as specified in Section 4 of the
specification.
Terminal lugs of "Thomas & Betts", "Burndy", "Panduit", or "3M", or KS Marked as
listed on page A-5, or equivalent
1.3 The wire insulation shall be removed without nicking the conductor. The wire shall be
firmly inserted into the lug and crimped with a ratchet type, or positive action
air/hydraulic tool as listed on Page A-4, or as recommended by the lug manufacturer.
1.4 Manufacturer's standard insulating sleeve for listed terminals are Polyvinyl-Chloride
(PVC) for terminal lugs of "Thomas & Betts", "Burndy", "Panduit", or "3M""; Nylon for
KS marked or equivalent. The Supplier shall obtain the buyer's prior approval for
furnishing insulated lugs with other than Manufacturer Standard insulation on them.
Acceptable manufacturers and specific catalog numbers of acceptable insulating lugs are
listed on Page A-4.
1.5 Part numbers specified in this attachment are for use with AWG conductors. If metric
conductors are to be furnished by the Supplier, the appropriate lug from the same
manufacturer and of the same type shall be used.
1.6 Terminal lugs of KS marked or equivalent shall be made of Oxygen Free High-
Conductivity Copper (OFHC) and shall meet the KSC2620.
A-3

Attachment A
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURER
WIRE THOMAS & BETTS BURNDY PANDUIT 3M KS Marked
STUD
SIZE
SIZE
(AWG)
CATALOG INSTALLATION CATALOG INSTALLATION CATALOG INSTALLATION CATALOG INSTALLATION Nominal INSTALLATION
NUMBER TOOL NUMBER TOOL NUMBER TOOL NUMBER TOOL Number TOOL
TH 482 Recommended
22-18 6 18RA-6X WT 145C TP16-6 MR8-89-1 PV18-6R CT-400 MV18-6R/S RBP 1.5-3.5
or TH 484 Manufacture
TH 482
22-18 8 18RA-8X WT 145C TP16-8 MR8-89-1 PV18-8R CT-400 MV18-8R/L RBP 1.5-4 "
or TH 484
TH 482
22-18 10 18RA-10X WT 145C TP16-10 MR8-89-1 PV18-10R CT-400 MV18-10R/L RBP 1.5-5 "
or TH 484
TH 482
16-14 6 14RB-6X WT 145C TP14-6 MR8-89-1 PV14-6RX CT-400 MV14-6R/S RBP 2.5-3.5 "
or TH 484
TH 482
16-14 8 14RB-8X WT 145C TP14-8 MR8-89-1 PV14-8RX CT-400 MV14-8R/L RBP 2.5-4 "
or TH 484
TH 482
16-14 10 14RB-10X WT 145C TP14-10 MR8-89-1 PV14-10RX CT-400 MV14-10R/L RBP 2.5-5 "
or TH 484
TH 482
16-14 1/4" 14RB-14X WT 145C TP14-14 MR8-89-1 PV14-14RX CT-400 MV14-14R/S RBP 2.5-6 "
or TH 484
WT 145C or TH 482
12-10 6 10RC-6X TP10-6 MR8-89-1 PV10-6RX CT-460 MV10-6R RBP 4, 5-3.5 "
WT 2130 or TH 484
WT 145C or TH 482
12-10 8 10RC-8X TP10-8 MR8-89-1 PV10-8RX CT-460 MV10-8R RBP 4, 5-4 "
WT 2130 or TH 484
TH 482
12-10 10 10RC-10X WT 2130 TP10-10 MR8-89-1 PV10-10RX CT-460 MV10-10R RBP 4, 5-5 "
or TH 484
WT 145C or TH 482
12-10 1/4" 10RC-14X TP10-14 MR8-89-1 PV10-14RX CT-460 MV10-14R/S RBP 4, 6-6 "
WT 2130 or TH 484
8 10 PV8-10RX CT-720 RBP 10-5 "
8 1/4" PV8-14RX CT-720 RBP 10-6 "
A-4 (Final)

ATTACHMENT B
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
COMPRESSION COPPER POWER LUGS
B-1

Attachment B
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
1.0 SCOPE ... ……………………..............………………………………...... B-3
2.0 SPECIFICATIONS ..............……........………………………………....... B-3
B-2

Attachment B
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This Attachment provides specifications and general information for copper compression
terminal lugs to be used for terminating stranded insulated and uninsulated copper
conductors.
2.0 SPECIFICATIONS
2.1 Lugs shall be color keyed or coded, tool applied compression type (hexagonal or
circumferential), tin plated made of high conductivity copper and be listed by the
Underwriters Laboratories for use with copper cable or KS marked(only for one-hole
lugs) or equivalent.
2.2 Lugs shall be applied in accordance with the following instructions:
a. The installation tools and dies shall be of either hexagonal or circumferential
compression type as recommended by the lug manufacturer. The tooling shall be
color coded or color keyed with the lugs.
b. For inspection purposes, the manufacturer's die code shall be embossed upon the
applied compressed connection on lugs.
2.3 The bolt holes of the lugs shall be drilled and spaced in accordance with the latest NEMA
Standards Publications No. CC-1 "Electric Power Connection for substations". The bolt
holes of KS marked one-hole lugs shall be drilled in accordance with the KSC2620.
2.4 Lugs listed are long barrel type for maximum current-carrying requirements and have
barrels that are blind ended.
2.5 Lugs shall meet the performance requirements of Underwriters Laboratories Test of
UL486 except the heating or current cycling tests shall be performed for a minimum of
500 cycles.
2.6 Part numbers specified in this attachment are for use with AWG conductors. If metric
conductors are to be furnished by the Supplier, the appropriate lug from the same
manufacturer and of the same type shall be used.
2.7 KS marked(only for one-hole lugs) or equivalent shall be made of Oxygen Free High-
Conductivity Copper (OFHC) and shall meet the KSC2620.
B-3

Attachment B
TYCO ELECTRONICS
ONE-HOLE TERMINAL LUGS
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
BOLT HYDRAULIC INSTALLING HEAD & DIE
DIMENSION INCHES (MILLIMETERS) DIE
WIRE SIZE CAT. NO. SIZE CODE PART NO.
CODE
INCH(MM) A B C 69065 69099 69082
#2 325202 5/16 (7.9) 1.62 (41.15) 0.84 (21.34) 0.71 (21.34) 2 46321-3 46765-3 -
#1 325202 5/16 (7.9) 1.62 (41.15) 0.84 (21.34) 0.71 (21.34) 2 46321-3 46321-3 -
1/0 325303 3/8 (9.5) 1.97 (50.04) 1.04 (26.42) 0.87 (22.10) 1/0 46322-2 46766-2 -
2/0 325403 3/8 (9.5) 2.11 (53.59) 1.09 (27.69) 0.97 (24.64) 2/0 46323-2 46767-2 -
3/0 325503 3/8 (9.5) 2.26 (57.40) 1.14 (28.96) 1.08 (27.43) 3/0 46324-2 46749-2 -
4/0 325605 1/2 (12.7) 2.45 (62.23) 1.21 (30.74) 1.19 (30.23) 4/0 46325-2 46750-2 -
250 MCM 325705 1/2 (12.7) 2.58 (65.53) 1.25 (31.75) 1.28 (32.51) 250 - 46751-2 -
B-4
ONE HOLE LUG
DIMENSION DETAIL

Attachment B
TYCO ELECTRONICS
TWO-HOLE TERMINAL LUGS
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
HYDRAULIC INSTALLING HEAD & DIE
BOLT SIZE DIMENSION INCHES (MILLIMETERS) DIE
WIRE SIZE CAT. NO. CODE PART NO.
INCH(MM) CODE
A B C 69065 69099 69082
1/0 53680-2 1/2 (12.7) 4-1/4 (107.9) 2-51/64 (71.0) 27/32 (21.4) 1/0 46322-2 46766-2 -
2/0 53681-2 1/2 (12.7) 4-7/16 (112.7) 2-27/32 (72.2) 61/64 (24.2) 2/0 46323-2 46767-2 -
3/0 53682-2 1/2 (12.7) 4-21/32 (118.3) 2-57/64 (73.4) 1-1/16 (27.0) 3/0 46324-2 46749-2 -
4/0 327284 1/2 (12.7) 4.21 (106.93) 2.96 (75.19) 1.19 (30.23) 4/0 46325-2 46750-2 -
250 MCM 327285 1/2 (12.7) 4.34 (110.24) 3 (76.2) 1.28 (32.51) 250 - 46751-2 -
300 MCM 327286 1/2 (12.7) 4.43 (112.52) 3 (76.2) 1.40 (35.56) 300 - 46752-2 -
350 MCM 327287 1/2 (12.7) 4.55 (115.57) 3 (76.2) 1.51 (38.35) 350 - 46753-2 69653
500 MCM 327289 1/2 (12.7) 4.80 (121.92) 2.98 (75.69) 1.80 (45.72) 500 - - 46755-2
600 MCM 327290 1/2 (12.7) 4.97 (126.24) 3 (76.2) 1.95 (49.53) 600 - - 46756-2
700 MCM 53686-2 1/2 (12.7) 6-9/32 (159.5) 3 (76.2) 2-3/32 (53.2) 700* - - 46757-2
1000 MCM 327294 1/2 (12.7) 5.64 (143.00) 3.19 (81.02) 2.51 (63.75) 1000 - - 46760-2
*Range from 650 to 750 MCM.
B-5
TWO HOLE LUG DIMENSION DETAIL

Attachment B
BURNDY
ONE-HOLE TERMINAL LUGS
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
DIE HYDRAULIC INSTALLING HEAD &
WIRE CAT. BOLT SIZE DIMENSION INCHES (MILLIMETERS)
COLOR KEY INDEX DIE CODE PART NO.
SIZE NO. INCH(MM)
A B C NO. Y39 Y46 Y48B
2-1/64 1 374 U8CABT U8CABT
#6 YA6C 1/4 (6.4) 21/32 (16.7) 13/32 (10.4) BLUE -
(51.2) 2 7 U5CRT U5CRT
2-7/64 1 346 U6CABT U6CABT
#4 YA4C 1/4 (6.4) 11/16 (17.4) 1/2 (12.7) GRAY -
(53.6) 2 8 U4CRT U4CRT
2-27/64 1 10 U2CRT U2CRT
#2 YA2C 5/16 (7.9) 45/64 (17.9) 19/32 (15.0) BROWN -
(61.5) 2 10 U2CRT U2CRT
1 375 U4CABT U4CABT
#1 YA1C 5/16 (7.9) 2-3/8 (60.5) 11/16 (17.4) 43/64 (17.0) GREEN -
2 11 U1CRT U1CRT
YA25- 2-21/32 1 348 U2CABT U2CABT
1/0 3/8 (9.5) 53/64 (21.0) 3/4 (19.1) PINK -
TC38 (67.5) 2 12 U25RT U25RT
2-51/64 1 13 U26RT U26RT
2/0 YA26 3/8 (9.5) 51/64 (20.2) 13/16 (20.6) BLACK -
(71.0) 2 13 U26RT U26RT
3-7/32 1 14 U27RT U27RT
3/0 YA27 1/2 (12.7) 1-3/16 (30.2) 29/32 (23.1) ORANGE -
(81.8) 2 14 U27RT U27RT
2-31/32 1 15 U28RT U28RT C28R
4/0 YA28 1/2 (12.7) 1-3/64 (26.6) 1 (25.4) PURPULE
(75.4) 2 15 U28RT U28RT C28R
250 3-3/16 1 16 U29RT U29RT C29R
YA29 1/2 (12.7) 1-3/32 (27.8) 1-3/32 (27.7) YELLOW
MCM (81.0) 2 16 U29RT U29RT C29R
NOTE: For the die index, 1 means that die is color coded and 2 means that die is not color coded.
B-6

Attachment B
BURNDY
TWO-HOLE TERMINAL LUGS
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
DIE HYDRAULIC INSTALLING HEAD &
WIRE CAT. BOLT SIZE DIMENSION INCHES (MILLIMETERS)
COLOR KEY INDEX DIE CODE PART NO.
SIZE NO. INCH(MM)
A B C NO. Y39 Y46 Y48B
YA25- 1 348 U2CABT U2CABT
1/0 1/2 (12.7) 4-51/64 (121.8) 3-1/16 (77.8) 13/16 (20.8) PINK -
2N 2 12 U25RT U25RT
YA26- 1 13 U26RT U26RT
2/0 1/2 (12.7) 5-1/32 (127.8) 3-1/32 (77.0) 13/16 (20.8) BLACK -
2N 2 13 U26RT U26RT
YA27- 1 14 U27RT U27RT
3/0 1/2 (12.7) 5-1/16 (128.6) 3-1/32 (77.0) 15/16 (23.8) ORANGE -
2N 2 14 U27RT U27RT
YA28- 1 15 U28RT U28RT C28R
4/0 1/2 (12.7) 5-1/16 (128.6) 3-1/32 (77.0) 1 (25.4) PURPLE
2N 2 15 U28RT U28RT C28R
250 YA29- 1 16 U29RT U29RT C29R
1/2 (12.7) 5-5/16 (134.9) 3-1/32 (77.0) 1-1/32 (26.2) YELLOW
MCM 2N 2 16 U29RT U29RT C29R
300 YA30- 1 298 U28ART U28ART C28AR
1/2 (12.7) 5-3/4 (146.1) 3-1/32 (77.0) 1-7/32 (31.0) WHITE
MCM 2N 2 17 U30RT U30RT C30R
350 YA31- 1 324 U29ART U29ART C29AR
1/2 (12.7) 5-23/32 (145.2) 3 (76.2) 1-9/32 (32.5) RED
MCM 2N 2 18 U31RT U31RT C31R
400 YA32- 1 470 U30ART U30ART C30AR
1/2 (12.7) 5-7/8 (149.2) 3-1/32 (77.0) 1-13/32 (35.8) BLUE
MCM 2N 2 19 U32RT U32RT C32R
500 YA34- 1 299 U31ART U31ART C31AR
1/2 (12.7) 5-31/32 (151.6) 3-1/32 (77.0) 1-17/32 (38.9) BROWN
MCM 2N 2 20 U34RT U34RT C34
NOTE: For the die index, 1 means that die is color coded and 2 means that die is not color coded.
B-7

Attachment B
BURNDY
TWO-HOLE TERMINAL LUGS
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
DIE HYDRAULIC INSTALLING HEAD &
WIRE BOLT SIZE DIMENSION INCHES (MILLIMETERS) COLOR
CAT. NO. INDEX DIE CODE PART NO.
SIZE INCH(MM) KEY
A B C NO. Y39 Y46 Y48B
600 1 472 U32ART U32ART C32AR
YA36-2N 1/2 (12.7) 6-5/8 (168.3) 3-1/32 (77.0) 1-23/32 (43.7) GREEN
MCM 2 22 U36RT U36RT C36R
750 1 473 U36ART U36ART C36AR
YA39-2N 1/2 (12.7) 6-3/4 (171.5) 3-1/32 (77.0) 1-29/32 (48.4) BLACK
MCM 2 24 U39RT U39RT C39R
1000 1 27 - P44RT C44R
YA44-2N 1/2 (12.7) 7 (177.8) 3-1/32 (77.0) 2-3/16 (55.6) WHITE
MCM 2 27 - P44RT C44R
NOTE: For the die index, 1 means that die is color coded and 2 means that die is not color coded.
PANDUIT
ONE-HOLE TERMINAL LUGS
HYDRAULIC INSTALLING HEAD & DIE CODE
DIMENSION INCHES (MILLIMETERS)
BOLT SIZE COLOR NO.
WIRE SIZE CAT. NO.
INCH(MM) KEY PANDUIT PANDUIT
A B C BURNDY Y39
CT-930 CT-940CH
1/0 LCB 1/0-56 5/16 (7.9) 2.61 (66.3) 0.755(19.2) 0.76 (19.3) PINK P42 P42 U25RT
2/0 LCB 2/0-38 3/8 (9.5) 2.82 (71.6) 0.838(21.3) 0.85 (21.6) BLACK P45 P45 U26RT
3/0 LCB 3/0-12 1/2 (12.7) 3.12 (79.2) 1.088(27.6) 0.96 (24.4) ORANGE P50 P50 U27RT
4/0 LCB 4/0-12 1/2 (12.7) 3.22 (81.8) 1.090(27.7) 1.06 (26.9) PURPLE P54 P54 U28RT
250 LCB 250-
1/2 (12.7) 3.32 (84.3) 1.090(27.7) 1.17 (29.7) YELLOW P62 P62 U29RT
MCM 12
B-8

Attachment B
PANDUIT
TWO-HOLE TERMINAL LUGS
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
HYDRAULIC INSTALLING HEAD & DIE CODE
DIMENSION INCHES (MILLIMETERS)
BOLT SIZE COLOR NO.
WIRE SIZE CAT. NO.
INCH(MM) KEY PANDUIT PANDUIT
A B C BURNDY Y39
CT-930 CT-940CH
1/0 LCC 1/0-12 1/2 (12.7) 4.86 (123.4) 3 (76.2) 0.80 (20.3) PINK P42 P42 U25RT
2/0 LCC 2/0-12 1/2 (12.7) 4.98 (126.5) 3 (76.2) 0.85 (21.6) BLACK P45 P45 U26RT
3/0 LCC 3/0-12 1/2 (12.7) 5.03 (127.7) 3 (76.2) 0.96 (24.4) ORANGE P50 P50 U27RT
4/0 LCC 4/0-12 1/2 (12.7) 5.13 (130.3) 3 (76.2) 1.06 (26.9) PURPLE P54 P54 U28RT
250 LCC 250-
1/2 (12.7) 5.23 (132.8) 3 (76.2) 1.17 (29.7) YELLOW P62 P62 U29RT
MCM 12
300 LCC 300-
1/2 (12.7) 5.94 (150.9) 3 (76.2) 1.19 (30.2) WHITE P66 P66 U30RT
MCM 12
350 LCC 350-
1/2 (12.7) 5.99 (152.1) 3 (76.2) 1.28 (32.5) RED P71 P71 U31RT
MCM 12
400 LCC 400-
1/2 (12.7) 6.10 (154.9) 3 (76.2) 1.39 (35.3) BLUE P76 P76 U32RT
MCM 12
500 LCC 500-
1/2 (12.7) 6.36 (161.5) 3 (76.2) 1.54 (39.1) BROWN P87 P87 U34RT
MCM 12
750 LCC 750-
1/2 (12.7) 7.04 (178.8) 3 (76.2) 1.89 (48.0) BLACK P106 P106 U39RT
MCM 12
1000 LCC 1000-
1/2 (12.7) 7.29 (185.2) 3 (76.2) 2.17 (55.1) WHITE -- P125 -
MCM 12
B-9

Attachment B
3M COMPANY
ONE-HOLE TERMINAL LUGS
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
HYDRAULIC INSTALLING HEAD & DIE CODE
BOLT SIZE DIMENSION INCHES (MILLIMETERS)
WIRE SIZE CAT. NO. DIE CODE INDEX NO.
INCH(MM)
A B C T&B 13246 T&B TBM15 BURNDY Y39
2/0 31036 3/8 (9.5) 2-27/32 (72.2) 29/32 (23.1) 13/16 (20.6) 2/0 42 42H U28RT
3/0 31041 1/2 (12.7) 3-1/8 (79.2) 1-5/32 (29.4) 29/32 (23.1) 3/0 45 45 U27RT
4/0 31045 1/2 (12.7) 3-5/16 (84.1) 1-5/32 (29.4) 1 (25.4) 4/0 50 50 U28RT
250
31049 1/2 (12.7) 3-3/8 (85.7) 1-3/32 (27.7) 1-1/8 (28.4) 250 54 54H U29RT
MCM
B-10

Attachment B
3M COMPANY
TWO-HOLE TERMINAL LUGS
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
HYDRAULIC INSTALLING HEAD & DIE
WIRE BOLT SIZE DIMENSION INCHES (MILLIMETERS) DIE
CAT. NO. CODE INDEX NO.
SIZE INCH(MM) CODE
A B C T&B 13246 T&B TBM15 BURNDY Y39
4/0 31145 1/2 (12.7) 5-5/32 (131.0) 3 (76.2) 1 (25.4) 4/0 54 54H U28RT
250
31149 1/2 (12.7) 5-5/16 (134.9) 3 (76.2) 1-1/8 (28.4) 250 62 62 U29RT
MCM
300
31153 1/2 (12.7) 5-3/4 (146.1) 3 (76.2) 1-7/32 (31.0) 300 66H 66 U30RT
MCM
350
31156 1/2 (12.7) 5-3/4 (146.1) 3 (76.2) 1-9/32 (32.5) 350 71H 71H U31RT
MCM
500
31166 1/2 (12.7) 6-5/32 (156.4) 3 (76.2) 1-17/32 (38.9) 500 87H 87H U34RT
MCM
750
31172 1/2 (12.7) 7 (177.8) 3 (76.2) 1-29/32 (48.4) 750 106H 106H U39RT
MCM
1000
31178 1/2 (12.7) 7-9/32 (185.0) 3 (76.2) 2-3/16 (55.6) 1000 - 125H -
MCM
B-11

Attachment B
THOMAS & BETTS CO.
ONE-HOLE TERMINAL LUGS
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
HYDRAULIC INSTALLING HEAD & DIE
WIRE BOLT SIZE DIMENSION INCHES (MILLIMETERS) COLOR
CAT. NO. CODE INDEX NO.
SIZE INCH(MM) KEY
A B C 13642 TBM15 21940
#8 54930 1/4 (6.4) 1-15/32 (37.3) 9/16 (14.3) 15/32 (11.9) RED 21 21 -
#6 54905 1/4 (6.4) 1-1/2 (38.1) 9/16 (14.3) 7/16 (11.1) BLUE 24 24 24
#4 54906 1/4 (6.4) 1-17/32 (38.9) 9/16 (14.3) 9/16 (14.3) GRAY 29 29 29
#2 54942 5/16 (7.9) 1-27/32 (46.8) 23/32 (18.6) 21/32 (16.7) BROWN 33 33 33
#1 54947 5/16 (7.9) 2-1/16 (52.4) 13/16 (20.6) 43/64 (17.1) GREEN 37 37 37
1/0 54909 3/8 (9.5) 2-3/32 (53.2) 13/16 (20.6) 3/4 (19.1) PINK 42 42H 42
2/0 54910 3/8 (9.5) 2-3/32 (53.2) 1-1/16 (27.0) 13/16 (20.6) BLACK 45 45 45
3/0 54965 1/2 (12.7) 2-17/32 (64.3) 1-1/16 (27.0) 15/16 (23.8) ORANGE 50 50 50
4/0 54970 1/2 (12.7) 2-11/16 (68.3) 1-1/16 (27.0) 1-1/32 (26.2) PURPLE 54 54H 54
250
54913 1/2 (12.7) 3-1/32 (77.0) 1-1/16 (27.0) 1-1/16 (27.0) YELLOW 62 62 62
MCM
B-12

Attachment B
THOMAS & BETTS CO.
TWO-HOLE TERMINAL LUGS
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
HYDRAULIC INSTALLING HEAD & DIE
WIRE BOLT SIZE DIMENSION INCHES (MILLIMETERS) COLOR
CAT. NO. CODE INDEX NO.
SIZE INCH(MM) KEY
A B C 13642 TBM15 21940
2/0 54862 1/2 (12.7) 4-5/16 (109.5) 2-15/16 (74.6) 13/16 (20.6) BLACK 45 45 45
3/0 54864 1/2 (12.7) 4-13/32 (111.9) 2-15/16 (74.6) 15/16 (23.8) ORANGE 50 50 50
4/0 54866 1/2 (12.7) 4-3/4 (120.7) 3 (76.2) 1-1/32 (26.2) PURPLE 54H 54H 54
250
54868 1/2 (12.7) 4-27/32 (123.0) 3 (76.2) 1-3/32 (27.9) YELLOW 62 62 62
MCM
300
54870 1/2 (12.7) 5-1/32 (127.8) 3 (76.2) 1-1/4 (31.8) WHITE 66 66 66
MCM
350
54872 1/2 (12.7) 5-1/4 (133.4) 3 (76.2) 1-23/64 (34.5) RED 71H 71H 71
MCM
400
54874 1/2 (12.7) 5-9/32 (134.1) 3 (76.2) 1-7/16 (36.5) BLUE 76 76 76
MCM
500
54876 1/2 (12.7) 5-11/16 (144.5) 3 (76.2) 1-5/8 (41.3) BROWN 87H 87H 87
MCM
600
54878 1/2 (12.7) 5-13/16 (147.6) 3 (76.2) 1-3/4 (44.5) GREEN 94H 94H 94
MCM
750
54880 1/2 (12.7) 6 (152.4) 3 (76.2) 1-15/16 (49.2) BLACK 106H 106 106
MCM
1000
54882 1/2 (12.7) 6-39/64 (167.9) 3 (76.2) 2-17/64 (57.5) - - 125H 125
MCM
B-13 (Final)

ATTACHMENT C
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
TERMINATION OF CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION CABLES AND WIRES
C-1

Attachment C
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
1.0 SCOPE ………………………………………………………………… C-3
2.0 PURPOSE…….…………………………………….………………… C-3
3.0 GENERAL……………………………………………….……………. C-3
4.0 WIRE IDENTIFICATION……………………………………………. C-3
5.0 WIRE SUPPORT AT EQUIPMENT…………………………………. C-3
6.0 TERMINATING WIRES…………………………….……………….. C-3
7.0 WIRING OF PANEL……………………………………………….… C-5
8.0 SWINGING PANEL OR DOOR WIRING………………………….. C-6
9.0 TERMINATION OF TAPE-SHIELD DRAIN WIRE ………………. C-7
10.0 TERMINATION OF METAL SHIELDING BRAID…………………. C-9
C-2

Attachment C
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 The recommendations contained herein apply to all control, instrumentation and
thermocouple cables and wires.
2.0 PURPOSE
2.1 The purpose of this Attachment is to identify methods of terminating control and
instrumentation cables and wires.
3.0 GENERAL
3.1 The details shown in this Attachment are typical. They are intended to serve as a guide
and reference and are supplemental to the Purchase Specification and Electrical Drawings.
4.0 WIRE IDENTIFICATION
4.1 Each wire shall be identified at both ends by securely fastening noncorrosive cable tags or
markers around the wire. These tags or markers shall be imprinted with the wire
numbers identified on the wiring diagrams.
4.2 Cable tags and markers shall be suitable for the wire and the environmental conditions
mentioned in Section 4 of the specification.
5.0 WIRE SUPPORT AT EQUIPMENT
5.1 Supplier shall provide support to avoid stress on the individual wires. All wires
terminating at control boards, logic cabinets, switchgear, motor control centers, etc., shall
be supported with facilities furnished with the equipment.
6.0 TERMINATING WIRES
6.1 All individual wires shall be terminated on terminal blocks, fuse blocks, etc.. No more
than two wires shall be connected to any one terminal point.
6.2 Only one wire per terminal will be used by the buyer on the field side of the terminal
blocks. Any common connections required shall be provided by the Supplier on the
panel side of the terminal block and the field side shall be left free for the buyer’s wiring.
C-3

Attachment C
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
6. TERMINATING WIRES (CONT.)
6.3 Each terminal for the field side of the terminal block shall be the minimum width of
0.312” (See Detail A).
6.4 When cutting away the insulation, wire stripping tools shall be used. The length of
insulation removed shall be as recommended by the terminal lug manufacturer. The bare
wire must be completed covered by the ferrule on the lug.
6.5 Each wire (other than thermocouple extension wire) shall be terminated with a ring-
tongue terminal lug which is to be fastened to the wire with the proper compression tools.
Attachment A to this Appendix indicates the applicable ring-tongue terminal lug to be
used, and also indicates other pertinent directions on the subject of terminations.
6.6 When grounding wires for potential or current transformer circuits are indicated, each
grounding wire shall be insulated wire (Type SIS or XHHW), be suitable for the
environmental conditions mentioned in Section 4 of purchase specification, be 10 AWG
(5.5 mm2) with Class B stranding and be terminated at both ends with the specified ring-
tongue terminal lug.
6.7 When a grounding circuit for instrumentation cable shield and/or drain wire is indicated,
the ground wire and jumper wires of the circuits shall be assembled so that both wires (to
any indicated terminal block terminal) are terminated in a single ring-tongue terminal lug.
This allows removal of the ground from a given terminal without interrupting the ground
circuit to other terminals. The ground and jumper wires shall be 18 AWG (1.0 mm2) with
Class B stranding, be suitable for the environmental condition mentioned in Section 4 of
purchase specification and be insulated wire (600V, Type SIS or XHHW). The grounding
wire shall be terminated at the grounding point in a single ring-tongue terminal lug.
6.8 Wires requiring termination in either a plug or receptacle shall be terminated as the type
plug or receptacle requires according to the proper Wiring Diagram.
6.9 Thermocouple extension wire terminations shall be made without the use of lugs. After
stripping off sufficient insulation, each wire is terminated (in the case of machine screw
terminals) by bending the wire in a "U" shape around the terminal screw in the same
direction as the screw tightens and tightening the screw properly.
6.10 When thermocouple extension wire termination is made in the terminal block, bar
conductor in the terminal block shall be of the same material as the thermocouple extension
wire in order to have proper accuracy.
6.11 If connections are made with plug, connector, etc., both male and female of plug, connector,
etc. shall be supplied with the equipment and/or cable.
C-4

Attachment C
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
7.0 WIRING OF PANEL
7.1 Control wires shall be continuous between terminal points and be 14 AWG (2.08 mm2)
with Class B stranding. Insulation shall be 600 volt, suitable for the environmental
conditions mentioned in Section 4 of the specification and be of Type SIS or XHHW.
Terminations shall be as mentioned in Section 6 on this attachment.
7.2 Wiring shall be bundled, be run in straight lines without kinks and have uniform bends.
Bends shall be of sufficient radius to avoid damage to the insulation. The wires shall be
symmetrically arranged so as to avoid stress on the terminations. They shall be secured
in position with bolted cleats and mounting plates or secured with cable ties and
terminated in a good workmanlike manner.
7.3 Approved terminal blocks shall be furnished within suitable enclosures for cable
connections to or between panels, racks or skid mounted units. Requirements for
terminal blocks are identified in Attachment F to this Appendix.
7.4 Separate terminal blocks shall be provided for power, control and/or instrumentation
cables, respectively. And for noise reduction, opening for power, control and/or
instrumentation cable entrances shall be separated, respectively.
7.5 Wiring techniques(e.g., physical separation, shield of susceptible circuit or shield of
EMI/RFI source. etc.) shall be applied to minimize producing undesirable effects in the
control or instrumentation circuit.
C-5

Attachment C
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
8.0 SWINGING PANEL OR DOOR WIRING
8.1 When connections are made from a fixed panel or box to a swinging panel or door, the
conductors used across the hinge shall be 14 AWG with Class K stranding or as specified
on the Electrical Drawings. These conductors shall have tinned copper wire with 600 volt,
Type SIS or XHHW and be suitable for the environmental conditions mentioned in Section
4 of the specification.
8.2 Conductors crossing a door hinge area shall be cleated on both sides of that area so that
they rotate (instead of flexing) with the movement of the swinging panel or door. (See
Detail A)
DETAIL A
METHOD OF INSTALLING HINGE WIRE ON SWINGING PANEL OR DOOR
C-6

Attachment C
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
9.0 TERMINATION OF TAPE-SHIELD DRAIN WIRE
9.1 Each drain wire termination shall be made by using an insulated butt splice and insulated
extension wire as indicated in the following details:
DETAIL B
INDIVIDUAL SHIELDED PAIRS, TRIADS, ETC.
DETAIL C
OVERALL SHIELD DRAIN WIRE
C-7

Attachment C
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
9.0 TERMINATION OF TAPE-SHIELD DRAIN WIRE(CONT.)
DETAIL D
TAPE-SHIELD DRAIN WIRE EXTENSION WITHOUT
USING INSULATED BUTT-SPLICE
DETAIL E
SHIELD BRAID TERMINATION
C-8

Attachment C
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
9.0 TERMINATION OF TAPE-SHIELD DRAIN WIRE(CONT.)
Notes for Details B through D
1. The outer cable jacket shall only be removed for a distance necessary to expose
sufficient lengths of individual conductors to make the proper connections to
termination points. The drain wire extension shall be 18 AWG tinned copper
with Class B stranding and cut to a length to reach its termination point. The
insulation shall be 600V, Type SIS or XHHW and suitable for the environmental
conditions mentioned in Section 4 of the specification.
2. The insulated butt splice shall be crimped with the ratchet crimping tool
recommended by the manufacturer of splicing material.
3. The sleeve shall be either heat shrinkable tubing or electrical tape, shall capture
the tape shield and the insulation on the drain wire extension and shall be suitable
for cable materials.
4. Detail D is an acceptable alternate termination of the tape-shield drain wire.
When this method is used, an insulating sleeve shall be slipped over the drain
wire before the lug is attached. The drain wire shall be made long enough to
reach its termination point.
10.0 TERMINATION OF METAL SHIELDING BRAID
10.1 Each shielded braid terminal shall be terminated as described in the following paragraphs.
10.2 The ferrules and splices required for properly terminating cables and conductors which
have braided shielding braid will depend on the diameters of the cables and conductors
involved. This attachment will, therefore, recommend the ferrules and splices by
manufacturers types rather than specific catalog numbers. The Supplier shall consult the
hardware manufacturer for applicable catalog numbers of the complete splice and the
crimping tool required to terminate each size cable.
10.3 The following methods are recommended for terminating the metal shielding braid:
Method 1 Shield Extension
This method uses a combed out and twisted wires of the braid as a conductor which is
spliced with an insulated butt splice to an insulated wire as shown in Detail E.
C-9

Attachment C
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
10. TERMINATION OF METAL SHIELDING BRAID (CONT.)
Notes for Detail E
1. The outer cable jacket shall only be removed for a distance necessary to expose
sufficient lengths of individual conductors to make the proper connections to
termination points. The drain wire extension shall be 18 AWG tinned copper with
Class B or Class K stranding and cut to a length to reach its termination point. The
insulation shall be 600V, Type SIS or XHHW and suitable for the environmental
conditions mentioned in Section 4 of the specification.
2. The shielded braid should be combed out and twisted to size 12 AWG conductor.
3. The insulated butt splice shall be crimped with the crimping tool recommended by the
splice manufacturer.
4. The sleeve shall be either heat shrinkable tubing or tape, shall capture the cable jacket,
shielding braid and lead wire insulation and shall be suitable for the cable materials.
Method 2 Single Piece
The single piece termination contains a tinned metallic shell which protects the inner
conductor(s) during the crimping of a shield extension to the metal shielding braid as
detailed in principle by Detail F.
DETAIL F
1 PIECE TERMINATION TO SHIELD (SH)
C-10

Attachment C
10. TERMINATION OF METAL SHIELDING BRAID (CONT.)
Notes for Detail F
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
1. The shield extension shall be 18 AWG tinned copper with Class B or Class K
stranding. The insulation shall be 600V, Type SIS or XHHW and suitable for the
environmental conditions mentioned in Section 4 of the specification. The
extension shall be trimmed so that the shielded conductors are shielded until
nearing their termination points.
2. Recommended manufacturers of the shell termination piece are:
AMP - "Termashield"
Burndy - "Uniring"
Thomas & Betts - "STA-KON"
3. The one piece termination may be of the preinsulated kind or be insulated with
either manufacturers insulating sleeve or heat shrinkable tubing.
Method 3 Two Piece
The two piece termination consists of a harder inner and softer outer ferrule which allows
crimping of the shield extension to the braid without distortion of the inner conductor(s)
as detailed in Detail G.
DETAIL G
2 PIECE TERMINATION TO SHIELD (SH)
C-11

Attachment C
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
10. TERMINATION OF METAL SHIELDING BRAID (CONT.)
Notes for Detail G
1. The shield extension shall be 18 AWG tinned copper with Class B or Class K
stranding. The insulation shall be 600V crosslinked polyethylene (Type SIS or
XHHW). The shield extension shall be tinned so that the shielded conductors
are shielded until nearing their termination points.
2. Recommended manufacturers of the two piece terminations are:
Burndy - "Hyring"
Thomas & Betts - "STA-KON"
3. The two piece termination may be of the preinsulated kind or be insulated with
either manufacturers insulating sleeve or heat shrinkable tubing.
C-12 (Final)

ATTACHMENT D
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
CONDUIT TERMINATIONS AT THERMOCOUPLES,
TRANSMITTERS, SOLENOIDS, ETC.
D-1

Attachment D
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
1.0 SCOPE ...........................………………………………………………… D-3
2.0 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS ..………………………………………..... D-3
D-2

Attachment D
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This attachment outlines the method of terminating conduits at thermocouples,
transmitters, solenoids, etc. This information is being supplied to the manufacturer for
information to illustrate the field installation detail.
2.0 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
2.1 Unless otherwise specified on the Construction Drawings, conduit terminations at
thermocouples, transmitters and solenoids shall be made with liquid-tight flexible conduit.
2.2 Minimum one foot length of liquid-tight flexible conduit will be used for terminating of
rigid steel conduit to the equipment.
2.3 See following typical detail installations as shown below.
D-3

Attachment D
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
CONDUIT CONNECTION AT THERMOCOUPLE
Conduit Connection at Thermocouples, Transmitters, Solenoids,
Etc. (in Mild Environment)
D-4 (Final)

ATTACHMENT E
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
TERMINATION OF CONDUIT
AND CABLES AT MOTORS DRIVE UNITS, VALVES, ETC.
E-1

Attachment E
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
1.0 SCOPE ...........................………………………………………………… E-3
2.0 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS ..………………………………………..... E-3
E-2

Attachment E
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This attachment outlines the method of terminating conduits at motors, damper drive units,
motor operated valves, and other equipment. This information is being supplied to the
manufacturer to identify the field installation detail.
2.0 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
2.1 Unless otherwise specified on the Construction Drawings, conduit terminations at motors
and other electrically driven equipment shall be made with liquid-tight flexible conduit.
2.2 Minimum one foot length of liquid-tight flexible conduit will be used for terminating of
rigid steel conduit to the equipment.
2.3 Motors and drives located outdoors shall have terminal housings that can be oriented to
allow conduit entrance from the bottom or either sides.
2.4 See following typical detail installations as shown below.
E-3

Attachment E
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
DETAIL A DETAIL B
DETAIL C
E-4 (Final)

ATTACHMENT F
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
HINGED COVER CABINETS WITH REMOVABLE PANEL
FOR TERMINAL BLOCK MOUNTING
F-1

Attachment F
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
1. Hinged cover cabinets with non-locking handles and latches, with panels mounted on
studs in rear for installation indoors in dry, non-hazardous locations, shall be 14 gauge
sheet steel and shall conform to the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association
(NEMA) Standard for Type 1 enclosures.
2. Cabinet sizes, except for Detail A, are based on minimum spacing required for the
installation and wiring of 12 point molded bakelite terminal blocks with washer head
screw contacts as follows:
A. Control Terminations (10-32 Screw, 600V Rated or above)
Series 1500, Catalog No. 1512ST
Series 1600, Catalog No. 1612ST
Marathon Special Products Co.
Type EB-25, Catalog No. EB25A12W
General Electric Co.
Catalog No. TBU-12
Westinghouse Electric Corp.
Series YSFT-XXX-XX-S-FN
Yongsung Electric Co., Ltd. or equivalent
B. Instrumentation Terminations (8-32 Screw) for low level signals
Series 300, Catalog No. 312
Marathon Special Products Co.
Type CR151, Catalog No. CR151B2
General Electric Co.
Series YSFT-XXX-XX-S-FN
Yongsung Electric Co., Ltd. or equivalent
Terminal Blocks shall be suitable to the size of external wiring which will be decided by
the buyer. Therefore, terminal blocks rating and dimension shall be provided to the
buyer for review.
3. Detail A shows the cabinet arrangement for mounting a single 8 point Marathon Special
Products Co's series 1600 terminal block, or equivalent.
4. Cabinet sizes shown are typical sizes
F-2

Attachment F
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
5. The quantity, size and position of conduit or cable openings in the cabinets shall be
determined from Electrical Installation Drawings (where applicable ) and punched by the
Construction Contractor.
6. Hinged cover cabinets that are to be installed outdoors shall be 12 gauge, they shall be
galvanized without knockouts, and the cover shall be suitably gasketed. If galvanized
finish is damaged by welding, drilling or cutting, the exposed metal shall be repaired with
a zinc-rich paint or a galvanized repair stick. Cabinet shall conform otherwise to NEMA
Standard for Type 4X enclosures.
7. Cabinets shall have a 1" diameter drain hole provided in a bottom front corner with a
bronze screen or mesh spot-brazed on the inside surface over the opening.
8. Terminal blocks shall be mounted to the panel at the rear of the cabinet.
9. Terminal block number plate shall be attached near each terminal block within cabinet.
10 All terminal blocks shall be marked in a permanent manner with the name of the
manufacturer, the identification or serial no., terminal block point no. etc.,etc. and those
information shall be provided to the buyer for review.
F-3

Attachment F
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
TERMINAL BLOCKS CABINET DIMENSIONS
DETAIL
NUMBER MAX. NO.
QUANTITY HEIGHT WIDTH DEPTH
OF POINTS
A 1 8 16” 12” 6-5/8” TO 7”
B 1 12 20” 16” 6-5/8” TO 7”
C 2 24 20” 20” 6-5/8” TO 7”
D 4 48 30” 20” 6-5/8” TO 7”
E 6 72 30” 24” 6-5/8” TO 7”
F-4 (Final)

ATTACHMENT G
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
CABLE REQUIREMENT FOR SUPPLIER FURNISHED CABLE
G-1

Attachment G
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
1.0 SPECIFICATIONS ………………………………..............…………… G-3
G-2

Attachment G
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
1.0 SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 Cable Requirements
The external cable supplied by Vendor shall meet the following requirements unless
otherwise specified in Section 4.0 of the Purchased Specification.
1.1.1 Cable
a. Cable shall be suitable for the environmental condition mentioned in
Section 4.0 of the Purchased Specification.
b. Cable shall meet the following Code and STD :

• IEEE 383, Section 8
• NEMA WC57(ICEA S73-532), NEMA WC70, NEMA WC74

1.1.2 Insulation and jacket material
a. Insulation – EPR, XLPE or equivalent
b. Jacket – Neoprene, Hypalon or equivalent
c. PVC is not acceptable for insulation or jacket material.
1.1.3 Flame Test
a. The flame test shall meet the requirements of the IEEE 383 with aged and unaged
test specimens. The flame test shall be performed in accordance with IEEE 1202 for
Vertical Tray Flame Test (VTFT) and UL VW-1 for Vertical Flame Test (VFT) as
shown in IEEE 383.
b. The thermal and normal radiation aging shall be performed in accordance with IEEE
383. All cables shall also be aged in accordance with IEEE 383 considering the
design life before the flame test.
c. The VTFT shall be performed with completed cables and VFT with only insulated
wire.
d. However, it is acceptable that the pigtail cable and installed cable within the 30ft
galvanized steel conduit could be performed only VFT with unaged test specimens.
G-3

Attachment G
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
1.0 SPECIFICATIONS(CONT.)
1.2 Supplier furnished cable shall have the following identifications on the outer surface of
the cable and Supplier shall submit the detail method of each cable identification for the
Buyer's review.
1.2.1 Cable Color Code : Black
1.2.2 The Buyer 's Cable Type Code: (The buyer will provide the cable type code after the buyer
receives the cable data mentioned in para. 1.3 below)
1.2.3 The Buyer's Cable number (If required)
G-4

Attachment G
1.0 SPECIFICATIONS(CONT.)
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
1.2.4 The following information shall be printed on the outer surface of the cable
a. Supplier's name
b. Rated circuit voltage
c. Insulation/Jacket material
d. Year of manufacture
e. Supplier's traceability code
f. Number of conductors and wire size
1.3 The following cable data shall be supplied by the Supplier for the Buyer 's review and
approval.
1.3.1 Copper cable for power, control and instrument
a. Cable Manufacturer
b. Number of conductors
c. Method of Conductor Identification (Color, Character or Number)
d. Conductor size (AWG)
e. Overall diameter (inch) (Normal/Maximum)
f. Shield material (If required)
g. Voltage rating (V)
h. Temperature rating (℃)
i. Insulation/Jacket material
j. Jacket color
G-5

1.0 SPECIFICATIONS (CONT.)
k. Wight/Foot (lb) (Note 1)
l. BTU/ft for fire loading
m. AC Ohm/100ft＠25℃ (Note 2)
n. DC Ohm/100ft＠25℃ (Note 2)
o. Rated ampacity in air at 40℃ (Note 2)
p. Min. pulling temperature(℃)
q. Radiation Rating (Gy)
r. Bend radius (Pulling/Training) (inch) (Note 1)
s. Allowable sidewall pressure (lb/ft) (Note 1)
t. Max tension (lb) (Note 1)
u. Cable length (ft) (Include length limitation, if any)
v. Connector manufacture/type (If any)

• Maximum allowable cable diameter (inch)
• Connector outside diameter (inch)

Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
w. Has cable been qualified to IEEE 383 vertical tray flame test and/or vertical flame
test? (Yes/No)
Note 1. It is not applicable for pigtails.
2. It is applicable for power cable only.
1.3.2 Fiber Optic cable
a. Cable Manufacturer
b. Number of fibers
c. Fiber type (Singlemode or Multimode, etc.)
d. Core/Clad size
e. Attenuation (dB/km) @850 nm and @1300 nm
G-6

1.0 SPECIFICATIONS (CONT.)
Appendix 4P
Rev. 0
f. Bandwidth(Mhz-km) @850 nm and @1300 nm
g. Jacket material/color
h. F.O Cable type (Loose or Tight Tube)
i. Radiation rating (Gy)
j. Overall diameter (inch)
k. Weight per feet (lb/ft)
l. Max. tension (lb)
m. Sidewall pressure (lb/ft)
n. Bend radius (Pulling/Training) (inch)
o. Cable length of limitation to assure the acceptable range of the signal (ft)
(If required)
p. BTU/ft for fire loading
q. Connector manufacture/type

• Maximum allowable cable diameter (inch)

r. Has cable been qualified to IEEE 383 vertical tray flame test and/or vertical flame
test? (Yes/No)
G-7 (Final)

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/ STORAGE BUILDING
APPENDIX 4S
General Requirements for Instrument &
Control
KEPCO E&C JOB No. : 11G79
IS UE STATUS
1 07/10/19 General Revision
0 06/15/18 Construction is ue
REV. NO DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
Preparer : 정승하, Tel : 054-421-3943

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
Section Title Page
1.0 GENERAL ..................................................................................................... 4S-1
2.0 CODE & STANDARDS ................................................................................. 4S-1
3.0 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ........................................................ 4S-3
4.0 HUMAN FACTORS ENGINEERING DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ............. 4S-31
Attachment
A Standard Abbreviation List A-1
B Demarcation and Mimic Guidelines B-1
C Statistical Basis of the Uncertainties C-1
D Instrument List D-1(Final)
E Instrument Numbering System E-1(Final)
TC 4S-1(Final)

1.0 GENERAL
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
1.1 This appendix is applicable to furnishing instrumentation components, associated piping
or tubing, and wiring within a package specification.
1.2 All field-mounted instruments and associated electrical devices shall be NEMA Type 4
rated or located in NEMA Type 4 or Type 12 enclosure.
1.3 All control panels and associated panel mounted devices shall be designed to meet the
Human Factors Engineering design requirements specified in Section 4.0.
2.0 CODE & STANDARDS
2.1 Supplier shall control the quality and services to meet the requirements of this Appendix,
applicable codes and standards, but not limited to those listed in Section 2.2.
2.2 Referenced Codes and Standards
Sponsor Number Subject
ANSI C84.1 Electric Power Systems and Equipment – Voltage Rating
ASME B1.20.1 Pipe Threads (Except Dryseal)
ASME B16.5 Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
ASME B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded
ASME PTC19.5 Flow Measurement
ASME B31.1 Power Piping
IEEE 383(’03 Ed.) Standard for Qualifying Class 1E Electric Cables and Filed
Splices for Nuclear Power Generating Stations
IEEE 946 Recommended Practice for the Design of DC Auxiliary
Power System for Generating Stations
IEEE 518 Guide for Installation of Electrical to Minimize Electrical
Noise Inputs to Controllers from External Sources
4S-1

Sponsor Number Subject
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
IEEE 1050 Guide for Instrumentation and Control Equipment
Grounding in Generating Stations Corrections
IEEE 1202 Standard for Flame Testing of Cable for Use in Cable Tray
in Industrial and Commercial Occupancies
IEEE C37.90.1 Standard Surge Withstand Capability(SWC) Test for
Protective Relay and Relay Systems
ISA 7.0.01 Quality Standard for Instrument Air
(ISA : The International Society of Automation)
ISA 5.1 Instrumentation Symbols and Identification
NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
(1000V Maximum)
NEMA ICS Industrial Controls and Systems
NEMA WC-70 Nonshielded Power Cables Rated 2000 volts or less for the
Distribution of electrical Energy
NEMA WC-57 Standard for Control, Thermocouple Extension, and
instrumentation Cables
UL 3 Safety Standard for Flexible Nonmetallic Tubing
UL 4 Safety Standard for Armored Cable
UL 83 Safety Standard for Thermoplastic Insulated Wires
UL 467 Standard for Safety Grounding and Bonding Equipment
UL 486A Standard for Safety Wire Connectors
UL 489 Molded-Case Circuits Breakers, Molded-Case Switches,
and Circuit Breaker Enclosures
UL 1581 Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables and
Flexible Cords
USNRC RG 1.143 Design Guidance for Radioactive Waste Management
Systems, Structures and Components Installed in Light
Water Cooled Nuclear Power Plants
USNRC RG 1.21 Measuring, Evaluating and Reporting Radioactive Material
in Liquid and Gaseous Effluents and Solid Waste
USNRC RG 1.40 Qualification of Continuous Duty Safety Related Motors
for Nuclear Power Plants
4S-2

3.0 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
3.1 General
1. The following requirements generally are applicable only to larger custom-built
package systems. Package systems, especially those that have been built in a
particular configuration through several units of manufacture, will normally be
purchased on the standardized version. KORAD reserves the right to evaluate and
approve system drawings before fabrication.
2. Equipment shall be arranged to prevent hazard to personnel or damage to major
equipment in the event of mechanical failure or loss of power.
3. Adequate spacing shall be provided for personnel performing operating or
maintenance procedures and for servicing, maintaining, removing, and replacing
components.
4. Local indicating instrumentation shall be visible to the operator at the normal
floor level. Where instrumentation is elevated or arranged such that it is not
accessible from a floor or a major structure, Supplier shall supply permanent
platforms, ladders, or other access.
5. Supplier shall furnish the instrument data using Attachment D, Instrument List.
The required data and general device information shall be provided via data base
or text file which is a PC compatible magnetic or optical media. The data shall be
in an EXCEL or ACCESS format.
6. Flame Test for Instruments Cables
a. The VFT (Vertical Flame Test) shall be performed in accordance with IEEE
383 with unaged test specimens.
b. The flame test of cables shall be in accordance with UL VW-1 as show in IEEE
383.
3.2 Installation
Instrumentation and control equipment shall be furnished and installed in accordance
with the following requirements. In case not specified herein, Supplier's standard
4S-3

practice shall be applied following KORAD’s approval:
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
1. Package system control panels or cabinets will be located in the vicinity of the
related equipment so that easy operation and/or monitoring can be made.
2. The materials used in fabrication or installation shall be as follows:

• Sensing lines

a. General
. tube : seamless austenitic stainless steel
. fittings : austenitic stainless steel
. valve/manifold valves : austenitic stainless steel

• Air distribution / pneumatic signal lines

. tube : seamless copper or seamless austenitic stainless steel
. fittings : brass or bronze or austenitic stainless steel
. valves : brass or bronze or austenitic stainless steel

• Tube clamps : stainless steel
• Process tap and root valves : main line class

3. Root valve shall be located as close to the process tap as practical but they shall be
accessible.
4. The type and size of process taps shall be as follows. Root valve size shall be the
same as the process tap size:

• Pressure (including differential pressure) : 3/4" S.W. or Flange as applicable
• Temperature : 1-1/4" S.W or Flange as applicable
• Orifice flange.

. 900 Psig or greater / 800 oF or greater : 3/4" S.W
. Less than 900 Psig / Less than 800 oF : 1/2" S.W
4S-4

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

• Averaging Pitot Tube : depend on type and size
• Sampling probe : S.W type, size to be dependent on probe size

5. Sensing lines shall be of 3/8" O.D x 0.065 Wall Thickness tube and shall not be
over 50 feet long. Sensing lines run shall be continuously sloped by 1 inch per 1
foot. Reversal slopes without a separate drain or vent valve shall be avoided.
6. Sensing lines shall be as short as practical.
7. The discharge points of vents or drains shall be away from electrical equipment or
operational areas. In case of hazardous fluid, the discharge lines of drains and vent
shall be connected to a safe disposal point.
8. Instruments shall be located in accessible areas where they will be free from
vibration, missile, or jet-impingement, and rigidly mounted with 33Hz of natural
frequency, and protected against physical damage, shock, high temperature
freezing, or adverse effect on the process fluid.
9. Preferred instrument elevations relative to process taps shall be as follows :
FLUID PREFERRED INSTRUMENT ELEVATION
LIQUID BELOW PROCESS CONNECTION
SLURRY BELOW PROCESS CONNECTION
STEAM ABOVE 20 PSIA BELOW PROCESS CONNECTION
STEAM BELOW 20 PSIA ABOVE PROCESS CONNECTION
GAS OR AIR ABOVE PROCESS CONNECTION
10. A pair of differential-pressure sensing lines shall have an equalizing manifold with
bleed valves.
11. The flow tap should be located in a straight run of the pipe line according to the
ASME PTC 19.5-2004 “Flow Measurement”.
4S-5

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
3.3 Control Panels, Cabinets, and Racks
1. All enclosed control panels shall be NEMA Type 12 for indoor use and NEMA
Type 4 for outdoor use. Control panels shall be freestanding, unless provided as
integral parts of a prewired, skid-mounted package. Each panel, cabinet and rack
shall be rigid, suitably braced, stiffened, and reinforced to withstand all stresses
incidental to shipping, installation and operation without warping or twisting.
2. Control panels, cabinets, and racks shall be completely tubed, wired, and
assembled with all instruments, devices, and controls installed so that the
assembly is an operating unit ready for installation.
3. Each freestanding control panel/cabinet shall be provided with sufficient interior
lighting and duplex, grounded type 120 Vac 1ø receptacles. Control panel/cabinet
heater when required during construction stage and during long storage shall also
be provided. Heaters rated more than 2000 watts in capacity shall be rated at 600
V for 480 V, 3 phase operation and heaters rated less than 2000 watts in capacity
shall be rated at 240 V for 120 V, 1 phase operation.
4. Supplier shall provide incoming circuit breakers for the incoming power circuit
and documents showing the characteristics of the circuit breakers shall be
submitted to KORAD for coordination with KORAD's upstream circuit breakers.
5. Each control panel shall be provided with a loss of control voltage relay for
KORAD’s alarm.
6. Each control panel load shall be limited to 2 kVA at 120 Vac. For higher control
panel loads, the panel shall be provided with a step down transformer 480-120 V
of adequate capacity with incoming circuit breakers.
7. Piping, tubing, fittings, and wiring shall be arranged such that instruments or
devices may be removed or serviced without disturbing piping, tubing, or wiring.
4S-6

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
8. Instruments exerting strong cantilever forces on the panel surface shall be
adequately supported to remain plumb and true within 1/16 inch of vertical and
horizontal alignment.
9. Wiring
Control panel wiring shall be performed in accordance with Appendix 4P and the
following:

• Low level analog type instrumentation wiring shall be 2/c or 3/c twisted and

shielded (i.e. copper mylar tape with stranded copper drain wire) cable not less
than AWG No. 16 (1.25 mm2), Class B stranded copper with an insulation/
jacketing system.

• Current transformer circuit leads shall not be less than AWG No. 10 (5.5 mm2),

and shall be terminated at separate short circuiting type terminal blocks.

• Extra flexible wiring shall be provided over door hinges or other locations

where leads may be subject to flexing.

• Conductor insulation shall be cross-linked polyethylene or ethylene propylene

rubber compound. Cable Jacket shall be Neoprene, Hypalon or equivalent, if
required. PVC is not acceptable for insulation or Jacket material.

• Terminal blocks shall be suitable for external wires and shall be approved by

KORAD.

• All cables shall be capable of passing the test indicated in NEMA Standard

WC57/ICEA S-73-532- and WC70/ICEA S-95-658, as well as the flame test in
IEEE 383.
4S-7

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

• Wires shall be identified by individual wire numbers or letters at all terminal

points. Wires shall be identified by individual sleeve-type wire markers slipped
over the ends of and fastened to wires at each termination. Sleeves shall be
flame-resistant, non-conducting, a minimum of 1 inch in length, lettered
length-wise. PVC sleeves are not acceptable.

• All control panels and cabinets shall be completely wired at the factory prior to

shipment in a manner to ensure satisfactory and reliable operation. Particular
attention shall be given to factors such as vibration, temperature, ease of
installation, testing, and routine maintenance. All wiring shall be protected
from sharp edges and corners.

• External wire entrances shall be in accordance with KORAD's standard for

wiring segregation.

• All electrical equipment and instruments which require external connections

shall be prewired to terminal boxes mounted on skids.

• Control panels containing both AQ and NQ devices and wires shall follow the

separation and isolation requirements identified in USNRC RG 1.143.

• Supplier shall provide enough space in each control panel for cable training

bend radii.
10. Connections and Terminations

• Circuits connecting to KORAD's external equipment shall be terminated at

heavy duty terminal blocks including shield wires for instrumentation cable.
Instruments interfaced with KORAD's equipment shall be wired to a
centralized terminal block. Supplier's wiring shall not have more than two
wires connected to any terminal point.

• Wiring connections shall be made with compression crimp-on type ring-tongue

terminals with insulated ferrules.
4S-8

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

• Any electronic components, which are arranged in sliding drawers for rack

mounting shall be provided with quick disconnect type connectors for ease of
removing the drawers. Mating connectors shall be supplied with an apparatus
where such terminations are provided as manufacturer's standard.

• Provisions shall be made for the entrance of all power cables to the cabinets

with adequate space provided for termination. Supplier shall furnish cable
supports with a flame-resistant nonhygroscopic material suitable to withstand
the maximum short circuit stresses.

• Terminal block bars for thermocouple circuits shall be of appropriate material

such as chromel or constantan for signal continuity.

• Supplier shall furnish terminal blocks with a minimum of 20 percent spare

terminals for each panel.
11. Insulation

• All insulation and clearances to ground shall be designed such that the live

parts will withstand a high potential test of not less than 2500 V at 60 Hz for 1
minute (except for solid state equipment).

• The insulation of all control device coils shall be impervious to moisture and

suitable for operation in a salt laden air. The insulation shall completely seal
the conductors to prevent penetration of moisture or other contaminants and
shall be suitable for continuous operation at a rated total temperature of 130 oC
(266 oF) (Class B). The type of insulation desired shall be one in which the coil
windings are fully encapsulated with an epoxy resin, resulting in a
homogeneous watertight seal.
12. Insofar as practical, arrangement of instruments and conduits on panels, cabinets
and racks shall place the electrical devices out of likely paths of condensate or
water drains that may occur during testing or calibrating of instruments.
13. Ground Bus
A ground bus of 1-inch by 1/4-inch thick copper bar shall be installed to extend
the length of each cabinet at a convenient location just above the mounting base.
4S-9

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
Each section of the cabinet and all instrument and device grounds shall be
grounded directly to this bus. Supplier shall drill two NEMA standard 9/16-inch
holes on 1-3/4-inch centers spacing at each end of the ground bus for connection
of KORAD's ground cable. Where signal ground isolated from equipment ground
is required, a separate ground bus shall be installed in each equipment for
analog/digital signal ground.
14. With the multiple instrument arrangement, the panels, cabinets and racks shall be
arranged so any instrument can be serviced without taking the other instruments
out of service.
15. Panels, cabinets and racks, when requested, shall have hinged, gasketed,
removable doors. The doors shall be equipped with handles.
16. Instruments with pigtail electrical connections, such as solenoid valves, shall have
all pigtails terminated with ring tongue-type lugs adjacent to the device in lieu of
spliced connections.
17. All instrument piping, tubing, valves, and fittings shall be installed and securely
fastened to the panels, grouped in an orderly manner, and terminated with fittings
and plugs at points located at the top or bottom of each panel. Each terminal
point shall be identified by a stainless steel tag bearing the number of the
instrument associated with the sensing line. All clamps, pads, and supports in
direct contact with stainless steel pipe or tubing shall be of stainless steel material.
18. All process-sensing line piping, tubing, fittings, and welding within the panels,
unless otherwise noted, shall conform to the ASME B31.1 Code for Power Piping.
Supplier shall certify that the design, materials, fabrication, construction, and
testing of all piping provided by Supplier conforms to the ASME B31.1 Code.
19. Test connections shall be provided such that each device can be calibrated and
checked without its removal from the panel.
20. All valves located within tubing runs (tube connection at inlet and outlet) shall be
mechanically supported from the panel structure. Valves in piping runs may be
supported by the pipe, provided adequate pipe supports are utilized.
4S-10

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
21. All process-sensing line fittings and connections shall be of welded construction
except final connections to the instruments and test connections at the instruments,
which shall be threaded.
22. Connections from control devices shall be terminated in bulkhead fittings unless
specified otherwise.
23. Tubing runs shall be continuous from equipment to terminal area except where
tees are required or where tubing cannot properly be formed, attached, or removed
in one piece without deformation.
24. Each air supply stop valve and tube terminal connection shall be identified by a
stainless steel tag stamped with KORAD's tag number of the connecting
instrument on the instrument panel.
25. Control switches, indicating instruments, annunciators and alarm lamps shall be
located in front of the panel. Relays, contactors, etc., shall be located on the inside
of the rear and side panels. The arrangements of equipment inside the panel shall
be such as to provide ample access and meet applicable separation requirements as
called in the Technical Specification.
26. The freestanding control panel shall be designed to receive cables from above and
below unless otherwise specified. Top cover plates shall be removable in sections
for KORAD's drilling of conduit and cable entrance fittings. The top of the panel
shall be designed for attaching and supporting KORAD's cable trays with space
allowed for cable entry.
27. An internally mounted motor-driven blower, if required, shall be provided
complete with intake filter and necessary grills. The blower shall be of sufficient
flow capacity to limit the air temperature rise of 10 o F.
28. Fuses shall be nonreusable cartridge type with indication when blown and shall be
assembled in NEMA 1 type enclosure with adequate lighting for maintenance and
service. There shall be a proper protective coordination between main fuses or
circuit breakers and branch fuses or circuit breakers where the control panels
provide the main and feeder fuses and circuit breakers. Supplier shall provide
coordination verification documents for KORAD's approval.
4S-11

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
29. Supplier shall supply all necessary power sources for the components which are
operated or controlled by and/or through the control panel. Supplier shall also
supply adequate terminal blocks for external wirings for the components. Supplier
shall also supply suitable voltage regulating transformers for instrumentation
when required.
30. If plug-in relays are used, a plug-in test device shall be furnished.
31. Timers, relays, stepping switches, logic controllers and other similar devices shall
be provided with dust-tight enclosures.
32. All recorders and indicators shall be arranged for optimum viewing by the
operator and ease of chart removal. In no case shall recorders be mounted that
maintenance and chart changing will require ladders or foot stools.
33. Control and instrument wiring running inside the panels shall be installed in
raceways having removable covers.
3.4 Small Air Systems
If instrument air consumption to the package system is less than 600 scfh, individual
combination filter reducers shall be used with each instrument or with a panel or rack
header using less than 600 scfh for the complete panel.
3.5 Large Air Systems
1. On large systems, Supplier shall provide a dual instrument air regulator filter
station to reduce the nominal 100 psig instrument air to 20 psig.
2. The valve and manifold arrangement shall permit removal of one reducing valve
and one filter from service without disturbing the other or affecting its operation.
3. A minimum 4-1/2 inch diameter, 0 to 30 psig pressure gauge shall be provided
downstream of each reducing regulator but ahead of manifold valves.
4. If instruments requiring air pressures different from those described here are
4S-12

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
furnished, Supplier shall supply an additional filter/reducing station for each
different system.
5. All filter/reducing stations shall be furnished with a separate relief valve
downstream of the reducing valve.
6. On panels, individual air supply takeoffs for an instrument shall be made from the
top of a brass air header through 1/4 inch brass packless valves attached to 1/4
inch brass nipples brazed into the header.
7. Each instrument and valve shall be tagged with the instrument number in
accordance with KORAD's Numbering System.
8. Supplier shall furnish 20 percent extra valve-branches on each header installed.
3.6 Calibration
1. The following shall be considered the measurement reference data for this
specification :

• Normal barometric pressure : 14.7 psia
• Pressure base for gas-flow measurement : 14.7 psia
• Temperature base for gas-flow measurement : 15.6 oC (60 oF)
• Temperature base for liquid-flow measurement : 15.6 oC (60 oF)

2. Performance
The Following are minimum acceptable performance requirements for instruments
of package systems, all expressed as percentages of instrument operating span.
a. Panel mounted indicator (Electrical Type):
Accuracy(%) Repeatability(%)
4S-13

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
±1.5 ±0.2
b. Field mounted instrument (Electrical & Pneumatic)
b1. Transmitter Input Accuracy(%) Repeatability(%)

• Gage Pressure ±0.5 ±0.2
• Absolute Pressure

Spans to 50 mmHg ±1.0 ±0.5
Spans exceeding 50 mmHg ±0.5 ±0.1

• Diff. Pressure

Spans to 500 in H2O ±0.5 ±0.2
Spans 500 to 850 in H2O ±0.75 ±0.2

• Resistance ±0.5 ±0.15
• Millivolts ±0.5 ±0.15
• Level

Displacer ±0.5 ±0.2
Flanged Diff. Pressure ±1.0 ±0.1

• Current/Pneumatic ±0.5 ±0.2

b2. Local Indicator/Switches Accuracy(%)

• Differential Indicator Switch ±1.5% of F.S
• Differential Pressure Indicator ± 0.75% of F.S
• Pressure Switch ±0.5% of F.S
• Pressure Gauges ±0.5% of F.S

4S-14

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

• Temperature Indicator ±1% of F.S
• Temperature Switches ±1% of F.S
• Flow Indicator ±5% of F.S
• Flow Switch ±2% of F.S
• Level Indicator ±1% of F.S
• Level Switch ±1/4 inch

3.7 Electronic Field-Mounted Instruments
The following features shall be incorporated as applicable into all electronic
field-mounted instruments included in this specification :

• Signals : 4 to 20 mA dc, two-wire
• Electronic circuitry : solid-state
• Power Supply : 24 V dc (remotely mounted)
• Electrical connection : 3/4 inch conduit
• Non-interacting zero and span adjustments
• Diaphragm seals shall be provided for pressure, flow, and level transmitters in

application such as acid, caustic, radioactive fluids, etc.

• Transmitters shall be provided with shop-filled capillaries where required.

1. Pressure Transmitters (gauge, absolute and differential)

• Type : 2 wire

4S-15

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

• Wetted parts : Type 316 stainless steel (except body, gaskets, and seals)
• Amplifier : integral
• Housing : suitable for specified service environment
• Junction box : integral, with wiring terminals
• Elevation and suppression capability : as required
• Mounting : surface
• Process connections : 1/4" NPT preferred

2. Temperature Transmitters (resistance to current)

• Sensor : RTD, platinum, 100 ohm rating at 0 oC base Temp. with Temp.

coefficient of exactly 0.00385 ohm/oC three or four wire ungrounded.

• Range and span : field adjustable
• Output : linear
• Housing : suitable for specified service environment
• Adaptability to : 3 or 4 wire system
• Mounting : surface

3. Temperature Transmitters (mV to current)

• Sensor : thermocouple (E Type)
• Range and span : field adjustable
• Output : linear with mV input
• Housing : suitable for specified service environment

4S-16

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

• Mounting : surface

4. Temperature Transmitters (filled-system type)

• Output : 4 - 20 mA
• Others : Refer to Paragraph 3.8.2.

5. Level Transmitters (displacer type)

• Displacer length : to suit application range
• Displacer material : Type 304 or 316 stainless steel
• Hanger rod : 300 series stainless steel
• Mounting Type : external cage type (preferred) or internal displacer
• Mounting orientation and connections : to suit application
• Housing : suitable for specified service environment.

6. Level Transmitters (differential-pressure type, flanged or extended diaphragm)

• Mounting : side of vessel
• Flange : material, size and rating to match application
• Wetted Parts : Type 316 stainless steel
• Housing : suitable for specified service environment

7. Converters (current to pneumatic)

• Input/Output : 4 to 20 mA dc/3 to 15 psig

4S-17

• Housing : suitable for specified service environment

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

• Air line connection : 1/4" NPT
• Mounting : surface
• Accessories : pressure reducing valve with filter and gauge

8. Thermocouples

• Type : Refer to Paragraph 3.7.3.
• Installation : Thermowells shall be provided with thermocouples.

9. RTD's

• Type : Refer to Paragraph 3.7.2.
• Installation : Thermowells shall be provided with RTD's.

3.8 Pneumatic Field-Mounted Instruments
The following features shall be incorporated as applicable into all pneumatic
field-mounted instruments included in this specification :

• Output Signals : 3 to 15 psig
• Accessories : pressure reducing valve with filter and gauge.
• Zero adjustment : accessible without removing cover
• Mounting : surface
• Output and air supply connections : 1/4 inch NPT
• Style : indicating type or with output gauge.

4S-18

1. Pressure Transmitters (gauge, absolute and differential)
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

• Wetted parts : Type 316 stainless steel
• Elevation and suppression capability : as required
• Gaskets : TFE or silicone elastomer for nonradioactive services and suitable

material for radio-active services.

• Process connections : 1/4" NPT preferred

2. Temperature Transmitters ( filled-system type)

• Bulb : furnished with a companion thermowell .
• Ambient temperature compensation : for Class II thermal systems without

compensation ( bulb elevation calibration correction may be required), all other
system classes with compensation either fully compensated or easily
compensated as suited for the accuracy requirements.
3. Level Transmitters (displacer type)

• Displace length : to suit application range
• Displace material : Type 304 or 316 stainless steel
• Hanger rod : 300 series stainless steel
• Mounting : external cage (preferred) or internal displace
• Mounting connection and orientation : to suit application
• Gauges : supply and output air

4. Level Controllers (displacer type)

• Control modes : proportional (plus integral if application requires)

4S-19

• Setpoint knob : external (preferred) or inside case door

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

• Control action : reversible
• Displace length : to suit application range
• Displace material : Type 304 or 316 stainless steel
• Hanger rod : 300 series stainless steel
• Mounting : external cage (preferred) or internal displace
• Connection and orientation : to suit application
• Gauges : supply and output air

3.9 Panel Mounted Instruments
The following features, as applicable, shall be incorporated into all panel mounted
instruments included in this specification :

• Signal transmission : 4 to 20 mA or 3 to 15 psig
• Electronic circuitry : microprocessor based solid-state or equivalent.
• Scale : white with black numerals.
• Panel mounting : flush or semiflush
• Bezel : black
• Accessories : mounting hardware and shelves.

1. Elect. Indicators :

• Size : nominal 3 inch width X 6 inch height

4S-20

• Terminal connections : studs on rear of instrument

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

• Ganging : capability for horizontal array
• Engineering units and scaling factors : Metric unit shall be applied for all

indicating. But especially for
pressure and volumetric flow, the
following engineering units should
be applied.
. For pressure, metric unit such as mmH O (or cmH O) or kg/cm2 should
2 2
be used.
. For volumetric flow , metric unit such as ℓ/s or ℓ/min should be used.

• Zero adjustment : front of instrument
• Display : LED bargraph with 4 digit numeric.
• Display color : green
• Scale : printed, engineering units and scaling factors
• Mounting Method : From the front of the panel.

2. Recorders (miniature strip chart) :

• Size : 6 X 6 inch nominal
• Pens : color coded in multi pen units
• Chart capacity : For 30 days
• Inking system : capsule
• Ink and chart supply : For 2 years plant normal operation
• Chart speed : variable speed

4S-21

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

• Chart drive : 120 Vac, 60 Hz
• Display : LCD or LED
• Display Color : green

3. Indicating Controllers :

• Control modes : non interactive and to suit application
• Control action : reversible
• Indicators : setpoint, controlled variable, and output
• Scale : fixed
• Display : LED or VFD(vacuum fluorescent display)
• Display Color : green
• Size : 3 inch width by 6 inch height, nominal.
• Chassis : slideout for adjustment or servicing in place
• Servicing : provision for maintaining manual control.

4. Manual Control Station :

• Setting device : thumbwheel, knob, or pushbuttons
• Scale : calibrated 0 to 100 percent unless otherwise required by application
• Output indicator : if furnished, scaled 0 to 100 percent
• Measured variable indication : when required by application

4S-22

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
5. Manual/Automatic Transfer Stations :

• Scale : calibrated 0 to 100 percent
• Indication : measured variable and output
• Switch : manual/automatic transfer
• Signal biasing : when required by application
• Manual/automatic transfer : bumpless and balanceless

6. Signal Comparators (electronic receiver switches) :

• Setpoint capability : 0 to 100 percent of input
• Adjustable deadband
• Output relay : SPDT
• Relay contact rating : 0.5 A, at 250 Vdc inductive load, and 5 A, at 120

Vac, 60 Hz resistive load.
7. Signal Selectors (high-low) :

• Capability : select on 1 percent difference
• Type : nonindicating
• Field convertible : on high or low signal

3.10 Alarm Contacts and Annunciation :
1. Local annunciators and alarms shall include dual "trouble alarm" contacts for
transmission of a combined common signal to a remote annunciator.
4S-23

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
2. Annunciator field trouble contacts shall be normally open and shall close to alarm.
3. The annunciator shall incorporate the momentary acknowledge and test
pushbuttons.
4. Annunciators

• Solid state type annunciators shall be used and all logic cards shall be plug-in

type.

• Response time shall be less than 50 msec.
• All logic cards shall be tested for surge withstand capability per IEEE

C37.90.1 and annunciator system shall operate reliably in ambient temperature
up to 148 oF.

• Aux. relay contacts shall be rated for 0.5 A at 125 Vdc inductive load, 1 A at

120 Vac, 60 Hz resistive load.
5. Twenty five percent spare active windows complete with logic circuits shall be
provided for KORAD's future use.
6. Annunciators shall follow the sequence below :
Alarm Contact
Operator Field to remote
Condition Action Contact Window Audible Annunciator
Normal None Open Off Silent Open
Alarm (abnormal) None Close Flashing Sounding Close
Return to None Open Flashing Sounding Close
normal before
acknowledge
4S-24

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
Alarm + 20 None Closed Flashing Silent Close
seconds or Open
Alarm (abnormal) Acknowledge Close On Silent Open
Alarm (normal) Acknowledge Open Off Silent Open
Normal after None Open Off Silent Open
acknowledge
7. Annunciator Cabinet :

• The annunciator cabinet shall be Hathaway EL series or Ronan series X12

series or approved equivalent.

• Local annunciator horns shall be adjustable such that they will sound 10 dB

above local ambient noise levels.

• There shall be an alarm contact closing on loss of voltage to the local

annunciator to be transmitted to the main annunciator.
3.11 Miscellaneous Instrument and Hardware
The following are miscellaneous instruments and hardware, so defined because they do
not specifically fall into any of the previously defined categories. However, they are
part of many package systems and therefore must meet the following specifications.
With regards to process related switches, high setpoint contact shall be energized to
close on process rising action while low setpoint contact be energized to close on
process falling action.
1. Control Valves :

• Minimum body size : 1 inch, with reduced trim as required

4S-25

• Use of butterfly or ball valves : for special applications

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

• Valve sizing : Valve sizing and Cv rating shall be specified based on

minimum and maximum pressure drop, pressure, and flow requirement of the
system. Valve shall be 70 to 85 percent open during rated maximum process
condition.

• Positioners, with gauges and bypass : on all butterfly valves, valves 2

inches and larger, and on cases of seat unbalance when needed for exact
positioning, split ranging (do not use bypass) characterizing, and for flow
deemed critical by Supplier.
2. Solenoid Valves :

• Coil insulation : Class H
• Solenoid valve enclosures : suitable for specified service environment with

3/4 inch threaded conduit hub

• Elastomers : Seals, Disc. or Diaphragm material to be fluorocarbon elastomer

(VITON, FLLIOREL, etc) or approved equivalent.

• DC solenoids : rated 125 Vdc, for continuous operation range at 90 to 140

Vdc

• Solenoid coil leads : run in conduit to terminal boxes
• Solenoid valves : mounted such that conduit and cable may be connected

without causing misalignment or incorrect operation

• Solenoid valves shall be as manufactured by ASCO or approved equivalent
• Each solenoid valve shall be supplied with 30 ft pigtails having insulation

temperature ratings of 200 oC (392 oF).
3. Pressure, Temperature and Flow Switches :
4S-26

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

• Enclosures : suitable for specified service environment
• Switches : rigidly fastened to panel, rack, or cabinet such that removal of

tubing, piping, and wiring may be accomplished without dismounting of the
instrument.

• Contact rating : 5 A, 120 Vac, 60 Hz resistive load and 0.5 A, 250 Vdc

inductive load.

• Pressure, temperature and flow switches : installed such that KORAD's

connections are to terminal blocks.
4. Level Switches :
a. Displacer type

• Contact rating : 5 A, 120 Vac, 60 Hz resistive load 0.5 A, 250 Vdc

inductive load

• Switch type : 2-DPDT
• Others : refer to Paragraph 3.8.5

b. Electronic type (ultrasonic, capacitance, etc)

• Enclosures : Suitable for specified service environment
• Mounting connections : 3/4" NPT
• Switch contact rating and type : See Paragraph 3.11.4.a

5. Limit Switches :

• Enclosures : suitable for specified service environment

4S-27

• Contacts : 2-DPDT

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

• Contact rating : 5 A, 120 Vac, 60 Hz resistive load and 0.5 A, 250 Vdc

inductive load.
6. Auxiliary Relays :

• Auxiliary relays shall be rated 600 Vac self-reset front connected surface

mounted with cover, coil rated for 5 A 120 Vac 60 Hz and 0.5 A 125 Vdc
continuous duty.

• Contact rating : 5 A, 120 Vac, 60 Hz resistive load and 0.5 A, 250 Vdc

inductive load.
7. (Differential) Pressure Gauges including flow indicator:

• Pressure gauges : Minimum 4-1/2 inch diameter dial (white face with black

graduations), phenol turret case, and blowout protection

• Dial inscriptions shall not be used : the service shall be indicated by a

permanent label attached to the gauge case.

• Diaphragm seals : on instruments used for handling viscous liquids or

liquids with suspended solids. Means shall be provided for on site calibration
of all instruments furnished with diaphragm seals.

• Engineering units and scaling factors : Metric unit shall be applied for all

indicating. But especially for
pressure and volumetric flow, the
following engineering units should
be applied.
. For pressure, metric unit such as mmH O (or cmH O) or kg/cm2 should be
2 2
used.
. For volumetric flow , metric unit such as ℓ/s or ℓ/min should be used.
4S-28

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
8. Thermowells :

• Type : socket weld ( 1-1/4"), thread ( 1-1/4" or 1" NPT), or Flange (3")
• Location : after fluid mixing but not in the minimum straight run of pipe

upstream or downstream of a flow element.

• Material : to suit application service

9. Thermometers :

• Dial type : bimetallic with 5 inch diameter dial
• Orientation type : as required for unobstructed viewing
• Stem : 1/4 inch stainless steel

10. Averaging Pitot Tubes :

• Averaging pitot tubes shall provide suitable signal for proper recording,

totalizing or control of complex systems.

• The sensing probes shall be designed to sense flow velocity in each of several

equal annular cross-sectional areas of the flow stream and provide an output
signal proportional to the average flow.

• Material : to suit application service

11. Timers :

• The type of timers shall be timer selector switch, reset timer or program timer

as required.

• Each timer shall have proper adjustable range and 120 Vac 60 Hz continuous

duty coils.

• Contact rating : 5 A, 120 Vac, 60 Hz resistive load and 0.5 A, 250 Vdc

4S-29

inductive load.
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
12. Control Switches, Pushbuttons, Selector Switches :

• The number of stages and contacts, number of switch positions, and handle

style and color shall be specified or reviewed by KORAD.

• All contacts shall have contact rating designations of A600 and P300 as

defined in NEMA ICS-5.

• Removable handles or keys for control switches shall not be interchangeable

with other switches. Supplier shall furnish two handles per unit for use with all
control switches.
13. Indicating Lights :

• Indicating lights shall be complete with bulb, translucent lens, and suitable

resistor for the service required. Lens color shall be either as specified or
reviewed by KORAD.

• Indicating lights for dry, indoor applications shall be Master Specialties

Series-10E or approved equivalent.

• LED's are preferred and shall be used whenever available, for the indicating

lights in the control panels and boards. LED's shall be of equivalent brightness
to incandescent lamps. LED's shall be as manufactured by Master Specialties,
Ledtronics, Oshino or approved equivalent.
14. Uninterrupted Power Supply System
All equipment are subject to short period of power interruption during the fast bus
transfer from normal power source to standby power source. Standby power
source is supplied approximately 5 to 10 cycle after initiation of bus transfer.
All equipment shall continue to operate without any degradation of performance
during or after bus transfer. If uninterrupted performance of equipment can not be
guaranteed, uninterrupted power supply system which consists of inverter, battery,
battery charger and any other necessary devices shall be provided by the supplier.
4S-30

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
3.12 Instrument Numbering and Tagging
1. Supplier shall assign instrument number in accordance with Attachment E for all
instrumentations and controls supplied with associated mechanical equipments.
2. Instrument tagging shall be in accordance with Appendix 4T, "Requirements for
Instrument Tagging."
3.13 Unless otherwise specified, the ac equipment fed from system nominal voltage of 120
Vac or 480 Vac shall be rated in accordance with ANSI C.84.1, and be able to normally
operate at the steady state voltage variation of 10%. The operating voltage ranges of
125 Vdc and 250 Vdc equipment shall be in accordance with IEEE 946 Table 1.
4.0 HUMAN FACTORS ENGINEERING DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
4.1 General
1. Control panels and associated panel mounted devices to be furnished within this
package specification shall be designed to meet the following human factors
engineering design requirements for consistent design to 1)minimize operator
errors, 2)improve operating convenience.
4.2 Annunciators
1. Control panel annunciators shall follow good human factors engineering design
criteria in order to be immediately and correctly noticed, accurately responded to
in a timely fashion, and easily discriminable.
2. Functional Grouping
Annunciators shall be grouped by function and system.
3. Alarm Controls

• The control panel alarm system shall have 2 discriminable controls.

4S-31

(acknowledge and test buttons)
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1

• Control Type : The two controls shall be pushbuttons of large (2cm or

greater) diameter.
4. Dark at Power
Control panel annunciators shall adhere to the "dark board" concept.
5. Out-Of-Service (OOS) and Blank Windows
Out-Of-Service (OOS) and blank windows shall be set up such that the operators
will not receive spurious alarms.
6. Alarm Matrix
Alarms shall be identified by their positions in the row by column matrix. The
matrix rows and columns shall reflect information on the system and problem.
Columns shall reflect systems when possible and rows common trouble types. For
example, A and B train alarm for a system would be in adjacent columns with
alarms for identical pump trips in a row.
7. Labeling & Nomenclature
Alarm legends shall be unambiguous and easy to read.

• Abbreviations - Only abbreviations from the standard list of abbreviations and

table of system mnemonics (Attachment A, Part I) shall be used.
Abbreviations shall be consistent for component types, system names, and
trouble types.

• Labeling

Engraving and tile setup
4S-32

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
. Wording shall be set up on each alarm tile in this order : first - Alarm
Source (e.g. - pump A, EFW) second - Problem (e.g. - open, power lost,
pressure, flow) third - Degree of severity, if needed (e.g. - Lo-Lo)
. If a three line format is not needed, a 2 line tile shall be acceptable.
More than 3 lines per tile shall be avoided.
. Lettering height shall be such that 14 characters may fit per line.
. Character font shall be Gothic, such as Bold Boston (sans serif) for
maximum viewability, Stroke width shall be wider than that traditionally
used, with a 3:8 ratio to height. Hence letter height shall be 1/4 inch.
. Lettering shall be accomplished by the following method : Engraving
plastic diffuser tile and filling the engraving with black paint or ink.
8. Multi - Input Windows
In many cases, an alarm window will have multiple inputs. The general principle
governing this is that multiple inputs may be used only when the operator's
response to the inputs is the same. For instance, if the operator's response to the
alarm would be to dispatch someone to a local panel, regardless of what input, the
inputs would be appropriate on one window. However, if the operator must
perform different actions, separate windows should be used. In order to limit the
number of control panel alarms, multi-input windows shall be used when
appropriate.
4.3 Panel Layout
1. Consistency and Standardization

• Layouts shall be consistent and instrumentation types standard for similar

systems and functions.

• For each type of control function or indicator function, only one hardware type

shall be used where practical. For example, all controls for breakers should be
the same model. This does not mean, for instance, that all recorders shall be
the same. It means that all recorders which perform similar functions (e.g. -
4S-33

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
trend data for a linear variable from 5 input points, over a certain range and
frequency of reading) should be the same model.
2. Panel Size & Shape
For location of components above the floor, vertical panels. shall adhere to the
following I&C height guidelines:
Controls Displays
Min. - Max. Min. - Max.
Major 86 – 135 cm ( 34 – 53 inch) 127 –165 cm (50 – 65 inch)
Normal 86 – 178 cm ( 34 – 70 inch) 104 –178 cm (41 – 70 inch)
"Major" means that controls and display are used frequently or precisely by the
operator.
3. Display and Control Groups
Related instruments and controls shall be grouped together and arranged to reflect
system process.

• Grouping

Controls and indicators for each system shall be integrated and grouped below
relevant alarms. In general, annunciators shall be at the highest panel elevation,
status lights and LED meters below them (but above 170 cm height) and other
controls and indications either on the bench section of the panel or located
below the 170 cm elevation on the vertical-board. The vertical-board shall
contain predominantly indication devices such as analog meters with controls,
especially those with handles being located primarily on the bench section.
However, controls and indications shall be integrated to reflect process flow as
described below.

• Hardware Layout Mimic

Hardware shall be arranged on the control panels so as to blend instrumentation
4S-34

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
and control in a manner that reflects process flow through the system. For
example, pump and valve controls should reflect their relative locations in the
flow paths in the plant with relevant indicators such as discharge pressure, and
flow located adjacently. This type of arrangement need not be done for small,
uncomplicated systems with only a few controls and indicators.
4.4 Visual Displays (Indicators and Lights)
Visual displays shall be easy to read, unambiguous, easy to maintain, and provide
needed, relevant information. Glare shall be kept low enough so that visual displays may
be easily read.
1. Color Coding
Color coding shall provide clear status information on lights without being
overused.
Color coding for indicator lights shall, in general, be as follows:

• Red : Equipment or process operating (open, running, on) or for immediate

operator information/attention.

• Green : Equipment or process not operating (close, stop, off)
• White : Equipment with trouble/disabled condition, (or Yellow) general

information or status. If LED's are used in lieu of bulbs, yellow may be
substituted (white and yellow are indiscriminable to the human eye).

• Amber : Not to be used as a warning. May be used for "Auto" as needed, or

for less critical operator information/ attention.
2. Lettering and Wording
Lettering and wording shall be clear, consistent, and readable under all conditions.
4S-35

• Consistency

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
Nomenclature shall be consistent for units, system names, and other standard
words on all indicators.

• Legends on Lights

Legends and component names shall not be engraved only on indicators. A
label shall also be provided in all cases, such that control names shall be visible
even when bulbs are burned out or power is lost.
Lettering on visual displays shall adhere to the same general principles as in
Section 4.7 (labeling). The only exception is that lettering shall be of smaller
size (actual size depends on hardware dimensions).
3. Lights
Indicator lights shall be easy to maintain and easy to see against background
lighting and glare.

• Color on backlite pushbuttons shall be derived from LED's, not plastic boots

placed over lightbulbs.

• Engraving of identification information (such as valve number, pump name,

etc.) shall be placed on labels and not lenses. However, status information
(such as trip bypass, trouble, etc.) can be placed on lenses.
4. Meters and Recorders
Meters shall be easy to use; accurate and unambiguous under all conditions.
Recorders shall be easy to use and maintain and shall contain features allowing
precise readings.

• Meter Scales

Meter Scales shall have clear divisions, which are non-logarithmic and utilize
major, intermediate and minor scale divisions. All scale divisions shall be in 1's,
4S-36

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
2's, 5's or 10's (preferably 1's or 10's). Scales shall be in units preferred by
operators for interpreting the variable. Metric units shall be used on all meters
and indicators. Scales shall begin and end at major scale divisions and be
consistent with range limits. Log scales are permissible for certain power meter
applications. Exceptions to this practice may be individually evaluated based on
technical considerations.

• In the event of a power loss, meters shall have provisions to indicate the power

loss.
4.5 Controls
All controls shall be easily discriminable, standardized across function, grouped
according to function and generally within system, and chosen with good human factors
incorporated into the hardware.
1. Control Type
Control types shall be standardized for function and shall reflect good human
factors practice. Each type of control shall be readily discernable from the other.
Controls with handles shall not be located within 10cm (from the bottom of the
control handle) of the edge of the benchboard panel (to prevent inadvertent
activation).

• Pushbutton Controls

As a general practice, pushbutton control shall be vertically aligned.
Pushbutton legend shall be readable under ambient light conditions, regardless
of internal illumination.

• Rotary Controls

All rotary control knobs shall incorporate the following features:
4S-37

. Good Control Resistance
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
. Grooved or textured edge and a 2.5 cm minimum diameter
. Clear linear scale markings - a detent at each position if possible
. Bright orange or red pointer on control bezel or comparable position
indicator

• All control types shall be standardized relative to function. That is, if a

pushbutton control switch is used for one type of task such as valve operation,
it should be used for that task in all instances.
2. Administrative Controls
Restricted use of controls shall have barriers to inappropriate actuation. These may
be protective housings, hinged shields or keylocks, in this order of preference.

• Protective housings are type of controls in which a round pushbutton has a

guard on its side but not top. This prevents inadvertent actuation but does not
cause the operator to take extra action or pause.

• Keylocks shall be used only when access must be absolutely restricted and

there is a real danger of unauthorized use of the controls. Keylocks shall use
double sided teeth on keys and shall have "up" as the locked position for the
control. Keys shall only be removable when the switch is locked. Keys shall be
available at all necessary times in a timely fashion from a well-marked
controlled repository.
3. Control Discrimination

• All possible cues shall be used to aid operators in discriminating between

different control types.

• Tactile cues (different shape, feel, and resistance) and visual cues (size, shape,

color, style) can be used.
4S-38

4.6 Video Display Unit(VDU) Displays
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
Computer displays shall be designed for clarity, rapid error-free interpretation, and
accurate presentation of information. Computer hardware shall be designed to support
this principle.
1. Display Format
Displays shall be formatted to avoid clutter, be easy to use and avoid being "busy"

• Layout of displays shall be done by the computer system supplier. The criteria

mentioned below are general guidelines intended to assure compliance with
NUREG-0800 and NUREG-0700.

• Display clutter shall be avoided. All screens shall be at least 50% white space.

To avoid "busy" screens, data shall not change more often than 1 time a second
and rapidly oscillating data shall be smoothed out.
2. Use of Graphs
Graphs, when used, shall have clear information in a format familiar to operators.
Scales and Units : Graphs on computer generated displays shall use the same
scales and units that operators are familiar with, from MCR
instrumentation and plant procedures.
3. Color
Chosen colors shall be discrete, readily visible, and enhance operator processing
of displayed information.
4. Menus
All computer displays shall be menu-driven and shall provide paging cues.
4S-39

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
Menus shall be hierarchical in nature and each option shall be assigned a number.
Multi-page menus and displays shall be avoided.
5. Hardware
Glare : All MCR VDUs shall be fitted with glare shields or antiglare screens and
mounted at an angle empirically determined to minimize glare.

• VDUs shall be capable of high resolution graphics and, at a minimum, the 7

colors described previously.

• Diagonal resolution shall exceed 800 pixels for a 19 inch screen.
• Data refresh rates shall not exceed once per second ; as this would be

meaningless to the operator.

• Computer response time shall be fast enough not to impact operator

performance.
6. Highlighting
Highlighting shall be used but not overused to emphasize key information.
Blinking (Flashing) Displays can be used for transition to computer alarm state
(and suppressed when acknowledged) and for graphic displays where plant
parameters exceed the setpoint and are shown out of bounds. Blink rates for these
should not detract from readability.
7. Lettering and Messages
Messages shall be concise but complete. Lettering shall be easily discriminable
and readable.

• Alpha numeric character size shall be a minimum of 7 pixels by 9 pixels.
• Graphic lines shall have a minimum density of 40 pixels per inch.
• Prompt messages shall provide direction to the operator and shall display

required action or options.
4S-40

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
8. Guidelines
All VDU displays shall use format, units and limits (scale range) that correspond
to control board Instrumentation and Control.

• In tabular data, decimals shall be aligned: whole numbers shall be right

justified.

• Data flow shall mimic normal plant flow relations.

4.7 Labeling, Demarcation, and Mimic
Hierarchical labeling employing clearly visible lettering shall be employed. Labels
shall conform to good human factors practices in general, as outlined in EPRI NP-3659,
and NUREG-0700.
1. Hierarchical Labeling
To prevent panel clutter and unnecessary repetition, a hierarchical labeling scheme
shall be used.

• System or subsystem name shall be presented on an overall label for groups of

controls and indications within these demarcated areas, and the system name
should not be repeated on each individual identifying label.

• As labels go up the hierarchy, letter height and stroke width shall increase.

2. General labeling and Demarcation Guideline
General labeling guideline (e.g. label colors, letter heights, stroke widths etc.) shall
be in accordance with Appendix 4U. Demarcation and mimic shall be designed in
accordance with Attachment B.3.
4S-41

3. Nomenclature and Style
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
Labels shall use plant standard nomenclatures and abbreviations as delineated in
Attachment A.
4S-42 (Final)

ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
ABBREV-
IATION
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
A
APPROXIMATELY
ARCHITECT ENGINEER
AREA RADIATION
AREA RADIATION
MONITOR (ING)
ARGON
AS LOW AS REASONABLY
ACHIEVABLE
ASSEMBLY
ATMOSPHERE
ATMOSPHERIC DUMP VALVE
AUCTIONEERED
AUDIBLE
AUTOMATIC
AUTOSTART
AUXILIARY
AUXILIARY RELAY CABINET
AUXILIARY STEAM
AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER
AVAILABLE
AVERAGE
APPROX
AE, A/E
AR
ARM
ARG
ALARA
ASSY
ATMOS
ADV
AUCTD
AUD
AUTO
AUTOST
AUX
ARC
AUX STM
AUXT
AVAIL
AVG
B
BACK
BACK-UP
BACKWASH
BALANCE
BATTERY
BEARING
BEFORE
BETWEEN
BISTABLE
BLEED
BLEED TRIP VALVE
BLOCKED
BCK
BCKUP
BKWH
BAL
BATT
BRG
BFR
BTWN
BISTAB
BLD
BTV
BLKD
BLOWER
BLOWING
BOILER
BOOSTER
BOTTLED GAS
BOTTOM
BOX
BREAKER
BREATHING
BRIDGE
BRITISH THERMAL UNIT
BUILDING
BURNER
BYPASS
C
CABINET
CABINET WIRING DIAGRAM
CABLE
CALCULATION
CALIBRATION
CALCIUM
CAPACITY
CARBON
CARBON DIOXIDE
CASING
CATEGORY
CATHODE RAY TUBE
CATHODIC PROTECTION
CATION
CAUSTIC
CAVITY
CELSIUS
CENTER
A-1
ABBREV

• IATION

BLWR
BLWG
BLR
BSTR
BG
BOT
BX
BRKR
BR
BRDG
BTU
BLDG
BNR
BYP
CAB
CWD
CBL
CALC
CALB,
CALIB
CA
CAPY
C
CO2
CSG
CAT
CRT
C PROT
CTN
CAUS
CVTY
oC
CTR

ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
ABBREV-
IATION
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
ABBREV

• IATION

C (Cont.)
CENTIMETER CM
CENTRAL ALARM STATION CAS
CENTRAL PROCESS UNIT CPU
CENTRIFUGAL CENT
CHAMBER CHMB
CHANGE CHNG
CHANNEL CH
CHARCOAL CHAR
CHARCOAL DELAY BED CDB
CHARCOAL GUARD BED CGB
CHARGER CHR
CHARGING CHRG
CHECK CHK, CK
CHECK VALVE CK VLV
CHEMICAL CHEM
CHEST CHST
CHILLED CHLD
CHILLED WATER CH WTR
CHILLED WATER COIL CWC
CHILLER CHLR
CHLORIDE CHLOR
CHLORINE CL
CHLORINATION CHLORTN
CIRCUIT(S) CKT(S)
CIRCULATING CIRC
CIRCULATING WATER PUMP CWP
CIRCULATING WATER CW(S)
(SYSTEM)
CLARIFIER CLRF
CLEAING CLNG
CLEAN UP CU
CLOSE CLS
CLOSED CLSD
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION CCTV
COAGULANT COAG
COALESCER
CODE OF FEEDERAL (UNITED
STATES) REGULATIONS
COEFFICIENT
COLLECTION
COLLECTOR
COLUMN
COMBUSTIBLE
COMBUSTIBLE GAS CONTROL
SYSTEM
COMMON
COMMUNICATION
COMPARTMENT
COMPENSATED
COMPENSATED IONIZATION
CHAMBER
COMPONENT
COMPONENT CONTROL
SYSTEM
COMPONENT COOLING
WATER (SYSTEM)
COMPRESSOR
COMPUTED
COMPUTER
COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN
CONCENTRATION
CONDITION
CONDUCTIVITY
CONDUCTIVITY RACK
CONNECTION
CONSTRUCTION
CONSTRUCTION PERMIT
CONTROL (LER)
CONTROLLED
CONTROL LOGIC DIAGRAM
CONTROL ROOM
CLSCR
CFR
COEFF
COLLN
COLL
COL
COMB
CGCS
CMN
COM
COMP
CMPN
CIC
CMPNT
CCS
CCW(S)
COMR
CMPTD
CPTR
CAD
CONC
CONDN
CDTY
CDTY RK
CONN
CONSTR
CP
CTRL(R)
CTRLD
CLD
CR
A-2

ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
ABBREV-
IATION
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
ABBREV

• IATION

C (Cont.)
CONTROL VALVE CV
CONTROL WIRING DIAGRAM CWD
CONVECTION CONV
CONVERTER CVTR
CONVEYER CNVR
COOLER CLR
COOLING CLG
COOLING WATER TREATMENT CWT
CORRECTED CORR
COST SCHEDULE C/S
COUNTS PER MINUTE CPM
COUNTS PER SECOND CPS
COUPLING CPLG
COVER CVR
CROSSCONNECT XCON
CROSSTIE XTIE
CROSSOVER XOVER
CUBICLE CUB
CURIE CI
CURRENT CURR
CURRENT INDICATOR II
CURRENT RECORDER IR
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CT
CUTOUT CTOUT
CYLINDER CYL
DECREASE
DEENERGIZE
DEGASFIER
DEGRESS
DELAY
DEMAND
DEMINERALIZER
DENSITY
DEPENDENT
DESIGN BASIS ACCIDENT
DESIGN BASIS EARTHQUAKE
DESIGN CRITERIA MANUAL
DESIGN DOCUMENT CONTROL
CENTER
DESIGN INFORMATION
TRANSMITTAL
DETECTOR
DETECTION
DEVIATION
DEWATERING
DIESEL
DIESEL OIL
DIESEL GENERATOR
DIFFERENTIAL
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE
D
DAMPER
DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM
DATA LINK
DECARBONATOR
DECADES PER MINUTE
DECANTER
DECONTAMINATION
DECONTAMINATION FACTOR
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE
CONTROL STATION
DMPR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE
DAS INDICATOR
DL DIGITAL
DECAR DIGITAL CONTROL AND
MONITORING
DPM
DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
DECAN SYSTEM
DECON DIGITAL ELECTROHYDRAULIC
DF
A-3
DECR
DENERG
DEGAS
DEG
DLY
DEM
DEMI,
DEMIN
DNS
DEP
DBA
DBE
DCM
DDCC
DIT
DET
DETN
DEV
DEWATER
DSL
DO
DG
DIFF
D P, P,
DIFF PRESS
PDK
PDI
DIG
DCM
DDPS
DEH

ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
ABBREV-
IATION
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
ABBREV

• IATION

D (Cont.)
DIGITAL TO ANALOG D/A
DILUTE DIL
DILUTION DILU
DIRECT CURRENT DC
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL DDC
DISABLED DIS
DISCHARGE DSCH
DISCHARGE FLUME DSCH FLM
DISCONNECT DISCON
DISENGAGE DISENG
DISPLAY DISP
DISSOLVED OXYGEN DO2
DISTRIBUTION DISTR
DIVERSION DIVE
DIVISION DIV
DUCT DCT
DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITY DOR
DOCUMENT REVIEW NOTICE DRN
DOMESTIC DOMES
DOWNSTREAM DNSTRM
DRAIN DRN
DRAIN PUMP DRNP
DRAIN TANK DT
DRAIN VALVE DV
DRAWING COMMENT DCDF
DISTRIBUTION FORM
DRIVE DRV
DRUM DRM
DUPLEX DPLX
DURATION DURAT
E
EAST E
ECCENTRICITY ECC
EFFICIENCY EFF
EFFLUENT EFLU
EFFLUENT CONCENTRATION EC
ELECTRICAL ELECT
ELECTRICAL TO PNEUMATIC E/P
ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM EWD
ELECTROHYDRAULIC EH
ELECTROHYDRAULIC EHC
CONTROL
ELECTROMAGNETIC EMI
INTERFERENCE
ELETRONIC ELECTRN
ELECTRO PNEUMATIC E/P
ELEVATION ELEV
ELEVATOR ELVTR
EMERGENCY EMRG
ENCLOSURE ENCLSR
ENERGIZE ENERG
ENGAGED ENGD
ENGINE ENG
ENGINEERING GROUP LEADER EGL
ENGINEERING GROUP EGS
SUPERVISOR
ENVIRONMENTAL EM
MONITORING
EQUIPMENT EQUIP,
EQ, EQPT
EQUIPMENT DRAIN TANK EDT
EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATION EQ
EQUIPMENT VIBRATION EVMS
MONITORING SYSTEM
ESSENTIAL ESSEN
EVACUATION EVAC
EVAPORATOR EVAP
EXCESS EXCS
A-4

ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
ABBREV-
IATION
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
ABBREV

• IATION

E (Cont.)
EXCESS FLOW CHECK VALVE
EXCHANGER
EXHAUST
EXHAUSTER
EXHAUSR HOOD
EXPANSION
EXTERNAL
EXTRACTION
EXTRAXTOR
EFCV
EXCH
EXH
EXHSTR
EXHD
EXP
EXTER
EXT
EXTRR
F
FACILITY FAC
FAHRENHEIT F
FAILED AS IS F.A.I
FAILED CLOSED F.C.
FAILED OPEN F.O.
FAILURE FAIL
FAILURE MODE AND EFFECTS FMEA
ANALYSIS
FAULT FALT
FEEDER FDR
FEET FT
FIELD FLD
FILTER FLTR
FIRE PROTECTION (PANEL) FP(P)
FIRST 1ST
FLAME FLM
FLANGE FLNG
FLASH FLSH
FLOOR FLR
FLOW FLO
FLOW CALIBRATION FCL
CONSTANT
FLOW CONTROLLER FC
FLOW CONTROL VALVE FCV
FLOW INDICATOR
FLOW INDICATING CONTROL
STATION
FLOW INTEGRATOR
INDICATOR
FLOW INTEGRATOR SWITCH
FLOW TRANSMITTER
FLUE GAS
FLUID
FLUORIDE
FOULING
FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY INDICATOR
FROM
FRONT
FRONT FACE
FULL LENGTH CEA
FUNCTION
FUNCTIONAL
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
FI
FIK
FQI
FQS
FT
FG
FLU
FLUO
FLG
FREQ
SI
FR
FRNT
FF
FLCEA
FUNC,
FUNCT
FID
FUNCTIONAL LOOP DIAGRAM
FUNCTIONAL RECOVERY
GUIDELINES
FUTURE
FLD
FRG
FUT
A-5

ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
ABBREV-
IATION
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
G
GALLONS PER MINUTE GPM
GAS ANALYZER GA
GAS COLLECTION HEADER GCH
GAS DECAY TANK GDT
GASEOUS RADWASTE SYSTEM GRS
GASEOUS WASTE GWMS
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
GAS INSULATED BUS GIB
GAS INSULATED SUBSTATION GIS
GAS MONITOR GM
GAS RECIRCULATION GAS
RECIRC
GAS STRIPPER GS
GAS STRIPPER EFFLUENT GSE
GAS STRIPPER EFFLUENT GSERM
RADIATION MONITOR
GAS SURGE TANK GST
GAS SURGE HEADER GSH
GATEHOUSE GH
GEARBOX GRBX
GEIGER-MUELLER G-M
GENERAL GNRL
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT GACR
CHANGING REQUEST
GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA GDC
GENERATOR GEN
GLAND GLND
GLYCOL GLY
GRAM GM
GRAVITY GRAV
GROUND GND
GROUP GRP
H
HAND CONTROLLER
HAND INDICATING
CONTROLLER
HANDLE
HANDLING
HANDSWITCH
HAND TRANSFER SWITCH
HANDWHEEL
HEADER
HEADER DRAIN TANK
HEALTH
HEAT
HEATER (S)
HEATER DRAIN
HEAT EXCHANGER
HEATING
HEATING, VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
HEAT LOSS
HEAT TRACING
HERTZ
HIGH
HIGH EFFICIENCY
PARTICULATE AIR (abs)
HIGH-HIGH
HIGH-HIGH-HIGH
HIGH LEVEL OVERRIDE
HIGH LEVEL WASTE
HIGH OR LOW
HIGH PRESSURE
HIGH VOLTAGE
HOIST
HOLD (ING)
HORIZONTAL
HORIZONTAL MULTICELL
PRESSURE FILTER
A-6
ABBREV

• IATION

HC
HIC, HIK
HDL
HDLG
HS
HTS
HNDWHL
HDR
HDT
HLTH
HT
HTR(S)
HD
HX
HTG
HVAC
HL
HT TRAC
HZ
HI
HEPA
HI-HI, HH
HI-HI-HI
HLO
HLW
HI/LO
HP
HV
HST
HLD (G)
HOR
HMPF

ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
ABBREV-
IATION
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
ABBREV

• IATION

H (Cont.)
HOTWATER
HOUR
HOUSE
HOUSING
HUMAN FACTORS
ENGINEERING
HUMAN FACTORS GROUP
HUMIDIFIER
HUMIDITY
HYDRAULIC
HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT
HYDRAULIC FLUID PUMP
HYDRAZINE
HYDROGEN
HYDROXIDE
HYPOCHLORITE
I
IMPULSE
INACCESSIBLE
INACTIVE
INBOARD
INCH
INCOMING
INCREASE
INDEPENDENT
INDICATOR
INDIVIDUAL
INDUCTION
INERTING
INFLUENT
INITIATE
INITIATED
INJECTION
INLET
H/W
HR
HSE
HSNG
HFE
HFG
HUMF
HUMID
HYD
HCU
HFP
HYDZ
H, H2
HYDROX
HYCO
IMP
INACCES
INACT
INBD
IN
INC
INCR
INDP
IND
INDVL
INDN
INRT
INFLU
INIT
INTD
INJ
INLT
INNER
ISOLATION
INOPERABLE
INPUT/OUTPUT
INSERTION
INSIDE DIAMETER
INSPECTION
INSTITUTE FOR NUCLEAR
POWER OPERATIONS
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRIC AND
ELECTRONIC ENGINEERS
INSTRUMENT
INSTRUMENT AIR
INSTRUMENT AIR
DISTRIBUTION DRAWING
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL
INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION
DETAILS
INSTRUMENT LOCATION
DRAWING
INTEGRATED PROJECT
SCHEDULE
INTERCEPT
INTERCONNECTION WIRE
DIAGRAMS
INTERFACE REQUIREMENT
INTERMEDIATE
INTERNAL
INTERNALS VIBRATION
MONITORING SYSTEM
INTEROFFICE MEMORANDUM
IODINE
ION EXCHANGE DRAIN
HEADER
ION EXCHANGER
IRON
ISOLATION
INR
ISOL
INOP
I/O
INSER
ID
INSP
INPO
IEEE
INST
IA
IAD
I&C
IID
ILD
IPS
INTCP
IWD
IRQ
INTERM
INT
IVMS
IOM
IOD, I
IEDH
IX
FE
ISOL
A-7

ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
ABBREV-
IATION
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
ABBREV

• IATION

I (Cont.) L
ISOLATION VALVE IV LABORATORY
ISOMETRIC DRAWING ISO LEAD
ISOTOPE ISOTPE LEAK
LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM
J LEAK OFF
JOINT JT LEAVING
JOINT SYSTEM DESIGN JSD LEFT HAND
JOURNAL JRNL LEVEL
JUNCTION JUNC LEVEL CONTROL VALVE
JUNCTION BOX JB LEVEL CONTROLLER
LEVEL INDICATING CONTROL
STATION
K
LEVEL INDICATOR
KILOGRAMS KG
LEVEL MULTIPOINT
KILOGRAMS PER CENTIMETER KG/CM2A
RECORDER
SQUARED ABSOLUTE
LEVEL INSTRUMENT BRIDDLE
KILOGRAMS PER CENTIMETER KG/CM2G
DRAWING
SQUARED GAUGE
LEVEL SETTING DIAGRAM
KILOVARS KVAR
LEVEL TRANSMITTER
KILOVOLTS KV
LICENSEE EVENT REPORT
KILOWATTS KW
LIGHT
KOREA ATOMIC ENERGY KAERI
RESEARCH INSTITUTE LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
COMPANY
LIGHTER
KOREA RADIOACTIVE WASTE KORAD
LIGHTING
AGENCY
LIGHTING ARRESTER
KOREA INSTITUTE FOR KINS
NUCLEAR SAFETY LIGHT WATER REACTOR
KOREA NUCLEAR FUEL KNFC LIMIT
COMPANY
LIMITING
KEPCO ENGINEERING & KEPCO E&C
LIMITING CONDITIONS OF
CONSTRUCTION
OPERATION
COMPANY
LINE
KOREA STANDARDS KSI
INSTITUTE LINE OF SIGHT
KOPEC INTERACTIVE KIDS LINEAR
DOCUMENT SYSTEM
LINEAR VARIABLE
DIFFERENTIAL TRANSFORMER
LIQUID
LAB
LD
LK
LDS
LKOFF
LVNG
LH
LVL, L
LCV
LC
LIK
LI
LJR
LBD
LSD
LT
LER
LGT
LED
LGTR
LTG
LA
LWR
LMT
LMTNG
LCO
LN
LOS
LNR
LVDT
LIQ
A-8

ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
ABBREV-
IATION
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
M
L (Cont.) MACHINE
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY LCD MAIN
LIQUID RADWASTE SYSTEM LRS MAIN CONTROL ROOM
LIQUID WASTE MANAGEMENT LWMS MAIN POWER
SYSTEM
MAIN TRANSFORMER
LITER L
MAINTENANCE
LOAD CENTER LDC
MAKEUP
LOCAL LCL
MALFUNCTION
LOCAL CONTROL PANEL (S) LCP
MANAGER
LOCAL CONTROL STATION LCS
MANIFOLD
LOCALLY MOUNTED LM
MANIPULATOR
LOCAL SAMPLE LS
MANPOWER
LOCAL SAMPLING SYSTEM LSS
MANUAL
LOCAL TEST SWITCH LTS
MANUAL/AUTOMATIC
LOCKED LKD
MANUAL/AUTOMATIC
LOCKED CLOSED L.C. INDICATOR CONTROL
LOCKED OPEN L.O. MANUAL INDIVIDUAL
LOCKED-OUT L-O MANUFACTURING
LOGARITHMIC LOG MANUFACTURING LICENSE
LOOSE PARTS MONITORING LPMS MANUFACTURER
SYSTEM
MASTER
LOW LO
MASTER DIAGRAM
LOW-LOW LO-LO, LL
MATERIAL TRACKING
LOW-LOW-LOW LO-LO-LO SYSTEM
LOW AND INTERMIDIATE LILW MAXIMUM
LEVEL RADWASTE DISPOSAL 111111111111
MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE
FACILITY 11111
CONCENTRATION
LOW BEARING LBRNG
MEAN TIME BETWEEN
LOWER LWR FAILURE
LOW PRESSURE LP MEAN TIME TO FAILURE
LOW VOLTAGE LV MEAN TIME TO REPAIR
LUBRICATING LUB MECHANICAL
LUBRICATING OIL LUBO MEMORY ADDRESS
TRANSLATOR
MERCURY
MEZZANINE
ABBREV

• IATION

MACH
MN
MCR
MP
MTR
MAINT
MU
MALF
MANGR
MFLD
MANIP
MP
MAN
M/A
MAIC
111111
MI
MFG
ML
MFR
MAST
MD
MTS
MAX
MPC
MTBF
MTTF
MTTR
MECH
MAT
HG
MEZ
A-9

ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
ABBREV-
IATION
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
ABBREV

• IATION

M (Cont.)
MICROPROCESSOR MPROCES
MIDSPAN MDSP
MILLIMETERS MM
MILLIMETERS MERCURY MM HGA
ABSOLUTE
MINIMUM MIN,MINI
MINUTE MINU,MIN
MISCELLANEOUS MISC
MODULATION MOD
MOISTURE MOIST
MONITOR MON
MONTHLY PROGRESS REPORT MPR
MOTOR MTR
MOTOR CONTROL CENTER MCC
MOTOR OPERATED VALVE MOV
MOUNTED MTD
MOUNTING HEIGHT MH
MULTIPERIPHERAL MPC
CONTROLLER
MULTIPLEXER MUX
MULTIVARIABLE INDICATOR UI
MULTIVARIABLE LIGHT UL
INDICATION
MULTIVARIABLE UU
MULTIFUNCTION
N
NARROW NAR
NARROW RANGE NR
NATURAL NAT
NEGATIVE NEG
NET POSITIVE SUCTION HEAD NPSH
NEUTRAL GROUND NEUTGND
NITROGEN N2
NOBLE NBL
NONCONFORMANCE REPORT NCR
NON-POST ACCIDENT NPA
NON-REGENERATIVE NON-REGEN
NON-SAFETY RELATED NSR
DESIGNATION 1111110
NORM
NORMAL
NOG
NORMAL OPERATING
111111111
GUIDELINES
N
NORTH
N/A
NOT APPLICABLE
NFC
NOT FULLY CLOSED
NFO
NOT FULLY OPEN
NOZ
NOZZLE
NUC
NUCLEAR
NRC
NUCLEAR REGULATORY
1111111
COMMISSION (UNITED STATES)
NUM,#,
NUMBER
NO.
A-10

ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
ABBREV-
IATION
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
ABBREV

• IATION

O
OBSTRUCTION
OFF GAS
OFFICE
OFFSHORE TECHNICAL
SUPPORT
OIL CIRCUIT BREAKER
OKAY
ON LOAD TAP CHANGE
OPEN
OPEN/CLOSE
OPERATING
OPERATING BASIS
EARTHQUAKE
OPERATING LICENSE
OPERATION
OPERATOR
OPERATOR INTERFACE UNIT
ORGANIC CARBON
ORIFICE
OUNCE
OUTBOARD
OUTBOARD BEARING
OUTER
OUTLET
OUTLET HEADER
OUT-OF-SEQUENCE
OUT OF SERVICE
OUTSIDE
OUTSIDE AIR
OUTSIDE DIAMETER
OVER
OVERCURRENT
OVERLOW
OVERLOAD
OVERSPEED
OXYGEN
OBSTR
OG
OFC
OTS
OCB
OK
OLTC
OPN
O/C
OPER
OBE
OL
OP
OPR
OIU
C
ORIF
OZ
OUTBD
OBRNG
OUTR
OTLT
OHDR
OUT-OF SEQ
OOS
OUTS
OA
OD
OVR
OC
OVERFLO
OVRLD
OVRSP
O2
P
PACKING
PANEL
PARTICLE
PART LENGTH CONTROL
ELEMENT ASSEMBLY
PART NUMBER
PARTS PER MILLION
PENDANT
PENETRATION
PENETRATION
PRESSURIZATION
PERCENT
PERFORMANCE
PH NUMBER (EFFECTIVE
HYDROGEN ION CONCENTRA-
TION, MEASURES ACIDITY/
ALKALINITY)
PHASE
PHOSPHATE
PILOT
PIPING & INSTRUMENTATION
DIAGRAM
PIPING DESIGN TABLE
PIPING SYSTEM DESIGN
SPECIFICATION
PLANT CONTROL& MONITORING
SYSTEM
PLATE
PLATEN
PLENNUM
PNEUMATIC
POINT
POLISHER
POLISHING
POSITION INDICATOR
POSITION LIGHT INDICATION
POSITIVE
POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT
PKG
PNL
PART
PLCEA
P/N
PPM
PNDT
PEN
PP
%, PCT
PERF
PH
111111111
PHAS
PHOS
PLT
P&ID
PDT
PSDS
PCMS
111111
PLTE
PLTN
PLEN
PNEU
PNT
PLSHR
PLSHNG
ZI
ZL
POS
PD
A-11

ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
ABBREV-
IATION
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
ABBREV

• IATION

P (Cont.) PROJECT DISTRIBUTION LIST
POTENTIOMETER POT PROJECT MANAGER
POUND LB PROJECT NUMBERING
SYSTEM
POUND PER SQUARE PSIA
INCH ABSOLUTE PROPORTIONAL
POUND PER SQUARE PSIG PROTECTION
INCH GAUGE
PUMP (S)
POWER PWR
PURGE
PRECIPITATOR PCP
PURIFICATION FILTER
PREFERRED PRFD
PURIFICATION ION
PRE-FILTER PRE-FLTR EXCHANGER
PREHEATER PHTR PURIFIER
PREHEATING PHTG PURITY
PRELIMINARY TASK ANALYSIS PTA PUSHBUTTON
PRESSURE PRESS, P PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
PRESSURE CONTROLLER PC
Q
PRESSURE CONTROL OR PCV
REGULATING VALVE QUADRANT
PRESSURE DROP PD QUALITY
PRESSURE INDICATING PIK QUALITY ASSURANCE
CONTROLLER
QUALITY ASSURANCE OF
PRESSURE INDICATOR PI DESIGN PROCEDURE
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE PRV QUALITY ASSURANCE
REPRESENTATIVE
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER PT
QUALITY CONTROL
PREVENTION PREV
QUALITY SURVEILLANCE
PRIMARY PRIM
QUANTITY
PROBE PROB
PROCEDURE REVIEW NOTICE PRN
PROCESS PROC
PROCESS AND EFFLUENT PRM
RADIATION MONITORING
PROCESS CONTROL CABINET
PCC
PROCESSING UNIT
PU
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION
PI
PROCESS SAMPLING
PS
PROGRAM
PROG
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
PLC
CONTROLLER
A-12
PDL
PM
PNS
PROP
PROT
PMP(S)
PRG
PF
PIX, PUR.
EX.
PURF
PRTY
PB
PAS
Q
QUAD
QLTY
QA
QADP
QAR
QC
QS
QNTY

ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
ABBREV-
IATION
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
ABBREV

• IATION

R
RACK RK REMOTE
RACKED IN R/I REMOTE CONTROL MODULE
RACKED OUT R/O REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT
RADIATION MONITORING RMC REMOVAL
CABINET
REMOVE
RADIATION MONITORING RMS
REPRESENTATIVE
SYSTEM
REPUBLIC OF KOREA-ATOMIC
RADIOACTIVE RCG
ENERGY BUREAU
CONCENTRATION GUIDE
RESERVE
RADIOACTIVE DRAIN SYSTEM RDS
RESERVOIR
RADIOACTIVE LAUNDRY RLS
SYSTEM RESET
RADIOACTIVE WASTE RADWASTE RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE
DETECTOR
RADIOACTIVITY LIGHT RL
INDICATION RESPONSIBLE ENGINEER
RADIOACTIVITY RECORDER RR RESTRICTING
RANGE RNG RETURN
RATE RT REVERSE OSMOSIS
RECEIVER RCVR REVOLUTIONS PER MINUTE
RECIRCULATION RECIRC RIGHT SIDE
RECYCLE RECY RISER
REFERENCE REF ROENTGEN
REGENERATOR REGN ROENTGEN ABSORBED DOSE
REGION RGN ROENTGEN EQUIVALENT MAN
(REGISTERED) PROFESSIONAL (R)PE ROOM
ENGINEER
ROOT MEAN SQUARE
REGULATE REG
ROOT SUM SQUARE
REGULATOR REGR
RUNNING
REGULATORY GUIDE RG
REHEAT RH
REHEATER RHTR
REINJECTION REINJ
RELATED RLTD
RELALTIVE REL
RELATIVE HUMIDITY RH
RELAY RLY
RELIEF RLF
A-13
RMT
RCM
RTU
RMVL
RMV
REP
ROK-AEB
RES
RSVR
RSET
RTD
RE
RSTRCTING
RTRN
RO
RPM
RS
RISR
R
RAD
REM
RM
RMS
RSS
RUN

ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
S
SAFETY
SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT
SAFETY-RELIEF VALVE
SAMPLE
SATURATED
SCANNER
SCAVENGING
SCHEDULED
SCREEN
SEAL
SECOND (time)
SECOND (after first)
SECONDARY
SECTION
SECURITY
SEISMIC
SELECTION
SELECTOR SWITCH
SEPARATOR
SEQUENCE
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS
SERVICE
SERVICE WATER
SETPOINT
SEWAGE
SHAFT
SHALLOW
SHEEL
SHUTDOWN
SIDE
SIDEWALL
SIGNAL
SILICA
SILICON CONTROLLED
RECTIFIER
ABBREV-
IATION
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
ABBREV

• IATION

SAF
SAR
SRV
SAMP
SAT
SCAN
SCAV
SCHED
SCRN
SL
SEC
2ND
SECD
SECT
SECUR
SEIS
SEL
SEL SW
SEP
SEQ
SOE
SERV
SW
SETPT
SEW
SHFT
SHAL
SHL
S/D
SD
SWL
SIG
SI
SCR
SKIMMER SKIM
SLUDGE SLUG
SLUICE SLU
SMOKE SMK
SNUBBER SNUB
SODIUM NA
SOLENOID SLND
SOLENOID VALVE SOV
SOLID RADWASTE SYSTEM SRS
SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT SWNS
SYSTEM 111
SOLUTION SOLN
SOURGE SRCE
SOURGE RANGE SR
SOUTH S
SOUTH/NORTH S/N
SPARGING SPRG
SPECIAL LIGHT INDICATION XL
SPECIFIC SPCF
SPECIFICATION SPEC
SPECIFIC GRAVITY SPGR
SPECIFIC VOLUME SPVOL
SPEED SPD
SPREADING SPRDG
SPRINKLER SPKLR
STAGE STG
STAIRWAY STRWY
STANDARD STD
STANDBY STBY
A-14

ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
ABBREV-
IATION
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
ABBREV

• IATION

S (Cont.)
STANDBY LIQUID CONTROL
START
STARTED
START-UP
STATIC
STATIC PRESSURE
STATION
STATUS
STEAM
STOP
STOPPED
STORAGE
STRAINER
STREAM
STRIPPER
STRUCTURE
STUCK
SUBSTATION
SUCTION
SUDDEN
SULFATE
SUMP
SUPERVISORY
SUPPLIERS’S DEVIATION
DISPOSITION REQUEST
SUPPLIER DOCUMENT REVIEW
FORM
SUPPLY
SUPPORT
SUPPRESSION
SURFACE
SURGE
SURVEILLANCE
SUSPENDED SOLID
SWITCH
SWITCHGEAR
SLC SWGR
SYSTEM
STRT SYS
SYSTEM DESIGN CRITERIA
STRD SDC
SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL
SFD
S/U DESCRIPTION
STAC
T
SP
TACH
TACHOMETER
STA
TK(S)
TANK (S)
STAT
TA
TASK ANALYSIS
STM
TECH
TECHNICAL
ST
TV
TELEVISION
STOP
TEMP, T
TEMPERATURE
STOR
TC
TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
STRN
TIK
TEMPERATURE INDICATING
STRM
CONTROL STATION
STRIPR TI
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
STRUC TCV
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
STK VALVE
TT
SUBSTA TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
TMPG
SUCT TEMPERING
TMPRY
SUD TEMPORARY
TERM
SO4 TERMINAL
TERT
SMP TERTIARY
TST
SUPV TEST
TSP
SDDR TEST SIGNAL POSITION
THERM
THERMAL
SDRF T/C, TC
THERMOCOUPLE
THRSHD
THERSHOLD
SUP
THROT
THROTTLE
SUPRT
TRST
THRUST
SUPP
TBRNG
THRUST BEARING
SURF
TM
TIME
SRGE
KI
TIME INDICATOR
SURV
TMR
TIMER
SS
TOT
TOTAL
SWCH, SW
TDS
TOTAL DISSOLVED SOLID
A-15

ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
ABBREV-
IATION
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
ABBREV

• IATION

T (Cont.)
TOTAL INTEGRATED DOSE TID
TOWER TWR
TRAIN TRN
TRANSDUCER XDCR
TRANSDUCER POWER SUPPLY TPSC
CABINET
TRANSFER XFER
TRANSFORMER XFMR
TRANSMITTER XMTR
TRAVELLING TRAV
TREATMENT TREAT
TRIP TRP
TRIPPED TRPD
TROUBLE TRBL
TURBID TRBD
TURBIDITY TBDT
U
UNBALANCE
UNCERTAINTIE(S)
UNCOMPENSATED
UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER
SUPPLIER
UPPER
UPPER BEARING
UPSTREAM
UTILITY
UNBAL
UNCERT(S)
UCMPN
UPS
UPPR
UBRNG
UPSTRM
ULTY
V
VACUUM
VALID
VALIDATION AND
VERIFICATION
VALVE (S)
VAPOR
VARIABLE
VAULT
VENTILATION
VENT (TO ATMOSPHERE)
VERIFICATION
VERTICAL
VESSEL
VIA (THROUGH, BY MEANS OF,
BY WAY OF)
VIBRATION
VOLTAGE
VOLTAMPERE
VIDEO DISPLAY UNIT
VOLTMETER
VOLT-OHM METER
VOLTAGE TO CURRENT
VOLTAGE TO FREQUENCY
CONVERTER
VOLTAGE TO PULSE RATE
CONVERTER
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
VOLTS
VOLUME
VAC
VLD
V/V
VLV(S)
VAP
VAR
VLT
VENT
V
VERF
VERT
VESS
VIA
VIB
VTG
VA
VDU
VM
VOM
E/I
VFC
VPRC
VT
VOLT, V
VOL
A-16

ATTACHMENT A
STANDARD ABBREVIATION LIST
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
W
WAREHOUSE
WARM-UP
WASTE
WASTE MANAGEMENT
(SYSTEM)
WATCHDOG TIMER
WATER
WATERBOX
WEIGHT
WEST
WIDE RANGE
WINDBOX
WINDING
WINDOW
WITHDRAW
WITHOUT
ABBREV-
IATION
WH
WMUP
WSTE
WM(S)
WDT
WTR
WTRBX
WT
W
WR
WDBX
WDG
WDW
WITHDRA
W/O
STANDARD SERVICE
DESIGNATION
ABBREV

• IATION

A-17 (Final)

ATTACHMENT B
DEMARCATION AND MIMIC GUIDELINES
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
1.1 General
Proper demarcation and mimic can significantly improve an operator's ability to use a
set of controls and/or displays. Demarcation of functionally grouped controls and
displays reduces operator search time. Demarcation also aids in defining or
reinforcing the relationship between controls and their displays. Labeling the
functionally grouped and demarcated controls/displays can reduce the wordiness of
individual component labels and can increase information transfer.
Groups of functionally similar controls/displays shall be enclosed by demarcation
lines. The demarcated area shall be labeled with a descriptive title as to the system
or function of the demarcated controls. Each individual component shall be labeled
with its alpha-numeric designator and/or its descriptive name. The descriptive title
of the demarcated group shall not be repeated in the individual component labels.
1.2 Abbreviations
Refer to Attachment A for preferred abbreviations.
1.3 Component Designations
1.3.1 Nomenclature shall be consistent with procedures and flow diagrams.
1.3.2 Controls and displays shall be identified by a descriptive name and
alpha-numeric designature where available.
1.3.3 Controls and displays in a mimic may be identified by its alpha-numeric
designator if its position in the mimic describes its function.
1.4 Demarcation
Demarcation can be used on control panel to designate system boundaries and component
groups.
Demarcation material shall be autostriping tape (Mannufacturer: 'Trim' or equivalent).
Chartpack-style (Paper-Backed) tape shall not be used as it is not durable.
Width = 0.48cm(0.19 inch)
B - 1

{0.2cm (0.078 inch) may be used for subsystem delineation}
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
Color: black
Group Labels shall be centered on the demarcation line.
1.5 Material
Label plates and mimic lines shall be made of low glare material. In areas where the plate
may be abused, stronger, less scratchable material is recommended.
1.6 Mimics
A mimic is the use of lines to show the relationship between system components or to
show the direction of fluid flow or electrical distribution. Arrows, whose base is wider
than the mimic line, shall be used to show the direction of the fluid or electrical flow.
Arrows shall be used only when the flow is in one direction.
Fluid mimic lines shall be black. Electrical mimic lines shall conform to the following
convention:
345 kV - white
154 kV - silver
13.8 kV - red
4.16 kV - blue
480 V - yellow
Symbols may be used to represent components in the system.
The start and end of each mimic shall be identified; and if it connects to another mimic or
extends to another panel, this shall be indicated. Mimics shall be made (cut) from the same
0.16 cm (0.06 inch) thick material as labels.
B – 2 (Final)

ATTACHMENT C
STATISTICAL BASIS OF UNCERTAINTIES
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
DELETED
C – 1

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
DELETED
C – 2

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
DELETED
C – 3 (Final)

ATTACHMENT D
INSTRUMENT LIST (SPEC. NO : )
Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
KORAD’S TAG NO. INSTRUMENT INPUT RANGE
TYPE
SETPOINT
(ALARM OR
SERVICE DESCRIPTION SAFETY CAT/ OUTPUT TRIP)
SEISMIC CAT RANGE
SHEET : OF
SWITCH TYPE SCALE RANGE MANUFACTURER SUPPLIER’S TAG NO. LOOSE
PART
REMARK
(YES/NO)
CONTACT ENG’G UNIT MODEL NO. REFERENCE DWG NO.
RATING
D-1 (Final)

Appendix 4S
Rev. 1
Instrument No.
ATTACHMENT E
INSTRUMENT NUMBERING SYSTEM
Description Example : 0 - 542 - J - PDIS - 3001 - AA
Phase +
PBS +
Equipment Category +
Instrument type #
Serial Number ++
Duplicate instrument
with identical
designation *
+ Optional on Drawing (If this common part of component tag no. is separately identified as a
drawing note)
# Two, three, or four letters are used
++ Numbering of the system shall generally be upper left across to lower right, but take process
flow path into account.
If four(4) letters of instrument type are used, “PDIS” for example, serial number can be
reduced to 3 digits
* Optional
The PBS shall be identified from the specifications. Otherwise, the Supplier shall request
KORAD's assistance.
Note : The solenoid-operated air valves are numbered by the above numbering system.
E – 1 (Final)

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/ STORAGE BUILDING
APPENDIX 4W
Weld End Details
KEPCO E&C JOB No. : 11G79
IS UE STATUS
0 03/12/18 Construction is ue
REV. NO DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
Preparer : 한별, Tel : 054-421-7875

Appendix 4W
Rev. 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
1.0 SCOPE 4W-1
2.0 GENERAL 4W-1
3.0 BUTT WELD END PREPARATION AND TRANSITIONS 4W-2
TABLE 1. CARBON & LOW ALLOY STEEL PIPE DIMENSIONS
TABLE 2. STAINLESS STEEL PIPE DIMENSIONS
FIGURE 1. WELD END DETAILS FOR PIPE AND COMPONENTS
TC 4W-1 (Final)

1.0 SCOPE
Appendix 4W
Rev. 0
1.1 This Appendix provides the requirements for butt weld end preparation and transitions to be
used on pipe, fitting or component.
1.2 This Standard Appendix doesn’t cover Automatic Narrow Gap Welding.
Weld end details for Automatic Narrow Gap Welding shall be prepared under the responsibility
of applicable contractors or suppliers.
2.0 GENERAL
2.1 There shall be no welds included in pipe bends because the machining diameter "C" may
remove the bending allowance. If available pipe lengths are not sufficient for a complete bend,
the actual pipe diameter and wall dimensions shall be submitted to the Buyer with a request for
a special welding end detail.
2.2 Plate piping shall be resized at the ends (for at least 4" from the end) prior to machining for
welding to maximum out-of-round, such that the maximum or minimum O.D. shall not differ
from the average by more than ±1/16".
2.3 When machining weld ends, the pipe should be centered on the axis of the following diameter
to insure against undercutting the minimum wall:
Forged & Bored ….. I.D. Schedule Pipe ….…. O.D.
Extruded ………….. I.D. Hollow Forged ….... O.D.
Plate …………….… O.D.
2.4 For large diameter piping where the joint is readily accessible for welding, double welded joints
may be used if the Buyer accepts. After welding the first side, the weld shall be back chipped or
ground to sound metal from the second side, inspected by magnetic particle or liquid penetrant
method and then welded to completion.
4W-1

Appendix 4W
Rev. 0
3.0 BUTT WELD END PREPARATION AND TRANSITIONS
3.1 Butt weld end preparation and transitions shall be in accordance with Figure 1.
3.2 Schedule pipe (or standard wall, extra strong, or double extra strong pipe) per ASTM A106 and
A335: Use details per Figure 1 with dimensions A, B, C and T as shown on Table 1.
3.3 Schedule pipe (or standard wall, extra strong, or double extra strong pipe) per ASTM A 312
seamless and A 376: Use details per Figure 1 with dimensions A, B, C and T as shown on Table
2.
3.4 All other pipes (forged and bored, hollow forged, extruded, welded plate, etc.): Use Details per
Figure 1 with dimensions A, B, C and T as indicated on the applicable PDT or design drawings.
3.5 Pipe to component joints: Use details per Figure 1 with dimensions as shown on Table 1 and 2.
3.6 Welding end transitions for component or fitting shall be in accordance with ASME B31.1, Fig.
127.4.2. However when minimum wall thickness is specified in applicable PDTs, tmin shall be
as specified in the PDT.
3.7 Where tmin specified in the paragraph 3.6 is not practicable, T(nominal wall thickness) may be
used in lieu of tmin for transition region and counterbore.
4W-2

Appendix 4W
Rev. 0
NOMINAL SCHEDULE A B C T NOMINAL SCHEDULE A B C T
PIPE SIZE NO. PIPE SIZE NO.
12" (STD) 12.750 12.000 .375 10" 100 10.750 9.312 9.451 .719
18" O. D. (STD) 18.000 17.250 .375 12" 100 12.750 11.062 11.232 .844
20" O. D. 20 (STD) 20.000 19.250 .375 14" O. D. 100 14.000 12.124 12.318 .938
22" O. D. 20 (STD) 22.000 21.250 .375 16" O. D. 100 16.000 13.938 14.155 1.031
24" O. D. 20 (STD) 24.000 23.250 .375 18" O. D. 100 18.000 15.688 15.936 1.156
8" 30 8.625 8.071 .277 20" O. D. 100 20.000 17.438 17.717 1.281
10" 30 10.750 10.136 .307 22" O. D. 100 22.000 19.250 19.553 1.375
12" 30 12.750 12.090 .330 24" O. D. 100 24.000 20.938 21.280 1.531
14" O. D. 30 (STD) 14.000 13.250 .375 4" 120 4.500 3.624 3.693 .438
16" O. D. 30 (STD) 16.000 15.250 .375 5" 120 5.563 4.563 4.647 .500
18" O. D. 30 18.000 17.124 17.193 .438 6" 120 6.625 5.501 5.601 .562
20" O. D. 30 (XS) 20.000 19.000 19.084 .500 8" 120 8.625 7.187 7.326 .719
22" O. D. 30 (XS) 22.000 21.000 21.084 .500 10" 120 10.750 9.062 9.232 .844
24" O. D. 30 24.000 22.876 22.975 .562 12". 120 (XXS) 12.750 10.750 10.959 1.000
2½" 40 (STD) 2.875 2.469 .203 14" O. D. 120 14.000 11.812 12.045 1.094
3" 40 (STD) 3.500 3.068 .216 16" O. D. 120 16.000 13.562 13.826 1.219
3½" 40 (STD) 4.000 3.584 .226 18" O. D. 120 18.000 15.250 15.553 1.375
4" 40 (STD) 4.500 4.026 .237 20" O. D. 120 20.000 17.000 17.334 1.500
5" 40 (STD) 5.563 5.047 .258 22" O. D. 120 22.000 18.750 19.115 1.625
6" 40 (STD) 6.625 6.065 .280 24" O. D 120 24.000 20.376 20.788 1.812
8" 40 (STD) 8.625 7.981 .322 8" 140 8.625 7.001 7.163 .812.
10" 40 (STD) 10.750 10.020 .365 10" 140 (XXS) 10.750 8.750 8.959 1.000
12" 40 12.750 11.938 11.999 .406 12" 140 12.750 10.500 10.740 1.125
14" O. D. 40 14.000 13.124 13.193 .438 14" O. D. 140 14.000 11.500 11.772 1.250
16" O. D. 40 (XS) 16.000 15.000 15.084 .500 16" O. D. 140 16.000 13.124 13.443 1.438
18" O. D. 40 18.000 16.876 16.976 .562 18" O. D. 140 18.000 14.876 15.226 1.562
20" O. D. 40 20.000 18.812 18.919 .594 20" O. D. 140 20.000 16.500 16.897 1.750
24" O. D. 40 24.000 22.624 22.755 .688 22" O. D. 140 22.000 18.250 18.678 1.875
8" 60 8.625 7.813 7.874 .406 24" O. D. 140 24.000 19.876 20.351 2.062
10" 60 (XS) 10.750 9.750 9.834 .500 2½" 160 2.875 2.125 .375
12" 60 12.750 11.626 11.726 .562 3" 160 3.500 2.624 2.693 .438
14" O. D. 60 14.000 12.812 12.920 .594 4" 160 4.500 3.438 3.530 .531
16" O. D. 60 16.000 14.688 14.811 .656 5" 160 5.563 4.313 4.428 .625
18" O. D. 60 18.000 16.500 16.647 .750 6" 160 6.625 5.187 5.326 .719
20" O. D. 60 20.000 18.376 18.538 .812 8" 160 8.625 6.813 6.999 .906
22" O. D. 60 22.000 20.350 20.428 .875 10" 160 10.750 8.500 8.740 1.125
24" O. D. 60 24.000 22.062 22.263 .969 12" 160 12.750 10.126 10.413 1.312
2½" 80 (XS) 2.875 2.323 .276 14" O. D. 160 14.000 11.188 11.499 1.406
3" 80 (XS) 3.500 2.900 .300 16" O. D. 160 16.000 12.812 13.170 1.594
3½" 80 (XS) 4.000 3.364 .318 18" O. D. 160 18.000 14.438 14.842 1.781
4" 80 (XS) 4.500 3.826 .337 20" O. D 160 20.000 16.062 16.513 1.969
5" 80 (XS) 5.563 4.813 .375 22" O. D. 160 22.000 17.750 18.240 2.125
6" 80 (XS) 6.625 5.761 5.828 .432 24" O. D. 160 24.000 19.312 19.857 2.344
8" 80 (XS) 8.625 7.625 7.709 .500 12" (XS) 12.750 11.750 11.834 .500
10" 80 10.750 9.562 9.670 .594 14" O. D. (XS) 14.000 13.000 13.084 .500
12" 80 12.750 11.374 11.505 .688 18" O. D. (XS) 18.000 17.000 17.084 .500
14" O. D. 80 14.000 12.500 12.647 .750 24" O. D. (XS) 24.000 23.000 23.084 .500
16" O. D. 80 16.000 14.312 14.482 .844 2½" (XXS) 2.875 1.771 1.868 .552
18" O. D. 80 18.000 16.124 16.318 .938 3" (XXS) 3.500 2.300 2.409 .600
20" O. D 80 20.000 17.938 18.155 1.031 4" (XXS) 4.500 3.152 3.279 .674
22" O. D. 80 22.000 19.750 19.990 1.125 5" (XXS) 5.563 4.063 4.209 .750
24" O. D 80 24.000 21.562 21.826 1.219 6" (XXS) 6.625 4.897 5.072 .864
8" 100 8.625 7.437 7.545 .594 8" (XXS) 8.625 6.875 7.053 .875
LEGEND
A – NOMINAL O.D. OF PIPE C – I.D. OF PIPE AT LAND
B – NOMINAL I.D. OF PIPE TOLERANCE + 0.010" - 0.040"
T – NOMINAL WALL THICKNESS C = A – 0.031" – 1.75T – 0.010"
TABLE 1. CARBON & LOW ALLOY STEEL PIPE DIMENSIONS
4W-4

Appendix 4W
Rev. 0
NOMINAL SCHEDULE A B C T NOMINAL SCHEDULE A B C T
PIPE SIZE NO. PIPE SIZE NO.
1" 10S 1.315 1.097 .109 2½" 10S 2.875 2.635 .120
1-½" 10S 1.900 1.682 .109 3” 10S 3.500 3.260 .120
2" 10S 2.375 2.157 .109 3½" 10S 4.000 3.760 .120
1" 40S 1.315 1.049 .133 4" 10S 4.500 4.260 .120
1-½" 40S 1.900 1.610 .145 5" 10S 5.563 5.295 .134
2" 40S 2.375 2.067 .154 6" 10S 6.625 6.357 .134
1" 80S 1.315 0.957 .179 8" 10S 8.625 8.329 .148
1-½" 80S 1.900 1.500 .200 10" 10S 10.750 10.420 .165
2" 80S 2.375 1.939 .218 12" 10S 12.750 12.390 .180
1" 40 (STD) 1.315 1.049 .133 2½" 40S 2.875 2.469 .203
1-½" 40 (STD) 1.900 1.610 .145 3” 40S 3.500 3.068 .216
2" 40 (STD) 2.375 2.067 .154 3½" 40S 4.000 3.548 .226
1" 80 1.315 0.957 .179 4" 40S 4.500 4.026 .237
1-½" 80 1.900 1.500 .200 5" 40S 5.563 5.047 .258
2" 80 2.375 1.939 .218 6" 40S 6.625 6.065 .280
1" 160 1.315 0.815 .250 8" 40S 8.625 7.981 .322
1-½" 160 1.900 1.338 .281 10" 40S 10.750 10.020 .365
2" 160 2.375 1.687 .344 12" 40S 12.750 12.000 .375
3" 160 3.500 2.624 .438 2½" 80S 2.875 2.323 .276
1" XXS 1.315 0.599 .358 3” 80S 3.500 2.900 .300
1-½" XXS 1.900 1.100 1.159 .400 3½" 80S 4.000 3.364 .318
2" XXS 2.375 1.503 1.571 .436 4" 80S 4.500 3.826 .337
5" 80S 5.563 4.813 .375
6" 80S 6.625 5.761 5.828 .432
8" 80S 8.625 7.625 7.709 .500
10" 80S 10.750 9.750 9.834 .500
12" 80S 12.750 11.750 11.834 .500
LEGEND NOTE :
A – NOMINAL O.D. OF PIPE
B – NOMINAL I.D. OF PIPE 1. SIZES 10S, 40S & 80S APPLY TO PIPE UP TO
C – I.D. OF PIPE AT LAND & INCLUDING 12" PIPE(ANSI/ASME B36.19M).
TOLERANCE +0.010" - 0.040" FOR SIZES LARGER THAN 12" CARBON STEEL
C = A - 0.031" – 1.75T – 0.010" SCHEDULES WILL APPLY WITH DIMENSIONS AS
T – NOMINAL WALL THICKNESS SHOWN ON TABLE 1.
TABLE 2. STAINLESS STEEL PIPE DIMENSIONS
4W-5(Final)

PIPE WELDING END DETAILS
COMPONENT WELDING END DETAILS
Type 1(SEE NOTE 1)
T=1/8" & UNDER
T
T
37 1/2O + 2 1/2 O
-
ALTERNATE
1/16" + 1/32"

• 0"

"B"
TYPE 2
T= OVER 1/8" THRU 3/8"
T
PIPE
(NOTE 4)
COMPONENT
Y
OR FITTING
(NOTE 3)
TYPE 4(SEE NOTE 5) SAME DIMENSION WITH TYPE 2
T= OVER 1/8" THRU 3/8"
37 1/2o + 2 1/2o
-
T
18o Max
1/16" + 1/32"

• 0"

1/16" R + 0" MAX
-1/32"
0.090" + 0.015"-
1/2" Min
"A"
"B"
TYPE 3(SEE NOTE 5)
T= OVER 3/8" THRU 1"
"C"
T
PIPE min
t
COMPONENT
Y OR FITTING
(NOTE 3)
1/2" Min
18 OMax
2 t min
transition region
TYPE 5(SEE NOTE 5) SAME DIMENSION WITH TYPE 3
T= OVER 3/8" THRU 1"
10O + 2 1/2 O
-
T
3/4"
18 o Max
20o + 2 1/2 o
-
1/16" + 1/32"

• 0"

3/16" R + 1/32"
0.090" + 0.015"
-

T PIPE
min
t
1/2" Min
Y COMPONENT
OR FITTING
(NOTE 3)
18O Max
"A" 1/2" Min
"B"
TYPE 3A(SEE NOTE 5)
T= OVER 1"
NOTES
"C"
1. CUT SQUARE OR SLIGHT CHAMBER OPTIONAL
2. A - NOMINAL O.D. OF PIPE
B - NOMINAL I.D. OF PIPE
C - I.D. OF PIPE AT LAND
TOLERANCE + 0.010" - 0.040"
T - NOMINAL WALL THICKNESS
t min - MINIMUM WALL THICKNESS (See Para. 3.6 & 3.7)
3. ALL COMPONENTS
Y Min. = t min
Y Max. = THE GREATER OF ( t min + 0.150") OR 1.15 t min
FOR PIPE ORDERED BY MINIMUM WALL.
= THE GREATER OF ( t min + 0.150") OR 1.10T
FOR PIPE ORDERED BY NOMINAL WALL.
4. 1/32" Max. UNIFORM MISMATCH AROUND JOINT.
2 t min
transition region
TYPE 6(SEE NOTE 5) SAME DIMENSION WITH TYPE 3A
T= OVER 1"
5. REFER TO APPENDIX 4W PARA.3.6, ALL WELD END PREPARATION CONDITIONS, OTHER THAN
THIS APPENDIX REQUIREMENTS, SHALL COMPLY WITH APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS.
FIGURE 1. WELD END DETAILS FOR PIPE AND COMPONENTS

2ND RADWASTE RECEIPT/ STORAGE BUILDING
APPENDIX 4X
Requirements for Part Clas ification
KEPCO E&C JOB No. : 11G79
IS UE STATUS
0 01/26/24 Construction is ue
REV. NO DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED CHECKED REVIEWED APPROVED
Preparer : 임정민, Tel : 054-421-6395

Appendix 4X
Rev. 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
1.0 GENERAL 4X-1
2.0 DEFINITIONS 4X-1
3.0 REQUIREMENTS FOR PART CLASSIFICATION 4X-1
ATTACHMENT
1 INSTRUCTIONS TO DETERMINE PART
CLASSIFICAION FOR AQ-CLASS EQUIPMENT
2 PART LIST FORM
TC 4X – 1 (Final)

Appendix 4X
Rev. 0
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
The Scope of this Appendix is to determine the quality classification of parts used in
equipment. The purpose is to utilize the classification method practically and efficiently for the
receipt/storage building operation and management.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Equipment
An assembly of components designed and manufactured to perform specific functions
2.2 Component
An assembly of parts to have independent function (e.g., pump, motor)
2.3 Part
Minimum unit of maintenance or replacement as a basic unit of equipment or component
(e.g., gasket, relay, capacitor, switch, stem)
3.0 REQUIREMENTS FOR PART CLASSIFICATION
3.1 The supplier shall identify and determine appropriate quality class of each part. Part
classification depends on design function and quality class of its parent equipment. Therefore,
if the quality class of equipment is AQ, the classification of the parts shall follow Section 3.2.
The rest of equipment, which is considered as NQ, are not classified. All parts of NQ class
equipment are also considered as quality class NQ. However, part list shall be prepared in
accordance with Section 3.4.
3.2 Requirements of part classification for AQ-Class equipment
3.2.1 For the parts used in AQ-Class parent equipment (that is, augmented-quality component),
after confirming component’s regulatory requirements or special requirement imposed by the
utility, parts which perform or impact to their component (equipment)’s design functions are
classified as quality class AQ.
3.2.2 Suppliers shall identify the required information for all components and complete Form1 of
attachment 1.
3.2.3 If the information about parent components has been changed, the supplier should be
informed about Attachment 1, Form 1 from A/E.
3.2.4 Supplier shall identify and evaluate the function of each part using Form2 of attachment 1. If
a part is not required for design function of parent component directly, the quality class of part
is determined as NQ.
4X - 1

Appendix 4X
Rev. 0
3.2.5 All parts described in the part list shall be properly designated quality class with an alpha-
numeric character (AQ or NQ) and the definition is as follows:
A. Augmented Quality(AQ)
AQ is assigned to those parts which are provided as non-safety-related items for which
regulatory requirements or special requirements imposed by the utility exist that establish
design, procurement, maintenance, or quality assurance requirements. None of these
requirements constitutes a safety-related functions or classification. However, because of
these requirements certain items are classified as AQ in order to ensure that these
requirements are preserved while operating, maintaining, or modifying the items.
B. Non-Quality(NQ)
NQ is assigned to those parts that do not effect nor degrade the equipment/component
safety function performance or availability. This category consists of non-safety-related
items that are not subject to any special requirements.
3.2.6 Based on the above classifications, supplier shall complete the part list using the Attachment
2.
3.3 Requirements of part classification for NQ-Class equipment
3.3.1 Supplier shall complete and submit the part list only using Part List Form of Attachment 2.
3.4 Part List
3.4.1 The part list, using Microsoft Excel only, shall be prepared by referring Attachment 2 for the
classified parts of all equipment.
3.4.2 Supplier who supplies AQ class equipment shall submit the part list to owner including all
completed forms of Attachment 1.
4X - 2

Appendix 4X
Rev. 0
3.5 Work Flow
3.5.1 The work flow chart for overall part classification process is as follows.
Identify part
Is parent equipment
augmented quality
(AQ)?
Yes
Is the part required for
parent equipment’s
Design functions?
Yes
Part is Augmented
Quality: AQ
No Part is Non-
Quality: NQ
No
4X – 3 (Final)

Appendix 4X
Rev. 0
ATTACHMENT 1
INSTRUCTIONS TO DETERMINE PART CLASSIFICATION
(AQ - Class Equipment)
4X-A1-1

Appendix 4X
Rev. 0
Table of Contents
Form 1. Parent Component Design Functions and Classification Evaluation Sheet
Form 2. Part Classification Work Sheet
Instructions
1. Instructions for Evaluating Design Functions and Classification for Parent Component
2. Instructions for Preparing Part Classification Work Sheet
4X-A1-2

Appendix 4X
Rev. 0
Form 1. Parent Component Design Functions and Classification Evaluation Sheet
1. Evaluation
2. Station/Unit(s)
Sheet No.
3. System/Component Identification
System
Component Component Tag No.
Specification No. Supplier/Manufacturer
4. Component Design Functions Evaluation
Design Function Design Function Description
5. Component Classification
Radwaste Safety
□ I □ II □ III Quality Class □ AQ □ NQ
Category(RSC)
Seismic Category □ I □ II □ III
6. References
4X-A1-3

Appendix 4X
Rev. 0
Form 2. Part Classification Work Sheet
1. Part Identification
Part Classification
Part Description
Work Sheet No.
Part/Model No. Specification
Manufacturer’s
Manufacturer
Identification No.
2.Part Function
3. Part Safety Assessment
No. Questions Yes No N/A
1) Is the part required for design function(s) of the component?
2)
(Only for Seismic Category II component)
Is the part required for maintaining structural integrity of the
component?
4. References
5. Part Safety Classification
□ Augmented Quality(AQ) □ Non-Quality(NQ)
6. Part Classification Evaluation
(Document a Basis or References)
7. Final Part Classification
□ Augmented Quality(AQ) □ Non-Quality(NQ)
4X-A1-4

Appendix 4X
Rev. 0
1. Instructions for Evaluating Safety Functions and Classifications for Parent Component
The classification and safety functions of the component are a prerequisite to the parts classification and must be
established before proceeding to the parts classification.
Referring to following instructions supplier shall identify and provide the required information for all
components using Form 1 of this attachment.
No. Section Description Instructions
1 Evaluation Sheet No.
Give the number of evaluation sheet as follows:
Description Example: 0-152-M255 – ES - 001
(Spec. No.) (Sheet Serial No. 001 thru 999)
2 Station/Unit(s) Identify the station/unit(s) of installed item.
System/Component
3
Identification
Identify the system/component identifications, including the following:
System and Component Description
Component Tag No.
Technical specification No. of the parent component
Supplier/Manufacturer of the parent component
Component Design
4
Function Evaluation
Identify design functions of component item referring to the purchase
specification section 4 and above item 3 and describe each function, one
function per line.
Component
5
Classification
Identify the component classes as follows:
1) Radwaste Safety Category: Radwaste Safety Category I, II or III
2) Quality Class: AQ(Augmented Quality) or NQ(Non-Quality)
3) Seismic Category: Seismic category I, II or III
6 References
Identify the evaluation reports including environmental and seismic
qualification reports or other related documents of parent item.
4X-A1-5

Appendix 4X
Rev. 0
2. Instructions for Preparing Part Classification Work Sheet
If the parent component is Augment-quality(AQ) the associated function of parts shall be evaluated to determine
whether any special regulatory or site specific requirements apply which would require classification of the part
as AQ. Referring to following instructions supplier shall identify the required information and evaluate the
results for the questions using Form 2 of this attachment.
Section
No. Instructions
Description
Identify the part identifications as follows:
1) Give the number of Part Classification Work Sheet as follows:
Description Example: 0-611–M–AU01 - 001
(Tag No.) (Part Serial No. 001 thru 999)
2) Part Description: Identify the name or description of the part.
1 Part 3) Part/Model Number: Identify the identification number for the part. This
Identification might be a part number, model number, style number, type number or other
unique identifier used by the manufacturer to uniquely identify the product.
4) Specification: Provide a brief description of part specification.
5) Manufacturer: Identify the manufacturer providing the item.
6) Manufacturer’s Identification No.: Number assigned to track item in the
manufacturer inventory.
2 Provide a description of the part design functions. Generally this will be the role or
Part Function
function as provided on the manufacturer’s published description.
Part Safety
3
Assessment
Answer the following questions no. 1) and 2) to determine the part safety
classification in consideration of part function.
1) Is the part required for design function(s) of the component?
: Confirm the design functions of the parent component and determine whether
the part is required for that function of component. Refer to the item no.4 of
Form 1.
2) Is the part required for maintaining structural integrity of the component?
: Answer only when the Seismic category of parent component is II.
4 References Identify the reference documents including the title, revision number and other
information.
5 Part Safety
Classification
Select the part safety classification based on the item no. 3 above. If one of the
answer of above questions is ‘yes’, the part should be classified AQ.
6
Part
Classification
Evaluation
Describe the basis or references about part classification.
Select the final part classification based on the preceding evaluation.
Final Part
7 Generally, part is determined to be AQ when the item has been classified Augmented
Classification
Quality (AQ).
4X-A1-6 (Final)

Appendix 4X
Rev. 0
ATTACHMENT 2
PART LIST FORM
4X-A2-1

Attachment 2
Part List
Appendix 4X
Rev. 0
1. PO No. 2. PO Item No. 3. Equipment No. 4. Equipment
Description
5. Equipment Model 6. Component No. 7. Component
No. Manufacturer
8. Component
Model No.
9. Part No. 10. Part Description 11. Material 12. Quantity 13. Unit 14. Shelf Life
15. Replacement
Cycle
16. Part Manufacturer 17. Supplier Drawing 18. Revision No. 19. Instruction
No. Manual No.
20. Volume No. 21. Safety
Classification
22. Quality Class. 23. SQ Report No. 24. Revision No. 25. Page No. 26. QVD No. 27. Page No.
4X-A2-2

Appendix 4X
Rev. 0
Instruction for Completing Part List
No. Entry Information
1 PO No.(Purchase Order Number): Number of Purchase Specification

• Example) E208, E277, M250, M259…

2 PO Item No.(Purchase Order Item Number): Number specified in the Section 3. Attachment 3-1 (Pricing and
Schedule Data)

• Example) 0-E208-1.02.A, 0-M250-1.01, 0-E277-B.0001…

3 Equipment No. : Tag number, Name or Mark number specified in the Section 3. Attachment 3-1 (Pricing and
Schedule Data) PO Item No.
① Identified in Name, not Tag No., Equipment No. should be described as the Name

• Example) Equipment Hatch Body

② In case both Tag and Name are not identified, Mark No. should be described as the Name

• Example) 2550-A-CKB-D

4 Equipment Description:
① If the Equipment is Tag No.,

• Example) PO No. E208 – Description of Equipment No. 1.02.A

Section 3. Attachment 3-1 Equipment Description in 1.02.A
1.02 480V Motor Control Centers
A. 0-826-E-MC07
“480V Motor Control Centers”
B. 0-826-E-MC08
C. 0-826-E-MC09
② If the Equipment No. is Name,

• Example) PO No. M259 – Description of Equipment No. 1.15.A

Section 3. Attachment 3-1 Equipment Description in 1.15.A
1.15 Detectors
A. Smoke Detector, Analogue Type “Smoke Detector, Analogue Type for
Detectors”
B. Heat Detector, Explosion Proof Type
③ In case of instruments and valve items, Description specified in Data Sheet should be used.
④ In case of Bulk materials (e.g., Bulk valves, pipes), Description specified in Suppliers’ Drawing as a Title
should be used.

• Example) In case of 2550-A-CKB-D, Class 2500 Y-Piston Check Valve

5 Equipment Model No. : Equipment Model No. assigned be manufacturer

• Example) MD 308, MDG 286D, APT3700N

6 Component No. : If the Equipment can be divided in several assemblies, supplier can assign the component
number by adding 2 digits(alphabet + numeric number)

• Example) 0-826-E-MC07-A1, 0-826-E-MC07-A2

7 Component Manufacturer : Name of Component Manufacturer

• Example) HHI(Hyundai Heavy Industries CO. LTD)

8 Component Model No. : Component Model No.

• Example) MD 308(S), HIMF-V11F

9 Part No. : Part Identification number such as Model No., of Catalog No., of Serial No.

• Example) SD11046-01, KVAH7250M

10 Part Description : Part name and specification

• Example) Vacuum Circuit Breaker – 4.16kV, 2000A, 60Hz, 50kA

11 Material : Material code name

• Example) ASTM A217 Gr.WC9, JIS G4051, S45C

12 Quantity : Quantity of part
13 Unit : Unit of part
4X-A2-3

Appendix 4X
Rev. 0
No. Entry Information
14 Shelf Life: Maximum time to preserve function of part

• Example) X months or X years

15 Replacement Cycle: Recommended replacement period

• Example) X months or X years

16 Part Manufacturer: Name of part manufacturer

• Example) ABB, MERSEN, YONGSUNG

17 Suppler Drawing No. : Drawings submitted to KORAD according to PNS(Project numbering system)

• Example) ① 1 page of drawing: [E208-DG-B02-01]

② more than 1 pages: describe just one page to identity applicable item
[E208-DG-B02-01(X/N)]
18 Revision No. : Revision number of supplier’s drawing document

• Example) 0, 1, 2, 3…

19 Instruction Manual No. : Instruction manual number
20 Volume No. : Number of instruction manual(in case of several books, specify the number as X/N)
21 Safety Classification : Safety classification of part

• Example) Augmented Quality(AQ), or Non-Quality(NQ)

22 Quality Class: Quality class of part

• Example) Augmented Quality(AQ) or Non-Quality(NQ)

23 SQ(Seismic Qualification) Report No. : SQ Report No.

• Example) E208-ER-A01-01

24 Revision No. : Revision number of SQ Report

• Example) 0, 1, 2, 3…

25 Page No. : SQ Report Page number that identifies applicable part

• Example) 3 of 100(Page of Total Page)

26 QVD(Quality Verification Document) No. : QVD No.

• Example) E208-VR-A01-01

27 Page No. : QVD Page number that identifies applicable part

• Example) 3 of 100(Page of Total Page)

Note: 1) Every data shall be entered in every cell to prevent an error during the uploading and downloading to the
computational program even for the identical information (do not merge the cell).
2) Use left-aligned test for the input data to easily identify the information and prevent an error.
3) Place “N/A” if the entry is not applicable during the data entry.
4X-A2-4 (Final)

===== 2-2-2. 구매규격서 요약(0-771-J212).hwp =====
구매규격서 요약

1. 품 명 : Process Control & Monitoting System

2. 구매규격서 번호 : 0-771-J212(Rev.0, 추록1)

3. 설계범주 ㅇ 폐기물안전범주 : Ⅱ/Ⅲ ㅇ 품질등급 : AQ/NQ ㅇ 내진범주 : Ⅲ 4. 공급품목

• Remote System Cabinet(0-771-J-RX01) : 1대

• Quadruplex Fiber Optic Cables with Connector : 1대

• Engineering Station(0-771-J-CA03) : 1대

5. 주요 기술규격 ㅇ ASME NQA-1, Part II ㅇ IEEE 336 ㅇ ANSI C39.1 ㅇ NEMA ICS 1 등 6. 납기일 : 2028. 4. 2. 7. 인도조건 : 방폐장 현장 하차도 8. 하자보증기간 : 인수통보일로부터 3년

===== 2-3. 계약 일반조건.hwpx =====

Ⅱ. 계 약 조 건

제1장 계약 일반조건
물품구매계약일반조건

2026.<hp:fwSpace/>5.<hp:fwSpace/>12.<hp:fwSpace/>일부개정

제1조(총칙) 발주자와 계약상대자는 물품구매표준계약서(이하 “계약서”라 한다)에 적힌 물품의 구매(“제조”를 포함한다. 이하 같다) 계약에 관하여 제3조에 따른 계약문서에서 정하는 바에 따라 신의와 성실의 원칙에 바탕을 두고 이를 이행한다.
제2조(정의) 이 조건에서 사용하는 용어의 뜻은 다음과 같다.

1. “발주자”란 한국원자력환경공단(이하 “공단”이라 한다) 이사장 또는 그로부터 위임을 받은 자를 말한다.

2. “계약상대자”란 발주자와 물품구매계약을 체결한 자연인 또는 법인을 말한다.

3. “규격서(시방서)”란 물품에 대한 기술적인 요구사항과 요구 필요조건의 일치성 여부를 판단하기 위한 절차와 방법을 포함하여 서술한 문서로, 제품의 성능, 재료형상, 치수, 용적, 색채, 제조, 포장 및 검사방법 등을 포함한다.

4. “산출내역서”란 입찰금액 또는 계약금액을 구성하는 물량, 규격, 단위, 단가 등을 적은 명세서를 말한다.

5. 이 조건에서 정한 용어를 제외하고는 공단 계약규정에서 정하는 바에 따른다.

6. <삭제>

7. <삭제>
제3조(계약문서) ① 계약문서는 계약서, 규격서, 유의서, 물품구매계약특수조건, 물품구매계약특수조건 및 산출내역서 등으로 구성되며 상호보완의 효력을 갖는다. 다만, 이 경우 산출내역서는 계약금액의 조정과 기성부분에 대한 대가의 지급할 때 적용할 기준으로서 계약문서의 효력을 가진다.
② 발주자는 ｢국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법령｣, 물품구매 및 제조와 관련된 법령 및 이 조건에 정한 계약일반사항 외에 해당 계약의 적정한 이행을 위하여 필요한 경우 물품구매계약특수조건을 정하여 계약을 체결할 수 있다.
③ 제2항에 따라 정한 물품구매계약특수조건에 ｢국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법령｣, 물품구매(제조)와 관련된 법령 및 이 조건에 반하여 계약상대자의 계약상 이익을 제한하는 내용이 있는 경우 특수조건의 동 내용은 효력이 인정되지 않는다.
④ 이 조건이 정하는 바에 의하여 계약당사자간에 행한 통지문서등은 계약문서로서의 효력을 가진다.
제4조(사용언어) ① 계약을 이행할 때 사용하는 언어는 한국어를 원칙으로 한다.
② 발주자는 계약체결할 때 제1항에도 불구하고 필요하다고 인정하는 경우에는 계약이행과 관련하여 계약상대자가 외국어를 사용하거나 외국어와 한국어를 병행하여 사용할 수 있도록 필요한 조치를 할 수 있다.
③ 제2항에 따라 외국어와 한국어를 병행하여 사용한 경우 외국어로 기재된 사항이 한국어와 상이할 때에는 한국어로 기재한 사항이 우선한다.
제5조(통지 등) ① 말로 한 통지ㆍ신청ㆍ청구ㆍ요구ㆍ회신ㆍ승인 또는 지시 등(이하 “통지 등”이라 한다)은 문서로 보완되어야 효력이 있다.
② 통지 등의 장소는 계약서에 적힌 주소로 하며, 주소를 변경하는 경우에는 이를 즉시 계약당사자에게 통지하여야 한다.
③ 통지 등의 효력은 계약문서에서 따로 정하는 경우를 제외하고는 계약당사자에게 도달한 날부터 발생한다. 이 경우 도달일이 공휴일인 경우에는 그 다음 날부터 효력이 발생한다.
④ 계약상대자는 계약 이행 중 관계 법령 및 이 조건 등에 정한 바에 따라 서면으로 정당한 요구를 받은 경우에는 이를 성실히 검토하여 회신하여야 한다.
제6조(채권양도) ① 계약상대자는 이 계약에 따라 발생한 채권(대금청구권)을 제3자(공동수급체 구성원 포함)에게 양도할 수 있다.
② 발주자는 제1항에 따른 채권양도와 관련하여 적정한 계약이행목적 등 필요한 경우에는 채권양도를 제한하는 특약을 정하여 운용할 수 있다.
제7조(계약보증금) ① 계약을 체결하려는 자는 계약체결일까지 계약규정 제37조에 따른 현금 또는 보증서 등으로 계약보증금을 납부해야 한다. 이 경우 보증기간은 계약상 의무이행 개시일부터 계약기간 종료일 이후로서 계약상 의무이행이 완료되는 시점까지를 포함해야 한다.
② 계약을 체결하려는 자가 계약보증금의 전부 또는 일부의 납부를 면제받은 경우에는 제8조제1항 및 제2항에 따라 공단 귀속 사유가 발생할 때 계약보증금에 해당하는 금액을 현금으로 납입할 것을 보장하기 위하여 그 지급을 확약하는 내용의 문서(이하 “계약보증금 지급각서”라 한다)를 제출해야 한다.
③ 발주자는 단가계약에 따르는 경우로서 수회에 걸쳐 분할하여 계약을 이행하게 할 때에는 매회별 이행예정량 중 최대량에 계약단가를 곱한 금액의 100분의 10 이상을 계약보증금으로 납부하게 할 수 있다.
④ 발주자는 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률 시행령」(이하 “시행령”이라 한다) 제37조제2항제2호에 따른 유가증권이나 현금으로 납부된 계약보증금을 계약상대자가 특별한 사유로 시행령 제37조제2항제1호부터 제5호까지에 따른 보증서 등으로 대체납부할 것을 요청한 경우에는 같은 가치 이상으로 대체납부하게 할 수 있다.
⑤ 계약상대자는 이 조건에 따라 계약금액이 증액된 경우에는 이에 상응하는 금액의 계약보증금을 제1항에 따라 추가로 납부해야 하며, 발주자는 계약금액이 감액된 경우에는 이에 상응하는 금액의 계약보증금을 반환해야 한다.
제8조(계약보증금의 처리) ① 계약상대자가 정당한 이유 없이 계약상의 의무를 이행하지 않은 경우에는 계약보증금을 공단에 귀속한다.
② 시행령 제69조에 따른 장기물품제조계약에서 계약상대자가 2차 이후의 물품제조계약을 체결하지 않은 경우에 제1항을 준용한다.
③ 제7조제2항에 따라 계약보증금 지급각서를 제출한 경우로서 계약보증금의 공단 귀속사유가 발생하여 발주자의 납입요청이 있을 때에는 계약상대자는 해당 계약보증금을 지체 없이 현금으로 납부하여야 한다.
④ 제1항 및 제2항에 따른 계약보증금을 공단에 귀속할 때 그 계약보증금은 기성 또는 기납부분에 대한 미지급액과 상계 처리할 수 없다. 다만, 계약보증금의 전부 또는 일부를 면제받은 자의 경우에는 공단에 귀속되는 계약보증금과 기납부분에 대한 미지급액을 상계 처리할 수 있다.
⑤ 계약상대자가 납부한 계약보증금은 계약이 이행된 후 계약상대자의 청구에 따라 반환한다.
제9조(수량변경) 발주자는 필요에 따라 계약된 물품의 수량을 100분의 10 범위에서 변경할 수 있다. 다만, 발주자가 해당 물품의 수급상황 등을 고려하여 부득이하다고 판단하는 경우에는 계약상대자의 동의를 받아 100분의 10 범위를 초과하여 계약수량을 변경할 수 있다.
제10조(계약이행상의 감독) ① 발주자는 계약의 적정한 이행을 확보하기 위하여 필요하다고 인정하는 경우에는 물품의 제조를 위하여 사용하는 재료 및 그 밖의 제조공정을 감독할 수 있으며, 계약상대자에게 필요한 조치를 요구할 수 있다.
② 계약상대자는 발주자의 감독업무 수행에 협력해야 하며, 발주자는 감독업무를 수행할 때 계약상대자의 업무를 부당하게 방해해서는 안 된다.
제10조의2(하도급계약의 감독) 계약상대자는 물품 납품을 위한 하도급계약을 체결하는 경우에는 반드시 발주자의 승인을 받아야 하며, 이 경우에는 ｢하도급거래 공정화에 관한 법률｣ 제3조의2에 따른 공정거래위원회 표준하도급계약서를 사용하여 하도급계약을 체결해야 한다. 다만, 사업의 특성상 하도급 표준계약서 사용이 어려운 경우에는 발주자와 협의하여 정한다.
제11조(물가변동으로 인한 계약금액의 조정) ① 물가변동으로 인한 계약금액의 조정은 시행령 제64조 및 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률 시행규칙」(이하 “시행규칙”이라 한다) 제74조에 정한 바에 따른다.
② 동일한 계약에 대하여 계약금액의 조정할 때에는 품목조정률 및 지수조정률을 동시에 적용해서는 안 되며, 계약을 체결할 때 계약상대자가 지수조정률 방법을 원하는 경우가 아니면 품목조정률 방법으로 계약금액을 조정하도록 계약서에 명시해야 한다. 이 경우 계약 이행 중 계약서에 명시된 계약금액 조정방법을 임의로 변경해서는 안 된다.
③ 제1항에 따라 계약금액을 증액하는 경우에는 계약상대자가 청구해야 하고, 계약상대자는 제22조에 따른 완납대가(장기계속계약의 경우에는 각 차수별 완납대가) 수령 전까지 조정 신청을 해야 조정금액을 지급받을 수 있으며, 조정된 계약금액은 직전의 물가변동으로 인한 계약금액 조정기준일부터 90일 이내에 이를 다시 조정할 수 없다. 다만, 천재지변 또는 원자재의 가격 급등으로 해당 기간 내에 계약금액을 조정하지 않고는 계약 이행이 곤란하다고 인정되는 경우에는 계약을 체결한 날 또는 직전 조정기준일로부터 90일 이내에도 계약금액을 조정할 수 있다.
④ 계약상대자는 제3항에 따라 계약금액의 증액을 청구하는 경우에는 계약금액 조정내역서를 첨부해야 한다.
⑤ 발주자는 제1항부터 제4항까지에 따라 계약금액을 증액하는 경우에는 계약상대자의 청구를 받은 날부터 20일 이내에 계약금액을 조정해야 한다. 이 경우 예산 배정의 지연 등 불가피한 사유가 있는 경우에는 계약상대자와 협의하여 그 조정기한을 연장할 수 있으며, 계약금액을 증액할 수 있는 예산이 없는 경우에는 제조량 등을 조정하여 그 대가를 지급할 수 있다.
⑥ 발주자는 제4항 및 제5항에 따른 계약상대자의 계약금액 조정 청구 내용이 일부 미비하거나 분명하지 않은 경우에는 지체 없이 필요한 보완 요구를 해야 하며, 이 경우 계약상대자가 보완 요구를 통보받은 날부터 발주자가 그 보완을 완료한 사실을 통지한 날까지의 기간은 제5항에 따른 기간에 산입하지 않는다. 다만, 발주자는 계약상대자의 계약금액 조정 청구 내용이 계약금액 조정 요건을 충족하지 않았거나 관련 증빙서류가 첨부되지 않은 경우에는 그 사유를 명시하여 계약상대자에게 해당 청구서를 반송해야 하며, 이 경우 계약상대자는 그 반송 사유를 충족하여 계약금액 조정을 다시 청구해야 한다.
제11조의2(기타 계약내용의 변경으로 인한 계약금액의 조정) ① 발주자는 물품구매계약에서 제11조에 따른 경우 이외에 다음 각 호의 어느 하나의 사유로 인하여 계약금액을 조정할 필요가 있는 경우에는 그 변경된 내용에 따라 실비를 초과하지 않는 범위에서 이를 조정한다.

1. 「최저임금법」에 따른 최저임금을 시간당 노무비 단가로 정한 경우에 최저임금이 변경된 경우

2. 그 밖의 계약내용이 변경된 경우
② 제1항의 경우에는 시행령 제65조제6항을 준용한다.
③ 발주자는 제1항에 따라 계약금액을 조정하는 경우에는 계약상대자의 계약금액 조정 청구를 받은 날부터 30일 이내에 계약금액을 조정해야 한다. 이 경우 예산 배정의 지연 등 불가피한 경우에는 계약상대자와 협의하여 그 조정기한을 연장할 수 있으며, 계약금액을 조정할 수 있는 예산이 없는 경우에는 업무량 등을 조정하여 그 대가를 지급할 수 있다.
④ 발주자는 제3항에 따른 계약상대자의 계약금액 조정 청구 내용이 부당함을 발견한 경우에는 지체 없이 보완 요구 등의 필요한 조치를 해야 한다. 이 경우 계약상대자가 보완 요구 등의 조치를 통보받은 날부터 발주자가 그 보완을 완료한 사실을 통지받은 날까지의 기간은 제3항의 기간에 산입하지 않는다.
⑤ 제3항에 따른 계약상대자의 계약금액 조정 청구는 제22조에 따른 완료대가(장기계속계약의 경우 각 차수별 완료대가) 수령 전까지 해야 한다.
제11조의3(계약금액 조정 전의 기성대가 지급) ① 발주자는 물가변동, 설계변경 및 기타 계약내용의 변경으로 인하여 계약금액이 당초 계약금액보다 증감될 것이 예상되는 경우로서 기성대가를 지급하려는 경우에는 「국고금관리법 시행규칙」제72조에 따라 당초 산출내역서를 기준으로 산출한 기성대가를 개산급으로 지급할 수 있다. 다만, 감액이 예상되는 경우에는 예상되는 감액금액을 제외하고 지급해야 한다.
② 계약상대자는 제1항에 따라 기성대가를 개산급으로 지급받으려는 경우에는 기성대가 신청 시 개산급 신청사유를 서면으로 작성하여 첨부해야 한다.
제12조(납품) ① 계약상대자는 계약서에 정한 납품기일까지 해당 물품(검사에 필요한 서류, 녹색제품 인증서 등을 포함한다)을 ｢산업표준화법｣ 제24조에 따른 한국산업표준(특별한 사유가 없는 한 ｢물류정책기본법｣ 제24조에 따른 물류표준을 포함한다)을 준수하여 발주자가 지정한 장소에 납품해야 한다.
② 제1항에 따라 납품된 물품을 검사ㆍ수령하기까지 발주자의 책임 없는 사유로 인하여 발생한 물품의 망실ㆍ파손 등은 계약상대자의 부담으로 한다.
③ 발주자가 필요에 따라 분할납품을 요구하거나 계약상 분할납품이 허용된 경우가 아니면 분할납품을 할 수 없다.
제13조(규격) ① 모든 물품의 규격은 계약상 명시된 규격명세, 규격번호 및 발주자가 제시한 견품의 규격을 충족해야 하며, 구매목적에 맞는 신품이어야 한다. 다만, 해당 물품이 「기후위기 대응을 위한 탄소중립ㆍ녹색성장 기본법」 제66조에 따른 녹색제품 구매대상 품목일 경우 녹색제품을 우선적으로 구매해야 한다.
② 계약상 규격이 명시되어 있지 않은 경우에는 상관습과 기술적 타당성 및 구매규격 등에 부합하는 물품이어야 한다.
③ 예비부속품으로서 기계ㆍ기구를 완성하는 데 필요한 조립비는 물품가격에 포함되어 있는 것으로 본다. 다만, 계약에 부속품으로 기계ㆍ기구를 완성하는 데 필요한 조립비가 별도로 표시되어 있는 경우에는 그렇지 않다.
제14조(포장 및 품목표시) ① 포장은 계약조건과 계약규격서에 규정된 포장조건에 따라야 하며 내용물의 보전에 충분해야 한다.
② 기계의 모체와 분리하여 부속품 또는 예비부속품을 포장할 때에는 관련 참조번호 및 기호 등을 명기한 꼬리표를 붙여야 한다.
③ 계약상대자는 대한민국 외에서 제조된 계약물품을 납품하려는 경우에는 관세청장이 고시한 「원산지표시제도 운영에 관한 고시」 및 산업통상부장관이 고시한 「대외무역관리규정」에 따라 원산지를 해당 물품에 표시해야 한다.
제15조(포장명에 표기할 사항) 물품의 포장면에는 다음 각 호의 사항을 명기해야 한다.

1. 제작자 상호 및 계약상대자 상호 2. 계약번호 3. 품명 및 물품저장번호 4. 포장 내용물의 일련번호 및 수량 5. 순무게, 총무게 및 부피 6. 취급 시 주의사항

7. 그 밖의 계약상 요구되는 표기
제16조(표기) ① 납품한 물품에는 계약상 규격서에 규정된 포장 외에 제작자명 또는 상표와 발주자가 정한 관수품 표시를 해야 한다.
② 표지는 물품의 형태 또는 성질에 따라 인쇄, 금속판 첩찰, 꼬리표 또는 그 밖의 방법으로 표시해야 한다.
③ 물품에 표기해야 할 표지는 그 물품의 지구성과 같아야 하며 포장의 표지는 목적된 장소에 도착할 때까지 선명해야 한다.
제17조(포장명세서) ① 계약상대자는 납품할 때 포장내용물에 관하여 상세히 기재한 포장명세서를 제출해야 한다.
② 포장명세서에는 포장번호, 포장수, 포장품명, 수량, 순무게, 부피 등을 기명해야 한다.
③ 포장에는 포장명세서 1통을 첨부해야 한다. 다만, 드럼통 등 명세서를 첨부하기 어려운 경우에는 용기에 기명해야 한다.
제18조(사용 및 취급주의서) 계약상대자는 사용 및 취급상 주의가 필요하다고 생각되는 경우에는 해당 물품의 사용, 보관, 수리 등의 요령과 주의사항을 명기한 주의서를 제출해야 한다.
제19조(검사) ① 계약상대자는 계약이행을 완료한 경우에는 그 사실을 서면으로 발주자에게 통지하고 필요한 검사를 받아야 한다. 기납부분에 대하여 완납 전에 대가의 전부 또는 일부를 지급하려는 경우에도 또한 같다.
② 「산업표준화법」제15조에 따라 인증을 받은 제품, 같은 법 제31조의4제2항에 따라 수상자로 선정된 기업 등이 제조한 물품, 「조달사업에 관한 법률」제3조의4에 따라 조달청장이 고시한 품질관리능력 평가기준에 적합한 자가 제조한 물품에 대하여는 제1항에도 불구하고 검사를 면제해야 한다. 다만, 해당 물품이 국민의 생명 보호, 안전, 보건위생 등을 위하여 검사가 필요하다고 인정되거나, 불량 자재의 사용, 다수의 하자 발생, 관계 기관의 결함보상명령 등으로 품질의 확인이 필요한 것으로 인정되어 계약의 내용에 검사를 실시한다는 사항이 포함되도록 한 경우에는 그렇지 않다.
③ 발주자는 제1항의 통지를 받은 경우에는 검사 관련 규정 및 다음 각호의 요령에 따라 계약서 기타 관계서류에 의하여 그 날로부터 14일 이내에 계약상대자의 입회하에 그 이행을 확인하기 위한 검사를 하여야 한다. 다만, 천재지변 등 불가항력인 사유로 인하여 검사를 완료하지 못한 경우에는 당해 사유가 존속되는 기간과 당해 사유가 소멸된 날로부터 3일까지는 이를 연장할 수 있다.

1. 검사는 발주자가 품질, 수량, 포장, 표기상태, 포장명세서, 품질식별기호 등에 관하여 행한다.

2. 발주자는 물품을 신규로 제조할 필요가 있거나 물품의 성질상 제조과정이 중요한 경우에는 제조과정에서 검사를 할 수 있다.

3. 계약상대자는 검사를 받기 위하여 발주자가 지정하는 장소에 물품을 반입하였을 때에는 발주자에게 즉시 반입통지를 하여야 한다.

4. 검사에 필요한 일체의 비용과 검사를 하기 위한 변형, 소모, 파손 또는 변질로 생기는 손상은 계약상대자의 부담으로 한다.
④ 발주자는 제3항의 검사에서 계약상대자의 계약이행 내용의 전부 또는 일부가 계약에 위반되거나 부당함을 발견한 경우에는 필요한 시정조치를 할 수 있다. 이 경우에는 계약상대자로부터 그 시정을 완료한 사실을 통지받은 날부터 제3항의 기간을 계산한다.
⑤ 제3항에 따른 검사에 합격하지 못하여 계약이행기간이 연장되는 경우에는 발주자는 제24조에 따른 지체상금을 부과한다.
⑥ 계약상대자는 제3항에 따른 검사에 입회하고 협력해야 하며, 계약상대자가 입회를 거부하거나 검사에 협력하지 않음으로써 발생하는 지체에 대해서는 제4항 및 제5항을 준용한다.
⑦ 계약상대자는 제3항 및 제4항에 따른 검사에 이의가 있는 경우에는 재검사를 요청할 수 있다. 이 경우 발주자는 지체 없이 검사를 해야 한다.
⑧ 발주자는 검사를 완료한 경우에는 그 결과를 서면으로 계약상대자에게 통지해야 한다.
⑨ 제3항에도 불구하고 「재난 및 안전관리 기본법」제3조제1호의 재난이나 경기침체, 대량실업 등으로 인한 국가의 경제위기를 극복하기 위해 재정경제부장관이 기간을 정하여 고시한 경우에는 제3항의 14일을 7일로 본다.
제20조(특허권 등의 사용) 계약상대자는 해당 계약을 이행할 때 제3자의 권리 대상인 특허권 등을 사용하는 경우에는 그 사용에 관한 모든 책임을 져야 한다. 다만, 계약문서에 지정되지 않은 특허권 등의 사용을 발주자가 요구한 경우에는 발주자는 소요된 비용을 계약상대자에게 지급해야 한다.
제21조(보증) ① 계약상대자는 검수와는 별도로 납품 후 1년간 납품한 물품의 규격과 품질이 계약내용과 동일함을 보증해야 한다.
② 발주자는 납품 후 1년 이내에 납품한 물품의 규격과 품질이 계약내용과 상이함을 발견한 경우에는 그 사실을 계약상대자에게 통지하고 해당 물품의 대체납품 또는 해당 물품대금을 반환하도록 청구할 수 있다.
③ 계약상대자는 제2항의 통지를 받으면 조속히 해당 물품을 계약조건에 따라 대체납품해야 한다. 이 경우에 모든 대체물품 가격과 이에 따르는 경비는 계약상대자의 부담으로 한다.
④ 제3항의 대체물품에 대해서는 제1항을 적용한다.
⑤ 계약상대자가 발주자가 요구한 물품의 대체를 거부하거나, 발주자가 통지를 한 후 정해진 기일 내에 물품을 대체납품하지 못하는 경우에는 계약상대자는 해당 물품가격을 발주자에게 반납해야 한다.
제22조(대가의 지급) ① 계약상대자는 계약이행을 완료한 후 제19조에 따른 검사에 합격한 경우에는 대가지급청구서(하수급인에 대한 대금지급 계획을 첨부해야 한다)를 제출하는 등 정해진 절차에 따라 대가지급을 청구할 수 있다.
② 발주자는 제1항의 청구를 받은 경우에는 그 청구를 받은 날부터 5일(공휴일 및 토요일은 제외한다. 이하 이 조에서 같다) 이내에 그 대가를 지급(「전자조달의 이용 및 촉진에 관한 법률」 제9조의2제1항에 따른 시스템을 통한 지급 포함. 이하 이 조에서 같다)해야 하며, 해당 대가지급기한에도 불구하고 자금사정 등 불가피한 사유가 없으면 최대한 신속히 대가를 지급해야 한다. 다만, 계약상대자와의 합의에 따라 5일을 초과하지 않는 범위에서 대가의 지급기간을 연장하는 특약을 정할 수 있다.
③ 천재지변 등 불가항력의 사유로 대가를 지급할 수 없게 된 경우에는 발주자는 해당 사유가 존속되는 기간과 해당 사유가 소멸된 날부터 3일까지는 대가의 지급을 연장할 수 있다.
④ 발주자는 기성부분 또는 기납부분에 대한 대가를 지급하는 경우에 제2항에도 불구하고 계약수량, 이행의 전망, 이행기간 등을 고려하여 최소한 매 30일마다 공평하게 지급해야 하며 제19조제3항에 따른 검사를 한 후 계약상대자의 청구를 받은 날부터 5일 이내에 지급해야 한다.
⑤ 발주자는 제2항 및 제4항에 따른 대가 지급 시 제1항의 대금지급 계획상 하수급인에게 대가지급 사실을 통보하고 대금 수령내역(수령자, 수령액, 수령일 등) 및 증빙서류를 제출(「전자서명법」제2조에 따른 전자문서를 통한 제출을 포함한다. 이하 제22조의2제1항에 따른 제출 및 통보에서 같다)하게 해야 한다.
⑥ 발주자는 제1항 또는 제4항의 청구를 받은 후 그 청구내용의 전부 또는 일부가 부당함을 발견한 경우에는 그 사유를 명시하여 계약상대자에게 해당 청구서를 반송할 수 있다. 이 경우에는 반송한 날부터 재청구를 받은 날까지의 기간은 제2항 또는 제4항의 지급기간에 산입하지 않는다.
⑦ 제4항에 따라 기성부분에 대한 대가를 지급하는 경우에는 제3조제1항 단서에 따른 산출내역서의 단가로 계산한다.
⑧ 제2항에도 불구하고 「재난 및 안전관리 기본법」제3조제1호의 재난이나 경기침체, 대량실업 등으로 인한 국가의 경제위기를 극복하기 위해 재정경제부장관이 기간을 정하여 고시한 경우에는 제2항의 5일을 3일로 본다.
제22조의2(하도급대금 지급 확인) ① 계약상대자는 제22조에 따른 대가를 지급받은 경우 15일 이내에 하도급대금을 하수급인에게 현금으로 지급(「전자조달의 이용 및 촉진에 관한 법률」 제9조의2제1항에 따른 시스템을 통한 지급 포함. 이하 이 조에서 같다)해야 하며, 하도급대금의 지급 내역(수령자, 지급액, 지급일 등)을 5일(공휴일 및 토요일은 제외한다) 이내에 발주자에게 통보해야 한다.
② 발주자는 제1항에 따른 대금 지급 내역을 제22조제5항에 따라 하수급인으로부터 제출받은 대금 수령내역과 비교ㆍ확인해야 한다.
③ 「하도급거래 공정화에 관한 법률」 제2조에 따라 같은 법의 적용을 받지 않는 하도급계약에 대해서는 제1항 및 제2항을 적용하지 않는다.(제22조제5항의 경우에도 같다)
제22조의3(국민건강보험료 등의 사후정산) 발주자는 「정부 입찰ㆍ계약 집행기준」 제93조에 따라 국민건강보험료 등을 사후정산하기로 한 계약에 대해서는 제22조에 따른 대가 지급 시 계약예규 「정부 입찰ㆍ계약 집행기준」 제94조에 따라 정산해야 한다.
제23조(대가지급지연에 대한 이자) ① 발주자는 대가지급청구를 받은 경우에 제22조에 따른 대가지급기한(국고채무부담행위에 의한 계약의 경우에는 다음 회계연도 개시 후 ｢국가재정법｣에 따라 해당 예산이 배정된 날부터 20일)까지 대가를 지급하지 못하는 경우에는 지급기한의 다음 날부터 지급하는 날까지의 일수(이하 “대가지급지연일수”라 한다)에 해당 미지급액에 지연 발생 시점의 금융기관 대출평균금리(한국은행 통계월보상 금융기관 대출평균금리를 말한다)를 곱하여 산출한 금액을 이자로 지급해야 한다.
② 천재지변 등 불가항력의 사유로 검사 또는 대가지급이 지연된 경우에는 제19조제3항 단서 및 제22조제3항에 따른 지연기간은 제1항의 대가지급지연일수에 산입하지 않는다.
제24조(지체상금) ① 계약상대자는 계약서에서 정한 납품기한 내에 물품을 납품하지 않은 경우에는 매 지체일수마다 계약서에서 정한 지체상금률을 계약금액(장기계속계약의 경우에는 연차별 계약금액)에 곱하여 산출한 금액(이하 “지체상금”이라 한다)을 현금으로 납부해야 한다. 다만, 납부할 금액이 계약금액(제2항에 따라 기성부분 또는 기납부분에 대하여 검사를 거쳐 인수한 경우에는 그 부분에 상당하는 금액을 계약금액에서 공제한 금액을 말한다)의 100분의 30을 초과하는 경우에는 100분의 30으로 한다.
② 발주자는 제1항의 경우에 기납부분에 대한 검사를 거쳐 해당 부분을 인수(인수하지 않고 관리ㆍ사용하고 있는 경우를 포함한다. 이하 이 조에서 같다)한 경우에는 그 부분에 상당하는 금액을 계약금액에서 공제한다. 기납부분의 인수는 성질상 분할할 수 있는 물품에 대한 완성부분으로서 인수하는 경우로 한정한다.
③ 발주자는 다음 각 호의 어느 하나에 해당되어 납품이 지체되었다고 인정하는 경우에는 그 해당일수를 제1항의 지체일수에 산입하지 않는다.

1. 천재지변 등 불가항력의 사유에 따른 경우

2. 계약상대자가 대체 사용할 수 없는 중요 관급재료의 공급이 지연되어 제조 공정의 진행이 불가능했던 경우

3. 계약상대자의 책임 없이 납품이 지연된 경우로서 다음 각 목의 어느 하나에 해당하는 경우

가. 발주자의 물품 제작을 위한 설계도서 승인이 계획된 일정보다 지연된 경우(관련 서류의 누락 등 계약상대자의 잘못을 보완하는 기간은 제외한다)

나. 계약상대자가 시험기관 및 검사기관의 시험ㆍ검사를 위해 필요한 준비를 완료하였으나 시험기관 및 검사기관의 책임으로 시험ㆍ검사가 지연된 경우

다. 설계도서 승인 후 발주자의 요구에 따른 설계변경으로 제작기간이 지연된 경우

라. 발주자의 책임으로 제조의 착수가 지연되었거나 중단되었을 경우

4. 그 밖의 계약상대자의 책임에 속하지 않은 사유로 인하여 지체된 경우
④ 발주자는 제1항에 따른 지체일수를 다음 각 호에 따라 산정해야 한다.

1. 납품기한 내에 제12조제1항에 따라 물품(검사에 필요한 서류를 포함한다. 이하 이 항에서 같다)을 납품한 경우에는 제19조에 따른 검사에 소요된 기간은 지체일수에 산입하지 않는다. 다만, 납품기한 이후에 제19조제4항에 따른 시정조치를 한 경우에는 시정조치를 한 날부터 최종 검사에 합격한 날까지의 기간(검사기간이 제19조제3항에서 정한 기간을 초과한 경우에는 같은 조에서 정한 기간으로 한정한다. 이하 같다)을 지체일수에 산입한다.

2. 납품기한이 지나 물품과 검사서류를 제출한 경우에는 납품기한 다음 날부터 검사(시정조치를 한 경우에는 최종 검사)에 합격한 날까지의 기간을 지체일수에 산입한다.

3. 납품기한의 말일이 공휴일(관련 법령에 따라 공단의 휴무일이거나 「노동절 제정에 관한 법률」에 따른 노동절(계약상대자가 실제 업무를 하지 아니한 경우에 한함)인 경우를 포함한다)인 경우 지체일수는 공휴일의 다음 날부터 기산한다.
⑤ 발주자는 제1항부터 제4항까지에 따라 산출된 지체상금을 계약상대자에게 지급될 대가, 대가지급지연에 대한 이자 또는 그 밖의 예치금 등과 상계할 수 있다.
제24조의2(불가항력) ① 불가항력이란 태풍ㆍ홍수 그 밖의 악천후, 전쟁 또는 사변, 지진, 화재, 전염병, 폭동 그 밖의 계약당사자의 통제범위를 벗어나는 사태(이하 “불가항력의 사유”라 한다)가 발생하여 계약이행에 직접적인 영향을 미친 경우로서 계약당사자 누구의 책임에도 속하지 않는 경우를 말한다.
② 제1항의 불가항력의 사유로 다음 각 호에 발생한 손해는 발주자가 부담해야 한다.

1. 제19조에 따른 검사를 완료한 기납부분

2. 검사를 완료하지 않은 부분 중 객관적인 자료(감독일지, 사진 또는 비디오테이프 등)로 이미 수행되었음이 판명된 부분
③ 계약상대자는 제1항 및 제2항의 사유가 발생한 경우에는 지체 없이 그 사실을 발주자에게 통지해야 하며, 발주자는 즉시 그 사실을 조사하고 그 손해의 상황을 확인한 후 그 결과를 계약상대자에게 통지해야 한다.
④ 발주자는 제3항에 따라 손해의 상황을 확인한 경우에는 별도의 약정이 없으면 계약금액의 변경 또는 손해액의 부담 등에 대하여 계약상대자와 협의해야 한다. 다만, 협의가 성립되지 않은 경우에는 제31조에 따라 처리한다.
제25조(계약기간의 연장) ① 계약상대자는 제24조제3항 각 호의 어느 하나의 사유가 계약기간 내에 발생한 경우에는 계약기간 종료 전에 지체 없이 발주자에게 서면으로 계약기간의 연장신청과 제4항에 따른 계약금액 조정신청을 함께 해야 한다. 다만, 연장사유가 계약기간 내에 발생하여 계약기간 경과 후 종료된 경우에는 해당 사유가 종료된 후 즉시 계약기간의 연장신청과 제4항에 따른 계약금액 조정신청을 함께 해야 한다.
② 발주자는 제1항에 따른 계약기간 연장 신청이 접수된 경우에는 즉시 그 사실을 조사ㆍ확인하고 계약이 적절히 이행될 수 있도록 계약기간의 연장 등 필요한 조치를 해야 한다.
③ 발주자는 제1항의 연장청구를 승인하였을 경우에는 제24조에 따른 지체상금을 부과해서는 안 된다.
④ 제2항에 따라 계약기간을 연장한 경우에는 그 변경된 내용에 따라 실비를 초과하지 않는 범위에서 계약금액을 조정한다.
⑤ 발주자는 제1항부터 제4항까지에도 불구하고 계약상대자의 의무불이행으로 발생한 지체상금이 시행령 제50조제1항에 따른 계약보증금 상당액에 달한 경우로서 계약목적물이 발주자의 정책사업 대상이거나 계약의 이행이 노사분규 등 불가피한 사유로 인하여 지연된 경우에는 계약기간을 연장할 수 있다.
⑥ 제4항에 따른 계약기간의 연장은 지체상금이 계약보증금 상당액에 달한 경우에 해야 하며, 연장된 계약기간에 대해서는 제24조에도 불구하고 지체상금을 부과해서는 안 된다.
제26조(계약상대자의 책임 있는 사유로 인한 계약의 해제 또는 해지) ① 발주자는 계약상대자가 다음 각 호의 어느 하나에 해당하는 경우에는 해당 계약의 전부 또는 일부를 해제 또는 해지할 수 있다. 다만, 제3호의 경우 계약상대자의 계약이행 가능성이 있고 계약을 유지할 필요가 있다고 인정되는 경우로서 계약상대자가 계약이행이 완료되지 않은 부분에 상당하는 계약보증금(당초 계약보증금에 제24조제1항에 따른 지체상금의 최대금액을 더한 금액을 한도로 한다)을 추가 납부하는 경우에는 계약을 유지한다.

1. 계약서상의 납품기한(또는 연장된 납품기한) 내에 계약상대자가 계약된 규격 등과 같은 물품 납품을 거부하거나 완료하지 못한 경우

2. 계약상대자의 귀책사유로 납품기일 내에 납품할 가능성이 없음이 명백하다고 인정되는 경우

3. 제24조제1항에 따른 지체상금이 시행령 제50조제1항에 따른 해당 계약의 계약보증금 상당액에 달한 경우

4. 장기물품제조 등의 계약에서 제2차 이후의 계약을 체결하지 않는 경우

5. 계약의 수행 중 뇌물수수 또는 정상적인 계약관리를 방해하는 불법ㆍ부정행위가 있는 경우

6. 입찰에 관한 서류 등을 거짓 또는 부정한 방법으로 제출하여 계약이 체결된 경우

7. 선금의 반복적인 목적 외 사용으로 계약이행에 상당한 지장을 초래할 것이 명백한 경우

8. 그 밖의 계약조건을 위반하고 그 위반으로 계약의 목적을 달성할 수 없다고 인정되는 경우
② 발주자는 제1항에 따라 계약을 해제 또는 해지하는 경우에는 그 사실을 해당 계약상대자에게 통지하고 기납부분 검사를 마친 물품을 기납부분으로 인수한 경우에는 해당 부분에 상당하는 대가를 계약상대자에게 지급한다.
③ 계약상대자는 계약상 기한 내에 해당 물품을 납품할 수 없다고 인정되는 경우에는 지체 없이 발주자에게 통지해야 한다.
④ 제1항에 따라 계약이 해제 또는 해지된 경우 계약상대자는 지급받은 선금에 대하여 미정산잔액이 있는 경우에는 그 잔액에 대한 약정이자 상당액[사유 발생 시점의 금융기관 대출평균금리(한국은행 통계월보상 대출평균금리를 말한다)로 산출한 금액]을 더하여 발주자에게 상환해야 한다. 이 경우 발주자는 상환할 금액과 기성부분의 대가를 상계할 수 있다.
제27조(사정변경에 따른 계약의 해제 또는 해지) ① 발주자는 제26조제1항 각 호의 경우 외에 다음 각 호의 사유와 같이 객관적으로 명백한 발주자의 불가피한 사정이 발생한 경우에는 계약을 해제 또는 해지할 수 있다.

1. 정부정책 변화 등에 따른 불가피한 사업취소

2. 관계 법령의 제정ㆍ개정으로 인한 사업취소

3. 과다한 지역 민원 제기로 인한 사업취소

4. 그 밖의 공공복리에 따른 사업의 변경 등에 따라 계약을 해제 또는 해지하는 경우
② 발주자는 제1항에 따라 계약을 해제 또는 해지하는 경우에는 다음 각 호에 해당하는 금액을 해제 또는 해지한 날부터 14일 이내에 계약상대자에게 지급해야 한다. 이 경우 제7조에 따른 계약보증금을 동시에 반환해야 한다.

1. 제22조제4항의 대가 중 지급하지 않은 금액

2. 전체 물품제조의 완성을 위하여 계약의 해제 또는 해지일 이전에 투입된 계약상대자의 인력ㆍ재료 및 장비의 철수비용
③ 계약상대자는 선금에 대한 미정산잔액이 있는 경우에는 이를 발주자에게 상환해야 한다. 이 경우 미정산잔액에 대한 이자는 더하지 않는다.
제28조(부정당업자의 입찰참가자격제한) 계약상대자가 시행령 제76조에 해당하는 경우에는 1개월 이상 2년 이하의 범위에서 입찰참가자격 제한조치를 받게 된다.
제29조(기술지식의 이용 및 비밀엄수의무) ① 발주자는 사업목적 달성 또는 공공의 이익 등을 위해 필요하다고 인정되는 경우, 계약내용에 따라 계약상대자가 제출하는 각종 보고서, 정보, 그 밖의 자료 및 이에 따라 얻은 기술지식(계약목적물의 내용에 포함되는 경우는 제외한다. 이하 이 조에서 “기술지식 등”이라 한다)의 전부 또는 일부를 계약상대자의 승인을 받아 복사, 이용 또는 공개할 수 있다.
② 계약상대자는 해당 계약을 통하여 얻은 모든 정보 또는 발주자의 기밀사항을 계약이행의 전후와 관계없이 외부에 누설할 수 없다.
③ 발주자는 시장에서 거래되는 등 재산적 가치가 있는 기술지식 등을 제1항에 따라 복사ㆍ이용 또는 공개하려는 경우에는 계약상대자에게 정당한 이용대가를 지급해야 한다. 이 경우 기술지식 등의 이용대가는 시장거래가격 등을 기초로 계약상대자와 협의하여 결정한다.
제29조의2(계약목적물의 지식재산권 귀속 등) 해당 계약에 따른 계약목적물의 지식재산권은 발주자와 계약상대자가 별도의 정함이 없는 한 균등한 지분으로 공동 소유하며, 세부사항은 「용역계약일반조건」 제35조의2부터 제35조의4까지의 규정을 준용한다.
제29조의3(비밀유지계약 체결 및 기술자료 임치) ① 발주자는 「대ㆍ중소기업 상생협력 촉진에 관한 법률」(이하 ‘상생협력법’이라 한다) 제2조제9호에 해당하는 기술자료 중 계약상대자가 비밀로 관리하는 기술자료를 제공받을 경우에는 별지 서식의 비밀유지계약서를 계약상대자와 체결해야 한다.
② 발주자와 계약상대자가 서로 협의하여 핵심기술을 임치하려는 경우에는 「상생협력법 시행령」 제15조의2에 따른 전문인력과 설비를 갖춘 전문기관에 임치할 수 있으며, 기술임치 등에 필요한 사항은 상생협력법 등 관련 법령에 따른다.
제30조(적격심사 관련 사항 이행) ① 시행령 제42조제1항 본문에 따른 물품을 제조ㆍ구매할 때 계약상대자는 계약예규 ｢적격심사기준｣(계약규정 제33조에 따른 심사기준을 포함한다) 심사항목에 규정된 사항에 대하여 적격심사 당시 제출한 내용대로 철저하게 이행해야 한다.
② 발주자는 제1항에 규정한 이행상황을 수시로 확인해야 하며, 제출된 내용대로 이행되지 않고 있는 경우에는 즉시 시정하도록 조치해야 한다.
제31조(분쟁의 해결) ① 물품구매계약의 수행 중 계약당사자 간에 발생하는 분쟁은 협의하여 해결한다.
② 제1항에 따른 협의가 이루어지지 않는 경우에는 법원의 판결 또는 ｢중재법｣에 따른 중재로 해결한다. 다만,「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률」제28조에서 정한 이의신청 대상에 해당하는 경우에는 국가계약분쟁조정위원회 조정결정에 따라 분쟁을 해결할 수 있다.
③ 제2항에도 불구하고 계약을 체결할 때 「국가를 당사자로 하는 계약에 관한 법률」제28조의2에 따라 분쟁해결방법을 정한 경우에는 그에 따른다.
④ 계약상대자는 제1항부터 제3항까지의 분쟁처리절차 수행 기간 중 물품구매계약의 수행을 중지해서는 안 된다.
[별지 서식] 비밀유지계약서

비밀유지계약서

계약상대자의 기술자료 제공과 관련하여 발주자와 계약상대자는
다음과 같이 비밀유지계약을 체결한다.

제1조(계약의 목적) 이 계약은 계약상대가 발주자에게 계약상대자의 기술자료를 제공하는 경우 해당 기술자료를 비밀로 유지하고 보호하기 위하여 필요한 제반 사항을 규정함을 목적으로 한다.

제2조(기술자료의 정의) ① 이 계약에서 ‘기술자료’란 계약상대자에 따라 비밀로 관리되고 있는 것으로서 다음 각 호의 어느 하나에 해당하는 정보ㆍ자료를 말한다.
1. 제조ㆍ수리ㆍ시공 또는 용역수행 방법에 관한 정보ㆍ자료
2. 특허권, 실용신안권, 디자인권, 저작권 등의 지식재산권과 관련된 기술정보ㆍ자료로서 수급사업자의 기술개발(R&D)ㆍ생산ㆍ영업활동에 기술적으로 유용하고 독립된 경제적 가치가 있는 것
3. 시공프로세스 매뉴얼, 장비 제원, 설계도면, 연구자료, 연구개발보고서 등 1호 또는 2호에 포함되지 않는 그 밖에 사업자의 정보ㆍ자료로서 수급사업자의 기술개발(R&D)ㆍ생산ㆍ영업활동에 기술적으로 유용하고 독립된 경제적 가치가 있는 것
② 수급사업자가 기술자료를 제공함에 있어, 비밀임을 알리는 문구(비밀 또는 대외비 등의 국문 또는 영문 표시 등을 의미)가 표시되어 있지 아니하더라도 비밀로 관리되고 있는지 여부에는 영향을 미치지 않는다.
③ 발주자는 계약상대자의 기술자료가 비밀로 관리되고 있는지 여부(기술자료에서 제외되는지 여부)에 대해 의문이 있는 경우에는 계약상대자에게 그에 대한 확인을 요청할 수 있다. 이 경우 계약상대자는 확인 요청을 받은 날로부터 15일 이내에 발주자에게 해당 기술자료가 비밀로 관리되고 있는지 여부를 서면으로 발송해야 한다.

제3조(기술자료의 목적외 사용금지) ① 발주자는 계약상대자의 기술자료를 ⌜비밀유지계약서(별첨) 1-2.⌟에서 정한 목적으로만 사용해야 한다.
② 발주자가 ⌜비밀유지계약서(별첨) 1-2.⌟에서 정한 목적 수행을 위하여 계약상대자의 기술자료를 제3자에게 제공하고자 할 경우에는 사전에 계약상대자로부터 서면에 따른 동의를 얻어야 하며, 그 제3자와의 사이에 해당 기술자료가 비밀로 유지되어야 함을 목적으로 하는 별도의 비밀유지계약을 체결한 이후에 그 제3자에게 해당 기술자료를 제공해야 한다.
③ 발주자는 ⌜비밀유지계약서(별첨) 2.⌟에 적힌 임직원들에 한하여 계약상대자의 기술자료를 보유할 수 있도록 필요한 합리적인 조치를 취해야 하며, 해당 임직원 각자에게 계약상대자의 기술자료에 대한 비밀유지의무를 주지시켜야 한다. 이 경우 계약상대자는 발주자에게 해당 임직원으로부터 비밀유지서약서를 제출받는 등의 방법으로 해당 기술자료의 비밀성을 유지하기 위하여 필요한 합리적인 조치를 취해줄 것을 요구할 수 있다.

제4조(기술자료의 비밀유지 의무) ① 계약상대자가 사전에 서면(전자문서 포함)으로 동의하지 않는 경우, 발주자는 제공받은 기술자료를 타인에게 누설하거나 공개해서는 안 된다.
② 발주자는 계약상대자의 기술자료가 외부로 유출되는 것을 방지하기 위하여 물리적 설비 설치 및 내부비밀관리지침 마련, 정보보안교육 실시 등 기술자료를 보호하고 관리하는 데에 필요한 합리적인 조치를 취해야 한다.

제5조(기술자료의 반환 또는 폐기방법) ⌜비밀유지계약서(별첨) 1-4.⌟에서 정한 기술자료의 반환일까지 발주자는 계약상대자의 기술자료 원본을 즉시 계약상대자에게 반환해야 하며, 일체의 복사본 등을 보유해서는 안 된다. 다만, 계약상대자의 선택에 따라 이를 반환하는 대신 폐기하는 경우에는 ⌜비밀유지계약서(별첨) 1-4.⌟에서 정한 시점까지 이를 폐기하고 발주자는 그 폐기를 증명하는 서류를 계약상대자에게 제공해야 한다.

제6조(권리의 부존재 등) ① 이 계약은 계약상대자의 기술자료를 제공받는 발주자에게 기술자료에 관한 어떠한 권리나 사용권을 부여하는 것으로 해석되지 않는다. 다만, 발주자가 ⌜비밀유지계약서(별첨) 1-2.⌟에서 정한 목적에 따라 사용하는 경우에 대해서는 그렇지 않다.
② 이 계약은 발주자와 계약상대자 간에 향후 어떠한 확정적인 계약의 체결, 제조물의 판매나 구입, 실시권의 허락 등을 암시하거나 이를 강제하지 않는다.
③ 계약상대자는 기술자료를 제공할 적법한 자격이 있음을 발주자에 대하여 보증한다.

제7조(비밀유지의무 위반시 배상) 발주자가 이 계약을 위반한 경우, 이에 따라 발생한 계약상대자의 손해를 배상해야 한다. 다만, 발주자가 고의 또는 과실이 없음을 입증한 경우에는 그렇지 않다.

제8조(권리의무의 양도 및 계약의 변경) ① 계약상대자가 사전에 서면(전자문서 포함)으로 동의하지 않는 경우, 발주자는 이 계약상의 권리의무를 제3자에게 양도하거나 이전할 수 없다.
② 이 계약의 수정이나 변경은 양 당사자의 정당한 대표자가 기명날인 또는 서명한 서면(전자문서 포함) 합의로만 이루어질 수 있다.
③ ⌜비밀유지계약서(별첨) 2.⌟에 적힌 임직원들의 퇴직, 전직, 조직/업무 변경 등으로 명단이 변경되어야 할 경우에는 발주자는 계약상대자의 사전 동의를 받은 후, 해당 명단을 서면으로 계약상대자에게 통지하는 것으로 이 계약의 변경을 갈음할 수 있다.

제9조(일부무효의 특칙) 이 계약의 내용 중 일부가 무효인 경우에도 이 계약의 나머지 규정의 유효성에 영향을 미치지 않는다. 다만, 유효인 부분만으로 계약의 목적을 달성할 수 없는 경우에는 전부를 무효로 한다.

이 계약의 체결사실 및 계약내용을 증명하기 위하여 이 계약서를 2통 작성하여 계약 당사자가 각각 서명 또는 기명날인한 후 각자 1통씩 보관한다.

년
월
일

발주자
계약상대자
상호 또는 명칭 : 한국원자력환경공단
전화번호 :

주
소 :
대표자 성명 :
(인)
사업자(법인)번호 :
상호 또는 명칭 :
전화번호 :
주
소 :
대표자 성명 :
(인)
사업자(법인)번호 :

첨부: 비밀유지계약서 (별첨) 【첨부】 비밀유지계약서(별첨)

1-1. 계약상대자로부터 제공받는 기술자료의 명칭 및 범위
* 요구하는 기술자료의 명칭과 범위 등 구체적 내역을 명시하여 기재

1-2. <1-1. 기술자료>를 제공받는 목적
* 공단이 기술자료를 요구하는 정당한 사유 기재

1-3. <1-1. 기술자료>의 사용기간:

1-4. <1-1. 기술자료>의 반환일 또는 폐기일:

2. 기술자료를 보유할 임직원의 명단
No.
보유자
이메일
부서
이름
1

2 ⋮

* 위 임직원의 명단은 본 계약의 체결 및 이행을 위해서만 사용될 수 있는 것으로서 이를 무단으로 전송ㆍ배포할 수 없으며, 일부의 내용이라도 공개ㆍ복사해서는 안됨
** 본 건 기술자료를 1-3.의 사용기간 중 보유할 임직원 명단을 기재

===== 2-4. 계약 특수조건.hwp =====

Ⅱ. 계 약 조 건 제2장 계약 특수조건

목
차

제2.01조
구매개요
1

제2.02조
통지
2

제2.03조
품질보증, 시험 및 검사
4

제2.04조
제작독려
9

제2.05조
코드·표준 및 도량형
10

제2.06조
품질서류
11

제2.07조
포장, 표시 및 납품
12

제2.08조
하자보증 기간
16

제2.09조
인수통보
17

제2.10조
현장 기술지원서비스
18

제2.11조
하도급 관리
20

제2.12조
계약내용 변경으로 인한 계약금액의 조정
21

제2.13조
물가변동으로 인한 계약금액 조정
22

부록 2A‐１
포장, 표시 및 납품 지침
2A-1-23

부록 2A‐2
기술지원 역무 지침
2A-2-32

제2.01조
구매개요

2.01.1 한국원자력환경공단(이하 공단)은 경북 경주시 문무대왕면 봉길리 일대 중저준위사업본부 내에서 중·저준위 방사성폐기물 인수/검사를 위한 방폐물검사건물 건설사업을 추진 중이다.

2.01.2 중·저준위 방사성폐기물 방폐물검사건물 건설 사업기간은 2017.1. ~ 2028.12. 이다.

제2.02조
통지

2.02.1 공단에 대한 통지는 아래와 같이 전달되어야 한다.

2.02.1.1 계약절차, 계약(변경계약 포함)체결 등의 사항은 아래주소로 송부한다.

경북 경주시 충효천길 19 (우 38062)
한국원자력환경공단 경영관리본부 ESG상생팀
전화번호 : (054) 750‐4076

2.02.1.2 기술규격서에 요구되는 기술자료 및 도면, 기타 모든 기술적 사항(아래 2.02.1.3조 기재사항 제외). 단, 제출서한 사본 1부는 2.02.1.3조의 주소로도 송부되어야 한다.

수신 : 경북 경주시 충효천길 19 (우 38062)
한국원자력환경공단 중저준위사업본부 엔지니어링팀
전화번호 : (054) 750‐4303

사본 : 경북 김천시 혁신로 269(우‐61486)
한국전력기술주식회사
방폐물사업책임자
전화번호 : (054) 421‐4260

2.02.1.3 사업일정, 사업진도 보고, 계약상대자 품질보증계획, 품질감독, 품질보증감사, 제작독려, 하도급 승인에 대하여 아래 주소로 송부한다.

2.02.1.4 위 사항 외에 현장에 통보하여야 할 사항은 2.02.1.3조의 주소로 전달되어야 한다.

2.02.1.5 공단은 2.02.1.3조에 명시된 계약사후관리 업무를 시공관리팀에 위임할 수 있다.

2.02.2 계약상대자에 대한 통지는 아래 주소로 전달되어야 한다.

• ㅇㅇㅇㅇㅇㅇㅇㅇ(우‐ㅇㅇㅇㅇㅇ)

ㅇㅇㅇㅇㅇㅇㅇ
ㅇㅇ
전화번호 : (ㅇㅇㅇ)

2.02.3 계약서에 달리 규정되어 있지 않는 한, 계약상 모든 통지, 요청, 청구, 승인, 기타의 의사전달은 인편, 등기우편 등으로 상대방에게 도달한 때 그 효력이 발생한다.

2.02.4 주소가 변경되었을 경우에는 상대방에게 서면으로 통지하여야 한다.

제2.03조
품질보증, 시험 및 검사

2.03.1 품질보증
이 조항은 제Ⅳ편 기술규격서에 규정된 품질등급이 AQ 표시된 품목에 적용된다. 계약상대자는 NQ품목에 대하여 계약요건, 설계 및 제작, 품질요구 수준을 만족하도록 물품특성에 맞게 품질활동을 수행하여야 한다.

2.03.1.1 계약상대자는 계약에 의하여 요구되는 업무품질의 수준을 보증하기 위하여 이 조항과 제Ⅳ편 기술규격서에서 정한 요건에 따라 품질보증계획을 수립·시행하여야 한다.

2.03.1.2 계약상대자는 아래 기준에 맞는 품질보증활동을 수행할 책임이 있으며, 외국 기준과 국내 기준이 상치되는 경우에는 국내 기준을 우선하여 적용한다.

1. 원안위고시(방사성폐기물 폐기시설 품질보증기준)
2. 전력산업기술기준(KEPIC), QAP(원자력 품질보증)
3. 기술규격서 등에 명시된 품질보증기준
4. 공단 품질보증규정 및 품질보증계획서
5. 기타 공인 규격 등

2.03.1.3
계약상대자는 계약발효일로부터 4주 이내에 공단의 품질보증계획서를 기준으로 작성된 품질보증계획서 관리본 1부를 공단에 제출하여 검토를 받아야 한다. 이때 품질보증계획 요건을 선별적으로 차감하여 적용하거나 다른 기준을 참조하여 작성할 경우에는 요건별 대비표와 그 사유를 첨부하여 제출하여야 한다. 다만, 공단이 검토되어 동일 품질등급품목에 적용중인 품질보증계획서를 보유하고 있는 계약상대자는 관련 증빙서류제출로 품질보증계획서의 제출을 대체할 수 있다. 이때 계약상대자는 공급품목에 적용할 품질보증계획서의 명칭, 개정번호, 개정일자 등을 공단에게 알려야 한다.

2.03.1.4 공단이 제시한 검토의견은 20일 이내에 품질보증계획서에 반영하여 공단의 검토를 받아야 하며 또한, 품질보증계획서 개정의 경우에도 원본과 동일한 방법으로 공단의 검토를 받아야 한다. 또한 공단이 계약상대자의 품질보증계획서를 검토한 후에도 그 내용에 미흡한 부분이 발견되면 공단은 이에 대한 보완을 요구할 권한을 갖는다.

2.03.1.5 계약의 일부를 다른 업체에 하도급 할 경우에는 계약상대자가 검토, 인정한 협력업체의 품질보증계획서 1부를 참조용으로 공단에게 제출하여야 한다.

2.03.1.6 계약상대자는 협력업체의 품질보증계획서를 검토 및 필요시 검토의견을 반영토록 하고 이행상태를 확인하며 계약상대자와 동등이상의 품질보증활동을 수행토록 한다.

2.03.1.7 공단은 계약상대자의 계약 이행 중 중대한 품질상의 문제점이 발견된 경우에는 작업중지를 요청할 권리가 있으며, 계약상대자는 공단으로부터 작업중지요청서를 접수 시에는 작업을 중지하고 필요한 조치를 취한 후 결과를 공단에게 알려야 한다. 이러한 작업중지에 따른 제반 책임은 계약상대자에게 있다.

2.03.1.8 계약상대자는 작업 완료 시 품질보증기록을 수집·분류·색인 및 편철하여 공단에 제출하여야 하며, 품질보증기록은 실제 작업과정 또는 구조물, 계통 및 기기의 이력이 명확히 추적될 수 있도록 사전에 관리체계가 수립되어야 한다.

2.03.1.9 계약상대자는 공단에게 제출하지 않은 품질보증기록에 대해서는 품질보증기록 관련 요건에 따라 기록 보존기간을 설정하고 보존기간 동안 보관하여야 하며 계약상대자는 기록 보관 중 계약상대자의 불가피한 사정으로 자체 기록보관이 곤란한 경우가 발생시에는 계약상대자 자체비용으로 공단에게 해당 품질보증기록을 인계하여야 한다.

2.03.1.10 계약상대자는 국내법령과 적용 기술기준에서 법정검사 또는 공인검사가 요구될 시 해당 검사에 합격해야 한다.

2.03.2 품질보증감사, 품질감독 및 검사 요건

2.03.2.1 공단 또는 그 대리인(규제기관 포함)은 계약상대자 또는 그 협력업체의 품질보증계획서 이행상태를 확인하기 위하여 정기 또는 수시로 품질보증감사, 품질감독 및 품질검사 등을 시행할 권한이 있다.

2.03.2.2 계약상대자는 공단 또는 그 대리인이 감사, 감독 및 검사를 위하여 계약상대자 및 협력업체의 공장이나 설비, 현장, 서류 등을 자유롭게 출입, 검토, 열람, 확인할 수 있도록 협조하여야 하고, 필요한 설비(사무실, 전화 등)를 별도의 비용부담 없이 제공하여야 한다.

2.03.2.3 계약상대자는 공단이 품질보증계획의 이행상태 확인 시 사용할 수 있도록 품질보증계획서, 절차서 및 각종 계약관련 서류를 현장에 비치하여야 한다. 공단 또는 그의 대리인에 의한 감사, 감독 및 검사를 수행하였더라도 품질보증계획 이행에 대한 계약상대자의 책임이 면제되는 것은 아니다.

2.03.2.4 계약상대자는 공단의 감사, 감독 및 검사결과의 지적 사항에 대한 시정조치 결과를 공단에 제출하여야 하며, 즉각적인 조치가 어려운 경우에는 시정조치계획을 제출하여야 한다.

2.03.3 공장시험 및 검사

2.03.3.1 계약상대자는 제Ⅳ편 기술규격서에 정해진 기한 내에 제작 또는 작업공정에 대한 품질검사계획서를 공단에 제출하여 공단의 입회점 및 필수확인점을 지정받아야 한다. 계약상대자는 입회점 및 필수확인점으로 지정받는 작업공정에 대하여 국내 공급분은 작업 개시 5일전, 국외 공급분은 작업 개시 ３주전에 공단에 입회요청을 하여야 하고, 검사일정을 변경하여야 할 경우 이를 공단에 통지하여야 한다.

2.03.3.2 계약상대자는 계약이행과 관련하여 기술규격, 설계기준, 제작, 시공관계상 필요한 시험 및 검사와 본 계약서에 공단이 요구되는 시험 및 검사를 계약상대자의 비용으로 시행하여야 한다.

2.03.3.3 계약상대자는 자체의 설비로 수행하지 못하는 시험이 있을 경우, 자신의 비용으로 공인기관 또는 공단이 인정하는 전문기관에서 시험을 실시할 수 있다.

2.03.3.4 계약상대자는 검사결과 불합격 또는 보완이 필요한 경우 자신의 비용으로 시정 및 보완 후 재검사를 받아야 한다.

2.03.4 현장시험 및 검사
현장시험이 제Ⅳ편 기술규격서에 명시된 경우는 아래에 따른다.

2.03.4.1 계약상대자는 현장시험/검사계획서를 제Ⅳ편 기술규격서에 정해진 기한 내에 공단에 제출하여 승인을 받아야 하며 설비를 현장에 설치한 후 제Ⅳ편 기술규격서에 명시한 성능을 확인하기 위하여 계약상대자의 책임 있는 기술자를 파견하여 현장시험 및 검사를 시행하거나 또는 시행에 필요한 기술지원을 하여야 한다.

2.03.4.2 현장시험은 시험조건이 구비되어 시험준비가 완료되었음을 쌍방이 확인한 후 시행되며 계약상대자의 사정으로 지연되는 경우에는 상호 합의하여 연기될 수 있다.

2.03.4.3 계약상대자는 예비점검 및 시운전 중 기기, 계기, 계통, 제어장치 및 회로 등에 요구되는 조정 및 수정을 하여야 한다.

2.03.4.4 공단은 물품의 점검 및 현장시험에 필요한 전력, 연료, 용수를 계약상대자에게 공급한다.

2.03.4.5 계약상대자는 공단의 요청에 따라 기동, 최초부하시험, 부하변동시험, 부하차단시험, 신뢰도 운전 및 성능시험에 필요한 기술자와 계측설비 등 필요한 장비를 지원하여야 한다.

2.03.4.6 계약상대자는 검사결과 불합격 또는 보완이 필요한 경우 자신의 비용으로 시정 및 보완 후 재검사를 받아야 한다.

2.03.5 중대결함의 통지
계약상대자는 다음과 같은 중대결함을 인지할 시에는 공단에 구두로 즉시 통보하고, ７일 이내에 결함내용, 기술적 검토결과 및 조치계획 등을 문서로 작성하여 공단의 최종 처리방안 검토를 위해 공단에 제출하여야 한다.

1. 품질보증프로그램의 일부에 있어서의 중대한 하자

2. 안전성분석보고서에 명시된 기준에 부합되지 않는 건설용으로 승인 배포된 최종설계상의 주요 결함

3. 광범위한 평가, 재설계나 보수가 요구되는 구조물, 계통 또는 기기의 건설 중의 중대한 결함이나 손상

4. 성능요건과의 중대한 불일치로 인하여 구조물, 계통 또는 기기가 계획된 안전기능을 달성하기 위하여 광범위한 평가나 또는 재설계가 필요한 경우

2.03.6 일반규격품(CGI : Commercial Grade Item) 관리

2.03.6.1 계약상대자는 일반규격품(CGI)을 품질검증(Dedication)하여 안전성 관련품목에 사용하고자 하는 경우에는 “계약상대자 불일치사항 처리 요청서(SDDR)”를 공단에 제출하여 승인을 득해야 한다. 이때 일반규격품 품질검증요건에 따라 일반규격품 품질검증계획(CGI Dedication Plan/Conformance for CGI Dedication)를 작성하여 첨부하여야 한다.

2.03.6.2 기자재 납품 시 일반규격품 품질검증과 관련한 품질검증계획, 품질검증확인서 및 보고서(Report)는 품질증명서류로서 공단에게 제출되어야 한다.

제2.04조
제작 독려

2.04.1 공단 또는 그 대리인은 계약상대자와 협력업체의 공장, 기타 시설물에 파견하는 등의 방법으로 계약서에 명시된 업무의 이행을 독려할 권한을 가진다.

2.04.2 계약상대자는 공단 또는 그 대리인이 제작 독려를 위하여 계약상대자 및 협력업체의 공장이나 설비, 현장, 서류 등을 자유롭게 출입, 검토, 열람, 확인할 수 있도록 협조하여야 하고, 별도의 비용부담 없이 필요한 설비 (사무실, 전화 등)를 제공하여야 한다.

2.04.3 계약상대자는 계약체결 후 1개월 이내에 단위업무별 가중치와 월별 공정률이 표시된 예정공정표를 제출하여 공단의 승인을 받아야 한다.

2.04.4 계약상대자는 공단이 계약이행 진도를 실제적으로 파악할 수 있도록 상세한 내용의 월별 진도보고서를 매월 공단에 제출하여야 한다. 진도보고서에는 주요 협력업체의 작업진도가 포함되어야 한다.

2.04.5 계약상대자는 이 계약의 원활한 수행을 위하여 필요시 사업관리조직을 구성하고 사업관리책임자, 공사현장대리인 및 담당자를 임명하여야 하며, 그 내용을 계약 후 30일 이내에 공단에 통보하여야 한다.

제2.05조
코드, 표준 및 도량형

2.05.1 계약상대자는 제Ⅳ편 기술규격서에 달리 명시되어 있지 않는 한, 법규 및 규격, 표준을 준수하여야 한다. 계약상대자는 필요한 경우 그러한 요건적합성에 대한 증명서를 획득하여야 한다.

2.05.2 계약상대자는 도면, 자료, 운전설명서 등에 국제단위계(SI unit)를 사용하여야 한다. 필요한 때에는 미국단위계(푸트‐파운드법)와 병행하여 사용할 수 있다.

2.05.3 계약상대자가 계약에 따라 제공하여야 하는 모든 설계, 엔지니어링, 인허가 및 제작은 제Ⅳ편 기술규격서에 규정된 모든 요건을 충족하여야 한다. 계약상대자는 계약이후 새로 공표되거나 개정된 규격의 적용이 공단에 유익한 경우 이를 공단에 제안하여야 하며, 공단의 사전승인 하에 새로운 규격 및 표준을 사용할 수 있다.

제2.06조
품질서류

2.06.1
계약서에서 요구하는 모든 품질관련서류는 제４장 기술규격서 부록 4E 품질 증명서류 목록(QVDL)에 따라 정확히 작성되어야 하며, 매 납품시마다 물품과 함께 공단에 제출되어야 한다.

2.06.2 모든 품질서류는 공단 또는 그 대리인(SQR)에 의하여 검토되어야 한다. 공단의 검사가 요구될 경우, 일체의 품질서류에 대하여 만족스런 것으로 검토가 완료되기 전에는 선적지시가 나갈 수 없다. 매 품질증명서류 목록은 표지에 아래와 같이 상업송장번호, 계약서 번호 및 수신인이 명시되어야 한다.

“품질증명서류”

계약서 번호:
상업송장번호:
수신:

2.06.3 품질서류 묶음은 반드시 방수봉투로 포장하여 물품과 함께 선적되어야 하며, 운송 중 분실되지 않도록 물품 포장단위 내에 단단하게 부착되어야 한다. 물품이 하나 이상의 포장단위로 선적될 경우, 품질서류 묶음은 일련번호 1번의 포장단위에 포함되어야 하며, 포장단위 표면에 “품질서류 재중”이라고 붉은 색으로 굵게 표시하여야 한다. 위와 같은 조치가 불가할 경우 납품서 및 품목명세서와 함께 제출되어야 한다.

제2.07조
포장, 표시 및 납품

2.07.1 계약상대자는 계약문서에 규정된 납품조건, 절차 및 일정에 따라 물품 (납품서류 등을 포함한다)을 납품하고 기술인력을 지원한다.

2.07.2
물품의 납품은 계약문서에 규정된 조건에 따라 시험 및 검사에 합격한 물품을 공단이 지정된 장소에서 계약상대자로부터 수령한 때에 완료된다. 다만, 계약서상 설치 및 성능시험 등의 조건이 계약상대자 공급범위에 포함되어 있는 경우에는 이를 완전히 수행한 때에 완료된다.

2.07.3 계약상대자가 공단의 귀책사유로 인해 물품을 납품할 수 없을 경우에는 계약상대자는 공단이 지정하는 창고에 물품을 보관할 수 있다. 이 경우에는 공단 및 공단이 지정하는 자를 수하인으로 하여 발행된 창고증권을 공단이 수령한 때에 계약상의 납품이 이루어진 것으로 본다. 계약상대자는 보험을 포함하여 보관된 물품의 안전을 위해서 필요하다고 생각되는 모든 조치를 다 하여야 한다. 공단의 요청이 있을 때에는 계약상대자는 보관창고로부터 계약서에 규정된 납품장소로 물품을 이송하여야 한다. 공단은 이 조항에 의한 납품과정에서 발생한 비용과 정상적인 납품 시 발생했을 비용간의 차액은 상대방에게 정산 지급되어야 한다.

2.07.4 이 계약에 의거 공급되는 물품은 부록 2A‐1, [포장, 표시 및 납품지침]에 따라 포장, 표시 및 납품되어야 한다.

제2.08조
하자보증기간

2.08.1 물품 및 기술지원서비스에 대한 하자보증은 제2.10조에 따라 인수통보일로부터 3년간 유효하다.

2.08.2 인수통보일이 계약상대자의 귀책사유가 아닌 다른 사유로 예정일로부터 ６개월 이상 지연될 경우, 양 당사자는 그러한 지연에 따른 하자보증기간의 연장에 대한 보상방안을 협의하여 결정한다.

2.08.3 2.08.1조에 규정된 하자보증기간이 경과되었을지라도 하자보증기간 내에 하자보수를 요청한 경우에는 하자보수완료에 대하여 공단이 확인된 시점에 하자보증기간이 종료된다. 또한, 하자부분이 단위기기 내에서 매우 중요하거나 업무의 다른 부분에 영향을 미친 경우에 하자보증은 단위기기 전체 또는 영향을 받은 업무까지 적용된다.

제2.09조
인수 통보

2.09.1 해당 물품 설치후 성능확인이 성공적으로 완료되고 하자보수보증 의무를 제외한 계약상대자의 계약상 의무가 모두 이행되었을 때에 공단은 계약상대자에게 인수통보서를 발급한다.

2.09.2 성능시험 결과가 성능 보증치 미달로 최종 확정되는 경우, 공단은 인수를 거절하거나 적정금액의 배상 또는 계약금액 감액 조건으로 인수할 수 있다. 계약상대자가 인수거절 또는 계약금액 감액으로 인하여 환급할 금액이 있거나 배상을 하여야 할 경우 계약상대자는 공단의 청구서를 접수한 후 20일 이내에 해당금액을 공단에 지급하여야 한다.

2.09.3 계약상대자의 의무 이행상의 경미한 누락이나 하자가 있을 경우, 공단은 양 당사자가 상호 합의한 기간 이내에 계약상대자가 이를 시정하는 조건으로 인수할 수 있다.

2.09.4 공단은 현장에 도착된 물품을 인수할 수 있으나, 이러한 잠정인수가 계약상대자의 계약상의 의무와 책임이 면제되거나 공단이 계약상대자에게 대한 손해배상 청구권 또는 원상회복조치를 요구할 수 있는 권리를 포기하는 것은 아니다.

제2.10조
현장기술지원서비스

계약상대자는 이 계약에 의거 납품되는 물품의 인수, 하역, 검사, 저장, 설치, 현장시험 및 운전과 관련하여 공단의 요청시 부록 2A‐2 [기술지원역무지침]에 의거 현장기술지원을 제공하여야 한다.

제2.11조
하도급의 관리

2.11.1 계약상대자는 계약된 일부를 제3자에게 하도급 하고자 할 때에는 하도급 부분에 해당하는 계약금액 산출내역서를 포함하여 공단의 승인을 받아야 한다.

2.11.2 2.12.1조의 규정에 의하여 하도급한 경우에도 계약에 의한 계약상대자의 의무는 면제되지 아니한다.

2.11.3 계약상대자는 하도급 계약을 체결하고자 할 때에는 하도급심사 기준에 따라 하수급인의 공정관리능력, 품질관리능력, 기술능력, 가격의 적정성 등을 검토하여 적격한 업체를 선정하여야 한다.

2.11.4 공단은 하수급인의 제작실적을 정기적으로 평가하여 하수급인의 교체를 요구할 수 있으며, 계약상대자는 특별한 사유가 없는 한 이를 교체하여야 한다.

제2.12조
계약내용 변경으로 인한 계약금액의 조정

2.12.1 계약서에 명시된 기술규격(도면 포함) 또는 물품 수량의 변경으로 인하여 계약금액을 조정하는 경우에는 다음 기준에 의한다. 다만, 계약상대자의 책임이 있는 사유로 인한 경우에는 계약금액을 증액할 수 없다.

1. 증감된 물량의 단가는 제Ⅲ편 물품 및 가격명세의 단가(이하 “계약단가”라 한다)에 의한다.

2. 계약단가가 없는 신규비목의 단가는 계약변경 당시 기준으로 산정된 단가에 낙찰률(예정가격에 대한 낙찰금액 또는 계약금액의 비율을 말한다. 이하 같다)을 곱한 금액으로 한다.

3. 제1호 및 제2호에도 불구하고 공단의 책임 있는 사유로 인한 경우에는 증가된 물량 또는 신규비목의 단가는 계약변경 당시를 기준으로 하여 산정한 단가와 동단가에 낙찰률을 곱한 금액의 범위 안에서 계약상대자 간에 협의하여 결정한다. 다만, 계약상대자간에 협의가 이루어지지 아니하는 경우에는 설계변경 당시를 기준으로 하여 산정한 단가와 동단가에 낙찰률을 곱한 금액을 합한 금액의 100분의 50으로 한다.

2.12.2 위 2.13.1조의 경우를 제외한 기타 계약내용의 변경으로 인하여 계약금액을 조정하는 경우에는 변경된 내용에 따라 실비를 초과하지 않는 범위 안에서 이를 조정한다. 2.13.1조 단서의 규정은 이 경우에도 준용한다.

2.12.3 공단은 불가피한 경우를 제외하고는 이 조항에 의한 계약상대자의 계약금액 조정 청구를 받은 날부터 30일 이내에 계약금액을 조정한다. 이 경우 조정청구 내용의 보완에 소요되는 기간은 위 조정기간에 산입하지 않는다.

제2.13조
물가변동으로 인한 계약금액 조정

2.13.1 제Ⅲ편 물품 및 가격명세에 명시된 계약금액에 대하여는 아래 규정된 조건에 의하여 물가변동에 따라 계약금액 또는 계약단가를 조정한다.
단, 국외공급분 및 미합중국 달러화로 표시된 국내 공급분은 전 계약기간 동안 물가변동에 따른 가격조정을 하지 아니한다.

2.13.2 물가변동으로 인한 계약금액 조정은 품목조정 또는 지수조정 방법 중 하나의 방법에 의하여야 하며, 계약체결 시 협의하여 조정방법을 확정한다.

2.13.3 물가변동으로 인한 계약금액의 증액은 계약상대자의 청구에 의한다.

2.13.4 선금급을 지급하였을 경우에는 계약금액 증감액에서 다음 산식에 의하여 산출된 금액을 공제한다.

공제금액 = 물가변동 적용대가 × 조정률 × 선금급률

2.13.5
계약상대자는 계약체결 후 1개월 이내에 제조공정예정표를 공단에 제출하여 승인을 받아야 한다.

2.13.6 공단은 불가피한 경우를 제외하고는 이 조항에 의한 계약상대자의 계약금액 조정 청구를 받은 날부터 20일 이내에 계약금액을 조정한다. 이 경우 조정청구 내용의 보완에 소요되는 기간은 위 조정기간에 산입하지 않는다.

부록 2A ‐１ 포장, 표시 및 납품 지침

목
차

1.0
일반사항
2A-1-25

2.0
보존처리
2A-1-26

3.0
포장 및 묶음
2A-1-26

4.0
중량물 및 활대품
2A-1-27

5.0
표시
2A-1-28

6.0
납품
2A-1-29

부록 2A‐1 포장, 표시 및 납품 지침 1.0 일반사항

1.01 이 지침은 제Ⅳ편 기술규격서에 특별히 규정되지 않는 한, 이 계약에 의거 공급되는 물품의 포장, 표시 및 납품에 적용된다. 이 지침에 규정된 조건이 제Ⅳ편 기술규격서에 규정된 포장 및 표시조건보다 더 상세할 경우에는 이 지침을 우선 적용한다.

1.02 계약상대자는 이 지침을 하도급업체에게도 적용하도록 하여야 한다.

1.03 모든 기자재 및 포장단위는 기계적으로 조작할 수 있는 특성을 가져야 하며, 필요할 경우 걸쇠, U링크 등이 물품에 장착되거나 활재(skid)를 갖추어야 한다.

1.04 기자재는 가능한 한 최대단위로 조립되어 납품되어야 한다. 납품여건상 분해되어 납품될 경우에는 각 부품에 연계표시가 있어야 하며, 성능보증에 어떠한 영향도 미치지 않아야 한다. 모든 물품 및 그 용기는 계약번호, 품목번호 등이 표시되어야 하고, 식별번호가 표시된 꼬리표를 최소 두 군데 이상 각 물품에 부착하여야 한다.

1.05 꼬리표는 비철금속이나 견고한 플라스틱으로 만들어 져야 하고, 꼬리표 이음줄은 비철금속 또는 스테인리스스틸이어야 한다.

1.06 가연성 자재나 위험한 자재는 해당 규제법령이나 국제규격 또는 관습에 따라 포장, 표기 및 운송되어야 한다.

1.07 모든 기자재는 현장 또는 선적지에서 어떠한 손상 없이 옥외 보관을 할 수 있도록 포장되어야 한다.

1.08 계약상대자는 필요하다고 판단할 경우 물품의 현장저장, 보관, 사용 및 취급상의 주의사항 및 요령을 제공하여야 한다.

1.09 계약상대자는 공급범위에 대하여 계약상대자의 부주의 또는 부적절한 조치로 인하여 발생된 손상 또는 망실에 대하여 책임을 져야 한다.

2.0 보존처리

2.01 염해 또는 염습에 부식되기 쉬운 물품은 운송중이거나 옥외저장 또는 충격보호를 위하여 적정한 임시 보호제로 포장되어야 한다. 임시보호제로 사용된 컴파운드는 사용전 쉽게 제거되거나, 제거되지 않아도 사용상 문제가 없어야 한다.

2.02 기계류의 모든 내부는 녹 또는 산화방지를 위하여 윤활제로 처리되어야 하며, 운전중 계속 사용하는 제품과 호환성이 있어야 하고 사용상 주의사항이 적절한 꼬리표에 명시되어야 한다.

2.03 비교적 장기간 사용하지 않을 경우 손상되기 쉬운 제품은 특별차단제, 끼움조각 (shim), 모조 베어링 (dummy bearings)등으로 포장되어야 한다.

2.04 습기 또는 수분에 의하여 손상되기 쉬운 물품은 방수제로 내부 포장한 후 박스 내에 포장되어야 한다.

2.05 건조제 또는 휘발성 부식방지제는 봉함용기, 차단제 등에서만 사용되어야 한다. 휘발성 부식방지제는 황동, 납 또는 동 금속의 합금이 노출된 곳에서는 사용되지 않아야 한다.

2.06 배관류는 양단에 마개를 끼우는 등의 적절한 방법으로 찌그러짐과 이물질 또는 습기가 들어가는 것을 방지해야 한다.

2.07 수용성 부식방지제는 사용하지 않아야 한다. 석유류 계통 부식방지제를 사용할 수 없는 금속제품은 최소 6㎜ 두께의 폴리에틸렌 시트로 포장되어야 한다.

3.0 포장 및 묶음

3.01 계약상대자는 산업 및 국제표준에 따라 모든 물품을 자신의 비용으로 수송과 현장에서의 취급 및 일시적인 저장에 적합하고, 습기, 강우, 이상 저온·고온, 염해, 염습, 먼지, 마찰 및 충격 등에 의한 손상을 방지하며, 수송 또는 저장 중 자연재해와 도난, 조작상의 손상·파괴를 피할 수 있도록 포장하여야 한다.

3.02 예비품과 특수공구는 관련 계약번호 및 기호 등을 명기한 꼬리표를 부착하고, 별도로 포장하며 포장의 외부에 ‘예비품’ 또는 ‘특수공구’라고 명기하여야 한다.

3.03 스풀(Spool)이나 조립용 부품(Fittings), 볼트와 너트 등의 부속품과 분해된 부품은 관련 계약번호 및 기호 등을 명기한 꼬리표를 붙여 별도로 포장하며, 포장 외부에 `부속품과 분해된 부품'이라고 명기하여야 한다.

3.04 매 포장에는 포장명세서 １부를 첨부하여야 하며, 드럼통 등 명세서를 첨부하기 어려운 것에는 용기에 기명하여야 한다. 포장명세서에는 계약번호, 포장번호, 포장수량, 포장품명, 수량, 순무게, 총무게, 부피 등이 명시되어야 한다.

3.05 계약상대자가 적절한 포장시설이나 경험이 없는 경우에는 전문업체에 이를 의뢰하여야 한다.

3.06 계약문서에 특별히 규정되지 않는 한, 납품후 모든 포장재는 공단의 소유가 된다.

4.0 중량물 및 활대품

4.01 단일포장단위의 중량이 40톤을 초과할 때에는, 굴림이동(roll‐on/roll‐off) 또는 들어올림(pulling)에 의한 안전수송 및 취급에 적합하도록 적절한 활재(skid) 와 손잡이(pulling eyes), 재킹보스(jacking boss)등을 갖추어야 한다.

4.02 중량물 및 활대품의 경우에는 통상적으로 사용되는 거양기에 의한 작업이 가능하도록 적절한 들어올림 장치, 가로막대(spreader bars) 또는 특수장치 등을 계약상대자 책임으로 현장까지 제공하여야 하며, 이는 공단의 재산이 된다.

5.0
표시

5.01 납품되는 물품에는 제작자명 또는 상표, 모델번호, 크기, 계약번호, 품목번호 등을 표시한 표지를 부착하여야 하며, 표지는 그 물품의 내용 년수와 같아야 하고, 물품의 형태 또는 성질에 따라 인쇄, 금속판첩찰, 꼬리표 또는 기타 방법에 의하여야 한다.

5.02 포장의 외부표지는 5센티미터 이상 크기의 글자로 읽을 수 있고 지워지지 않도록 각 포장단위의 양쪽 면이나 묶음(bundle)의 양단에 견고하게 묶인 꼬리표에 페인트나 스텐슬(stencil)로 다음 기재사항과 공단이 요구하는 사항을 표시하여야 한다.

한국원자력환경공단 방폐물검사건물
계약번호 :
선적승인번호 :
포장일련번호 : (예 1of3, 2of3, 3of3 등)
총중량(kg) :
순중량(kg) :
용적(㎥) : 가로(m) X 세로(m) X 높이 (m)
계약상대자 성명 및 주소 :

5.03 필요한 경우, ‘취급주의’, ‘깨지는 물건 : 떨어뜨리지 마시오’, ‘바로 세우시오’, ‘이 면을 위로’, ‘무게중심’, ‘이 곳을 매다시오’ (화살표와 함께 표시), ‘갈고리 사용금지’ 등과 같은 특별표시를 포장단위의 표면에 표시하여야 한다.

5.04 배관자재와 같이 묶음(bundle)단위로 납품되는 벌크자재의 경우 각 자재마다 “한국원자력환경공단 방폐물검사건물”표기를 하여야 한다.

5.05 하자품의 교체 또는 수량부족분 보충자재일 경우에는 포장단위 표면에 “대체품 또는 누락품”임을 명시하여야 한다.

5.06 계약상대자는 공단의 로고 또는 CI가 표시된 물품을 타인에게 판매할 수 없다.

6.0 납품

6.01 계약상대자는 납품예정일로부터 최소 14일 이전에 납품장소, 납품품목 명세, 총중량 및 용적, 가장 큰 화물의 중량과 치수, 송장금액, 예정 납품일, 검수입회자 인적사항, 기타 공단이 요청하는 정보를 팩스전송이나 전신으로 공단에 통보하여야 한다.

6.02 계약상대자는 계약서 또는 납품요청서상에 규정된 납품기일까지 지정장소에 물품반입을 완료한 후(국외공급분의 경우 물품통관완료 포함) 또는 설치·성능시험조건 등이 포함된 경우에는 이를 완료한 후 공단에 서면(납품서 또는 설치·성능시험완료보고서 등)으로 검사요청 하여야 한다. 계약상 기납부분에 대하여 완납 전에 대가의 전부 또는 일부를 지급하는 경우에도 또한 같다.

6.03 공단은 제6.02조의 통지를 받은 때에는 공단 검사관계규정 및 다음 각 호의 요령에 따라 계약서 및 기타 관계서류에 의하여 그 날로부터 14일 이내에 계약상대자의 입회하에 그 이행을 확인하기 위한 검사를 하여야 한다. 다만, 천재지변 등 불가항력적인 사유로 인하여 검사를 완료하지 못한 경우에는 당해 사유가 존속되는 기간과 당해 사유가 소멸된 날로부터 3일 까지는 이를 연장할 수 있다.

1.검사는 품질, 규격, 수량, 포장, 표기상태, 포장명세서 등에 관하여 행한다. 설치·성능시험조건부 계약인 경우에는 기술규격서 및 관련법규에 규정된 설치요건·성능 등을 포함한다.

2.계약상대자는 검사에 필요한 시험품의 납품을 요청 받은 경우 지체없이 이를 제공하여야 하며, 시험품의 제공과 검사를 하기 위한 변형, 소모, 파손 또는 변질로 생기는 손상은 계약상대자의 부담으로 한다.

6.04 공단은 제6.03조의 검사에 있어서 계약상대자의 계약이행 내용의 전부 또는 일부가 계약에 위반되거나 부당함을 발견한 때에는 필요한 시정조치를 요구할 수 있다. 이 경우에는 계약상대자로부터 그 시정을 완료한 사실을 통지 받은 날로부터 제6.03조의 기간을 계산한다.

6.05 제6.04조의 경우에 계약이행기간이 연장된 때에는 공단은 제Ⅱ편 계약일반조건 제24조(지체상금)의 규정에 의한 지체상금을 부과한다. 지체상금의 부과대상이 되는 지체일수는 다음 각 호의 1에 따라 산정된다.

1.납품기한 내에 물품 (검사에 필요한 서류를 포함한다)을 납품한 때에는 제6.03조의 규정에 의한 검사에 소요된 기간은 지체일수에 산입하지 아니한다.

2.납품기한을 경과하여 물품과 검사서류를 제출한 때(제6.04조에 의한 시정조치를 요구한 때 포함)에는 납품기한 다음날부터 최종검사에 합격한 날까지의 기간을 지체일수에 산입한다. 다만, 다시 납품검사를 요청한 경우로서 공단의 귀책사유로 14일을 초과하여 검사한 경우에는 그 초과일수를 지체일수에서 차감한다.

6.06 계약상대자는 제6.03조의 규정에 의한 검사에 입회·협력하여야 한다. 계약상대자가 입회를 거부하거나 검사에 협력하지 아니함으로써 발생하는 지체에 대하여는 제6.04조 및 제6.05조의 규정을 준용한다.

6.07 계약상대자는 제6.03조 및 제6.04조의 규정에 의한 검사에 이의가 있을 때에는 재검사를 요청할 수 있다. 이 경우 공단은 지체 없이 재검사를 하여야 한다.

6.08 공단은 검사를 완료한 때에는 그 결과를 서면으로 계약상대자에게 통지하여야 한다.

6.09 ２개 이상의 장소에 납품하는 조건 (납품장소별 납품조건)으로 계약체결 및 납품요청을 하였을 경우에는 계약상대자는 납품장소별로 검사요청 하여야 한다. 다만, 공단이 필요시 또는 불가피할 경우에는 일괄하여 검사할 수 있다.

6.10 산업표준화법에 의한 KS표시품 또는 품질경영 및 공산품안전관리법에 의하여 등급이 사정된 물품에 대하여는 제6.02조의 규정에 불구하고 검사를 면제할 수 있다. 다만, 특약조건이 있거나 당해 물품이 성질상 인명피해 또는 화재발생의 원인이 될 수 있다고 판단되는 경우에는 그러하지 아니하다.

6.11 계약상대자는 관계법령 또는 기술규격서에 의하여 시험 또는 형식승인 등을 필하여야 할 물품에 대하여는 물품 납품시에 시험성적서 또는 형식승인서를 공단에 제출하여야 한다.

6.12 계약상대자가 수입승인·통관 등의 수입절차를 이행하는데 있어 필요한 경우, 공단은 계약상대자의 비용부담으로 필요한 협조를 계약상대자에게 제공한다.

6.13 계약상대자는 납품시에 다음 각 호의 서류를 물품과 함께 공단에 제출하여야 한다. 납품서류를 물품과 같이 포장하는 경우에는 포장 겉면에 이를 표시하여야 하며, 포장단위가 여러 개일 경우에는 일련번호 １번의 포장단위에 이를 위치하도록 한다.

‐ 납품서 ５부
‐ 상세 포장명세서 ５부
‐ 품질증명서류 ２부
‐ 수입면장 사본 １부 (원본제시) 및 수입세금계산서 원본 １부
(국외 공급분만 해당)
‐ 복합운송서류, 운송화물상환증 등 원본 (화물상환에 필요한 경우)
‐ 기타 공단이 요구하는 서류

6.14 납품서류는 계약조건에 따라 정확히 작성되어야 한다.

6.15 공단이 필요에 따라 분할납품을 요구하거나, 계약상 분할납품이 허용된 경우를 제외하고는 분할납품을 할 수 없으며, 분할납품이 허용된 경우에도 납품횟수는 지정된 횟수범위 내에 한한다.

부록 2A‐2 기술지원역무지침

목
차

1.0
범위
2A-2-34

2.0
수행자 관리
2A-2-34

3.0
대가 지급
2A-2-35

4.0
공단의 지원사항
2A-2-37

5.0
이행확인서
2A-2-37

부록 2A‐2 1.0 범위

1.01 계약서에 별도로 규정되지 않는 한, 계약상대자는 공단의 요청이 있는 경우 제Ⅲ편 물품 및 가격명세 또는 제Ⅳ편 기술규격서에 규정된 기술지원서비스 (이하 "기술서비스"이라 함)를 이 조항에 따라 제공하여야 한다.

1.02 기술서비스의 일반범위는 다음과 같다.

1. 물품의 인수, 하역, 검사, 저장, 설치와 현장시험을 위한 감리 및 기술지원

2. 공단 직원에 대한 기술 및 절차 교육

3. 물품 문제에 대한 적절한 현장조치 및 현장 활동에 대한 업무조정

4. 공단이 정당하게 요청하는 기타 업무

1.03 기술지원서비스수행자(이하 ‘수행자’라 함)는 도면 및 기술규격서를 면밀히 검토하여 불일치나 차이점이 있을 경우, 이를 업무진행 이전에 공단에 통보하여야 한다.

1.04 수행자는 기술서비스의 원활한 수행에 필요한 공구를 갖추어야 한다.

1.05 기술서비스는 설치된 물품이 계약서에 규정된 대로 방폐물 처분시설의 정상운전상태에 적합하도록 적절하고 완전하게 수행되어야 한다.

2.0 수행자 관리

2.01 공단이 기술서비스를 요청하면 계약상대자는 즉시 수행자 각각의 직무명세, 경력 및 직능등급이 기재된 이력서를 포함한 인력표를 제출하여 공단의 승인을 받아야 하며, 승인 받은 수행자를 요청기간 또는 합의된 기간 동안 지원하여야 한다.

2.02 계약상대자가 기술서비스를 수행하도록 파견한 수행자는 공단으로부터 독립하여 업무를 수행하며 계약상대자를 대리하여 구속력 있는 결정을 할 수 있는 권한을 가져야 한다. 수행자가 2인 이상인 경우 계약상대자는 책임자를 지명하여야 한다.

2.03 수행자는 필요한 능력을 갖추어야 한다. 공단은 수행자의 능력부족으로 제공받는 기술서비스의 성과가 계약조건을 충족하지 못할 것으로 판단되는 경우 수행자의 교체를 요청할 수 있는 권한을 가지며, 이 경우 계약상대자는 즉시 자기비용으로 공단의 승인을 받은 수행자로 교체하여야 한다.

2.04 공단과의 업무협조, 시공사와의 협동작업 또는 기술감리를 위하여 필요한 경우 수행자의 업무수행 시간은 공단 또는 시공사의 업무시간 계획에 따라 조정되어야 하며, 수행자의 기술서비스 제공기간 중 휴가는 양 당사자의 상호합의에 의한다.

2.05 공단의 책임 있는 사유로 기술서비스가 ２주 이상 정지되고 단기간 내에 재개될 전망이 없는 경우, 계약상대자는 공단의 동의를 얻어 기술서비스가 재개될 때까지 수행자 전부 또는 일부를 철수시킬 수 있다.

2.06 공단이 정당하게 요청하는 경우, 계약상대자는 공급조건의 변경 없이 기술서비스 제공기간을 연장하여야 한다.

2.07 수행자는 공단의 현장 운영규정, 절차 및 모든 의무적용 법규를 준수해야 한다. 또한 공단의 지시에 따라 재난방지절차를 준수해야 하며 기술서비스수행과 관련하여 현장에서 발생하는 사고에 대해 즉시 문서로 공단과 지방경찰 및 지방노동감독관에게 보고해야 한다.

3.0 대가 지급

3.01 계약상대자는 제Ⅲ편 물품 및 가격명세에 규정된 항목별 가격에 따라 기술서비스에 대한 대가를 지급 받는다.

3.02 제Ⅲ편 물품 및 가격명세에 규정된 각 항목별 가격의 적용조건은 다음과 같다.

1. 정상근무수당은 일당으로 지급하며 초과근무(휴일근무 포함)수당은 시간급으로 지급한다. 실근무시간은 공단의 현장책임자가 승인한 작업시간표로 확인한다.

2. 정상근무시간은 월요일부터 금요일까지 ８시간(１시간의 점심시간은 제외)이다.

3. 초과근무수당은 정상근무시간을 초과한 근무시간에 적용한다. 일요일을 포함한 공휴일은 현장의 공단 직원과 동일하게 적용한다. 수행자의 초과근무는 공단의 현장책임자에 의해 요청을 받거나 승인된 경우에 한한다. 수행자는 공단이 정당하게 요청하는 초과근무 또는 교대근무를 거부하여서는 아니 되며, 휴일근무는 ８시간을 초과하지 못한다. 계약상대자의 귀책사유로 인한 초과근무에 대하여는 공단이 대가를 지급하지 아니한다.

4. 기술서비스 수행과 관련된 숙박, 식사, 지역 교통비 등은 실비로 지급한다. 일당은 한국엔지니어링협회가 공표한「엔지니어링 사업대가 기준」에 의거하여 산정된 금액을 초과할 수 없다.

5. 수행기간은 기술서비스가 수행되기 시작한 날로부터 완료일까지로 하며, 휴가와 결근일수는 제외한다.

3.03 계약서에 노무 투입량이나 기술서비스금액의 최고한도가 규정된 경우, 기술서비스가 이를 초과하여 소요되는 때에는, 계약상대자는 공단의 추가부담 없이 초과 기술서비스를 제공하여야 한다. 그러나 초과 기술서비스가 공단 측의 책임 있는 사유로 소요되는 경우에는 계약서에 규정된 것과 동일한 요율 및 조건으로 대가를 지급하여야 한다.

3.04 대가지급을 위하여, 계약상대자는 상업송장, 공단에 의하여 승인된 이행확인서, 근무시간표 및 비행기 탑승증 또는 비행기요금영수증 등을 첨부하여 공단에 제출하여야 한다.

3.05 기술서비스에 대한 대가지급이 전부 완료된 후 계약금액과 실제 지급액과의 차이가 발생될 경우, 양당사자는 별도 계약변경 절차 없이 총 계약금액이 변경된 것으로 간주하며, 이에 따라 계약이행보증금 조정이 요구될 경우에는 계약상대자는 관련조항에 따라 이를 조정하여야 한다.

4.0 공단의 지원사항

4.01 기술서비스 수행인력의 도면 및 개인장비 보관장소 등이 필요할 때에는 공단은 계약상대자의 비용부담없이 이를 제공할 수 있다.

5.0 이행확인서

계약상대자는 기술서비스를 종료한 후 공단의 현장책임자 또는 대리인에게 아래와 같은 이행확인서를 제출, 승인을 득한다.

“(계약상대자명)은 귀사의 요청에 따라 틀림없이 기술서비스를 이행하였으며, 계약조건에 따라 요구되는 보고서 또는 절차서를 제출하였음을 확인합니다.”

20
년
월
일

확인자 (공단)
계약상대자